diff --git a/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/adjust_shadow.png b/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/adjust_shadow.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a39f686f27 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/adjust_shadow.png differ diff --git a/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings_layout.png b/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings_layout.png index 2352bc444f..6ad83d4fd6 100644 Binary files a/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings_layout.png and b/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/chartsettings_layout.png differ diff --git a/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/chat.png b/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/chat.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..78f009dc31 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/chat.png differ diff --git a/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/document_language_window.png b/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/document_language_window.png index d9c0f2b2fa..71e283f045 100644 Binary files a/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/document_language_window.png and b/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/document_language_window.png differ diff --git a/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/pixabay_apikey.png b/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/pixabay_apikey.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..6ec0a837a1 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/pixabay_apikey.png differ diff --git a/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/pixabay_left.png b/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/pixabay_left.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..e71e0f08bf Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/pixabay_left.png differ diff --git a/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/pixabay_settings.png b/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/pixabay_settings.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..74c9f07119 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/common/main/resources/help/en/images/pixabay_settings.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/Contents.json b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/Contents.json index 0a6d620c5e..360afe9ea5 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/Contents.json +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/Contents.json @@ -48,8 +48,10 @@ {"src": "UsageInstructions/InsertImages.htm", "name": "Insert images"}, {"src": "UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm", "name": "Insert autoshapes"}, {"src": "UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm", "name": "Insert charts" }, - {"src": "UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm", "name": "Insert text objects" }, + { "src": "UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm", "name": "Insert text objects" }, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/InsertFieldCodes.htm", "name": "Insert field codes" }, { "src": "UsageInstructions/InsertSmartArt.htm", "name": "Insert SmartArt objects" }, + { "src": "UsageInstructions/InsertTextFromFile.htm", "name": "Insert text from file" }, {"src": "UsageInstructions/DrawingOperations.htm", "name": "Draw freehand on a document" }, { "src": "UsageInstructions/AddCaption.htm", "name": "Add caption" }, { "src": "UsageInstructions/InsertSymbols.htm", "name": "Insert symbols and characters" }, @@ -85,7 +87,8 @@ {"src": "UsageInstructions/Drawio.htm", "name": "Create and insert diagrams"}, {"src": "UsageInstructions/Zoom.htm", "name": "Host and schedule Zoom meetings"}, { "src": "UsageInstructions/ChatGPT.htm", "name": "Use AI to write text" }, - {"src": "UsageInstructions/TerMef.htm", "name": "Insert definitions"}, + { "src": "UsageInstructions/TerMef.htm", "name": "Insert definitions" }, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/Pixabay.htm", "name": "Add pictures"}, {"src": "UsageInstructions/ViewDocInfo.htm", "name": "View document information", "headername": "Tools and settings"}, {"src": "UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm", "name": "Save, download, print your document" }, {"src": "HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm", "name": "Advanced settings of Document Editor"}, diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm index 5b754a4f0e..89780139a7 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm @@ -44,11 +44,11 @@

Collaboration

  • - The Real-time Collaboration Changes subsection allows you to choose how new changes and comments will be displayed in real time. + The Real-time collaboration changes subsection allows you to choose how new changes and comments will be displayed in real time.

    To remove protection from the document, provided that the password has been set,

    + +

    Adding a signature

    +

    This feature is available only in the Desktop Editors.

    +

    To add a signature,

    +
      +
    1. Go to the Protection tab.
    2. +
    3. + Click the Signature icon and select the required type: +
        +
      • Add digital signature - type in the purpose for signing this document and select the Certificate by clicking the corresponding button in the opened pop-up window. When ready, click OK.
      • +
      • Add signature line - fill in the Suggested signer, Suggested signer's title, and Suggested signer's e-mail fields, as well as provide the instructions for the signer. Activate the Show sign date in signature line checkbox if necessary. When ready, click OK.
      • +
      +
    4. +
    \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Search.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Search.htm index 2144b34fde..880cb1c7c0 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Search.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Search.htm @@ -23,7 +23,7 @@

    Search and Replace Function

    Find and Replace Window

    1. Type in your inquiry into the corresponding Find data entry field.
    2. -
    3. If you need to replace one or more occurrences of the found characters, type in the replacement text into the corresponding Replace with data entry field. You can choose to replace a single currently highlighted occurrence or replace all occurrences by clicking the corresponding Replace and Replace All buttons.
    4. +
    5. If you need to replace one or more occurrences of the found characters, type in the replacement text into the corresponding Replace with data entry field. You can choose to replace a single currently highlighted occurrence or replace all occurrences by clicking the corresponding Replace and Replace All buttons. The
      Replace button can also be found on the Home tab.
    6. To navigate between the found occurrences, click one of the arrow buttons. The
      button shows the next occurrence, while the
      button shows the previous one.
    7. Specify search parameters by checking the necessary options below the entry fields: diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm index 97a9e68604..c4457e8d5d 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm @@ -64,14 +64,6 @@

      Supported Formats of Electronic Documents

      + - - DOCXF - A format to create, edit and collaborate on a fillable form. - + - - + - - DOTX Word Open XML Document Template
      Zipped, XML-based file format developed by Microsoft for text document templates. A DOTX template contains formatting settings, styles etc. and can be used to create multiple documents with the same formatting diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/VersionHistory.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/VersionHistory.htm index 04d80ec616..868c58e48e 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/VersionHistory.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/VersionHistory.htm @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@

      Version history

      The Document Editor allows you to maintain a constant team-wide approach to work flow: share files and folders, collaborate on documents in real time, communicate right in the editor, comment certain parts of your documents that require additional third-party input, review documents and add your changes without actually editing the file, compare and merge documents to facilitate processing and editing.

      -

      In Document Editor, you can view the version history of the document you collaborate on.

      +

      In Document Editor, you can view the version history of the document you collaborate on. The versions are stored separately and can be viewed individually, so there cannot be a conflict.

      Viewing version history:

      To view all the changes made to the document,

        @@ -28,7 +28,8 @@

        Version history

      You'll see the list of the document versions and revisions, with the indication of each version/revision author and creation date and time. For document versions, the version number is also specified (e.g., ver. 2).

      Viewing versions:

      -

      To know exactly which changes have been made in each separate version/revision, you can view the one you need by clicking it on the left sidebar. The changes made by the version/revision author are marked with the color which is displayed next to the author's name on the left sidebar.

      +

      To know exactly which changes have been made in each separate version/revision, you can view the one you need by clicking it on the left sidebar. The changes made by the version/revision author are highlighted with the same color as their avatar in the viewing version history window.

      +

      The deleted text can be highlighted. To do that, click the More button in the top right corner of the version history panel and choose the Highlight deleted option from the menu.

      To return to the current version of the document, use the Close History option on the top of the version list.

      Restoring versions:

      If you need to roll back to one of the previous versions of the document, click the Restore link below the selected version/revision.

      diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/DrawTab.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/DrawTab.htm index bea7d41d24..64ae474145 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/DrawTab.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/DrawTab.htm @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ - +
      diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm index 1a1538cfea..a1cb564774 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm @@ -26,17 +26,18 @@

      File tab

      With this tab, you can use the following options:

        -
      • in the online version: save the current file (in case the Autosave option is disabled), save it in the required format on the hard disk drive of your computer with the Download as option, save a copy of the file in the selected format to the portal documents with the Save copy as option, print or rename the current file, +
      • create a new document or open a recently edited one (available in the online version only),
      • +
      • + in the online version: save the current file (in case the Autosave option is disabled), save it in the required format on the hard disk drive of your computer with the Download as option, save a copy of the file in the selected format to the portal documents with the Save copy as option, print or rename the current file, in the desktop version: save the current file without changing its format and location using the Save option, save it changing its name, location or format using the Save as option or print the current file,
      • protect the file using a password, change or remove the password,
      • protect the file using a digital signature (available in the desktop version only),
      • -
      • create a new document or open a recently edited one (available in the online version only),
      • view general information about the document or change some file properties,
      • -
      • manage access rights (available in the online version only),
      • -
      • track version history (available in the online version only),
      • +
      • track version history (available in the online version only),
      • +
      • Go to Documents - in the desktop version, open the folder, where the file is stored, in the File explorer window, in the online version, open the folder of the Documents module, where the file is stored, in a new browser tab,
      • access the Advanced Settings of the editor,
      • -
      • in the desktop version, open the folder, where the file is stored, in the File explorer window. In the online version, open the folder of the Documents module, where the file is stored, in a new browser tab.
      • +
      • Help - open the built-in helpcenter.
      diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/FormsTab.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/FormsTab.htm index 8eba5eceb0..a7107f6d6f 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/FormsTab.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/FormsTab.htm @@ -15,7 +15,6 @@

      Forms tab

      -

      Note: this tab is available with DOCXF files only.

      The Forms tab allows you to create fillable forms such as agreements, applications or surveys. Add, format and configure text and form fields to draft a fillable form no matter how complex you need it to be.

      The corresponding window of the Online Document Editor:

      @@ -36,6 +35,7 @@

      Forms tab

    8. checkboxes
    9. radio buttons
    10. images
    11. +
    12. signatures
    13. e-mail addresses
    14. phone numbers
    15. date and time
    16. @@ -46,8 +46,7 @@

      Forms tab

    17. clear all fields and highlight settings,
    18. navigate through form fields using Previous Field and Next Field buttons,
    19. view the resulting forms in your document,
    20. -
    21. manage roles,
    22. -
    23. save form as a fillable OFORM file.
    24. +
    25. manage roles.
    26. diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm index 4ba506a7ad..ef16bf79d5 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

      Home tab

      -

      The Home tab appears by default when you open the Document Editor. It also allows formatting fonts and paragraphs. Some other options are also available here, such as Mail Merge and color schemes.

      +

      The Home tab appears by default when you open the Document Editor. It also allows formatting fonts and paragraphs.

      The corresponding window of the Online Document Editor:

      Home tab

      @@ -35,8 +35,6 @@

      Home tab

    27. align your text in a paragraph,
    28. show/hide non-printing characters,
    29. copy/clear text formatting,
    30. -
    31. change the color scheme,
    32. -
    33. use Mail Merge (available in the online version only),
    34. manage styles.
    35. diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm index 4886694bfb..294c5d8b30 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm @@ -31,7 +31,7 @@

      Insert tab

    36. insert tables, images, charts, shapes,
    37. insert hyperlinks, comments,
    38. insert headers and footers, page numbers, date & time,
    39. -
    40. insert text boxes and Text Art objects, equations, symbols, drop caps, content controls,
    41. +
    42. insert text boxes and Text Art objects, equations, symbols, drop caps, text from file, content controls,
    43. insert SmartArt objects.
    44. diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/LayoutTab.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/LayoutTab.htm index 60dc0623b0..706737539d 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/LayoutTab.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/LayoutTab.htm @@ -33,7 +33,9 @@

      Layout tab

    45. hyphenate your document,
    46. align and arrange objects (tables, pictures, charts, shapes),
    47. change the wrapping style and edit wrap boundary,
    48. -
    49. add a watermark.
    50. +
    51. add a watermark, +
    52. change page color,
    53. +
    54. change the color scheme.
    55. diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm index 012f0eedd5..79444ca9ed 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

      Plugins tab

      -

      The Plugins tab of the Document Editor allows accessing the advanced editing features using the available third-party components. This tab also makes it possible to use macros to simplify routine operations.

      +

      The Plugins tab of the Document Editor allows accessing the advanced editing features using the available third-party components.

      The corresponding window of the Online Document Editor:

      Plugins tab

      @@ -26,7 +26,6 @@

      Plugins tab

      The Plugin Manager button allows viewing and managing all the installed plugins, as well as adding new ones.

      The Background Plugins button allows viewing the list of plugins that work in the background. Here you can activate or disable them by activating/deactivating the corresponding switches, and adjust their settings by clicking the More button next to the required plugin.

      -

      The Macros button allows you to create and run your own macros. To learn more about macros, please refer to our API Documentation.

      Currently, the following plugins are available by default:

      diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ViewTab.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ViewTab.htm index f96210af24..5a461a5edd 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ViewTab.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ViewTab.htm @@ -32,7 +32,7 @@

      View tab

    56. Zoom allows zooming in and out of your document.
    57. Fit to Page allows resizing the page so that the screen displays the whole page.
    58. Fit to Width allows resizing the page so that the page scales to fit the width of the screen.
    59. -
    60. Interface Theme allows changing interface theme by choosing a Same as system, Light, Classic Light, Dark or Contrast Dark theme.
    61. +
    62. Interface Theme allows changing interface theme by choosing a Same as system, Light, Classic Light, Dark, Contrast Dark, or Gray theme.
    63. Dark Document option becomes active when the Dark or Contrast Dark theme is enabled. Click it to make the working area dark too.
    64. The following options allow you to configure the elements to display or to hide. Check the elements to make them visible:

      @@ -43,6 +43,7 @@

      View tab

    65. Right Panel to make the right panel visible.
    66. Rulers to make rulers always visible.
    67. +

      Macros - this option allows adding custom macros to your document.

      \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ChangeColorScheme.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ChangeColorScheme.htm index 968f716f3c..d2b25fc7f6 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ChangeColorScheme.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ChangeColorScheme.htm @@ -16,13 +16,13 @@

      Change color scheme

      Color schemes are applied to the whole document. In the Document Editor, you can quickly change the appearance of your document because they define the Theme Colors palette for different document elements (font, background, tables, autoshapes, charts). If you applied some Theme Colors to the document elements and then select a different Color Scheme, the applied colors in your document will change correspondingly.

      -

      To change a color scheme, click the downward arrow next to the Change color scheme icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar and select the required color scheme from the list: New Office, Office, Grayscale, Apex, Aspect, Civic, Concourse, Equity, Flow, Foundry, Median, Metro, Module, Odulent, Oriel, Origin, Paper, Solstice, Technic, Trek, Urban, Verve. The selected color scheme will be highlighted in the list.

      +

      To change a color scheme, click the downward arrow next to the Color Scheme icon on the Layout tab of the top toolbar and select the required color scheme from the list: Aspect, Blue Green, Blue II, Blue Warm, Blue, Grayscale, Green Yellow, Green, Marquee, Median, Office 2007-2010, Office 2013-2022, Office, Orange Red, Orange, Paper, Red Orange, Red Violet, Red, Slipstream, Violet II, Violet, Yellow Orange, Yellow, and New Office. The selected color scheme will be highlighted in the list.

      Color Schemes

      Once you select the preferred color scheme, you can select other colors in the color palettes window that corresponds to the document element you want to apply the color to. For most document elements, the color palettes window can be accessed by clicking the colored box on the right sidebar when the required element is selected. For the font, this window can be opened using the downward arrow next to the Font color icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar. The following palettes are available:

      Palette


      Adjust autoshape advanced settings

      @@ -210,7 +226,7 @@

      Adjust autoshape advanced settings

      Width - use one of these options to change the autoshape width.
    68. diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm index d2c090610a..0e993fb919 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm @@ -105,10 +105,10 @@

      Insert a chart

    69. Custom combination
    70. -

      Note: ONLYOFFICE Document Editor supports the following types of charts that were created with third-party editors: Pyramid, Bar (Pyramid), Horizontal/Vertical Cylinders, Horizontal/Vertical Cones. You can open the file containing such a chart and modify it using the available chart editing tools.

      +

      Note: ONLYOFFICE Document Editor supports the following types of charts that were created with third-party editors: Pyramid, Bar (Pyramid), Horizontal/Vertical Cylinders, Horizontal/Vertical Cones. You can open the file containing such a chart and modify it using the available chart editing tools. The following types are supported for opening only: Histogram, Waterfall, Funnel.

    71. - After that the Chart Editor window will appear where you can enter the necessary data into the cells using the following controls: + After that, the Chart Editor window will appear where you can enter the necessary data into the cells using the following controls:
      • and
        for copying and pasting the copied data
      • and
        for undoing and redoing actions
      • @@ -173,7 +173,7 @@

        Insert a chart

        The Layout tab allows you to change the layout of chart elements.

        • - Specify the Chart title position in regard to your chart selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: + Specify the Chart title position in regard to your chart, selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list:
          • None to display no chart title,
          • Overlay to overlay and center a title on the plot area,
          • @@ -181,22 +181,22 @@

            Insert a chart

        • - Specify the Legend position in regard to your chart selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: + Specify the Legend position in regard to your chart, selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list:
          • None to display no legend,
          • Bottom to display the legend and align it to the bottom of the plot area,
          • Top to display the legend and align it to the top of the plot area,
          • Right to display the legend and align it to the right of the plot area,
          • Left to display the legend and align it to the left of the plot area,
          • -
          • Left overlay to overlay and center the legend to the left on the plot area,
          • -
          • Right overlay to overlay and center the legend to the right on the plot area.
          • +
          • Left overlay to overlay and center the legend to the left of the plot area,
          • +
          • Right overlay to overlay and center the legend to the right of the plot area.
        • Specify the Data labels (i.e. text labels that represent exact values of data points) parameters:
          • - Specify the Data labels position relative to the data points selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list. The available options vary depending on the selected chart type. + Specify the Data labels position relative to the data points, selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list. The available options vary depending on the selected chart type.
            • For Column/Bar charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Inner bottom, Inner top, Outer top.
            • For Line/XY (Scatter)/Stock charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Left, Right, Top, Bottom.
            • @@ -204,7 +204,7 @@

              Insert a chart

            • For Area charts as well as for 3D Column, Line, Bar, Radar, and Combo charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center.
          • -
          • Select the data you wish to include into your labels checking the corresponding boxes: Series name, Category name, Value,
          • +
          • Select the data you wish to include into your labels, checking the corresponding boxes: Series name, Category name, Value,
          • Enter a character (comma, semicolon etc.) you wish to use for separating several labels into the Data labels separator entry field.
        • @@ -216,7 +216,7 @@

          Insert a chart

        Chart - Advanced Settings window

        The Vertical axis tab allows you to change the parameters of the vertical axis also referred to as the values axis or y-axis which displays numeric values. Note that the vertical axis will be the category axis which displays text labels for the Bar charts, therefore in this case the Vertical axis tab options will correspond to the ones described in the next section. For the XY (Scatter) charts, both axes are value axes.

        -

        Note: the Axis Settings and Gridlines sections will be disabled for Pie charts since charts of this type have no axes and gridlines.

        +

        Note: the Axis Settings and Gridlines sections will be disabled for Pie charts, since charts of this type have no axes and gridlines.

        • Select Hide to hide vertical axis in the chart, leave it unchecked to have vertical axis displayed.
        • @@ -229,12 +229,12 @@

          Insert a chart

        • Minimum value - is used to specify the lowest value displayed at the vertical axis start. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the minimum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right.
        • Maximum value - is used to specify the highest value displayed at the vertical axis end. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the maximum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right.
        • -
        • Axis crosses - is used to specify a point on the vertical axis where the horizontal axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the axes intersection point value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the axes intersection point at the Minimum/Maximum Value on the vertical axis.
        • +
        • Axis crosses - is used to specify a point on the vertical axis where the horizontal axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the axes' intersection point value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the axes' intersection point at the Minimum/Maximum Value on the vertical axis.
        • Display units - is used to determine the representation of the numeric values along the vertical axis. This option can be useful if you're working with great numbers and wish the values on the axis to be displayed in a more compact and readable way (e.g. you can represent 50 000 as 50 by using the Thousands display units). Select desired units from the drop-down list: Hundreds, Thousands, 10 000, 100 000, Millions, 10 000 000, 100 000 000, Billions, Trillions, or choose the None option to return to the default units.
        • Values in reverse order - is used to display values in the opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, the lowest value is at the bottom and the highest value is at the top of the axis. When the box is checked, the values are ordered from top to bottom.
        • Logarithmic scale - is used to enable logarithmic scaling to the Base that is determined by the user.
        • - The Tick Options section allows adjusting the appearance of tick marks on the vertical scale. Major tick marks are the larger scale divisions which can have labels displaying numeric values. Minor tick marks are the scale subdivisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed if the corresponding option is set on the Layout tab. The Major/minor type drop-down lists contain the following placement options: + The Tick Options section allows adjusting the appearance of tick marks on the vertical scale. Major tick marks are the larger scale divisions, which can have labels displaying numeric values. Minor tick marks are the scale subdivisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed if the corresponding option is set on the Layout tab. The Major/minor type drop-down lists contain the following placement options:
          • None to display no major/minor tick marks,
          • Cross to display major/minor tick marks on both sides of the axis,
          • @@ -243,14 +243,14 @@

            Insert a chart

        • - The Label options section allows adjusting the appearance of major tick mark labels which display values. To specify a Label position in regard to the vertical axis, select the necessary option from the drop-down list: + The Label options section allows adjusting the appearance of major tick mark labels, which display values. To specify a Label position in regard to the vertical axis, select the necessary option from the drop-down list:
          • None to not display tick mark labels,
          • Low to display tick mark labels to the left of the plot area,
          • High to display tick mark labels to the right of the plot area,
          • Next to axis to display tick mark labels next to the axis.
          • - To specify a Label format click the Label format button and choose a category as deemed appropriate. + To specify a Label format, click the Label format button and choose a category as deemed appropriate.

            Available label format categories:

            • General
            • @@ -288,12 +288,12 @@

              Insert a chart

            • No overlay to display the title below the horizontal axis,
          • -
          • Gridlines are used to specify the Horizontal gridlines to display by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None,  MajorMinor, or Major and minor.
          • -
          • Axis crosses - is used to specify a point on the horizontal axis where the vertical axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the axes intersection point value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the axes intersection point at the Minimum/maximum value (that corresponds to the first and last category) on the horizontal axis.
          • +
          • Gridlines are used to specify the Horizontal gridlines to display by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: NoneMajorMinor, or Major and minor.
          • +
          • Axis crosses - is used to specify a point on the horizontal axis where the vertical axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the axes' intersection point value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the axes' intersection point at the Minimum/maximum value (that corresponds to the first and last category) on the horizontal axis.
          • Axis position - is used to specify where the axis text labels should be placed: On tick marks or Between tick marks.
          • Values in reverse order - is used to display categories in the opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, categories are displayed from left to right. When the box is checked, the categories are ordered from right to left.
          • - The Tick Options section allows adjusting the appearance of tick marks on the horizontal scale. Major tick marks are the larger divisions which can have labels displaying category values. Minor tick marks are the smaller divisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed if the corresponding option is set on the Layout tab. You can adjust the following tick mark parameters: + The Tick Options section allows adjusting the appearance of tick marks on the horizontal scale. Major tick marks are the larger divisions, which can have labels displaying category values. Minor tick marks are the smaller divisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed if the corresponding option is set on the Layout tab. You can adjust the following tick mark parameters:
            • Major/minor type - is used to specify the following placement options: None to not display major/minor tick marks, Cross to display major/minor tick marks on both sides of the axis, In to display major/minor tick marks inside the axis, Out to display major/minor tick marks outside the axis.
            • Interval between marks - is used to specify how many categories should be displayed between two adjacent tick marks.
            • @@ -304,9 +304,9 @@

              Insert a chart

              • Label position - is used to specify where the labels should be placed in regard to the horizontal axis. Select the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display category labels, Low to display category labels at the bottom of the plot area, High to display category labels at the top of the plot area, Next to axis to display category labels next to the axis.
              • Axis label distance - is used to specify how closely the labels should be placed to the axis. You can specify the necessary value in the entry field. The more the value you set, the more the distance between the axis and labels is.
              • -
              • Interval between labels - is used to specify how often the labels should be displayed. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case labels are displayed for every category. You can select the Manual option from the drop-down list and specify the necessary value in the entry field on the right. For example, enter 2 to display labels for every other category etc.
              • +
              • Interval between labels - is used to specify how often the labels should be displayed. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case labels are displayed for every category. You can select the Manual option from the drop-down list and specify the necessary value in the entry field on the right. For example, enter 2 to display labels for every other category, etc.
              • - To specify a Label format click the Label format button and choose a category as deemed appropriate. + To specify a Label format, click the Label format button and choose a category as deemed appropriate.

                Available label format categories:

                • General
                • @@ -331,8 +331,8 @@

                  Insert a chart

                  The Cell snapping tab contains the following parameters:

                  • Move and size with cells - this option allows you to snap the chart to the cell behind it. If the cell moves (e.g. if you insert or delete some rows/columns), the chart will be moved together with the cell. If you increase or decrease the width or height of the cell, the chart will change its size as well.
                  • -
                  • Move but don't size with cells - this option allows to snap the chart to the cell behind it preventing the chart from being resized. If the cell moves, the chart will be moved together with the cell, but if you change the cell size, the chart dimensions remain unchanged.
                  • -
                  • Don't move or size with cells - this option allows to prevent the chart from being moved or resized if the cell position or size was changed.
                  • +
                  • Move but don't size with cells - this option allows you to snap the chart to the cell behind it, preventing the chart from being resized. If the cell moves, the chart will be moved together with the cell, but if you change the cell size, the chart dimensions remain unchanged.
                  • +
                  • Don't move or size with cells - this option allows you to prevent the chart from being moved or resized if the cell position or size was changed.

                  Chart - Advanced Settings

                  The Alternative text tab allows specifying a Title and Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information the chart contains.

                  @@ -341,7 +341,7 @@

                  Insert a chart


                  Move and resize charts

                  Moving chartOnce the chart is added, you can change its size and position. To change the chart size, drag small squares situated on its edges. To maintain the original proportions of the selected chart while resizing, hold down the Shift key and drag one of the corner icons.

                  -

                  To alter the chart position, use the icon that appears after hovering your mouse cursor over the chart. Drag the chart to the necessary position without releasing the mouse button. When you move the chart, guide lines are displayed to help you position the object on the page precisely (if a wrapping style other than inline is selected).

                  +

                  To alter the chart position, use the icon that appears after hovering your mouse cursor over the chart. Drag the chart to the necessary position without releasing the mouse button. When you move the chart, guidelines are displayed to help you position the object on the page precisely (if a wrapping style other than inline is selected).

                  Note: the list of keyboard shortcuts that can be used when working with objects is available here.

                  @@ -365,7 +365,7 @@

                  Edit chart elements


                  Adjust chart settings

                  Chart Settings tab

                  -

                  Some of the chart settings can be altered using the Chart settings tab of the right sidebar. To activate it click the chart and choose the Chart settings icon on the right. Here you can change the following properties:

                  +

                  Some of the chart settings can be altered using the Chart settings tab of the right sidebar. To activate it, click the chart and choose the Chart settings icon on the right. Here, you can change the following properties:

                  • Size is used to view the Width and Height of the current chart.
                  • Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind (for more information see the advanced settings description below).
                  • @@ -375,14 +375,14 @@

                    Adjust chart settings

                  • Edit Data is used to open the 'Chart Editor' window. -

                    Note: to quickly open the 'Chart Editor' window you can also double-click the chart in the document.

                    +

                    Note: to quickly open the 'Chart Editor' window, you can also double-click the chart in the document.

                  You can also find some of these options in the right-click menu. The menu options are:

                  • Cut, Copy, Paste - standard options which are used to cut or copy the selected text/object and paste the previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position.
                  • -
                  • Arrange is used to bring the selected chart to foreground, send it to the background, move forward or backward as well as group or ungroup charts to perform operations with several of them at once. To learn more on how to arrange objects, please refer to this page.
                  • -
                  • Align is used to align the chart left, center, right, top, middle, bottom. To learn more on how to align objects you can refer to this page.
                  • +
                  • Arrange is used to bring the selected chart to the foreground, send it to the background, move forward or backward as well as group or ungroup charts to perform operations with several of them at once. To learn more on how to arrange objects, please refer to this page.
                  • +
                  • Align is used to align the chart left, center, right, top, middle, bottom. To learn more on how to align objects, you can refer to this page.
                  • Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind. The Edit Wrap Boundary option is unavailable for charts.
                  • Edit Data is used to open the 'Chart Editor' window.
                  • Chart Advanced Settings is used to open the 'Chart - Advanced Settings' window.
                  • @@ -401,11 +401,11 @@

                    Adjust chart settings

                    Please note that you cannot edit each element of the chart; the settings will be applied to the chart as a whole.


                  -

                  To change the chart advanced settings, click the needed chart with the right mouse button and select Chart Advanced Settings from the right-click menu or just click the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar. The chart properties window will open:

                  +

                  To change the chart advanced settings, click the needed chart with the right mouse button and select Chart Advanced Settings from the right-click menu, or just click the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar. The chart properties window will open:

                  Chart - Advanced Settings: Size

                  The Size tab contains the following parameters:

                    -
                  • Width and Height - use these options to change the width and/or height of the chart. If the Constant Proportions
                    button is clicked (in this case it looks like this
                    ), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original chart aspect ratio.
                  • +
                  • Width and Height - use these options to change the width and/or height of the chart. If the Constant Proportions
                    button is clicked (in this case it looks like this
                    ), the width and height will be changed together, preserving the original chart aspect ratio.

                  Chart - Advanced Settings: Text Wrapping

                  The Text Wrapping tab contains the following parameters:

                  @@ -414,7 +414,7 @@

                  Adjust chart settings

                  Wrapping Style - use this option to change the way the chart is positioned relative to the text: it will either be a part of the text (in case you select the inline style) or bypassed by it from all sides (if you select one of the other styles).
                  • -

                    Inline - the chart is considered to be a part of the text, like a character, so when the text moves, the chart moves as well. In this case the positioning options are inaccessible.

                    +

                    Inline - the chart is considered to be a part of the text, like a character, so when the text moves, the chart moves as well. In this case, the positioning options are inaccessible.

                    If one of the following styles is selected, the chart can be moved independently of the text and positioned on the page exactly:

                  • Square - the text wraps the rectangular box that bounds the chart.

                  • diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertFieldCodes.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertFieldCodes.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..5757dbbaf5 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertFieldCodes.htm @@ -0,0 +1,222 @@ + + + + Insert field codes + + + + + + + + +
                    +
                    + +
                    +

                    Insert field codes

                    +

                    In the Document Editor, you can add fields with dynamic content that depends on your system info or other content. Please do not confuse fields with content controls as these are two different features.

                    +

                    To insert a field,

                    +
                      +
                    1. Go to the Insert tab.
                    2. +
                    3. Click the Field button.
                    4. +
                    5. In the opened dialogue window, enter the field code you need to be displayed and click OK.
                    6. +
                    +

                    The field codes are as follows:

                    +
                    + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
                    ONLYOFFICE field codeDescriptionSyntaxSwitches
                    MERGEFIELDThe code inserts a link to a data field from the other source into the current document. When merging, data from the other source will replace the current field value.{ MERGEFIELD FieldName [ Switches ]} +
                      +
                    1. \b - specifies the text to be inserted before the MergeField field, if the latter is not blank.
                    2. +
                    3. \f - specifies the text to be inserted after the MergeField field, if the latter is not blank.
                    4. +
                    5. \m - specifies that the MergeField field is a mapped one.
                    6. +
                    7. \v - enables character conversion for vertical formatting.
                    8. +
                    +
                    PAGENUMThe code inserts the current page number.
                    PAGECOUNTThe code inserts the total number of pages in the current document.
                    FORMTEXT
                    TOCThe code creates a table of contents. The table of contents is based on the applied heading styles, outline levels, captions, etc., specified by Table of Contents Entry fields.{ TOC [Switches ] } +
                      +
                    1. \a - creates a list of objects that does not include labels and numbers.
                    2. +
                    3. \b - creates a table of contents for the bookmarked part of the document.
                    4. +
                    5. \с - creates a list of objects of the specified type.
                    6. +
                    7. \d - determines the separator type for page numbers.
                    8. +
                    9. \f - creates a table of contents based on the TC fields and not the document structure levels.
                    10. +
                    11. \h - applies hyperlink formatting to the table of contents.
                    12. +
                    13. \l - specifies the required levels of TC fields. The levels that are not included in the specified range will be omitted.
                    14. +
                    15. \n - creates a table of content either fully or using only the elements from the specified range (e.g., "1-9"), omitting page numbers.
                    16. +
                    17. \o - creates a table of contents using only structure levels of the document and not the TC fields.
                    18. +
                    19. \p - specifies the separator between the element and the corresponding page number.
                    20. +
                    21. \s - adds a sequence number to the page number.
                    22. +
                    23. \t - creates a table of contents using only custom styles instead of the default styles.
                    24. +
                    25. \u - creates a table of contents using only the applied paragraph formatting outline level.
                    26. +
                    27. \w - preserves the tabulation in table entries.
                    28. +
                    29. \x - preserves line breaks in table entries.
                    30. +
                    31. \z - hides page number while viewing the table of content as a web document layout.
                    32. +
                    +
                    PAGEREFThe code inserts the page number as a bookmark for cross-reference.{ PAGEREF Bookmark [\* Format Switch ] } +
                      +
                    1. \h - creates a hyperlink to the specified paragraph.
                    2. +
                    3. \p - inserts the position of the specified paragraph relative to the bookmark.
                    4. +
                    +
                    PAGEThe code inserts the number of the current page.{ PAGE [\* Format Switch ] }
                    NUMPAGESThe code inserts the total number of pages in the document.{ NUMPAGES }
                    ASKThe code inserts a field that prompts the user to enter data that will then be stored as a bookmark. The editor will prompt the user each time this field is refreshed or during merging.{ ASK Bookmark"Prompt" [Optional switches ] } +
                      +
                    1. \d - inserts the default replacement text as a bookmark.
                    2. +
                    3. \o - prompts just once when merging documents.
                    4. +
                    +
                    REFThe code inserts the contents of the bookmark. The bookmark should be inserted in the document.{ [REF] Bookmark [Switches ] } +
                      +
                    1. \d - specifies the separator for the page number.
                    2. +
                    3. \f - increments footnote or note numbers and inserts them into the document.
                    4. +
                    5. \h - creates a hyperlink to the specified paragraph.
                    6. +
                    7. \n - adds paragraph numbers, if any.
                    8. +
                    9. \p - inserts the position of the specified paragraph relative to the bookmark.
                    10. +
                    11. \r - inserts the relative number of the specified paragraph.
                    12. +
                    13. \t - omits symbols that are non-numerical or non-delimiter.
                    14. +
                    15. \w - inserts the full number of the specified paragraph.
                    16. +
                    +
                    HYPERLINKThe code inserts a hyperlink to an element in the document, to a document on your hard disk drive, portal, or a third-party resource.{ HYPERLINK "Filename" [Switches ] } +
                      +
                    1. \l - specifies the element within the document to go to.
                    2. +
                    3. \m - specifies coordinates to a hyperlink for a server-side image map.
                    4. +
                    5. \n - opens the end document in a new window.
                    6. +
                    7. \o - specifies the ScreenTip text.
                    8. +
                    9. \t - specifies the target of the hyperlink.
                    10. +
                    +
                    TIMEThe code inserts the current time based on the user's system into the document.{ TIME [\@ "Date-Time Picture"] }
                    DATEThe code inserts the current date based on the user's system into the document.{ DATE [ \@ "Date-Time Picture"] [Switches] }
                    FORMULAThe code performs calculation as per the entered formula.{ = Formula [Bookmark ] [\#Numeric Picture ] }
                    SEQThe code provides a way to number chapters, tables, figures, and other elements in a document in order. If you add, remove, or relocate an item along with its Seq field, you can update the other Seq fields in the document to show the revised sequence.{ SEQ Identifier [Bookmark ] [Switches ] } +
                      +
                    1. \c - inserts the closest preceding sequence number.
                    2. +
                    3. \h - hides the field result (used for cross-referencing).
                    4. +
                    5. \n - inserts the next sequence number.
                    6. +
                    7. \r - the numeration starts with the specified nymber.
                    8. +
                    9. \s - the numeration starts with the specified outline level.
                    10. +
                    +
                    STYLEREFThe code ads adds text that has been formatted using a specific style. When placed in a header or footer, it displays the first or last instance of text formatted with that style from the main content of the current page, enabling the creation of dictionary-style headers or footers.{ STYLEREF StyleIdentifier [Switches ] } +
                      +
                    1. \l - starts the search from the bottom of the current page.
                    2. +
                    3. \n - inserts the numeration from the specified paragraph.
                    4. +
                    5. \p - inserts the position of the specified paragraph relative to the bookmark.
                    6. +
                    7. \r - inserts the relative number of the specified paragraph.
                    8. +
                    9. \t - omits symbols that are non-numerical or non-delimiter.
                    10. +
                    11. \w - inserts the full number of the specified paragraph.
                    12. +
                    +
                    NOTEREFThe code inserts a footnote or endnote reference mark that is marked with a bookmark to make references to the same note or to cross-reference footnotes and endnotes. If the sequence of the notes is changed, the result of the field will reflect the new numbering.{ NOTEREF Bookmark [Switches] } +
                      +
                    1. \f - inserts a reference mark formatted with the Footnote reference style or the Endnote reference style.
                    2. +
                    3. \h - creates a hyperlink to the specified foot- or endnote.
                    4. +
                    5. \p - inserts the relative position of the foot- or endnote.
                    6. +
                    +
                    +
                    +
                    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertPageNumbers.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertPageNumbers.htm index 2ec280c10a..35b1ec17b5 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertPageNumbers.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertPageNumbers.htm @@ -25,7 +25,7 @@

                    Insert page numbers

                  • To add a page number to each page of your document, select the page number position on the page.
                  • To insert a page number at the current cursor position, select the To Current Position option.

                    - Note: to insert a current page number at the current cursor position you can also use the Ctrl+Shift+P key combination. + Note: to insert a current page number at the current cursor position, you can also use the Ctrl+Shift+P key combination.

                  @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@

                  Insert page numbers

                • click the Header/Footer
                  icon on the top toolbar,
                • click the Insert page number option in the menu and choose the position of the page number.
    -

    To insert the total number of pages in your document (e.g. if you want to create the Page X of Y entry):

    +

    To insert the total number of pages in your document (e.g., if you want to create the Page X of Y entry):

    1. put the cursor where you want to insert the total number of pages,
    2. click the Header/Footer
      icon on the top toolbar,
    3. @@ -47,22 +47,27 @@

      Insert page numbers

      To edit the page number settings,

      1. double-click the page number added,
      2. -
      3. change the current parameters on the right sidebar: -

        Right Sidebar - Header and Footer Settings

        -
          -
        • Set the Position of page numbers on the page accordingly to the top and bottom of the page.
        • -
        • Check the Different first page box to apply a different page number to the very first page or in case you don't want to add any number to it at all.
        • -
        • Use the Different odd and even pages box to insert different page numbers for odd and even pages.
        • -
        • The Link to Previous option is available in case you've previously added sections into your document. - If not, it will be grayed out. Moreover, this option is also unavailable for the very first section (i.e. when a header or footer that belongs to the first section is selected). - By default, this box is checked, so that unified numbering is applied to all the sections. If you select a header or footer area, you will see that the area is marked with the Same as Previous label. - Uncheck the Link to Previous box to use different page numbering for each section of the document. The Same as Previous label will no longer be displayed. -

          Same as previous label

        • -
        • The Page Numbering section allows adjusting page numbering options throughout different sections of the document. - The Continue from previous section option is selected by default and makes it possible to keep continuous page numbering after a section break. - If you want to start page numbering with a specific number in the current section of the document, select the Start at radio button and enter the required starting value in the field on the right. -
        • -
        +
      4. + change the current parameters on the right sidebar: +

        Right Sidebar - Header and Footer Settings

        +
          +
        • Set the Position of page numbers on the page accordingly to the top and bottom of the page.
        • +
        • Check the Different first page box to apply a different page number to the very first page or in case you don't want to add any number to it at all.
        • +
        • Use the Different odd and even pages box to insert different page numbers for odd and even pages.
        • +
        • + The Link to Previous option is available in case you've previously added sections into your document. + If not, it will be grayed out. Moreover, this option is also unavailable for the very first section (i.e. when a header or footer that belongs to the first section is selected). + By default, this box is checked, so that unified numbering is applied to all the sections. If you select a header or footer area, you will see that the area is marked with the Same as Previous label. + Uncheck the Link to Previous box to use different page numbering for each section of the document. The Same as Previous label will no longer be displayed. +

          Same as previous label

          +
        • +
        • +

          The Page Numbering section allows adjusting page numbering options throughout different sections of the document.

          +

          The Continue from previous section option is selected by default and makes it possible to keep continuous page numbering after a section break.

          +

          If you want to start page numbering with a specific number in the current section of the document, select the Start at radio button and enter the required starting value in the field on the right.

          +

          Use the Number format dropdown menu to quickly change the format of the page numbers, e.g., "I, II, III, IV..."

          +
        • +

      To return to the document editing, double-click within the working area.

      diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertReferences.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertReferences.htm index 999997a1e3..21fd89808d 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertReferences.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertReferences.htm @@ -16,12 +16,12 @@

      Insert references

      ONLYOFFICE Document Editor supports Mendeley, Zotero and EasyBib reference managers to insert references into your document.

      - +

      Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager.

      Mendeley

      Connect ONLYOFFICE to Mendeley

      1. Login to your Mendeley account.
      2. -
      3. In your document, switch to the Plugins tab and choose
        Mendeley, a sidebar will open on the left side of your document. +
      4. In your document, switch to the Plugins tab and choose
        Mendeley, a sidebar will open on the left side of your document.
      5. Click the Copy Link and Open Form button.
        The browser opens a form on the Mendeley site. Complete this form and note the Application ID for ONLYOFFICE. @@ -35,7 +35,7 @@

        Connect ONLYOFFICE to Mendeley

        Inserting references using Mendeley

        1. Open the document and place the cursor on the spot where you want to insert the reference(s).
        2. -
        3. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose
          Mendeley.
        4. +
        5. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose
          Mendeley.
        6. Enter a search text and hit Enter on your keyboard.
        7. Click one or more check-boxes.
        8. [Optional] Enter a new search text and click on one or more check-boxes.
        9. @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@

          Zotero

          Connect ONLYOFFICE to Zotero

          1. Login to your Zotero account.
          2. -
          3. In your document, switch to the Plugins tab and choose
            Zotero, a sidebar will open on the left side of your document.
          4. +
          5. In your document, switch to the Plugins tab and choose
            Zotero, a sidebar will open on the left side of your document.
          6. Click the Zotero API settings link.
          7. On the Zotero site, create a new key for Zotero, copy it and save it for later use.
          8. Switch to your document and paste the API key.
          9. @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@

            Connect ONLYOFFICE to Zotero

            Inserting references using Zotero

            1. Open the document and place the cursor on the spot where you want to insert the reference(s).
            2. -
            3. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose
              Zotero.
            4. +
            5. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose
              Zotero.
            6. Enter a search text and hit Enter on your keyboard.
            7. Click one or more check-boxes.
            8. [Optional] Enter a new search text and click on one or more check-boxes.
            9. @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@

              Inserting references using Zotero

              EasyBib

              1. Open the document and place the cursor on the spot where you want to insert the reference(s).
              2. -
              3. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose
                EasyBib.
              4. +
              5. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose
                EasyBib.
              6. Select the type of source you want to find.
              7. Enter a search text and hit Enter on your keyboard.
              8. Click '+' on the right side of the suitable Book/Journal article/Website. It will be added to Bibliography.
              9. diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertTextFromFile.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertTextFromFile.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..6e60b822b0 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertTextFromFile.htm @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ + + + + Insert text from file + + + + + + + + +
                +
                + +
                +

                Insert text from file

                +

                In the Document Editor, you can insert text from file preserving the formatting.

                +
                  +
                1. + Switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar. +

                  Insert tab

                  +
                2. +
                3. Click the
                  Text from File icon.
                4. +
                5. + Select one of the following options: +
                    +
                  • Text from the local file - select a file on your hard disk drive to insert it into the document.
                  • +
                  • Text from the URL file - enter the required URL to insert the text from it. Please note that this shall be a publicly accessible text file for the process to run properly.
                  • +
                  • Text from the storage file - select a file from your ONLYOFFICE portal to insert its contents.
                  • +
                  +
                6. +
                +
                + + diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Jitsi.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Jitsi.htm index 0a76feff11..c465a76c2a 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Jitsi.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Jitsi.htm @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@

                Make Audio and Video Calls

                Audio and video calls are immediately accessible from ONLYOFFICE Document Editor, using Jitsi plugin. Jitsi provides video conferencing capabilities that are secure and easy to deploy.

                -

                Note: Jitsi plugin is not installed by default and shall be added manually. Please, refer to the corresponding article to find the manual installation guide Adding plugins to ONLYOFFICE Cloud or Adding new plugins to server editors

                +

                Note: Jitsi plugin is not installed by default and shall be added manually. Please, refer to the corresponding article to find the manual installation guide Adding plugins to ONLYOFFICE Cloud or Adding new plugins to server editors, or install the plugin using the Plugin Manager.

                1. Switch to the Plugins tab and click the Jitsi icon on the top toolbar.
                2. diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/LineSpacing.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/LineSpacing.htm index 16ecb604c0..cbbf7e1cea 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/LineSpacing.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/LineSpacing.htm @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@

                  Set paragraph line spacing

                These parameters can also be found in the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window. To open the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window, right-click the text and choose the Paragraph Advanced Settings option from the menu or use the Show advanced settings option on the right sidebar. Then switch to the Indents & Spacing tab and go to the Spacing section.

                Paragraph Advanced Settings - Indents & Spacing

                -

                To quickly change the current paragraph line spacing, you can also use the Paragraph line spacing icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar selecting the required value from the list: 1.0, 1.15, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, or 3.0 lines.

                +

                To quickly change the current paragraph line spacing, you can also use the Paragraph line spacing icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar selecting the required value from the list: 1.0, 1.15, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, or 3.0 lines, as well as open the corresponding right panel by clicking the Line spacing options menu item, and choose whether you want to Add or Remove space after paragraph.

                \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/OCR.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/OCR.htm index 6b88fe9367..de79e79e05 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/OCR.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/OCR.htm @@ -16,9 +16,10 @@

                Extract text from an image

                With ONLYOFFICE Document Editor you can extract text from an image (.png .jpg) and insert it in your document.

                +

                Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager.

                1. Open your document and place the cursor on the spot where you want to insert the text.
                2. -
                3. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose
                  OCR from the menu.
                4. +
                5. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose
                  OCR from the menu.
                6. Click Load File and select the image.
                7. Choose the recognition language from the Choose Language pull-down menu.
                8. Click Recognize.
                9. diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/OpenCreateNew.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/OpenCreateNew.htm index 9b1a58d435..26d8c881bc 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/OpenCreateNew.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/OpenCreateNew.htm @@ -72,6 +72,7 @@

                  To rename an opened document

                  To open the folder, where the file is stored, in a new browser tab in the online editor in the file explorer window in the desktop editor, click the Open file location icon on the right side of the editor header. Alternatively, you can switch to the File tab on the top toolbar and select the Open file location option.

                  +

                  ONLYOFFICE offers a form gallery where you can find templates in different languages and download them directly onto your hard drive. The gallery is constantly updated, and you can participate and upload your own templates. Currently, the gallery is available for ONLYOFFICE DocSpace and for ONLYOFFICE Desktop Editors.

                  \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/PhotoEditor.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/PhotoEditor.htm index 1f5cd7ce09..e9d229a893 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/PhotoEditor.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/PhotoEditor.htm @@ -16,18 +16,20 @@

                  Edit an image

                  ONLYOFFICE Document Editor comes with a very powerful photo editor, that allows you to adjust the image with filters and make all kinds of annotations.

                  +

                  Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager.

                  1. Select an image in your document.
                  2. - Switch to the Plugins tab and choose
                    Photo Editor.
                    + Switch to the Plugins tab and choose
                    Photo Editor.
                    You are now in the editing environment.
                      -
                    • Below the image you will find the following checkboxes and slider filters: -
                        -
                      • Grayscale, Sepia, Sepia 2, Blur, Emboss, Invert, Sharpen;
                      • -
                      • Remove White (Threshold, Distance), Gradient transparency, Brightness, Noise, Pixelate, Color Filter;
                      • -
                      • Tint, Multiply, Blend.
                      • -
                      +
                    • + Below the image you will find the following checkboxes and slider filters: +
                        +
                      • Grayscale, Sepia, Sepia 2, Blur, Emboss, Invert, Sharpen;
                      • +
                      • Remove White (Threshold, Distance), Gradient transparency, Brightness, Noise, Pixelate, Color Filter;
                      • +
                      • Tint, Multiply, Blend.
                      • +
                    • To the left of the filters you will find buttons for diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Pixabay.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Pixabay.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..914bfaca20 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Pixabay.htm @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + Pixabay + + + + + + + + +
                      +
                      + +
                      +

                      Pixabay

                      +

                      The Pixabay plugin allows you to add pictures to your document from an open collection of Pixabay service that offers copyright free images.

                      +

                      The plugin is compatible with the self-hosted and the desktop versions of the ONLYOFFICE editors and can be added to ONLYOFFICE instances manually using the Plugin Manager.

                      + +

                      Installation

                      +

                      To install the Pixabay plugin,

                      +
                        +
                      1. Go to the Plugins tab.
                      2. +
                      3. Open the Plugin Manager.
                      4. +
                      5. Find
                        on the marketplace and click the Install button below.
                      6. +
                      7. Click the
                        Pixabay icon in the Plugins tab.
                      8. +
                      9. Proceed with the plugin configuration.
                      10. +
                      +

                      For more details, please refer to the ONLYOFFICE API documentation.

                      + +

                      Configuration

                      +
                        +
                      1. Log in to your Pixabay account or register a new one.
                      2. +
                      3. Go to the Search Images section of the Pixabay API page.
                      4. +
                      5. + Scroll down to the Parameters list and copy the link under the Key parameter. If you are not logged in, press Login next to the Key parameter. +

                        Pixabay API key

                        +
                      6. +
                      7. Paste the key to the API key field on the left panel of the Plugins tab in the Document Editor.
                      8. +
                      9. Click Save.
                      10. +
                      +

                      Pixabay Panel

                      + +

                      How to use

                      +
                        +
                      1. Go to the Plugins tab.
                      2. +
                      3. Click the
                        Pixabay icon.
                      4. +
                      5. On the left panel that opens, type in the keyword you associate with the image you are looking for.
                      6. +
                      7. + Use the Show settings button to refine your search by Language, Image type, Orientation and Category. Click Hide settings to reduce the search section. +

                        Pixabay settings

                        +
                      8. +
                      9. Click Search.
                      10. +
                      11. Scroll through search results and click the image to add it to your document.
                      12. +
                      +

                      Pixabay results

                      +
                      + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SetPageParameters.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SetPageParameters.htm index 243539205c..2e54574fd0 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SetPageParameters.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SetPageParameters.htm @@ -18,9 +18,9 @@

                      Set page parameters

                      To change page layout in the Document Editor, i.e. set page orientation and size, adjust margins and insert columns, use the corresponding icons on the Layout tab of the top toolbar.

                      Note: all these parameters are applied to the entire document. If you need to set different page margins, orientation, size, or column number for the separate parts of your document, please refer to this page.

                      Page Orientation

                      -

                      Change the current orientation by type clicking the Orientation icon. The default orientation type is Portrait that can be switched to Album.

                      +

                      Change the current orientation by type clicking the Orientation icon. The default orientation type is Portrait that can be switched to Album.

                      Page Size

                      -

                      Change the default A4 format by clicking the Size icon and selecting the required format from the list. The following preset sizes are available:

                      +

                      Change the default A4 format by clicking the Size icon and selecting the required format from the list. The following preset sizes are available:

                      • US Letter (21,59cm x 27,94cm)
                      • US Legal (21,59cm x 35,56cm)
                      • @@ -39,31 +39,33 @@

                        Page Size

                        You can also set a special page size by selecting the Custom Page Size option from the list. The Page Size window will open where you'll be able to select the required Preset (US Letter, US Legal, A4, A5, B5, Envelope #10, Envelope DL, Tabloid, AЗ, Tabloid Oversize, ROC 16K, Envelope Choukei 3, Super B/A3, A0, A1, A2, A6) or set custom Width and Height values. Enter new values into the entry fields or adjust the existing values using the arrow buttons. When you finish, click OK to apply the changes.

                        Custom Page Size

                        Page Margins

                        -

                        Change the default margins, i.e. the blank space between the left, right, top and bottom page edges and the paragraph text, by clicking the Margins icon and selecting one of the available presets: Normal, US Normal, Narrow, Moderate, Wide. You can also use the Custom Margins option to set your own values in the Margins window. Enter the required Top, Bottom, Left and Right page margin values into the entry fields or adjust the existing values using arrow buttons.

                        +

                        Change the default margins, i.e. the blank space between the left, right, top and bottom page edges and the paragraph text, by clicking the Margins icon and selecting one of the available presets: Normal, US Normal, Narrow, Moderate, Wide. You can also use the Custom Margins option to set your own values in the Margins window. Enter the required Top, Bottom, Left and Right page margin values into the entry fields or adjust the existing values using arrow buttons.

                        Custom Margins

                        Gutter position is used to set up additional space on the left side of the document or at its top. The Gutter option is helpful to make sure that bookbinding does not cover the text. In the Margins enter the required gutter position into the entry fields and choose where it should be placed in.

                        Note: the Gutter position cannot be used when the Mirror margins option is checked.

                        In the Multiple pages drop-down menu, choose the Mirror margins option to set up facing pages for double-sided documents. With this option checked, Left and Right margins turn into Inside and Outside margins respectively.

                        In Orientation drop-down menu choose from Portrait and Landscape options.

                        All applied changes to the document will be displayed in the Preview window.

                        -

                        When you finish, click OK. The custom margins will be applied to the current document and the Last Custom option with the specified parameters will appear in the Margins list so that you will be able to apply them to other documents.

                        +

                        When you finish, click OK. The custom margins will be applied to the current document and the Last Custom option with the specified parameters will appear in the Margins list so that you will be able to apply them to other documents.

                        You can also change the margins manually by dragging the border between the grey and white areas on the rulers (the grey areas of the rulers indicate page margins):

                        -

                        +

                        +

                        Page Color

                        +

                        Change the page color on the Layout tab using the Page Color button. Choose one of the Theme or Standard colors, or click the More colors menu item to create a custom color.

                        Columns

                        -

                        Apply a multi-column layout by clicking the Columns icon and selecting the necessary column type from the drop-down list. The following options are available:

                        +

                        Apply a multi-column layout by clicking the Columns icon and selecting the necessary column type from the drop-down list. The following options are available:

                          -
                        • Two
                          - to add two columns of the same width,
                        • -
                        • Three
                          - to add three columns of the same width,
                        • -
                        • Left
                          - to add two columns: a narrow column on the left and a wide column on the right,
                        • -
                        • Right
                          - to add two columns: a narrow column on the right and a wide column on the left.
                        • +
                        • Two
                          - to add two columns of the same width,
                        • +
                        • Three
                          - to add three columns of the same width,
                        • +
                        • Left
                          - to add two columns: a narrow column on the left and a wide column on the right,
                        • +
                        • Right
                          - to add two columns: a narrow column on the right and a wide column on the left.

                        If you want to adjust column settings, select the Custom Columns option from the list. The Columns window will appear, and you'll be able to set the required Number of columns, column Width and Spacing. Enter your new values into the entry fields or adjust the existing values using arrow buttons. Check the Equal column width checkbox to make all column width the same. Check the Column divider box to add a vertical line between the columns. When you finish, click OK to apply the changes.

                        Custom Columns

                        -

                        To exactly specify where a new column should start, place the cursor before the text that you want to move to the new column, click the Breaks icon on the top toolbar and then select the Insert Column Break option. The text will be moved to the next column.

                        -

                        The inserted column breaks are indicated in your document with a dotted line: . If you do not see the inserted column breaks, click the icon at the Home tab on the top toolbar to make them visible. To remove a column break select it with the mouse and press the Delete key.

                        +

                        To exactly specify where a new column should start, place the cursor before the text that you want to move to the new column, click the Breaks icon on the top toolbar and then select the Insert Column Break option. The text will be moved to the next column.

                        +

                        The inserted column breaks are indicated in your document with a dotted line: . If you do not see the inserted column breaks, click the icon at the Home tab on the top toolbar to make them visible. To remove a column break select it with the mouse and press the Delete key.

                        To manually change the column width and spacing, you can use the horizontal ruler.

                        -

                        -

                        To cancel columns and return to a regular single-column layout, click the Columns icon on the top toolbar and select the One option from the list.

                        +

                        +

                        To cancel columns and return to a regular single-column layout, click the Columns icon on the top toolbar and select the One option from the list.

                        \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Speech.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Speech.htm index 6be37cd26b..5e04cf30bf 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Speech.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Speech.htm @@ -16,9 +16,10 @@

                        Read the text out loud

                        ONLYOFFICE Document Editor has a plugin that can read out the text for you.

                        +

                        Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager.

                        1. Select the text to be read out.
                        2. -
                        3. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose
                          Speech.
                        4. +
                        5. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose
                          Speech.

                        The text will now be read out.

                        diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Speechinput.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Speechinput.htm index c3832ce2da..6ce4218c57 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Speechinput.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Speechinput.htm @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ - +
                        @@ -16,6 +16,7 @@

                        Type via voice

                        In the Document Editor, you can insert text with your voice.

                        +

                        Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager.

                        1. Set the cursor to the place where you want to add text,
                        2. switch to the Plugins tab and select
                          Speech input,
                        3. diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/TerMef.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/TerMef.htm index a87fd574e5..499d58e8a5 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/TerMef.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/TerMef.htm @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ - +
                          @@ -16,12 +16,13 @@

                          Insert definitions

                          In the Document Editor, you can use the TerMef plugin to search for notions, display their definitions from the database and insert the required definition as an endnote at the end of your document. The plugin only works with notions and definitions in French. It can be installed via the built-in Plugin Manager.

                          +

                          Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager.

                          1. Select your term in the document.
                          2. Check the required definition on the left-side panel.
                          3. Paste the definition as an endnote by clicking the Note de bas de page button.

                          TerMef

                          - + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Thesaurus.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Thesaurus.htm index bbe50c36ea..2934e8096f 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Thesaurus.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Thesaurus.htm @@ -19,9 +19,10 @@

                          Replace a word by a synonym

                          If you are using the same word multiple times, or a word is just not quite the word you are looking for, ONLYOFFICE Document Editor lets you look up synonyms. It will show you the antonyms too.

                          +

                          Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager.

                          1. Select the word in your document.
                          2. -
                          3. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose
                            Thesaurus.
                          4. +
                          5. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose
                            Thesaurus.
                          6. The synonyms and antonyms will show up in the left sidebar.
                          7. Click a word to replace the word in your document.
                          diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Translator.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Translator.htm index b743902261..37ac3015df 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Translator.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Translator.htm @@ -16,9 +16,10 @@

                          Translate text

                          In the Document Editor, you can translate your document from and to numerous languages.

                          +

                          Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager.

                          1. Select the text that you want to translate.
                          2. -
                          3. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose
                            Translator, the Translator appears in a sidebar on the left.
                          4. +
                          5. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose
                            Translator, the Translator appears in a sidebar on the left.
                          6. Click the drop-down box and choose the preferred language.

                          The text will be translated to the required language.

                          @@ -28,7 +29,7 @@

                          Changing the language of your result:

                          1. Click the drop-down box and choose the preferred language.
                          -

                          The translation will change immediately.

                          +

                          The translation will change immediately.

                          \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Typograf.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Typograf.htm index 905ff68ea2..adac95ee85 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Typograf.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Typograf.htm @@ -16,6 +16,7 @@

                          Correct typography

                          If you need to correct typography in your text, use the Typograf plugin that will automatically place non-breaking spaces and remove extra ones, as well as correct minor typos, insert correct quotes, replace hyphens with dashes, etc.

                          +

                          Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager.

                          1. Open the Plugins tab and click Typograf.
                          2. Click the Show advanced settings button.
                          3. diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/UseMailMerge.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/UseMailMerge.htm index 0892834359..6910a6581b 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/UseMailMerge.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/UseMailMerge.htm @@ -23,7 +23,7 @@

                            Use Mail Merge

                          4. A data source used for the mail merge must be an .xlsx spreadsheet stored on your portal. Open an existing spreadsheet or create a new one and make sure that it meets the following requirements.
                          5. The spreadsheet should have a header row with the column titles, as values in the first cell of each column will designate merge fields (i.e. variables that you can insert into the text). Each column should contain a set of actual values for a variable. Each row in the spreadsheet should correspond to a separate record (i.e. a set of values that belongs to a certain recipient). During the merge process, a copy of the main document will be created for each record and each merge field inserted into the main text will be replaced with an actual value from the corresponding column. If you are goung to send results by email, the spreadsheet must also include a column with the recipients' email addresses.
                          6. - Open an existing text document or create a new one. It must contain the main text which will be the same for each version of the merged document. Click the Mail Merge
                            icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar and select the data source location: From File, From URL or From Storage. + Open an existing text document or create a new one. It must contain the main text which will be the same for each version of the merged document. Click the Mail Merge
                            icon on the Collaboration tab of the top toolbar and select the data source location: From File, From URL or From Storage.

                            Mail Merge Options

                          7. diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ViewDocInfo.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ViewDocInfo.htm index f37cb59bfd..b8dbfcb4b6 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ViewDocInfo.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ViewDocInfo.htm @@ -15,36 +15,24 @@

                            View document information

                            -

                            To access the detailed information about the currently edited document in the Document Editor, click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Document Info option.

                            -

                            General Information

                            -

                            The document information includes a number of the file properties which describe the document. Some of these properties are updated automatically, and some of them can be edited.

                            +

                            To access the detailed information about the currently edited document in the Document Editor, click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Info option.

                            +

                            Common

                              -
                            • Location - the folder in the Documents module where the file is stored. Owner - the name of the user who has created the file. Uploaded - the date and time when the file has been created. These properties are available in the online version only.
                            • -
                            • Statistics - the number of pages, paragraphs, words, symbols, symbols with spaces.
                            • -
                            • Title, Subject, Comment - these properties allow yoy to simplify your documents classification. You can specify the necessary text in the properties fields.
                            • -
                            • Last Modified - the date and time when the file was last modified.
                            • -
                            • Last Modified By - the name of the user who has made the latest change to the document. This option is available if the document has been shared and can be edited by several users.
                            • -
                            • Application - the application the document has been created with.
                            • -
                            • Author - the person who has created the file. You can enter the necessary name in this field. Press Enter to add a new field that allows you to specify one more author.
                            • +
                            • Owner - the person who has created the file.
                            • +
                            • Uploaded - the date when the file has been uploaded to the server.
                            • +
                            • Last Modified - the date when the file has last been edited.
                            -

                            If you changed the file properties, click the Apply button to apply the changes.

                            -
                            -

                            Note: The online Editors allow you to change the name of the document directly in the editor interface. To do that, click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Rename option, then enter the necessary File name in a new window that will appear and click OK.

                            -
                            -
                            -

                            Permission Information

                            -

                            In the online version, you can view the information about permissions to the files stored in the cloud.

                            -

                            Note: this option is not available for users with the Read Only permissions.

                            -

                            To find out who have rights to view or edit the document, select the Access Rights... option on the left sidebar.

                            -

                            You can also change currently selected access rights by pressing the Change access rights button in the Persons who have rights section.

                            -

                            Version History

                            -

                            In the online version, you can view the version history for the files stored in the cloud.

                            -

                            Note: this option is not available for users with the Read Only permissions.

                            -

                            To view all the changes made to this document, select the Version History option at the left sidebar. It's also possible to open the history of versions using the Version History icon on the Collaboration tab of the top toolbar. You'll see the list of this document versions (major changes) and revisions (minor changes) with the indication of each version/revision author and creation date and time. For document versions, the version number is also specified (e.g. ver. 2). To know exactly which changes have been made in each separate version/revision, you can view the one you need by clicking it on the left sidebar. The changes made by the version/revision author are marked with the color which is displayed next to the author's name on the left sidebar. You can use the Restore link below the selected version/revision to restore it.

                            -

                            Version History

                            -

                            To return to the current version of the document, use the Close History option on the top of the version list.

                            -
                            -

                            To close the File panel and return to document editing, select the Close Menu option.

                            - +

                            Statistics

                            +

                            This subsection displays the number of pages, paragraphs, words, symbols, and symbols with spaces within the file.

                            +

                            Properties

                            +
                              +
                            • Author - you can enter the necessary name in this field. Press Enter to add a new field that allows you to specify one more author. To delete additional authors, click the cross button next to the corresponding fields.
                            • +
                            • Title - enter the title of the document. Please do not confuse it with the file name as these are different file properties.
                            • +
                            • Tags - enter necessary tags for better file classification.
                            • +
                            • Subject - enter the document subject.
                            • +
                            • Comment - enter the comment to the file. Please do not confuse it with the Comments as these are different features.
                            • +
                            • Click the Add property button to add custom fields, entering the Title of the field, its Type, i.e., its format, and its Value. Click OK when ready. To delete additional fields, click the cross button next to them.
                            • +
                            + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/WordCounter.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/WordCounter.htm index 98cfeb640f..f6c2a4002d 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/WordCounter.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/WordCounter.htm @@ -16,16 +16,18 @@

                            Count words

                            To know the exact number of words and symbols both with and without spaces in your document, as well as the number of paragraphs altogether, use the Word counter plugin.

                            -
                              +

                              Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager.

                              +
                              1. Open the Plugins tab and click Count words and characters.
                              2. Select the text.
                              -
                              Please note that the following elements are not included in the word count: -
                                -
                              • footnote/endnote symbols,
                              • -
                              • numbers from numbered lists,
                              • -
                              • page numbers.
                              • -
                              +
                              + Please note that the following elements are not included in the word count: +
                                +
                              • footnote/endnote symbols,
                              • +
                              • numbers from numbered lists,
                              • +
                              • page numbers.
                              • +
                              Word counter plugin gif

                              For more information on the Word counter plugin and its installation, please see the plugin’s page on the AppDirectory.

                              diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Wordpress.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Wordpress.htm index 92e9f2bbd2..6eb0fb143a 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Wordpress.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Wordpress.htm @@ -16,10 +16,11 @@

                              Upload a document to WordPress

                              You can write your articles in your ONLYOFFICE Document Editor environment and upload them as a WordPress-article.

                              +

                              Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager.

                              Connect to WordPress

                              1. Open your document.
                              2. -
                              3. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose
                                WordPress.
                              4. +
                              5. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose
                                WordPress.
                              6. Log in into your WordPress account and choose the website page you want to post your document on.
                              7. Enter a title for your article.
                              8. Click Publish to publish immediately or Save as draft to publish later from your WordPress site or app.
                              9. diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/YouTube.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/YouTube.htm index de7fe876ff..4b4600ec83 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/YouTube.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/YouTube.htm @@ -16,18 +16,19 @@

                                Include a video

                                In the Document Editor, you can include a video in your document. It will be shown as an image. By double-clicking the image the video dialog opens. Here you can start the video.

                                +

                                Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager.

                                1. Copy the URL of the video you want to include.
                                  (the complete address shown in the address line of your browser)
                                2. Go to your document and place the cursor at the location where you want to include the video.
                                3. -
                                4. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose
                                  YouTube.
                                5. +
                                6. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose
                                  YouTube.
                                7. Paste the URL and click OK.
                                8. Check if it is the correct video and click the OK button below the video.

                                The video is now included in your document.

                                Youtube plugin gif - + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Zoom.htm b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Zoom.htm index 5641369723..0df87690c0 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Zoom.htm +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Zoom.htm @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ - +
                                @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@

                                Zoom

                                The Zoom plugin allows you to host or schedule Zoom meetings directly in the editor in just a few clicks.

                                -

                                The plugin is compatible with the self-hosted version of ONLYOFFICE editors and can be added to ONLYOFFICE instances manually.

                                +

                                The plugin is compatible with the self-hosted version of ONLYOFFICE editors and can be added to ONLYOFFICE instances manually using the Plugin Manager.

                                Installation

                                To install the Zoom plugin,

                                diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/colorscheme.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/colorscheme.png index 19f4c38e9d..0094221e9b 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/colorscheme.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/colorscheme.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/convert_footnotes_endnotes.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/convert_footnotes_endnotes.png index e92e0557ee..396972b31b 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/convert_footnotes_endnotes.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/convert_footnotes_endnotes.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/drawio_diagram.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/drawio_diagram.png index 30e5560870..a9e961832c 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/drawio_diagram.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/drawio_diagram.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_collaborationtab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_collaborationtab.png index 3dd8e9c0a7..f0412ebae0 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_collaborationtab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_collaborationtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_drawtab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_drawtab.png index 26f14ae52e..c2a2bffdaf 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_drawtab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_drawtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png index d3d98e4209..3938abf4ba 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png index 3ae13f1b7d..ebf611c47a 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_formstab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_formstab.png index a148cc9102..6a3b2dd75c 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_formstab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_formstab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png index 6de344eeba..7c964910ac 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png index 7c1eb78d28..e5625f3ff6 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_layouttab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_layouttab.png index 555e1b603a..383a47e63b 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_layouttab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_layouttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png index f55e2e4789..c146446ad9 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_protectiontab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_protectiontab.png index 4b3c7d5619..a0d63d9335 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_protectiontab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_protectiontab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_referencestab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_referencestab.png index b2b85f1689..ace1fe3236 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_referencestab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_referencestab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_reviewtab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_reviewtab.png index 3dd8e9c0a7..f0412ebae0 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_reviewtab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_reviewtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_viewtab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_viewtab.png index 576b531119..3f32a5c28b 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_viewtab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_viewtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/drawtab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/drawtab.png index fd7d3baabb..55e37f67cc 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/drawtab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/drawtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/editorwindow.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/editorwindow.png index 0ce163d078..a32f46873f 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/editorwindow.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/editorwindow.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/filetab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/filetab.png index 1231b3709e..734465b3eb 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/filetab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/filetab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/formstab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/formstab.png index 1eea32a734..8b5f832636 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/formstab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/formstab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/hometab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/hometab.png index 6140309d06..48dbdc42a6 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/hometab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/hometab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/inserttab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/inserttab.png index ceb28125aa..70bcfd43e3 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/inserttab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/inserttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/layouttab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/layouttab.png index 88c9cda9d1..eaf6f20d3d 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/layouttab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/layouttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/leftpart.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/leftpart.png index a23428dc04..c6e6c434e3 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/leftpart.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/leftpart.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/pluginstab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/pluginstab.png index 6e8ed591a4..5fa03820e9 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/pluginstab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/pluginstab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/protectiontab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/protectiontab.png index d9c37d4b8f..ab349e9b4d 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/protectiontab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/protectiontab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/referencestab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/referencestab.png index 3004b11370..cad64382fa 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/referencestab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/referencestab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/reviewtab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/reviewtab.png index fac6446454..66ff799bfe 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/reviewtab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/reviewtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/viewtab.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/viewtab.png index e5686aad03..cbf3e9c63c 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/viewtab.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/viewtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/pixabay_results.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/pixabay_results.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..564ca4be19 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/pixabay_results.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_autoshape.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_autoshape.png index cf7e4981fd..56bea423fe 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_autoshape.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_autoshape.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/signature_form_settings.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/signature_form_settings.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c0e30c2c3d Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/signature_form_settings.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/spellchecking_language.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/spellchecking_language.png index ff704d56af..ce4fb9a6c5 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/spellchecking_language.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/spellchecking_language.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/versionhistory.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/versionhistory.png index 47e50bef9b..5baea726bb 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/versionhistory.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/versionhistory.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/search/indexes.js b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/search/indexes.js index f2e69948c3..d44814692c 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/search/indexes.js +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/en/search/indexes.js @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm", "title": "Advanced Settings of the Document Editor", - "body": "The Document Editor allows you to change its advanced settings. To access them, open the File tab on the top toolbar and select the Advanced Settings option. The advanced settings are grouped as follows: Editing and saving Autosave is used in the online version to turn on/off automatic saving of changes you make while editing. Autorecover is used in the desktop version to turn on/off the option that allows automatically recovering documents in case the program closes unexpectedly. Show the Paste Options button when the content is pasted. The corresponding icon will appear when you paste content in the document. The Use smart paragraph selection option is used to include the paragraph mark when a whole paragraph is selected. Make the files compatible with older MS Word versions when saved as DOCX. The files saved in DOCX format will become compatible with older Microsoft Word versions. Collaboration The Co-editing mode subsection allows you to set the preferable mode for seeing changes made to the document when working in collaboration. Fast (by default). The users who take part in the document co-editing will see the changes in real time once they are made by other users. Strict. All the changes made by co-editors will be shown only after you click the Save icon that will notify you about new changes. The Show track changes subsection allows you to choose how new changes will be displayed. Show by click in balloons. The change is shown in a balloon when you click the tracked change. Show by hover in tooltips. A tooltip appears when you hover the mouse pointer over the tracked change. The Real-time Collaboration Changes subsection allows you to choose how new changes and comments will be displayed in real time. View None. All the changes made during the current session will not be highlighted. View All. All the changes made during the current session will be highlighted. View Last. Only the changes made since you last time clicked the Save icon will be highlighted. This option is only available when the Strict co-editing mode is selected. Show changes from other users. This feature allows seeing changes made by other users in the document opened for viewing only in the Live Viewer mode. Show comments in text. If you disable this feature, the commented passages will be highlighted only if you click the Comments icon on the left sidebar. Show resolved comments. This feature is disabled by default so that the resolved comments are hidden in the document text. You can view such comments only if you click the Comments icon on the left sidebar. Enable this option if you want to display resolved comments in the document text. Proofing The Spell Checking option is used to turn on/off the spell checking. Ignore words in UPPERCASE. Words typed in capital letters are ignored during the spell checking. Ignore words with numbers. Words with numbers in them are ignored during the spell checking. The AutoCorrect options... menu allows you to access the autocorrect settings such as replacing text as you type, recognizing functions, automatic formatting etc. Workspace The Turn on screen reader support option is used to enable support of screen reader software. The Alignment Guides option is used to turn on/off alignment guides that appear when you move objects. It allows for a more precise object positioning on the page. The Use Alt key to navigate the user interface using the keyboard option is used to enable using the Alt / Option key in keyboard shortcuts. Show the Quick Print button in the editor header is used in the desktop version to enable quick printing via the corresponding button at the top toolbar. The file will be printed on the last selected or default printer. The RTL Interface (Beta) option is used to change the direction in which elements of the interface are displayed. In the desktop editors, the RTL Interface (Beta) option can be accessed on the main settings page. To learn more, please refer to the desktop getting started guide. The Interface theme option is used to change the color scheme of the editor’s interface. The Same as system option makes the editor follow the interface theme of your system. The Light color scheme incorporates standard blue, white, and light gray colors with less contrast in UI elements suitable for working during daytime. The Classic Light color scheme incorporates standard blue, white, and light gray colors. The Dark color scheme incorporates black, dark gray, and light gray colors suitable for working during nighttime. The Contrast Dark color scheme incorporates black, dark gray, and white colors with more contrast in UI elements highlighting the working area of the file. The Turn on document dark mode option is used to make the working area darker when the editor is set to Dark or Contrast Dark interface theme. Check the Turn on document dark mode box to enable it. Note: Apart from the available Light, Classic Light, Dark, and Contrast Dark interface themes, ONLYOFFICE editors can now be customized with your own color theme. Please follow these instructions to learn how you can do that. The Unit of Measurement option is used to specify what units are used on the rulers and in properties of objects when setting such parameters as width, height, spacing, margins etc. The available units are Centimeter, Point, and Inch. The Default Zoom Value option is used to set the default zoom value, selecting it in the list of available options from 50% to 500%. You can also choose the Fit to Page, Fit to Width, or Last Used option. The Last Used option refers to the last set scaling during the current session. The Font Hinting option is used to select how fonts are displayed in the Document Editor. Choose As Windows if you like the way fonts are usually displayed on Windows, i.e. using Windows font hinting. Choose As OS X if you like the way fonts are usually displayed on a Mac, i.e. without any font hinting at all. Choose Native if you want your text to be displayed with the hinting embedded into font files. Default cache mode - used to select the cache mode for the font characters. It’s not recommended to switch it without any reason. It can be helpful in some cases only, for example, when an issue in the Google Chrome browser with the enabled hardware acceleration occurs. The Document Editor has two cache modes: In the first cache mode, each letter is cached as a separate picture. In the second cache mode, a picture of a certain size is selected where letters are placed dynamically and a mechanism of allocating/removing memory in this picture is also implemented. If there is not enough memory, a second picture is created, etc. The Default cache mode setting applies two above-mentioned cache modes separately for different browsers: When the Default cache mode setting is enabled, Internet Explorer (v. 9, 10, 11) uses the second cache mode, other browsers use the first cache mode. When the Default cache mode setting is disabled, Internet Explorer (v. 9, 10, 11) uses the first cache mode, other browsers use the second cache mode. The Macros Settings option is used to set macros display with a notification. Choose Disable All to disable all macros within the document. Choose Show Notification to receive notifications about macros within the document. Choose Enable All to automatically run all macros within the document. To save the changes you made, click the Apply button." + "body": "The Document Editor allows you to change its advanced settings. To access them, open the File tab on the top toolbar and select the Advanced Settings option. The advanced settings are grouped as follows: Editing and saving Autosave is used in the online version to turn on/off automatic saving of changes you make while editing. Autorecover is used in the desktop version to turn on/off the option that allows automatically recovering documents in case the program closes unexpectedly. Show the Paste Options button when the content is pasted. The corresponding icon will appear when you paste content in the document. The Use smart paragraph selection option is used to include the paragraph mark when a whole paragraph is selected. Make the files compatible with older MS Word versions when saved as DOCX. The files saved in DOCX format will become compatible with older Microsoft Word versions. Collaboration The Co-editing mode subsection allows you to set the preferable mode for seeing changes made to the document when working in collaboration. Fast (by default). The users who take part in the document co-editing will see the changes in real time once they are made by other users. Strict. All the changes made by co-editors will be shown only after you click the Save icon that will notify you about new changes. The Show track changes subsection allows you to choose how new changes will be displayed. Show by click in balloons. The change is shown in a balloon when you click the tracked change. Show by hover in tooltips. A tooltip appears when you hover the mouse pointer over the tracked change. The Real-time collaboration changes subsection allows you to choose how new changes and comments will be displayed in real time. View none. All the changes made during the current session will not be highlighted. View all. All the changes made during the current session will be highlighted. View last. Only the changes made since you last time clicked the Save icon will be highlighted. This option is only available when the Strict co-editing mode is selected. Show changes from other users. This feature allows seeing changes made by other users in the document opened for viewing only in the Live Viewer mode. Show comments in text. If you disable this feature, the commented passages will be highlighted only if you click the Comments icon on the left sidebar. Show resolved comments. This feature is disabled by default so that the resolved comments are hidden in the document text. You can view such comments only if you click the Comments icon on the left sidebar. Enable this option if you want to display resolved comments in the document text. Proofing The Spell checking option is used to turn on/off the spell checking. Ignore words in UPPERCASE. Words typed in capital letters are ignored during the spell checking. Ignore words with numbers. Words with numbers in them are ignored during the spell checking. The AutoCorrect options... menu allows you to access the autocorrect settings such as replacing text as you type, recognizing functions, automatic formatting etc. Appearance The Interface theme option is used to change the color scheme of the editor’s interface. The Same as system option makes the editor follow the interface theme of your system. The Light color scheme incorporates standard blue, white, and light gray colors with less contrast in UI elements suitable for working during daytime. The Classic Light color scheme incorporates standard blue, white, and light gray colors. The Dark color scheme incorporates black, dark gray, and light gray colors suitable for working during nighttime. The Contrast Dark color scheme incorporates black, dark gray, and white colors with more contrast in UI elements highlighting the working area of the file. The Gray color scheme incorporates lighter gray color and appears as a uniformly light color scheme. The Turn on document dark mode option is used to make the working area darker when the editor is set to Dark or Contrast Dark interface theme. Check the Turn on document dark mode box to enable it. Note: Apart from the available Light, Classic Light, Dark, Contrast Dark, and Gray interface themes, ONLYOFFICE editors can now be customized with your own color theme. Please follow these instructions to learn how you can do that. Tab style - choose whether you want the currently selected tab to be filled in with a lighter color with the Fill option or to be underlined with the Line option. Use toolbar color as tabs background - the color of the toolbar will be used as tabs background. The toolbar color depends on the currently selected interface theme. Workspace The Turn on screen reader support option is used to enable support of screen reader software. The Alignment guides option is used to turn on/off alignment guides that appear when you move objects. It allows for a more precise object positioning on the page. The Use Alt key to navigate the user interface using the keyboard option is used to enable using the Alt / Option key in keyboard shortcuts. Show the Quick Print button in the editor header is used in the desktop version to enable quick printing via the corresponding button at the top toolbar. The file will be printed on the last selected or default printer. The RTL Interface (Beta) option is used to change the direction in which elements of the interface are displayed. In the desktop editors, the RTL Interface (Beta) option can be accessed on the main settings page. To learn more, please refer to the desktop getting started guide. This option is available only for interface languages that require RTL. The Customize quick access button is used to choose which buttons shall be available in the top toolbar, i.e., Save, Print, Undo, and Redo. The Unit of measurement option is used to specify what units are used on the rulers and in properties of objects when setting such parameters as width, height, spacing, margins etc. The available units are Centimeter, Point, and Inch. The Default zoom value option is used to set the default zoom value, selecting it in the list of available options from 50% to 500%. You can also choose the Fit to Page, Fit to Width, or Last Used option. The Last Used option refers to the last set scaling value during the current session. The Font hinting option is used to select how fonts are displayed in the Document Editor. Choose As Windows if you like the way fonts are usually displayed on Windows, i.e. using Windows font hinting. Choose As OS X if you like the way fonts are usually displayed on a Mac, i.e. without any font hinting at all. Choose Native if you want your text to be displayed with the hinting embedded into font files. Default cache mode - used to select the cache mode for the font characters. It’s not recommended to switch it without any reason. It can be helpful in some cases only, for example, when an issue in the Google Chrome browser with the enabled hardware acceleration occurs. The Document Editor has two cache modes: In the first cache mode, each letter is cached as a separate picture. In the second cache mode, a picture of a certain size is selected where letters are placed dynamically and a mechanism of allocating/removing memory in this picture is also implemented. If there is not enough memory, a second picture is created, etc. The Default cache mode setting applies two above-mentioned cache modes separately for different browsers: When the Default cache mode setting is enabled, Internet Explorer (v. 9, 10, 11) uses the second cache mode, other browsers use the first cache mode. When the Default cache mode setting is disabled, Internet Explorer (v. 9, 10, 11) uses the first cache mode, other browsers use the second cache mode. The Macros settings option is used to set macros display with a notification. Choose Disable All to disable all macros within the document. Choose Show notification to receive notifications about macros within the document. Choose Enable all to automatically run all macros within the document. The changes are saved as you go." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm", @@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "HelpfulHints/Communicating.htm", "title": "Communicating in real time", - "body": "The Document Editor allows you to maintain a constant team-wide approach to work flow: share files and folders, collaborate on documents in real time, comment certain parts of your documents that require additional third-party input, save document versions for future use, review documents and add your changes without actually editing the file, compare and merge documents to facilitate processing and editing. In Document Editor, you can communicate with your co-editors in real time using the built-in Chat tool as well as a number of useful plugins, i.e. Telegram or Rainbow. To access the Chat tool and leave a message for other users, click the icon on the left sidebar, or switch to the Collaboration tab of the top toolbar and click the Chat button, enter your text into the corresponding field below, press the Send button. The chat messages are stored during one session only. To discuss the document content, it is better to use comments which are stored until they are deleted. All the messages left by users will be displayed on the panel on the left. If there are new messages you haven't read yet, the chat icon will look like this - . To close the panel with chat messages, click the icon on the left sidebar or the Chat button at the top toolbar once again." + "body": "The Document Editor allows you to maintain a constant team-wide approach to work flow: share files and folders, collaborate on documents in real time, comment certain parts of your documents that require additional third-party input, save document versions for future use, review documents and add your changes without actually editing the file, compare and merge documents to facilitate processing and editing. In Document Editor, you can communicate with your co-editors in real time using the built-in Chat tool as well as a number of useful plugins, i.e., Telegram or Rainbow. To access the Chat tool and leave a message for other users, click the icon on the left sidebar, or switch to the Collaboration tab of the top toolbar and click the Chat button, enter your text into the corresponding field below, press the Send button. The chat messages are stored during one session only. To discuss the document content, it is better to use comments which are stored until they are deleted. All the messages left by users will be displayed on the panel on the left. If there are new messages you haven't read yet, the chat icon will look like this - . To close the panel with chat messages, click the icon on the left sidebar or the Chat button at the top toolbar once again." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/Comparison.htm", @@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm", "title": "Keyboard Shortcuts", - "body": "Keyboard Shortcuts for Key Tips Use keyboard shortcuts for a faster and easier access to the features of the Document Editor without using a mouse. Press Alt (Option for macOS) key to turn on all key tips for the editor header, the top toolbar, the right and the left sidebars and the status bar. Press the letter that corresponds to the item you wish to use. The additional key tips may appear depending on the key you press. The first key tips hide when additional key tips appear. For example, to access the Insert tab, press Alt (Option for macOS) to see all primary key tips. Press letter I to access the Insert tab, and to see all the available shortcuts for this tab. Then press the letter that corresponds to the item you wish to configure. Press Alt (Option for macOS) to hide all key tips, or press Escape to go back to the previous group of key tips. Find the most common keyboard shortcuts in the list below. Please note: for macOS, some shortcuts contain the Home, End, Page Up and Page Down keys which are only available on the extended keyboard. If you don't have these keys, use the keyboard shortcuts specified above (i.e. use ^ Ctrl/⌘ Cmd+← or Fn+← instead of Home, ^ Ctrl/⌘ Cmd+→ or Fn+→ instead of End, Fn+↑ instead of Page Up, Fn+↓ instead of Page Down). Windows/Linux Mac OS Working with Document Open 'File' panel Alt+F ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+F Open the File panel to save, download, print the current document, view its info, create a new document or open an existing one, access the Document Editor Help Center or advanced settings. Open 'Find' dialog window Ctrl+F ^ Ctrl+F, ⌘ Cmd+F Open the Find dialog window to start searching for a character/word/phrase in the currently edited document. Open 'Find and Replace' menu (panel) with replacement field Ctrl+H ^ Ctrl+H Open the Find and Replace menu (panel) with the replacement field to replace one or more occurrences of the found characters. Open 'Comments' panel Ctrl+⇧ Shift+H ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+H, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+H Open the Comments panel to add your own comment or reply to other users' comments. Open comment field Alt+H ⌘ Cmd+⌥ Option+A Open a data entry field where you can add the text of your comment. Open 'Chat' panel (Online Editors) Alt+Q ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+Q Open the Chat panel in the Online Editors and send a message. Save document Ctrl+S ^ Ctrl+S, ⌘ Cmd+S Save all the changes to the document currently edited with The Document Editor. The active file will be saved with its current file name, location, and file format. Print document Ctrl+P ^ Ctrl+P, ⌘ Cmd+P Print the document with one of the available printers or save it as a file. Download As... Ctrl+⇧ Shift+S ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+S, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+S Open the Download as... panel to save the currently edited document to the hard disk drive of your computer in one of the supported formats: DOCX, DOCXF, OFORM, DOTX, ODT, OTT, RTF, TXT, HTML, FB2, EPUB, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, JPG. Full screen (Online Editors) F11 Switch to the full screen view in the Online Editors to fit the Document Editor into your screen. Help menu F1 Fn+F1 Open the Document Editor Help menu. Open existing file Ctrl+O ⌘ Cmd+O Open the standard dialog box that allows selecting an existing file. If you select the file in this dialog box and click Open, the file will be opened in a new tab or window of Desktop Editors. Switch to the next tab Ctrl+↹ Tab ^ Ctrl+↹ Tab Switch to the next file tab in Desktop Editors or browser tab in Online Editors. Switch to the previous tab Ctrl+Shift+↹ Tab ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Switch to the previous file tab in Desktop Editors or browser tab in Online Editors. Close file Ctrl+W ⌘ Cmd+W Close the current document window. Element contextual menu ⇧ Shift+F10 ⇧ Shift+Fn+F10 Open the selected element contextual menu. Close menu or modal window, reset modes, etc. Esc Esc Close a menu or modal window. Reset pop-ups and balloons with comments and review changes. Reset drawing and erasing table mode. Reset text drag-n-drop. Reset marker selection mode. Reset format painter mode. Deselect shapes. Reset adding shapes mode. Exit from the header/footer. Exit from filling in forms. Reset the ‘Zoom’ parameter Ctrl+0 ^ Ctrl+0 or ⌘ Cmd+0 Reset the ‘Zoom’ parameter of the current document to a default 100%. Update fields F9 Fn+F9 Update fields (e.g., Table of Contents). Navigation Jump to the beginning of the line Home ⌘ Cmd+← Home Put the cursor to the beginning of the currently edited line. Jump to the beginning of the document Ctrl+Home ^ Ctrl+Fn+←, ⌘ Cmd+Fn+← ^ Ctrl+Home, ⌘ Cmd+Home Put the cursor to the very beginning of the currently edited document. Jump to the end of the line End ⌘ Cmd+→ End Put the cursor to the end of the currently edited line. Jump to the end of the document Ctrl+End ^ Ctrl+Fn+→, ⌘ Cmd+Fn+→ ^ Ctrl+End, ⌘ Cmd+End Put the cursor to the very end of the currently edited document. Jump to the beginning of the previous page Alt+Ctrl+Page Up ⌥ Option+Fn+↑, ⌘ Cmd+Fn+↑ ⌥ Option+Page Up, ⌘ Cmd+Page Up Put the cursor to the very beginning of the page which preceeds the currently edited one. Jump to the beginning of the next page Alt+Ctrl+Page Down ⌥ Option+Fn+↓, ⌘ Cmd+Fn+↓ ⌥ Option+Page Down, ⌘ Cmd+Page Down Put the cursor to the very beginning of the page which follows the currently edited one. Scroll down Page Down Fn+↓ Page Down Scroll the document approximately one visible page down. Scroll up Page Up Fn+↑ Page Up Scroll the document approximately one visible page up. Next page Alt+Page Down Go to the next page in the currently edited document. Previous page Alt+Page Up Go to the previous page in the currently edited document. Zoom In Ctrl+Num+, Ctrl++ (on the main keyboard) ^ Ctrl++, ⌘ Cmd++ Zoom in the currently edited document. Zoom Out Ctrl+- (on the main keyboard) ^ Ctrl+-, ⌘ Cmd+- Zoom out the currently edited document. Move one character to the left/right or one line up/down ← → ↑ ↓ ← → ↑ ↓ Move the cursor one character to the left/right or one line up/down. Move to the beginning of a word or one word to the left Ctrl+← ⌥ Option+← Move the cursor to the beginning of a word or one word to the left. Move one word to the right Ctrl+→ ⌥ Option+→ Move the cursor one word to the right. Navigate between controls in modal dialogues ↹ Tab/⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ↹ Tab/⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Navigate between controls to give focus to the next or previous control in modal dialogues. Move to lower header/footer Page Down Fn+↓ Page Down Move to the lower header/footer (if the cursor is in the header/footer). Move to upper header/footer Page Up Fn+↑ Page Up Move to the upper header/footer (if the cursor is in the header/footer). Move to lower header Alt+Page Down ⌥ Option+Fn+↓ ⌥ Option+Page Down Move to the lower header (if the cursor is in the header/footer). Move to upper header Alt+Page Up ⌥ Option+Fn+↑ ⌥ Option+Page Up Move to the upper header (if the cursor is in the header/footer). Writing End paragraph ↵ Enter ↵ Return End the current paragraph and start a new one. Add line break ⇧ Shift+↵ Enter ⇧ Shift+↵ Return Add a line break without starting a new paragraph. Add new placeholder to equation argument Enter Return Add a new placeholder to the equation argument. Change the alignment level of the operator to the left ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Change the alignment level of the operator to the left (for the second line of the equation with a forced break). Change the alignment level of the operator to the right ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Change the alignment level of the operator to the right (for the second line of the equation with a forced break). Delete character on the left ← Backspace Delete Delete one character to the left of the cursor. Delete character on the right Delete Fn+Delete Delete one character to the right of the cursor. Delete word/selection/graphical object to the left of cursor Ctrl+← Backspace ⌥ Option+Delete Delete one word/selection/graphical object to the left of the cursor. Delete word/selection/graphical object to the right of cursor Ctrl+Delete Fn+⌥ Option+Delete Delete one word/selection/graphical object to the right of the cursor. Create nonbreaking space Ctrl+⇧ Shift+␣ Spacebar ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Fn+␣ Spacebar, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Fn+␣ Spacebar Create a space between characters which cannot be used to start a new line. Create nonbreaking hyphen Ctrl+⇧ Shift+- ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+-, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+- Create a hyphen between characters which cannot be used to start a new line. Undo and Redo Undo Ctrl+Z ^ Ctrl+Z, ⌘ Cmd+Z Reverse the latest performed action. Redo Ctrl+Y ^ Ctrl+Y, ⌘ Cmd+Y Repeat the latest undone action. Cut, Copy, and Paste Cut Ctrl+X, ⇧ Shift+Delete ⌘ Cmd+X Delete the selected text fragment and send it to the computer clipboard memory. The copied text can be later inserted to another place in the same document, into another document, or into some other program. Copy Ctrl+C, Ctrl+Insert ⌘ Cmd+C Send the selected text fragment to the computer clipboard memory. The copied text can be later inserted to another place in the same document, into another document, or into some other program. Paste Ctrl+V, ⇧ Shift+Insert ⌘ Cmd+V Insert the previously copied text fragment from the computer clipboard memory to the current cursor position. The text can be previously copied from the same document, from another document, or from some other program. Paste text without style formatting Ctrl+⇧ Shift+V ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+V Insert the previously copied text fragment from the computer clipboard memory to the current cursor position without preserving its original formatting. The text can be previously copied from the same document, from another document, or from some other program. Copy style Alt+Ctrl+C ⌘ Cmd+⌥ Option+C, ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+C Copy the formatting from the selected fragment of the currently edited text. The copied formatting can be later applied to another text fragment in the same document. Apply style Alt+Ctrl+V ⌘ Cmd+⌥ Option+V, ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+V Apply the previously copied formatting to the text in the currently edited document. Paste Special options 1 Keep source formatting Ctrl then K ^ Ctrl then K Keep the source formatting of the copied text. Keep text only Ctrl then T ^ Ctrl then T Paste the text without its original formatting. Overwrite cells Ctrl then O ^ Ctrl then O Replace the contents of the existing table with the copied data. Nest table Ctrl then N ^ Ctrl then N Paste the copied table as a nested table into the selected cell of the existing table. Working with Hyperlinks Insert hyperlink Ctrl+K ⌘ Cmd+K, ^ Ctrl+K Insert a hyperlink which can be used to go to a web address. Visit hyperlink Enter Return Visit a hyperlink (with the cursor in the hyperlink). Text Selection Select all Ctrl+A ⌘ Cmd+A, ^ Ctrl+A Select all the document text with tables and images. Select from cursor to beginning of line ⇧ Shift+Home ⇧ Shift+Fn+← ⇧ Shift+Home Select a text fragment from the cursor to the beginning of the current line. Select from cursor to end of line ⇧ Shift+End ⇧ Shift+Fn+→ ⇧ Shift+End Select a text fragment from the cursor to the end of the current line. Select from cursor to beginning of document Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Home ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Fn+←, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Fn+← ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Home, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Home Select a text fragment from the cursor to the beginning of the document. Select from cursor to end of document Ctrl+⇧ Shift+End ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Fn+→, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Fn+→ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+End, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+End Select a text fragment from the cursor to the end of the document. Select one character to the right ⇧ Shift+→ ⇧ Shift+→ Select one character to the right of the cursor position. Select one character to the left ⇧ Shift+← ⇧ Shift+← Select one character to the left of the cursor position. Select to the end of a word Ctrl+⇧ Shift+→ ⇧ Shift+⌥ Option+→ Select a text fragment from the cursor to the end of a word. Select to the beginning of a word Ctrl+⇧ Shift+← ⇧ Shift+⌥ Option+← Select a text fragment from the cursor to the beginning of a word. Select one line up ⇧ Shift+↑ ⇧ Shift+↑ Select one line up (with the cursor at the beginning of a line). Select one line down ⇧ Shift+↓ ⇧ Shift+↓ Select one line down (with the cursor at the end of a line). Select the page up to the upper part of the screen ⇧ Shift+Page Up ⇧ Shift+Fn+↑ ⇧ Shift+Page Up Select the page part from the cursor position to the upper part of the screen. Select the page down to the lower part of the screen ⇧ Shift+Page Down ⇧ Shift+Fn+↓ ⇧ Shift+Page Down Select the page part from the cursor position to the lower part of the screen. Select to the beginning of the previous page Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Page Up ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Fn+↑, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Fn+↑ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Page Up, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Page Up Select a text fragment from the cursor to the beginning of the previous page. Select to the beginning of the next page Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Page Down ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Fn+↓, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Fn+↓ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Page Down, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Page Down Select a text fragment from the cursor to the beginning of the next page. Text Styling Bold Ctrl+B ^ Ctrl+B, ⌘ Cmd+B Make the font of the selected text fragment darker and heavier than normal. Italic Ctrl+I ^ Ctrl+I, ⌘ Cmd+I Make the font of the selected text fragment italicized and slightly slanted. Underline Ctrl+U ^ Ctrl+U, ⌘ Cmd+U Make the selected text fragment underlined with a line going below the letters. Strikeout Ctrl+5 ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+x Make the selected text fragment struck out with a line going through the letters. Subscript Ctrl+. ^ Ctrl+., ⌘ Cmd+. Make the selected text fragment smaller and place it to the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas. Superscript Ctrl+, ^ Ctrl+,, ⌘ Cmd+, Make the selected text fragment smaller and place it to the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions. Heading 1 style Alt+1 ⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+1, ⌥ Option+⌘ Cmd+1 Apply the style of the heading 1 to the selected text fragment. Heading 2 style Alt+2 ⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+2, ⌥ Option+⌘ Cmd+2 Apply the style of the heading 2 to the selected text fragment. Heading 3 style Alt+3 ⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+3, ⌥ Option+⌘ Cmd+3 Apply the style of the heading 3 to the selected text fragment. Bulleted list Ctrl+⇧ Shift+L ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+L, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+L Create an unordered bulleted list from the selected text fragment or start a new one. Clear formatting Ctrl+␣ Spacebar ^ Ctrl+Fn+␣ Spacebar, ⌘ Cmd+Fn+␣ Spacebar Clear formatting of the selected text fragment. Increase font Ctrl+] ⌘ Cmd+], ^ Ctrl+] Increase the size of the font for the selected text fragment 1 point. Decrease font Ctrl+[ ⌘ Cmd+[, ^ Ctrl+[ Decrease the size of the font for the selected text fragment 1 point. Align center Ctrl+E ^ Ctrl+E, ⌘ Cmd+E Switch a paragraph between centered and left-aligned. Align justified Ctrl+J ^ Ctrl+J, ⌘ Cmd+J Switch a paragraph between justified and left-aligned. Align right Ctrl+R ^ Ctrl+R, ⌘ Cmd+R Switch a paragraph between right-aligned and left-aligned. Align left Ctrl+L ^ Ctrl+L, ⌘ Cmd+L Align a paragraph left. Insert page break Ctrl+↵ Enter ^ Ctrl+↵ Return, ⌘ Cmd+↵ Return Insert a page break at the current cursor position. Increase indent Ctrl+M ^ Ctrl+M, ⌘ Cmd+M Indent a paragraph from the left incrementally. Decrease indent Ctrl+⇧ Shift+M ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+M, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+M Remove a paragraph indent from the left incrementally. Add page number Ctrl+⇧ Shift+P ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+P, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+P Add the current page number at the current cursor position. Nonprinting characters Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Num8, Ctrl+⇧ Shift+8 ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+8, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+8 Show or hide the display of nonprinting characters. Increase list/indent level ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Increase the list/indent level (with the cursor at the beginning of a paragraph). Decrease list/indent level ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Decrease the list/indent level (with the cursor at the beginning of a paragraph). Add tab character to paragraph ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Add the tab character to a paragraph (if the cursor is not at the beginning of a paragraph). Increase indent for selected paragraphs ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Increase the indent for the selected paragraphs. Decrease indent for selected paragraphs ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Decrease the lindent for the selected paragraphs. Modifying Objects Working with shapes ↵ Enter Return When the shape is selected, if it does not contain content, create content and move the cursor to the beginning of the line. If the content is empty, move the cursor to it, otherwise select the entire content. Working with charts ↵ Enter When the chart title is selected, if the title is empty, move the cursor to the beginning of the line, otherwise select the text. Create a copy when dragging Ctrl ^ Ctrl Select an object and hold down the specified key when dragging the object to create the copy of the object in the location where it was moved. Constrain movement ⇧ Shift + drag ⇧ Shift + drag Constrain the movement of the selected object horizontally or vertically. Set 15-degree rotation ⇧ Shift + drag (when rotating) ⇧ Shift + drag (when rotating) Constrain the rotation angle to 15-degree increments. Maintain proportions ⇧ Shift + drag (when resizing) ⇧ Shift + drag (when resizing) Maintain the proportions of the selected object when resizing. Change angle of line/arrow when drawing ⇧ Shift + drag (when drawing lines/arrows) ⇧ Shift + drag (when drawing lines/arrows) Hold down the Shift key while drawing the line/arrow and rotate the spout of the arrow/end of the line to change the angle of the line/arrow when drawing it. The line/arrow will be rotated exactly 45 degrees. Movement by one-pixel increments Ctrl+← → ↑ ↓ ⌘ Cmd+← → ↑ ↓ Hold down the specified key and use the keybord arrows to move the selected object to the left, right, up, or down by one pixel at a time. Move shape by a big step ← → ↑ ↓ ← → ↑ ↓ Use the keybord arrows to move the selected object by a big step to the left, right, up, or down. Move focus to the next object ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Move focus to the next object after the currently selected one. Move focus to the previous object ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Move focus to the previous object before the currently selected one. Working with Endnotes/Footnotes Insert endnote Ctrl+Alt+D ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+D Insert an endnote. Insert footnote Ctrl+Alt+F Insert a footnote. Working with Tables Move to the next cell in a row ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Go to the next cell in a table row. Move to the previous cell in a row ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Go to the previous cell in a table row. Move to the next row ↓ ↓ Go to the next row in a table. Move to the previous row ↑ ↑ Go to the previous row in a table. Start new paragraph ↵ Enter ↵ Return Start a new paragraph within a cell. Add new row ↹ Tab in the lower right table cell. ↹ Tab in the lower right table cell. Add a new row at the bottom of the table. Insert table break Ctrl+⇧ Shift+↵ Enter ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+↵ Return, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+↵ Return Insert a table break within the table. Working with Forms Move to the next form ↹ Tab Move to the next form. Move to the previous form ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Move to the previous form. Choose the next combo box option in the form ↓ ↓ Choose the next combo box option in the form. Choose the previous combo box option in the form ↑ ↑ Choose the previous combo box option in the form. Add line break in the multiline form Enter Add a line break in the multiline form. Inserting special characters Insert equation Alt+= ⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+=,⌥ Option+⌘ Cmd+= Insert an equation at the current cursor position. Insert an em dash Alt+Ctrl+Num- ⌥ Option+⇧ Shift+- Insert an em dash ‘—’ within the current document and to the right of the cursor. Insert an en dash Ctrl+Num- ⌥ Option+- Insert an en dash ‘-’ within the current document and to the right of the cursor. Insert a copyright symbol Ctrl+Alt+G ⌘ Cmd+⌥ Option+G, ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+G Insert a copyright symbol ‘©’ within the current document and to the right of the cursor. Insert the Euro sign Ctrl+Alt+E ⌘ Cmd+⌥ Option+E, ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+E Insert the Euro sign (€) at the current cursor position. Insert the registered trademark sign Ctrl+Alt+R ⌘ Cmd+⌥ Option+R, ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+R Insert the registered trademark sign (®) at the current cursor position. Insert the trademark sign Ctrl+Alt+T ⌘ Cmd+⌥ Option+T, ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+T Insert the trademark sign (™) at the current cursor position. Insert ellipsis Ctrl+Alt+. ⌥ Option+; Insert the ellipsis sign (...) at the current cursor position. Replace selected Unicode code with symbol Alt+X ⌥ Option+⌘ Cmd+X, ⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+X Replace the selected Unicode code with a symbol. Work with keyboard supporting the ability to insert Unicode symbols ⌥ Option+Q, ⌥ Option+F, ⇧ Shift+⌥ Option+7, and others When using the ⌥ Option+keyboard symbol shortcuts, for the keyboards supporting the ability to insert Unicode symbols, the keyboard symbols are added. The examples are listed below. With the English ABC layout, the ⌥ Option+Q shortcut inserts the \"œ\" symbol, the ⌥ Option+F shortcut inserts the “ƒ” function symbol. With the US International w/o deadkeys layout, the ⌥ Option+Q shortcut inserts the “ä” symbol. With the Swiss-german layout, the ⇧ Shift+⌥ Option+7 shortcut inserts the \"\\” symbol. Paste the copied data using Ctrl+V on Windows or Cmd+V on macOS. After pasting the copied data, use the Ctrl key to open the Paste Special menu, then press the letter key which corresponds to the necessary option." + "body": "Keyboard Shortcuts for Key Tips Use keyboard shortcuts for a faster and easier access to the features of the Document Editor without using a mouse. Press Alt (Option for macOS) key to turn on all key tips for the editor header, the top toolbar, the right and the left sidebars and the status bar. Press the letter that corresponds to the item you wish to use. The additional key tips may appear depending on the key you press. The first key tips hide when additional key tips appear. For example, to access the Insert tab, press Alt (Option for macOS) to see all primary key tips. Press letter I to access the Insert tab, and to see all the available shortcuts for this tab. Then press the letter that corresponds to the item you wish to configure. Press Alt (Option for macOS) to hide all key tips, or press Escape to go back to the previous group of key tips. Find the most common keyboard shortcuts in the list below. Please note: for macOS, some shortcuts contain the Home, End, Page Up and Page Down keys which are only available on the extended keyboard. If you don't have these keys, use the keyboard shortcuts specified above (i.e. use ^ Ctrl/⌘ Cmd+← or Fn+← instead of Home, ^ Ctrl/⌘ Cmd+→ or Fn+→ instead of End, Fn+↑ instead of Page Up, Fn+↓ instead of Page Down). Windows/Linux Mac OS Working with Document Open 'File' panel Alt+F ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+F Open the File panel to save, download, print the current document, view its info, create a new document or open an existing one, access the Document Editor Help Center or advanced settings. Open 'Find' dialog window Ctrl+F ^ Ctrl+F, ⌘ Cmd+F Open the Find dialog window to start searching for a character/word/phrase in the currently edited document. Open 'Find and Replace' menu (panel) with replacement field Ctrl+H ^ Ctrl+H Open the Find and Replace menu (panel) with the replacement field to replace one or more occurrences of the found characters. Open 'Comments' panel Ctrl+⇧ Shift+H ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+H, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+H Open the Comments panel to add your own comment or reply to other users' comments. Open comment field Alt+H ⌘ Cmd+⌥ Option+A Open a data entry field where you can add the text of your comment. Open 'Chat' panel (Online Editors) Alt+Q ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+Q Open the Chat panel in the Online Editors and send a message. Save document Ctrl+S ^ Ctrl+S, ⌘ Cmd+S Save all the changes to the document currently edited with The Document Editor. The active file will be saved with its current file name, location, and file format. Print document Ctrl+P ^ Ctrl+P, ⌘ Cmd+P Print the document with one of the available printers or save it as a file. Download As... Ctrl+⇧ Shift+S ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+S, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+S Open the Download as... panel to save the currently edited document to the hard disk drive of your computer in one of the supported formats: DOCX, DOCXF, OFORM, DOTX, ODT, OTT, RTF, TXT, HTML, FB2, EPUB, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, JPG. Full screen (Online Editors) F11 Switch to the full screen view in the Online Editors to fit the Document Editor into your screen. Help menu F1 Fn+F1 Open the Document Editor Help menu. Open existing file Ctrl+O ⌘ Cmd+O Open the standard dialog box that allows selecting an existing file. If you select the file in this dialog box and click Open, the file will be opened in a new tab or window of Desktop Editors. Switch to the next tab Ctrl+↹ Tab ^ Ctrl+↹ Tab Switch to the next file tab in Desktop Editors or browser tab in Online Editors. Switch to the previous tab Ctrl+Shift+↹ Tab ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Switch to the previous file tab in Desktop Editors or browser tab in Online Editors. Close file Ctrl+W ⌘ Cmd+W Close the current document window. Element contextual menu ⇧ Shift+F10 ⇧ Shift+Fn+F10 Open the selected element contextual menu. Close menu or modal window, reset modes, etc. Esc Esc Close a menu or modal window. Reset pop-ups and balloons with comments and review changes. Reset drawing and erasing table mode. Reset text drag-n-drop. Reset marker selection mode. Reset format painter mode. Deselect shapes. Reset adding shapes mode. Exit from the header/footer. Exit from filling in forms. Reset the ‘Zoom’ parameter Ctrl+0 ^ Ctrl+0 or ⌘ Cmd+0 Reset the ‘Zoom’ parameter of the current document to a default 100%. Update fields F9 Fn+F9 Update fields (e.g., Table of Contents). Navigation Jump to the beginning of the line Home ⌘ Cmd+← Home Put the cursor to the beginning of the currently edited line. Jump to the beginning of the document Ctrl+Home ^ Ctrl+Fn+←, ⌘ Cmd+Fn+← ^ Ctrl+Home, ⌘ Cmd+Home Put the cursor to the very beginning of the currently edited document. Jump to the end of the line End ⌘ Cmd+→ End Put the cursor to the end of the currently edited line. Jump to the end of the document Ctrl+End ^ Ctrl+Fn+→, ⌘ Cmd+Fn+→ ^ Ctrl+End, ⌘ Cmd+End Put the cursor to the very end of the currently edited document. Jump to the beginning of the previous page Alt+Ctrl+Page Up ⌥ Option+Fn+↑, ⌘ Cmd+Fn+↑ ⌥ Option+Page Up, ⌘ Cmd+Page Up Put the cursor to the very beginning of the page which preceeds the currently edited one. Jump to the beginning of the next page Alt+Ctrl+Page Down ⌥ Option+Fn+↓, ⌘ Cmd+Fn+↓ ⌥ Option+Page Down, ⌘ Cmd+Page Down Put the cursor to the very beginning of the page which follows the currently edited one. Scroll down Page Down Fn+↓ Page Down Scroll the document approximately one visible page down. Scroll up Page Up Fn+↑ Page Up Scroll the document approximately one visible page up. Next page Alt+Page Down Go to the next page in the currently edited document. Previous page Alt+Page Up Go to the previous page in the currently edited document. Zoom In Ctrl+Num+, Ctrl++ (on the main keyboard) ^ Ctrl++, ⌘ Cmd++ Zoom in the currently edited document. Zoom Out Ctrl+- (on the main keyboard) ^ Ctrl+-, ⌘ Cmd+- Zoom out the currently edited document. Move one character to the left/right or one line up/down ← → ↑ ↓ ← → ↑ ↓ Move the cursor one character to the left/right or one line up/down. Move to the beginning of a word or one word to the left Ctrl+← ⌥ Option+← Move the cursor to the beginning of a word or one word to the left. Move one word to the right Ctrl+→ ⌥ Option+→ Move the cursor one word to the right. Navigate between controls in modal dialogues ↹ Tab/⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ↹ Tab/⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Navigate between controls to give focus to the next or previous control in modal dialogues. Move to lower header/footer Page Down Fn+↓ Page Down Move to the lower header/footer (if the cursor is in the header/footer). Move to upper header/footer Page Up Fn+↑ Page Up Move to the upper header/footer (if the cursor is in the header/footer). Move to lower header Alt+Page Down ⌥ Option+Fn+↓ ⌥ Option+Page Down Move to the lower header (if the cursor is in the header/footer). Move to upper header Alt+Page Up ⌥ Option+Fn+↑ ⌥ Option+Page Up Move to the upper header (if the cursor is in the header/footer). Writing End paragraph ↵ Enter ↵ Return End the current paragraph and start a new one. Add line break ⇧ Shift+↵ Enter ⇧ Shift+↵ Return Add a line break without starting a new paragraph. Add new placeholder to equation argument Enter Return Add a new placeholder to the equation argument. Change the alignment level of the operator to the left ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Change the alignment level of the operator to the left (for the second line of the equation with a forced break). Change the alignment level of the operator to the right ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Change the alignment level of the operator to the right (for the second line of the equation with a forced break). Delete character on the left ← Backspace Delete Delete one character to the left of the cursor. Delete character on the right Delete Fn+Delete Delete one character to the right of the cursor. Delete word/selection/graphical object to the left of cursor Ctrl+← Backspace ⌥ Option+Delete Delete one word/selection/graphical object to the left of the cursor. Delete word/selection/graphical object to the right of cursor Ctrl+Delete Fn+⌥ Option+Delete Delete one word/selection/graphical object to the right of the cursor. Create nonbreaking space Ctrl+⇧ Shift+␣ Spacebar ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Fn+␣ Spacebar, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Fn+␣ Spacebar Create a space between characters which cannot be used to start a new line. Create nonbreaking hyphen Ctrl+⇧ Shift+- ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+-, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+- Create a hyphen between characters which cannot be used to start a new line. Undo and Redo Undo Ctrl+Z ^ Ctrl+Z, ⌘ Cmd+Z Reverse the latest performed action. Redo Ctrl+Y ^ Ctrl+Y, ⌘ Cmd+Y Repeat the latest undone action. Cut, Copy, and Paste Cut Ctrl+X, ⇧ Shift+Delete ⌘ Cmd+X Delete the selected text fragment and send it to the computer clipboard memory. The copied text can be later inserted to another place in the same document, into another document, or into some other program. Copy Ctrl+C, Ctrl+Insert ⌘ Cmd+C Send the selected text fragment to the computer clipboard memory. The copied text can be later inserted to another place in the same document, into another document, or into some other program. Paste Ctrl+V, ⇧ Shift+Insert ⌘ Cmd+V Insert the previously copied text fragment from the computer clipboard memory to the current cursor position. The text can be previously copied from the same document, from another document, or from some other program. Paste text without style formatting Ctrl+⇧ Shift+V ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+V Insert the previously copied text fragment from the computer clipboard memory to the current cursor position without preserving its original formatting. The text can be previously copied from the same document, from another document, or from some other program. Copy style Alt+Ctrl+C ⌘ Cmd+⌥ Option+C, ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+C Copy the formatting from the selected fragment of the currently edited text. The copied formatting can be later applied to another text fragment in the same document. Apply style Alt+Ctrl+V ⌘ Cmd+⌥ Option+V, ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+V Apply the previously copied formatting to the text in the currently edited document. Paste Special options 1 Keep source formatting Ctrl then K ^ Ctrl then K Keep the source formatting of the copied text. Keep text only Ctrl then T ^ Ctrl then T Paste the text without its original formatting. Overwrite cells Ctrl then O ^ Ctrl then O Replace the contents of the existing table with the copied data. Nest table Ctrl then N ^ Ctrl then N Paste the copied table as a nested table into the selected cell of the existing table. Working with Hyperlinks Insert hyperlink Ctrl+K ⌘ Cmd+K, ^ Ctrl+K Insert a hyperlink which can be used to go to a web address. Visit hyperlink Enter Return Visit a hyperlink (with the cursor in the hyperlink). Text Selection Select all Ctrl+A ⌘ Cmd+A, ^ Ctrl+A Select all the document text with tables and images. Select from cursor to beginning of line ⇧ Shift+Home ⇧ Shift+Fn+← ⇧ Shift+Home Select a text fragment from the cursor to the beginning of the current line. Select from cursor to end of line ⇧ Shift+End ⇧ Shift+Fn+→ ⇧ Shift+End Select a text fragment from the cursor to the end of the current line. Select from cursor to beginning of document Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Home ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Fn+←, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Fn+← ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Home, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Home Select a text fragment from the cursor to the beginning of the document. Select from cursor to end of document Ctrl+⇧ Shift+End ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Fn+→, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Fn+→ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+End, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+End Select a text fragment from the cursor to the end of the document. Select one character to the right ⇧ Shift+→ ⇧ Shift+→ Select one character to the right of the cursor position. Select one character to the left ⇧ Shift+← ⇧ Shift+← Select one character to the left of the cursor position. Select to the end of a word Ctrl+⇧ Shift+→ ⇧ Shift+⌥ Option+→ Select a text fragment from the cursor to the end of a word. Select to the beginning of a word Ctrl+⇧ Shift+← ⇧ Shift+⌥ Option+← Select a text fragment from the cursor to the beginning of a word. Select one line up ⇧ Shift+↑ ⇧ Shift+↑ Move the cursor one line up, selecting all symbols between the previous and current cursor position. Select one line down ⇧ Shift+↓ ⇧ Shift+↓ Move the cursor one line down, selecting all symbols between the previous and current cursor position. Select the page up to the upper part of the screen ⇧ Shift+Page Up ⇧ Shift+Fn+↑ ⇧ Shift+Page Up Select the page part from the cursor position to the upper part of the screen. Select the page down to the lower part of the screen ⇧ Shift+Page Down ⇧ Shift+Fn+↓ ⇧ Shift+Page Down Select the page part from the cursor position to the lower part of the screen. Select to the beginning of the previous page Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Page Up ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Fn+↑, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Fn+↑ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Page Up, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Page Up Select a text fragment from the cursor to the beginning of the previous page. Select to the beginning of the next page Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Page Down ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Fn+↓, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Fn+↓ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Page Down, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Page Down Select a text fragment from the cursor to the beginning of the next page. Text Styling Bold Ctrl+B ^ Ctrl+B, ⌘ Cmd+B Make the font of the selected text fragment darker and heavier than normal. Italic Ctrl+I ^ Ctrl+I, ⌘ Cmd+I Make the font of the selected text fragment italicized and slightly slanted. Underline Ctrl+U ^ Ctrl+U, ⌘ Cmd+U Make the selected text fragment underlined with a line going below the letters. Strikeout Ctrl+5 ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+x Make the selected text fragment struck out with a line going through the letters. Subscript Ctrl+. ^ Ctrl+., ⌘ Cmd+. Make the selected text fragment smaller and place it to the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas. Superscript Ctrl+, ^ Ctrl+,, ⌘ Cmd+, Make the selected text fragment smaller and place it to the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions. Heading 1 style Alt+1 ⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+1, ⌥ Option+⌘ Cmd+1 Apply the style of the heading 1 to the selected text fragment. Heading 2 style Alt+2 ⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+2, ⌥ Option+⌘ Cmd+2 Apply the style of the heading 2 to the selected text fragment. Heading 3 style Alt+3 ⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+3, ⌥ Option+⌘ Cmd+3 Apply the style of the heading 3 to the selected text fragment. Bulleted list Ctrl+⇧ Shift+L ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+L, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+L Create an unordered bulleted list from the selected text fragment or start a new one. Clear formatting Ctrl+␣ Spacebar ^ Ctrl+Fn+␣ Spacebar, ⌘ Cmd+Fn+␣ Spacebar Clear formatting of the selected text fragment. Increase font Ctrl+] ⌘ Cmd+], ^ Ctrl+] Increase the size of the font for the selected text fragment 1 point. Decrease font Ctrl+[ ⌘ Cmd+[, ^ Ctrl+[ Decrease the size of the font for the selected text fragment 1 point. Align center Ctrl+E ^ Ctrl+E, ⌘ Cmd+E Switch a paragraph between centered and left-aligned. Align justified Ctrl+J ^ Ctrl+J, ⌘ Cmd+J Switch a paragraph between justified and left-aligned. Align right Ctrl+R ^ Ctrl+R, ⌘ Cmd+R Switch a paragraph between right-aligned and left-aligned. Align left Ctrl+L ^ Ctrl+L, ⌘ Cmd+L Align a paragraph left. Insert page break Ctrl+↵ Enter ^ Ctrl+↵ Return, ⌘ Cmd+↵ Return Insert a page break at the current cursor position. Increase indent Ctrl+M ^ Ctrl+M, ⌘ Cmd+M Indent a paragraph from the left incrementally. Decrease indent Ctrl+⇧ Shift+M ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+M, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+M Remove a paragraph indent from the left incrementally. Add page number Ctrl+⇧ Shift+P ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+P, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+P Add the current page number at the current cursor position. Nonprinting characters Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Num8, Ctrl+⇧ Shift+8 ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+8, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+8 Show or hide the display of nonprinting characters. Increase list/indent level ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Increase the list/indent level (with the cursor at the beginning of a paragraph). Decrease list/indent level ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Decrease the list/indent level (with the cursor at the beginning of a paragraph). Add tab character to paragraph ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Add the tab character to a paragraph (if the cursor is not at the beginning of a paragraph). Increase indent for selected paragraphs ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Increase the indent for the selected paragraphs. Decrease indent for selected paragraphs ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Decrease the indent for the selected paragraphs. Modifying Objects Working with shapes ↵ Enter Return When the shape is selected, if it does not contain content, create content and move the cursor to the beginning of the line. If the content is empty, move the cursor to it, otherwise select the entire content. Working with charts ↵ Enter When the chart title is selected, if the title is empty, move the cursor to the beginning of the line, otherwise select the text. Create a copy when dragging Ctrl ^ Ctrl Select an object and hold down the specified key when dragging the object to create the copy of the object in the location where it was moved. Constrain movement ⇧ Shift + drag ⇧ Shift + drag Constrain the movement of the selected object horizontally or vertically. Set 15-degree rotation ⇧ Shift + drag (when rotating) ⇧ Shift + drag (when rotating) Constrain the rotation angle to 15-degree increments. Maintain proportions ⇧ Shift + drag (when resizing) ⇧ Shift + drag (when resizing) Maintain the proportions of the selected object when resizing. Change angle of line/arrow when drawing ⇧ Shift + drag (when drawing lines/arrows) ⇧ Shift + drag (when drawing lines/arrows) Hold down the Shift key while drawing the line/arrow and rotate the spout of the arrow/end of the line to change the angle of the line/arrow when drawing it. The line/arrow will be rotated exactly 45 degrees. Movement by one-pixel increments Ctrl+← → ↑ ↓ ⌘ Cmd+← → ↑ ↓ Hold down the specified key and use the keybord arrows to move the selected object to the left, right, up, or down by one pixel at a time. Move shape by a big step ← → ↑ ↓ ← → ↑ ↓ Use the keybord arrows to move the selected object by a big step to the left, right, up, or down. Move focus to the next object ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Move focus to the next object after the currently selected one. Move focus to the previous object ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Move focus to the previous object before the currently selected one. Working with Endnotes/Footnotes Insert endnote Ctrl+Alt+D ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+D Insert an endnote. Insert footnote Ctrl+Alt+F Insert a footnote. Working with Tables Move to the next cell in a row ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Go to the next cell in a table row. Move to the previous cell in a row ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Go to the previous cell in a table row. Move to the next row ↓ ↓ Go to the next row in a table. Move to the previous row ↑ ↑ Go to the previous row in a table. Start new paragraph ↵ Enter ↵ Return Start a new paragraph within a cell. Add new row ↹ Tab in the lower right table cell. ↹ Tab in the lower right table cell. Add a new row at the bottom of the table. Insert table break Ctrl+⇧ Shift+↵ Enter ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+↵ Return, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+↵ Return Insert a table break within the table. Working with Forms Move to the next form ↹ Tab Move to the next form. Move to the previous form ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Move to the previous form. Choose the next combo box option in the form ↓ ↓ Choose the next combo box option in the form. Choose the previous combo box option in the form ↑ ↑ Choose the previous combo box option in the form. Add line break in the multiline form Enter Add a line break in the multiline form. Inserting special characters Insert equation Alt+= ⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+=,⌥ Option+⌘ Cmd+= Insert an equation at the current cursor position. Insert an em dash Alt+Ctrl+Num- ⌥ Option+⇧ Shift+- Insert an em dash ‘—’ within the current document and to the right of the cursor. Insert an en dash Ctrl+Num- ⌥ Option+- Insert an en dash ‘-’ within the current document and to the right of the cursor. Insert a copyright symbol Ctrl+Alt+G ⌘ Cmd+⌥ Option+G, ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+G Insert a copyright symbol ‘©’ within the current document and to the right of the cursor. Insert the Euro sign Ctrl+Alt+E ⌘ Cmd+⌥ Option+E, ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+E Insert the Euro sign (€) at the current cursor position. Insert the registered trademark sign Ctrl+Alt+R ⌘ Cmd+⌥ Option+R, ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+R Insert the registered trademark sign (®) at the current cursor position. Insert the trademark sign Ctrl+Alt+T ⌘ Cmd+⌥ Option+T, ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+T Insert the trademark sign (™) at the current cursor position. Insert ellipsis Ctrl+Alt+. ⌥ Option+; Insert the ellipsis sign (...) at the current cursor position. Replace selected Unicode code with symbol Alt+X ⌥ Option+⌘ Cmd+X, ⌥ Option+^ Ctrl+X Replace the selected Unicode code with a symbol. Work with keyboard supporting the ability to insert Unicode symbols ⌥ Option+Q, ⌥ Option+F, ⇧ Shift+⌥ Option+7, and others When using the ⌥ Option+keyboard symbol shortcuts, for the keyboards supporting the ability to insert Unicode symbols, the keyboard symbols are added. The examples are listed below. With the English ABC layout, the ⌥ Option+Q shortcut inserts the \"œ\" symbol, the ⌥ Option+F shortcut inserts the “ƒ” function symbol. With the US International w/o deadkeys layout, the ⌥ Option+Q shortcut inserts the “ä” symbol. With the Swiss-german layout, the ⇧ Shift+⌥ Option+7 shortcut inserts the \"\\” symbol. Paste the copied data using Ctrl+V on Windows or Cmd+V on macOS. After pasting the copied data, use the Ctrl key to open the Paste Special menu, then press the letter key which corresponds to the necessary option." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm", @@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "HelpfulHints/Password.htm", "title": "Protecting documents with a password", - "body": "You can protect your documents with a password that is required to enter the editing mode by your co-authors. The password can be changed or removed later on. The password cannot be restored if you lose or forget it. Please keep it in a safe place. You can also protect your documents by restricting access rights. Setting a password go to the File tab at the top toolbar and choose the Protect option. Click the Add password button to open the Set password window, or go to the Protection tab and choose the Encrypt option, set a password in the Password field and repeat it in the Repeat password field below. Click to show or hide password characters when entered, Click OK when ready. To open the document with the full access rights, the user has to enter the set password. Changing a password go to the File tab at the top toolbar and choose the Protect option. Click the Change password button to open the Set password window, or go to the Protection tab and choose the Encrypt option, set a new password in the Password field and repeat it in the Repeat password field below. Click to show or hide password characters when entered. click OK. Deleting a password go to the File tab at the top toolbar, choose the Protect option, click the Delete password button. Protecting a document go to the Protection tab, click the Protect Document button, set the password if necessary, choose the required access rights for the document, provided the password has not been entered by the user: No changes (Read only) - the user can only view the document. Filling forms - the user can only fill a form. Tracked changes - the user can only view the document changes history and review the document itself. Comments - the user can only leave and answer comments. click Protect when ready. To remove protection from the document, provided that the password has been set, go to the Protection tab, click the Protect Document button, enter the set password in the Unprotect Document window." + "body": "You can protect your documents with a password that is required to enter the editing mode by your co-authors. The password can be changed or removed later on. The password cannot be restored if you lose or forget it. Please keep it in a safe place. You can also protect your documents by restricting access rights. Setting a password go to the File tab at the top toolbar and choose the Protect option. Click the Add password button to open the Set password window, or go to the Protection tab and choose the Encrypt option, set a password in the Password field and repeat it in the Repeat password field below. Click to show or hide password characters when entered, Click OK when ready. To open the document with the full access rights, the user has to enter the set password. Changing a password go to the File tab at the top toolbar and choose the Protect option. Click the Change password button to open the Set password window, or go to the Protection tab and choose the Encrypt option, set a new password in the Password field and repeat it in the Repeat password field below. Click to show or hide password characters when entered. click OK. Deleting a password go to the File tab at the top toolbar, choose the Protect option, click the Delete password button. Protecting a document go to the Protection tab, click the Protect Document button, set the password if necessary, choose the required access rights for the document, provided the password has not been entered by the user: No changes (Read only) - the user can only view the document. Filling forms - the user can only fill a form. Tracked changes - the user can only view the document changes history and review the document itself. Comments - the user can only leave and answer comments. click Protect when ready. To remove protection from the document, provided that the password has been set, go to the Protection tab, click the Protect Document button, enter the set password in the Unprotect Document window. Adding a signature This feature is available only in the Desktop Editors. To add a signature, Go to the Protection tab. Click the Signature icon and select the required type: Add digital signature - type in the purpose for signing this document and select the Certificate by clicking the corresponding button in the opened pop-up window. When ready, click OK. Add signature line - fill in the Suggested signer, Suggested signer's title, and Suggested signer's e-mail fields, as well as provide the instructions for the signer. Activate the Show sign date in signature line checkbox if necessary. When ready, click OK." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/Review.htm", @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "HelpfulHints/Search.htm", "title": "Search and Replace Function", - "body": "To search for the required characters, words or phrases used in the currently edited document, click the icon situated on the left sidebar of the Document Editor, the icon situated in the upper right corner, or use the Ctrl+F (Command+F for macOS) key combination to open the small Find panel or the Ctrl+H key combination to open the full Find panel. A small Find panel will open in the upper right corner of the working area. The panel includes the text field for typing in a search query, the number of search results, and controls for moving to the previous or the next result, and closing the bar. To access the advanced settings, click the icon or use the Ctrl+H key combination. The Find and replace panel will open: Type in your inquiry into the corresponding Find data entry field. If you need to replace one or more occurrences of the found characters, type in the replacement text into the corresponding Replace with data entry field. You can choose to replace a single currently highlighted occurrence or replace all occurrences by clicking the corresponding Replace and Replace All buttons. To navigate between the found occurrences, click one of the arrow buttons. The button shows the next occurrence, while the button shows the previous one. Specify search parameters by checking the necessary options below the entry fields: Case sensitive - is used to find only the occurrences typed in the same case as your inquiry (e.g. if your inquiry is 'Editor' and this option is selected, such words as 'editor' or 'EDITOR' etc. will not be found). Whole words only - is used to highlight only whole words. All occurrences will be highlighted in the file and shown as a list in the Find panel to the left. Use the list to skip to the required occurrence, or use the navigation and buttons. The Document Editor supports search for special characters. To find a special character, enter it into the search box. The list of special characters that can be used in searches Special character Description ^l Line break ^t Tab stop ^? Any symbol ^# Any digit ^$ Any letter ^n Column break ^e Endnote ^f Footnote ^g Graphic element ^m Page break ^~ Non-breaking hyphen ^s Non-breaking space ^^ Escaping the caret itself ^w Any space ^+ Em dash ^= En dash ^y Any dash Special characters that may be used for replacement too: Special character Description ^l Line break ^t Tab stop ^n Column break ^m Page break ^~ Non-breaking hyphen ^s Non-breaking space ^+ Em dash ^= En dash" + "body": "To search for the required characters, words or phrases used in the currently edited document, click the icon situated on the left sidebar of the Document Editor, the icon situated in the upper right corner, or use the Ctrl+F (Command+F for macOS) key combination to open the small Find panel or the Ctrl+H key combination to open the full Find panel. A small Find panel will open in the upper right corner of the working area. The panel includes the text field for typing in a search query, the number of search results, and controls for moving to the previous or the next result, and closing the bar. To access the advanced settings, click the icon or use the Ctrl+H key combination. The Find and replace panel will open: Type in your inquiry into the corresponding Find data entry field. If you need to replace one or more occurrences of the found characters, type in the replacement text into the corresponding Replace with data entry field. You can choose to replace a single currently highlighted occurrence or replace all occurrences by clicking the corresponding Replace and Replace All buttons. The Replace button can also be found on the Home tab. To navigate between the found occurrences, click one of the arrow buttons. The button shows the next occurrence, while the button shows the previous one. Specify search parameters by checking the necessary options below the entry fields: Case sensitive - is used to find only the occurrences typed in the same case as your inquiry (e.g. if your inquiry is 'Editor' and this option is selected, such words as 'editor' or 'EDITOR' etc. will not be found). Whole words only - is used to highlight only whole words. All occurrences will be highlighted in the file and shown as a list in the Find panel to the left. Use the list to skip to the required occurrence, or use the navigation and buttons. The Document Editor supports search for special characters. To find a special character, enter it into the search box. The list of special characters that can be used in searches Special character Description ^l Line break ^t Tab stop ^? Any symbol ^# Any digit ^$ Any letter ^n Column break ^e Endnote ^f Footnote ^g Graphic element ^m Page break ^~ Non-breaking hyphen ^s Non-breaking space ^^ Escaping the caret itself ^w Any space ^+ Em dash ^= En dash ^y Any dash Special characters that may be used for replacement too: Special character Description ^l Line break ^t Tab stop ^n Column break ^m Page break ^~ Non-breaking hyphen ^s Non-breaking space ^+ Em dash ^= En dash" }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/SpellChecking.htm", @@ -63,12 +63,12 @@ var indexes = { "id": "HelpfulHints/SupportedFormats.htm", "title": "Supported Formats of Electronic Documents", - "body": "Electronic documents are the most frequently used computer files. Due to the highly developed modern computer network, it's more convenient to distribute electronic documents than printed ones. Nowadays, a lot of devices are used for document presentation, so there are plenty of proprietary and open file formats. The Document Editor handles the most popular of them. While uploading or opening the file for editing, it will be converted to the Office Open XML (DOCX) format. It's done to speed up the file processing and increase the interoperability. The following table contains the formats which can be opened for viewing and/or editing. Formats Description View natively View after conversion to OOXML Edit natively Edit after conversion to OOXML DjVu File format designed primarily to store scanned documents, especially those containing a combination of text, line drawings, and photographs + DOC Filename extension for word processing documents created with Microsoft Word + + DOCM Macro-Enabled Microsoft Word Document Filename extension for Microsoft Word 2007 or higher generated documents with the ability to run macros + + DOCX Office Open XML Zipped, XML-based file format developed by Microsoft for representing spreadsheets, charts, presentations, and word processing documents + + DOCXF A format to create, edit and collaborate on a Form Template. + + DOTX Word Open XML Document Template Zipped, XML-based file format developed by Microsoft for text document templates. A DOTX template contains formatting settings, styles etc. and can be used to create multiple documents with the same formatting + + EPUB Electronic Publication Free and open e-book standard created by the International Digital Publishing Forum + + FODT A text document saved in the OpenDocument format, but stored as a flat XML file + + FB2 An ebook extension that lets you read books on your computer or mobile devices + + HTML HyperText Markup Language The main markup language for web pages + + MHTML MIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions) HTML A web archive format that combines all the contents of a webpage. + + ODT Word processing file format of OpenDocument, an open standard for electronic documents + + OFORM An old format to fill out a Form. You will be prompted to save it to PDF to be able to fill it out. + OTT OpenDocument Document Template OpenDocument file format for text document templates. An OTT template contains formatting settings, styles etc. and can be used to create multiple documents with the same formatting + + PDF Portable Document Format File format used to represent documents regardless of the used software, hardware, and operating systems + PDF/A Portable Document Format / A An ISO-standardized version of the Portable Document Format (PDF) specialized for use in the archiving and long-term preservation of electronic documents. + RTF Rich Text Format Document file format developed by Microsoft for cross-platform document interchange + + STW StarOffice Document Template A file format used for saving word processing documents in OpenOffice.org Writer. An STW file can be edited using any other software that supports the OpenDocument Format (ODF) standard. STW files contain text, images, and other formatting information. + + SXW StarOffice/OpenOffice Writer Document A text document format included in the StarOffice suite that is based on the OpenDocument XML format and is compatible with Apache OpenOffice (formerly OpenOffice.org) Writer, the successor to StarOffice Writer. + + TXT Filename extension for text files usually containing very little formatting + + WPS Microsoft Works Word Processor Text Document A text document created by Microsoft Works Word Processor, the word processing program that was replaced by Microsoft Word. WPS files are similar to Word documents, but they have fewer formatting options. + + WPT WordPerfect Text Document A text file with .wpt extension is saved in a binary format and can contain text, charts, images, tables and other textual data. + + XML Extensible Markup Language (XML). A simple and flexible markup language that derived from SGML (ISO 8879) and is designed to store and transport data. + + XPS Open XML Paper Specification Open royalty-free fixed-layout document format developed by Microsoft + The following table contains the formats in which you can download a document from the File -> Download as menu. Input format Can be downloaded as DjVu DjVu, PDF DOC DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT DOCM DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT DOCX DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT DOCXF DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT DOTX DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT EPUB DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT FB2 DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT HTML DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT MHTML DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, PDF, PDFA, PNG, RTF, TXT ODT DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT OTT DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT PDF DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT PDF/A DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, PDF, PNG, RTF, TXT RTF DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT STW DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, PDF, PDFA, PNG, RTF, TXT SXW DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, PDF, PDFA, PNG, RTF, TXT TXT DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT WPS DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, PDF, PDFA, PNG, RTF, TXT WPT DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, PDF, PDFA, PNG, RTF, TXT XML DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT XPS DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT, XPS You can also refer to the conversion matrix on api.onlyoffice.com to see possibility of conversion your documents into the most known file formats." + "body": "Electronic documents are the most frequently used computer files. Due to the highly developed modern computer network, it's more convenient to distribute electronic documents than printed ones. Nowadays, a lot of devices are used for document presentation, so there are plenty of proprietary and open file formats. The Document Editor handles the most popular of them. While uploading or opening the file for editing, it will be converted to the Office Open XML (DOCX) format. It's done to speed up the file processing and increase the interoperability. The following table contains the formats which can be opened for viewing and/or editing. Formats Description View natively View after conversion to OOXML Edit natively Edit after conversion to OOXML DjVu File format designed primarily to store scanned documents, especially those containing a combination of text, line drawings, and photographs + DOC Filename extension for word processing documents created with Microsoft Word + + DOCM Macro-Enabled Microsoft Word Document Filename extension for Microsoft Word 2007 or higher generated documents with the ability to run macros + + DOCX Office Open XML Zipped, XML-based file format developed by Microsoft for representing spreadsheets, charts, presentations, and word processing documents + + DOTX Word Open XML Document Template Zipped, XML-based file format developed by Microsoft for text document templates. A DOTX template contains formatting settings, styles etc. and can be used to create multiple documents with the same formatting + + EPUB Electronic Publication Free and open e-book standard created by the International Digital Publishing Forum + + FODT A text document saved in the OpenDocument format, but stored as a flat XML file + + FB2 An ebook extension that lets you read books on your computer or mobile devices + + HTML HyperText Markup Language The main markup language for web pages + + MHTML MIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions) HTML A web archive format that combines all the contents of a webpage. + + ODT Word processing file format of OpenDocument, an open standard for electronic documents + + OFORM An old format to fill out a Form. You will be prompted to save it to PDF to be able to fill it out. + OTT OpenDocument Document Template OpenDocument file format for text document templates. An OTT template contains formatting settings, styles etc. and can be used to create multiple documents with the same formatting + + PDF Portable Document Format File format used to represent documents regardless of the used software, hardware, and operating systems + PDF/A Portable Document Format / A An ISO-standardized version of the Portable Document Format (PDF) specialized for use in the archiving and long-term preservation of electronic documents. + RTF Rich Text Format Document file format developed by Microsoft for cross-platform document interchange + + STW StarOffice Document Template A file format used for saving word processing documents in OpenOffice.org Writer. An STW file can be edited using any other software that supports the OpenDocument Format (ODF) standard. STW files contain text, images, and other formatting information. + + SXW StarOffice/OpenOffice Writer Document A text document format included in the StarOffice suite that is based on the OpenDocument XML format and is compatible with Apache OpenOffice (formerly OpenOffice.org) Writer, the successor to StarOffice Writer. + + TXT Filename extension for text files usually containing very little formatting + + WPS Microsoft Works Word Processor Text Document A text document created by Microsoft Works Word Processor, the word processing program that was replaced by Microsoft Word. WPS files are similar to Word documents, but they have fewer formatting options. + + WPT WordPerfect Text Document A text file with .wpt extension is saved in a binary format and can contain text, charts, images, tables and other textual data. + + XML Extensible Markup Language (XML). A simple and flexible markup language that derived from SGML (ISO 8879) and is designed to store and transport data. + + XPS Open XML Paper Specification Open royalty-free fixed-layout document format developed by Microsoft + The following table contains the formats in which you can download a document from the File -> Download as menu. Input format Can be downloaded as DjVu DjVu, PDF DOC DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT DOCM DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT DOCX DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT DOCXF DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT DOTX DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT EPUB DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT FB2 DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT HTML DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT MHTML DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, PDF, PDFA, PNG, RTF, TXT ODT DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT OTT DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT PDF DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT PDF/A DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, PDF, PNG, RTF, TXT RTF DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT STW DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, PDF, PDFA, PNG, RTF, TXT SXW DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, PDF, PDFA, PNG, RTF, TXT TXT DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT WPS DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, PDF, PDFA, PNG, RTF, TXT WPT DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, PDF, PDFA, PNG, RTF, TXT XML DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT XPS DOCX, DOCXF, DOTX, EPUB, FB2, HTML, JPG, ODT, OTT, PDF, PDF/A, PNG, RTF, TXT, XPS You can also refer to the conversion matrix on api.onlyoffice.com to see possibility of conversion your documents into the most known file formats." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/VersionHistory.htm", "title": "Version history", - "body": "The Document Editor allows you to maintain a constant team-wide approach to work flow: share files and folders, collaborate on documents in real time, communicate right in the editor, comment certain parts of your documents that require additional third-party input, review documents and add your changes without actually editing the file, compare and merge documents to facilitate processing and editing. In Document Editor, you can view the version history of the document you collaborate on. Viewing version history: To view all the changes made to the document, go to the File tab, select the Version History option at the left sidebar or go to the Collaboration tab, open the history of versions using the  Version History icon at the top toolbar. You'll see the list of the document versions and revisions, with the indication of each version/revision author and creation date and time. For document versions, the version number is also specified (e.g., ver. 2). Viewing versions: To know exactly which changes have been made in each separate version/revision, you can view the one you need by clicking it on the left sidebar. The changes made by the version/revision author are marked with the color which is displayed next to the author's name on the left sidebar. To return to the current version of the document, use the Close History option on the top of the version list. Restoring versions: If you need to roll back to one of the previous versions of the document, click the Restore link below the selected version/revision. To learn more about managing versions and intermediate revisions, as well as restoring previous versions, please read the following article." + "body": "The Document Editor allows you to maintain a constant team-wide approach to work flow: share files and folders, collaborate on documents in real time, communicate right in the editor, comment certain parts of your documents that require additional third-party input, review documents and add your changes without actually editing the file, compare and merge documents to facilitate processing and editing. In Document Editor, you can view the version history of the document you collaborate on. Viewing version history: To view all the changes made to the document, go to the File tab, select the Version History option at the left sidebar or go to the Collaboration tab, open the history of versions using the  Version History icon at the top toolbar. You'll see the list of the document versions and revisions, with the indication of each version/revision author and creation date and time. For document versions, the version number is also specified (e.g., ver. 2). Viewing versions: To know exactly which changes have been made in each separate version/revision, you can view the one you need by clicking it on the left sidebar. The changes made by the version/revision author are highlighted with the same color as their avatar in the viewing version history window. The deleted text can be highlighted. To do that, click the More button in the top right corner of the version history panel and choose the Highlight deleted option from the menu. To return to the current version of the document, use the Close History option on the top of the version list. Restoring versions: If you need to roll back to one of the previous versions of the document, click the Restore link below the selected version/revision. To learn more about managing versions and intermediate revisions, as well as restoring previous versions, please read the following article." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/Viewer.htm", @@ -83,42 +83,42 @@ var indexes = { "id": "ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm", "title": "File tab", - "body": "The File tab of the Document Editor allows performing some basic operations. The corresponding window of the Online Document Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Document Editor: With this tab, you can use the following options: in the online version: save the current file (in case the Autosave option is disabled), save it in the required format on the hard disk drive of your computer with the Download as option, save a copy of the file in the selected format to the portal documents with the Save copy as option, print or rename the current file, in the desktop version: save the current file without changing its format and location using the Save option, save it changing its name, location or format using the Save as option or print the current file, protect the file using a password, change or remove the password, protect the file using a digital signature (available in the desktop version only), create a new document or open a recently edited one (available in the online version only), view general information about the document or change some file properties, manage access rights (available in the online version only), track version history (available in the online version only), access the Advanced Settings of the editor, in the desktop version, open the folder, where the file is stored, in the File explorer window. In the online version, open the folder of the Documents module, where the file is stored, in a new browser tab." + "body": "The File tab of the Document Editor allows performing some basic operations. The corresponding window of the Online Document Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Document Editor: With this tab, you can use the following options: create a new document or open a recently edited one (available in the online version only), in the online version: save the current file (in case the Autosave option is disabled), save it in the required format on the hard disk drive of your computer with the Download as option, save a copy of the file in the selected format to the portal documents with the Save copy as option, print or rename the current file, in the desktop version: save the current file without changing its format and location using the Save option, save it changing its name, location or format using the Save as option or print the current file, protect the file using a password, change or remove the password, protect the file using a digital signature (available in the desktop version only), view general information about the document or change some file properties, track version history (available in the online version only), Go to Documents - in the desktop version, open the folder, where the file is stored, in the File explorer window, in the online version, open the folder of the Documents module, where the file is stored, in a new browser tab, access the Advanced Settings of the editor, Help - open the built-in helpcenter." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/FormsTab.htm", "title": "Forms tab", - "body": "Note: this tab is available with DOCXF files only. The Forms tab allows you to create fillable forms such as agreements, applications or surveys. Add, format and configure text and form fields to draft a fillable form no matter how complex you need it to be. The corresponding window of the Online Document Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Document Editor: Using this tab, you can: insert and edit text fields combo boxes drop-down lists checkboxes radio buttons images e-mail addresses phone numbers date and time zip codes credit card numbers complex fields clear all fields and highlight settings, navigate through form fields using Previous Field and Next Field buttons, view the resulting forms in your document, manage roles, save form as a fillable OFORM file." + "body": "The Forms tab allows you to create fillable forms such as agreements, applications or surveys. Add, format and configure text and form fields to draft a fillable form no matter how complex you need it to be. The corresponding window of the Online Document Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Document Editor: Using this tab, you can: insert and edit text fields combo boxes drop-down lists checkboxes radio buttons images signatures e-mail addresses phone numbers date and time zip codes credit card numbers complex fields clear all fields and highlight settings, navigate through form fields using Previous Field and Next Field buttons, view the resulting forms in your document, manage roles." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm", "title": "Home tab", - "body": "The Home tab appears by default when you open the Document Editor. It also allows formatting fonts and paragraphs. Some other options are also available here, such as Mail Merge and color schemes. The corresponding window of the Online Document Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Document Editor: Using this tab, you can: adjust the font type, its size and color, apply font decoration styles, select a background color for a paragraph, create bulleted and numbered lists, change paragraph indents, set paragraph line spacing, align your text in a paragraph, show/hide non-printing characters, copy/clear text formatting, change the color scheme, use Mail Merge (available in the online version only), manage styles." + "body": "The Home tab appears by default when you open the Document Editor. It also allows formatting fonts and paragraphs. The corresponding window of the Online Document Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Document Editor: Using this tab, you can: adjust the font type, its size and color, apply font decoration styles, select a background color for a paragraph, create bulleted and numbered lists, change paragraph indents, set paragraph line spacing, align your text in a paragraph, show/hide non-printing characters, copy/clear text formatting, manage styles." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm", "title": "Insert tab", - "body": "The Insert tab of the Document Editor allows adding some page formatting elements as well as visual objects and comments. The corresponding window of the Online Document Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Document Editor: Using this tab, you can: insert a blank page, insert page breaks, section breaks and column breaks, insert tables, images, charts, shapes, insert hyperlinks, comments, insert headers and footers, page numbers, date & time, insert text boxes and Text Art objects, equations, symbols, drop caps, content controls, insert SmartArt objects." + "body": "The Insert tab of the Document Editor allows adding some page formatting elements as well as visual objects and comments. The corresponding window of the Online Document Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Document Editor: Using this tab, you can: insert a blank page, insert page breaks, section breaks and column breaks, insert tables, images, charts, shapes, insert hyperlinks, comments, insert headers and footers, page numbers, date & time, insert text boxes and Text Art objects, equations, symbols, drop caps, text from file, content controls, insert SmartArt objects." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/LayoutTab.htm", "title": "Layout tab", - "body": "The Layout tab of the Document Editor allows changing the appearance of a document: setting up page parameters and defining the arrangement of visual elements. The corresponding window of the Online Document Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Document Editor: Using this tab, you can: adjust page margins, orientation and size, add columns, insert page breaks, section breaks and column breaks, insert line numbers, hyphenate your document, align and arrange objects (tables, pictures, charts, shapes), change the wrapping style and edit wrap boundary, add a watermark." + "body": "The Layout tab of the Document Editor allows changing the appearance of a document: setting up page parameters and defining the arrangement of visual elements. The corresponding window of the Online Document Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Document Editor: Using this tab, you can: adjust page margins, orientation and size, add columns, insert page breaks, section breaks and column breaks, insert line numbers, hyphenate your document, align and arrange objects (tables, pictures, charts, shapes), change the wrapping style and edit wrap boundary, add a watermark, change page color, change the color scheme." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm", "title": "Plugins tab", - "body": "The Plugins tab of the Document Editor allows accessing the advanced editing features using the available third-party components. This tab also makes it possible to use macros to simplify routine operations. The corresponding window of the Online Document Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Document Editor: The Plugin Manager button allows viewing and managing all the installed plugins, as well as adding new ones. The Background Plugins button allows viewing the list of plugins that work in the background. Here you can activate or disable them by activating/deactivating the corresponding switches, and adjust their settings by clicking the More button next to the required plugin. The Macros button allows you to create and run your own macros. To learn more about macros, please refer to our API Documentation. Currently, the following plugins are available by default: Send allows sending the document via email using the default desktop mail client (available in the desktop version only), Highlight code allows highlighting syntax of the code selecting the necessary language, style, background color, OCR allows recognizing text included into a picture and insert it into the document text, Photo Editor allows editing images: crop, flip, rotate them, draw lines and shapes, add icons and text, load a mask and apply filters such as Grayscale, Invert, Sepia, Blur, Sharpen, Emboss, etc., Speech allows converting the selected text into speech (available in the online version only), Thesaurus allows searching for synonyms and antonyms of a word and replace it with the selected one, Translator allows translating the selected text into other languages, This plugin doesn't work in Internet Explorer. YouTube allows embedding YouTube videos into your document, Mendeley allows managing research papers and generate bibliographies for scholarly articles (available in the online version only), Zotero allows managing bibliographic data and related research materials (available in the online version only), EasyBib helps to find and insert related books, journal articles and websites (available in the online version only). The WordPress and EasyBib plugins can be used if you connect the corresponding services in your portal settings. You can use the following instructions for the server version or for the SaaS version. The WordPress and EasyBib plugins are not included in the free version of the editors. Several visual plugins can be added to your document. The added plugins will be displayed as corresponding icons on the left panel. To learn more about plugins, please refer to our API Documentation. All the currently existing open source plugin examples are available on GitHub." + "body": "The Plugins tab of the Document Editor allows accessing the advanced editing features using the available third-party components. The corresponding window of the Online Document Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Document Editor: The Plugin Manager button allows viewing and managing all the installed plugins, as well as adding new ones. The Background Plugins button allows viewing the list of plugins that work in the background. Here you can activate or disable them by activating/deactivating the corresponding switches, and adjust their settings by clicking the More button next to the required plugin. Currently, the following plugins are available by default: Send allows sending the document via email using the default desktop mail client (available in the desktop version only), Highlight code allows highlighting syntax of the code selecting the necessary language, style, background color, OCR allows recognizing text included into a picture and insert it into the document text, Photo Editor allows editing images: crop, flip, rotate them, draw lines and shapes, add icons and text, load a mask and apply filters such as Grayscale, Invert, Sepia, Blur, Sharpen, Emboss, etc., Speech allows converting the selected text into speech (available in the online version only), Thesaurus allows searching for synonyms and antonyms of a word and replace it with the selected one, Translator allows translating the selected text into other languages, This plugin doesn't work in Internet Explorer. YouTube allows embedding YouTube videos into your document, Mendeley allows managing research papers and generate bibliographies for scholarly articles (available in the online version only), Zotero allows managing bibliographic data and related research materials (available in the online version only), EasyBib helps to find and insert related books, journal articles and websites (available in the online version only). The WordPress and EasyBib plugins can be used if you connect the corresponding services in your portal settings. You can use the following instructions for the server version or for the SaaS version. The WordPress and EasyBib plugins are not included in the free version of the editors. Several visual plugins can be added to your document. The added plugins will be displayed as corresponding icons on the left panel. To learn more about plugins, please refer to our API Documentation. All the currently existing open source plugin examples are available on GitHub." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm", "title": "Introducing the user interface of the Document Editor", - "body": "The Document Editor uses a tabbed interface, where editing commands are grouped into tabs by functionality. Main window of the Online Document Editor: Main window of the Desktop Document Editor: The editor interface consists of the following main elements: The Editor header displays the ONLYOFFICE logo, tabs for all opened documents with their names and menu tabs. On the left side of the Editor header, the Save, Print file, Undo and Redo buttons are located. On the right side of the Editor header, along with the username the following icons are displayed: Open file location - in the desktop version, it allows opening the folder, where the file is stored, in the File explorer window. In the online version, it allows opening the folder of the Documents module, where the file is stored, in a new browser tab. Share (available in the online version only). It allows adjusting access rights for the documents stored in the cloud. Mark as favorite - click the star to add a file to favorites as to make it easy to find. The added file is just a shortcut, so the file itself remains stored in its original location. Deleting a file from favorites does not remove the file from its original location. Search - allows searching the document for a particular word or symbol, etc. The Top toolbar displays a set of editing commands depending on the selected menu tab. Currently, the following tabs are available: File, Home, Insert, Layout, References, Forms (available with DOCXF files only), Collaboration, Protection, Plugins. The Copy, Paste, Cut and Select All options are always available on the left side of the Top toolbar regardless of the selected tab. The Status bar located at the bottom of the editor window indicates the page number and word count, as well as displays some notifications (for example, \"All changes saved\", ‘Connection is lost’ when there is no connection and the editor is trying to reconnect, etc.). It also allows setting the text language, enabling spell checking, turning on the track changes mode and adjusting zoom. The Left sidebar contains the following icons: - allows using the Search and Replace tool, - allows opening the Comments panel, - allows going to the Headings panel and managing headings, - (available in the online version only) allows opening the Chat panel, - (available in the online version only) allows contacting our support team, - (available in the online version only) allows viewing the information about the program. Right sidebar allows adjusting additional parameters of different objects. When you select a particular object in the text, the corresponding icon is activated on the Right sidebar. Click this icon to expand the Right sidebar. The horizontal and vertical Rulers make it possible to align the text and other elements in the document, set up margins, tab stops and paragraph indents. Working area allows viewing document content, enter and edit data. Scroll bar on the right allows scrolling up and down multipage documents. For your convenience, you can hide some components and display them again when them when necessary. To learn more about adjusting view settings, please refer to this page. When there are many icons on the left and right panels, the ones below will be hidden, and they can be accessed via the More button." + "body": "The Document Editor uses a tabbed interface, where editing commands are grouped into tabs by functionality. Main window of the Online Document Editor: Main window of the Desktop Document Editor: The editor interface consists of the following main elements: The Editor header displays the ONLYOFFICE logo, tabs for all opened documents with their names and menu tabs. On the left side of the Editor header, the Save, Print file, Undo and Redo buttons are located. Click the dots icon to the right to customize which buttons shall be hidden if any. On the right side of the Editor header, along with the username the following icons are displayed: Editing, Reviewing, or Viewing - allows selecting the required document display mode and its corresponding editing rights and features. Open file location - in the desktop version, it allows opening the folder, where the file is stored, in the File explorer window. In the online version, it allows opening the folder of the Documents module, where the file is stored, in a new browser tab. Share (available in the online version only). It allows adjusting access rights for the documents stored in the cloud. Mark as favorite - click the star to add a file to favorites as to make it easy to find. The added file is just a shortcut, so the file itself remains stored in its original location. Deleting a file from favorites does not remove the file from its original location. Search - allows searching the document for a particular word or symbol, etc. The Top toolbar displays a set of editing commands depending on the selected menu tab. Currently, the following tabs are available: File, Home, Insert, Draw, Layout, References, Collaboration, Protection, Plugins. The Copy, Paste, Cut and Select All options are always available on the left side of the Top toolbar regardless of the selected tab. The Status bar located at the bottom of the editor window indicates the page number and word count, as well as displays some notifications (for example, \"All changes saved\", ‘Connection is lost’ when there is no connection and the editor is trying to reconnect, etc.). It also allows setting the text language, enabling spell checking, turning on the track changes mode and adjusting zoom. The Left sidebar contains the following icons: - allows using the Search and Replace tool, - allows opening the Comments panel, - allows going to the Headings panel and managing headings, - (available in the online version only) allows opening the Chat panel, - (available in the online version only) allows contacting our support team, - (available in the online version only) allows viewing the information about the program. Right sidebar allows adjusting additional parameters of different objects. When you select a particular object in the text, the corresponding icon is activated on the Right sidebar. Click this icon to expand the Right sidebar. The horizontal and vertical Rulers make it possible to align the text and other elements in the document, set up margins, tab stops and paragraph indents. Working area allows viewing document content, enter and edit data. Scroll bar on the right allows scrolling up and down multipage documents. For your convenience, you can hide some components and display them again when them when necessary. To learn more about adjusting view settings, please refer to this page. When there are many icons on the left and right panels, the ones below will be hidden, and they can be accessed via the More button." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/ProtectionTab.htm", "title": "Protection tab", - "body": "The Protection tab of the Document Editor allows protecting your documents with a password while setting restricted access rights. The corresponding window of the Online Document Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Document Editor: Using this tab, you can: set a password for your document, change passwords and delete them, set certain types of editing in the protected documents, remove document protection altogether." + "body": "The Protection tab of the Document Editor allows protecting your documents with a password while setting restricted access rights. The corresponding window of the Online Document Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Document Editor: Using this tab, you can: set a password for your document, change passwords and delete them, in the desktop editors: add signatures, set certain types of editing in the protected documents, remove document protection altogether." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/ReferencesTab.htm", @@ -128,12 +128,12 @@ var indexes = { "id": "ProgramInterface/ReviewTab.htm", "title": "Collaboration tab", - "body": "The Collaboration tab of the Document Editor allows collaborating on documents. In the online version, you can share the file, select the required co-editing mode, manage comments, track changes made by a reviewer, view all versions and revisions. In the commenting mode, you can add and remove comments, navigate between the tracked changes, use the built-in chat and view the version history. In the desktop version, you can manage comments and use the Track Changes feature . The corresponding window of the Online Document Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Document Editor: Using this tab, you can: specify the sharing settings (available in the online version only), switch between the Strict and Fast co-editing modes (available in the online version only), add or remove comments to the document, enable the Track Changes feature, choose the changes display mode, manage the suggested changes, load a document for comparison (available in the online version only), open the Chat panel (available in the online version only), track the version history (available in the online version only)." + "body": "The Collaboration tab of the Document Editor allows collaborating on documents. In the online version, you can share the file, select the required co-editing mode, manage comments, track changes made by a reviewer, view all versions and revisions. In the commenting mode, you can add and remove comments, navigate between the tracked changes, use the built-in chat and view the version history. In the desktop version, you can manage comments and use the Track Changes feature . The corresponding window of the Online Document Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Document Editor: Using this tab, you can: specify the sharing settings (available in the online version only), switch between the Strict and Fast co-editing modes (available in the online version only), add or remove comments to the document, enable the Track Changes feature, choose the changes display mode, manage the suggested changes, load a document for comparison (available in the online version only), open the Chat panel (available in the online version only), track the version history (available in the online version only), use Mail Merge (available in the online version only)." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/ViewTab.htm", "title": "View tab", - "body": "The View tab of the Document Editor allows you to manage how your document looks like while you are working on it. The corresponding window of the Online Document Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Document Editor: View options available on this tab: Headings allow displaying and navigating headings in your document. Zoom allows zooming in and out of your document. Fit to Page allows resizing the page so that the screen displays the whole page. Fit to Width allows resizing the page so that the page scales to fit the width of the screen. Interface Theme allows changing interface theme by choosing a Same as system, Light, Classic Light, Dark or Contrast Dark theme. Dark Document option becomes active when the Dark or Contrast Dark theme is enabled. Click it to make the working area dark too. The following options allow you to configure the elements to display or to hide. Check the elements to make them visible: Always Show Toolbar to make the top toolbar always visible. Status Bar to make the status bar always visible. Left Panel to make the left panel visible. Right Panel to make the right panel visible. Rulers to make rulers always visible." + "body": "The View tab of the Document Editor allows you to manage how your document looks like while you are working on it. The corresponding window of the Online Document Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Document Editor: View options available on this tab: Headings allow displaying and navigating headings in your document. Zoom allows zooming in and out of your document. Fit to Page allows resizing the page so that the screen displays the whole page. Fit to Width allows resizing the page so that the page scales to fit the width of the screen. Interface Theme allows changing interface theme by choosing a Same as system, Light, Classic Light, Dark, Contrast Dark, or Gray theme. Dark Document option becomes active when the Dark or Contrast Dark theme is enabled. Click it to make the working area dark too. The following options allow you to configure the elements to display or to hide. Check the elements to make them visible: Always Show Toolbar to make the top toolbar always visible. Status Bar to make the status bar always visible. Left Panel to make the left panel visible. Right Panel to make the right panel visible. Rulers to make rulers always visible. Macros - this option allows adding custom macros to your document." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/AddBorders.htm", @@ -183,7 +183,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/ChangeColorScheme.htm", "title": "Change color scheme", - "body": "Color schemes are applied to the whole document. In the Document Editor, you can quickly change the appearance of your document because they define the Theme Colors palette for different document elements (font, background, tables, autoshapes, charts). If you applied some Theme Colors to the document elements and then select a different Color Scheme, the applied colors in your document will change correspondingly. To change a color scheme, click the downward arrow next to the Change color scheme icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar and select the required color scheme from the list: New Office, Office, Grayscale, Apex, Aspect, Civic, Concourse, Equity, Flow, Foundry, Median, Metro, Module, Odulent, Oriel, Origin, Paper, Solstice, Technic, Trek, Urban, Verve. The selected color scheme will be highlighted in the list. Once you select the preferred color scheme, you can select other colors in the color palettes window that corresponds to the document element you want to apply the color to. For most document elements, the color palettes window can be accessed by clicking the colored box on the right sidebar when the required element is selected. For the font, this window can be opened using the downward arrow next to the Font color icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar. The following palettes are available: Theme Colors - the colors that correspond to the selected color scheme of the document. Standard Colors - a set of default colors. The selected color scheme does not affect them. You can also apply a custom color using two different options: Eyedropper - use this option to choose the required color by clicking it in the document. More colors - click this caption if the required color is missing among the available palettes. Select the necessary color range moving the vertical color slider and set a specific color dragging the color picker within the large square color field. Once you select a color with the color picker, the appropriate RGB and sRGB color values will be displayed in the fields on the right. You can also define a color on the base of the RGB color model by entering the corresponding numeric values into the R, G, B (red, green, blue) fields or enter the sRGB hexadecimal code into the field marked with the # sign. The selected color appears in the New preview box. If the object was previously filled with any custom color, this color is displayed in the Current box so you can compare the original and modified colors. When the color is defined, click the Add button: The custom color will be applied to the selected element and added to the Recent colors palette." + "body": "Color schemes are applied to the whole document. In the Document Editor, you can quickly change the appearance of your document because they define the Theme Colors palette for different document elements (font, background, tables, autoshapes, charts). If you applied some Theme Colors to the document elements and then select a different Color Scheme, the applied colors in your document will change correspondingly. To change a color scheme, click the downward arrow next to the Color Scheme icon on the Layout tab of the top toolbar and select the required color scheme from the list: Aspect, Blue Green, Blue II, Blue Warm, Blue, Grayscale, Green Yellow, Green, Marquee, Median, Office 2007-2010, Office 2013-2022, Office, Orange Red, Orange, Paper, Red Orange, Red Violet, Red, Slipstream, Violet II, Violet, Yellow Orange, Yellow, and New Office. The selected color scheme will be highlighted in the list. Once you select the preferred color scheme, you can select other colors in the color palettes window that corresponds to the document element you want to apply the color to. For most document elements, the color palettes window can be accessed by clicking the colored box on the right sidebar when the required element is selected. For the font, this window can be opened using the downward arrow next to the Font color icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar. The following palettes are available: Theme colors - the colors that correspond to the selected color scheme of the document. Standard colors - a set of default colors. The selected color scheme does not affect them. You can also apply a custom color using two different options: Eyedropper - use this option to choose the required color by clicking it in the document. More colors - click this caption if the required color is missing among the available palettes. Select the necessary color range moving the vertical color slider and set a specific color dragging the color picker within the large square color field. Once you select a color with the color picker, the appropriate RGB and sRGB color values will be displayed in the fields on the right. You can also define a color on the base of the RGB color model by entering the corresponding numeric values into the R, G, B (red, green, blue) fields or enter the sRGB hexadecimal code into the field marked with the # sign. The selected color appears in the New preview box. If the object was previously filled with any custom color, this color is displayed in the Current box so you can compare the original and modified colors. When the color is defined, click the Add button: The custom color will be applied to the selected element and added to the Recent colors palette." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/ChangeWrappingStyle.htm", @@ -193,12 +193,12 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/ChatGPT.htm", "title": "ChatGPT", - "body": "The ChatGPT plugin allows you to analyze, summarize and translate the selected text, to generate images, to find synonyms and to use the OpenAI chatbot to perform tasks that involve understanding or generating natural language or code. Installation To install the ChatGPT plugin, Go to the Plugins tab. Open the Plugin Manager. Find ChatGPT on the marketplace and click the Install button below. Right-click anywhere in the document and find ChatGPT in the context menu. Click Settings to proceed with the plugin configuration. Configuration Create your API key on the OpenAI API key page. Copy the generated API key into the corresponding field of the Settings window. How to use ONLYOFFICE assumes no responsibility for any ChatGPT completions that may contain errors or omissions, as well as for any harassing and inappropriate content. The information contained in the plugin completions is generated by ChatGPT and is provided on the \"as is\" basis without additional filtering from ONLYOFFICE. Once installed, ChatGPT will be added to the context menu, and all the ChatGPT features will be accessed with a right mouse click. Select a piece of text or a word to access the context menu and to choose one of the ChatGPT features: Text Analysis, Word Analysis, Translation, Image Generation, Thesaurus, Chat, and Custom Request. Text Analysis The Text analysis feature includes two options: Summarize and Keywords. The Summarize option generates and inserts a concise version of the selected text. The Keywords option detects the key points and extracts keywords from the selected text. The result appears below the text. Word Analysis The Word analysis feature offers two options: Explain text in comment and Explain text in hyperlink. The Explain text in comment option provides the definition of the selected word in the comment section. The Explain text in hyperlink option allows you to embed a link into the selected word. This link directs users to the website that gives a detailed explanation of the selected word or phrase. Translation into French or German The Translation feature allows you to translate the selected text into French or German. The translation replaces the original text. Image Generation The Generate image from text feature allows you to generate images based on the selected text. You can choose the appropriate size of the image to be generated from the ChatGPT context menu. Thesaurus of Synonyms The Thesaurus feature facilitates the generation of synonyms for the selected word. Right-click the word you want to find the synonyms for, and navigate to the Thesaurus option in the ChatGPT context menu. The list of synonyms will open. The Explain text in comment also becomes available when you right-click a word. The explanation for the word will be provided on the right-side Comments panel. Chat Integration of ChatGPT into the context menu allows you to invoke the Chat from anywhere in the document. Use chatbot to interact and carry on a conversation, ask questions, and receive responses to your requests. Navigate to the Chat option from the ChatGPT context menu, and start a conversation in the text box at the bottom of the ChatGPT window. Custom Request The Custom Request feature allows you to tokenize natural language or code. The tool converts the input text into a list of tokens, processes the request, converts the generated tokens back to the text, and returns the string in the document. To make a custom request, go to the ChatGPT context menu, and click Custom request. In the Open AI text box, enter the text you would like to tokenize. The tool shows the total number of tokens in the text. Click the Show advanced settings to configure the request settings: Model - the model which will generate the completion. Some models are suitable for natural language tasks, others specialize in code. To learn more about these models, please refer to the official ChatGPT website. Maximum length - the maximum number of tokens to generate in the completion. Temperature - this parameter controls randomness, e.g., lowering it results in less random completions. As the temperature approaches zero, the node will become deterministic and repetitive. Top P - an alternative to sampling with temperature, called nucleus sampling, where the model considers the results of the tokens with top_p probability mass. Stop sequences - up to four sequences where the API will stop generating further tokens. The returned text will not contain the stop sequence. Click the Submit button to process the text, or click the Clear button to delete the request and enter a new one." + "body": "The ChatGPT plugin allows you to analyze, summarize and translate the selected text, to generate images, to find synonyms and to use the OpenAI chatbot to perform tasks that involve understanding or generating natural language or code. Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager. Installation To install the ChatGPT plugin, Go to the Plugins tab. Open the Plugin Manager. Find ChatGPT on the marketplace and click the Install button below. Right-click anywhere in the document and find ChatGPT in the context menu. Click Settings to proceed with the plugin configuration. Configuration Create your API key on the OpenAI API key page. Copy the generated API key into the corresponding field of the Settings window. How to use ONLYOFFICE assumes no responsibility for any ChatGPT completions that may contain errors or omissions, as well as for any harassing and inappropriate content. The information contained in the plugin completions is generated by ChatGPT and is provided on the \"as is\" basis without additional filtering from ONLYOFFICE. Once installed, ChatGPT will be added to the context menu, and all the ChatGPT features will be accessed with a right mouse click. Select a piece of text or a word to access the context menu and to choose one of the ChatGPT features: Text Analysis, Word Analysis, Translation, Image Generation, Thesaurus, Chat, and Custom Request. Text Analysis The Text analysis feature includes two options: Summarize and Keywords. The Summarize option generates and inserts a concise version of the selected text. The Keywords option detects the key points and extracts keywords from the selected text. The result appears below the text. Word Analysis The Word analysis feature offers two options: Explain text in comment and Explain text in hyperlink. The Explain text in comment option provides the definition of the selected word in the comment section. The Explain text in hyperlink option allows you to embed a link into the selected word. This link directs users to the website that gives a detailed explanation of the selected word or phrase. Translation into French or German The Translation feature allows you to translate the selected text into French or German. The translation replaces the original text. Image Generation The Generate image from text feature allows you to generate images based on the selected text. You can choose the appropriate size of the image to be generated from the ChatGPT context menu. Thesaurus of Synonyms The Thesaurus feature facilitates the generation of synonyms for the selected word. Right-click the word you want to find the synonyms for, and navigate to the Thesaurus option in the ChatGPT context menu. The list of synonyms will open. The Explain text in comment also becomes available when you right-click a word. The explanation for the word will be provided on the right-side Comments panel. Chat Integration of ChatGPT into the context menu allows you to invoke the Chat from anywhere in the document. Use chatbot to interact and carry on a conversation, ask questions, and receive responses to your requests. Navigate to the Chat option from the ChatGPT context menu, and start a conversation in the text box at the bottom of the ChatGPT window. Custom Request The Custom Request feature allows you to tokenize natural language or code. The tool converts the input text into a list of tokens, processes the request, converts the generated tokens back to the text, and returns the string in the document. To make a custom request, go to the ChatGPT context menu, and click Custom request. In the Open AI text box, enter the text you would like to tokenize. The tool shows the total number of tokens in the text. Click the Show advanced settings to configure the request settings: Model - the model which will generate the completion. Some models are suitable for natural language tasks, others specialize in code. To learn more about these models, please refer to the official ChatGPT website. Maximum length - the maximum number of tokens to generate in the completion. Temperature - this parameter controls randomness, e.g., lowering it results in less random completions. As the temperature approaches zero, the node will become deterministic and repetitive. Top P - an alternative to sampling with temperature, called nucleus sampling, where the model considers the results of the tokens with top_p probability mass. Stop sequences - up to four sequences where the API will stop generating further tokens. The returned text will not contain the stop sequence. Click the Submit button to process the text, or click the Clear button to delete the request and enter a new one." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/CommunicationPlugins.htm", "title": "Communicate while editing", - "body": "In ONLYOFFICE Document Editor, you can always keep in touch with colleagues and use popular online messengers, such as Telegram and Rainbow. Telegram and Rainbow plugins are not installed by default. To find information on how to install them, please, refer to the corresponding article: Adding plugins to the ONLYOFFICE Desktop Editors Adding plugins to ONLYOFFICE Cloud, or Adding new plugins to server editors . Telegram To start chatting in the Telegram plugin, Switch to the Plugins tab and click Telegram, enter your phone number into the corresponding field, check the Keep me signed in checkbox if you want to save credentials for the current session, and click the Next button, enter the code you've received in your Telegram app, or log in using the QR code, open Telegram app on your phone, go to Settings > Devices > Scan QR, scan the image to Log in. Now you can use Telegram for instant messaging within ONLYOFFICE editors interface. Rainbow To start chatting in the Rainbow plugin, Switch to the Plugins tab and click Rainbow, register a new account by clicking the Sign up button, or log into an already created one. To do this, enter your email into the corresponding field and click Continue, then enter your account password, check the Keep my session alive checkbox if you want to save credentials for the current session, and click the Connect button. Now you're all set and can simultaneously chat in Rainbow and work within ONLYOFFICE editors interface." + "body": "In ONLYOFFICE Document Editor, you can always keep in touch with colleagues and use popular online messengers, such as Telegram and Rainbow. Telegram and Rainbow plugins are not installed by default. To find information on how to install them, please, refer to the corresponding article: Adding plugins to the ONLYOFFICE Desktop Editors Adding plugins to ONLYOFFICE Cloud, or Adding new plugins to server editors , or install the plugin using the Plugin Manager. Telegram To start chatting in the Telegram plugin, Switch to the Plugins tab and click Telegram, enter your phone number into the corresponding field, check the Keep me signed in checkbox if you want to save credentials for the current session, and click the Next button, enter the code you've received in your Telegram app, or log in using the QR code, open Telegram app on your phone, go to Settings > Devices > Scan QR, scan the image to Log in. Now you can use Telegram for instant messaging within ONLYOFFICE editors interface. Rainbow To start chatting in the Rainbow plugin, Switch to the Plugins tab and click Rainbow, register a new account by clicking the Sign up button, or log into an already created one. To do this, enter your email into the corresponding field and click Continue, then enter your account password, check the Keep my session alive checkbox if you want to save credentials for the current session, and click the Connect button. Now you're all set and can simultaneously chat in Rainbow and work within ONLYOFFICE editors interface." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/ConvertFootnotesEndnotes.htm", @@ -218,7 +218,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/CreateFillableForms.htm", "title": "Create fillable forms", - "body": "ONLYOFFICE Document Editor allows you to effortlessly create fillable forms in your documents, e.g. agreement drafts or surveys. Form Template is DOCXF format that offers a range of tools to create a fillable form. Save the resulting form as a DOCXF file, and you will have a form template you can still edit, revise or collaborate on. To make a Form template fillable and to restrict file editing by other users, save it as a PDF file. Please refer to form filling instructions for further details. DOCXF is a new ONLYOFFICE format that allows to create form templates and fill out forms. Use ONLYOFFICE Document Editor either online or desktop to make full use of form-associated elements and options. You can also save any existing DOCX file as a DOCXF to use it as a Form template. Go to the File tab, click the Download as... or Save as... option on the left side menu and choose the DOCXF icon. Now you can use all the available form editing functions to create a form. It is not only the form fields that you can edit in a DOCXF file, you can still add, edit and format text or use other Document Editor functions. Creating fillable forms is enabled through user-editable objects that ensure overall consistency of the resulting documents and allow for advanced form interaction experience. Currently, you can insert editable plain text fields, combo boxes, dropdown lists, checkboxes, radio buttons, assign designated areas for images, as well as create email address, phone number, date and time, zip code, credit card and complex fields. Access these features on the Forms tab that is available for DOCXF files only. There are tips for each form field to facilitate creating a fillable form. Creating a new Plain Text Field Text fields are user-editable plain text form fields; no other objects can be added. To insert a text field, place the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the field to be added, switch to the Forms tab of the top toolbar, click the Text Field icon or click the arrow next to the Text Field icon and choose whether you want to insert an inline text field or a fixed text field. To learn more about fixed field, please read the Fixed size field paragraph of this section below. The form field will appear at the insertion point within the existing text line. The Form Settings menu will open to the right. Who needs to fill this out?: choose the role via the dropdown list to set the group of users with access to this field. To learn more about assigning roles, please read the Managing Roles section of this guide. Key: a key to group fields to fill out simultaneously. To create a new key, enter its name in the field and press Enter, then assign the required key to each text field using the dropdown list. A message Fields connected: 2/3/... will be displayed. To disconnect the fields, click the Disconnect button. Placeholder: type in the text to be displayed in the inserted text field; “Your text here” is set by default. Tag: type in the text to be used as a tag for internal use, i.e., displayed only for co-editors. Tip: type in the text to be displayed as a tip when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the text field. Default value: enter the value displayed in the field by default. Format: choose the content format of the text field, i.e., only the chosen character format will be allowed: None, Digits, Letters, Arbitrary Mask (the text shall correspond with the custom mask, e.g., (999) 999 99 99), Regular Expression (the text shall correspond with the custom expression). When you choose an Arbitrary Mask or a Regular Expression format, an additional field below the Format field appears. Allowed Symbols: type in the symbols that are allowed in the text field. Fixed size field: check this box to create a field with a fixed size. When this option is enabled, you can also use the AutoFit and/or Multiline field settings. A fixed size field looks like an autoshape. You can set a wrapping style for it as well as adjust its position. AutoFit: this option can be enabled when the Fixed size field setting is selected, check it to automatically fit the font size to the field size. Multiline field: this option can be enabled when the Fixed size field setting is selected, check it to create a form field with multiple lines, otherwise, the text will occupy a single line. Characters limit: no limits by default; check this box to set the maximum characters number in the field to the right. Comb of characters: spread the text evenly within the inserted text field and configure its general appearance. Leave the box unchecked to preserve the default settings, or check it to set the following parameters: Cell width: choose whether the width value should be Auto (width is calculated automatically), At least (width is no less than the value given manually), or Exactly (width corresponds to the value given manually). The text within will be justified accordingly. Border color: click the icon to set the color for the borders of the inserted text field. Choose the preferred border color from the palette. You can add a new custom color if necessary. Background color: click the icon to apply a background color to the inserted text field. Choose the preferred color out of Theme Colors, Standard Colors, or add a new custom color if necessary. Required: check this box to make the text field a necessary one to fill in. Click within the inserted text field and adjust the font type, size, color, apply decoration styles and formatting presets. Formatting will be applied to all the text inside the field. Creating a new Combo box Combo boxes contain a dropdown list with a set of choices that can be edited by users. To insert a combo box, place the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the field to be added, switch to the Forms tab of the top toolbar, click the Combo box icon. The form field will appear at the insertion point within the existing text line. The Form Settings menu will open to the right. Who needs to fill this out?: choose the role via the dropdown list to set the group of users with access to this field. To learn more about assigning roles, please read the Managing Roles section of this guide. Key: a key to group combo boxes to fill out simultaneously. To create a new key, enter its name in the field and press Enter, then assign the required key to each combo box using the dropdown list. A message Fields connected: 2/3/... will be displayed. To disconnect the fields, click the Disconnect button. Placeholder: type in the text to be displayed in the inserted combo box; “Choose an item” is set by default. Tag: type in the text to be used as a tag for internal use, i.e., displayed only for co-editors. Tip: type in the text to be displayed as a tip when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the form field. Default value: enter the value displayed in the field by default. Value Options: add new values, delete them, or move them up and down in the list. Fixed size field: check this box to create a field with a fixed size. A fixed size field looks like an autoshape. You can set a wrapping style for it as well as adjust its position. Border color: click the icon to set the color for the borders of the inserted combo box. Choose the preferred border color from the palette. You can add a new custom color if necessary. Background color: click the icon to apply a background color to the inserted combo box. Choose the preferred color out of Theme Colors, Standard Colors, or add a new custom color if necessary. Required: check this box to make the combo box field a necessary one to fill in. You can click the arrow button in the right part of the added Combo box to open the item list and choose the necessary one. Once the necessary item is selected, you can edit the displayed text entirely or partially by replacing it with yours. You can change font decoration, color, and size. Click within the inserted combo box and proceed according to the instructions. Formatting will be applied to all the text inside the field. Creating a new Dropdown list form field Dropdown lists contain a list with a set of choices that cannot be edited by the users. To insert a dropdown list, place the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the field to be added, switch to the Forms tab of the top toolbar, click the Dropdown icon. The form field will appear at the insertion point within the existing text line. The Form Settings menu will open to the right. Who needs to fill this out?: choose the role via the dropdown list to set the group of users with access to this field. To learn more about assigning roles, please read the Managing Roles section of this guide. Key: a key to group dropdown lists to fill out simultaneously. To create a new key, enter its name in the field and press Enter, then assign the required key to each form field using the dropdown list. A message Fields connected: 2/3/... will be displayed. To disconnect the fields, click the Disconnect button. Placeholder: type in the text to be displayed in the inserted dropdown list; “Choose an item” is set by default. Tag: type in the text to be used as a tag for internal use, i.e., displayed only for co-editors. Tip: type in the text to be displayed as a tip when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the form field. Default value: enter the value displayed in the field by default. Value Options: add new values, delete them, or move them up and down in the list. Fixed size field: check this box to create a field with a fixed size. A fixed size field looks like an autoshape. You can set a wrapping style for it as well as adjust its position. Border color: click the icon to set the color for the borders of the inserted dropdown field. Choose the preferred border color from the palette. You can add a new custom color if necessary. Background color: click the icon to apply a background color to the inserted dropdown field. Choose the preferred color out of Theme Colors, Standard Colors, or add a new custom color if necessary. Required: check this box to make the dropdown list field a necessary one to fill in. You can click the arrow button in the right part of the added Dropdown list form field to open the item list and choose the necessary one. Creating a new Checkbox Checkboxes are used to provide users with a variety of options, any number of which can be selected. Checkboxes operate individually, so they can be checked or unchecked independently. To insert a checkbox, place the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the field to be added, switch to the Forms tab of the top toolbar, click the Checkbox icon. The form field will appear at the insertion point within the existing text line. The Form Settings menu will open to the right. Who needs to fill this out?: choose the role via the dropdown list to set the group of users with access to this field. To learn more about assigning roles, please read the Managing Roles section of this guide. Key: a key to group checkboxes to fill out simultaneously. To create a new key, enter its name in the field and press Enter, then assign the required key to each form field using the dropdown list. A message Fields connected: 2/3/... will be displayed. To disconnect the fields, click the Disconnect button. Tag: type in the text to be used as a tag for internal use, i.e., displayed only for co-editors. Tip: type in the text to be displayed as a tip when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the checkbox. Checkbox is checked by default: check this box so that the checkbox field is activated by default. Fixed size field: check this box to create a field with a fixed size. A fixed size field looks like an autoshape. You can set a wrapping style for it as well as adjust its position. Border color: click the icon to set the color for the borders of the inserted checkbox. Choose the preferred border color from the palette. You can add a new custom color if necessary. Background color: click the icon to apply a background color to the inserted checkbox. Choose the preferred color out of Theme Colors, Standard Colors, or add a new custom color if necessary. Required: check this box to make the checkbox field a necessary one to fill in. To check the box, click it once. Creating a new Radio Button Radio buttons are used to provide users with a variety of options, only one of which can be selected. Radio buttons can be grouped so that there is no selecting several buttons within one group. To insert a radio button, place the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the field to be added, switch to the Forms tab of the top toolbar, click the Radio Button icon. The form field will appear at the insertion point within the existing text line. The Form Settings menu will open to the right. Who needs to fill this out?: choose the role via the dropdown list to set the group of users with access to this field. To learn more about assigning roles, please read the Managing Roles section of this guide. Group key: to create a new group of radio buttons, enter the name of the group in the field and press Enter, then assign the required group to each radio button. Tag: type in the text to be used as a tag for internal use, i.e., displayed only for co-editors. Tip: type in the text to be displayed as a tip when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the radio button. Radio button choice: type in the text used as a name for the element. Button is checked by default: check this box so that the radio button field is activated by default. Fixed size field: check this box to create a field with a fixed size. A fixed size field looks like an autoshape. You can set a wrapping style for it as well as adjust its position. Border color: click the icon to set the color for the borders of the inserted radio button. Choose the preferred border color from the palette. You can add a new custom color if necessary. Background color: click the icon to apply a background color to the inserted radio button. Choose the preferred color out of Theme Colors, Standard Colors, or add a new custom color if necessary. Required: check this box to make the radio button field a necessary one to fill in. To check the radio button, click it once. Creating a new Image field Images are form fields which are used to enable inserting an image with the limitations you set, i.e. the location of the image or its size. To insert an image form field, place the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the field to be added, switch to the Forms tab of the top toolbar, click the Image icon. The form field will appear at the insertion point within the existing text line. The Form Settings menu will open to the right. Who needs to fill this out?: choose the role via the dropdown list to set the group of users with access to this field. To learn more about assigning roles, please read the Managing Roles section of this guide. Key: a key to group images to fill out simultaneously. To create a new key, enter its name in the field and press Enter, then assign the required key to each form field using the dropdown list. A message Fields connected: 2/3/... will be displayed. To disconnect the fields, click the Disconnect button. Placeholder: type in the text to be displayed in the inserted image form field; “Click to load image” is set by default. Tag: type in the text to be used as a tag for internal use, i.e., displayed only for co-editors. Tip: type in the text to be displayed as a tip when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the bottom border of the image. When to scale: click the drop-down menu and select an appropriate image sizing option: Always, Never, when the Image is Too Big, or when the Image is Too Small. The selected image will scale inside the field correspondingly. Lock aspect ratio: check this box to maintain the image aspect ratio without distortion. When the box is checked, use the vertical and the horizontal slider to position the image inside the inserted field. The positioning sliders are inactive when the box is unchecked. Select Image: click this button to upload an image either From File, From URL, or From Storage. Border color: click the icon to set the color for the borders of the inserted image field. Choose the preferred border color from the palette. You can add a new custom color if necessary. Background color: click the icon to apply a background color to the inserted image field. Choose the preferred color out of Theme Colors, Standard Colors, or add a new custom color if necessary. Required: check this box to make the image field a necessary one to fill in. To replace the image, click the   image icon above the form field border and select another one. To adjust the image settings, open the Image Settings tab on the right toolbar. To learn more, please read the guide on image settings. Creating a new Email Address field Email Address field is used to type in an email address corresponding to a regular expression \\S+@\\S+\\.\\S+. To insert an email address field, place the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the field to be added, switch to the Forms tab of the top toolbar, click the Email Address icon. The form field will appear at the insertion point within the existing text line. The Form Settings menu will open to the right. Who needs to fill this out?: choose the role via the dropdown list to set the group of users with access to this field. To learn more about assigning roles, please read the Managing Roles section of this guide. Key: to create a new group of email addresses, enter the name of the group in the field and press Enter, then assign the required group to each email address field. Placeholder: type in the text to be displayed in the inserted email address form field; “user_name@email.com” is set by default. Tag: type in the text to be used as a tag for internal use, i.e., displayed only for co-editors. Tip: type in the text to be displayed as a tip when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the email address field. Default value: enter the value displayed in the field by default. Format: choose the content format of the field, i.e., None, Digits, Letters, Arbitrary Mask or Regular Expression. The field is set to Regular Expression by default to preserve the email address format \\S+@\\S+\\.\\S+. Allowed Symbols: type in the symbols that are allowed in the email address field. Fixed size field: check this box to create a field with a fixed size. When this option is enabled, you can also use the Autofit and/or Multiline field settings. A fixed size field looks like an autoshape. You can set a wrapping style for it as well as adjust its position. AutoFit: this option can be enabled when the Fixed size field setting is selected, check it to automatically fit the font size to the field size. Multiline field: this option can be enabled when the Fixed size field setting is selected, check it to create a form field with multiple lines, otherwise, the text will occupy a single line. Characters limit: no limits by default; check this box to set the maximum characters number in the field to the right. Comb of characters: spread the text evenly within the inserted email address field and configure its general appearance. Leave the box unchecked to preserve the default settings, or check it to set the following parameters: Cell width: choose whether the width value should be Auto (width is calculated automatically), At least (width is no less than the value given manually), or Exactly (width corresponds to the value given manually). The text within will be justified accordingly. Border color: click the icon to set the color for the borders of the inserted email address field. Choose the preferred border color from the palette. You can add a new custom color if necessary. Background color: click the icon to apply a background color to the inserted email address field. Choose the preferred color out of Theme Colors, Standard Colors, or add a new custom color if necessary. Required: check this box to make the email address field a necessary one to fill in. Creating a new Phone Number field Phone Number field is used to type in a phone number corresponding to an arbitrary mask given by the form creator. It is set to (999)999-9999 by default. To insert a phone number field, place the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the field to be added, switch to the Forms tab of the top toolbar, click the Phone Number icon. The form field will appear at the insertion point within the existing text line. The Form Settings menu will open to the right. Who needs to fill this out?: choose the role via the dropdown list to set the group of users with access to this field. To learn more about assigning roles, please read the Managing Roles section of this guide. Key: to create a new group of phone numbers, enter the name of the group in the field and press Enter, then assign the required group to each phone number. Placeholder: type in the text to be displayed in the inserted phone number form field; “(999)999-9999” is set by default. Tag: type in the text to be used as a tag for internal use, i.e., displayed only for co-editors. Tip: type in the text to be displayed as a tip when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the phone number field. Default value: enter the value displayed in the field by default. Format: choose the content format of the field, i.e., None, Digits, Letters, Arbitrary Mask or Regular Expression. The field is set to Arbitrary Mask by default. To change its format, type in the required mask into the field below. Allowed Symbols: type in the symbols that are allowed in the phone number field. Fixed size field: check this box to create a field with a fixed size. When this option is enabled, you can also use the AutoFit and/or Multiline field settings. A fixed size field looks like an autoshape. You can set a wrapping style for it as well as adjust its position. AutoFit: this option can be enabled when the Fixed size field setting is selected, check it to automatically fit the font size to the field size. Multiline field: this option can be enabled when the Fixed size field setting is selected, check it to create a form field with multiple lines, otherwise, the text will occupy a single line. Characters limit: no limits by default; check this box to set the maximum characters number in the field to the right. Comb of characters: spread the text evenly within the inserted phone number field and configure its general appearance. Leave the box unchecked to preserve the default settings, or check it to set the following parameters: Cell width: choose whether the width value should be Auto (width is calculated automatically), At least (width is no less than the value given manually), or Exactly (width corresponds to the value given manually). The text within will be justified accordingly. Border color: click the icon to set the color for the borders of the inserted phone number field. Choose the preferred border color from the palette. You can add a new custom color if necessary. Background color: click the icon to apply a background color to the inserted phone number field. Choose the preferred color out of Theme Colors, Standard Colors, or add a new custom color if necessary. Required: check this box to make the phone number field a necessary one to fill in. Creating a new Date and Time field Date and Time field is used to insert a date. The date is set to DD/MM/YYYY by default. To insert a date and time field, place the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the field to be added, switch to the Forms tab of the top toolbar, click the Date and Time icon. The form field will appear at the insertion point within the existing text line. To enter a date, click the dropdown arrow within the field and choose the required date via the calendar. The Form Settings menu will open to the right. Who needs to fill this out?: choose the role via the dropdown list to set the group of users with access to this field. To learn more about assigning roles, please read the Managing Roles section of this guide. Key: to create a new group of date and time fields, enter the name of the group in the field and press Enter, then assign the required group to each date and time field. Placeholder: type in the text to be displayed in the inserted date and time form field; by default, today's date is displayed. Tag: type in the text to be used as a tag for internal use, i.e., displayed only for co-editors. Tip: type in the text to be displayed as a tip when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the date and time field. Default value: enter the value displayed in the field by default. Display the date like this: choose the format of the field, e.g., MM/DD/YYYY, Monday, MM DD, YYYY, etc. The date is set to DD/MM/YYYY by default. Language: choose the required language for displaying the date and time. Fixed size field: check this box to create a field with a fixed size. A fixed size field looks like an autoshape. You can set a wrapping style for it as well as adjust its position. Border color: click the icon to set the color for the borders of the inserted date and time field. Choose the preferred border color from the palette. You can add a new custom color if necessary. Background color: click the icon to apply a background color to the inserted date and time field. Choose the preferred color out of Theme Colors, Standard Colors, or add a new custom color if necessary. Required: check this box to make the date and time field a necessary one to fill in. Creating a new Zip Code field Zip Code field is used to enter a zip code corresponding to an arbitrary mask given by the form creator. It is set to 99999-9999 by default. To insert a zip code field, place the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the field to be added, switch to the Forms tab of the top toolbar, click the Zip Code icon. The form field will appear at the insertion point within the existing text line. The Form Settings menu will open to the right. Who needs to fill this out?: choose the role via the dropdown list to set the group of users with access to this field. To learn more about assigning roles, please read the Managing roles section of this guide. Key: to create a new group of zip codes, enter the name of the group in the field and press Enter, then assign the required group to each zip code. Placeholder: type in the text to be displayed in the inserted zip code form field; “99999-9999” is set by default. Tag: type in the text to be used as a tag for internal use, i.e., displayed only for co-editors. Tip: type in the text to be displayed as a tip when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the zip code field. Default value: enter the value displayed in the field by default. Format: choose the content format of the field, i.e., None, Digits, Letters, Arbitrary Mask or Regular Expression. The field is set to Arbitrary Mask by default. To change its format, type in the required mask into the field below. Allowed Symbols: type in the symbols that are allowed in the zip code field. Fixed size field: check this box to create a field with a fixed size. When this option is enabled, you can also use the AutoFit and/or Multiline field settings. A fixed size field looks like an autoshape. You can set a wrapping style for it as well as adjust its position. AutoFit: this option can be enabled when the Fixed size field setting is selected, check it to automatically fit the font size to the field size. Multiline field: this option can be enabled when the Fixed size field setting is selected, check it to create a form field with multiple lines, otherwise, the text will occupy a single line. Characters limit: no limits by default; check this box to set the maximum characters number in the field to the right. Comb of characters: spread the text evenly within the inserted zip code field and configure its general appearance. Leave the box unchecked to preserve the default settings, or check it to set the following parameters: Cell width: choose whether the width value should be Auto (width is calculated automatically), At least (width is no less than the value given manually), or Exactly (width corresponds to the value given manually). The text within will be justified accordingly. Border color: click the icon to set the color for the borders of the inserted zip code field. Choose the preferred border color from the palette. You can add a new custom color if necessary. Background color: click the icon to apply a background color to the inserted zip code field. Choose the preferred color out of Theme Colors, Standard Colors, or add a new custom color if necessary. Required: check this box to make the zip code field a necessary one to fill in. Creating a new Credit Card field Credit Card field is used to enter a credit card number corresponding to an arbitrary mask given by the form creator. It is set to 9999-9999-9999-9999 by default. To insert a credit card field, place the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the field to be added, switch to the Forms tab of the top toolbar, click the Credit Card icon. The form field will appear at the insertion point within the existing text line. The Form Settings menu will open to the right. Who needs to fill this out?: choose the role via the dropdown list to set the group of users with access to this field. To learn more about assigning roles, please read the Managing Roles section of this guide. Key: to create a new group of credit card numbers, enter the name of the group in the field and press Enter, then assign the required group to each credit card field. Placeholder: type in the text to be displayed in the inserted credit card form field; “9999-9999-9999-9999” is set by default. Tag: type in the text to be used as a tag for internal use, i.e., displayed only for co-editors. Tip: type in the text to be displayed as a tip when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the credit card field. Default value: enter the value displayed in the field by default. Format: choose the content format of the field, i.e., None, Digits, Letters, Arbitrary Mask or Regular Expression. The field is set to Arbitrary Mask by default. To change its format, type in the required mask into the field below. Allowed Symbols: type in the symbols that are allowed in the credit card field. Fixed size field: check this box to create a field with a fixed size. When this option is enabled, you can also use the AutoFit and/or Multiline field settings. A fixed size field looks like an autoshape. You can set a wrapping style for it as well as adjust its position. AutoFit: this option can be enabled when the Fixed size field setting is selected, check it to automatically fit the font size to the field size. Multiline field: this option can be enabled when the Fixed size field setting is selected, check it to create a form field with multiple lines, otherwise, the text will occupy a single line. Characters limit: no limits by default; check this box to set the maximum characters number in the field to the right. Comb of characters: spread the text evenly within the inserted credit card field and configure its general appearance. Leave the box unchecked to preserve the default settings, or check it to set the following parameters: Cell width: choose whether the width value should be Auto (width is calculated automatically), At least (width is no less than the value given manually), or Exactly (width corresponds to the value given manually). The text within will be justified accordingly. Border color: click the icon to set the color for the borders of the inserted credit card field. Choose the preferred border color from the palette. You can add a new custom color if necessary. Background color: click the icon to apply a background color to the inserted credit card field. Choose the preferred color out of Theme Colors, Standard Colors, or add a new custom color if necessary. Required: check this box to make the credit card field a necessary one to fill in. Creating a new Complex Field Complex Field combines several field types, e.g., text field and a drop-down list. You can combine fields however you need. To insert a complex field, place the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the field to be added, switch to the Forms tab of the top toolbar, click the Complex Field icon. The form field will appear at the insertion point within the existing text line. The Form Settings menu will open to the right. Who needs to fill this out?: choose the role via the dropdown list to set the group of users with access to this field. To learn more about assigning roles, please read the Managing Roles section of this guide. Key: to create a new group of complex fields, enter the name of the group in the field and press Enter, then assign the required group to each complex field. Placeholder: type in the text to be displayed in the inserted complex field; “Your text here” is set by default. Tag: type in the text to be used as a tag for internal use, i.e., displayed only for co-editors. Tip: type in the text to be displayed as a tip when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the complex field. Fixed size field: check this box to create a field with a fixed size. A fixed size field looks like an autoshape. You can set a wrapping style for it as well as adjust its position. Border color: click the icon to set the color for the borders of the inserted complex field. Choose the preferred border color from the palette. You can add a new custom color if necessary. Background color: click the icon to apply a background color to the inserted complex field. Choose the preferred color out of Theme Colors, Standard Colors, or add a new custom color if necessary. Required: check this box to make the complex field a necessary one to fill in. To insert various form fields in a complex field, click within it and choose the required field at the top toolbar in the Forms tab, then configure it to your liking. To learn more about each field type, read the corresponding sections above. Please note that you cannot use Image form field within complex fields. Managing Roles You can create new roles that will determine who can fill in certain form fields. To manage roles, go to the Forms tab in the top toolbar, click the Managing Roles icon, click the New button to create a new role, type in the role name and choose its color if necessary. You can also create a custom color by clicking the corresponding menu item, click OK to create a new role, set the order in which the fillers receive and sign the document using the and buttons, use the Edit or Delete buttons to change the roles or delete them, click Close to go back to form editing. When saving the form as .pdf file, you can view all roles created for the form. Enabling the View form Note: Once you have entered the View form mode, all editing options will become unavailable. Click the View Form button on the Forms tab of the top toolbar to see how all the inserted forms will be displayed in your document. You can view the form from the point of view of each created role. To do that, click the arrow under the View Form button and choose the required role. Navigate through the form fields using the Previous field and Next field buttons at the top toolbar. To clear all fields and reset the form, click the Clear fields button at the top toolbar. To exit the viewing mode, click the same icon again. Moving form fields Form fields can be moved to another place in the document: click the button on the left of the control border to select the field and drag it without releasing the mouse button to another position in the text. You can also copy and paste form fields: select the necessary field and use the Ctrl+C/Ctrl+V key combinations. Creating required fields To make a field obligatory, check the Required option. The mandatory fields will be marked with red stroke. Locking form fields To prevent further editing of the inserted form field, click the Lock icon. Filling the fields remains available. Saving a Form When you are finished, click the Save as pdf button at the top toolbar to save the form as a PDF file ready to be filled out. You can save as many PDF files as you need. Removing form fields To remove a form field and leave all its contents, select it and click the Delete icon (make sure the field is not locked) or press the Delete key on the keyboard." + "body": "ONLYOFFICE Document Editor allows you to effortlessly create fillable forms in your documents, e.g. agreement drafts or surveys. Save the resulting form as a PDF file, and you will have a form you can still edit, revise or collaborate on. To make a form fillable and to restrict file editing by other users, save it as a PDF file. Please refer to form filling instructions for further details. You can also save any existing DOCX file as a PDF to use it as a form. Go to the File tab, click the Download as... or Save as... option on the left side menu and choose the PDF icon. Now you can use all the available form editing functions to create a form. It is not only the form fields that you can edit in a PDF file, you can still add, edit and format text or use other Document Editor functions. Creating fillable forms is enabled through user-editable objects that ensure overall consistency of the resulting documents and allow for advanced form interaction experience. Currently, you can insert editable plain text fields, combo boxes, dropdown lists, checkboxes, radio buttons, assign designated areas for images, as well as create email address, phone number, date and time, zip code, credit card and complex fields. Access these features on the Forms tab that is available for PDF files only. There are tips for each form field to facilitate creating a fillable form. Creating a new Plain Text Field Text fields are user-editable plain text form fields; no other objects can be added. To insert a text field, place the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the field to be added, switch to the Forms tab of the top toolbar, click the Text Field icon or click the arrow next to the Text Field icon and choose whether you want to insert an inline text field or a fixed text field. To learn more about fixed field, please read the Fixed size field paragraph of this section below. The form field will appear at the insertion point within the existing text line. The Form Settings menu will open to the right. Who needs to fill this out?: choose the role via the dropdown list to set the group of users with access to this field. To learn more about assigning roles, please read the Managing Roles section of this guide. Key: a key to group fields to fill out simultaneously. To create a new key, enter its name in the field and press Enter, then assign the required key to each text field using the dropdown list. A message Fields connected: 2/3/... will be displayed. To disconnect the fields, click the Disconnect button. Placeholder: type in the text to be displayed in the inserted text field; “Your text here” is set by default. Tag: type in the text to be used as a tag for internal use, i.e., displayed only for co-editors. Tip: type in the text to be displayed as a tip when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the text field. Default value: enter the value displayed in the field by default. Format: choose the content format of the text field, i.e., only the chosen character format will be allowed: None, Digits, Letters, Arbitrary Mask (the text shall correspond with the custom mask, e.g., (999) 999 99 99), Regular Expression (the text shall correspond with the custom expression). When you choose an Arbitrary Mask or a Regular Expression format, an additional field below the Format field appears. Allowed Symbols: type in the symbols that are allowed in the text field. Fixed size field: check this box to create a field with a fixed size. When this option is enabled, you can also use the AutoFit and/or Multiline field settings. A fixed size field looks like an autoshape. You can set a wrapping style for it as well as adjust its position. AutoFit: this option can be enabled when the Fixed size field setting is selected, check it to automatically fit the font size to the field size. Multiline field: this option can be enabled when the Fixed size field setting is selected, check it to create a form field with multiple lines, otherwise, the text will occupy a single line. Characters limit: no limits by default; check this box to set the maximum characters number in the field to the right. Comb of characters: spread the text evenly within the inserted text field and configure its general appearance. Leave the box unchecked to preserve the default settings, or check it to set the following parameters: Cell width: choose whether the width value should be Auto (width is calculated automatically), At least (width is no less than the value given manually), or Exactly (width corresponds to the value given manually). The text within will be justified accordingly. Border color: click the icon to set the color for the borders of the inserted text field. Choose the preferred border color from the palette. You can add a new custom color if necessary. Background color: click the icon to apply a background color to the inserted text field. Choose the preferred color out of Theme Colors, Standard Colors, or add a new custom color if necessary. Required: check this box to make the text field a necessary one to fill in. Click within the inserted text field and adjust the font type, size, color, apply decoration styles and formatting presets. Formatting will be applied to all the text inside the field. Creating a new Combo box Combo boxes contain a dropdown list with a set of choices that can be edited by users. To insert a combo box, place the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the field to be added, switch to the Forms tab of the top toolbar, click the Combo box icon. The form field will appear at the insertion point within the existing text line. The Form Settings menu will open to the right. Who needs to fill this out?: choose the role via the dropdown list to set the group of users with access to this field. To learn more about assigning roles, please read the Managing Roles section of this guide. Key: a key to group combo boxes to fill out simultaneously. To create a new key, enter its name in the field and press Enter, then assign the required key to each combo box using the dropdown list. A message Fields connected: 2/3/... will be displayed. To disconnect the fields, click the Disconnect button. Placeholder: type in the text to be displayed in the inserted combo box; “Choose an item” is set by default. Tag: type in the text to be used as a tag for internal use, i.e., displayed only for co-editors. Tip: type in the text to be displayed as a tip when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the form field. Default value: enter the value displayed in the field by default. Value Options: add new values, delete them, or move them up and down in the list. Fixed size field: check this box to create a field with a fixed size. A fixed size field looks like an autoshape. You can set a wrapping style for it as well as adjust its position. Border color: click the icon to set the color for the borders of the inserted combo box. Choose the preferred border color from the palette. You can add a new custom color if necessary. Background color: click the icon to apply a background color to the inserted combo box. Choose the preferred color out of Theme Colors, Standard Colors, or add a new custom color if necessary. Required: check this box to make the combo box field a necessary one to fill in. You can click the arrow button in the right part of the added Combo box to open the item list and choose the necessary one. Once the necessary item is selected, you can edit the displayed text entirely or partially by replacing it with yours. You can change font decoration, color, and size. Click within the inserted combo box and proceed according to the instructions. Formatting will be applied to all the text inside the field. Creating a new Dropdown list form field Dropdown lists contain a list with a set of choices that cannot be edited by the users. To insert a dropdown list, place the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the field to be added, switch to the Forms tab of the top toolbar, click the Dropdown icon. The form field will appear at the insertion point within the existing text line. The Form Settings menu will open to the right. Who needs to fill this out?: choose the role via the dropdown list to set the group of users with access to this field. To learn more about assigning roles, please read the Managing Roles section of this guide. Key: a key to group dropdown lists to fill out simultaneously. To create a new key, enter its name in the field and press Enter, then assign the required key to each form field using the dropdown list. A message Fields connected: 2/3/... will be displayed. To disconnect the fields, click the Disconnect button. Placeholder: type in the text to be displayed in the inserted dropdown list; “Choose an item” is set by default. Tag: type in the text to be used as a tag for internal use, i.e., displayed only for co-editors. Tip: type in the text to be displayed as a tip when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the form field. Default value: enter the value displayed in the field by default. Value Options: add new values, delete them, or move them up and down in the list. Fixed size field: check this box to create a field with a fixed size. A fixed size field looks like an autoshape. You can set a wrapping style for it as well as adjust its position. Border color: click the icon to set the color for the borders of the inserted dropdown field. Choose the preferred border color from the palette. You can add a new custom color if necessary. Background color: click the icon to apply a background color to the inserted dropdown field. Choose the preferred color out of Theme Colors, Standard Colors, or add a new custom color if necessary. Required: check this box to make the dropdown list field a necessary one to fill in. You can click the arrow button in the right part of the added Dropdown list form field to open the item list and choose the necessary one. Creating a new Checkbox Checkboxes are used to provide users with a variety of options, any number of which can be selected. Checkboxes operate individually, so they can be checked or unchecked independently. To insert a checkbox, place the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the field to be added, switch to the Forms tab of the top toolbar, click the Checkbox icon. The form field will appear at the insertion point within the existing text line. The Form Settings menu will open to the right. Who needs to fill this out?: choose the role via the dropdown list to set the group of users with access to this field. To learn more about assigning roles, please read the Managing Roles section of this guide. Key: a key to group checkboxes to fill out simultaneously. To create a new key, enter its name in the field and press Enter, then assign the required key to each form field using the dropdown list. A message Fields connected: 2/3/... will be displayed. To disconnect the fields, click the Disconnect button. Tag: type in the text to be used as a tag for internal use, i.e., displayed only for co-editors. Tip: type in the text to be displayed as a tip when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the checkbox. Checkbox is checked by default: check this box so that the checkbox field is activated by default. Fixed size field: check this box to create a field with a fixed size. A fixed size field looks like an autoshape. You can set a wrapping style for it as well as adjust its position. Border color: click the icon to set the color for the borders of the inserted checkbox. Choose the preferred border color from the palette. You can add a new custom color if necessary. Background color: click the icon to apply a background color to the inserted checkbox. Choose the preferred color out of Theme Colors, Standard Colors, or add a new custom color if necessary. Required: check this box to make the checkbox field a necessary one to fill in. To check the box, click it once. Creating a new Radio Button Radio buttons are used to provide users with a variety of options, only one of which can be selected. Radio buttons can be grouped so that there is no selecting several buttons within one group. To insert a radio button, place the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the field to be added, switch to the Forms tab of the top toolbar, click the Radio Button icon. The form field will appear at the insertion point within the existing text line. The Form Settings menu will open to the right. Who needs to fill this out?: choose the role via the dropdown list to set the group of users with access to this field. To learn more about assigning roles, please read the Managing Roles section of this guide. Group key: to create a new group of radio buttons, enter the name of the group in the field and press Enter, then assign the required group to each radio button. Tag: type in the text to be used as a tag for internal use, i.e., displayed only for co-editors. Tip: type in the text to be displayed as a tip when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the radio button. Radio button choice: type in the text used as a name for the element. Button is checked by default: check this box so that the radio button field is activated by default. Fixed size field: check this box to create a field with a fixed size. A fixed size field looks like an autoshape. You can set a wrapping style for it as well as adjust its position. Border color: click the icon to set the color for the borders of the inserted radio button. Choose the preferred border color from the palette. You can add a new custom color if necessary. Background color: click the icon to apply a background color to the inserted radio button. Choose the preferred color out of Theme Colors, Standard Colors, or add a new custom color if necessary. Required: check this box to make the radio button field a necessary one to fill in. To check the radio button, click it once. Creating a new Image field Images are form fields which are used to enable inserting an image with the limitations you set, i.e. the location of the image or its size. To insert an image form field, place the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the field to be added, switch to the Forms tab of the top toolbar, click the Image icon. The form field will appear at the insertion point within the existing text line. The Form Settings menu will open to the right. Who needs to fill this out?: choose the role via the dropdown list to set the group of users with access to this field. To learn more about assigning roles, please read the Managing Roles section of this guide. Key: a key to group images to fill out simultaneously. To create a new key, enter its name in the field and press Enter, then assign the required key to each form field using the dropdown list. A message Fields connected: 2/3/... will be displayed. To disconnect the fields, click the Disconnect button. Placeholder: type in the text to be displayed in the inserted image form field; “Click to load image” is set by default. Tag: type in the text to be used as a tag for internal use, i.e., displayed only for co-editors. Tip: type in the text to be displayed as a tip when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the bottom border of the image. When to scale: click the drop-down menu and select an appropriate image sizing option: Always, Never, when the Image is Too Big, or when the Image is Too Small. The selected image will scale inside the field correspondingly. Lock aspect ratio: check this box to maintain the image aspect ratio without distortion. When the box is checked, use the vertical and the horizontal slider to position the image inside the inserted field. The positioning sliders are inactive when the box is unchecked. Select Image: click this button to upload an image either From File, From URL, or From Storage. Border color: click the icon to set the color for the borders of the inserted image field. Choose the preferred border color from the palette. You can add a new custom color if necessary. Background color: click the icon to apply a background color to the inserted image field. Choose the preferred color out of Theme Colors, Standard Colors, or add a new custom color if necessary. Required: check this box to make the image field a necessary one to fill in. To replace the image, click the   image icon above the form field border and select another one. To adjust the image settings, open the Image Settings tab on the right toolbar. To learn more, please read the guide on image settings. Creating a new Signature field Signature fields are used to insert a field for signing the document. To insert a signature field, place the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the field to be added, switch to the Forms tab of the top toolbar, click the Signature icon. The form field will appear at the insertion point within the existing text line. The Form Settings menu will open to the right. Who needs to fill this out?: choose the role via the dropdown list to set the group of users with access to this field. To learn more about assigning roles, please read the Managing Roles section of this guide. Key: a key to group signatures to fill out simultaneously. To create a new key, enter its name in the field and press Enter, then assign the required key to each form field using the dropdown list. A message Fields connected: 2/3/... will be displayed. To disconnect the fields, click the Disconnect button. Placeholder: type in the text to be displayed in the inserted signature form field; “Signature” is set by default. Tag: type in the text to be used as a tag for internal use, i.e., displayed only for co-editors. Tip: type in the text to be displayed as a tip when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the bottom border of the signature. Border color: click the icon to set the color for the borders of the inserted signature field. Choose the preferred border color from the palette. You can add a new custom color if necessary. Background color: click the icon to apply a background color to the inserted signature field. Choose the preferred color out of Theme Colors, Standard Colors, or add a new custom color if necessary. Required: this field is mandatory, i.e., the document has to be signed using the signature field. Creating a new Email Address field Email Address field is used to type in an email address corresponding to a regular expression \\S+@\\S+\\.\\S+. To insert an email address field, place the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the field to be added, switch to the Forms tab of the top toolbar, click the Email Address icon. The form field will appear at the insertion point within the existing text line. The Form Settings menu will open to the right. Who needs to fill this out?: choose the role via the dropdown list to set the group of users with access to this field. To learn more about assigning roles, please read the Managing Roles section of this guide. Key: to create a new group of email addresses, enter the name of the group in the field and press Enter, then assign the required group to each email address field. Placeholder: type in the text to be displayed in the inserted email address form field; “user_name@email.com” is set by default. Tag: type in the text to be used as a tag for internal use, i.e., displayed only for co-editors. Tip: type in the text to be displayed as a tip when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the email address field. Default value: enter the value displayed in the field by default. Format: choose the content format of the field, i.e., None, Digits, Letters, Arbitrary Mask or Regular Expression. The field is set to Regular Expression by default to preserve the email address format \\S+@\\S+\\.\\S+. Allowed Symbols: type in the symbols that are allowed in the email address field. Fixed size field: check this box to create a field with a fixed size. When this option is enabled, you can also use the Autofit and/or Multiline field settings. A fixed size field looks like an autoshape. You can set a wrapping style for it as well as adjust its position. AutoFit: this option can be enabled when the Fixed size field setting is selected, check it to automatically fit the font size to the field size. Multiline field: this option can be enabled when the Fixed size field setting is selected, check it to create a form field with multiple lines, otherwise, the text will occupy a single line. Characters limit: no limits by default; check this box to set the maximum characters number in the field to the right. Comb of characters: spread the text evenly within the inserted email address field and configure its general appearance. Leave the box unchecked to preserve the default settings, or check it to set the following parameters: Cell width: choose whether the width value should be Auto (width is calculated automatically), At least (width is no less than the value given manually), or Exactly (width corresponds to the value given manually). The text within will be justified accordingly. Border color: click the icon to set the color for the borders of the inserted email address field. Choose the preferred border color from the palette. You can add a new custom color if necessary. Background color: click the icon to apply a background color to the inserted email address field. Choose the preferred color out of Theme Colors, Standard Colors, or add a new custom color if necessary. Required: check this box to make the email address field a necessary one to fill in. Creating a new Phone Number field Phone Number field is used to type in a phone number corresponding to an arbitrary mask given by the form creator. It is set to (999)999-9999 by default. To insert a phone number field, place the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the field to be added, switch to the Forms tab of the top toolbar, click the Phone Number icon. The form field will appear at the insertion point within the existing text line. The Form Settings menu will open to the right. Who needs to fill this out?: choose the role via the dropdown list to set the group of users with access to this field. To learn more about assigning roles, please read the Managing Roles section of this guide. Key: to create a new group of phone numbers, enter the name of the group in the field and press Enter, then assign the required group to each phone number. Placeholder: type in the text to be displayed in the inserted phone number form field; “(999)999-9999” is set by default. Tag: type in the text to be used as a tag for internal use, i.e., displayed only for co-editors. Tip: type in the text to be displayed as a tip when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the phone number field. Default value: enter the value displayed in the field by default. Format: choose the content format of the field, i.e., None, Digits, Letters, Arbitrary Mask or Regular Expression. The field is set to Arbitrary Mask by default. To change its format, type in the required mask into the field below. Allowed Symbols: type in the symbols that are allowed in the phone number field. Fixed size field: check this box to create a field with a fixed size. When this option is enabled, you can also use the AutoFit and/or Multiline field settings. A fixed size field looks like an autoshape. You can set a wrapping style for it as well as adjust its position. AutoFit: this option can be enabled when the Fixed size field setting is selected, check it to automatically fit the font size to the field size. Multiline field: this option can be enabled when the Fixed size field setting is selected, check it to create a form field with multiple lines, otherwise, the text will occupy a single line. Characters limit: no limits by default; check this box to set the maximum characters number in the field to the right. Comb of characters: spread the text evenly within the inserted phone number field and configure its general appearance. Leave the box unchecked to preserve the default settings, or check it to set the following parameters: Cell width: choose whether the width value should be Auto (width is calculated automatically), At least (width is no less than the value given manually), or Exactly (width corresponds to the value given manually). The text within will be justified accordingly. Border color: click the icon to set the color for the borders of the inserted phone number field. Choose the preferred border color from the palette. You can add a new custom color if necessary. Background color: click the icon to apply a background color to the inserted phone number field. Choose the preferred color out of Theme Colors, Standard Colors, or add a new custom color if necessary. Required: check this box to make the phone number field a necessary one to fill in. Creating a new Date and Time field Date and Time field is used to insert a date. The date is set to DD/MM/YYYY by default. To insert a date and time field, place the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the field to be added, switch to the Forms tab of the top toolbar, click the Date and Time icon. The form field will appear at the insertion point within the existing text line. To enter a date, click the dropdown arrow within the field and choose the required date via the calendar. The Form Settings menu will open to the right. Who needs to fill this out?: choose the role via the dropdown list to set the group of users with access to this field. To learn more about assigning roles, please read the Managing Roles section of this guide. Key: to create a new group of date and time fields, enter the name of the group in the field and press Enter, then assign the required group to each date and time field. Placeholder: type in the text to be displayed in the inserted date and time form field; by default, today's date is displayed. Tag: type in the text to be used as a tag for internal use, i.e., displayed only for co-editors. Tip: type in the text to be displayed as a tip when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the date and time field. Default value: enter the value displayed in the field by default. Display the date like this: choose the format of the field, e.g., MM/DD/YYYY, Monday, MM DD, YYYY, etc. The date is set to DD/MM/YYYY by default. Language: choose the required language for displaying the date and time. Fixed size field: check this box to create a field with a fixed size. A fixed size field looks like an autoshape. You can set a wrapping style for it as well as adjust its position. Border color: click the icon to set the color for the borders of the inserted date and time field. Choose the preferred border color from the palette. You can add a new custom color if necessary. Background color: click the icon to apply a background color to the inserted date and time field. Choose the preferred color out of Theme Colors, Standard Colors, or add a new custom color if necessary. Required: check this box to make the date and time field a necessary one to fill in. Creating a new Zip Code field Zip Code field is used to enter a zip code corresponding to an arbitrary mask given by the form creator. It is set to 99999-9999 by default. To insert a zip code field, place the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the field to be added, switch to the Forms tab of the top toolbar, click the Zip Code icon. The form field will appear at the insertion point within the existing text line. The Form Settings menu will open to the right. Who needs to fill this out?: choose the role via the dropdown list to set the group of users with access to this field. To learn more about assigning roles, please read the Managing roles section of this guide. Key: to create a new group of zip codes, enter the name of the group in the field and press Enter, then assign the required group to each zip code. Placeholder: type in the text to be displayed in the inserted zip code form field; “99999-9999” is set by default. Tag: type in the text to be used as a tag for internal use, i.e., displayed only for co-editors. Tip: type in the text to be displayed as a tip when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the zip code field. Default value: enter the value displayed in the field by default. Format: choose the content format of the field, i.e., None, Digits, Letters, Arbitrary Mask or Regular Expression. The field is set to Arbitrary Mask by default. To change its format, type in the required mask into the field below. Allowed Symbols: type in the symbols that are allowed in the zip code field. Fixed size field: check this box to create a field with a fixed size. When this option is enabled, you can also use the AutoFit and/or Multiline field settings. A fixed size field looks like an autoshape. You can set a wrapping style for it as well as adjust its position. AutoFit: this option can be enabled when the Fixed size field setting is selected, check it to automatically fit the font size to the field size. Multiline field: this option can be enabled when the Fixed size field setting is selected, check it to create a form field with multiple lines, otherwise, the text will occupy a single line. Characters limit: no limits by default; check this box to set the maximum characters number in the field to the right. Comb of characters: spread the text evenly within the inserted zip code field and configure its general appearance. Leave the box unchecked to preserve the default settings, or check it to set the following parameters: Cell width: choose whether the width value should be Auto (width is calculated automatically), At least (width is no less than the value given manually), or Exactly (width corresponds to the value given manually). The text within will be justified accordingly. Border color: click the icon to set the color for the borders of the inserted zip code field. Choose the preferred border color from the palette. You can add a new custom color if necessary. Background color: click the icon to apply a background color to the inserted zip code field. Choose the preferred color out of Theme Colors, Standard Colors, or add a new custom color if necessary. Required: check this box to make the zip code field a necessary one to fill in. Creating a new Credit Card field Credit Card field is used to enter a credit card number corresponding to an arbitrary mask given by the form creator. It is set to 9999-9999-9999-9999 by default. To insert a credit card field, place the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the field to be added, switch to the Forms tab of the top toolbar, click the Credit Card icon. The form field will appear at the insertion point within the existing text line. The Form Settings menu will open to the right. Who needs to fill this out?: choose the role via the dropdown list to set the group of users with access to this field. To learn more about assigning roles, please read the Managing Roles section of this guide. Key: to create a new group of credit card numbers, enter the name of the group in the field and press Enter, then assign the required group to each credit card field. Placeholder: type in the text to be displayed in the inserted credit card form field; “9999-9999-9999-9999” is set by default. Tag: type in the text to be used as a tag for internal use, i.e., displayed only for co-editors. Tip: type in the text to be displayed as a tip when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the credit card field. Default value: enter the value displayed in the field by default. Format: choose the content format of the field, i.e., None, Digits, Letters, Arbitrary Mask or Regular Expression. The field is set to Arbitrary Mask by default. To change its format, type in the required mask into the field below. Allowed Symbols: type in the symbols that are allowed in the credit card field. Fixed size field: check this box to create a field with a fixed size. When this option is enabled, you can also use the AutoFit and/or Multiline field settings. A fixed size field looks like an autoshape. You can set a wrapping style for it as well as adjust its position. AutoFit: this option can be enabled when the Fixed size field setting is selected, check it to automatically fit the font size to the field size. Multiline field: this option can be enabled when the Fixed size field setting is selected, check it to create a form field with multiple lines, otherwise, the text will occupy a single line. Characters limit: no limits by default; check this box to set the maximum characters number in the field to the right. Comb of characters: spread the text evenly within the inserted credit card field and configure its general appearance. Leave the box unchecked to preserve the default settings, or check it to set the following parameters: Cell width: choose whether the width value should be Auto (width is calculated automatically), At least (width is no less than the value given manually), or Exactly (width corresponds to the value given manually). The text within will be justified accordingly. Border color: click the icon to set the color for the borders of the inserted credit card field. Choose the preferred border color from the palette. You can add a new custom color if necessary. Background color: click the icon to apply a background color to the inserted credit card field. Choose the preferred color out of Theme Colors, Standard Colors, or add a new custom color if necessary. Required: check this box to make the credit card field a necessary one to fill in. Creating a new Complex Field Complex Field combines several field types, e.g., text field and a drop-down list. You can combine fields however you need. To insert a complex field, place the insertion point within a line of the text where you want the field to be added, switch to the Forms tab of the top toolbar, click the Complex Field icon. The form field will appear at the insertion point within the existing text line. The Form Settings menu will open to the right. Who needs to fill this out?: choose the role via the dropdown list to set the group of users with access to this field. To learn more about assigning roles, please read the Managing Roles section of this guide. Key: to create a new group of complex fields, enter the name of the group in the field and press Enter, then assign the required group to each complex field. Placeholder: type in the text to be displayed in the inserted complex field; “Your text here” is set by default. Tag: type in the text to be used as a tag for internal use, i.e., displayed only for co-editors. Tip: type in the text to be displayed as a tip when a user hovers their mouse pointer over the complex field. Fixed size field: check this box to create a field with a fixed size. A fixed size field looks like an autoshape. You can set a wrapping style for it as well as adjust its position. Border color: click the icon to set the color for the borders of the inserted complex field. Choose the preferred border color from the palette. You can add a new custom color if necessary. Background color: click the icon to apply a background color to the inserted complex field. Choose the preferred color out of Theme Colors, Standard Colors, or add a new custom color if necessary. Required: check this box to make the complex field a necessary one to fill in. To insert various form fields in a complex field, click within it and choose the required field at the top toolbar in the Forms tab, then configure it to your liking. To learn more about each field type, read the corresponding sections above. Please note that you cannot use Image form field within complex fields. Managing Roles You can create new roles that will determine who can fill in certain form fields. To manage roles, go to the Forms tab in the top toolbar, click the Managing Roles icon, click the New button to create a new role, type in the role name and choose its color if necessary. You can also create a custom color by clicking the corresponding menu item, click OK to create a new role, set the order in which the fillers receive and sign the document using the and buttons, use the Edit or Delete buttons to change the roles or delete them, click Close to go back to form editing. When saving the form as .pdf file, you can view all roles created for the form. Enabling the View form Note: Once you have entered the View form mode, all editing options will become unavailable. Click the View Form button on the Forms tab of the top toolbar to see how all the inserted forms will be displayed in your document. You can view the form from the point of view of each created role. To do that, click the arrow under the View Form button and choose the required role. Navigate through the form fields using the Previous field and Next field buttons at the top toolbar. To clear all fields and reset the form, click the Clear fields button at the top toolbar. To exit the viewing mode, click the same icon again. Moving form fields Form fields can be moved to another place in the document: click the button on the left of the control border to select the field and drag it without releasing the mouse button to another position in the text. You can also copy and paste form fields: select the necessary field and use the Ctrl+C/Ctrl+V key combinations. Creating required fields To make a field obligatory, check the Required option. The mandatory fields will be marked with red stroke. Locking form fields To prevent further editing of the inserted form field, click the Lock icon. Filling the fields remains available. Saving a Form When you are finished, click the Save as PDF button at the top toolbar to save the form as a PDF file ready to be filled out. You can save as many PDF files as you need. Removing form fields To remove a form field and leave all its contents, select it and click the Delete icon (make sure the field is not locked) or press the Delete key on the keyboard." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/CreateLists.htm", @@ -243,12 +243,12 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/Drawio.htm", "title": "Create and insert diagrams", - "body": "If you need to create a lot of various and complex diagrams, ONLYOFFICE Document Editor provides you with a draw.io plugin that can create and configure such diagrams. Select the place on the page where you want to insert a diagram. Switch to the Plugins tab and click draw.io. draw io window will open containing the following sections: Top toolbar contains tools to manage files, configure interface, edit data via File, Edit, View, Arrange, Extras, Help tabs and corresponding options. Left sidebar contains various forms to select from: Standard, Software, Networking, Business, Other. To add new shapes to those available by default, click the More Shapes button, select the necessary object types and click Apply. Right sidebar contains tools and settings to customize the worksheet, shapes, charts, sheets, text, and arrows: Worksheet settings: View: Grid, its size and color, Page view, Background - you can either select a local image or provide the URL, or choose a suitable color using the color palette, as well as add Shadow effects. Options: Connection Arrows, Connection Points, Guides. Paper size: Portrait or Landscape orientation with specified length and width parameters. Shape settings: Color: Fill color, Gradient. Line: Color, Type, Width, Perimeter width. Opacity. Arrow settings: Color: Fill color, Gradient. Line: Color, Type, Width, Line end, Line start. Opacity. Working area to view diagrams, enter and edit data. Here you can move objects, form sequential diagrams, and connect objects with arrows. Status bar contains navigation tools for convenient switching between sheets and managing them. Use these tools to create the necessary diagram, edit it, and when it is finished, click the Insert button to add it to the document." + "body": "If you need to create a lot of various and complex diagrams, ONLYOFFICE Document Editor provides you with a draw.io plugin that can create and configure such diagrams. Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager. Select the place on the page where you want to insert a diagram. Switch to the Plugins tab and click draw.io. draw io window will open containing the following sections: Top toolbar contains tools to manage files, configure interface, edit data via File, Edit, View, Arrange, Extras, Help tabs and corresponding options. Left sidebar contains various forms to select from: Standard, Software, Networking, Business, Other. To add new shapes to those available by default, click the More Shapes button, select the necessary object types and click Apply. Right sidebar contains tools and settings to customize the worksheet, shapes, charts, sheets, text, and arrows: Worksheet settings: Diagram tab: View: Grid, its size and color, Page view, Background - you can either select a local image or provide the URL, or choose a suitable color using the color palette via Background Color, as well as add Shadow and Sketch effects. Options: Connection Arrows, Connection Points, Guides. Paper size: Portrait or Landscape orientation with specified length and width parameters. Style tab: Choose the required color preset, as well as set the Sketch and Rounded effects. Shape settings: Style tab: Color: Fill color, Gradient. Use the Eyedropper tool to create a custom color. Line: Color, Type, Width, Perimeter width. Opacity. Graphic effects: Rounded, Glass, Sketch, and Shadow. Text tab: Font: type, size. Text formatting: Bold, Italic, Underline. Horizontal alignment: Left, Center, Right. Vertical alignment: Vertical text orientation, Top, Middle, Bottom. Position: Top Left, Top, Top Right, Left, Center, Right, Bottom Left, Bottom, Bottom Right. Writing Direction: Automatic, Left to Right, Right to Left. Font Color. Background Color. Border Color. Word Wrap. Formatted Text. Opacity. Spacing: Top, Global, Left, Bottom, Right. Clear Formatting button. Arrange tab: Depth arrangement: To Front, To Back, Bring Forward, Send Backward. Size: Autosize, Width, Height, Constrain Proportions. Position: Left, Top. Angle: value in degrees, Rotate shape only by 90°. Flip: Horizontal, Vertical. Align: Snap to Grid. Group button. Copy Size button. Reset: All, Waypoints, Connection Points. Lock/Unlock to restrict editing. Arrow settings: Color: Fill color, Gradient. Line: Shape, Color, Connection, Pattern, Width, Waypoints, Line start, Line end. Opacity. Graphic effects: Sketch, Shadow. Working area to view diagrams, enter and edit data. Here you can move objects, form sequential diagrams, and connect objects with arrows. Status bar contains navigation tools for convenient switching between sheets and managing them. Use these tools to create the necessary diagram, edit it, and when it is finished, click the Insert button to add it to the document." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeColor.htm", "title": "Set font type, size, and color", - "body": "Set the font type, size, and color In the Document Editor, you can select the font type, its size and color using the corresponding icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar. In case you want to apply the formatting to the already existing text in the document, select it with the mouse or use the keyboard and apply the formatting. You can also place the mouse cursor within the necessary word to apply the formatting to this word only. Font Used to select a font from the list of the the available fonts. If the required font is not available in the list, you can download and install it on your operating system, and the font will be available in the desktop version. Font size Used to choose from the preset font size values in the dropdown list (the default values are: 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 36, 48, 72 and 96). It's also possible to manually enter a custom value up to 300 pt in the font size field. Press Enter to confirm. Increment font size Used to change the font size making it one point bigger each time the button is pressed. Decrement font size Used to change the font size making it one point smaller each time the button is pressed. Change case Used to change the font case. Sentence case. - the case matches that of a common sentence. lowercase - all letters are small. UPPERCASE - all letters are capital. Capitalize Each Word - each word starts with a capital letter. tOGGLE cASE - reverse the case of the selected text or the word where the mouse cursor is positioned. Highlight color Used to mark separate sentences, phrases, words, or even characters by adding a color band that imitates the highlighter pen effect throughout the text. You can select the required part of the text and click the downward arrow next to the icon to select a color in the palette (this color set does not depend on the selected Color scheme and includes 16 colors) - the color will be applied to the selected text. Alternatively, you can first choose a highlight color and then start selecting the text with the mouse - the mouse pointer will look like this and you'll be able to highlight several different parts of your text sequentially. To stop highlighting, just click the icon once again. To delete the highlight color, choose the No Fill option. The Highlight color is different from the Background color as the latter is applied to the whole paragraph and completely fills all the paragraph space from the left page margin to the right page margin. Font color Used to change the color of the letters/characters in the text. By default, the automatic font color is set in a new blank document. It is displayed as a black font on the white background. If you change the background color to black, the font color will automatically change to white to keep the text clearly visible. To choose a different color, click the downward arrow next to the icon and select a color from the available palettes (the colors in the Theme Colors palette depend on the selected color scheme). After you change the default font color, you can use the Automatic option in the color palettes window to quickly restore the automatic color for the selected text passage. To learn more about color palettes, please refer to this page." + "body": "Set the font type, size, and color In the Document Editor, you can select the font type, its size and color using the corresponding icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar. In case you want to apply the formatting to the already existing text in the document, select it with the mouse or use the keyboard and apply the formatting. You can also place the mouse cursor within the necessary word to apply the formatting to this word only. Font Used to select a font from the list of the the available fonts. If the required font is not available in the list, you can download and install it on your operating system, and the font will be available in the desktop version. Font size Used to choose from the preset font size values in the dropdown list (the default values are: 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 36, 48, 72 and 96). It's also possible to manually enter a custom value up to 300 pt in the font size field. Press Enter to confirm. Increment font size Used to change the font size making it one point bigger each time the button is pressed. Decrement font size Used to change the font size making it one point smaller each time the button is pressed. Change case Used to change the font case. Sentence case. - the case matches that of a common sentence. lowercase - all letters are small. UPPERCASE - all letters are capital. Capitalize Each Word - each word starts with a capital letter. tOGGLE cASE - reverse the case of the selected text or the word where the mouse cursor is positioned. Highlight color Used to mark separate sentences, phrases, words, or even characters by adding a color band that imitates the highlighter pen effect throughout the text. You can select the required part of the text and click the downward arrow next to the icon to select a color in the palette (this color set does not depend on the selected Color scheme and includes 16 colors) - the color will be applied to the selected text. Alternatively, you can first choose a highlight color and then start selecting the text with the mouse - the mouse pointer will look like this and you'll be able to highlight several different parts of your text sequentially. To stop highlighting, just click the icon once again. To delete the highlight color, choose the No Fill option. The Highlight color is different from the Background color as the latter is applied to the whole paragraph and completely fills all the paragraph space from the left page margin to the right page margin. Font color Used to change the color of the letters/characters in the text. By default, the automatic font color is set in a new blank document. It is displayed as a black font on the white background. If you change the background color to black, the font color will automatically change to white to keep the text clearly visible. To choose a different color, click the downward arrow next to the icon and select a color from the available palettes (the colors in the Theme Colors palette depend on the selected color scheme). After you change the default font color, you can use the Automatic option in the color palettes window to quickly restore the automatic color for the selected text passage. Color Scheme This button is located on the Layout tab. Used to change the default color palette for document elements (font, background, chats and chart elements) selecting from the available options: Aspect, Blue Green, Blue II, Blue Warm, Blue, Grayscale, Green Yellow, Green, Marquee, Median, Office 2007-2010, Office 2013-2022, Office, Orange Red, Orange, Paper, Red Orange, Red Violet, Red, Slipstream, Violet II, Violet, Yellow Orange, Yellow, and New Office. To learn more about color palettes, please refer to this page." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/FormattingPresets.htm", @@ -258,12 +258,12 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/HTML.htm", "title": "Edit HTML", - "body": "If you are writing a website page in a text editor and want to get it as an HTML code, use the HTML plugin. Open the Plugins tab and click Get and paste html. Select the necessary content. The HTML code of the selected paragraph will be displayed in the plugin field on the left-side panel. You can edit the code to alter the text characteristics, e.g. font size or font family, etc. Click Paste into the document to insert the text with its HTML code edited at the current cursor position in your document. You can also write your own HTML code (without selecting any document content) and then paste it to your document. For more information on the HTML plugin and its installation, please see the plugin’s page on the AppDirectory." + "body": "If you are writing a website page in a text editor and want to get it as an HTML code, use the HTML plugin. Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager. Open the Plugins tab and click Get and paste html. Select the necessary content. The HTML code of the selected paragraph will be displayed in the plugin field on the left-side panel. You can edit the code to alter the text characteristics, e.g. font size or font family, etc. Click Paste into the document to insert the text with its HTML code edited at the current cursor position in your document. You can also write your own HTML code (without selecting any document content) and then paste it to your document. For more information on the HTML plugin and its installation, please see the plugin’s page on the AppDirectory." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/HighlightedCode.htm", "title": "Insert highlighted code", - "body": "In the Document Editor, you can embed highlighted code with the already adjusted style in accordance with the programming language and coloring style of the program you have chosen. Go to your document and place the cursor at the location where you want to include the code. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose Highlight code. Specify the programming Language. Select a Style of the code so that it appears as if it were open in this program. Specify if you want to replace tabs with spaces. Choose Background color. To do this, manually move the cursor over the palette or insert the RGB/HSL/HEX value. Click OK to insert the code." + "body": "In the Document Editor, you can embed highlighted code with the already adjusted style in accordance with the programming language and coloring style of the program you have chosen. Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager. Go to your document and place the cursor at the location where you want to include the code. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose Highlight code. Specify the programming Language. Select a Style of the code so that it appears as if it were open in this program. Specify if you want to replace tabs with spaces. Choose Background color. To do this, manually move the cursor over the palette or insert the RGB/HSL/HEX value. Click OK to insert the code." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/Hyphenation.htm", @@ -273,7 +273,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm", "title": "Insert autoshapes", - "body": "Insert an autoshape To add an autoshape in the Document Editor, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Shape icon on the top toolbar, select one of the available autoshape groups from the Shape Gallery: Recently Used, Basic Shapes, Figured Arrows, Math, Charts, Stars & Ribbons, Callouts, Buttons, Rectangles, Lines, click the necessary autoshape within the selected group, place the mouse cursor where the shape should be added, once the autoshape is added, you can change its size, position and properties. Note: to add a caption to an autoshape, make sure the required shape is selected on the page and start typing your text. The added text becomes a part of the autoshape (when you move or rotate the shape, the text moves or rotates with it). It's also possible to add a caption to the autoshape. To learn more on how to work with captions for autoshapes, you can refer to this article. Move and resize autoshapes To change the autoshape size, drag small squares situated on the shape edges. To maintain the original proportions of the selected autoshape while resizing, hold down the Shift key and drag one of the corner icons. When modifying some shapes, for example figured arrows or callouts, the yellow diamond-shaped icon is also available. It allows you to adjust some aspects of the shape, for example, the length of the head of an arrow. To alter the autoshape position, use the icon that appears after hovering your mouse cursor over the autoshape. Drag the autoshape to the required position without releasing the mouse button. When you move the autoshape, the guide lines are displayed to help you precisely position the object on the page (if the selected wrapping style is not inline). To move the autoshape by one-pixel increments, hold down the Ctrl key and use the keybord arrows. To move the autoshape strictly horizontally/vertically and prevent it from moving in a perpendicular direction, hold down the Shift key when dragging. To rotate the autoshape, hover the mouse cursor over the rotation handle and drag it clockwise or counterclockwise. To constrain the rotation angle to 15 degree increments, hold down the Shift key while rotating. Note: the list of keyboard shortcuts that can be used when working with objects is available here. Copy autoshape style formatting To copy a certain autoshape style formatting, select the autoshape whose formatting you need to copy with the mouse or using the keyboard, click the Copy style icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar (the mouse pointer will look like this ), select the required autoshape to apply the same formatting. Adjust autoshape settings To align and arrange autoshapes, use the right-click menu. The menu options are: Cut, Copy, Paste - standard options which are used to cut or copy the selected text/object and paste the previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position. Print selection is used to print out only a selected portion of the document. Accept / Reject changes is used to accept or to reject tracked changes in a shared document. Edit Points is used to customize or to change the curvature of your shape. To activate a shape’s editable anchor points, right-click the shape and choose Edit Points from the menu or click the Edit shape > Edit points option on the right panel. The black squares that become active are the points where two lines meet, and the red line outlines the shape. Click and drag it to reposition the point, and to change the shape outline. Once you click the anchor point, two blue lines with white squares at the ends will appear. These are Bezier handles that allow you to create a curve and to change a curve’s smoothness. As long as the anchor points are active, you can add and delete them. To add a point to a shape, hold Ctrl and click the position where you want to add an anchor point. To delete a point, hold Ctrl and click the unnecessary point. Arrange is used to bring the selected autoshape to foreground, send it to background, move forward or backward as well as group or ungroup shapes to perform operations with several of them at once. To learn more on how to arrange objects, please refer to this page. Align is used to align the shape to the left, in the center, to the right, at the top, in the middle, at the bottom. To learn more on how to align objects, please refer to this page. Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind - or edit the wrap boundary. The Edit Wrap Boundary option is available only if you select a wrapping style other than Inline. Drag wrap points to customize the boundary. To create a new wrap point, click anywhere on the red line and drag it to the necessary position. Rotate is used to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the shape horizontally or vertically. Save as picture is used to save the shape as a picture on your hard drive. Shape Advanced Settings is used to open the 'Shape - Advanced Settings' window. Some of the autoshape settings can be altered using the Shape settings tab of the right sidebar. To activate it click the shape and choose the Shape settings icon on the right. Here you can change the following properties: Fill - use this section to select the autoshape fill. You can choose the following options: Color Fill - select this option to specify the solid color to fill the inner space of the selected autoshape. Click the colored box below and select the necessary color from the available color sets or specify any color you like: Gradient Fill - use this option to fill the shape with two or more fading colors. Customize your gradient fill with no constraints. Click the Shape settings icon to open the Fill menu on the right sidebar: Available menu options: Style - choose between Linear or Radial: Linear is used  when you need your colors to flow from left-to-right, top-to-bottom, or at any angle you chose in a single direction. The Direction preview window displays the selected gradient color, click the arrow to choose a preset gradient direction. Use Angle settings for a precise gradient angle. Radial is used to move from the center as it starts at a single point and emanates outward. Gradient Point is a specific point for transition from one color to another. Use the Add Gradient Point button or slider bar to add a gradient point. You can add up to 10 gradient points. Each next gradient point added will in no way affect the current gradient fill appearance. Use the Remove Gradient Point button to delete a certain gradient point. Use the slider bar to change the location of the gradient point or specify Position in percentage for precise location. To apply a color to a gradient point, click a point on the slider bar, and then click Color to choose the color you want. Picture or Texture - select this option to use an image or a predefined texture as the shape background. If you wish to use an image as a background for the shape, you can add an image From File by selecting it on your computer hard disc drive, From URL by inserting the appropriate URL address into the opened window, or From Storage by selecting the required image stored on your portal. If you wish to use a texture as a background for the shape, open the From Texture menu and select the necessary texture preset. Currently, the following textures are available: canvas, carton, dark fabric, grain, granite, grey paper, knit, leather, brown paper, papyrus, wood. In case the selected Picture has less or more dimensions than the autoshape has, you can choose the Stretch or Tile setting from the dropdown list. The Stretch option allows you to adjust the image size to fit the autoshape size so that it could fill the space completely. The Tile option allows you to display only a part of the bigger image keeping its original dimensions or repeat the smaller image keeping its original dimensions over the autoshape surface so that it could fill the space completely. Note: any selected Texture preset fills the space completely, but you can apply the Stretch effect if necessary. Pattern - select this option to fill the shape with a two-colored design composed of regularly repeated elements. Pattern - select one of the predefined designs from the menu. Foreground color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern elements. Background color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern background. No Fill - select this option if you don't want to use any fill. Opacity - use this section to set an Opacity level dragging the slider or entering the percent value manually. The default value is 100%. It corresponds to the full opacity. The 0% value corresponds to the full transparency. Line - use this section to change the width, color or type of the autoshape line. To change the line width, select one of the available options from the Size dropdown list. The available options are: 0.5 pt, 1 pt, 1.5 pt, 2.25 pt, 3 pt, 4.5 pt, 6 pt. Alternatively, select the No Line option if you don't want to use any line. To change the line color, click on the colored box below and select the necessary color. To change the line type, select the necessary option from the corresponding dropdown list (a solid line is applied by default, you can change it to one of the available dashed lines). To change the line opacity, enter the required value manually or use the corresponding slider bar. Rotation is used to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the shape horizontally or vertically. Click one of the buttons: to rotate the shape by 90 degrees counterclockwise to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise to flip the shape horizontally (left to right) to flip the shape vertically (upside down) Wrapping Style - use this section to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind (for more information see the advanced settings description below). Edit shape - use this section to edit the shape points or to replace the current autoshape with another one selected from the dropdown list. Edit points is used to customize or to change the curvature of your shape. Once you click the anchor point, two blue lines with white squares at the ends will appear. These are Bezier handles that allow you to create a curve and to change a curve’s smoothness. As long as the anchor points are active, you can add and delete them. To add a point to a shape, hold Ctrl and click the position where you want to add an anchor point. To delete a point, hold Ctrl and click the unnecessary point. Change Shape is used to replace the current autoshape. Choose another autoshape from the dropdown list. Show shadow - check this option to display the shape with a shadow. Adjust autoshape advanced settings To change the advanced settings of the autoshape, right-click it and select the Advanced Settings option in the menu or use the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar. The 'Shape - Advanced Settings' window will open: The Size tab contains the following parameters: Width - use one of these options to change the autoshape width. Absolute - specify an exact value measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab). Relative - specify a percentage relative to the left margin width, the margin (i.e. the distance between the left and right margins), the page width, or the right margin width. Height - use one of these options to change the autoshape height. Absolute - specify an exact value measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab). Relative - specify a percentage relative to the margin (i.e. the distance between the top and bottom margins), the bottom margin height, the page height, or the top margin height. If the Lock aspect ratio option is checked, the width and height will be changed together preserving the original shape aspect ratio. The Rotation tab contains the following parameters: Angle - use this option to rotate the shape by an exactly specified angle. Enter the necessary value measured in degrees into the field or adjust it using the arrows on the right. Flipped - check the Horizontally box to flip the shape horizontally (left to right) or check the Vertically box to flip the shape vertically (upside down). The Text Wrapping tab contains the following parameters: Wrapping Style - use this option to change the way the shape is positioned relative to the text: it will either be a part of the text (in case you select the inline style) or bypassed by it from all sides (if you select one of the other styles). Inline - the shape is considered to be a part of the text, like a character, so when the text moves, the shape moves as well. In this case the positioning options are inaccessible. If one of the following styles is selected, the shape can be moved independently of the text and positioned on the page exactly: Square - the text wraps the rectangular box that bounds the shape. Tight - the text wraps the actual shape edges. Through - the text wraps around the shape edges and fills in the open white space within the shape. So that the effect can appear, use the Edit Wrap Boundary option from the right-click menu. Top and bottom - the text is only above and below the shape. In front - the shape overlaps the text. Behind - the text overlaps the shape. If you select the square, tight, through, or top and bottom styles, you will be able to set up some additional parameters - distance from text at all sides (top, bottom, left, right). The Position tab is available only if the selected wrapping style is not inline. This tab contains the following parameters that vary depending on the selected wrapping style: The Horizontal section allows you to select one of the following three autoshape positioning types: Alignment (left, center, right) relative to character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin, Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) to the right of character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin, Relative position measured in percent relative to the left margin, margin, page or right margin. The Vertical section allows you to select one of the following three autoshape positioning types: Alignment (top, center, bottom) relative to line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin, Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) below line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin, Relative position measured in percent relative to the margin, bottom margin, page or top margin. Move object with text ensures that the autoshape moves along with the text to which it is anchored. Allow overlap makes it possible for two autoshapes to overlap if you drag them near each other on the page. The Weights & Arrows tab contains the following parameters: Line Style - this option group allows specifying the following parameters: Cap Type - this option allows setting the style for the end of the line, therefore it can be applied only to the shapes with the open outline, such as lines, polylines etc.: Flat - the end points will be flat. Round - the end points will be rounded. Square - the end points will be square. Join Type - this option allows setting the style for the intersection of two lines, for example, it can affect a polyline or the corners of the triangle or rectangle outline: Round - the corner will be rounded. Bevel - the corner will be cut off angularly. Miter - the corner will be pointed. It goes well to shapes with sharp angles. Note: the effect will be more noticeable if you use a large outline width. Arrows - this option group is available if a shape from the Lines shape group is selected. It allows setting the arrow Start and End Style and Size by selecting the appropriate option from the dropdown lists. The Text Padding tab allows changing the Top, Bottom, Left and Right internal margins of the autoshape (i.e. the distance between the text within the shape and the autoshape borders). Note: this tab is only available if text is added within the autoshape, otherwise the tab is disabled. The Alternative Text tab allows specifying a Title and Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information the shape contains." + "body": "Insert an autoshape To add an autoshape in the Document Editor, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Shape icon on the top toolbar, select one of the available autoshape groups from the Shape Gallery: Recently Used, Basic Shapes, Figured Arrows, Math, Charts, Stars & Ribbons, Callouts, Buttons, Rectangles, Lines, click the necessary autoshape within the selected group, place the mouse cursor where the shape should be added, once the autoshape is added, you can change its size, position and properties. Note: to add a caption to an autoshape, make sure the required shape is selected on the page and start typing your text. The added text becomes a part of the autoshape (when you move or rotate the shape, the text moves or rotates with it). It's also possible to add a caption to the autoshape. To learn more on how to work with captions for autoshapes, you can refer to this article. Move and resize autoshapes To change the autoshape size, drag small squares situated on the shape edges. To maintain the original proportions of the selected autoshape while resizing, hold down the Shift key and drag one of the corner icons. When modifying some shapes, for example figured arrows or callouts, the yellow diamond-shaped icon is also available. It allows you to adjust some aspects of the shape, for example, the length of the head of an arrow. To alter the autoshape position, use the icon that appears after hovering your mouse cursor over the autoshape. Drag the autoshape to the required position without releasing the mouse button. When you move the autoshape, the guide lines are displayed to help you precisely position the object on the page (if the selected wrapping style is not inline). To move the autoshape by one-pixel increments, hold down the Ctrl key and use the keybord arrows. To move the autoshape strictly horizontally/vertically and prevent it from moving in a perpendicular direction, hold down the Shift key when dragging. To rotate the autoshape, hover the mouse cursor over the rotation handle and drag it clockwise or counterclockwise. To constrain the rotation angle to 15 degree increments, hold down the Shift key while rotating. Note: the list of keyboard shortcuts that can be used when working with objects is available here. Copy autoshape style formatting To copy a certain autoshape style formatting, select the autoshape whose formatting you need to copy with the mouse or using the keyboard, click the Copy style icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar (the mouse pointer will look like this ), select the required autoshape to apply the same formatting. Adjust autoshape settings To align and arrange autoshapes, use the right-click menu. The menu options are: Cut, Copy, Paste - standard options which are used to cut or copy the selected text/object and paste the previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position. Print selection is used to print out only a selected portion of the document. Accept / Reject changes is used to accept or to reject tracked changes in a shared document. Edit Points is used to customize or to change the curvature of your shape. To activate a shape’s editable anchor points, right-click the shape and choose Edit Points from the menu or click the Edit shape > Edit points option on the right panel. The black squares that become active are the points where two lines meet, and the red line outlines the shape. Click and drag it to reposition the point, and to change the shape outline. Once you click the anchor point, two blue lines with white squares at the ends will appear. These are Bezier handles that allow you to create a curve and to change a curve’s smoothness. As long as the anchor points are active, you can add and delete them. To add a point to a shape, hold Ctrl and click the position where you want to add an anchor point. To delete a point, hold Ctrl and click the unnecessary point. Arrange is used to bring the selected autoshape to foreground, send it to background, move forward or backward as well as group or ungroup shapes to perform operations with several of them at once. To learn more on how to arrange objects, please refer to this page. Align is used to align the shape to the left, in the center, to the right, at the top, in the middle, at the bottom. To learn more on how to align objects, please refer to this page. Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind - or edit the wrap boundary. The Edit Wrap Boundary option is available only if you select a wrapping style other than Inline. Drag wrap points to customize the boundary. To create a new wrap point, click anywhere on the red line and drag it to the necessary position. Rotate is used to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the shape horizontally or vertically. Save as picture is used to save the shape as a picture on your hard drive. Shape Advanced Settings is used to open the 'Shape - Advanced Settings' window. Some of the autoshape settings can be altered using the Shape settings tab of the right sidebar. To activate it click the shape and choose the Shape settings icon on the right. Here you can change the following properties: Fill - use this section to select the autoshape fill. You can choose the following options: Color fill - select this option to specify the solid color to fill the inner space of the selected autoshape. Click the colored box below and select the necessary color from the available color sets or specify any color you like. Gradient fill - use this option to fill the shape with two or more fading colors. Customize your gradient fill with no constraints. Click the Shape settings icon to open the Fill menu on the right sidebar: Available menu options: Style - choose between Linear or Radial: Linear is used  when you need your colors to flow from left-to-right, top-to-bottom, or at any angle you chose in a single direction. The Direction preview window displays the selected gradient color, click the arrow to choose a preset gradient direction. Use Angle settings for a precise gradient angle. Radial is used to move from the center as it starts at a single point and emanates outward. Gradient points are specific points for transition from one color to another. Use the Add gradient point button or slider bar to add a gradient point. You can add up to 10 gradient points. Each next gradient point added will in no way affect the current gradient fill appearance. Use the Remove gradient point button to delete a certain gradient point. Use the slider bar to change the location of the gradient point or specify Position in percentage for precise location. To apply a color to a gradient point, click a point on the slider bar, and then click Color to choose the color you want. Picture or texture - select this option to use an image or a predefined texture as the shape background. If you wish to use an image as a background for the shape, open the Select picture dropdown menu; here, you can add an image From file by selecting it on your computer hard disk drive, From URL by inserting the appropriate URL address into the opened window, or From storage by selecting the required image stored on your portal. If you wish to use a texture as a background for the shape, open the From texture menu and select the necessary texture preset. Currently, the following textures are available: canvas, carton, dark fabric, grain, granite, grey paper, knit, leather, brown paper, papyrus, wood. In case the selected Picture has less or more dimensions than the autoshape has, you can choose the Stretch or Tile setting from the dropdown list. The Stretch option allows you to adjust the image size to fit the autoshape size so that it could fill the space completely. The Tile option allows you to display only a part of the bigger image keeping its original dimensions or repeat the smaller image keeping its original dimensions over the autoshape surface so that it could fill the space completely. Note: any selected Texture preset fills the space completely, but you can apply the Stretch effect if necessary. Pattern - select this option to fill the shape with a two-colored design composed of regularly repeated elements. Pattern - select one of the predefined designs from the menu. Foreground color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern elements. Background color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern background. No fill - select this option if you don't want to use any fill. Opacity - use this section to set an Opacity level dragging the slider or entering the percent value manually. The default value is 100%. It corresponds to the full opacity. The 0% value corresponds to the full transparency. Line - use this section to change the width, color or type of the autoshape line. To change the line width, select one of the available options from the Size dropdown list. The available options are: 0.5 pt, 1 pt, 1.5 pt, 2.25 pt, 3 pt, 4.5 pt, 6 pt. Alternatively, select the No Line option if you don't want to use any line. To change the line color, click on the colored box below and select the necessary color. To change the line type, select the necessary option from the corresponding dropdown list (a solid line is applied by default, you can change it to one of the available dashed lines). To change the line opacity, enter the required value manually or use the corresponding slider bar. Rotation is used to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the shape horizontally or vertically. Click one of the buttons: to rotate the shape by 90 degrees counterclockwise to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise to flip the shape horizontally (left to right) to flip the shape vertically (upside down) Wrapping Style - use this section to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind (for more information see the advanced settings description below). Edit shape - use this section to edit the shape points or to replace the current autoshape with another one selected from the dropdown list. Edit points is used to customize or to change the curvature of your shape. Once you click the anchor point, two blue lines with white squares at the ends will appear. These are Bezier handles that allow you to create a curve and to change a curve’s smoothness. As long as the anchor points are active, you can add and delete them. To add a point to a shape, hold Ctrl and click the position where you want to add an anchor point. To delete a point, hold Ctrl and click the unnecessary point. Change shape is used to replace the current autoshape. Choose another autoshape from the dropdown list. Shadow - open this menu to choose one of the preset shadow styles used for the shape. No Shadow - uncheck this menu point to display a shadow, and vice versa. Color - choose one of the available colors either on the Theme colors or the Standard colors palette; use the Eyedropper tool to copy color from other objects in the document; or click the More colors menu item to create a custom color. Adjust Shadow - create a custom shadow using the following sliders: Transparency - adjust the transparency of the shadow. Size - adjust the size of the shadow. Angle - adjust the angle of the shadow relative to its object. Distance - adjust the distance of the shadow from its object. Adjust autoshape advanced settings To change the advanced settings of the autoshape, right-click it and select the Advanced Settings option in the menu or use the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar. The 'Shape - Advanced Settings' window will open: The Size tab contains the following parameters: Width - use one of these options to change the autoshape width. Absolute - specify an exact value measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab). Relative - specify a percentage relative to the left margin width, the margin (i.e., the distance between the left and right margins), the page width, or the right margin width. Height - use one of these options to change the autoshape height. Absolute - specify an exact value measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab). Relative - specify a percentage relative to the margin (i.e. the distance between the top and bottom margins), the bottom margin height, the page height, or the top margin height. If the Lock aspect ratio option is checked, the width and height will be changed together preserving the original shape aspect ratio. The Rotation tab contains the following parameters: Angle - use this option to rotate the shape by an exactly specified angle. Enter the necessary value measured in degrees into the field or adjust it using the arrows on the right. Flipped - check the Horizontally box to flip the shape horizontally (left to right) or check the Vertically box to flip the shape vertically (upside down). The Text Wrapping tab contains the following parameters: Wrapping Style - use this option to change the way the shape is positioned relative to the text: it will either be a part of the text (in case you select the inline style) or bypassed by it from all sides (if you select one of the other styles). Inline - the shape is considered to be a part of the text, like a character, so when the text moves, the shape moves as well. In this case the positioning options are inaccessible. If one of the following styles is selected, the shape can be moved independently of the text and positioned on the page exactly: Square - the text wraps the rectangular box that bounds the shape. Tight - the text wraps the actual shape edges. Through - the text wraps around the shape edges and fills in the open white space within the shape. So that the effect can appear, use the Edit Wrap Boundary option from the right-click menu. Top and bottom - the text is only above and below the shape. In front - the shape overlaps the text. Behind - the text overlaps the shape. If you select the square, tight, through, or top and bottom styles, you will be able to set up some additional parameters - distance from text at all sides (top, bottom, left, right). The Position tab is available only if the selected wrapping style is not inline. This tab contains the following parameters that vary depending on the selected wrapping style: The Horizontal section allows you to select one of the following three autoshape positioning types: Alignment (left, center, right) relative to character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin, Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) to the right of character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin, Relative position measured in percent relative to the left margin, margin, page or right margin. The Vertical section allows you to select one of the following three autoshape positioning types: Alignment (top, center, bottom) relative to line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin, Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) below line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin, Relative position measured in percent relative to the margin, bottom margin, page or top margin. Move object with text ensures that the autoshape moves along with the text to which it is anchored. Allow overlap makes it possible for two autoshapes to overlap if you drag them near each other on the page. The Weights & Arrows tab contains the following parameters: Line Style - this option group allows specifying the following parameters: Cap Type - this option allows setting the style for the end of the line, therefore it can be applied only to the shapes with the open outline, such as lines, polylines etc.: Flat - the end points will be flat. Round - the end points will be rounded. Square - the end points will be square. Join Type - this option allows setting the style for the intersection of two lines, for example, it can affect a polyline or the corners of the triangle or rectangle outline: Round - the corner will be rounded. Bevel - the corner will be cut off angularly. Miter - the corner will be pointed. It goes well to shapes with sharp angles. Note: the effect will be more noticeable if you use a large outline width. Arrows - this option group is available if a shape from the Lines shape group is selected. It allows setting the arrow Start and End Style and Size by selecting the appropriate option from the dropdown lists. The Text Padding tab allows changing the Top, Bottom, Left and Right internal margins of the autoshape (i.e. the distance between the text within the shape and the autoshape borders). Note: this tab is only available if text is added within the autoshape, otherwise the tab is disabled. The Alternative Text tab allows specifying a Title and Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information the shape contains." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertBookmarks.htm", @@ -283,7 +283,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm", "title": "Insert charts", - "body": "Insert a chart To insert a chart in the Document Editor, Place the cursor where the chart should be added. Switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar. Click the Chart icon on the top toolbar. Select the needed chart type from the available ones: Column Charts Clustered column Stacked column 100% stacked column 3-D Clustered Column 3-D Stacked Column 3-D 100% stacked column 3-D Column Line Charts Line Stacked line 100% stacked line Line with markers Stacked line with markers 100% stacked line with markers 3-D Line Pie Charts Pie Doughnut 3-D Pie Bar Charts Clustered bar Stacked bar 100% stacked bar 3-D clustered bar 3-D stacked bar 3-D 100% stacked bar Area Charts Area Stacked area 100% stacked area Stock Charts XY (Scatter) Charts Scatter Stacked bar Scatter with smooth lines and markers Scatter with smooth lines Scatter with straight lines and markers Scatter with straight lines Radar Charts Radar Radar with markers Filled radar Combo Charts Clustered column - line Clustered column - line on secondary axis Stacked area - clustered column Custom combination Note: ONLYOFFICE Document Editor supports the following types of charts that were created with third-party editors: Pyramid, Bar (Pyramid), Horizontal/Vertical Cylinders, Horizontal/Vertical Cones. You can open the file containing such a chart and modify it using the available chart editing tools. After that the Chart Editor window will appear where you can enter the necessary data into the cells using the following controls: and for copying and pasting the copied data and for undoing and redoing actions for inserting a function and for decreasing and increasing decimal places for changing the number format, i.e. the way the numbers you enter appear in cells for choosing a different type of chart. Click the Select data button situated in the Chart Editor window. The Chart data window will open. Use the Chart data dialog to manage Chart data range, Legend entries (Series), Horizontal (category) axis label and Switch row/column. Chart data range - select data for your chart. Click the icon on the right of the Chart data range box to select data range. Legend entries (series) - add, edit, or remove legend entries. Type or select series name for legend entries. In Legend entries (series), click Add button. In Edit series, type a new legend entry or click the icon on the right of the Select name box. Horizontal (category) axis labels - change text for category labels. In Horizontal (category) axis labels, click Edit. In Axis label range, type the labels you want to add or click the icon on the right of the Axis label range box to select data range. Switch row/column - rearrange the worksheet data that is configured in the chart not in the way that you want it. Switch rows to columns to display data on a different axis. Click OK button to apply the changes and close the window. Click the Change Chart Type button in the Chart Editor window to choose chart type and style. Select a chart from the available sections: Column, Line, Pie, Bar, Area, Stock, XY (Scatter), Radar, or Combo. When you choose Combo Charts, the Chart type window lists chart series and allows choosing the types of charts to combine and selecting data series to place on a secondary axis. Change the chart settings by clicking the Edit Chart button situated in the Chart Editor window. The Chart - Advanced Settings window will open. The Layout tab allows you to change the layout of chart elements. Specify the Chart title position in regard to your chart selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to display no chart title, Overlay to overlay and center a title on the plot area, No overlay to display the title above the plot area. Specify the Legend position in regard to your chart selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to display no legend, Bottom to display the legend and align it to the bottom of the plot area, Top to display the legend and align it to the top of the plot area, Right to display the legend and align it to the right of the plot area, Left to display the legend and align it to the left of the plot area, Left overlay to overlay and center the legend to the left on the plot area, Right overlay to overlay and center the legend to the right on the plot area. Specify the Data labels (i.e. text labels that represent exact values of data points) parameters: Specify the Data labels position relative to the data points selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list. The available options vary depending on the selected chart type. For Column/Bar charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Inner bottom, Inner top, Outer top. For Line/XY (Scatter)/Stock charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Left, Right, Top, Bottom. For Pie charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Fit to width, Inner top, Outer top. For Area charts as well as for 3D Column, Line, Bar, Radar, and Combo charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center. Select the data you wish to include into your labels checking the corresponding boxes: Series name, Category name, Value, Enter a character (comma, semicolon etc.) you wish to use for separating several labels into the Data labels separator entry field. Lines - is used to choose a line style for Line/XY (Scatter) charts. You can choose one of the following options: Straight to use straight lines between data points, Smooth to use smooth curves between data points, or None to not display lines. Markers - is used to specify whether the markers should be displayed (if the box is checked) or not (if the box is unchecked) for Line/XY (Scatter) charts. Note: the Lines and Markers options are available for Line charts and XY (Scatter) charts only. The Vertical axis tab allows you to change the parameters of the vertical axis also referred to as the values axis or y-axis which displays numeric values. Note that the vertical axis will be the category axis which displays text labels for the Bar charts, therefore in this case the Vertical axis tab options will correspond to the ones described in the next section. For the XY (Scatter) charts, both axes are value axes. Note: the Axis Settings and Gridlines sections will be disabled for Pie charts since charts of this type have no axes and gridlines. Select Hide to hide vertical axis in the chart, leave it unchecked to have vertical axis displayed. Specify Title orientation by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display a vertical axis title Rotated to display the title from bottom to top to the left of the vertical axis, Horizontal to display the title horizontally to the left of the vertical axis. Minimum value - is used to specify the lowest value displayed at the vertical axis start. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the minimum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right. Maximum value - is used to specify the highest value displayed at the vertical axis end. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the maximum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right. Axis crosses - is used to specify a point on the vertical axis where the horizontal axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the axes intersection point value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the axes intersection point at the Minimum/Maximum Value on the vertical axis. Display units - is used to determine the representation of the numeric values along the vertical axis. This option can be useful if you're working with great numbers and wish the values on the axis to be displayed in a more compact and readable way (e.g. you can represent 50 000 as 50 by using the Thousands display units). Select desired units from the drop-down list: Hundreds, Thousands, 10 000, 100 000, Millions, 10 000 000, 100 000 000, Billions, Trillions, or choose the None option to return to the default units. Values in reverse order - is used to display values in the opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, the lowest value is at the bottom and the highest value is at the top of the axis. When the box is checked, the values are ordered from top to bottom. Logarithmic scale - is used to enable logarithmic scaling to the Base that is determined by the user. The Tick Options section allows adjusting the appearance of tick marks on the vertical scale. Major tick marks are the larger scale divisions which can have labels displaying numeric values. Minor tick marks are the scale subdivisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed if the corresponding option is set on the Layout tab. The Major/minor type drop-down lists contain the following placement options: None to display no major/minor tick marks, Cross to display major/minor tick marks on both sides of the axis, In to display major/minor tick marks inside the axis, Out to display major/minor tick marks outside the axis. The Label options section allows adjusting the appearance of major tick mark labels which display values. To specify a Label position in regard to the vertical axis, select the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display tick mark labels, Low to display tick mark labels to the left of the plot area, High to display tick mark labels to the right of the plot area, Next to axis to display tick mark labels next to the axis. To specify a Label format click the Label format button and choose a category as deemed appropriate. Available label format categories: General Number Scientific Accounting Currency Date Time Percentage Fraction Text Custom Label format options vary depending on the selected category. For more information on changing number format, go to this page. Check Linked to source to keep number formatting from the data source in the chart. Note: Secondary axes are supported in Combo charts only. Secondary axes are useful in Combo charts when data series vary considerably or mixed types of data are used to plot a chart. Secondary Axes make it easier to read and understand a combo chart. The Secondary vertical/horizontal axis tab appears when you choose an appropriate data series for a combo chart. All the settings and options on the Secondary vertical/horizontal axis tab are the same as the settings on the vertical/horizontal axis. For a detailed description of the Vertical/horizontal axis options, see description above/below. The Horizontal axis tab allows you to change the parameters of the horizontal axis also referred to as the categories axis or x-axis which displays text labels. Note that the horizontal axis will be the value axis which displays numeric values for the Bar charts, therefore in this case the Horizontal axis tab options will correspond to the ones described in the previous section. For the XY (Scatter) charts, both axes are value axes. Select Hide to hide horizontal axis in the chart, leave it unchecked to have horizontal axis displayed. Specify Title orientation by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to display no horizontal axis title, No overlay to display the title below the horizontal axis, Gridlines are used to specify the Horizontal gridlines to display by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None,  Major, Minor, or Major and minor. Axis crosses - is used to specify a point on the horizontal axis where the vertical axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the axes intersection point value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the axes intersection point at the Minimum/maximum value (that corresponds to the first and last category) on the horizontal axis. Axis position - is used to specify where the axis text labels should be placed: On tick marks or Between tick marks. Values in reverse order - is used to display categories in the opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, categories are displayed from left to right. When the box is checked, the categories are ordered from right to left. The Tick Options section allows adjusting the appearance of tick marks on the horizontal scale. Major tick marks are the larger divisions which can have labels displaying category values. Minor tick marks are the smaller divisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed if the corresponding option is set on the Layout tab. You can adjust the following tick mark parameters: Major/minor type - is used to specify the following placement options: None to not display major/minor tick marks, Cross to display major/minor tick marks on both sides of the axis, In to display major/minor tick marks inside the axis, Out to display major/minor tick marks outside the axis. Interval between marks - is used to specify how many categories should be displayed between two adjacent tick marks. The Label Options section allows adjusting the appearance of labels which display categories. Label position - is used to specify where the labels should be placed in regard to the horizontal axis. Select the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display category labels, Low to display category labels at the bottom of the plot area, High to display category labels at the top of the plot area, Next to axis to display category labels next to the axis. Axis label distance - is used to specify how closely the labels should be placed to the axis. You can specify the necessary value in the entry field. The more the value you set, the more the distance between the axis and labels is. Interval between labels - is used to specify how often the labels should be displayed. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case labels are displayed for every category. You can select the Manual option from the drop-down list and specify the necessary value in the entry field on the right. For example, enter 2 to display labels for every other category etc. To specify a Label format click the Label format button and choose a category as deemed appropriate. Available label format categories: General Number Scientific Accounting Currency Date Time Percentage Fraction Text Custom Label format options vary depending on the selected category. For more information on changing number format, go to this page. Check Linked to source to keep number formatting from the data source in the chart. The Cell snapping tab contains the following parameters: Move and size with cells - this option allows you to snap the chart to the cell behind it. If the cell moves (e.g. if you insert or delete some rows/columns), the chart will be moved together with the cell. If you increase or decrease the width or height of the cell, the chart will change its size as well. Move but don't size with cells - this option allows to snap the chart to the cell behind it preventing the chart from being resized. If the cell moves, the chart will be moved together with the cell, but if you change the cell size, the chart dimensions remain unchanged. Don't move or size with cells - this option allows to prevent the chart from being moved or resized if the cell position or size was changed. The Alternative text tab allows specifying a Title and Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information the chart contains. Move and resize charts Once the chart is added, you can change its size and position. To change the chart size, drag small squares situated on its edges. To maintain the original proportions of the selected chart while resizing, hold down the Shift key and drag one of the corner icons. To alter the chart position, use the icon that appears after hovering your mouse cursor over the chart. Drag the chart to the necessary position without releasing the mouse button. When you move the chart, guide lines are displayed to help you position the object on the page precisely (if a wrapping style other than inline is selected). Note: the list of keyboard shortcuts that can be used when working with objects is available here. Edit chart elements To edit the chart Title, select the default text with the mouse and type the required text. To change the font formatting within text elements, such as the chart title, axes titles, legend entries, data labels etc., select the necessary text element by left-clicking it. Then use the corresponding icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar to change the font type, size, color or its decoration style. When the chart is selected, the Shape settings icon is also available on the right, since a shape is used as a background for the chart. You can click this icon to open the Shape settings tab on the right sidebar and adjust Fill and Line of the shape. Note that you cannot change the shape type. Using the Shape settings tab on the right panel, you can both adjust the chart area itself and change the chart elements, such as plot area, data series, chart title, legend etc and apply different fill types to them. Select the chart element clicking it with the left mouse button and choose the preferred fill type: solid color, gradient, texture or picture, pattern. Specify the fill parameters and set the Opacity level if necessary. When you select a vertical or horizontal axis or gridlines, the stroke settings are only available at the Shape settings tab: color, width, type, and opacity. For more details on how to work with shape colors, fills and stroke, you can refer to this page. Note: the Show shadow option is also available at the Shape settings tab, but it is disabled for chart elements. If you need to resize chart elements, left-click to select the needed element and drag one of 8 white squares located along the perimeter of the element. To change the position of the element, left-click on it, make sure your cursor changed to , hold the left mouse button and drag the element to the needed position. To delete a chart element, select it by left-clicking and press the Delete key on the keyboard. You can also rotate 3D charts using the mouse. Left-click within the plot area and hold the mouse button. Drag the cursor without releasing the mouse button to change the 3D chart orientation. Adjust chart settings Some of the chart settings can be altered using the Chart settings tab of the right sidebar. To activate it click the chart and choose the Chart settings icon on the right. Here you can change the following properties: Size is used to view the Width and Height of the current chart. Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind (for more information see the advanced settings description below). Change Chart Type is used to change the selected chart type and/or style. To select the necessary chart Style, use the second drop-down menu in the Change Chart Type section. Edit Data is used to open the 'Chart Editor' window. Note: to quickly open the 'Chart Editor' window you can also double-click the chart in the document. You can also find some of these options in the right-click menu. The menu options are: Cut, Copy, Paste - standard options which are used to cut or copy the selected text/object and paste the previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position. Arrange is used to bring the selected chart to foreground, send it to the background, move forward or backward as well as group or ungroup charts to perform operations with several of them at once. To learn more on how to arrange objects, please refer to this page. Align is used to align the chart left, center, right, top, middle, bottom. To learn more on how to align objects you can refer to this page. Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind. The Edit Wrap Boundary option is unavailable for charts. Edit Data is used to open the 'Chart Editor' window. Chart Advanced Settings is used to open the 'Chart - Advanced Settings' window. Additionally, 3D Rotation settings are available for 3D charts: X rotation - set the required value for the X axis rotation using the keyboard or via the Left and Right arrows to the right. Y rotation - set the required value for the Y axis rotation using the keyboard or via the Up and Down arrows to the right. Perspective - set the required value for depth rotation using the keyboard or via the Narrow field of view and Widen field of view arrows to the right. Right Angle Axis - is used to set the right angle axis view. Autoscale - check this box to autoscale the depth and height values of the chart, or uncheck this box to set the depth and height values manually. Depth (% of base) - set the required depth value using the keyboard or via the arrows. Height (% of base) - set the required height value using the keyboard or via the arrows. Default Rotation - set the 3D parameters to their default. Please note that you cannot edit each element of the chart; the settings will be applied to the chart as a whole. To change the chart advanced settings, click the needed chart with the right mouse button and select Chart Advanced Settings from the right-click menu or just click the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar. The chart properties window will open: The Size tab contains the following parameters: Width and Height - use these options to change the width and/or height of the chart. If the Constant Proportions button is clicked (in this case it looks like this ), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original chart aspect ratio. The Text Wrapping tab contains the following parameters: Wrapping Style - use this option to change the way the chart is positioned relative to the text: it will either be a part of the text (in case you select the inline style) or bypassed by it from all sides (if you select one of the other styles). Inline - the chart is considered to be a part of the text, like a character, so when the text moves, the chart moves as well. In this case the positioning options are inaccessible. If one of the following styles is selected, the chart can be moved independently of the text and positioned on the page exactly: Square - the text wraps the rectangular box that bounds the chart. Tight - the text wraps the actual chart edges. Through - the text wraps around the chart edges and fills in the open white space within the chart. Top and bottom - the text is only above and below the chart. In front - the chart overlaps the text. Behind - the text overlaps the chart. If you select the square, tight, through, or top and bottom styles, you will be able to set up some additional parameters - distance from text at all sides (top, bottom, left, right). The Position tab is available only if the selected wrapping style is not inline. This tab contains the following parameters that vary depending on the selected wrapping style: The Horizontal section allows you to select one of the following three chart positioning types: Alignment (left, center, right) relative to character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin, Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) to the right of character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin, Relative position measured in percent relative to the left margin, margin, page or right margin. The Vertical section allows you to select one of the following three chart positioning types: Alignment (top, center, bottom) relative to line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin, Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) below line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin, Relative position measured in percent relative to the margin, bottom margin, page or top margin. Move object with text ensures that the chart moves along with the text to which it is anchored. Allow overlap makes it possible for two charts to overlap if you drag them near each other on the page. The Alternative Text tab allows specifying a Title and Description which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information the chart contains." + "body": "Insert a chart To insert a chart in the Document Editor, Place the cursor where the chart should be added. Switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar. Click the Chart icon on the top toolbar. Select the needed chart type from the available ones: Column Charts Clustered column Stacked column 100% stacked column 3-D Clustered Column 3-D Stacked Column 3-D 100% stacked column 3-D Column Line Charts Line Stacked line 100% stacked line Line with markers Stacked line with markers 100% stacked line with markers 3-D Line Pie Charts Pie Doughnut 3-D Pie Bar Charts Clustered bar Stacked bar 100% stacked bar 3-D clustered bar 3-D stacked bar 3-D 100% stacked bar Area Charts Area Stacked area 100% stacked area Stock Charts XY (Scatter) Charts Scatter Stacked bar Scatter with smooth lines and markers Scatter with smooth lines Scatter with straight lines and markers Scatter with straight lines Radar Charts Radar Radar with markers Filled radar Combo Charts Clustered column - line Clustered column - line on secondary axis Stacked area - clustered column Custom combination Note: ONLYOFFICE Document Editor supports the following types of charts that were created with third-party editors: Pyramid, Bar (Pyramid), Horizontal/Vertical Cylinders, Horizontal/Vertical Cones. You can open the file containing such a chart and modify it using the available chart editing tools. The following types are supported for opening only: Histogram, Waterfall, Funnel. After that, the Chart Editor window will appear where you can enter the necessary data into the cells using the following controls: and for copying and pasting the copied data and for undoing and redoing actions for inserting a function and for decreasing and increasing decimal places for changing the number format, i.e. the way the numbers you enter appear in cells for choosing a different type of chart. Click the Select data button situated in the Chart Editor window. The Chart data window will open. Use the Chart data dialog to manage Chart data range, Legend entries (Series), Horizontal (category) axis label and Switch row/column. Chart data range - select data for your chart. Click the icon on the right of the Chart data range box to select data range. Legend entries (series) - add, edit, or remove legend entries. Type or select series name for legend entries. In Legend entries (series), click Add button. In Edit series, type a new legend entry or click the icon on the right of the Select name box. Horizontal (category) axis labels - change text for category labels. In Horizontal (category) axis labels, click Edit. In Axis label range, type the labels you want to add or click the icon on the right of the Axis label range box to select data range. Switch row/column - rearrange the worksheet data that is configured in the chart not in the way that you want it. Switch rows to columns to display data on a different axis. Click OK button to apply the changes and close the window. Click the Change Chart Type button in the Chart Editor window to choose chart type and style. Select a chart from the available sections: Column, Line, Pie, Bar, Area, Stock, XY (Scatter), Radar, or Combo. When you choose Combo Charts, the Chart type window lists chart series and allows choosing the types of charts to combine and selecting data series to place on a secondary axis. Change the chart settings by clicking the Edit Chart button situated in the Chart Editor window. The Chart - Advanced Settings window will open. The Layout tab allows you to change the layout of chart elements. Specify the Chart title position in regard to your chart, selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to display no chart title, Overlay to overlay and center a title on the plot area, No overlay to display the title above the plot area. Specify the Legend position in regard to your chart, selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to display no legend, Bottom to display the legend and align it to the bottom of the plot area, Top to display the legend and align it to the top of the plot area, Right to display the legend and align it to the right of the plot area, Left to display the legend and align it to the left of the plot area, Left overlay to overlay and center the legend to the left of the plot area, Right overlay to overlay and center the legend to the right of the plot area. Specify the Data labels (i.e. text labels that represent exact values of data points) parameters: Specify the Data labels position relative to the data points, selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list. The available options vary depending on the selected chart type. For Column/Bar charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Inner bottom, Inner top, Outer top. For Line/XY (Scatter)/Stock charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Left, Right, Top, Bottom. For Pie charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Fit to width, Inner top, Outer top. For Area charts as well as for 3D Column, Line, Bar, Radar, and Combo charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center. Select the data you wish to include into your labels, checking the corresponding boxes: Series name, Category name, Value, Enter a character (comma, semicolon etc.) you wish to use for separating several labels into the Data labels separator entry field. Lines - is used to choose a line style for Line/XY (Scatter) charts. You can choose one of the following options: Straight to use straight lines between data points, Smooth to use smooth curves between data points, or None to not display lines. Markers - is used to specify whether the markers should be displayed (if the box is checked) or not (if the box is unchecked) for Line/XY (Scatter) charts. Note: the Lines and Markers options are available for Line charts and XY (Scatter) charts only. The Vertical axis tab allows you to change the parameters of the vertical axis also referred to as the values axis or y-axis which displays numeric values. Note that the vertical axis will be the category axis which displays text labels for the Bar charts, therefore in this case the Vertical axis tab options will correspond to the ones described in the next section. For the XY (Scatter) charts, both axes are value axes. Note: the Axis Settings and Gridlines sections will be disabled for Pie charts, since charts of this type have no axes and gridlines. Select Hide to hide vertical axis in the chart, leave it unchecked to have vertical axis displayed. Specify Title orientation by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display a vertical axis title Rotated to display the title from bottom to top to the left of the vertical axis, Horizontal to display the title horizontally to the left of the vertical axis. Minimum value - is used to specify the lowest value displayed at the vertical axis start. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the minimum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right. Maximum value - is used to specify the highest value displayed at the vertical axis end. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the maximum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right. Axis crosses - is used to specify a point on the vertical axis where the horizontal axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the axes' intersection point value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the axes' intersection point at the Minimum/Maximum Value on the vertical axis. Display units - is used to determine the representation of the numeric values along the vertical axis. This option can be useful if you're working with great numbers and wish the values on the axis to be displayed in a more compact and readable way (e.g. you can represent 50 000 as 50 by using the Thousands display units). Select desired units from the drop-down list: Hundreds, Thousands, 10 000, 100 000, Millions, 10 000 000, 100 000 000, Billions, Trillions, or choose the None option to return to the default units. Values in reverse order - is used to display values in the opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, the lowest value is at the bottom and the highest value is at the top of the axis. When the box is checked, the values are ordered from top to bottom. Logarithmic scale - is used to enable logarithmic scaling to the Base that is determined by the user. The Tick Options section allows adjusting the appearance of tick marks on the vertical scale. Major tick marks are the larger scale divisions, which can have labels displaying numeric values. Minor tick marks are the scale subdivisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed if the corresponding option is set on the Layout tab. The Major/minor type drop-down lists contain the following placement options: None to display no major/minor tick marks, Cross to display major/minor tick marks on both sides of the axis, In to display major/minor tick marks inside the axis, Out to display major/minor tick marks outside the axis. The Label options section allows adjusting the appearance of major tick mark labels, which display values. To specify a Label position in regard to the vertical axis, select the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display tick mark labels, Low to display tick mark labels to the left of the plot area, High to display tick mark labels to the right of the plot area, Next to axis to display tick mark labels next to the axis. To specify a Label format, click the Label format button and choose a category as deemed appropriate. Available label format categories: General Number Scientific Accounting Currency Date Time Percentage Fraction Text Custom Label format options vary depending on the selected category. For more information on changing number format, go to this page. Check Linked to source to keep number formatting from the data source in the chart. Note: Secondary axes are supported in Combo charts only. Secondary axes are useful in Combo charts when data series vary considerably or mixed types of data are used to plot a chart. Secondary Axes make it easier to read and understand a combo chart. The Secondary vertical/horizontal axis tab appears when you choose an appropriate data series for a combo chart. All the settings and options on the Secondary vertical/horizontal axis tab are the same as the settings on the vertical/horizontal axis. For a detailed description of the Vertical/horizontal axis options, see description above/below. The Horizontal axis tab allows you to change the parameters of the horizontal axis also referred to as the categories axis or x-axis which displays text labels. Note that the horizontal axis will be the value axis which displays numeric values for the Bar charts, therefore in this case the Horizontal axis tab options will correspond to the ones described in the previous section. For the XY (Scatter) charts, both axes are value axes. Select Hide to hide horizontal axis in the chart, leave it unchecked to have horizontal axis displayed. Specify Title orientation by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to display no horizontal axis title, No overlay to display the title below the horizontal axis, Gridlines are used to specify the Horizontal gridlines to display by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None, Major, Minor, or Major and minor. Axis crosses - is used to specify a point on the horizontal axis where the vertical axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the axes' intersection point value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the axes' intersection point at the Minimum/maximum value (that corresponds to the first and last category) on the horizontal axis. Axis position - is used to specify where the axis text labels should be placed: On tick marks or Between tick marks. Values in reverse order - is used to display categories in the opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, categories are displayed from left to right. When the box is checked, the categories are ordered from right to left. The Tick Options section allows adjusting the appearance of tick marks on the horizontal scale. Major tick marks are the larger divisions, which can have labels displaying category values. Minor tick marks are the smaller divisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed if the corresponding option is set on the Layout tab. You can adjust the following tick mark parameters: Major/minor type - is used to specify the following placement options: None to not display major/minor tick marks, Cross to display major/minor tick marks on both sides of the axis, In to display major/minor tick marks inside the axis, Out to display major/minor tick marks outside the axis. Interval between marks - is used to specify how many categories should be displayed between two adjacent tick marks. The Label Options section allows adjusting the appearance of labels which display categories. Label position - is used to specify where the labels should be placed in regard to the horizontal axis. Select the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to not display category labels, Low to display category labels at the bottom of the plot area, High to display category labels at the top of the plot area, Next to axis to display category labels next to the axis. Axis label distance - is used to specify how closely the labels should be placed to the axis. You can specify the necessary value in the entry field. The more the value you set, the more the distance between the axis and labels is. Interval between labels - is used to specify how often the labels should be displayed. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case labels are displayed for every category. You can select the Manual option from the drop-down list and specify the necessary value in the entry field on the right. For example, enter 2 to display labels for every other category, etc. To specify a Label format, click the Label format button and choose a category as deemed appropriate. Available label format categories: General Number Scientific Accounting Currency Date Time Percentage Fraction Text Custom Label format options vary depending on the selected category. For more information on changing number format, go to this page. Check Linked to source to keep number formatting from the data source in the chart. The Cell snapping tab contains the following parameters: Move and size with cells - this option allows you to snap the chart to the cell behind it. If the cell moves (e.g. if you insert or delete some rows/columns), the chart will be moved together with the cell. If you increase or decrease the width or height of the cell, the chart will change its size as well. Move but don't size with cells - this option allows you to snap the chart to the cell behind it, preventing the chart from being resized. If the cell moves, the chart will be moved together with the cell, but if you change the cell size, the chart dimensions remain unchanged. Don't move or size with cells - this option allows you to prevent the chart from being moved or resized if the cell position or size was changed. The Alternative text tab allows specifying a Title and Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information the chart contains. Move and resize charts Once the chart is added, you can change its size and position. To change the chart size, drag small squares situated on its edges. To maintain the original proportions of the selected chart while resizing, hold down the Shift key and drag one of the corner icons. To alter the chart position, use the icon that appears after hovering your mouse cursor over the chart. Drag the chart to the necessary position without releasing the mouse button. When you move the chart, guidelines are displayed to help you position the object on the page precisely (if a wrapping style other than inline is selected). Note: the list of keyboard shortcuts that can be used when working with objects is available here. Edit chart elements To edit the chart Title, select the default text with the mouse and type the required text. To change the font formatting within text elements, such as the chart title, axes titles, legend entries, data labels etc., select the necessary text element by left-clicking it. Then use the corresponding icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar to change the font type, size, color or its decoration style. When the chart is selected, the Shape settings icon is also available on the right, since a shape is used as a background for the chart. You can click this icon to open the Shape settings tab on the right sidebar and adjust Fill and Line of the shape. Note that you cannot change the shape type. Using the Shape settings tab on the right panel, you can both adjust the chart area itself and change the chart elements, such as plot area, data series, chart title, legend etc and apply different fill types to them. Select the chart element clicking it with the left mouse button and choose the preferred fill type: solid color, gradient, texture or picture, pattern. Specify the fill parameters and set the Opacity level if necessary. When you select a vertical or horizontal axis or gridlines, the stroke settings are only available at the Shape settings tab: color, width, type, and opacity. For more details on how to work with shape colors, fills and stroke, you can refer to this page. Note: the Show shadow option is also available at the Shape settings tab, but it is disabled for chart elements. If you need to resize chart elements, left-click to select the needed element and drag one of 8 white squares located along the perimeter of the element. To change the position of the element, left-click on it, make sure your cursor changed to , hold the left mouse button and drag the element to the needed position. To delete a chart element, select it by left-clicking and press the Delete key on the keyboard. You can also rotate 3D charts using the mouse. Left-click within the plot area and hold the mouse button. Drag the cursor without releasing the mouse button to change the 3D chart orientation. Adjust chart settings Some of the chart settings can be altered using the Chart settings tab of the right sidebar. To activate it, click the chart and choose the Chart settings icon on the right. Here, you can change the following properties: Size is used to view the Width and Height of the current chart. Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind (for more information see the advanced settings description below). Change Chart Type is used to change the selected chart type and/or style. To select the necessary chart Style, use the second drop-down menu in the Change Chart Type section. Edit Data is used to open the 'Chart Editor' window. Note: to quickly open the 'Chart Editor' window, you can also double-click the chart in the document. You can also find some of these options in the right-click menu. The menu options are: Cut, Copy, Paste - standard options which are used to cut or copy the selected text/object and paste the previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position. Arrange is used to bring the selected chart to the foreground, send it to the background, move forward or backward as well as group or ungroup charts to perform operations with several of them at once. To learn more on how to arrange objects, please refer to this page. Align is used to align the chart left, center, right, top, middle, bottom. To learn more on how to align objects, you can refer to this page. Wrapping Style is used to select a text wrapping style from the available ones - inline, square, tight, through, top and bottom, in front, behind. The Edit Wrap Boundary option is unavailable for charts. Edit Data is used to open the 'Chart Editor' window. Chart Advanced Settings is used to open the 'Chart - Advanced Settings' window. Additionally, 3D Rotation settings are available for 3D charts: X rotation - set the required value for the X axis rotation using the keyboard or via the Left and Right arrows to the right. Y rotation - set the required value for the Y axis rotation using the keyboard or via the Up and Down arrows to the right. Perspective - set the required value for depth rotation using the keyboard or via the Narrow field of view and Widen field of view arrows to the right. Right Angle Axis - is used to set the right angle axis view. Autoscale - check this box to autoscale the depth and height values of the chart, or uncheck this box to set the depth and height values manually. Depth (% of base) - set the required depth value using the keyboard or via the arrows. Height (% of base) - set the required height value using the keyboard or via the arrows. Default Rotation - set the 3D parameters to their default. Please note that you cannot edit each element of the chart; the settings will be applied to the chart as a whole. To change the chart advanced settings, click the needed chart with the right mouse button and select Chart Advanced Settings from the right-click menu, or just click the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar. The chart properties window will open: The Size tab contains the following parameters: Width and Height - use these options to change the width and/or height of the chart. If the Constant Proportions button is clicked (in this case it looks like this ), the width and height will be changed together, preserving the original chart aspect ratio. The Text Wrapping tab contains the following parameters: Wrapping Style - use this option to change the way the chart is positioned relative to the text: it will either be a part of the text (in case you select the inline style) or bypassed by it from all sides (if you select one of the other styles). Inline - the chart is considered to be a part of the text, like a character, so when the text moves, the chart moves as well. In this case, the positioning options are inaccessible. If one of the following styles is selected, the chart can be moved independently of the text and positioned on the page exactly: Square - the text wraps the rectangular box that bounds the chart. Tight - the text wraps the actual chart edges. Through - the text wraps around the chart edges and fills in the open white space within the chart. Top and bottom - the text is only above and below the chart. In front - the chart overlaps the text. Behind - the text overlaps the chart. If you select the square, tight, through, or top and bottom styles, you will be able to set up some additional parameters - distance from text at all sides (top, bottom, left, right). The Position tab is available only if the selected wrapping style is not inline. This tab contains the following parameters that vary depending on the selected wrapping style: The Horizontal section allows you to select one of the following three chart positioning types: Alignment (left, center, right) relative to character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin, Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) to the right of character, column, left margin, margin, page or right margin, Relative position measured in percent relative to the left margin, margin, page or right margin. The Vertical section allows you to select one of the following three chart positioning types: Alignment (top, center, bottom) relative to line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin, Absolute Position measured in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) below line, margin, bottom margin, paragraph, page or top margin, Relative position measured in percent relative to the margin, bottom margin, page or top margin. Move object with text ensures that the chart moves along with the text to which it is anchored. Allow overlap makes it possible for two charts to overlap if you drag them near each other on the page. The Alternative Text tab allows specifying a Title and Description which will be read to the people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information the chart contains." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertContentControls.htm", @@ -315,6 +315,11 @@ var indexes = "title": "Insert equations", "body": "The Document Editor allows you to build equations using the built-in templates, edit them, insert special characters (including mathematical operators, Greek letters, accents, etc.). Add a new equation To insert an equation from the gallery, put the cursor within the necessary line, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the arrow next to the Equation icon on the top toolbar, select the required equation category in the toolbar above the inserted equation, or in the opened drop-down list select the equation category you need. The following categories are currently available: Symbols, Fractions, Scripts, Radicals, Integrals, Large Operators, Brackets, Functions, Accents, Limits and Logarithms, Operators, Matrices, click the Equation Settings symbol in the toolbar above the inserted equation to access more settings, e.g., Unicode or LaTeX, Professional or Linear, and Change to Inline, click the certain symbol/equation in the corresponding set of templates, to hide the toolbar, click the Hide Equation Toolbar option in the Equation Settings. The selected symbol/equation box will be inserted at the cursor position. If the selected line is empty, the equation will be centered. To align such an equation to the left or to the right, click on the equation box and use the or icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar. Each equation template represents a set of slots. A slot is a position for each element that makes up the equation. An empty slot (also called as a placeholder) has a dotted outline . You need to fill in all the placeholders specifying the necessary values. Note: to start creating an equation, you can also use the Alt + = keyboard shortcut. It's also possible to add a caption to the equation. To learn more on how to work with captions for equations, please refer to this article. Enter values The insertion point specifies where the next character will appear. To position the insertion point precisely, click within the placeholder and use the keyboard arrows to move the insertion point by one character left/right or one line up/down. If you need to create a new placeholder below the slot with the insertion point within the selected template, press Enter. Once the insertion point is positioned, you can fill in the placeholder: enter the desired numeric/literal value using the keyboard, insert a special character using the Symbols palette from the Equation menu on the Insert tab of the top toolbar or typing them from the keyboard (see the Math AutoСorrect option description), add another equation template from the palette to create a complex nested equation. The size of the primary equation will be automatically adjusted to fit its content. The size of the nested equation elements depends on the primary equation placeholder size, but it cannot be smaller than the sub-subscript size. To add some new equation elements you can also use the right-click menu options: To add a new argument that goes before or after the existing one within Brackets, you can right-click on the existing argument and select the Insert argument before/after option from the menu. To add a new equation within Cases with several conditions from the Brackets group (or equations of other types, if you've previously added new placeholders by pressing Enter), you can right-click on an empty placeholder or entered equation within it and select the Insert equation before/after option from the menu. To add a new row or a column in a Matrix, you can right-click on a placeholder within it, select the Insert option from the menu, then select Row Above/Below or Column Left/Right. Note: currently, equations cannot be entered using the linear format, i.e. \\sqrt(4&x^3). When entering the values of the mathematical expressions, you do not need to use Spacebar as the spaces between the characters and signs of operations are set automatically. If the equation is too long and does not fit a single line, automatic line breaking occurs while typing. You can also insert a line break in a specific position by right-clicking on a mathematical operator and selecting the Insert manual break option from the menu. The selected operator will start a new line. Once the manual line break is added, you can press the Tab key to align the new line to any math operator of the previous line. To delete the added manual line break, right-click on the mathematical operator that starts a new line and select the Delete manual break option. Format equations To increase or decrease the equation font size, click anywhere within the equation box and use the and buttons on the Home tab of the top toolbar or select the necessary font size from the list. All the equation elements will change correspondingly. The letters within the equation are italicized by default. If necessary, you can change the font style (bold, italic, strikeout) or color for a whole equation or its part. The underlined style can be applied to the entire equation only, not to individual characters. Select the necessary part of the equation by clicking and dragging it. The selected part will be highlighted in blue. Then use the necessary buttons on the Home tab of the top toolbar to format the selected part. For example, you can remove the italic format for ordinary words that are not variables or constants. To modify some equation elements, you can also use the right-click menu options: To change the Fractions format, you can right-click on a fraction and select the Change to skewed/linear/stacked fraction option from the menu (the available options differ depending on the selected fraction type). To change the Scripts position relating to text, you can right-click on the equation that includes scripts and select the Scripts before/after text option from the menu. To change the argument size for Scripts, Radicals, Integrals, Large Operators, Limits and Logarithms, Operators as well as for overbraces/underbraces and templates with grouping characters from the Accents group, you can right-click on the argument you want to change and select the Increase/Decrease argument size option from the menu. To specify whether an empty degree placeholder should be displayed or not for a Radical, you can right-click on the radical and select the Hide/Show degree option from the menu. To specify whether an empty limit placeholder should be displayed or not for an Integral or Large Operator, you can right-click on the equation and select the Hide/Show top/bottom limit option from the menu. To change the limits position relating to the integral or operator sign for Integrals or Large Operators, you can right-click on the equation and select the Change limits location option from the menu. The limits can be displayed on the right of the operator sign (as subscripts and superscripts) or directly above and below the operator sign. To change the limits position relating to text for Limits and Logarithms and templates with grouping characters from the Accents group, you can right-click on the equation and select the Limit over/under text option from the menu. To choose which of the Brackets should be displayed, you can right-click on the expression within them and select the Hide/Show opening/closing bracket option from the menu. To control the Brackets size, you can right-click on the expression within them. The Stretch brackets option is selected by default so that the brackets can grow according to the expression within them, but you can deselect this option to prevent brackets from stretching. When this option is activated, you can also use the Match brackets to argument height option. To change the character position relating to text for overbraces/underbraces or overbars/underbars from the Accents group, you can right-click on the template and select the Char/Bar over/under text option from the menu. To choose which borders should be displayed for a Boxed formula from the Accents group, you can right-click on the equation and select the Border properties option from the menu, then select Hide/Show top/bottom/left/right border or Add/Hide horizontal/vertical/diagonal line. To specify whether empty placeholders should be displayed or not for a Matrix, you can right-click on it and select the Hide/Show placeholder option from the menu. To align some equation elements you can use the right-click menu options: To align equations within Cases with several conditions from the Brackets group (or equations of other types, if you've previously added new placeholders by pressing Enter), you can right-click on an equation, select the Alignment option from the menu, then select the alignment type: Top, Center, or Bottom. To align a Matrix vertically, you can right-click on the matrix, select the Matrix Alignment option from the menu, then select the alignment type: Top, Center, or Bottom. To align elements within a Matrix column horizontally, you can right-click on a placeholder within the column, select the Column Alignment option from the menu, then select the alignment type: Left, Center, or Right. Delete equation elements To delete a part of the equation, select it by dragging the mouse or holding down the Shift key and using the arrow buttons, then press the Delete key on the keyboard. A slot can only be deleted together with the template it belongs to. To delete the entire equation, select it completely by dragging the mouse or double-clicking on the equation box and press the Delete key on the keyboard. To delete some equation elements, you can also use the right-click menu options: To delete a Radical, you can right-click on it and select the Delete radical option from the menu. To delete a Subscript and/or Superscript, you can right-click on the expression that contains them and select the Remove subscript/superscript option from the menu. If the expression contains scripts that go before text, the Remove scripts option is available. To delete Brackets, you can right-click on the expression within them and select the Delete enclosing characters or Delete enclosing characters and separators option from the menu. If the expression within Brackets inclides more than one argument, you can right-click on the argument you want to delete and select the Delete argument option from the menu. If Brackets enclose more than one equation (i.e. Cases with several conditions), you can right-click on the equation you want to delete and select the Delete equation option from the menu. This option is also available for equations of other types if you've previously added new placeholders by pressing Enter. To delete a Limit, you can right-click on it and select the Remove limit option from the menu. To delete an Accent, you can right-click on it and select the Remove accent character, Delete char or Remove bar option from the menu (the available options differ depending on the selected accent). To delete a row or a column of a Matrix, you can right-click on the placeholder within the row/column you need to delete, select the Delete option from the menu, then select Delete Row/Column. Convert equations If you open an existing document containing equations which were created with an old version of equation editor (for example, with MS Office versions before 2007), you need to convert these equations to the Office Math ML format to be able to edit them. To convert an equation, double-click it. The warning window will appear: To convert the selected equation only, click the Yes button in the warning window. To convert all equations in this document, check the Apply to all equations box and click Yes. Once the equation is converted, you can edit it." }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertFieldCodes.htm", + "title": "Insert field codes", + "body": "In the Document Editor, you can add fields with dynamic content that depends on your system info or other content. Please do not confuse fields with content controls as these are two different features. To insert a field, Go to the Insert tab. Click the Field button. In the opened dialogue window, enter the field code you need to be displayed and click OK. The field codes are as follows: ONLYOFFICE field code Description Syntax Switches MERGEFIELD The code inserts a link to a data field from the other source into the current document. When merging, data from the other source will replace the current field value. { MERGEFIELD FieldName [ Switches ]} \\b - specifies the text to be inserted before the MergeField field, if the latter is not blank. \\f - specifies the text to be inserted after the MergeField field, if the latter is not blank. \\m - specifies that the MergeField field is a mapped one. \\v - enables character conversion for vertical formatting. PAGENUM The code inserts the current page number. PAGECOUNT The code inserts the total number of pages in the current document. FORMTEXT TOC The code creates a table of contents. The table of contents is based on the applied heading styles, outline levels, captions, etc., specified by Table of Contents Entry fields. { TOC [Switches ] } \\a - creates a list of objects that does not include labels and numbers. \\b - creates a table of contents for the bookmarked part of the document. \\с - creates a list of objects of the specified type. \\d - determines the separator type for page numbers. \\f - creates a table of contents based on the TC fields and not the document structure levels. \\h - applies hyperlink formatting to the table of contents. \\l - specifies the required levels of TC fields. The levels that are not included in the specified range will be omitted. \\n - creates a table of content either fully or using only the elements from the specified range (e.g., \"1-9\"), omitting page numbers. \\o - creates a table of contents using only structure levels of the document and not the TC fields. \\p - specifies the separator between the element and the corresponding page number. \\s - adds a sequence number to the page number. \\t - creates a table of contents using only custom styles instead of the default styles. \\u - creates a table of contents using only the applied paragraph formatting outline level. \\w - preserves the tabulation in table entries. \\x - preserves line breaks in table entries. \\z - hides page number while viewing the table of content as a web document layout. PAGEREF The code inserts the page number as a bookmark for cross-reference. { PAGEREF Bookmark [\\* Format Switch ] } \\h - creates a hyperlink to the specified paragraph. \\p - inserts the position of the specified paragraph relative to the bookmark. PAGE The code inserts the number of the current page. { PAGE [\\* Format Switch ] } NUMPAGES The code inserts the total number of pages in the document. { NUMPAGES } ASK The code inserts a field that prompts the user to enter data that will then be stored as a bookmark. The editor will prompt the user each time this field is refreshed or during merging. { ASK Bookmark\"Prompt\" [Optional switches ] } \\d - inserts the default replacement text as a bookmark. \\o - prompts just once when merging documents. REF The code inserts the contents of the bookmark. The bookmark should be inserted in the document. { [REF] Bookmark [Switches ] } \\d - specifies the separator for the page number. \\f - increments footnote or note numbers and inserts them into the document. \\h - creates a hyperlink to the specified paragraph. \\n - adds paragraph numbers, if any. \\p - inserts the position of the specified paragraph relative to the bookmark. \\r - inserts the relative number of the specified paragraph. \\t - omits symbols that are non-numerical or non-delimiter. \\w - inserts the full number of the specified paragraph. HYPERLINK The code inserts a hyperlink to an element in the document, to a document on your hard disk drive, portal, or a third-party resource. { HYPERLINK \"Filename\" [Switches ] } \\l - specifies the element within the document to go to. \\m - specifies coordinates to a hyperlink for a server-side image map. \\n - opens the end document in a new window. \\o - specifies the ScreenTip text. \\t - specifies the target of the hyperlink. TIME The code inserts the current time based on the user's system into the document. { TIME [\\@ \"Date-Time Picture\"] } DATE The code inserts the current date based on the user's system into the document. { DATE [ \\@ \"Date-Time Picture\"] [Switches] } FORMULA The code performs calculation as per the entered formula. { = Formula [Bookmark ] [\\#Numeric Picture ] } SEQ The code provides a way to number chapters, tables, figures, and other elements in a document in order. If you add, remove, or relocate an item along with its Seq field, you can update the other Seq fields in the document to show the revised sequence. { SEQ Identifier [Bookmark ] [Switches ] } \\c - inserts the closest preceding sequence number. \\h - hides the field result (used for cross-referencing). \\n - inserts the next sequence number. \\r - the numeration starts with the specified nymber. \\s - the numeration starts with the specified outline level. STYLEREF The code ads adds text that has been formatted using a specific style. When placed in a header or footer, it displays the first or last instance of text formatted with that style from the main content of the current page, enabling the creation of dictionary-style headers or footers. { STYLEREF StyleIdentifier [Switches ] } \\l - starts the search from the bottom of the current page. \\n - inserts the numeration from the specified paragraph. \\p - inserts the position of the specified paragraph relative to the bookmark. \\r - inserts the relative number of the specified paragraph. \\t - omits symbols that are non-numerical or non-delimiter. \\w - inserts the full number of the specified paragraph. NOTEREF The code inserts a footnote or endnote reference mark that is marked with a bookmark to make references to the same note or to cross-reference footnotes and endnotes. If the sequence of the notes is changed, the result of the field will reflect the new numbering. { NOTEREF Bookmark [Switches] } \\f - inserts a reference mark formatted with the Footnote reference style or the Endnote reference style. \\h - creates a hyperlink to the specified foot- or endnote. \\p - inserts the relative position of the foot- or endnote." + }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertFootnotes.htm", "title": "Insert footnotes", @@ -338,12 +343,12 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertPageNumbers.htm", "title": "Insert page numbers", - "body": "To insert page numbers in the Document Editor, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Header/Footer icon on the top toolbar, choose the Insert Page Number submenu, select one of the following options: To add a page number to each page of your document, select the page number position on the page. To insert a page number at the current cursor position, select the To Current Position option. Note: to insert a current page number at the current cursor position you can also use the Ctrl+Shift+P key combination. OR switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Header/Footer icon on the top toolbar, click the Insert page number option in the menu and choose the position of the page number. To insert the total number of pages in your document (e.g. if you want to create the Page X of Y entry): put the cursor where you want to insert the total number of pages, click the Header/Footer icon on the top toolbar, select the Insert number of pages option. To edit the page number settings, double-click the page number added, change the current parameters on the right sidebar: Set the Position of page numbers on the page accordingly to the top and bottom of the page. Check the Different first page box to apply a different page number to the very first page or in case you don't want to add any number to it at all. Use the Different odd and even pages box to insert different page numbers for odd and even pages. The Link to Previous option is available in case you've previously added sections into your document. If not, it will be grayed out. Moreover, this option is also unavailable for the very first section (i.e. when a header or footer that belongs to the first section is selected). By default, this box is checked, so that unified numbering is applied to all the sections. If you select a header or footer area, you will see that the area is marked with the Same as Previous label. Uncheck the Link to Previous box to use different page numbering for each section of the document. The Same as Previous label will no longer be displayed. The Page Numbering section allows adjusting page numbering options throughout different sections of the document. The Continue from previous section option is selected by default and makes it possible to keep continuous page numbering after a section break. If you want to start page numbering with a specific number in the current section of the document, select the Start at radio button and enter the required starting value in the field on the right. To return to the document editing, double-click within the working area." + "body": "To insert page numbers in the Document Editor, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Header/Footer icon on the top toolbar, choose the Insert Page Number submenu, select one of the following options: To add a page number to each page of your document, select the page number position on the page. To insert a page number at the current cursor position, select the To Current Position option. Note: to insert a current page number at the current cursor position, you can also use the Ctrl+Shift+P key combination. OR switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Header/Footer icon on the top toolbar, click the Insert page number option in the menu and choose the position of the page number. To insert the total number of pages in your document (e.g., if you want to create the Page X of Y entry): put the cursor where you want to insert the total number of pages, click the Header/Footer icon on the top toolbar, select the Insert number of pages option. To edit the page number settings, double-click the page number added, change the current parameters on the right sidebar: Set the Position of page numbers on the page accordingly to the top and bottom of the page. Check the Different first page box to apply a different page number to the very first page or in case you don't want to add any number to it at all. Use the Different odd and even pages box to insert different page numbers for odd and even pages. The Link to Previous option is available in case you've previously added sections into your document. If not, it will be grayed out. Moreover, this option is also unavailable for the very first section (i.e. when a header or footer that belongs to the first section is selected). By default, this box is checked, so that unified numbering is applied to all the sections. If you select a header or footer area, you will see that the area is marked with the Same as Previous label. Uncheck the Link to Previous box to use different page numbering for each section of the document. The Same as Previous label will no longer be displayed. The Page Numbering section allows adjusting page numbering options throughout different sections of the document. The Continue from previous section option is selected by default and makes it possible to keep continuous page numbering after a section break. If you want to start page numbering with a specific number in the current section of the document, select the Start at radio button and enter the required starting value in the field on the right. Use the Number format dropdown menu to quickly change the format of the page numbers, e.g., \"I, II, III, IV...\" To return to the document editing, double-click within the working area." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertReferences.htm", "title": "Insert references", - "body": "ONLYOFFICE Document Editor supports Mendeley, Zotero and EasyBib reference managers to insert references into your document. Mendeley Connect ONLYOFFICE to Mendeley Login to your Mendeley account. In your document, switch to the Plugins tab and choose Mendeley, a sidebar will open on the left side of your document. Click the Copy Link and Open Form button. The browser opens a form on the Mendeley site. Complete this form and note the Application ID for ONLYOFFICE. Switch back to your document. Enter the Application ID and click Save. Click Login. Click Proceed. Now ONLYOFFICE is connected to your Mendeley account. Inserting references using Mendeley Open the document and place the cursor on the spot where you want to insert the reference(s). Switch to the Plugins tab and choose Mendeley. Enter a search text and hit Enter on your keyboard. Click one or more check-boxes. [Optional] Enter a new search text and click on one or more check-boxes. Choose the reference style from the Style pull-down menu. Click the Insert Bibliography button. Zotero Connect ONLYOFFICE to Zotero Login to your Zotero account. In your document, switch to the Plugins tab and choose Zotero, a sidebar will open on the left side of your document. Click the Zotero API settings link. On the Zotero site, create a new key for Zotero, copy it and save it for later use. Switch to your document and paste the API key. Click Save. Now ONLYOFFICE is connected to your Zotero account. Inserting references using Zotero Open the document and place the cursor on the spot where you want to insert the reference(s). Switch to the Plugins tab and choose Zotero. Enter a search text and hit Enter on your keyboard. Click one or more check-boxes. [Optional] Enter a new search text and click on one or more check-boxes. Choose the reference style from the Style pull-down menu. Click the Insert Bibliography button. EasyBib Open the document and place the cursor on the spot where you want to insert the reference(s). Switch to the Plugins tab and choose EasyBib. Select the type of source you want to find. Enter a search text and hit Enter on your keyboard. Click '+' on the right side of the suitable Book/Journal article/Website. It will be added to Bibliography. Select references style. Click the Add Bibliography to Doc to insert the references." + "body": "ONLYOFFICE Document Editor supports Mendeley, Zotero and EasyBib reference managers to insert references into your document. Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager. Mendeley Connect ONLYOFFICE to Mendeley Login to your Mendeley account. In your document, switch to the Plugins tab and choose Mendeley, a sidebar will open on the left side of your document. Click the Copy Link and Open Form button. The browser opens a form on the Mendeley site. Complete this form and note the Application ID for ONLYOFFICE. Switch back to your document. Enter the Application ID and click Save. Click Login. Click Proceed. Now ONLYOFFICE is connected to your Mendeley account. Inserting references using Mendeley Open the document and place the cursor on the spot where you want to insert the reference(s). Switch to the Plugins tab and choose Mendeley. Enter a search text and hit Enter on your keyboard. Click one or more check-boxes. [Optional] Enter a new search text and click on one or more check-boxes. Choose the reference style from the Style pull-down menu. Click the Insert Bibliography button. Zotero Connect ONLYOFFICE to Zotero Login to your Zotero account. In your document, switch to the Plugins tab and choose Zotero, a sidebar will open on the left side of your document. Click the Zotero API settings link. On the Zotero site, create a new key for Zotero, copy it and save it for later use. Switch to your document and paste the API key. Click Save. Now ONLYOFFICE is connected to your Zotero account. Inserting references using Zotero Open the document and place the cursor on the spot where you want to insert the reference(s). Switch to the Plugins tab and choose Zotero. Enter a search text and hit Enter on your keyboard. Click one or more check-boxes. [Optional] Enter a new search text and click on one or more check-boxes. Choose the reference style from the Style pull-down menu. Click the Insert Bibliography button. EasyBib Open the document and place the cursor on the spot where you want to insert the reference(s). Switch to the Plugins tab and choose EasyBib. Select the type of source you want to find. Enter a search text and hit Enter on your keyboard. Click '+' on the right side of the suitable Book/Journal article/Website. It will be added to Bibliography. Select references style. Click the Add Bibliography to Doc to insert the references." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertSmartArt.htm", @@ -360,6 +365,11 @@ var indexes = "title": "Insert tables", "body": "Insert a table To insert a table in the Document Editor, place the cursor where the table should be added, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Table icon on the top toolbar, select the option to create a table: either a table with predefined number of cells (10 by 8 cells maximum) If you want to quickly add a table, just select the number of rows (8 maximum) and columns (10 maximum). or a custom table In case you need more than 10 by 8 cell table, select the Insert Custom Table option that will open the window where you can enter the necessary number of rows and columns respectively, then click the OK button. If you want to draw a table using the mouse, select the Draw Table option. This can be useful, if you want to create a table with rows and columns of different sizes. The mouse cursor will turn into a pencil . Draw a rectangular shape where you want to add a table, then add rows by drawing horizontal lines and columns by drawing vertical lines within the table boundary. If you want to convert an existing text into a table, select the Convert Text to Table option. This feature can prove useful when you already have some text that you have decided to arrange into a table. The Convert Text to Table window consists of 3 sections: Table Size. Choose the required number of columns/rows you want to distribute your text into. You can either use the up/down arrow buttons or enter the number manually via keyboard. Autofit Behavior. Check the needed option to set the text fitting behavior: Fixed column width (set to Auto by default. You can either use the up/down arrow buttons or enter the number manually via keyboard), Autofit to contents (the column width corresponds with the text length), Autofit to window (the column width corresponds with the page width). Separate Text at. Check the needed option to set a delimiter type for your text: Paragraphs, Tabs, Semicolons, and Other (enter the preferred delimiter manually). Click OK to convert your text to table. If you want to insert a table as an OLE object: Select the Insert Spreadsheet option. The corresponding window appears where you can enter the required data and format it using the Spreadsheet Editor formatting tools such as choosing font, type and style, setting number format, inserting functions, formatting tables etc. The header contains the Visible area button in the top right corner of the window. Choose the Edit Visible Area option to select the area that will be shown when the object is inserted into the document; other data is not lost, it is just hidden. Click Done when ready. Click the Show Visible Area button to see the selected area that will have a blue border. When ready, click the Save & Exit button. once the table is added you can change its properties, size and position. To resize a table, hover the mouse cursor over the handle in its lower right corner and drag it until the table reaches the necessary size. You can also manually change the width of a certain column or the height of a row. Move the mouse cursor over the right border of the column so that the cursor turns into the bidirectional arrow and drag the border to the left or right to set the necessary width. To change the height of a single row manually, move the mouse cursor over the bottom border of the row so that the cursor turns into the bidirectional arrow and drag the border up or down. To move a table, hold down the handle in its upper left corner and drag it to the necessary place in the document. It's also possible to add a caption to the table. To learn more on how to work with captions for tables, you can refer to this article. Select a table or its part To select an entire table, click the handle in its upper left corner. To select a certain cell, move the mouse cursor to the left side of the necessary cell so that the cursor turns into the black arrow , then left-click. To select a certain row, move the mouse cursor to the left border of the table next to the necessary row so that the cursor turns into the horizontal black arrow , then left-click. To select a certain column, move the mouse cursor to the top border of the necessary column so that the cursor turns into the downward black arrow , then left-click. It's also possible to select a cell, row, column or table using options from the contextual menu or from the Rows & Columns section on the right sidebar. Note: to move around in a table you can use keyboard shortcuts. Adjust table settings Some of the table properties as well as its structure can be altered using the right-click menu. The menu options are: Cut, Copy, Paste - standard options which are used to cut or copy the selected text/object and paste the previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position. Select is used to select a row, column, cell, or table. Insert is used to insert a row above or row below the row where the cursor is placed as well as to insert a column at the left or right side from the column where the cursor is placed. It's also possible to insert several rows or columns. If you select the Several Rows/Columns option, the Insert Several window will appear. Select the Rows or Columns option from the list, specify the number of rows/column you want to add, choose where they should be added: Above the cursor or Below the cursor and click OK. Delete is used to delete a row, column, table or cells. If you select the Cells option, the Delete Cells window will open, where you can select if you want to Shift cells left, Delete entire row, or Delete entire column. Merge Cells is available if two or more cells are selected and is used to merge them. It's also possible to merge cells by erasing a boundary between them using the eraser tool. To do this, click the Table icon on the top toolbar, choose the Erase Table option. The mouse cursor will turn into the eraser . Move the mouse cursor over the border between the cells you want to merge and erase it. Split Cell... is used to open a window where you can select the needed number of columns and rows the cell will be split in. It's also possible to split a cell by drawing rows or columns using the pencil tool. To do this, click the Table icon on the top toolbar, choose the Draw Table option. The mouse cursor will turn into the pencil . Draw a horizontal line to create a row or a vertical line to create a column. Distribute rows is used to adjust the selected cells so that they have the same height without changing the overall table height. Distribute columns is used to adjust the selected cells so that they have the same width without changing the overall table width. Cell Vertical Alignment is used to align the text top, center or bottom in the selected cell. Text Direction - is used to change the text orientation in a cell. You can place the text horizontally, vertically from top to bottom (Rotate Text Down), or vertically from bottom to top (Rotate Text Up). Table Advanced Settings is used to open the 'Table - Advanced Settings' window. Hyperlink is used to insert a hyperlink. Paragraph Advanced Settings is used to open the 'Paragraph - Advanced Settings' window. You can also change the table properties on the right sidebar: Rows and Columns are used to select the table parts that you want to be highlighted. For rows: Header - to highlight the first row Total - to highlight the last row Banded - to highlight every other row For columns: First - to highlight the first column Last - to highlight the last column Banded - to highlight every other column Select from Template is used to choose a table template from the available ones. Borders Style is used to select the border size, color, style as well as background color. Rows & Columns is used to perform some operations with the table: select, delete, insert rows and columns, merge cells, split a cell. Rows & Columns Size is used to adjust the width and height of the currently selected cell. In this section, you can also Distribute rows so that all the selected cells have equal height or Distribute columns so that all the selected cells have equal width. Add formula is used to insert a formula into the selected table cell. Repeat as header row at the top of each page is used to insert the same header row at the top of each page in long tables. Convert Table to Text is used to arrange the table in a plain text form. The Convert Table to Text window sets the delimiter type for the conversion: Paragraph marks, Tabs, Semicolons, and Other (enter the preferred delimiter manually). The text in each cell of the table is considered a separate and individual element of the future text. Show advanced settings is used to open the 'Table - Advanced Settings' window. Adjust table advanced settings To change the advanced table properties, click the table with the right mouse button and select the Table Advanced Settings option from the right-click menu or use the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar. The table properties window will open: The Table tab allows changing the properties of the entire table. The Table Size section contains the following parameters: Width - by default, the table width is automatically adjusted to fit the page width, i.e. the table occupies all the space between the left and right page margin. You can check this box and specify the necessary table width manually. Measure in allows specifying the table width in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) or in Percent of the overall page width. Note: you can also adjust the table size manually changing the row height and column width. Move the mouse cursor over a row/column border until it turns into the bidirectional arrow and drag the border. You can also use the markers on the horizontal ruler to change the column width and the markers on the vertical ruler to change the row height. Automatically resize to fit contents - allows automatically change the width of each column in accordance with the text within its cells. The Default Cell Margins section allows changing the space between the text within the cells and the cell border used by default. The Options section allows changing the following parameter: Spacing between cells - the cell spacing which will be filled with the Table Background color. The Cell tab allows changing the properties of individual cells. First you need to select the required cell or select the entire table to change the properties of all its cells. The Cell Size section contains the following parameters: Preferred width - allows setting the preferred cell width. This is the size that a cell strives to fit, but in some cases, it may not be possible to fit this exact value. For example, if the text within a cell exceeds the specified width, it will be broken into the next line so that the preferred cell width remains unchanged, but if you insert a new column, the preferred width will be reduced. Measure in - allows specifying the cell width in absolute units i.e. Centimeters/Points/Inches (depending on the option specified on the File -> Advanced Settings... tab) or in Percent of the overall table width. Note: you can also adjust the cell width manually. To make a single cell in a column wider or narrower than the overall column width, select the necessary cell and move the mouse cursor over its right border until it turns into the bidirectional arrow, then drag the border. To change the width of all the cells in a column, use the markers on the horizontal ruler to change the column width. The Cell Margins allows adjusting the space between the text within the cells and the cell border. By default, the standard values are used (the default, these values can also be altered on the Table tab), but you can uncheck the Use default margins box and enter the necessary values manually. The Cell Options section allows changing the following parameter: The Wrap text option is enabled by default. It allows wrapping the text within a cell that exceeds its width onto the next line expanding the row height and keeping the column width unchanged. The Borders & Background tab contains the following parameters: Border parameters (size, color and presence or absence) - set the border size, select its color and choose the way it will be displayed in the cells. Note: in case you choose not to show the table borders by clicking the button or deselecting all the borders manually on the diagram, they will be indicated with a dotted line in the document. To make them disappear at all, click the Nonprinting characters icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar and select the Hidden Table Borders option. Cell Background - the color for the background within the cells (available only if one or more cells are selected or the Allow spacing between cells option is selected at the Table tab). Table Background - the color for the table background or the space background between the cells in case the Allow spacing between cells option is selected on the Table tab. The Table Position tab is available only if the Flow table option on the Text Wrapping tab is selected and contains the following parameters: Horizontal parameters include the table alignment (left, center, right) relative to margin, page or text as well as the table position to the right of margin, page or text. Vertical parameters include the table alignment (top, center, bottom) relative to margin, page or text as well as the table position below margin, page or text. The Options section allows changing the following parameters: Move object with text ensures that the table moves with the text. Allow overlap controls whether two tables are merged into one large table or overlap if you drag them near each other on the page. The Text Wrapping tab contains the following parameters: Text wrapping style - Inline table or Flow table. Use the necessary option to change the way the table is positioned relative to the text: it will either be a part of the text (in case you select the inline table) or bypassed by it from all sides (if you select the flow table). After you select the wrapping style, the additional wrapping parameters can be set both for inline and flow tables: For the inline table, you can specify the table alignment and indent from left. For the flow table, you can specify the distance from text and table position on the Table Position tab. The Alternative Text tab allows specifying the Title and Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand the contents of the table." }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertTextFromFile.htm", + "title": "Insert text from file", + "body": "In the Document Editor, you can insert text from file preserving the formatting. Switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar. Click the Text from File icon. Select one of the following options: Text from the local file - select a file on your hard disk drive to insert it into the document. Text from the URL file - enter the required URL to insert the text from it. Please note that this shall be a publicly accessible text file for the process to run properly. Text from the storage file - select a file from your ONLYOFFICE portal to insert its contents." + }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertTextObjects.htm", "title": "Insert text objects", @@ -368,12 +378,12 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/Jitsi.htm", "title": "Make Audio and Video Calls", - "body": "Audio and video calls are immediately accessible from ONLYOFFICE Document Editor, using Jitsi plugin. Jitsi provides video conferencing capabilities that are secure and easy to deploy. Note: Jitsi plugin is not installed by default and shall be added manually. Please, refer to the corresponding article to find the manual installation guide Adding plugins to ONLYOFFICE Cloud or Adding new plugins to server editors Switch to the Plugins tab and click the Jitsi icon on the top toolbar. Fill in the fields at the bottom of the left sidebar before you start a call: Domain - enter the domain name if you want to connect your domain. Room name - enter the name of the meeting room. This field is mandatory and you cannot start a call if you leave it out. Click the Start button to open the Jitsi Meet iframe. Enter your name and allow camera and microphone access to your browser. If you want to close the Jitsi Meet iframe click the Stop button at the bottom of the left. Click the Join the meeting button to start a call with audio or click the arrow to join without audio. The Jitsi Meet iframe interface elements before launching a meeting: Audio settings and Mute/Unmute Click the arrow to access the preview of Audio Settings. Click the micro to mute/unmute your microphone. Video settings and Start/Stop Click the arrow to access video preview. Click the camera to start/stop your video. Invite people Click this button to invite more people to your meeting. Share the meeting by copying the meeting link, or Share meeting invitation by copying it, or via your default email, Google email, Outlook email or Yahoo email. Embed the meeting by copying the link. Use one of the available dial-in numbers to join the meeting. Select background Select or add a virtual background for your meeting. Share your desktop by choosing the appropriate option: Screen, Window or Tab. Settings Configure advanced settings that are organized in the following categories: Devices for setting up your Microphone, Camera and Audio Output, and playing a test sound. Profile for setting up your name to be displayed and gravatar email, hide/show self view. Calendar for integration your Google or Microsoft calendar. Sounds for selecting the actions to play the sound on. More for configuring some additional options: enable/disable pre meeting screen and keyboard shortcuts, set up a language and desktop sharing frame rate. Interface elements that appear during a video conference: Click the side arrow on the right to display the participant thumbnails at the top. The timer at the iframe top shows the meeting duration. Open chat Type a text message or create a poll. Participants View the list of the meeting participants, invite more participants and search a participant. More Actions Find a range of options to use all the available Jitsi features to the full.Scroll through the options to see them all. Available options, Start screen sharing Invite people Enter/Exit tile view Performance settings for adjusting the quality View full screen Security options Lobby mode for participants to join the meeting after the moderator’s approval; Add password mode for participants to join the meeting with a password; End-to-end encryption is an experimental method of making secure calls (mind the restrictions like disabling server-side provided services and using browsers that support insertable streams). Start live stream Mute everyone Disable everyone’s camera Share video Select background Speaker stats Settings View shortcuts Embed meeting Leave feedback Help Leave the meeting Click it whenever you wish to end a call." + "body": "Audio and video calls are immediately accessible from ONLYOFFICE Document Editor, using Jitsi plugin. Jitsi provides video conferencing capabilities that are secure and easy to deploy. Note: Jitsi plugin is not installed by default and shall be added manually. Please, refer to the corresponding article to find the manual installation guide Adding plugins to ONLYOFFICE Cloud or Adding new plugins to server editors, or install the plugin using the Plugin Manager. Switch to the Plugins tab and click the Jitsi icon on the top toolbar. Fill in the fields at the bottom of the left sidebar before you start a call: Domain - enter the domain name if you want to connect your domain. Room name - enter the name of the meeting room. This field is mandatory and you cannot start a call if you leave it out. Click the Start button to open the Jitsi Meet iframe. Enter your name and allow camera and microphone access to your browser. If you want to close the Jitsi Meet iframe click the Stop button at the bottom of the left. Click the Join the meeting button to start a call with audio or click the arrow to join without audio. The Jitsi Meet iframe interface elements before launching a meeting: Audio settings and Mute/Unmute Click the arrow to access the preview of Audio Settings. Click the micro to mute/unmute your microphone. Video settings and Start/Stop Click the arrow to access video preview. Click the camera to start/stop your video. Invite people Click this button to invite more people to your meeting. Share the meeting by copying the meeting link, or Share meeting invitation by copying it, or via your default email, Google email, Outlook email or Yahoo email. Embed the meeting by copying the link. Use one of the available dial-in numbers to join the meeting. Select background Select or add a virtual background for your meeting. Share your desktop by choosing the appropriate option: Screen, Window or Tab. Settings Configure advanced settings that are organized in the following categories: Devices for setting up your Microphone, Camera and Audio Output, and playing a test sound. Profile for setting up your name to be displayed and gravatar email, hide/show self view. Calendar for integration your Google or Microsoft calendar. Sounds for selecting the actions to play the sound on. More for configuring some additional options: enable/disable pre meeting screen and keyboard shortcuts, set up a language and desktop sharing frame rate. Interface elements that appear during a video conference: Click the side arrow on the right to display the participant thumbnails at the top. The timer at the iframe top shows the meeting duration. Open chat Type a text message or create a poll. Participants View the list of the meeting participants, invite more participants and search a participant. More Actions Find a range of options to use all the available Jitsi features to the full.Scroll through the options to see them all. Available options, Start screen sharing Invite people Enter/Exit tile view Performance settings for adjusting the quality View full screen Security options Lobby mode for participants to join the meeting after the moderator’s approval; Add password mode for participants to join the meeting with a password; End-to-end encryption is an experimental method of making secure calls (mind the restrictions like disabling server-side provided services and using browsers that support insertable streams). Start live stream Mute everyone Disable everyone’s camera Share video Select background Speaker stats Settings View shortcuts Embed meeting Leave feedback Help Leave the meeting Click it whenever you wish to end a call." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/LineSpacing.htm", "title": "Set paragraph line spacing", - "body": "In the Document Editor, you can set the line height for the text lines within the paragraph as well as the margins between the current paragraph and the previous one or the subsequent paragraphs. To do that, place the cursor within the required paragraph, or select several paragraphs with the mouse or the whole text by pressing the Ctrl+A key combination, use the corresponding fields on the right sidebar to achieve the desired results: Line Spacing - set the line height for the text lines within the paragraph. You can select among three options: at least (sets the minimum line spacing that is needed to fit the largest font or graphic in the line), multiple (sets line spacing that can be expressed in numbers greater than 1), exactly (sets fixed line spacing). You can specify the necessary value in the field on the right. Paragraph Spacing defines the amount of spacing between paragraphs. Before defines the amount of spacing before the paragraph. After defines the amount of spacing after the paragraph. Don't add interval between paragraphs of the same style - please check this box if you don't need any spacing between paragraphs of the same style. These parameters can also be found in the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window. To open the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window, right-click the text and choose the Paragraph Advanced Settings option from the menu or use the Show advanced settings option on the right sidebar. Then switch to the Indents & Spacing tab and go to the Spacing section. To quickly change the current paragraph line spacing, you can also use the Paragraph line spacing icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar selecting the required value from the list: 1.0, 1.15, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, or 3.0 lines." + "body": "In the Document Editor, you can set the line height for the text lines within the paragraph as well as the margins between the current paragraph and the previous one or the subsequent paragraphs. To do that, place the cursor within the required paragraph, or select several paragraphs with the mouse or the whole text by pressing the Ctrl+A key combination, use the corresponding fields on the right sidebar to achieve the desired results: Line Spacing - set the line height for the text lines within the paragraph. You can select among three options: at least (sets the minimum line spacing that is needed to fit the largest font or graphic in the line), multiple (sets line spacing that can be expressed in numbers greater than 1), exactly (sets fixed line spacing). You can specify the necessary value in the field on the right. Paragraph Spacing defines the amount of spacing between paragraphs. Before defines the amount of spacing before the paragraph. After defines the amount of spacing after the paragraph. Don't add interval between paragraphs of the same style - please check this box if you don't need any spacing between paragraphs of the same style. These parameters can also be found in the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window. To open the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window, right-click the text and choose the Paragraph Advanced Settings option from the menu or use the Show advanced settings option on the right sidebar. Then switch to the Indents & Spacing tab and go to the Spacing section. To quickly change the current paragraph line spacing, you can also use the Paragraph line spacing icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar selecting the required value from the list: 1.0, 1.15, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, or 3.0 lines, as well as open the corresponding right panel by clicking the Line spacing options menu item, and choose whether you want to Add or Remove space after paragraph." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/MathAutoCorrect.htm", @@ -388,7 +398,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/OCR.htm", "title": "Extract text from an image", - "body": "With ONLYOFFICE Document Editor you can extract text from an image (.png .jpg) and insert it in your document. Open your document and place the cursor on the spot where you want to insert the text. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose OCR from the menu. Click Load File and select the image. Choose the recognition language from the Choose Language pull-down menu. Click Recognize. Click Insert text. You should check the inserted text for errors and layout." + "body": "With ONLYOFFICE Document Editor you can extract text from an image (.png .jpg) and insert it in your document. Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager. Open your document and place the cursor on the spot where you want to insert the text. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose OCR from the menu. Click Load File and select the image. Choose the recognition language from the Choose Language pull-down menu. Click Recognize. Click Insert text. You should check the inserted text for errors and layout." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/OpenCreateNew.htm", @@ -408,7 +418,12 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/PhotoEditor.htm", "title": "Edit an image", - "body": "ONLYOFFICE Document Editor comes with a very powerful photo editor, that allows you to adjust the image with filters and make all kinds of annotations. Select an image in your document. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose Photo Editor. You are now in the editing environment. Below the image you will find the following checkboxes and slider filters: Grayscale, Sepia, Sepia 2, Blur, Emboss, Invert, Sharpen; Remove White (Threshold, Distance), Gradient transparency, Brightness, Noise, Pixelate, Color Filter; Tint, Multiply, Blend. To the left of the filters you will find buttons for Undo, Redo and Resetting; Delete, Delete all; Crop (Custom, Square, 3:2, 4:3, 5:4, 7:5, 16:9); Flip (Flip X, Flip Y, Reset); Rotate (30 degree, -30 degree,Manual rotation slider); Draw (Free, Straight, Color, Size slider); Shape (Rectangle, Circle, Triangle, Fill, Stroke, Stroke size); Icon (Arrows, Stars, Polygon, Location, Heart, Bubble, Custom icon, Color); Text (Bold, Italic, Underline, Left, Center, Right, Color, Text size); Mask. Feel free to try all of these and remember you can always undo them. When finished, click the OK button. The edited picture is now included in the document." + "body": "ONLYOFFICE Document Editor comes with a very powerful photo editor, that allows you to adjust the image with filters and make all kinds of annotations. Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager. Select an image in your document. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose Photo Editor. You are now in the editing environment. Below the image you will find the following checkboxes and slider filters: Grayscale, Sepia, Sepia 2, Blur, Emboss, Invert, Sharpen; Remove White (Threshold, Distance), Gradient transparency, Brightness, Noise, Pixelate, Color Filter; Tint, Multiply, Blend. To the left of the filters you will find buttons for Undo, Redo and Resetting; Delete, Delete all; Crop (Custom, Square, 3:2, 4:3, 5:4, 7:5, 16:9); Flip (Flip X, Flip Y, Reset); Rotate (30 degree, -30 degree,Manual rotation slider); Draw (Free, Straight, Color, Size slider); Shape (Rectangle, Circle, Triangle, Fill, Stroke, Stroke size); Icon (Arrows, Stars, Polygon, Location, Heart, Bubble, Custom icon, Color); Text (Bold, Italic, Underline, Left, Center, Right, Color, Text size); Mask. Feel free to try all of these and remember you can always undo them. When finished, click the OK button. The edited picture is now included in the document." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/Pixabay.htm", + "title": "Pixabay", + "body": "The Pixabay plugin allows you to add pictures to your document from an open collection of Pixabay service that offers copyright free images. The plugin is compatible with the self-hosted and the desktop versions of the ONLYOFFICE editors and can be added to ONLYOFFICE instances manually using the Plugin Manager. Installation To install the Pixabay plugin, Go to the Plugins tab. Open the Plugin Manager. Find on the marketplace and click the Install button below. Click the Pixabay icon in the Plugins tab. Proceed with the plugin configuration. For more details, please refer to the ONLYOFFICE API documentation. Configuration Log in to your Pixabay account or register a new one. Go to the Search Images section of the Pixabay API page. Scroll down to the Parameters list and copy the link under the Key parameter. If you are not logged in, press Login next to the Key parameter. Paste the key to the API key field on the left panel of the Plugins tab in the Document Editor. Click Save. How to use Go to the Plugins tab. Click the Pixabay icon. On the left panel that opens, type in the keyword you associate with the image you are looking for. Use the Show settings button to refine your search by Language, Image type, Orientation and Category. Click Hide settings to reduce the search section. Click Search. Scroll through search results and click the image to add it to your document." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm", @@ -428,7 +443,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/SetPageParameters.htm", "title": "Set page parameters", - "body": "To change page layout in the Document Editor, i.e. set page orientation and size, adjust margins and insert columns, use the corresponding icons on the Layout tab of the top toolbar. Note: all these parameters are applied to the entire document. If you need to set different page margins, orientation, size, or column number for the separate parts of your document, please refer to this page. Page Orientation Change the current orientation by type clicking the Orientation icon. The default orientation type is Portrait that can be switched to Album. Page Size Change the default A4 format by clicking the Size icon and selecting the required format from the list. The following preset sizes are available: US Letter (21,59cm x 27,94cm) US Legal (21,59cm x 35,56cm) A4 (21cm x 29,7cm) A5 (14,81cm x 20,99cm) B5 (17,6cm x 25,01cm) Envelope #10 (10,48cm x 24,13cm) Envelope DL (11,01cm x 22,01cm) Tabloid (27,94cm x 43,17cm) AЗ (29,7cm x 42,01cm) Tabloid Oversize (30,48cm x 45,71cm) ROC 16K (19,68cm x 27,3cm) Envelope Choukei 3 (11,99cm x 23,49cm) Super B/A3 (33,02cm x 48,25cm) You can also set a special page size by selecting the Custom Page Size option from the list. The Page Size window will open where you'll be able to select the required Preset (US Letter, US Legal, A4, A5, B5, Envelope #10, Envelope DL, Tabloid, AЗ, Tabloid Oversize, ROC 16K, Envelope Choukei 3, Super B/A3, A0, A1, A2, A6) or set custom Width and Height values. Enter new values into the entry fields or adjust the existing values using the arrow buttons. When you finish, click OK to apply the changes. Page Margins Change the default margins, i.e. the blank space between the left, right, top and bottom page edges and the paragraph text, by clicking the Margins icon and selecting one of the available presets: Normal, US Normal, Narrow, Moderate, Wide. You can also use the Custom Margins option to set your own values in the Margins window. Enter the required Top, Bottom, Left and Right page margin values into the entry fields or adjust the existing values using arrow buttons. Gutter position is used to set up additional space on the left side of the document or at its top. The Gutter option is helpful to make sure that bookbinding does not cover the text. In the Margins enter the required gutter position into the entry fields and choose where it should be placed in. Note: the Gutter position cannot be used when the Mirror margins option is checked. In the Multiple pages drop-down menu, choose the Mirror margins option to set up facing pages for double-sided documents. With this option checked, Left and Right margins turn into Inside and Outside margins respectively. In Orientation drop-down menu choose from Portrait and Landscape options. All applied changes to the document will be displayed in the Preview window. When you finish, click OK. The custom margins will be applied to the current document and the Last Custom option with the specified parameters will appear in the Margins list so that you will be able to apply them to other documents. You can also change the margins manually by dragging the border between the grey and white areas on the rulers (the grey areas of the rulers indicate page margins): Columns Apply a multi-column layout by clicking the Columns icon and selecting the necessary column type from the drop-down list. The following options are available: Two - to add two columns of the same width, Three - to add three columns of the same width, Left - to add two columns: a narrow column on the left and a wide column on the right, Right - to add two columns: a narrow column on the right and a wide column on the left. If you want to adjust column settings, select the Custom Columns option from the list. The Columns window will appear, and you'll be able to set the required Number of columns, column Width and Spacing. Enter your new values into the entry fields or adjust the existing values using arrow buttons. Check the Equal column width checkbox to make all column width the same. Check the Column divider box to add a vertical line between the columns. When you finish, click OK to apply the changes. To exactly specify where a new column should start, place the cursor before the text that you want to move to the new column, click the Breaks icon on the top toolbar and then select the Insert Column Break option. The text will be moved to the next column. The inserted column breaks are indicated in your document with a dotted line: . If you do not see the inserted column breaks, click the icon at the Home tab on the top toolbar to make them visible. To remove a column break select it with the mouse and press the Delete key. To manually change the column width and spacing, you can use the horizontal ruler. To cancel columns and return to a regular single-column layout, click the Columns icon on the top toolbar and select the One option from the list." + "body": "To change page layout in the Document Editor, i.e. set page orientation and size, adjust margins and insert columns, use the corresponding icons on the Layout tab of the top toolbar. Note: all these parameters are applied to the entire document. If you need to set different page margins, orientation, size, or column number for the separate parts of your document, please refer to this page. Page Orientation Change the current orientation by type clicking the Orientation icon. The default orientation type is Portrait that can be switched to Album. Page Size Change the default A4 format by clicking the Size icon and selecting the required format from the list. The following preset sizes are available: US Letter (21,59cm x 27,94cm) US Legal (21,59cm x 35,56cm) A4 (21cm x 29,7cm) A5 (14,81cm x 20,99cm) B5 (17,6cm x 25,01cm) Envelope #10 (10,48cm x 24,13cm) Envelope DL (11,01cm x 22,01cm) Tabloid (27,94cm x 43,17cm) AЗ (29,7cm x 42,01cm) Tabloid Oversize (29,69cm x 45,72cm) ROC 16K (19,68cm x 27,3cm) Envelope Choukei 3 (12cm x 23,5cm) Super B/A3 (30,5cm x 48,7cm) You can also set a special page size by selecting the Custom Page Size option from the list. The Page Size window will open where you'll be able to select the required Preset (US Letter, US Legal, A4, A5, B5, Envelope #10, Envelope DL, Tabloid, AЗ, Tabloid Oversize, ROC 16K, Envelope Choukei 3, Super B/A3, A0, A1, A2, A6) or set custom Width and Height values. Enter new values into the entry fields or adjust the existing values using the arrow buttons. When you finish, click OK to apply the changes. Page Margins Change the default margins, i.e. the blank space between the left, right, top and bottom page edges and the paragraph text, by clicking the Margins icon and selecting one of the available presets: Normal, US Normal, Narrow, Moderate, Wide. You can also use the Custom Margins option to set your own values in the Margins window. Enter the required Top, Bottom, Left and Right page margin values into the entry fields or adjust the existing values using arrow buttons. Gutter position is used to set up additional space on the left side of the document or at its top. The Gutter option is helpful to make sure that bookbinding does not cover the text. In the Margins enter the required gutter position into the entry fields and choose where it should be placed in. Note: the Gutter position cannot be used when the Mirror margins option is checked. In the Multiple pages drop-down menu, choose the Mirror margins option to set up facing pages for double-sided documents. With this option checked, Left and Right margins turn into Inside and Outside margins respectively. In Orientation drop-down menu choose from Portrait and Landscape options. All applied changes to the document will be displayed in the Preview window. When you finish, click OK. The custom margins will be applied to the current document and the Last Custom option with the specified parameters will appear in the Margins list so that you will be able to apply them to other documents. You can also change the margins manually by dragging the border between the grey and white areas on the rulers (the grey areas of the rulers indicate page margins): Page Color Change the page color on the Layout tab using the Page Color button. Choose one of the Theme or Standard colors, or click the More colors menu item to create a custom color. Columns Apply a multi-column layout by clicking the Columns icon and selecting the necessary column type from the drop-down list. The following options are available: Two - to add two columns of the same width, Three - to add three columns of the same width, Left - to add two columns: a narrow column on the left and a wide column on the right, Right - to add two columns: a narrow column on the right and a wide column on the left. If you want to adjust column settings, select the Custom Columns option from the list. The Columns window will appear, and you'll be able to set the required Number of columns, column Width and Spacing. Enter your new values into the entry fields or adjust the existing values using arrow buttons. Check the Equal column width checkbox to make all column width the same. Check the Column divider box to add a vertical line between the columns. When you finish, click OK to apply the changes. To exactly specify where a new column should start, place the cursor before the text that you want to move to the new column, click the Breaks icon on the top toolbar and then select the Insert Column Break option. The text will be moved to the next column. The inserted column breaks are indicated in your document with a dotted line: . If you do not see the inserted column breaks, click the icon at the Home tab on the top toolbar to make them visible. To remove a column break select it with the mouse and press the Delete key. To manually change the column width and spacing, you can use the horizontal ruler. To cancel columns and return to a regular single-column layout, click the Columns icon on the top toolbar and select the One option from the list." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/SetTabStops.htm", @@ -438,61 +453,61 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/Speech.htm", "title": "Read the text out loud", - "body": "ONLYOFFICE Document Editor has a plugin that can read out the text for you. Select the text to be read out. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose Speech. The text will now be read out." + "body": "ONLYOFFICE Document Editor has a plugin that can read out the text for you. Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager. Select the text to be read out. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose Speech. The text will now be read out." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/Speechinput.htm", "title": "Type via voice", - "body": "In the Document Editor, you can insert text with your voice. Set the cursor to the place where you want to add text, switch to the Plugins tab and select Speech input, сhoose the recognition language in the pop-up window, сlick the Start dictation button and start speaking. Once you pause, the text will be added to the document. To turn off voice recognition, press the button again. For the plugin to work correctly, you must have an input device (e,g. a microphone or headset) as well as permissions for the browser to use these record devices." + "body": "In the Document Editor, you can insert text with your voice. Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager. Set the cursor to the place where you want to add text, switch to the Plugins tab and select Speech input, сhoose the recognition language in the pop-up window, сlick the Start dictation button and start speaking. Once you pause, the text will be added to the document. To turn off voice recognition, press the button again. For the plugin to work correctly, you must have an input device (e,g. a microphone or headset) as well as permissions for the browser to use these record devices." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/TerMef.htm", "title": "Insert definitions", - "body": "In the Document Editor, you can use the TerMef plugin to search for notions, display their definitions from the database and insert the required definition as an endnote at the end of your document. The plugin only works with notions and definitions in French. It can be installed via the built-in Plugin Manager. Select your term in the document. Check the required definition on the left-side panel. Paste the definition as an endnote by clicking the Note de bas de page button." + "body": "In the Document Editor, you can use the TerMef plugin to search for notions, display their definitions from the database and insert the required definition as an endnote at the end of your document. The plugin only works with notions and definitions in French. It can be installed via the built-in Plugin Manager. Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager. Select your term in the document. Check the required definition on the left-side panel. Paste the definition as an endnote by clicking the Note de bas de page button." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/Thesaurus.htm", "title": "Replace a word by a synonym", - "body": "If you are using the same word multiple times, or a word is just not quite the word you are looking for, ONLYOFFICE Document Editor lets you look up synonyms. It will show you the antonyms too. Select the word in your document. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose Thesaurus. The synonyms and antonyms will show up in the left sidebar. Click a word to replace the word in your document." + "body": "If you are using the same word multiple times, or a word is just not quite the word you are looking for, ONLYOFFICE Document Editor lets you look up synonyms. It will show you the antonyms too. Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager. Select the word in your document. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose Thesaurus. The synonyms and antonyms will show up in the left sidebar. Click a word to replace the word in your document." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/Translator.htm", "title": "Translate text", - "body": "In the Document Editor, you can translate your document from and to numerous languages. Select the text that you want to translate. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose Translator, the Translator appears in a sidebar on the left. Click the drop-down box and choose the preferred language. The text will be translated to the required language. Changing the language of your result: Click the drop-down box and choose the preferred language. The translation will change immediately." + "body": "In the Document Editor, you can translate your document from and to numerous languages. Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager. Select the text that you want to translate. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose Translator, the Translator appears in a sidebar on the left. Click the drop-down box and choose the preferred language. The text will be translated to the required language. Changing the language of your result: Click the drop-down box and choose the preferred language. The translation will change immediately." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/Typograf.htm", "title": "Correct typography", - "body": "If you need to correct typography in your text, use the Typograf plugin that will automatically place non-breaking spaces and remove extra ones, as well as correct minor typos, insert correct quotes, replace hyphens with dashes, etc. Open the Plugins tab and click Typograf. Click the Show advanced settings button. Choose the locale and the rules you want to apply to your text. Select the text you want to correct. Click the Correct text button. For more information on the Typograf plugin and its installation, please see the plugin’s page on the AppDirectory." + "body": "If you need to correct typography in your text, use the Typograf plugin that will automatically place non-breaking spaces and remove extra ones, as well as correct minor typos, insert correct quotes, replace hyphens with dashes, etc. Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager. Open the Plugins tab and click Typograf. Click the Show advanced settings button. Choose the locale and the rules you want to apply to your text. Select the text you want to correct. Click the Correct text button. For more information on the Typograf plugin and its installation, please see the plugin’s page on the AppDirectory." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/UseMailMerge.htm", "title": "Use Mail Merge", - "body": "Note: this option is available in the online version only. The Mail Merge feature is used to create a set of documents combining a common content which is taken from a text document and some individual components (variables, such as names, greetings etc.) taken from a spreadsheet (for example, a customer list). It can be useful if you need to create a lot of personalized letters and send them to recipients. Prepare a data source and load it to the main document A data source used for the mail merge must be an .xlsx spreadsheet stored on your portal. Open an existing spreadsheet or create a new one and make sure that it meets the following requirements. The spreadsheet should have a header row with the column titles, as values in the first cell of each column will designate merge fields (i.e. variables that you can insert into the text). Each column should contain a set of actual values for a variable. Each row in the spreadsheet should correspond to a separate record (i.e. a set of values that belongs to a certain recipient). During the merge process, a copy of the main document will be created for each record and each merge field inserted into the main text will be replaced with an actual value from the corresponding column. If you are goung to send results by email, the spreadsheet must also include a column with the recipients' email addresses. Open an existing text document or create a new one. It must contain the main text which will be the same for each version of the merged document. Click the Mail Merge icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar and select the data source location: From File, From URL or From Storage. Select the necesary file or paste a URL and click OK. Once the data source is loaded, the Mail Merge setting tab will be available on the right sidebar. Verify or change the recipients list Click the Edit recipients list button on the top of the right sidebar to open the Mail Merge Recipients window, where the content of the selected data source is displayed. In the opened window, you can add new information, edit or delete the existing data if necessary. To simplify working with data, you can use the icons at the top of the window: and - to copy and paste the copied data and - to undo and redo undone actions and - to sort your data within a selected range of cells in ascending or descending order - to enable the filter for the previously selected range of cells or to remove the applied filter - to clear all the applied filter parameters Note: to learn more on how to use the filter, please refer to the Sort and filter data section of the Spreadsheet Editor help. - to search for a certain value and replace it with another one, if necessary Note: to learn more on how to use the Find and Replace tool, please refer to the Search and Replace Functions section of the Spreadsheet Editor help. After all the necessary changes are made, click the Save & Exit button. To discard the changes, click the Close button. Insert merge fields and check the results Place the mouse cursor where the merge field should be inserted, click the Insert Merge Field button on the right sidebar and select the necessary field from the list. The available fields correspond to the data in the first cell of each column of the selected data source. All the required fields can be added anywhere. Turn on the Highlight merge fields switcher on the right sidebar to make the inserted fields more noticeable in the text. Turn on the Preview results switcher on the right sidebar to view the text with the merge fields replaced with actual values from the data source. Use the arrow buttons to preview the versions of the merged document for each record. To delete an inserted field, disable the Preview results mode, select the field with the mouse and press the Delete key on the keyboard. To replace an inserted field, disable the Preview results mode, select the field with the mouse, click the Insert Merge Field button on the right sidebar and choose a new field from the list. Specify the merge parameters Select the merge type. You can start mass mailing or save the result as a PDF or Docx file to print or edit it later. Select the necessary option from the Merge to list: PDF - to create a single PDF document that includes all the merged copies that can be printed later Docx - to create a single Docx document that includes all the merged copies that can be edited individually later Email - to send the results to recipients by email Note: the recipients' email addresses must be specified in the loaded data source and you need to have at least one email account connected in the Mail module on your portal. Choose all the required records to be applied: All records (this option is selected by default) - to create merged documents for all records from the loaded data source Current record - to create a merged document for the record that is currently displayed From ... To - to create merged documents for a range of records (in this case you need to specify two values: the number of the first record and the last record in the desired range) Note: the maximum allowed quantity of recipients is 100. If you have more than 100 recipients in your data source, please, perform the mail merge by stages: specify the values from 1 to 100, wait until the mail merge process is over, then repeat the operation specifying the values from 101 to N etc. Complete the merge If you've decided to save the merge results as a file, click the Download button to save the file on your PC. You'll find the downloaded file in your default Downloads folder. click the Save button to save the file on your portal. In the opened Folder for save window, you can change the file name and specify the folder where you want to save the file. You can also check the Open merged document in new tab box to check the result when the merge process is finished. Finally, click Save in the Folder for save window. If you've selected the Email option, the Merge button will be available on the right sidebar. After you click it, the Send to Email window will open: In the From list, select the required mail account if you have several accounts connected to the Mail module. In the To list, select the merge field corresponding to the email addresses of the recipients if this option was not selected automatically. Enter your message subject in the Subject Line field. Select the mail format from the list: HTML, Attach as DOCX or Attach as PDF. When one of the two latter options is selected, you also need to specify the File name for attachments and enter the Message (the text of your letter that will be sent to recipients). Click the Send button. Once the mailing is over, you'll receive a notification to your email specified in the From field." + "body": "Note: this option is available in the online version only. The Mail Merge feature is used to create a set of documents combining a common content which is taken from a text document and some individual components (variables, such as names, greetings etc.) taken from a spreadsheet (for example, a customer list). It can be useful if you need to create a lot of personalized letters and send them to recipients. Prepare a data source and load it to the main document A data source used for the mail merge must be an .xlsx spreadsheet stored on your portal. Open an existing spreadsheet or create a new one and make sure that it meets the following requirements. The spreadsheet should have a header row with the column titles, as values in the first cell of each column will designate merge fields (i.e. variables that you can insert into the text). Each column should contain a set of actual values for a variable. Each row in the spreadsheet should correspond to a separate record (i.e. a set of values that belongs to a certain recipient). During the merge process, a copy of the main document will be created for each record and each merge field inserted into the main text will be replaced with an actual value from the corresponding column. If you are goung to send results by email, the spreadsheet must also include a column with the recipients' email addresses. Open an existing text document or create a new one. It must contain the main text which will be the same for each version of the merged document. Click the Mail Merge icon on the Collaboration tab of the top toolbar and select the data source location: From File, From URL or From Storage. Select the necesary file or paste a URL and click OK. Once the data source is loaded, the Mail Merge setting tab will be available on the right sidebar. Verify or change the recipients list Click the Edit recipients list button on the top of the right sidebar to open the Mail Merge Recipients window, where the content of the selected data source is displayed. In the opened window, you can add new information, edit or delete the existing data if necessary. To simplify working with data, you can use the icons at the top of the window: and - to copy and paste the copied data and - to undo and redo undone actions and - to sort your data within a selected range of cells in ascending or descending order - to enable the filter for the previously selected range of cells or to remove the applied filter - to clear all the applied filter parameters Note: to learn more on how to use the filter, please refer to the Sort and filter data section of the Spreadsheet Editor help. - to search for a certain value and replace it with another one, if necessary Note: to learn more on how to use the Find and Replace tool, please refer to the Search and Replace Functions section of the Spreadsheet Editor help. After all the necessary changes are made, click the Save & Exit button. To discard the changes, click the Close button. Insert merge fields and check the results Place the mouse cursor where the merge field should be inserted, click the Insert Merge Field button on the right sidebar and select the necessary field from the list. The available fields correspond to the data in the first cell of each column of the selected data source. All the required fields can be added anywhere. Turn on the Highlight merge fields switcher on the right sidebar to make the inserted fields more noticeable in the text. Turn on the Preview results switcher on the right sidebar to view the text with the merge fields replaced with actual values from the data source. Use the arrow buttons to preview the versions of the merged document for each record. To delete an inserted field, disable the Preview results mode, select the field with the mouse and press the Delete key on the keyboard. To replace an inserted field, disable the Preview results mode, select the field with the mouse, click the Insert Merge Field button on the right sidebar and choose a new field from the list. Specify the merge parameters Select the merge type. You can start mass mailing or save the result as a PDF or Docx file to print or edit it later. Select the necessary option from the Merge to list: PDF - to create a single PDF document that includes all the merged copies that can be printed later Docx - to create a single Docx document that includes all the merged copies that can be edited individually later Email - to send the results to recipients by email Note: the recipients' email addresses must be specified in the loaded data source and you need to have at least one email account connected in the Mail module on your portal. Choose all the required records to be applied: All records (this option is selected by default) - to create merged documents for all records from the loaded data source Current record - to create a merged document for the record that is currently displayed From ... To - to create merged documents for a range of records (in this case you need to specify two values: the number of the first record and the last record in the desired range) Note: the maximum allowed quantity of recipients is 100. If you have more than 100 recipients in your data source, please, perform the mail merge by stages: specify the values from 1 to 100, wait until the mail merge process is over, then repeat the operation specifying the values from 101 to N etc. Complete the merge If you've decided to save the merge results as a file, click the Download button to save the file on your PC. You'll find the downloaded file in your default Downloads folder. click the Save button to save the file on your portal. In the opened Folder for save window, you can change the file name and specify the folder where you want to save the file. You can also check the Open merged document in new tab box to check the result when the merge process is finished. Finally, click Save in the Folder for save window. If you've selected the Email option, the Merge button will be available on the right sidebar. After you click it, the Send to Email window will open: In the From list, select the required mail account if you have several accounts connected to the Mail module. In the To list, select the merge field corresponding to the email addresses of the recipients if this option was not selected automatically. Enter your message subject in the Subject Line field. Select the mail format from the list: HTML, Attach as DOCX or Attach as PDF. When one of the two latter options is selected, you also need to specify the File name for attachments and enter the Message (the text of your letter that will be sent to recipients). Click the Send button. Once the mailing is over, you'll receive a notification to your email specified in the From field." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/ViewDocInfo.htm", "title": "View document information", - "body": "To access the detailed information about the currently edited document in the Document Editor, click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Document Info option. General Information The document information includes a number of the file properties which describe the document. Some of these properties are updated automatically, and some of them can be edited. Location - the folder in the Documents module where the file is stored. Owner - the name of the user who has created the file. Uploaded - the date and time when the file has been created. These properties are available in the online version only. Statistics - the number of pages, paragraphs, words, symbols, symbols with spaces. Title, Subject, Comment - these properties allow yoy to simplify your documents classification. You can specify the necessary text in the properties fields. Last Modified - the date and time when the file was last modified. Last Modified By - the name of the user who has made the latest change to the document. This option is available if the document has been shared and can be edited by several users. Application - the application the document has been created with. Author - the person who has created the file. You can enter the necessary name in this field. Press Enter to add a new field that allows you to specify one more author. If you changed the file properties, click the Apply button to apply the changes. Note: The online Editors allow you to change the name of the document directly in the editor interface. To do that, click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Rename option, then enter the necessary File name in a new window that will appear and click OK. Permission Information In the online version, you can view the information about permissions to the files stored in the cloud. Note: this option is not available for users with the Read Only permissions. To find out who have rights to view or edit the document, select the Access Rights... option on the left sidebar. You can also change currently selected access rights by pressing the Change access rights button in the Persons who have rights section. Version History In the online version, you can view the version history for the files stored in the cloud. Note: this option is not available for users with the Read Only permissions. To view all the changes made to this document, select the Version History option at the left sidebar. It's also possible to open the history of versions using the Version History icon on the Collaboration tab of the top toolbar. You'll see the list of this document versions (major changes) and revisions (minor changes) with the indication of each version/revision author and creation date and time. For document versions, the version number is also specified (e.g. ver. 2). To know exactly which changes have been made in each separate version/revision, you can view the one you need by clicking it on the left sidebar. The changes made by the version/revision author are marked with the color which is displayed next to the author's name on the left sidebar. You can use the Restore link below the selected version/revision to restore it. To return to the current version of the document, use the Close History option on the top of the version list. To close the File panel and return to document editing, select the Close Menu option." + "body": "To access the detailed information about the currently edited document in the Document Editor, click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Info option. Common Owner - the person who has created the file. Uploaded - the date when the file has been uploaded to the server. Last Modified - the date when the file has last been edited. Statistics This subsection displays the number of pages, paragraphs, words, symbols, and symbols with spaces within the file. Properties Author - you can enter the necessary name in this field. Press Enter to add a new field that allows you to specify one more author. To delete additional authors, click the cross button next to the corresponding fields. Title - enter the title of the document. Please do not confuse it with the file name as these are different file properties. Tags - enter necessary tags for better file classification. Subject - enter the document subject. Comment - enter the comment to the file. Please do not confuse it with the Comments as these are different features. Click the Add property button to add custom fields, entering the Title of the field, its Type, i.e., its format, and its Value. Click OK when ready. To delete additional fields, click the cross button next to them." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/WordCounter.htm", "title": "Count words", - "body": "To know the exact number of words and symbols both with and without spaces in your document, as well as the number of paragraphs altogether, use the Word counter plugin. Open the Plugins tab and click Count words and characters. Select the text. Please note that the following elements are not included in the word count: footnote/endnote symbols, numbers from numbered lists, page numbers. For more information on the Word counter plugin and its installation, please see the plugin’s page on the AppDirectory." + "body": "To know the exact number of words and symbols both with and without spaces in your document, as well as the number of paragraphs altogether, use the Word counter plugin. Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager. Open the Plugins tab and click Count words and characters. Select the text. Please note that the following elements are not included in the word count: footnote/endnote symbols, numbers from numbered lists, page numbers. For more information on the Word counter plugin and its installation, please see the plugin’s page on the AppDirectory." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/Wordpress.htm", "title": "Upload a document to WordPress", - "body": "You can write your articles in your ONLYOFFICE Document Editor environment and upload them as a WordPress-article. Connect to WordPress Open your document. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose WordPress. Log in into your WordPress account and choose the website page you want to post your document on. Enter a title for your article. Click Publish to publish immediately or Save as draft to publish later from your WordPress site or app." + "body": "You can write your articles in your ONLYOFFICE Document Editor environment and upload them as a WordPress-article. Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager. Connect to WordPress Open your document. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose WordPress. Log in into your WordPress account and choose the website page you want to post your document on. Enter a title for your article. Click Publish to publish immediately or Save as draft to publish later from your WordPress site or app." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/YouTube.htm", "title": "Include a video", - "body": "In the Document Editor, you can include a video in your document. It will be shown as an image. By double-clicking the image the video dialog opens. Here you can start the video. Copy the URL of the video you want to include. (the complete address shown in the address line of your browser) Go to your document and place the cursor at the location where you want to include the video. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose YouTube. Paste the URL and click OK. Check if it is the correct video and click the OK button below the video. The video is now included in your document." + "body": "In the Document Editor, you can include a video in your document. It will be shown as an image. By double-clicking the image the video dialog opens. Here you can start the video. Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager. Copy the URL of the video you want to include. (the complete address shown in the address line of your browser) Go to your document and place the cursor at the location where you want to include the video. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose YouTube. Paste the URL and click OK. Check if it is the correct video and click the OK button below the video. The video is now included in your document." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/Zoom.htm", "title": "Zoom", - "body": "The Zoom plugin allows you to host or schedule Zoom meetings directly in the editor in just a few clicks. The plugin is compatible with the self-hosted version of ONLYOFFICE editors and can be added to ONLYOFFICE instances manually. Installation To install the Zoom plugin, Go to the Plugins tab. Open the Plugin Manager. Find Zoom on the marketplace and click the Install button below. Click the Zoom icon in the Plugins tab. Proceed with the plugin configuration. For more details, please refer to the ONLYOFFICE API documentation. Configuration Register the editor as the JWT app on the Zoom Develop page to use the meeting schedule. Fill in all the necessary fields and activate the app. A JWT token will be assigned to the app. If you need help filling in the fields, please refer to the official Zoom documentation. Create a Meeting SDK app on the Zoom Develop page to start joining meetings. Fill in all the necessary fields and activate the app. SDK credentials will be assigned to the app. If you need help filling in the fields, please refer to the official Zoom documentation. Enter the generated SDK Key, SDK Secret, and JWT Token into the corresponding fields in the left panel of the ONLYOFFICE editor and click Save. How to use Go to the Plugins tab. Click the Zoom icon. Add your meeting topic and choose whether you want to Start meeting or Schedule meeting. Start meeting - a new meeting will be created. All details are displayed in the editor chat. Press the Alt + Q key combination to access the chat quickly. Schedule meeting - set all required parameters for the upcoming meeting, such as time, date, duration. Access the Advanced settings for more parameters. Click Save when you are ready. Meeting notifications are sent to the Chat for online editors and to the Comments for desktop editors. Click the Reconfigure button to set the parameters once again. Click the Meeting mode button to enter the meeting menu where you can set such parameters as Name, Meeting ID, Email, and Password. Select your role, meeting region, and meeting language. Click the Join button to enter the meeting or click the Copy direct join link button to copy the meeting link to your clipboard. Once you enter the meeting, a Zoom window will open within the plugin panel. Like in your usual Zoom call, here you can enable or disable microphone and camera, perform various actions, and enter the full screen mode. A black window may appear in the Safari browser when joining a meeting. For the problem to disappear, you need to resize the plugin window or zoom in on the browser page." + "body": "The Zoom plugin allows you to host or schedule Zoom meetings directly in the editor in just a few clicks. The plugin is compatible with the self-hosted version of ONLYOFFICE editors and can be added to ONLYOFFICE instances manually using the Plugin Manager. Installation To install the Zoom plugin, Go to the Plugins tab. Open the Plugin Manager. Find Zoom on the marketplace and click the Install button below. Click the Zoom icon in the Plugins tab. Proceed with the plugin configuration. For more details, please refer to the ONLYOFFICE API documentation. Configuration Register the editor as the JWT app on the Zoom Develop page to use the meeting schedule. Fill in all the necessary fields and activate the app. A JWT token will be assigned to the app. If you need help filling in the fields, please refer to the official Zoom documentation. Create a Meeting SDK app on the Zoom Develop page to start joining meetings. Fill in all the necessary fields and activate the app. SDK credentials will be assigned to the app. If you need help filling in the fields, please refer to the official Zoom documentation. Enter the generated SDK Key, SDK Secret, and JWT Token into the corresponding fields in the left panel of the ONLYOFFICE editor and click Save. How to use Go to the Plugins tab. Click the Zoom icon. Add your meeting topic and choose whether you want to Start meeting or Schedule meeting. Start meeting - a new meeting will be created. All details are displayed in the editor chat. Press the Alt + Q key combination to access the chat quickly. Schedule meeting - set all required parameters for the upcoming meeting, such as time, date, duration. Access the Advanced settings for more parameters. Click Save when you are ready. Meeting notifications are sent to the Chat for online editors and to the Comments for desktop editors. Click the Reconfigure button to set the parameters once again. Click the Meeting mode button to enter the meeting menu where you can set such parameters as Name, Meeting ID, Email, and Password. Select your role, meeting region, and meeting language. Click the Join button to enter the meeting or click the Copy direct join link button to copy the meeting link to your clipboard. Once you enter the meeting, a Zoom window will open within the plugin panel. Like in your usual Zoom call, here you can enable or disable microphone and camera, perform various actions, and enter the full screen mode. A black window may appear in the Safari browser when joining a meeting. For the problem to disappear, you need to resize the plugin window or zoom in on the browser page." } ] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/big.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/big.png index 278a84957f..6704b406a4 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/big.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/big.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/icons.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/icons.png index 23dea4cfed..fed7c1dfa7 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/icons.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/icons.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/sprite.css b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/sprite.css index 7dd6b5361a..5d840bedd3 100644 --- a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/sprite.css +++ b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/sprite.css @@ -66,20 +66,26 @@ height: 60px; } -.big-templateslist { +.big-signature_form_inserted { background-position: -555px -75px; + width: 160px; + height: 60px; +} + +.big-templateslist { + background-position: -555px -135px; width: 83px; height: 54px; } .big-nonetemplate { - background-position: -638px -75px; + background-position: -638px -135px; width: 63px; height: 48px; } .big-editedequation2 { - background-position: -555px -129px; + background-position: -555px -189px; width: 97px; height: 47px; } @@ -91,43 +97,43 @@ } .big-checkbox_checked { - background-position: -555px -176px; + background-position: -555px -236px; width: 127px; height: 45px; } .big-phone_number_inserted { - background-position: -555px -221px; + background-position: -555px -281px; width: 138px; height: 44px; } .big-radio_button_checked { - background-position: -555px -265px; + background-position: -555px -325px; width: 98px; height: 41px; } .big-radio_button_inserted { - background-position: -555px -306px; + background-position: -555px -366px; width: 114px; height: 39px; } .big-checkbox_inserted { - background-position: -555px -345px; + background-position: -555px -405px; width: 82px; height: 38px; } .big-credit_card_inserted { - background-position: -555px -383px; + background-position: -555px -443px; width: 159px; height: 36px; } .big-datecontentcontrol { - background-position: -555px -419px; + background-position: -555px -479px; width: 109px; height: 33px; } @@ -157,49 +163,49 @@ } .big-select_text_languages { - background-position: -652px -129px; + background-position: -652px -189px; width: 65px; height: 28px; } .big-fontfamily { - background-position: -555px -452px; + background-position: -357px -238px; width: 87px; height: 22px; } .big-wrap_boundary { - background-position: -653px -265px; + background-position: -653px -325px; width: 61px; height: 22px; } .big-date_time_inserted { - background-position: -555px -474px; + background-position: -444px -238px; width: 109px; height: 21px; } .big-zip_code_inserted { - background-position: -555px -495px; + background-position: -357px -260px; width: 92px; height: 20px; } .big-pagebreak { - background-position: -357px -238px; + background-position: -421px -560px; width: 185px; height: 9px; } .big-columnbreak { - background-position: -421px -560px; + background-position: -465px -610px; width: 200px; height: 8px; } .big-sectionbreak { - background-position: -465px -610px; + background-position: -465px -618px; width: 200px; height: 8px; } @@ -300,1310 +306,1346 @@ height: 38px; } +.icon-pixabay_store_icon { + background-position: -192px 0px; + width: 120px; + height: 37px; +} + .icon-jitsi_camera { - background-position: -76px -138px; + background-position: -192px -37px; width: 38px; height: 37px; } .icon-jitsi_more { - background-position: -114px -138px; + background-position: -230px -37px; width: 37px; height: 37px; } .icon-jitsi_openchat { - background-position: -151px -138px; + background-position: -267px -37px; width: 37px; height: 37px; } .icon-jitsi_invite { - background-position: -192px 0px; + background-position: -192px -74px; width: 36px; height: 37px; } .icon-jitsi_leave { - background-position: 0px -176px; + background-position: -228px -74px; width: 37px; height: 36px; } .icon-jitsi_settings { - background-position: -192px -37px; + background-position: -265px -74px; width: 36px; height: 36px; } .icon-jitsi_participants { - background-position: -192px -73px; + background-position: -192px -111px; width: 36px; height: 35px; } .icon-newequation { - background-position: -192px -108px; + background-position: -228px -111px; width: 20px; height: 32px; } .icon-checkboxcontentcontrol { - background-position: -192px -140px; + background-position: -248px -111px; width: 29px; height: 31px; } .icon-checkboxcontentcontrol2 { - background-position: -37px -176px; + background-position: -277px -111px; width: 29px; height: 31px; } .icon-linenumbers_icon { - background-position: -66px -176px; + background-position: -192px -146px; width: 34px; height: 30px; } .icon-save_form_icon { - background-position: -78px -48px; + background-position: -226px -146px; width: 25px; height: 30px; } .icon-arrows_formfilling { - background-position: -100px -176px; + background-position: -251px -146px; width: 31px; height: 29px; } .icon-next_formfilling { - background-position: -131px -176px; + background-position: -76px -138px; width: 31px; height: 29px; } .icon-highlight { - background-position: -162px -176px; + background-position: -282px -146px; width: 28px; height: 28px; } .icon-mendeley { - background-position: -190px -176px; + background-position: -78px -48px; width: 28px; height: 28px; } .icon-ocr { - background-position: -228px 0px; + background-position: -107px -138px; width: 28px; height: 28px; } .icon-photoeditor { - background-position: -228px -28px; + background-position: -135px -138px; width: 28px; height: 28px; } .icon-speech { - background-position: -228px -56px; + background-position: -163px -138px; width: 28px; height: 28px; } .icon-speechinput { - background-position: -228px -84px; + background-position: 0px -176px; width: 28px; height: 28px; } .icon-wordpress { - background-position: -228px -112px; + background-position: -28px -176px; width: 28px; height: 28px; } .icon-youtube { - background-position: -228px -140px; + background-position: -56px -176px; width: 28px; height: 28px; } .icon-thumbnailsettingicon { - background-position: 0px -212px; + background-position: -84px -176px; width: 34px; height: 27px; } .icon-cross_refference_icon { - background-position: -228px -168px; + background-position: -118px -176px; width: 26px; height: 26px; } .icon-favorites_iconpdf { - background-position: -34px -212px; + background-position: -144px -176px; width: 26px; height: 26px; } .icon-translator { - background-position: -60px -212px; + background-position: -170px -176px; width: 26px; height: 26px; } .icon-next_field_icon { - background-position: -86px -212px; + background-position: -196px -176px; width: 25px; height: 25px; } .icon-previous_field_icon { - background-position: -111px -212px; + background-position: -221px -176px; width: 25px; height: 25px; } .icon-submit_form_icon { - background-position: -136px -212px; + background-position: -246px -176px; width: 25px; height: 25px; } .icon-filelocationiconpdf { - background-position: -161px -212px; + background-position: -271px -176px; width: 26px; height: 24px; } .icon-drawio { - background-position: -187px -212px; + background-position: 0px -204px; width: 24px; height: 24px; } .icon-help { - background-position: -211px -212px; + background-position: -24px -204px; width: 24px; height: 24px; } .icon-rainbow_icon { - background-position: -256px 0px; + background-position: -48px -204px; width: 24px; height: 24px; } .icon-telegram_icon { - background-position: -256px -24px; + background-position: -72px -204px; width: 24px; height: 24px; } .icon-downloadpdf { - background-position: -256px -48px; + background-position: -96px -204px; width: 22px; height: 24px; } .icon-printiconpdf { - background-position: -256px -72px; + background-position: -118px -204px; width: 22px; height: 24px; } .icon-slicer_icon { - background-position: -256px -96px; + background-position: -140px -204px; width: 21px; height: 24px; } .icon-spellchecking_toptoolbar_activated { - background-position: -256px -120px; + background-position: -161px -204px; width: 21px; height: 24px; } .icon-usericonpdf { - background-position: 0px -239px; + background-position: -182px -204px; width: 25px; height: 23px; } .icon-arrow { - background-position: -256px -144px; + background-position: -207px -204px; width: 23px; height: 23px; } .icon-insert_pivot { - background-position: -256px -167px; + background-position: -230px -204px; width: 23px; height: 23px; } .icon-comparebutton { - background-position: -256px -190px; + background-position: -172px -85px; width: 20px; height: 23px; } .icon-review_displaymode { - background-position: -256px -213px; + background-position: -129px -95px; width: 20px; height: 23px; } .icon-change_case { - background-position: -25px -239px; + background-position: -253px -204px; width: 45px; height: 22px; } .icon-fontsize { - background-position: -70px -239px; + background-position: 0px -228px; width: 45px; height: 22px; } .icon-rowsandcolumns { - background-position: -115px -239px; + background-position: -45px -228px; width: 45px; height: 22px; } .icon-SearchOptions { - background-position: -160px -239px; + background-position: -90px -228px; width: 42px; height: 22px; } .icon-pastespecialbutton { - background-position: -202px -239px; + background-position: -132px -228px; width: 30px; height: 22px; } .icon-thesaurus_icon { - background-position: -232px -239px; + background-position: -162px -228px; width: 28px; height: 22px; } +.icon-signature { + background-position: -190px -228px; + width: 24px; + height: 22px; +} + .icon-zip_code_icon { - background-position: -280px 0px; + background-position: -214px -228px; width: 24px; height: 22px; } .icon-inserttexticon { - background-position: -280px -22px; + background-position: -238px -228px; width: 22px; height: 22px; } .icon-larger { - background-position: -280px -44px; + background-position: -260px -228px; width: 22px; height: 22px; } .icon-orientation { - background-position: -280px -66px; + background-position: -282px -228px; width: 22px; height: 22px; } .icon-radio_button_icon { - background-position: -280px -88px; + background-position: 0px -250px; width: 22px; height: 22px; } .icon-role_down { - background-position: -280px -110px; + background-position: -22px -250px; width: 22px; height: 22px; } .icon-role_up { - background-position: -280px -132px; + background-position: -44px -250px; width: 22px; height: 22px; } .icon-smaller { - background-position: -280px -154px; + background-position: -66px -250px; width: 22px; height: 22px; } .icon-table_figures_button { - background-position: -280px -176px; + background-position: -88px -250px; width: 22px; height: 22px; } .icon-zotero { - background-position: -280px -198px; + background-position: -110px -250px; width: 22px; height: 22px; } .icon-pagebreak1 { - background-position: -280px -220px; + background-position: -132px -250px; width: 21px; height: 22px; } .icon-trackchangestoptoolbar { - background-position: -235px -212px; + background-position: -153px -250px; width: 21px; height: 22px; } .icon-refresh_button { - background-position: -172px -85px; + background-position: -174px -250px; width: 20px; height: 22px; } .icon-spellchecking_toptoolbar { - background-position: -129px -95px; + background-position: -194px -250px; width: 20px; height: 22px; } .icon-wrapping_toptoolbar { - background-position: -260px -239px; + background-position: -214px -250px; width: 20px; height: 22px; } .icon-coeditingmode { - background-position: 0px -262px; + background-position: -234px -250px; width: 18px; height: 22px; } .icon-headerfooter { - background-position: -18px -262px; + background-position: -252px -250px; width: 18px; height: 22px; } .icon-pagesize { - background-position: -36px -262px; + background-position: -270px -250px; width: 18px; height: 22px; } .icon-blankpage { - background-position: -212px -108px; + background-position: -288px -250px; + width: 16px; + height: 22px; +} + +.icon-textfromfile { + background-position: 0px -272px; width: 16px; height: 22px; } .icon-watermark { - background-position: -54px -262px; + background-position: -16px -272px; width: 16px; height: 22px; } .icon-versionhistoryicon { - background-position: -70px -262px; + background-position: -32px -272px; width: 24px; height: 21px; } .icon-fittowidth { - background-position: -94px -262px; + background-position: -56px -272px; width: 23px; height: 21px; } .icon-pivot_refresh { - background-position: -117px -262px; + background-position: -79px -272px; width: 21px; height: 21px; } .icon-changerowheight { - background-position: -129px -117px; + background-position: -100px -272px; width: 17px; height: 21px; } .icon-toccontentcontrol { - background-position: -138px -262px; + background-position: -117px -272px; width: 16px; height: 21px; } .icon-bookmark { - background-position: -154px -262px; + background-position: -297px -176px; width: 13px; height: 21px; } .icon-viewsettingsiconpdf { - background-position: -167px -262px; + background-position: -133px -272px; width: 27px; height: 20px; } .icon-credit_card_icon { - background-position: -194px -262px; + background-position: -160px -272px; width: 26px; height: 20px; } .icon-sheetview_icon { - background-position: -220px -262px; + background-position: -186px -272px; width: 25px; height: 20px; } .icon-date_time_icon { - background-position: -280px -242px; + background-position: -211px -272px; width: 22px; height: 20px; } .icon-bringforward_toptoolbar { - background-position: -245px -262px; + background-position: -129px -118px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-chatgpt_icon { - background-position: -265px -262px; + background-position: -233px -272px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-checkbox_icon { - background-position: 0px -284px; + background-position: -253px -272px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-constantproportionsactivated { - background-position: -20px -284px; + background-position: -273px -272px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-copystyle_selected { - background-position: -40px -284px; + background-position: -312px 0px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-email_address_icon { - background-position: -60px -284px; + background-position: -312px -20px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-eraser_tool { - background-position: -80px -284px; + background-position: -312px -40px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-group_toptoolbar { - background-position: -100px -284px; + background-position: -312px -60px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-image { - background-position: -120px -284px; + background-position: -312px -80px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-image_form_icon { - background-position: -140px -284px; + background-position: -312px -100px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-insertautoshape { - background-position: -160px -284px; + background-position: -312px -120px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-insert_symbol_icon { - background-position: -180px -284px; + background-position: -312px -140px; + width: 20px; + height: 20px; +} + +.icon-pixabay_icon { + background-position: -312px -160px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-sendbackward_toptoolbar { - background-position: -200px -284px; + background-position: -312px -180px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-show_password { - background-position: -220px -284px; + background-position: -312px -200px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-sortcommentsicon { - background-position: -240px -284px; + background-position: -312px -220px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-spellcheckactivated { - background-position: -260px -284px; + background-position: -312px -240px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-zoom_icon { - background-position: -280px -284px; + background-position: -312px -260px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-align_toptoolbar { - background-position: -285px -262px; + background-position: -293px -272px; width: 19px; height: 20px; } .icon-fittopage { - background-position: -304px 0px; + background-position: 0px -294px; width: 17px; height: 20px; } .icon-inserttextarticon { - background-position: -304px -20px; + background-position: -17px -294px; width: 16px; height: 20px; } .icon-pagemargins { - background-position: -304px -40px; + background-position: -33px -294px; width: 16px; height: 20px; } .icon-hyphenation { - background-position: -304px -60px; + background-position: -49px -294px; width: 15px; height: 20px; } .icon-chat_toptoolbar { - background-position: -321px 0px; + background-position: -64px -294px; width: 24px; height: 19px; } .icon-comment_toptoolbar { - background-position: -321px -19px; + background-position: -88px -294px; width: 22px; height: 19px; } .icon-insertchart { - background-position: -321px -38px; + background-position: -110px -294px; width: 22px; height: 19px; } .icon-insertequationicon { - background-position: -321px -57px; + background-position: -132px -294px; width: 22px; height: 19px; } .icon-pivotselecticon { - background-position: -321px -76px; + background-position: -154px -294px; width: 22px; height: 19px; } .icon-review_next { - background-position: -321px -95px; + background-position: -176px -294px; width: 22px; height: 19px; } .icon-review_previous { - background-position: -321px -114px; + background-position: -198px -294px; width: 22px; height: 19px; } .icon-combo_box_icon { - background-position: -321px -133px; + background-position: -220px -294px; width: 21px; height: 19px; } .icon-dropdown_list_icon { - background-position: -321px -152px; + background-position: -241px -294px; width: 20px; height: 19px; } .icon-addhyperlink { - background-position: -321px -171px; + background-position: -261px -294px; width: 19px; height: 19px; } .icon-hiderulers { - background-position: -321px -190px; + background-position: -280px -294px; width: 19px; height: 19px; } .icon-noborders { - background-position: -321px -209px; + background-position: -299px -294px; width: 19px; height: 19px; } .icon-insertcolumns { - background-position: -321px -228px; + background-position: -332px 0px; width: 18px; height: 19px; } .icon-insert_dropcap_icon { - background-position: -321px -247px; + background-position: -332px -19px; width: 18px; height: 19px; } .icon-tocrefreshicon { - background-position: -321px -266px; + background-position: -332px -38px; width: 16px; height: 19px; } .icon-removecomment_toptoolbar { - background-position: -321px -285px; + background-position: -332px -57px; width: 15px; height: 19px; } .icon-backgroundcolor { - background-position: -228px -194px; + background-position: 0px -314px; width: 26px; height: 18px; } .icon-backgroundcolor_selected { - background-position: 0px -304px; + background-position: -26px -314px; width: 26px; height: 18px; } .icon-review_accepttoptoolbar { - background-position: -26px -304px; + background-position: -52px -314px; width: 22px; height: 18px; } .icon-review_rejecttoptoolbar { - background-position: -48px -304px; + background-position: -74px -314px; width: 22px; height: 18px; } .icon-new_icon { - background-position: -172px -107px; + background-position: -332px -76px; width: 18px; height: 18px; } .icon-pencil_tool { - background-position: -70px -304px; + background-position: -332px -94px; width: 18px; height: 18px; } .icon-phone_number_icon { - background-position: -88px -304px; + background-position: -332px -112px; width: 18px; height: 18px; } .icon-search_advanced { - background-position: -106px -304px; + background-position: -332px -130px; width: 18px; height: 18px; } .icon-usericon { - background-position: -124px -304px; + background-position: -332px -148px; width: 18px; height: 18px; } +.icon-mailmergeicon { + background-position: -332px -166px; + width: 15px; + height: 18px; +} + .icon-searchbuttons { - background-position: -142px -304px; + background-position: -96px -314px; width: 33px; height: 17px; } .icon-changecolumnwidth { - background-position: -175px -304px; + background-position: -129px -314px; width: 21px; height: 17px; } .icon-sharingicon { - background-position: -196px -304px; + background-position: -150px -314px; width: 21px; height: 17px; } -.icon-chaticon_new { - background-position: -217px -304px; - width: 19px; - height: 17px; -} - .icon-search_icon_header { - background-position: -304px -80px; + background-position: -332px -184px; width: 17px; height: 17px; } .icon-easybib { - background-position: -304px -97px; + background-position: -332px -201px; width: 16px; height: 17px; } .icon-insertslicer { - background-position: -304px -114px; + background-position: -332px -218px; width: 16px; height: 17px; } .icon-paste_style { - background-position: -304px -131px; + background-position: -332px -235px; width: 16px; height: 17px; } .icon-slicer_settings { - background-position: -304px -148px; + background-position: -332px -252px; width: 16px; height: 17px; } .icon-downloadicon { - background-position: -304px -165px; + background-position: -332px -269px; width: 15px; height: 17px; } .icon-addgradientpoint { - background-position: -304px -182px; + background-position: -332px -286px; width: 12px; height: 17px; } .icon-removegradientpoint { - background-position: -304px -199px; + background-position: -172px -108px; width: 12px; height: 17px; } .icon-highlightcolor { - background-position: -236px -304px; + background-position: -171px -314px; width: 25px; height: 16px; } .icon-complex_field_icon { - background-position: -261px -304px; + background-position: -196px -314px; width: 24px; height: 16px; } .icon-text_field_icon { - background-position: -285px -304px; + background-position: -220px -314px; width: 24px; height: 16px; } .icon-view_form_icon { - background-position: -309px -304px; + background-position: -244px -314px; width: 24px; height: 16px; } .icon-insertccicon { - background-position: 0px -322px; + background-position: -268px -314px; width: 23px; height: 16px; } .icon-table { - background-position: -23px -322px; + background-position: -291px -314px; width: 22px; height: 16px; } .icon-usersnumber { - background-position: -45px -322px; + background-position: -313px -314px; width: 22px; height: 16px; } .icon-close_icon { - background-position: -67px -322px; + background-position: 0px -332px; width: 18px; height: 16px; } .icon-saveupdate { - background-position: -85px -322px; + background-position: -18px -332px; width: 18px; height: 16px; } .icon-savewhilecoediting { - background-position: -304px -216px; + background-position: -36px -332px; width: 17px; height: 16px; } .icon-converttorange { - background-position: -304px -232px; + background-position: -53px -332px; width: 16px; height: 16px; } .icon-dropdownarrow { - background-position: -304px -248px; + background-position: -69px -332px; width: 16px; height: 16px; } .icon-editcommenticon { - background-position: -304px -264px; + background-position: -85px -332px; width: 16px; height: 16px; } .icon-favorites_icon { - background-position: -304px -280px; + background-position: -101px -332px; width: 16px; height: 16px; } .icon-filterbutton { - background-position: -103px -322px; + background-position: -117px -332px; width: 16px; height: 16px; } .icon-trackchangesstatusbar { - background-position: -119px -322px; + background-position: -335px -314px; width: 15px; height: 16px; } .icon-distributevertically { - background-position: -134px -322px; + background-position: -298px -204px; width: 14px; height: 16px; } .icon-handtool { - background-position: -148px -322px; + background-position: -318px -294px; width: 13px; height: 16px; } .icon-pagethumbnails { - background-position: -333px -304px; + background-position: -133px -332px; width: 12px; height: 16px; } .icon-textart_settings_icon { - background-position: -161px -322px; + background-position: -145px -332px; width: 12px; height: 16px; } .icon-selectiontool { - background-position: -218px -176px; + background-position: -301px -74px; width: 10px; height: 16px; } .icon-search_options { - background-position: -173px -322px; + background-position: -78px -76px; width: 22px; height: 15px; } .icon-addfootnote { - background-position: -195px -322px; + background-position: -157px -332px; width: 21px; height: 15px; } .icon-access_rights { - background-position: -216px -322px; + background-position: -178px -332px; width: 19px; height: 15px; } .icon-chaticon { - background-position: -235px -322px; + background-position: -197px -332px; width: 18px; height: 15px; } .icon-gotodocuments { - background-position: -253px -322px; + background-position: -215px -332px; width: 18px; height: 15px; } +.icon-chaticon_new { + background-position: -233px -332px; + width: 17px; + height: 15px; +} + .icon-print { - background-position: -271px -322px; + background-position: -250px -332px; width: 17px; height: 15px; } .icon-bgcolor { - background-position: -288px -322px; + background-position: -267px -332px; + width: 16px; + height: 15px; +} + +.icon-reviewing_mode { + background-position: -283px -332px; width: 16px; height: 15px; } .icon-wrappingstyle_behind_toptoolbar { - background-position: -304px -322px; + background-position: -299px -332px; width: 16px; height: 15px; } .icon-wrappingstyle_infront_toptoolbar { - background-position: -320px -322px; + background-position: -315px -332px; width: 16px; height: 15px; } .icon-wrappingstyle_inline_toptoolbar { - background-position: -345px 0px; + background-position: -331px -332px; width: 16px; height: 15px; } .icon-wrappingstyle_square_toptoolbar { - background-position: -345px -15px; + background-position: -350px 0px; width: 16px; height: 15px; } .icon-wrappingstyle_through_toptoolbar { - background-position: -345px -30px; + background-position: -350px -15px; width: 16px; height: 15px; } .icon-wrappingstyle_tight_toptoolbar { - background-position: -345px -45px; + background-position: -350px -30px; width: 16px; height: 15px; } .icon-wrappingstyle_topandbottom_toptoolbar { - background-position: -345px -60px; + background-position: -350px -45px; width: 16px; height: 15px; } .icon-about { - background-position: -345px -75px; + background-position: -350px -60px; width: 15px; height: 15px; } .icon-abouticon { - background-position: -345px -90px; + background-position: -350px -75px; width: 15px; height: 15px; } .icon-advanced_settings_icon { - background-position: -345px -105px; + background-position: -350px -90px; width: 15px; height: 15px; } .icon-document_language { - background-position: -345px -120px; + background-position: -350px -105px; width: 15px; height: 15px; } .icon-insertpivot { - background-position: -345px -135px; + background-position: -350px -120px; width: 15px; height: 15px; } .icon-tabstopcenter { - background-position: -345px -150px; + background-position: -350px -135px; width: 15px; height: 15px; } .icon-tabstopleft { - background-position: -345px -165px; + background-position: -350px -150px; width: 15px; height: 15px; } .icon-tabstopright { - background-position: -345px -180px; + background-position: -350px -165px; width: 15px; height: 15px; } .icon-anchor { - background-position: -345px -195px; + background-position: -350px -180px; width: 14px; height: 15px; } .icon-feedback { - background-position: -345px -210px; + background-position: -350px -195px; width: 14px; height: 15px; } .icon-flipupsidedown { - background-position: -345px -225px; + background-position: -350px -210px; width: 14px; height: 15px; } .icon-file { - background-position: -345px -240px; + background-position: -350px -225px; width: 13px; height: 15px; } .icon-fitpage { - background-position: -345px -255px; + background-position: -350px -240px; width: 13px; height: 15px; } .icon-back { - background-position: -345px -270px; + background-position: -350px -255px; width: 12px; height: 15px; } .icon-lock_form_icon { - background-position: -345px -285px; + background-position: -350px -270px; width: 12px; height: 15px; } .icon-changecolorscheme { - background-position: 0px -338px; + background-position: 0px -348px; width: 25px; height: 14px; } .icon-fontcolor { - background-position: -25px -338px; + background-position: -25px -348px; width: 25px; height: 14px; } .icon-numbering { - background-position: -50px -338px; + background-position: -50px -348px; width: 24px; height: 14px; } .icon-distributehorizontally { - background-position: -345px -300px; + background-position: -350px -285px; width: 16px; height: 14px; } .icon-columnwidthmarker { - background-position: -345px -314px; + background-position: -350px -299px; width: 15px; height: 14px; } .icon-fliplefttoright { - background-position: -74px -338px; + background-position: -350px -313px; width: 15px; height: 14px; } .icon-alignobjectbottom { - background-position: -89px -338px; + background-position: -350px -327px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-alignobjectleft { - background-position: -103px -338px; + background-position: -312px -280px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-alignobjectright { - background-position: -117px -338px; + background-position: -74px -348px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-alignobjecttop { - background-position: -131px -338px; + background-position: -88px -348px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-bringforward { - background-position: -145px -338px; + background-position: -102px -348px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-bringtofront { - background-position: -159px -338px; + background-position: -116px -348px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-chart_settings_icon { - background-position: -173px -338px; + background-position: -130px -348px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-commentsicon { - background-position: -187px -338px; + background-position: -144px -348px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-deleteicon { - background-position: -201px -338px; + background-position: -158px -348px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-group { - background-position: -215px -338px; + background-position: -172px -348px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-image_settings_icon { - background-position: -229px -338px; + background-position: -186px -348px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-save { - background-position: -243px -338px; + background-position: -200px -348px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-searchicon { - background-position: -257px -338px; + background-position: -214px -348px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-sendbackward { - background-position: -271px -338px; + background-position: -228px -348px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-sendtoback { - background-position: -285px -338px; + background-position: -242px -348px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-shape_settings_icon { - background-position: -299px -338px; + background-position: -256px -348px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-ungroup { - background-position: -313px -338px; + background-position: -270px -348px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-alignobjectcenter { - background-position: -327px -338px; + background-position: -284px -348px; width: 13px; height: 14px; } .icon-highlight_color_mouse_pointer { - background-position: -340px -338px; + background-position: -297px -348px; width: 13px; height: 14px; } .icon-tocrefreshiconcc { - background-position: -361px 0px; + background-position: -310px -348px; width: 13px; height: 14px; } .icon-copystyle { - background-position: -361px -14px; + background-position: -323px -348px; width: 12px; height: 14px; } .icon-gradientslider { - background-position: -361px -28px; + background-position: -335px -348px; width: 12px; height: 14px; } .icon-combo_delete_values { - background-position: -361px -42px; + background-position: -301px -90px; width: 11px; height: 14px; } .icon-hard { - background-position: -361px -56px; + background-position: -347px -348px; width: 9px; height: 14px; } @@ -1615,451 +1657,457 @@ } .icon-bullets { - background-position: -78px -78px; + background-position: -366px 0px; width: 24px; height: 13px; } .icon-review { - background-position: 0px -352px; + background-position: -366px -13px; width: 23px; height: 13px; } .icon-tocicon { - background-position: -23px -352px; + background-position: -366px -26px; width: 20px; height: 13px; } .icon-visible_area { - background-position: -43px -352px; + background-position: -366px -39px; width: 20px; height: 13px; } .icon-cut { - background-position: -174px -125px; + background-position: -366px -52px; width: 16px; height: 13px; } .icon-removeduplicates { - background-position: -63px -352px; + background-position: -366px -65px; width: 16px; height: 13px; } .icon-text_autoshape { - background-position: -79px -352px; + background-position: -366px -78px; width: 16px; height: 13px; } .icon-changerange { - background-position: -95px -352px; + background-position: -366px -91px; width: 15px; height: 13px; } .icon-clearstyle { - background-position: -110px -352px; + background-position: -366px -104px; width: 15px; height: 13px; } .icon-clear_fields_icon { - background-position: -125px -352px; + background-position: -366px -117px; width: 15px; height: 13px; } .icon-feedbackicon { - background-position: -140px -352px; + background-position: -366px -130px; width: 15px; height: 13px; } .icon-greencircle { - background-position: -155px -352px; + background-position: -366px -143px; + width: 15px; + height: 13px; +} + +.icon-replace { + background-position: -366px -156px; width: 15px; height: 13px; } .icon-alignobjectmiddle { - background-position: -170px -352px; + background-position: -366px -169px; width: 14px; height: 13px; } .icon-copy { - background-position: -184px -352px; + background-position: -366px -182px; width: 14px; height: 13px; } .icon-multiselect { - background-position: -198px -352px; + background-position: -366px -195px; width: 14px; height: 13px; } .icon-paste { - background-position: -212px -352px; + background-position: -366px -208px; width: 14px; height: 13px; } .icon-selectall { - background-position: -226px -352px; + background-position: -366px -221px; width: 14px; height: 13px; } .icon-dropcap_none { - background-position: -361px -70px; + background-position: -366px -234px; + width: 13px; + height: 13px; +} + +.icon-editing_mode { + background-position: -366px -247px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-movetable_handle { - background-position: -361px -83px; + background-position: -366px -260px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-zoomin { - background-position: -361px -96px; + background-position: -366px -273px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-equationplaceholder { - background-position: -361px -109px; + background-position: -366px -286px; width: 12px; height: 13px; } .icon-insertpagenumber { - background-position: -361px -122px; + background-position: -378px -286px; width: 12px; height: 13px; } .icon-rotateclockwise { - background-position: -361px -135px; + background-position: -366px -299px; width: 12px; height: 13px; } .icon-rotatecounterclockwise { - background-position: -361px -148px; + background-position: -378px -299px; width: 12px; height: 13px; } .icon-linespacing { - background-position: -240px -352px; + background-position: 0px -362px; width: 25px; height: 12px; } .icon-spellcheckdeactivated { - background-position: -265px -352px; + background-position: -366px -312px; width: 15px; height: 12px; } .icon-slicer_clearfilter { - background-position: -280px -352px; + background-position: -366px -324px; width: 14px; height: 12px; } .icon-circle { - background-position: -361px -161px; + background-position: -366px -336px; width: 12px; height: 12px; } .icon-follow_move { - background-position: -361px -173px; + background-position: -378px -336px; width: 12px; height: 12px; } .icon-nofill { - background-position: -361px -185px; + background-position: -366px -348px; width: 12px; height: 12px; } .icon-sup { - background-position: -361px -197px; + background-position: -378px -348px; width: 12px; height: 12px; } .icon-deletecommenticon { - background-position: -361px -209px; + background-position: -379px -234px; width: 11px; height: 12px; } .icon-review_delete { - background-position: -361px -221px; + background-position: -379px -247px; width: 11px; height: 12px; } .icon-tabletemplate { - background-position: -294px -352px; + background-position: -25px -362px; width: 26px; height: 11px; } .icon-footnotes { - background-position: -320px -352px; + background-position: -51px -362px; width: 24px; height: 11px; } .icon-insertfunction { - background-position: -344px -352px; + background-position: -75px -362px; width: 21px; height: 11px; } .icon-nonprintingcharacters { - background-position: -374px 0px; + background-position: -96px -362px; width: 20px; height: 11px; } .icon-fitwidth { - background-position: -374px -11px; + background-position: -332px -303px; width: 16px; height: 11px; } .icon-table_settings_icon { - background-position: -374px -22px; + background-position: -174px -125px; width: 16px; height: 11px; } .icon-viewsettingsicon { - background-position: -374px -33px; + background-position: -116px -362px; width: 16px; height: 11px; } -.icon-mailmergeicon { - background-position: -374px -44px; - width: 15px; - height: 11px; -} - .icon-review_accept { - background-position: -374px -55px; + background-position: -132px -362px; width: 13px; height: 11px; } .icon-sub { - background-position: -374px -66px; + background-position: -145px -362px; width: 13px; height: 11px; } .icon-aligncenter { - background-position: -374px -77px; + background-position: -158px -362px; width: 12px; height: 11px; } .icon-alignleft { - background-position: -374px -88px; + background-position: -170px -362px; width: 12px; height: 11px; } .icon-alignright { - background-position: -374px -99px; + background-position: -182px -362px; width: 12px; height: 11px; } .icon-clearfilter { - background-position: -374px -110px; + background-position: -194px -362px; width: 12px; height: 11px; } .icon-decreasedec { - background-position: -374px -121px; + background-position: -206px -362px; width: 12px; height: 11px; } .icon-decreaseindent { - background-position: -374px -132px; + background-position: -218px -362px; width: 12px; height: 11px; } .icon-dropcap_margin { - background-position: -374px -143px; + background-position: -230px -362px; width: 12px; height: 11px; } .icon-dropcap_text { - background-position: -374px -154px; + background-position: -242px -362px; width: 12px; height: 11px; } .icon-increasedec { - background-position: -374px -165px; + background-position: -254px -362px; width: 12px; height: 11px; } .icon-increaseindent { - background-position: -374px -176px; + background-position: -266px -362px; width: 12px; height: 11px; } .icon-justify { - background-position: -374px -187px; + background-position: -278px -362px; width: 12px; height: 11px; } .icon-leftcolumn { - background-position: -374px -198px; + background-position: -290px -362px; width: 12px; height: 11px; } .icon-onecolumn { - background-position: -374px -209px; + background-position: -302px -362px; width: 12px; height: 11px; } .icon-resolvedicon { - background-position: -374px -220px; + background-position: -314px -362px; width: 12px; height: 11px; } .icon-resolveicon { - background-position: -374px -231px; + background-position: -326px -362px; width: 12px; height: 11px; } .icon-rightcolumn { - background-position: -374px -242px; + background-position: -338px -362px; width: 12px; height: 11px; } .icon-sortandfilter { - background-position: -374px -253px; + background-position: -350px -362px; width: 12px; height: 11px; } .icon-twocolumns { - background-position: -374px -264px; + background-position: -362px -362px; width: 12px; height: 11px; } .icon-combo_add_values { - background-position: -374px -275px; + background-position: -379px -260px; width: 11px; height: 11px; } .icon-sortatoz { - background-position: -374px -286px; + background-position: -379px -273px; width: 11px; height: 11px; } .icon-sortztoa { - background-position: -374px -297px; + background-position: -374px -362px; width: 11px; height: 11px; } .icon-threecolumns { - background-position: -374px -308px; + background-position: 0px -374px; width: 11px; height: 11px; } .icon-underline { - background-position: -374px -319px; + background-position: -380px -169px; width: 10px; height: 11px; } .icon-zoomout { - background-position: -384px -319px; + background-position: -380px -182px; width: 10px; height: 11px; } .icon-navigationicon { - background-position: -374px -330px; + background-position: -11px -374px; width: 13px; height: 10px; } .icon-strike { - background-position: -374px -340px; + background-position: -24px -374px; width: 12px; height: 10px; } .icon-yellowdiamond { - background-position: -374px -350px; + background-position: -36px -374px; width: 11px; height: 10px; } .icon-firstline_indent { - background-position: -361px -233px; + background-position: -380px -195px; width: 10px; height: 10px; } .icon-review_reject { - background-position: -361px -243px; + background-position: -380px -208px; width: 10px; height: 10px; } .icon-bold { - background-position: -386px -77px; + background-position: -382px -52px; width: 8px; height: 10px; } .icon-italic { - background-position: -387px -55px; + background-position: -382px -65px; width: 7px; height: 10px; } .icon-selectcolumnpointer { - background-position: -387px -66px; + background-position: -382px -78px; width: 7px; height: 10px; } @@ -2077,181 +2125,187 @@ } .icon-combo_values_up { - background-position: -361px -253px; + background-position: -380px -221px; width: 10px; height: 9px; } .icon-cellrow { - background-position: -385px -275px; + background-position: -381px -91px; width: 9px; height: 9px; } .icon-resize_square { - background-position: -385px -286px; + background-position: -381px -104px; width: 9px; height: 9px; } .icon-searchdownbutton { - background-position: -345px -328px; + background-position: -76px -167px; width: 14px; height: 8px; } .icon-searchupbutton { - background-position: -304px -296px; + background-position: -90px -167px; + width: 14px; + height: 8px; +} + +.icon-viewing_mode { + background-position: -104px -167px; width: 14px; height: 8px; } .icon-constantproportions { - background-position: -361px -262px; + background-position: -118px -167px; width: 13px; height: 8px; } .icon-rowheightmarker { - background-position: -361px -270px; + background-position: -131px -167px; width: 13px; height: 8px; } .icon-tabstopcenter_marker { - background-position: -361px -278px; + background-position: -144px -167px; width: 12px; height: 8px; } .icon-hanging { - background-position: -361px -286px; + background-position: -380px -324px; width: 10px; height: 8px; } .icon-right_indent { - background-position: -361px -294px; + background-position: -156px -167px; width: 10px; height: 8px; } .icon-soft { - background-position: -361px -302px; + background-position: -166px -167px; width: 10px; height: 8px; } .icon-selectcellpointer { - background-position: -386px -88px; + background-position: -381px -117px; width: 8px; height: 8px; } .icon-tabstopleft_marker { - background-position: -386px -99px; + background-position: -381px -130px; width: 8px; height: 8px; } .icon-tabstopright_marker { - background-position: -386px -110px; + background-position: -381px -143px; width: 8px; height: 8px; } .icon-nextfootnote { - background-position: -386px -121px; + background-position: -381px -156px; width: 6px; height: 8px; } .icon-previousfootnote { - background-position: -386px -132px; + background-position: -381px -312px; width: 6px; height: 8px; } .icon-collapse { - background-position: -361px -310px; + background-position: -350px -341px; width: 11px; height: 7px; } .icon-expand { - background-position: -361px -317px; + background-position: -176px -167px; width: 11px; height: 7px; } .icon-selectrowpointer { - background-position: -361px -324px; + background-position: -356px -348px; width: 10px; height: 7px; } .icon-resizetable_handle { - background-position: -386px -143px; + background-position: -304px -37px; width: 7px; height: 7px; } .icon-redo1 { - background-position: -361px -331px; + background-position: -298px -220px; width: 13px; height: 6px; } .icon-undo1 { - background-position: -361px -337px; + background-position: -47px -374px; width: 13px; height: 6px; } .icon-combo_values_down { - background-position: -361px -343px; + background-position: -60px -374px; width: 12px; height: 6px; } .icon-leftindent { - background-position: -212px -130px; + background-position: -301px -104px; width: 10px; height: 6px; } .icon-nextpage { - background-position: -389px -44px; + background-position: -361px -341px; width: 5px; height: 6px; } .icon-previouspage { - background-position: -386px -154px; + background-position: -344px -286px; width: 5px; height: 6px; } .icon-tab { - background-position: -374px -360px; + background-position: -356px -355px; width: 10px; height: 5px; } .icon-nonbreakspace { - background-position: -389px -50px; + background-position: -381px -125px; width: 5px; height: 5px; } .icon-square { - background-position: -386px -160px; + background-position: -381px -138px; width: 5px; height: 5px; } .icon-space { - background-position: -390px -11px; + background-position: -386px -26px; width: 2px; height: 3px; } diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/big/signature_form_inserted.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/big/signature_form_inserted.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..d394c276cd Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/big/signature_form_inserted.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/chaticon_new.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/chaticon_new.png index b1fb9c0385..0d93aa1654 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/chaticon_new.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/chaticon_new.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/editing_mode.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/editing_mode.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..8f762bcaad Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/editing_mode.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/mailmergeicon.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/mailmergeicon.png index f8cc554abd..e7c12c8a1d 100644 Binary files a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/mailmergeicon.png and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/mailmergeicon.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/pixabay_icon.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/pixabay_icon.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..5c3b171dce Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/pixabay_icon.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/pixabay_store_icon.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/pixabay_store_icon.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..8a68930ddb Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/pixabay_store_icon.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/replace.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/replace.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..66e5fbd5bb Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/replace.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/reviewing_mode.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/reviewing_mode.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..8ec617cc42 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/reviewing_mode.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/signature.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/signature.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4ccb9b96a7 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/signature.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/textfromfile.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/textfromfile.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..be6bc71292 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/textfromfile.png differ diff --git a/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/viewing_mode.png b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/viewing_mode.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..fcff7109ef Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/documenteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/viewing_mode.png differ diff --git a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/Contents.json b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/Contents.json index 7733bd9686..5c80337a9b 100644 --- a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/Contents.json +++ b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/Contents.json @@ -1,12 +1,14 @@ [ {"src": "ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm", "name": "Introducing PDF Editor user interface", "headername": "Program Interface"}, {"src": "ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm", "name": "File tab"}, - {"src": "ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm", "name": "Home Tab"}, + { "src": "ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm", "name": "Home Tab" }, + {"src": "ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm", "name": "Insert tab"}, { "src": "ProgramInterface/CommentTab.htm", "name": "Comment tab" }, {"src": "ProgramInterface/ViewTab.htm", "name": "View tab"}, {"src": "ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm", "name": "Plugins tab"}, { "src": "UsageInstructions/OpenCreateNew.htm", "name": "Open an existing PDF or create a new document", "headername": "Basic operations" }, { "src": "UsageInstructions/FillingOutForm.htm", "name": "Filling out a form" }, + { "src": "UsageInstructions/EditPDF.htm", "name": "Editing PDF" }, { "src": "HelpfulHints/Communicating.htm", "name": "Communicating in real time", "headername": "Collaboration" }, {"src": "HelpfulHints/Commenting.htm", "name": "Commenting PDFs"}, {"src": "UsageInstructions/DrawingOperations.htm", "name": "Draw freehand on a PDF" }, diff --git a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/About.htm b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/About.htm index e6a50c1f4c..b03a1a4ec2 100644 --- a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/About.htm +++ b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/About.htm @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ - +
                                diff --git a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm index a1407f6124..4b524c2c0b 100644 --- a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm +++ b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ - +
                                @@ -29,7 +29,12 @@

                                Workspace

                              10. The Turn on screen reader support option is used to enable support of screen reader software.
                              11. The Use Alt key to navigate the user interface using the keyboard option is used to enable using the Alt / Option key in keyboard shortcuts.
                              12. Show the Quick Print button in the editor header is used in the desktop version to enable quick printing via the corresponding button at the top toolbar. The file will be printed on the last selected or default printer.
                              13. -
                              14. The RTL Interface (Beta) option is used to change the direction in which elements of the interface are displayed.
                              15. +
                              16. The Use the mini toolbar when selecting text option is used to enable displaying the mini toolbar with quick access to most common formatting tools when selecting text.
                              17. +
                              18. The Customize quick access button is used to choose which buttons shall be available in the top toolbar, i.e., Save, Print, Undo, and Redo.
                              19. +
                              20. + The RTL Interface (Beta) option is used to change the direction in which elements of the interface are displayed. +

                                This option is available only for interface languages that require RTL.

                                +
                              21. The Interface theme option is used to change the color scheme of the editor’s interface.
                                  diff --git a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Commenting.htm b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Commenting.htm index c03983105d..da37903928 100644 --- a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Commenting.htm +++ b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Commenting.htm @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ - +
                                  diff --git a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Communicating.htm b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Communicating.htm index 1195fb14c0..c4a2208a52 100644 --- a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Communicating.htm +++ b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Communicating.htm @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ - +
                                  diff --git a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm index 8bc9e303be..9c0d43b111 100644 --- a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm +++ b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm @@ -7,9 +7,9 @@ - - - + + +
                                  diff --git a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm index 9696a39fca..56519e0a64 100644 --- a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm +++ b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ - +
                                  @@ -34,7 +34,6 @@

                                  Adjust the view settings

                                • Status Bar – when this option is disabled, the bottommost bar where the Zoom, Fit to page, Fit to width buttons are situated will be hidden. To show the hidden Status Bar, enable this option.
                                • Left Panel - when disabled, hides the left panel where Search, Comments, etc. buttons are located. To show the left panel, check this box.
                                -

                                When the Comments or Chat panel is opened, the width of the left sidebar is adjusted by simple drag-and-drop: move the mouse cursor over the left sidebar border so that it turns into the bidirectional arrow and drag the border to the right to extend the width of the sidebar. To restore its original width, move the border to the left. @@ -69,6 +68,7 @@

                                Page Thumbnails

                              22. Drag the slider to set the thumbnail size.
                              23. The Highlight visible part of page is active by default to indicate the area that is currently on the screen. Click it to disable.
                      +

                      Click a page with the right mouse button to access the following options: Insert blank page before (the current one), Insert blank page after (the current one), Rotate page right, Rotate page left, Delete page. These options are available only in the Edit PDF mode.

                      To close the Page Thumbnails panel, click the Page Thumbnails icon on the left sidebar once again.

                      Zoom

                      The Zoom buttons are situated in the right lower corner and are used to zoom in and out of the current PDF.

                      diff --git a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Search.htm b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Search.htm index ffc0bdfe97..7ca00bc01a 100644 --- a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Search.htm +++ b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Search.htm @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ - +
                      diff --git a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/CommentTab.htm b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/CommentTab.htm index f473b54ae1..434f75b626 100644 --- a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/CommentTab.htm +++ b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/CommentTab.htm @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ - +
                      diff --git a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm index 0e07104854..ee072bba00 100644 --- a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm +++ b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ - +
                      @@ -30,9 +30,8 @@

                      File tab

                      in the online version, save the current file, download as (save the document in the selected format to the hard disk drive of your computer), save copy as (save a copy of the document in the selected format to the portal documents), print the file or rename it, in the desktop version, save the current file keeping the current format and location using the Save option or save the current file under a different name and change its location or format using the Save as option, print the file.
                    • -
                    • create a new .docx file or open a recently edited one (available in the online version only),
                    • +
                    • open a recently edited file,
                    • view general information about the PDF,
                    • -
                    • manage access rights (available in the online version only),
                    • access the Advanced Settings of the editor.
                    • in the desktop version, open the folder, where the file is stored, in the File Explorer window. In the online version, open the folder of the Documents module, where the file is stored, in a new browser tab.
                    diff --git a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm index ff008b70fa..54acf50a51 100644 --- a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm +++ b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm @@ -7,33 +7,50 @@ - + -
                    -
                    - -
                    -

                    Home tab

                    -

                    The Home tab in the PDF Editor opens by default when you open a PDF. It allows you to navigate the PDF, select text or objects, adjust zoom, fit to page or width.

                    -
                    +
                    +
                    + +
                    +

                    Home tab

                    +

                    The Home tab in the PDF Editor opens by default when you open a PDF. It allows you to navigate the PDF, select text or objects, rotate pages, adjust zoom, fit to page or width, insert objects and perform basic editing operations.

                    +

                    The corresponding window of the Online PDF Editor:

                    Home tab

                    -

                    Home tab - Forms

                    -
                    -

                    The corresponding window of the Desktop PDF Editor:

                    Home tab

                    +
                    +

                    The following mode is available after clicking the Edit PDF button on the top toolbar.

                    + The interface for the PDF editing mode in the Online PDF Editor: +

                    Home tab Editing

                    + The interface for the PDF editing mode in the Desktop PDF Editor: +

                    Home tab Editing

                    +
                    +

                    The following mode is available only for fillable PDF forms.

                    + The interface for the form filling mode in the Online PDF Editor: +

                    Home tab - Forms

                    + The interface for the form filling mode in the Desktop PDF Editor:

                    Home tab - Forms

                    Using this tab, you can:

                    -
                    +

                    Additional features while in the editing mode:

                    + +

                    The following options are not displayed for ordinary PDF files, they are available only for fillable PDF forms:

                    + +
                    \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..676acb698f --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + Insert tab + + + + + + + + +
                    +
                    + +
                    +

                    Insert tab

                    +

                    The Insert tab in the PDF Editor allows adding some page formatting elements as well as visual objects and comments.

                    +
                    +

                    The corresponding window of the Online PDF Editor:

                    +

                    Insert tab

                    +
                    +
                    +

                    The corresponding window of the Desktop PDF Editor:

                    +

                    Insert tab

                    +
                    +

                    Using this tab, you can:

                    +
                      +
                    • Use the Hand tool to move the page or objects.
                    • +
                    • Use the Select tool to select visual elements on the page for further editing.
                    • +
                    • Insert a Blank page into the file. Click the arrow on this icon to choose whether you want to insert a blank page before or after the cursor.
                    • +
                    • Insert a Table into the file.
                    • +
                    • Insert a Text Box, Text Art, an Image, or Shapes into the file.
                    • +
                    • Insert a Hyperlink into the file.
                    • +
                    • Insert an Equation or a Symbol into the file.
                    • +
                    +
                    + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm index 9398fe4402..cf4feb4d13 100644 --- a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm +++ b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ - +
                    @@ -27,21 +27,7 @@

                    Plugins tab

                    The Background Plugins button allows viewing the list of plugins that work in the background. Here you can activate or disable them by activating/deactivating the corresponding switches, and adjust their settings by clicking the More button next to the required plugin.

                    -

                    Currently, the following plugins are available:

                    -
                      -
                    • Send allows sending the presentation via email using the default desktop mail client (available in the desktop version only),
                    • -
                    • Get and paste html allows you to get the selected text as an HTML code.
                    • -
                    • Telegram can be integrated into your working area to continue chatting.
                    • - -
                    • Count words and characters counts the exact number of words and symbols, both with and without spaces, in your PDF, as well as the number of paragraphs altogether.
                    • -
                    • - Translator allows translating the selected text into other languages, -

                      This plugin doesn't work with Internet Explorer.

                      -
                    • -
                    • Thesaurus allows searching for synonyms and antonyms of a word,
                    • -
                    • Speech allows converting the selected text into speech,
                    • - -
                    +

                    The plugins on the screenshots above are used as an example. To learn more, please refer to the Plugin Manager page.

                    Several visual plugins can be added to your document. The added plugins will be displayed as corresponding icons on the left panel.

                    To learn more about plugins, please refer to our API Documentation. All the currently existing open-source plugin examples are available on GitHub.

                    diff --git a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm index 7522bf1fcc..0448147e09 100644 --- a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm +++ b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ - +
                    @@ -32,14 +32,12 @@

                    Introducing the user interface of the PDF Editor

                    Icons in the editor header

                    On the right side of the Editor header along with the username, the following icons are displayed:

                      -
                    • Share (available in the online version only) - allows adjusting access rights for the PDF stored in the cloud.
                    • Open file location - in the desktop version, it allows opening the folder, where the file is stored, in the File explorer window. In the online version, it allows opening the folder of the Documents module, where the file is stored, in a new browser tab.
                    • -
                    • Mark as favorite - click the star to add a file to favorites to make it easy to find. The added file is just a shortcut, so the file itself remains stored in its original location. Deleting a file from favorites does not remove the file from its original location.
                    • Search - allows searching the PDF for a particular word or symbol, etc.
                  3. - The Top toolbar displays a set of editing commands depending on the selected menu tab. Currently, the following tabs are available: File, Home, Comment, View, Plugins. + The Top toolbar displays a set of editing commands depending on the selected menu tab. Currently, the following tabs are available: File, Home, Comment, Insert, View, Plugins.

                    The Copy, Paste, Cut and Select All options are always available on the left side of the Top toolbar regardless of the selected tab, as are the Select and Hand tools.

                  4. diff --git a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ViewTab.htm b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ViewTab.htm index 6c752020bf..6e531a03bc 100644 --- a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ViewTab.htm +++ b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ViewTab.htm @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ - +
                    @@ -32,7 +32,7 @@

                    View tab

                  5. Zoom allows you to zoom in and out of your PDF.
                  6. Fit to Page allows you to resize the PDF so that the screen displays the page as a whole.
                  7. Fit to Width allows you to resize the PDF so that the page scales to fit the width of the screen.
                  8. -
                  9. Interface Theme allows you to change the interface theme by choosing a Same as system, Light, Classic Light, Dark or Contrast Dark theme.
                  10. +
                  11. Interface Theme allows you to change the interface theme by choosing a Same as system, Light, Classic Light, Dark, Contrast Dark, or Gray theme.
                  12. Dark Document option becomes active when the Dark or Contrast Dark theme is enabled. Click it to make the working area dark too.
                  13. The following options allow you to configure the elements to display or hide. Check the elements to make them visible:

                    @@ -40,6 +40,7 @@

                    View tab

                  14. Always Show Toolbar to make the top toolbar always visible.
                  15. Status Bar to make the status bar always visible.
                  16. Left Panel to make the left panel visible.
                  17. +
                  18. Right Panel to make the right panel visible.
                  19. diff --git a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/CommunicationPlugins.htm b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/CommunicationPlugins.htm index c1568285e7..a9930f42f4 100644 --- a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/CommunicationPlugins.htm +++ b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/CommunicationPlugins.htm @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ - +
                    @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@

                    Communicate while editing

                    In ONLYOFFICE PDF Editor, you can always keep in touch with colleagues and use popular online messengers, such as Telegram.

                    -
                    Telegram plugin is not installed by default. To find information on how to install it, please refer to the corresponding article: Adding plugins to ONLYOFFICE Desktop Editors Adding plugins to ONLYOFFICE Cloud.
                    +
                    Telegram plugin is not installed by default. To find information on how to install it, please refer to the corresponding article: Adding plugins to ONLYOFFICE Desktop Editors Adding plugins to ONLYOFFICE Cloud, or install the plugin using the Plugin Manager.

                    Telegram

                    To start chatting in the Telegram plugin,

                      diff --git a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/DrawingOperations.htm b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/DrawingOperations.htm index 1948a94f9c..55e5b26eb6 100644 --- a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/DrawingOperations.htm +++ b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/DrawingOperations.htm @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ - +
                      diff --git a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/EditPDF.htm b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/EditPDF.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..6a5f3e91a4 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/EditPDF.htm @@ -0,0 +1,116 @@ + + + + Editing PDF + + + + + + + + +
                      +
                      + +
                      +

                      Editing PDF

                      +

                      You can edit previously uploaded PDFs or the ones created using ONLYOFFICE PDF Editor.

                      +
                        +
                      1. Open a PDF file.
                      2. +
                      3. If the PDF file has been opened in a viewer or filling form mode, you can switch to editing by clicking the Edit PDF button on the top toolbar provided you have the corresponding rights.
                      4. +
                      5. Click the Edit Text button on the Home tab to run an automated process of marking up text boxes, graphical objects, etc.
                      6. +
                      7. + Click the recognized area you want to edit. +
                          +
                        • + To edit the recognized text, please read the following guides: +

                          Home tab

                          + +

                          These features can be found on the Home tab.

                          +
                        • +
                        • + To manage PDF pages, go to the Home tab: +

                          Home tab

                          +
                            +
                          • + To insert a blank page, click the Insert Page button and choose whether you want to insert a blank page before the currently selected one or after it. +

                            The same feature is available through the Page Thumbnails button on the left interface panel of the editor. Click within the page navigation area with the right mouse button, and choose where you want to insert a blank page.

                            +
                          • +
                          • + To rotate a page, click the Rotate Page button and choose whether you want to a page to be rotated right or left. +

                            The same feature is available through the Page Thumbnails button on the left interface panel of the editor. Click within the page navigation area with the right mouse button, and choose the direction of the page rotation.

                            +
                          • +
                          • + To delete a page, click the Delete Page button. +

                            The same feature is available through the Page Thumbnails button on the left interface panel of the editor. Click within the page navigation area with the right mouse button, and choose the Delete page menu item.

                            +
                          • +
                          +
                        • +
                        • + To insert new objects or edit the existing ones, please read the following guides: + +

                          These features can be found on the Insert tab.

                          +
                        • +
                        • + To facilitate collaborating on a PDF, please read the following guides: + +

                          These features can be found on the Collaboration tab (for editing mode) or on the Comment tab (for viewing mode). To hide comments, uncheck the Show Comments checkbox.

                          +

                          You can also add text comments using the Comment tab.

                          +
                            +
                          • Go to the Comment tab.
                          • +
                          • Click the Text Comment button.
                          • +
                          • + Choose the type of the comment you want to insert: +
                              +
                            • Insert text comment - a comment is displayed as a text box that can be moved around the page.
                            • +
                            • Insert text callout - a comment is displayed as a text box with a guideline leading to the exact place on the page.
                            • +
                            +

                            Comment tab

                            +
                          • +
                          +
                        • +
                        • +

                          Collaboration:

                          +

                          Advanced settings - Collaboration

                          +
                            +
                          • + The Co-editing mode subsection allows you to set the preferable mode for seeing changes made to the document when working in collaboration. +
                              +
                            • Fast. The users who take part in the document co-editing will see the changes in real time once they are made by other users.
                            • +
                            • Strict (by default). All the changes made by co-editors will be shown only after you click the Save
                              icon that will notify you about new changes.
                            • +
                            +
                          • +
                          • + The Real-time collaboration changes subsection allows you to choose how new changes and comments will be displayed in real time. +
                              +
                            • View none. All the changes made during the current session will not be highlighted.
                            • +
                            • View all. All the changes made during the current session will be highlighted.
                            • +
                            • View last. Only the changes made since you last time clicked the Save
                              icon will be highlighted. This option is only available when the Strict co-editing mode is selected.
                            • +
                            • Show comments in text. If you disable this feature, the commented passages will be highlighted only if you click the Comments
                              icon on the left sidebar.
                            • +
                            • Show resolved comments. This feature is disabled by default so that the resolved comments are hidden in the document text. You can view such comments only if you click the Comments
                              icon on the left sidebar. Enable this option if you want to display resolved comments in the document text.
                            • +
                            +
                          • +
                          +
                        • +
                        • To navigate PDFs, please read the following guide on the features available on the View tab.
                        • +
                        • The Plugins tab allows managing your plugins. To learn more about each plugin, please refer to the Plugins section of the Document Editor.
                        • +
                        +
                      8. +
                      9. To delete a recognized area, select it, and press Delete or Backspace on your keyboard.
                      10. +
                      +
                      + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/FillingOutForm.htm b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/FillingOutForm.htm index bb10aee8c7..b4029dc4a8 100644 --- a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/FillingOutForm.htm +++ b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/FillingOutForm.htm @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ - +
                      @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                      Filling out a form

                      -

                      You can fill in the form fields in the PDF file and submit, print, or download the form after you have filled it out.

                      +

                      You can fill in the form fields in the PDF file and submit, print, or download the form after you have filled it out. If you have corresponding access rights, you can switch to editing by clicking the Edit PDF button on the top toolbar.

                      How to fill in a form:

                      1. diff --git a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/HTML.htm b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/HTML.htm index 536fbcc1df..e2f2731e5e 100644 --- a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/HTML.htm +++ b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/HTML.htm @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ - +
                        @@ -16,6 +16,7 @@

                        Edit HTML

                        If you want to get text as HTML code, use the HTML plugin.

                        +

                        Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager.

                        1. Open the Plugins tab and click Get and paste html.
                        2. Select the necessary content.
                        3. diff --git a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/OpenCreateNew.htm b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/OpenCreateNew.htm index 53cc68ecb9..26603e7c4b 100644 --- a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/OpenCreateNew.htm +++ b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/OpenCreateNew.htm @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ - +
                          diff --git a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm index 3f2bd454d1..765928f02f 100644 --- a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm +++ b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ - +
                          diff --git a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Speech.htm b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Speech.htm index 6571ec1176..fccf5cc6c3 100644 --- a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Speech.htm +++ b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Speech.htm @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ - +
                          @@ -16,9 +16,10 @@

                          Read the text out loud

                          ONLYOFFICE PDF Editor has a plugin that can read out the text for you.

                          +

                          Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager.

                          1. Select the text to be read out.
                          2. -
                          3. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose
                            Speech.
                          4. +
                          5. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose
                            Speech.

                          The text will now be read out.

                          diff --git a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Speechinput.htm b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Speechinput.htm index dcdaf8f64f..ae264f4658 100644 --- a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Speechinput.htm +++ b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Speechinput.htm @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ - +
                          @@ -16,6 +16,7 @@

                          Type via voice

                          In the PDF Editor, you can insert text with your voice.

                          +

                          Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager.

                          1. Set the cursor to the place where you want to add text.
                          2. Switch to the Plugins tab and select
                            Speech input.
                          3. diff --git a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Thesaurus.htm b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Thesaurus.htm index dc22707d28..7c7a24c957 100644 --- a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Thesaurus.htm +++ b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Thesaurus.htm @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ - +
                            @@ -19,6 +19,7 @@

                            Find a synonym

                            If you are using the same word multiple times, or a word is just not quite the word you are looking for, ONLYOFFICE PDF Editor lets you look up synonyms. It will show you the antonyms too.

                            +

                            Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager.

                            1. Select the word in your document.
                            2. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose
                              Thesaurus.
                            3. diff --git a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Translator.htm b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Translator.htm index 63884a2f44..352ad5b430 100644 --- a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Translator.htm +++ b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Translator.htm @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ - +
                              @@ -16,19 +16,20 @@

                              Translate text

                              In the PDF Editor, you can translate your PDF into and from numerous languages.

                              +

                              Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager.

                              1. Select the text that you want to translate.
                              2. -
                              3. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose
                                Translator, the Translator appears in a sidebar on the left.
                              4. +
                              5. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose
                                Translator, the Translator appears in a sidebar on the left.
                              6. Click the drop-down box and choose the preferred language.

                              The text will be translated into the required language.

                              - Translator plugin + Translator plugin

                              Changing the language of your result:

                              1. Click the drop-down box and choose the preferred language.
                              -

                              The translation will change immediately.

                              +

                              The translation will change immediately.

                            \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Typograf.htm b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Typograf.htm index 8893677a69..5ba057752e 100644 --- a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Typograf.htm +++ b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Typograf.htm @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ - +
                            @@ -16,6 +16,7 @@

                            Correct typography

                            If you need to correct typography in your text, use the Typograf plugin, which will automatically place non-breaking spaces and remove extra ones, as well as correct minor typos, insert correct quotes, replace hyphens with dashes, etc.

                            +

                            Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager.

                            1. Open the Plugins tab and click Typograf.
                            2. Click the Show advanced settings button.
                            3. diff --git a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ViewPDFInfo.htm b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ViewPDFInfo.htm index 0a1f75201a..af6e3385b2 100644 --- a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ViewPDFInfo.htm +++ b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ViewPDFInfo.htm @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ - +
                              diff --git a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/WordCounter.htm b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/WordCounter.htm index ecd5c8a6e0..5a7ca0a801 100644 --- a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/WordCounter.htm +++ b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/WordCounter.htm @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ - +
                              @@ -16,6 +16,7 @@

                              Count words

                              To know the exact number of words and symbols both with and without spaces in your document, as well as the number of paragraphs altogether, use the Word Counter plugin.

                              +

                              Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager.

                              1. Open the Plugins tab and click Count words and characters.
                              2. Select the text.
                              3. diff --git a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/fillable_form.png b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/fillable_form.png index 44703515ff..4922bd98f3 100644 Binary files a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/fillable_form.png and b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/fillable_form.png differ diff --git a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/advancedsettings.png b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/advancedsettings.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..50f6a41310 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/advancedsettings.png differ diff --git a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/collaborationtab.png b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/collaborationtab.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..d83b2c8598 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/collaborationtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/commenttab.png b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/commenttab.png index 587c644e5f..8a2ad10efb 100644 Binary files a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/commenttab.png and b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/commenttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/commenttab_textcomment.png b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/commenttab_textcomment.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ffb2c0bfe5 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/commenttab_textcomment.png differ diff --git a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_commenttab.png b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_commenttab.png index 77770ecc1f..607534c48f 100644 Binary files a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_commenttab.png and b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_commenttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png index f02de3a99e..edbdab4b97 100644 Binary files a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png and b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png differ diff --git a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png index f38132e36c..51b1c39515 100644 Binary files a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png and b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png differ diff --git a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png index 682edd6590..87cb867953 100644 Binary files a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png and b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png differ diff --git a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_hometab_editing.png b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_hometab_editing.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..32ff2c4cc9 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_hometab_editing.png differ diff --git a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_hometab_form.png b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_hometab_form.png index 295d254e5a..9af1b4331e 100644 Binary files a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_hometab_form.png and b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_hometab_form.png differ diff --git a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..c9e7f9c021 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png index 01bf8e65c0..14958c5ed5 100644 Binary files a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png and b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png differ diff --git a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_viewtab.png b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_viewtab.png index feca358378..1f18c18f23 100644 Binary files a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_viewtab.png and b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_viewtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/editorwindow.png b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/editorwindow.png index b523633677..8724baa3d9 100644 Binary files a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/editorwindow.png and b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/editorwindow.png differ diff --git a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/filetab.png b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/filetab.png index 0e65551f29..ebff121868 100644 Binary files a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/filetab.png and b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/filetab.png differ diff --git a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/hometab.png b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/hometab.png index f40595d204..4043f8a70e 100644 Binary files a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/hometab.png and b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/hometab.png differ diff --git a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/hometab_editing.png b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/hometab_editing.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..dc8bf1106b Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/hometab_editing.png differ diff --git a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/hometab_form.png b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/hometab_form.png index 995dbfa695..8b657d1b23 100644 Binary files a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/hometab_form.png and b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/hometab_form.png differ diff --git a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/inserttab.png b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/inserttab.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..a5236a0b92 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/inserttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/leftpart.png b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/leftpart.png index 3863efe30b..0f528e8042 100644 Binary files a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/leftpart.png and b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/leftpart.png differ diff --git a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/pluginstab.png b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/pluginstab.png index 756935c60a..4dfd0ffa21 100644 Binary files a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/pluginstab.png and b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/pluginstab.png differ diff --git a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/viewtab.png b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/viewtab.png index 691eff44a8..5e2d715f79 100644 Binary files a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/viewtab.png and b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/viewtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/search/indexes.js b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/search/indexes.js index ea0c1bd109..b4b5985be4 100644 --- a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/search/indexes.js +++ b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/en/search/indexes.js @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm", "title": "Advanced Settings of the PDF Editor", - "body": "The PDF Editor allows you to change its advanced settings. To access them, open the File tab on the top toolbar and select the Advanced Settings option. The advanced settings are grouped as follows: Collaboration Show comments in text. If you disable this feature, the commented passages will be highlighted only if you click the Comments icon on the left sidebar. The option is available only when opening a common PDF file, not a form. Workspace The Turn on screen reader support option is used to enable support of screen reader software. The Use Alt key to navigate the user interface using the keyboard option is used to enable using the Alt / Option key in keyboard shortcuts. Show the Quick Print button in the editor header is used in the desktop version to enable quick printing via the corresponding button at the top toolbar. The file will be printed on the last selected or default printer. The RTL Interface (Beta) option is used to change the direction in which elements of the interface are displayed. The Interface theme option is used to change the color scheme of the editor’s interface. The Same as system option makes the editor follow the interface theme of your system. The Light color scheme incorporates standard red brick, white, and light gray colors with less contrast in UI elements suitable for working during the daytime. The Classic Light color scheme incorporates standard red brick, white, and light gray colors. The Dark color scheme incorporates black, dark gray, and light gray colors suitable for working at night. The Contrast Dark color scheme incorporates black, dark gray, and white colors with more contrast in UI elements, highlighting the working area of the file. The Turn on document dark mode option is used to make the working area darker when the editor is set to the Dark or Contrast Dark interface theme. Check the Turn on document dark mode box to enable it. Note: Apart from the available Light, Classic Light, Dark, and Contrast Dark interface themes, ONLYOFFICE editors can now be customized with your own color theme. Please follow these instructions to learn how you can do that. The Default Zoom Value option is used to set the default zoom value, selecting it in the list of available options from 50% to 500%. You can also choose the Fit to Page, Fit to Width, or Last Used option. The Last Used option refers to the last set scaling during the current session. The Font Hinting option is used to select how fonts are displayed in the PDF Editor. Choose As Windows if you like the way fonts are usually displayed on Windows, i.e., using Windows font hinting. Choose As OS X if you like the way fonts are usually displayed on a Mac, i.e., without any font hinting at all. Choose Native if you want your text to be displayed with hinting embedded into font files. Default cache mode - used to select the cache mode for the font characters. It’s not recommended to switch it without any reason. It can be helpful in some cases only, for example, when an issue in the Google Chrome browser with enabled hardware acceleration occurs. The Document Editor has two cache modes: In the first cache mode, each letter is cached as a separate picture. In the second cache mode, a picture of a certain size is selected where letters are placed dynamically, and a mechanism for allocating/removing memory in this picture is also implemented. If there is not enough memory, a second picture is created, etc. The Default cache mode setting applies the two above-mentioned cache modes separately for different browsers: When the Default cache mode setting is enabled, Internet Explorer (v. 9, 10, 11) uses the second cache mode, other browsers use the first cache mode. When the Default cache mode setting is disabled, Internet Explorer (v. 9, 10, 11) uses the first cache mode, other browsers use the second cache mode. To save the changes you made, click the Apply button." + "body": "The PDF Editor allows you to change its advanced settings. To access them, open the File tab on the top toolbar and select the Advanced Settings option. The advanced settings are grouped as follows: Collaboration Show comments in text. If you disable this feature, the commented passages will be highlighted only if you click the Comments icon on the left sidebar. The option is available only when opening a common PDF file, not a form. Workspace The Turn on screen reader support option is used to enable support of screen reader software. The Use Alt key to navigate the user interface using the keyboard option is used to enable using the Alt / Option key in keyboard shortcuts. Show the Quick Print button in the editor header is used in the desktop version to enable quick printing via the corresponding button at the top toolbar. The file will be printed on the last selected or default printer. The Use the mini toolbar when selecting text option is used to enable displaying the mini toolbar with quick access to most common formatting tools when selecting text. The Customize quick access button is used to choose which buttons shall be available in the top toolbar, i.e., Save, Print, Undo, and Redo. The RTL Interface (Beta) option is used to change the direction in which elements of the interface are displayed. This option is available only for interface languages that require RTL. The Interface theme option is used to change the color scheme of the editor’s interface. The Same as system option makes the editor follow the interface theme of your system. The Light color scheme incorporates standard red brick, white, and light gray colors with less contrast in UI elements suitable for working during the daytime. The Classic Light color scheme incorporates standard red brick, white, and light gray colors. The Dark color scheme incorporates black, dark gray, and light gray colors suitable for working at night. The Contrast Dark color scheme incorporates black, dark gray, and white colors with more contrast in UI elements, highlighting the working area of the file. The Turn on document dark mode option is used to make the working area darker when the editor is set to the Dark or Contrast Dark interface theme. Check the Turn on document dark mode box to enable it. Note: Apart from the available Light, Classic Light, Dark, and Contrast Dark interface themes, ONLYOFFICE editors can now be customized with your own color theme. Please follow these instructions to learn how you can do that. The Default Zoom Value option is used to set the default zoom value, selecting it in the list of available options from 50% to 500%. You can also choose the Fit to Page, Fit to Width, or Last Used option. The Last Used option refers to the last set scaling during the current session. The Font Hinting option is used to select how fonts are displayed in the PDF Editor. Choose As Windows if you like the way fonts are usually displayed on Windows, i.e., using Windows font hinting. Choose As OS X if you like the way fonts are usually displayed on a Mac, i.e., without any font hinting at all. Choose Native if you want your text to be displayed with hinting embedded into font files. Default cache mode - used to select the cache mode for the font characters. It’s not recommended to switch it without any reason. It can be helpful in some cases only, for example, when an issue in the Google Chrome browser with enabled hardware acceleration occurs. The Document Editor has two cache modes: In the first cache mode, each letter is cached as a separate picture. In the second cache mode, a picture of a certain size is selected where letters are placed dynamically, and a mechanism for allocating/removing memory in this picture is also implemented. If there is not enough memory, a second picture is created, etc. The Default cache mode setting applies the two above-mentioned cache modes separately for different browsers: When the Default cache mode setting is enabled, Internet Explorer (v. 9, 10, 11) uses the second cache mode, other browsers use the first cache mode. When the Default cache mode setting is disabled, Internet Explorer (v. 9, 10, 11) uses the first cache mode, other browsers use the second cache mode. To save the changes you made, click the Apply button." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/Commenting.htm", @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm", "title": "View Settings and Navigation Tools", - "body": "The PDF Editor offers several tools to help you view and navigate your PDF: zoom, navigate headings, set the interface theme, etc. Adjust the view settings To adjust default view settings and set the most convenient mode to work with the PDF, go to the View tab and select which interface elements you want to be hidden or shown. You can select the following options on the View tab: Headings – to show the PDF headers in the left panel. Zoom – to set the required zoom value from 50% to 500% from the drop-down list. The same option can be found on the Home tab as well. Fit to Page - to fit the whole PDF page to the visible part of the working area. Fit to Width - to fit the PDF page width to the visible part of the working area. Interface Theme – choose one of the available interface themes from the drop-down menu: Same as system, Light, Classic Light, Dark, Contrast Dark. When the Dark or Contrast Dark theme is enabled, the Dark Document switcher becomes active; use it to set the working area to white or dark gray. Always Show Toolbar – when this option is disabled, the top toolbar that contains commands will be hidden while tab names remain visible. Alternatively, you can just double-click any tab to hide the top toolbar or display it again. Status Bar – when this option is disabled, the bottommost bar where the Zoom, Fit to page, Fit to width buttons are situated will be hidden. To show the hidden Status Bar, enable this option. Left Panel - when disabled, hides the left panel where Search, Comments, etc. buttons are located. To show the left panel, check this box. When the Comments or Chat panel is opened, the width of the left sidebar is adjusted by simple drag-and-drop: move the mouse cursor over the left sidebar border so that it turns into the bidirectional arrow and drag the border to the right to extend the width of the sidebar. To restore its original width, move the border to the left. Use the Navigation Tools Navigating pages Go to the Home tab, where page navigation buttons are located. - displays the page number and the total number of pages in the PDF. Click the field and enter the required page number manually and press Enter to jump directly to it. The same page number indicator can be found in the bottom left corner as well. - jump to the first page of the PDF. - go to the next page of the PDF. The same button can be found in the bottom left corner as well. - go to the previous page of the PDF. The same button can be found in the bottom left corner as well. - jump to the last page of the PDF. Headings Click the Settings icon to the right of the Headings panel and use one of the available options from the menu: Expand all - to expand all levels of headings at the Headings panel. Collapse all - to collapse all levels of headings, excepting level 1, at the Headings panel. Expand to level - to expand the heading structure to the selected level. E.g., if you select level 3, then levels 1, 2 and 3 will be expanded, while level 4 and all lower levels will be collapsed. Font size – to customize font size of the Headings panel text by choosing one of the available presets: Small, Medium, and Large. Wrap long headings – to wrap long heading text. To manually expand or collapse separate heading levels, use the arrows to the left of the headings. To close the Headings panel, click the   Headings icon on the left sidebar once again. Page Thumbnails Click on the Page Thumbnails panel to access the Thumbnails Settings: Drag the slider to set the thumbnail size. The Highlight visible part of page is active by default to indicate the area that is currently on the screen. Click it to disable. To close the Page Thumbnails panel, click the Page Thumbnails icon on the left sidebar once again. Zoom The Zoom buttons are situated in the right lower corner and are used to zoom in and out of the current PDF. To change the currently selected zoom value that is displayed in percent, click it and select one of the available zoom options from the list (50% / 75% / 100% / 125% / 150% / 175% / 200% / 300% / 400% / 500%) or use the Zoom in or Zoom out buttons. The set scaling is maintained for all files during the current session. Click the Fit to width icon to fit the document page width to the visible part of the working area. To fit the whole document page to the visible part of the working area, click the Fit to page icon. Zoom settings are also available on the View tab." + "body": "The PDF Editor offers several tools to help you view and navigate your PDF: zoom, navigate headings, set the interface theme, etc. Adjust the view settings To adjust default view settings and set the most convenient mode to work with the PDF, go to the View tab and select which interface elements you want to be hidden or shown. You can select the following options on the View tab: Headings – to show the PDF headers in the left panel. Zoom – to set the required zoom value from 50% to 500% from the drop-down list. The same option can be found on the Home tab as well. Fit to Page - to fit the whole PDF page to the visible part of the working area. Fit to Width - to fit the PDF page width to the visible part of the working area. Interface Theme – choose one of the available interface themes from the drop-down menu: Same as system, Light, Classic Light, Dark, Contrast Dark. When the Dark or Contrast Dark theme is enabled, the Dark Document switcher becomes active; use it to set the working area to white or dark gray. Always Show Toolbar – when this option is disabled, the top toolbar that contains commands will be hidden while tab names remain visible. Alternatively, you can just double-click any tab to hide the top toolbar or display it again. Status Bar – when this option is disabled, the bottommost bar where the Zoom, Fit to page, Fit to width buttons are situated will be hidden. To show the hidden Status Bar, enable this option. Left Panel - when disabled, hides the left panel where Search, Comments, etc. buttons are located. To show the left panel, check this box. When the Comments or Chat panel is opened, the width of the left sidebar is adjusted by simple drag-and-drop: move the mouse cursor over the left sidebar border so that it turns into the bidirectional arrow and drag the border to the right to extend the width of the sidebar. To restore its original width, move the border to the left. Use the Navigation Tools Navigating pages Go to the Home tab, where page navigation buttons are located. - displays the page number and the total number of pages in the PDF. Click the field and enter the required page number manually and press Enter to jump directly to it. The same page number indicator can be found in the bottom left corner as well. - jump to the first page of the PDF. - go to the next page of the PDF. The same button can be found in the bottom left corner as well. - go to the previous page of the PDF. The same button can be found in the bottom left corner as well. - jump to the last page of the PDF. Headings Click the Settings icon to the right of the Headings panel and use one of the available options from the menu: Expand all - to expand all levels of headings at the Headings panel. Collapse all - to collapse all levels of headings, excepting level 1, at the Headings panel. Expand to level - to expand the heading structure to the selected level. E.g., if you select level 3, then levels 1, 2 and 3 will be expanded, while level 4 and all lower levels will be collapsed. Font size – to customize font size of the Headings panel text by choosing one of the available presets: Small, Medium, and Large. Wrap long headings – to wrap long heading text. To manually expand or collapse separate heading levels, use the arrows to the left of the headings. To close the Headings panel, click the   Headings icon on the left sidebar once again. Page Thumbnails Click on the Page Thumbnails panel to access the Thumbnails Settings: Drag the slider to set the thumbnail size. The Highlight visible part of page is active by default to indicate the area that is currently on the screen. Click it to disable. Click a page with the right mouse button to access the following options: Insert blank page before (the current one), Insert blank page after (the current one), Rotate page right, Rotate page left, Delete page. These options are available only in the Edit PDF mode. To close the Page Thumbnails panel, click the Page Thumbnails icon on the left sidebar once again. Zoom The Zoom buttons are situated in the right lower corner and are used to zoom in and out of the current PDF. To change the currently selected zoom value that is displayed in percent, click it and select one of the available zoom options from the list (50% / 75% / 100% / 125% / 150% / 175% / 200% / 300% / 400% / 500%) or use the Zoom in or Zoom out buttons. The set scaling is maintained for all files during the current session. Click the Fit to width icon to fit the document page width to the visible part of the working area. To fit the whole document page to the visible part of the working area, click the Fit to page icon. Zoom settings are also available on the View tab." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/Search.htm", @@ -43,47 +43,57 @@ var indexes = { "id": "ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm", "title": "File tab", - "body": "The File tab in the PDF Editor allows performing some basic file operations. The corresponding window of the Online PDF Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop PDF Editor: Using this tab, you can: in the online version, save the current file, download as (save the document in the selected format to the hard disk drive of your computer), save copy as (save a copy of the document in the selected format to the portal documents), print the file or rename it, in the desktop version, save the current file keeping the current format and location using the Save option or save the current file under a different name and change its location or format using the Save as option, print the file. create a new .docx file or open a recently edited one (available in the online version only), view general information about the PDF, manage access rights (available in the online version only), access the Advanced Settings of the editor. in the desktop version, open the folder, where the file is stored, in the File Explorer window. In the online version, open the folder of the Documents module, where the file is stored, in a new browser tab." + "body": "The File tab in the PDF Editor allows performing some basic file operations. The corresponding window of the Online PDF Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop PDF Editor: Using this tab, you can: in the online version, save the current file, download as (save the document in the selected format to the hard disk drive of your computer), save copy as (save a copy of the document in the selected format to the portal documents), print the file or rename it, in the desktop version, save the current file keeping the current format and location using the Save option or save the current file under a different name and change its location or format using the Save as option, print the file. open a recently edited file, view general information about the PDF, access the Advanced Settings of the editor. in the desktop version, open the folder, where the file is stored, in the File Explorer window. In the online version, open the folder of the Documents module, where the file is stored, in a new browser tab." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm", "title": "Home tab", - "body": "The Home tab in the PDF Editor opens by default when you open a PDF. It allows you to navigate the PDF, select text or objects, adjust zoom, fit to page or width. The corresponding window of the Online PDF Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop PDF Editor: Using this tab, you can: navigate the file, adjust zoom, fit to page or width, when filling out a PDF form, navigate between fields, clear fields, submit the form (these options are not displayed for ordinar PDF files, they are available only for fillable PDF forms)." + "body": "The Home tab in the PDF Editor opens by default when you open a PDF. It allows you to navigate the PDF, select text or objects, rotate pages, adjust zoom, fit to page or width, insert objects and perform basic editing operations. The corresponding window of the Online PDF Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop PDF Editor: The following mode is available after clicking the Edit PDF button on the top toolbar. The interface for the PDF editing mode in the Online PDF Editor: The interface for the PDF editing mode in the Desktop PDF Editor: The following mode is available only for fillable PDF forms. The interface for the form filling mode in the Online PDF Editor: The interface for the form filling mode in the Desktop PDF Editor: Using this tab, you can: edit PDFs, navigate the file, adjust zoom, fit to page or width, Additional features while in the editing mode: format selected text, copy and clear formatting, insert lists, align text, set line spacing, arrange text into columns, insert, delete, and rotate pages, insert objects. The following options are not displayed for ordinary PDF files, they are available only for fillable PDF forms: When filling out a PDF form, navigate between fields, clear fields, submit the form." + }, + { + "id": "ProgramInterface/InsertTab.htm", + "title": "Insert tab", + "body": "The Insert tab in the PDF Editor allows adding some page formatting elements as well as visual objects and comments. The corresponding window of the Online PDF Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop PDF Editor: Using this tab, you can: Use the Hand tool to move the page or objects. Use the Select tool to select visual elements on the page for further editing. Insert a Blank page into the file. Click the arrow on this icon to choose whether you want to insert a blank page before or after the cursor. Insert a Table into the file. Insert a Text Box, Text Art, an Image, or Shapes into the file. Insert a Hyperlink into the file. Insert an Equation or a Symbol into the file." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm", "title": "Plugins tab", - "body": "The Plugins tab in the PDF Editor makes it possible to access advanced editing features using the available third-party components. The corresponding window of the Online PDF Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop PDF Editor: The Background Plugins button allows viewing the list of plugins that work in the background. Here you can activate or disable them by activating/deactivating the corresponding switches, and adjust their settings by clicking the More button next to the required plugin. Currently, the following plugins are available: Send allows sending the presentation via email using the default desktop mail client (available in the desktop version only), Get and paste html allows you to get the selected text as an HTML code. Telegram can be integrated into your working area to continue chatting. Count words and characters counts the exact number of words and symbols, both with and without spaces, in your PDF, as well as the number of paragraphs altogether. Translator allows translating the selected text into other languages, This plugin doesn't work with Internet Explorer. Thesaurus allows searching for synonyms and antonyms of a word, Speech allows converting the selected text into speech, Several visual plugins can be added to your document. The added plugins will be displayed as corresponding icons on the left panel. To learn more about plugins, please refer to our API Documentation. All the currently existing open-source plugin examples are available on GitHub." + "body": "The Plugins tab in the PDF Editor makes it possible to access advanced editing features using the available third-party components. The corresponding window of the Online PDF Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop PDF Editor: The Background Plugins button allows viewing the list of plugins that work in the background. Here you can activate or disable them by activating/deactivating the corresponding switches, and adjust their settings by clicking the More button next to the required plugin. The plugins on the screenshots above are used as an example. To learn more, please refer to the Plugin Manager page. Several visual plugins can be added to your document. The added plugins will be displayed as corresponding icons on the left panel. To learn more about plugins, please refer to our API Documentation. All the currently existing open-source plugin examples are available on GitHub." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm", "title": "Introducing the user interface of the PDF Editor", - "body": "The PDF Editor uses a tabbed interface, where editing commands are grouped into tabs by functionality. Main window of the Online PDF Editor: Main window of the Desktop PDF Editor: The editor interface consists of the following main elements: The Editor header displays the ONLYOFFICE logo, tabs for all opened documents with their names and menu tabs. On the left side of the Editor header, the Save, Print file, Undo and Redo buttons are located. On the right side of the Editor header along with the username, the following icons are displayed: Share (available in the online version only) - allows adjusting access rights for the PDF stored in the cloud. Open file location - in the desktop version, it allows opening the folder, where the file is stored, in the File explorer window. In the online version, it allows opening the folder of the Documents module, where the file is stored, in a new browser tab. Mark as favorite - click the star to add a file to favorites to make it easy to find. The added file is just a shortcut, so the file itself remains stored in its original location. Deleting a file from favorites does not remove the file from its original location. Search - allows searching the PDF for a particular word or symbol, etc. The Top toolbar displays a set of editing commands depending on the selected menu tab. Currently, the following tabs are available: File, Home, Comment, View, Plugins. The Copy, Paste, Cut and Select All options are always available on the left side of the Top toolbar regardless of the selected tab, as are the Select and Hand tools. The Left sidebar contains the following icons: - allows using the Search and Replace tool. - allows opening the Comments panel. - (available in the online version only) allows opening the Chat panel. - allows opening the Headings panel that displays the list of all headings with corresponding nesting levels. - allows for the display of page thumbnails for quick navigation. - (available in the online version only) allows contacting our support team. - (available in the online version only) allows viewing the information about the program. The Status bar located at the bottom of the editor window indicates the page number, as well as displays some notifications (for example, \"All changes saved\", ‘Connection is lost’ when there is no connection and the editor is trying to reconnect, etc.). It also allows adjusting zoom. Working area allows viewing PDF content, enter and edit data. Scroll bar on the right allows scrolling up and down multipage PDFs. For your convenience, you can hide some components and display them again when necessary. To learn more about adjusting view settings, please refer to this page." + "body": "The PDF Editor uses a tabbed interface, where editing commands are grouped into tabs by functionality. Main window of the Online PDF Editor: Main window of the Desktop PDF Editor: The editor interface consists of the following main elements: The Editor header displays the ONLYOFFICE logo, tabs for all opened documents with their names and menu tabs. On the left side of the Editor header, the Save, Print file, Undo and Redo buttons are located. On the right side of the Editor header along with the username, the following icons are displayed: Open file location - in the desktop version, it allows opening the folder, where the file is stored, in the File explorer window. In the online version, it allows opening the folder of the Documents module, where the file is stored, in a new browser tab. Search - allows searching the PDF for a particular word or symbol, etc. The Top toolbar displays a set of editing commands depending on the selected menu tab. Currently, the following tabs are available: File, Home, Comment, Insert, View, Plugins. The Copy, Paste, Cut and Select All options are always available on the left side of the Top toolbar regardless of the selected tab, as are the Select and Hand tools. The Left sidebar contains the following icons: - allows using the Search and Replace tool. - allows opening the Comments panel. - (available in the online version only) allows opening the Chat panel. - allows opening the Headings panel that displays the list of all headings with corresponding nesting levels. - allows for the display of page thumbnails for quick navigation. - (available in the online version only) allows contacting our support team. - (available in the online version only) allows viewing the information about the program. The Status bar located at the bottom of the editor window indicates the page number, as well as displays some notifications (for example, \"All changes saved\", ‘Connection is lost’ when there is no connection and the editor is trying to reconnect, etc.). It also allows adjusting zoom. Working area allows viewing PDF content, enter and edit data. Scroll bar on the right allows scrolling up and down multipage PDFs. For your convenience, you can hide some components and display them again when necessary. To learn more about adjusting view settings, please refer to this page." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/ViewTab.htm", "title": "View tab", - "body": "The View tab of the PDF Editor allows you to manage how your PDF looks while you are working on it, as well as helps you navigate PDFs easily. The corresponding window of the Online PDF Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop PDF Editor: View options available on this tab: Headings panel displays a list of all headings with corresponding nesting levels. Click the heading to jump directly to a specific page. Zoom allows you to zoom in and out of your PDF. Fit to Page allows you to resize the PDF so that the screen displays the page as a whole. Fit to Width allows you to resize the PDF so that the page scales to fit the width of the screen. Interface Theme allows you to change the interface theme by choosing a Same as system, Light, Classic Light, Dark or Contrast Dark theme. Dark Document option becomes active when the Dark or Contrast Dark theme is enabled. Click it to make the working area dark too. The following options allow you to configure the elements to display or hide. Check the elements to make them visible: Always Show Toolbar to make the top toolbar always visible. Status Bar to make the status bar always visible. Left Panel to make the left panel visible." + "body": "The View tab of the PDF Editor allows you to manage how your PDF looks while you are working on it, as well as helps you navigate PDFs easily. The corresponding window of the Online PDF Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop PDF Editor: View options available on this tab: Headings panel displays a list of all headings with corresponding nesting levels. Click the heading to jump directly to a specific page. Zoom allows you to zoom in and out of your PDF. Fit to Page allows you to resize the PDF so that the screen displays the page as a whole. Fit to Width allows you to resize the PDF so that the page scales to fit the width of the screen. Interface Theme allows you to change the interface theme by choosing a Same as system, Light, Classic Light, Dark, Contrast Dark, or Gray theme. Dark Document option becomes active when the Dark or Contrast Dark theme is enabled. Click it to make the working area dark too. The following options allow you to configure the elements to display or hide. Check the elements to make them visible: Always Show Toolbar to make the top toolbar always visible. Status Bar to make the status bar always visible. Left Panel to make the left panel visible. Right Panel to make the right panel visible." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/CommunicationPlugins.htm", "title": "Communicate while editing", - "body": "In ONLYOFFICE PDF Editor, you can always keep in touch with colleagues and use popular online messengers, such as Telegram. Telegram plugin is not installed by default. To find information on how to install it, please refer to the corresponding article: Adding plugins to ONLYOFFICE Desktop Editors Adding plugins to ONLYOFFICE Cloud . Telegram To start chatting in the Telegram plugin, Switch to the Plugins tab and click Telegram, enter your phone number into the corresponding field, check the Keep me signed in checkbox if you want to save credentials for the current session and click the Next button, enter the code you've received in your Telegram app, or log in using the QR code, open Telegram app on your phone, go to Settings > Devices > Scan QR, scan the image to Log in. Now you can use Telegram for instant messaging within the ONLYOFFICE editor's interface." + "body": "In ONLYOFFICE PDF Editor, you can always keep in touch with colleagues and use popular online messengers, such as Telegram. Telegram plugin is not installed by default. To find information on how to install it, please refer to the corresponding article: Adding plugins to ONLYOFFICE Desktop Editors Adding plugins to ONLYOFFICE Cloud , or install the plugin using the Plugin Manager. Telegram To start chatting in the Telegram plugin, Switch to the Plugins tab and click Telegram, enter your phone number into the corresponding field, check the Keep me signed in checkbox if you want to save credentials for the current session and click the Next button, enter the code you've received in your Telegram app, or log in using the QR code, open Telegram app on your phone, go to Settings > Devices > Scan QR, scan the image to Log in. Now you can use Telegram for instant messaging within the ONLYOFFICE editor's interface." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/DrawingOperations.htm", "title": "Draw freehand on a PDF", "body": "In the PDF Editor, you can use the Comment tab to draw freehand, add handwritten notes, highlight text and erase on your PDF. To draw, write, or highlight text, click the Pen or the Highlighter icon and move your cursor. Click the drop-down arrow to customize the stroke color and thickness. Click More colors if the color you need is not in the palette. When you are done with drawing, writing or highlighting, click the Pen or Highlighter icon again, or press the Esc button. Click the Eraser tool and move your cursor back and forth to delete a stroke. The Eraser deletes only the whole stroke. Use the Select button to select the inscription, the drawing or the highlighting. Once selected, you can resize or delete the selected element." }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/EditPDF.htm", + "title": "Editing PDF", + "body": "You can edit previously uploaded PDFs or the ones created using ONLYOFFICE PDF Editor. Open a PDF file. If the PDF file has been opened in a viewer or filling form mode, you can switch to editing by clicking the Edit PDF button on the top toolbar provided you have the corresponding rights. Click the Edit Text button on the Home tab to run an automated process of marking up text boxes, graphical objects, etc. Click the recognized area you want to edit. To edit the recognized text, please read the following guides: on changing font, its size, text color, case, and highlight; on changing text formatting; on adjusting list settings; on changing indents; on adjusting line spacing; on changing vertical and horizontal text alignment; on splitting the text into columns; These features can be found on the Home tab. To manage PDF pages, go to the Home tab: To insert a blank page, click the Insert Page button and choose whether you want to insert a blank page before the currently selected one or after it. The same feature is available through the Page Thumbnails button on the left interface panel of the editor. Click within the page navigation area with the right mouse button, and choose where you want to insert a blank page. To rotate a page, click the Rotate Page button and choose whether you want to a page to be rotated right or left. The same feature is available through the Page Thumbnails button on the left interface panel of the editor. Click within the page navigation area with the right mouse button, and choose the direction of the page rotation. To delete a page, click the Delete Page button. The same feature is available through the Page Thumbnails button on the left interface panel of the editor. Click within the page navigation area with the right mouse button, and choose the Delete page menu item. To insert new objects or edit the existing ones, please read the following guides: on inserting tables, text boxes, text art, images, autoshapes, hyperlinks, equations, and symbols. These features can be found on the Insert tab. To facilitate collaborating on a PDF, please read the following guides: on adding comments, highlighting and drawing. These features can be found on the Collaboration tab (for editing mode) or on the Comment tab (for viewing mode). To hide comments, uncheck the Show Comments checkbox. You can also add text comments using the Comment tab. Go to the Comment tab. Click the Text Comment button. Choose the type of the comment you want to insert: Insert text comment - a comment is displayed as a text box that can be moved around the page. Insert text callout - a comment is displayed as a text box with a guideline leading to the exact place on the page. Collaboration: The Co-editing mode subsection allows you to set the preferable mode for seeing changes made to the document when working in collaboration. Fast. The users who take part in the document co-editing will see the changes in real time once they are made by other users. Strict (by default). All the changes made by co-editors will be shown only after you click the Save icon that will notify you about new changes. The Real-time collaboration changes subsection allows you to choose how new changes and comments will be displayed in real time. View none. All the changes made during the current session will not be highlighted. View all. All the changes made during the current session will be highlighted. View last. Only the changes made since you last time clicked the Save icon will be highlighted. This option is only available when the Strict co-editing mode is selected. Show comments in text. If you disable this feature, the commented passages will be highlighted only if you click the Comments icon on the left sidebar. Show resolved comments. This feature is disabled by default so that the resolved comments are hidden in the document text. You can view such comments only if you click the Comments icon on the left sidebar. Enable this option if you want to display resolved comments in the document text. To navigate PDFs, please read the following guide on the features available on the View tab. The Plugins tab allows managing your plugins. To learn more about each plugin, please refer to the Plugins section of the Document Editor. To delete a recognized area, select it, and press Delete or Backspace on your keyboard." + }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/FillingOutForm.htm", "title": "Filling out a form", - "body": "You can fill in the form fields in the PDF file and submit, print, or download the form after you have filled it out. How to fill in a form: Open a PDF file. Fill in all the required fields. If the form contains a date field, choose the date using the Date Picker. The mandatory fields are marked with red stroke. Use the Previous Field or Next Field buttons on the top toolbar to navigate between fields, or click the field you wish to fill in. Use the Clear Fields button to empty all input fields. Use the navigation tools to navigate the PDF, adjust zoom, fit to page or width. After you have filled in all the fields, сlick the Submit button at the top toolbar to send the form for further processing. Please note that this action cannot be undone. The form cannot be submitted until all required fields are filled in. If you are using the server version of ONLYOFFICE Docs, the presence of the Submit button depends on the configuration. When there is no configuration for submitting a form, the button will be displayed as Save as. Read this article to learn more. In the desktop editors, the Save as button is displayed instead of the Submit button. You can also use the Print button to print the form or switch to the File tab and download the form in one of the supported format." + "body": "You can fill in the form fields in the PDF file and submit, print, or download the form after you have filled it out. If you have corresponding access rights, you can switch to editing by clicking the Edit PDF button on the top toolbar. How to fill in a form: Open a PDF file. Fill in all the required fields. If the form contains a date field, choose the date using the Date Picker. The mandatory fields are marked with red stroke. Use the Previous Field or Next Field buttons on the top toolbar to navigate between fields, or click the field you wish to fill in. Use the Clear Fields button to empty all input fields. Use the navigation tools to navigate the PDF, adjust zoom, fit to page or width. After you have filled in all the fields, сlick the Submit button at the top toolbar to send the form for further processing. Please note that this action cannot be undone. The form cannot be submitted until all required fields are filled in. If you are using the server version of ONLYOFFICE Docs, the presence of the Submit button depends on the configuration. When there is no configuration for submitting a form, the button will be displayed as Save as. Read this article to learn more. In the desktop editors, the Save as button is displayed instead of the Submit button. You can also use the Print button to print the form or switch to the File tab and download the form in one of the supported format." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/HTML.htm", "title": "Edit HTML", - "body": "If you want to get text as HTML code, use the HTML plugin. Open the Plugins tab and click Get and paste html. Select the necessary content. The HTML code of the selected paragraph will be displayed in the plugin field on the left-side panel. You can edit the code to alter the text characteristics, e.g., font size or font family, etc. Click the Copy button to copy the whole code. To clear the plugin field, click the Clear button. For more information on the HTML plugin and its installation, please see the plugin’s page on the AppDirectory." + "body": "If you want to get text as HTML code, use the HTML plugin. Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager. Open the Plugins tab and click Get and paste html. Select the necessary content. The HTML code of the selected paragraph will be displayed in the plugin field on the left-side panel. You can edit the code to alter the text characteristics, e.g., font size or font family, etc. Click the Copy button to copy the whole code. To clear the plugin field, click the Clear button. For more information on the HTML plugin and its installation, please see the plugin’s page on the AppDirectory." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/OpenCreateNew.htm", @@ -98,27 +108,27 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/Speech.htm", "title": "Read the text out loud", - "body": "ONLYOFFICE PDF Editor has a plugin that can read out the text for you. Select the text to be read out. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose Speech. The text will now be read out." + "body": "ONLYOFFICE PDF Editor has a plugin that can read out the text for you. Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager. Select the text to be read out. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose Speech. The text will now be read out." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/Speechinput.htm", "title": "Type via voice", - "body": "In the PDF Editor, you can insert text with your voice. Set the cursor to the place where you want to add text. Switch to the Plugins tab and select Speech input. Choose the recognition language in the pop-up window. Click the Start dictation button and start speaking. Once you pause, the text will be added to the PDF. To turn off voice recognition, press the button again. For the plugin to work correctly, you must have an input device (e.g., a microphone or headset) as well as permissions for the browser to use these recording devices." + "body": "In the PDF Editor, you can insert text with your voice. Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager. Set the cursor to the place where you want to add text. Switch to the Plugins tab and select Speech input. Choose the recognition language in the pop-up window. Click the Start dictation button and start speaking. Once you pause, the text will be added to the PDF. To turn off voice recognition, press the button again. For the plugin to work correctly, you must have an input device (e.g., a microphone or headset) as well as permissions for the browser to use these recording devices." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/Thesaurus.htm", "title": "Find a synonym", - "body": "If you are using the same word multiple times, or a word is just not quite the word you are looking for, ONLYOFFICE PDF Editor lets you look up synonyms. It will show you the antonyms too. Select the word in your document. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose Thesaurus. The synonyms and antonyms will show up in the left sidebar." + "body": "If you are using the same word multiple times, or a word is just not quite the word you are looking for, ONLYOFFICE PDF Editor lets you look up synonyms. It will show you the antonyms too. Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager. Select the word in your document. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose Thesaurus. The synonyms and antonyms will show up in the left sidebar." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/Translator.htm", "title": "Translate text", - "body": "In the PDF Editor, you can translate your PDF into and from numerous languages. Select the text that you want to translate. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose Translator, the Translator appears in a sidebar on the left. Click the drop-down box and choose the preferred language. The text will be translated into the required language. Changing the language of your result: Click the drop-down box and choose the preferred language. The translation will change immediately." + "body": "In the PDF Editor, you can translate your PDF into and from numerous languages. Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager. Select the text that you want to translate. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose Translator, the Translator appears in a sidebar on the left. Click the drop-down box and choose the preferred language. The text will be translated into the required language. Changing the language of your result: Click the drop-down box and choose the preferred language. The translation will change immediately." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/Typograf.htm", "title": "Correct typography", - "body": "If you need to correct typography in your text, use the Typograf plugin, which will automatically place non-breaking spaces and remove extra ones, as well as correct minor typos, insert correct quotes, replace hyphens with dashes, etc. Open the Plugins tab and click Typograf. Click the Show advanced settings button. Choose the locale and the rules you want to apply to your text. Select the text you want to correct. Click the Correct text button. For more information on the Typograf plugin and its installation, please see the plugin’s page on the AppDirectory." + "body": "If you need to correct typography in your text, use the Typograf plugin, which will automatically place non-breaking spaces and remove extra ones, as well as correct minor typos, insert correct quotes, replace hyphens with dashes, etc. Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager. Open the Plugins tab and click Typograf. Click the Show advanced settings button. Choose the locale and the rules you want to apply to your text. Select the text you want to correct. Click the Correct text button. For more information on the Typograf plugin and its installation, please see the plugin’s page on the AppDirectory." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/ViewPDFInfo.htm", @@ -128,6 +138,6 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/WordCounter.htm", "title": "Count words", - "body": "To know the exact number of words and symbols both with and without spaces in your document, as well as the number of paragraphs altogether, use the Word Counter plugin. Open the Plugins tab and click Count words and characters. Select the text. Please note that the following elements are not included in the word count: footnote/endnote symbols, numbers from numbered lists, page numbers. For more information on the Word Counter plugin and its installation, please see the plugin’s page on the AppDirectory." + "body": "To know the exact number of words and symbols both with and without spaces in your document, as well as the number of paragraphs altogether, use the Word Counter plugin. Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager. Open the Plugins tab and click Count words and characters. Select the text. Please note that the following elements are not included in the word count: footnote/endnote symbols, numbers from numbered lists, page numbers. For more information on the Word Counter plugin and its installation, please see the plugin’s page on the AppDirectory." } ] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/images/icons.png b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/images/icons.png index 65e8202505..8180199e7c 100644 Binary files a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/images/icons.png and b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/images/icons.png differ diff --git a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/images/sprite.css b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/images/sprite.css index dce4a84d37..d8dad6d1f2 100644 --- a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/images/sprite.css +++ b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/images/sprite.css @@ -108,13 +108,13 @@ height: 17px; } -.icon-chaticon_new { +.icon-editcommenticon { background-position: -78px -76px; - width: 19px; - height: 17px; + width: 16px; + height: 16px; } -.icon-editcommenticon { +.icon-saveupdate { background-position: -99px 0px; width: 16px; height: 16px; @@ -150,12 +150,18 @@ height: 15px; } -.icon-print { +.icon-chaticon_new { background-position: -40px -94px; width: 17px; height: 15px; } +.icon-print { + background-position: -57px -94px; + width: 17px; + height: 15px; +} + .icon-about { background-position: -99px -64px; width: 15px; diff --git a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/chaticon_new.png b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/chaticon_new.png index b1fb9c0385..0d93aa1654 100644 Binary files a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/chaticon_new.png and b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/chaticon_new.png differ diff --git a/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/saveupdate.png b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/saveupdate.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..05292913e6 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/pdfeditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/saveupdate.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/Contents.json b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/Contents.json index 4e5b860a9e..375d8e142e 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/Contents.json +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/Contents.json @@ -10,8 +10,10 @@ {"src": "ProgramInterface/ViewTab.htm", "name": "View tab"}, {"src": "ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm", "name": "Plugins tab"}, {"src": "UsageInstructions/OpenCreateNew.htm", "name": "Create a new presentation or open an existing one", "headername": "Basic operations" }, - {"src": "UsageInstructions/CopyPasteUndoRedo.htm", "name": "Copy/paste data, undo/redo your actions"}, + { "src": "UsageInstructions/CopyPasteUndoRedo.htm", "name": "Copy/paste data, undo/redo your actions" }, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/ChangeColorScheme.htm", "name": "Change color scheme"}, {"src": "UsageInstructions/ManageSlides.htm", "name": "Manage slides", "headername": "Working with slides"}, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/SlideMaster.htm", "name": "Slide Master"}, {"src": "UsageInstructions/SetSlideParameters.htm", "name": "Set slide parameters"}, { "src": "UsageInstructions/ApplyTransitions.htm", "name": "Apply transitions" }, {"src": "UsageInstructions/InsertHeadersFooters.htm", "name": "Insert footers"}, @@ -44,7 +46,8 @@ {"src": "UsageInstructions/Thesaurus.htm", "name": "Replace a word by a synonym" }, {"src": "UsageInstructions/CommunicationPlugins.htm", "name": "Communicate while editing"}, {"src": "UsageInstructions/Zoom.htm", "name": "Host and schedule Zoom meetings"}, - {"src": "UsageInstructions/ChatGPT.htm", "name": "Use AI to write text"}, + { "src": "UsageInstructions/ChatGPT.htm", "name": "Use AI to write text" }, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/Pixabay.htm", "name": "Add pictures"}, {"src": "UsageInstructions/ViewPresentationInfo.htm", "name": "View presentation information", "headername": "Tools and settings"}, {"src": "UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm", "name": "Save/print/download your presentation" }, {"src": "HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm", "name": "Advanced settings of Presentation Editor"}, diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm index c2a3fcfe31..9cae7fca9e 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm @@ -10,12 +10,12 @@ -
                                -
                                - -
                                -

                                Advanced Settings of the Presentation Editor

                                -

                                The Presentation Editor allows you to change its advanced settings. To access them, open the File tab on the top toolbar and select the Advanced Settings option.

                                +
                                +
                                + +
                                +

                                Advanced Settings of the Presentation Editor

                                +

                                The Presentation Editor allows you to change its advanced settings. To access them, open the File tab on the top toolbar and select the Advanced Settings option.

                                The advanced settings are grouped as follows:

                                Editing and saving

                                @@ -34,7 +34,7 @@

                                Collaboration

                              4. Strict. All the changes made by co-editors will be shown only after you click the Save
                                icon that will notify you about new changes.
                    -
                  20. Show changes from other users. This feature allows to see changes made by other users in the presentation opened for viewing only in the Live Viewer mode.
                  21. +
                  22. Show changes from other users. This feature allows seeing changes made by other users in the presentation opened for viewing only in the Live Viewer mode.

                  Proofing

                  @@ -45,13 +45,8 @@

                  Proofing

                10. The AutoCorrect options menu allows you to access the autocorrect settings such as replacing text as you type, recognizing functions, automatic formatting etc.
                -

                Workspace

                +

                Appearance

                  -
                1. The Turn on screen reader support option is used to enable support of screen reader software.
                2. -
                3. The Alignment Guides option is used to turn on/off alignment guides that appear when you move objects. It allows for a more precise object positioning on the slide.
                4. -
                5. The Use Alt key to navigate the user interface using the keyboard option is used to enable using the Alt / Optionkey in keyboard shortcuts.
                6. -
                7. Show the Quick Print button in the editor header is used in the desktop version to enable quick printing via the corresponding button at the top toolbar. The file will be printed on the last selected or default printer.
                8. -
                9. The RTL Interface (Beta) option is used to change the direction in which elements of the interface are displayed.
                10. The Interface theme option is used to change the color scheme of the editor’s interface.
                    @@ -59,19 +54,36 @@

                    Workspace

                  • The Light color scheme incorporates standard blue, white, and light gray colors with less contrast in UI elements suitable for working during daytime.
                  • The Classic Light color scheme incorporates standard blue, white, and light gray colors.
                  • The Dark color scheme incorporates black, dark gray, and light gray colors suitable for working during nighttime.
                  • +
                  • The Contrast Dark color scheme incorporates black, dark gray, and white colors with more contrast in UI elements highlighting the working area of the file.
                  • +
                  • The Gray color scheme incorporates lighter gray color and appears as a uniformly light color scheme.
                  • - The Contrast Dark color scheme incorporates black, dark gray, and white colors with more contrast in UI elements highlighting the working area of the file. -

                    Note: Apart from the available Light, Classic Light, Dark, and Contrast Dark interface themes, ONLYOFFICE editors can now be customized with your own color theme. Please follow these instructions to learn how you can do that.

                    + The Turn on document dark mode option is used to make the working area darker when the editor is set to Dark or Contrast Dark interface theme. Check the Turn on document dark mode box to enable it. +

                    Note: Apart from the available Light, Classic Light, Dark, Contrast Dark, and Gray interface themes, ONLYOFFICE editors can now be customized with your own color theme. Please follow these instructions to learn how you can do that.

                11. -
                12. The Unit of Measurement option is used to specify what units are used on the rulers and in properties of objects when setting such parameters as width, height, spacing, margins etc. The available units are Centimeter, Point, and Inch.
                13. +
                14. Tab style - choose whether you want the currently selected tab to be filled in with a lighter color with the Fill option or to be underlined with the Line option.
                15. +
                16. Use toolbar color as tabs background - the color of the toolbar will be used as tabs background. The toolbar color depends on the currently selected interface theme.
                17. +
                + +

                Workspace

                +
                  +
                1. The Turn on screen reader support option is used to enable support of screen reader software.
                2. +
                3. The Alignment guides option is used to turn on/off alignment guides that appear when you move objects. It allows for a more precise object positioning on the slide.
                4. +
                5. The Use Alt key to navigate the user interface using the keyboard option is used to enable using the Alt / Option key in keyboard shortcuts.
                6. +
                7. Show the Quick Print button in the editor header is used in the desktop version to enable quick printing via the corresponding button at the top toolbar. The file will be printed on the last selected or default printer.
                8. - The Default Zoom Value option is used to set the default zoom value, selecting it in the list of available options from 50% to 500%. You can also choose the Fit to Page, Fit to Width, or Last Used option. -

                  The Last Used option refers to the last set scaling during the current session.

                  + The RTL Interface (Beta) option is used to change the direction in which elements of the interface are displayed. +

                  This option is available only for interface languages that require RTL.

                9. +
                10. The Customize quick access button is used to choose which buttons shall be available in the top toolbar, i.e., Save, Print, Undo, and Redo.
                11. +
                12. The Unit of measurement option is used to specify what units are used on the rulers and in properties of objects when setting such parameters as width, height, spacing, margins etc. The available units are Centimeter, Point, and Inch.
                13. - The Font Hinting option is used to select how fonts are displayed in the Presentation Editor. + The Default zoom value option is used to set the default zoom value, selecting it in the list of available options from 50% to 500%. You can also choose the Fit to Page, Fit to Width, or Last Used option. +

                  The Last used option refers to the last set scaling value during the current session.

                  +
                14. +
                15. + The Font hinting option is used to select how fonts are displayed in the Presentation Editor.
                  • Choose As Windows if you like the way fonts are usually displayed on Windows, i.e. using Windows font hinting.
                  • Choose As OS X if you like the way fonts are usually displayed on a Mac, i.e. without any font hinting at all.
                  • @@ -83,7 +95,7 @@

                    Workspace

                  • In the first cache mode, each letter is cached as a separate picture.
                  • In the second cache mode, a picture of a certain size is selected where letters are placed dynamically and a mechanism of allocating/removing memory in this picture is also implemented. If there is not enough memory, a second picture is created, etc.
                -

                The Default cache mode setting applies two above mentioned cache modes separately for different browsers:

                +

                The Default cache mode setting applies two above-mentioned cache modes separately for different browsers:

                • When the Default cache mode setting is enabled, Internet Explorer (v. 9, 10, 11) uses the second cache mode, other browsers use the first cache mode.
                • When the Default cache mode setting is disabled, Internet Explorer (v. 9, 10, 11) uses the first cache mode, other browsers use the second cache mode.
                • @@ -92,15 +104,15 @@

                  Workspace

              10. - The Macros Settings option is used to set macros display with a notification. + The Macros settings option is used to set macros display with a notification.
                • Choose Disable All to disable all macros within the presentation.
                • -
                • Choose Show Notification to receive notifications about macros within the presentation.
                • -
                • Choose Enable All to automatically run all macros within the presentation.
                • +
                • Choose Show notification to receive notifications about macros within the presentation.
                • +
                • Choose Enable all to automatically run all macros within the presentation.
              -

              To save the changes you made, click the Apply button.

              - +

              The changes are saved as you go.

              + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Commenting.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Commenting.htm index b3e06d9723..34f00dfb63 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Commenting.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Commenting.htm @@ -17,6 +17,7 @@

              Commenting

              The Presentation Editor allows you to maintain constant team-wide approach to work flow: share files and folders, collaborate on presentations in real time, communicate right in the editor, save presentation versions for future use.

              In Presentation Editor you can leave comments to the content of presentations without actually editing it. Unlike chat messages, the comments stay until deleted.

              +

              Added comments will remain in third-party editors.

              Leaving comments and replying to them

              To leave a comment to a certain object (text box, shape, etc.):

                diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm index 52a0f289c6..b9941109de 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm @@ -593,13 +593,13 @@

                Keyboard Shortcuts for Key Tips

                Select one line up ⇧ Shift+ ⇧ Shift+ - Select one line up (with the cursor at the beginning of a line). + Move the cursor one line up, selecting all symbols between the previous and current cursor position. Select one line down ⇧ Shift+ ⇧ Shift+ - Select one line down (with the cursor at the end of a line). + Move the cursor one line down, selecting all symbols between the previous and current cursor position. Deselect all diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Password.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Password.htm index 80dead7f84..984072511c 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Password.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Password.htm @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@

                Protecting presentations with a password

                -

                You can protect your presentations with a password that is required to enter the editing mode by your co-authors. The password can be changed or removed later on.

                +

                You can protect your presentations with a password that is required to enter the editing mode by your co-authors. The password can be changed or removed later on. The presentation will remain protected in third-party editors.

                The password cannot be restored if you lose or forget it. Please keep it in a safe place.

                Setting a password

                diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Search.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Search.htm index 91cbbadf09..2c4774d8bf 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Search.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Search.htm @@ -26,7 +26,7 @@

                Search and Replace Function

                Find and Replace Window
                1. Type in your inquiry into the corresponding Find data entry field.
                2. -
                3. If you need to replace one or more occurrences of the found characters, type in the replacement text into the corresponding Replace with data entry field. You can choose to replace a single currently highlighted occurrence or replace all occurrences by clicking the corresponding Replace and Replace All buttons.
                4. +
                5. If you need to replace one or more occurrences of the found characters, type in the replacement text into the corresponding Replace with data entry field. You can choose to replace a single currently highlighted occurrence or replace all occurrences by clicking the corresponding Replace and Replace All buttons. The
                  Replace button can also be found on the Home tab.
                6. To navigate between the found occurrences, click one of the arrow buttons. The
                  button shows the next occurrence while the
                  button shows the previous one.
                7. Specify search parameters by checking the necessary options below the entry fields: diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/UsingChat.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/UsingChat.htm index 8fe8a49ec7..1826338635 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/UsingChat.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/UsingChat.htm @@ -16,16 +16,22 @@

                  Communicating in real time

                  The Presentation Editor allows you to maintain constant team-wide approach to work flow: share files and folders, collaborate on presentations in real time, comment certain parts of your presentations that require additional third-party input, save presentation versions for future use.

                  -

                  In Presentation Editor you can communicate with your co-editors in real time using the built-in Chat tool as well as a number of useful plugins, i.e. Telegram or Rainbow.

                  -

                  To access the Chat tool and leave a message for other users,

                  -
                    -
                  1. click the
                    icon at the left sidebar,
                  2. -
                  3. enter your text into the corresponding field below,
                  4. -
                  5. press the Send button.
                  6. -
                  -

                  The chat messages are stored during one session only. To discuss the presentation content, it is better to use comments which are stored until they are deleted.

                  -

                  All the messages left by users will be displayed on the panel on the left. If there are new messages you haven't read yet, the chat icon will look like this - .

                  -

                  To close the panel with chat messages, click the icon once again.

                  +

                  In Presentation Editor you can communicate with your co-editors in real time using the built-in Chat tool as well as a number of useful plugins, i.e., Telegram or Rainbow.

                  +

                  Chat window

                  +
                  +

                  To access the Chat tool and leave a message for other users,

                  +
                    +
                  1. + click the
                    icon on the left sidebar, or
                    + switch to the Collaboration tab of the top toolbar and click the
                    Chat button, +
                  2. +
                  3. enter your text into the corresponding field below,
                  4. +
                  5. press the Send button.
                  6. +
                  +

                  The chat messages are stored during one session only. To discuss the presentation content, it is better to use comments which are stored until they are deleted.

                  +

                  All the messages left by users will be displayed on the panel on the left. If there are new messages you haven't read yet, the chat icon will look like this - .

                  +

                  To close the panel with chat messages, click the icon once again.

                  +
                  \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/VersionHistory.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/VersionHistory.htm index 83ec427ad6..25f6209494 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/VersionHistory.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/VersionHistory.htm @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@

                  Version history

                  You'll see the list of the presentation versions and revisions with the indication of each version/revision author and creation date and time. For presentation versions, the version number is also specified (e.g. ver. 2).

                  Viewing versions:

                  -

                  To know exactly which changes have been made in each separate version/revision, you can view the one you need by clicking it on the left sidebar. The changes made by the version/revision author are marked with the color which is displayed next to the author's name on the left sidebar.

                  +

                  To know exactly which changes have been made in each separate version/revision, you can view the one you need by clicking it on the left sidebar. The changes made by the version/revision author are highlighted with the same color as their avatar in the viewing version history window.

                  To return to the current version of the presentation, use the Close History option on the top of the version list.

                  Restoring versions:

                  If you need to roll back to one of the previous versions of the presentation, click the Restore link below the selected version/revision.

                  diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/DrawTab.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/DrawTab.htm index 9d98afcf3f..f94fb86c14 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/DrawTab.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/DrawTab.htm @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ - +
                  diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm index 8311317af2..d87828ce90 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm @@ -26,17 +26,18 @@

                  File tab

                  Using this tab, you can:

                    +
                  • create a new presentation or open a recently edited one (available in the online version only),
                  • in the online version, save the current file (in case the Autosave option is disabled), download as (save the document in the selected format to the hard disk drive of your computer), save copy as (save a copy of the document in the selected format to the portal documents), print or rename it, - in the desktop version, save the current file keeping the current format and location using the Save option or save the current file under a different name and change its location or format using the Save as option, print the file. + in the desktop version, save the current file keeping the current format and location using the Save option or save the current file under a different name and change its location or format using the Save as option, print the file,
                  • -
                  • protect the file using a password, change or remove the password;
                  • -
                  • protect the file using a digital signature (available in the desktop version only);
                  • -
                  • create a new presentation or open a recently edited one (available in the online version only),
                  • +
                  • protect the file using a password, change or remove the password,
                  • +
                  • protect the file using a digital signature (available in the desktop version only),
                  • view general information about the presentation or change some file properties,
                  • -
                  • manage access rights (available in the online version only),
                  • +
                  • track version history (available in the online version only),
                  • +
                  • Go to Documents - in the desktop version, open the folder, where the file is stored, in the File Explorer window, in the online version, open the folder of the Documents module, where the file is stored, in a new browser tab,
                  • access the Advanced Settings of the editor,
                  • -
                  • in the desktop version, open the folder, where the file is stored, in the File Explorer window. In the online version, open the folder of the Documents module, where the file is stored, in a new browser tab.
                  • +
                  • Help - open the built-in helpcenter.
                  diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm index c92027e2e3..80f76c6453 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@

                  Introducing the user interface of the Presentation Editor

                  1. The Editor header displays the logo, tabs for all opened presentations with their names and menu tabs. -

                    On the left side of the Editor header, the Save, Print file, Undo and Redo buttons are located.

                    +

                    On the left side of the Editor header, the Save, Print file, Undo and Redo buttons are located. Click the dots icon to the right to customize which buttons shall be hidden if any.

                    On the right side of the Editor header, along with the user name the following icons are displayed:

                      @@ -39,7 +39,7 @@

                      Introducing the user interface of the Presentation Editor

                  2. - The Top toolbar displays a set of editing commands depending on the selected menu tab. Currently, the following tabs are available: File, Home, Insert, Transitions, Animation, Collaboration, Protection, Plugins. + The Top toolbar displays a set of editing commands depending on the selected menu tab. Currently, the following tabs are available: File, Home, Insert, Draw, Transitions, Animation, Collaboration, Protection, Plugins.

                    The Copy, Paste, Cut and Select All options are always available on the left side of the Top toolbar regardless of the selected tab.

                  3. The Status bar at the bottom of the editor window contains the Start slideshow icon, some navigation tools: slide number indicator and zoom buttons. The Status bar also displays some notifications (such as "All changes saved", ‘Connection is lost’ when there is no connection and the editor is trying to reconnect etc.) and allows setting the text language and enable spell checking.
                  4. diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ViewTab.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ViewTab.htm index 8ae611027d..3ec85f9429 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ViewTab.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ViewTab.htm @@ -28,11 +28,12 @@

                    View tab

                    View options available on this tab:

                      -
                    • Zoom allows to zoom in and zoom out your document.
                    • +
                    • Zoom allows to zoom in and zoom out your presentation.
                    • Fit to Slide allows to resize the slide so that the screen displays the whole slide.
                    • Fit to Width allows to resize the slide so that the slide scales to fit the width of the screen.
                    • Interface Theme allows to change interface theme by choosing a Same as system, Light, Classic Light, Dark or Contrast Dark theme.
                    +

                    The Slide Master feature can be accessed on the tab.

                    The following options allow you to configure the elements to display or to hide. Check the elements to make them visible:

                    • Notes to make the notes panel always visible.
                    • @@ -43,6 +44,7 @@

                      View tab

                    • Left Panel to make the left panel visible.
                    • Right Panel to make the right panel visible.
                    +

                    Macros - this option allows adding custom macros to your presentation.

                    \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/AddingAnimations.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/AddingAnimations.htm index 80ac644868..7941fea983 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/AddingAnimations.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/AddingAnimations.htm @@ -89,6 +89,25 @@

                    Animation color options

                    You can set the final color for animation effects that change color.

                    Click the Parameters button at the top toolbar and select the necessary color on the Theme colors or Standard colors palette.

                    Colors

                    +

                    Animation pane

                    +

                    animation pane

                    +

                    The Animation pane displays set animations and allows for easier animation management.

                    +
                      +
                    1. +
                        +
                      • Play All - click this button to play all currently created animations.
                      • +
                      • Play Selected - click this button to play all currently selected animations. During the playback, only selected animations are displayed in the list.
                      • +
                      • Play From - click this button to play animations starting with the selected one and going down the list. During the playback, only selected animations are displayed in the list.
                      • +
                      • Stop - click this button to stop animation playback.
                      • +
                      +
                    2. +
                    3. Use the
                      and
                      buttons to change the order of objects' animations on the slide.
                    4. +
                    5. To set the Start point, click an animation with the right mouse button or click the More button to the right of the animation.
                    6. +
                    7. The timeline of the slide is displayed below the animation pane.
                    8. +
                    9. To change the duration of an animation, click and drag its ending point on the pane to the desired time point.
                    10. +
                    11. To move an animation along the timeline, click right on its diagram representation on the pane and drag it to the desired time point.
                    12. +
                    13. Use the Zoom interface buttons to zoom in and out of the timeline.
                    14. +
                    diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ApplyTransitions.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ApplyTransitions.htm index 99b157d539..5273c47d89 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ApplyTransitions.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ApplyTransitions.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                    Apply transitions

                    -

                    A transition is an effect that appears when one slide advances to the next one during presentation. In the Presentation Editor, you can apply the same transition to all slides or different transitions to each separate slide and adjust the transition parameters.

                    +

                    A transition is an effect that appears when one slide advances to the next one during a presentation. In the Presentation Editor, you can apply the same transition to all slides or different transitions to each separate slide and adjust the transition parameters.

                    To apply a transition to a single slide or several selected slides:

                    1. Switch to the Transitions tab on the top toolbar. @@ -23,7 +23,7 @@

                      Apply transitions

                    2. Select a slide (or several slides in the slide list) you want to apply a transition to.
                    3. - Select one of the available transition effects on the Transition tab: None, Fade, Push, Wipe, Split, Uncover, Cover, Clock, Zoom, and Morph. + Select one of the available transition effects on the Transition tab: None, Morph, Fade, Push, Wipe, Split, Uncover, Cover, Clock, Zoom, and Random.

                      You can assign a name for the object on a slide used in the Morph transition. To do that, click the object with the right mouse button, select Shape advanced settings > General > Shape name. An object name is used to match two objects and force the first one to morph into the other. The name shall correspond to the !!Name template and remain the same for two morphed objects.

                    4. Click the Parameters button to select one of the available effect options that define exactly how the effect appears. For example, the options available for Zoom effect are Zoom In, Zoom Out and Zoom and Rotate.
                    5. diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ChangeColorScheme.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ChangeColorScheme.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..bc64ef305e --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ChangeColorScheme.htm @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + Change color scheme + + + + + + + + +
                      +
                      + +
                      +

                      Change color scheme

                      +

                      Color schemes are applied to the whole presentation. In the Presentation Editor, you can quickly change the appearance of your presentation because they define the Theme Colors palette for different presentation elements (objects, tables, autoshapes, charts). If you applied some Theme Colors to the presentation elements and then select a different Color Scheme, the applied colors in your presentation will change correspondingly.

                      +

                      To change a color scheme, click the downward arrow next to the Color Scheme icon on the Layout tab of the top toolbar and select the required color scheme from the list: Aspect, Blue Green, Blue II, Blue Warm, Blue, Grayscale, Green Yellow, Green, Marquee, Median, Office 2007-2010, Office 2013-2022, Office, Orange Red, Orange, Paper, Red Orange, Red Violet, Red, Slipstream, Violet II, Violet, Yellow Orange, Yellow, and New Office. The selected color scheme will be highlighted in the list.

                      +

                      Color Schemes

                      +

                      Once you select the preferred color scheme, you can select other colors in the color palettes window that corresponds to the presentation element you want to apply the color to. For most presentation elements, the color palettes window can be accessed by clicking the colored box on the right sidebar when the required element is selected. For the font, this window can be opened using the downward arrow next to the Font color icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar. The following palettes are available:

                      +

                      Palette

                      +
                        +
                      • Theme colors - the colors that correspond to the selected color scheme of the presentation.
                      • +
                      • Standard colors - a set of default colors. The selected color scheme does not affect them.
                      • +
                      • + You can also apply a custom color using two different options: +
                          +
                        • + Eyedropper - use this option to choose the required color by clicking it in the presentation. +
                        • +
                        • + More colors - click this caption if the required color is missing among the available palettes. Select the necessary color range moving the vertical color slider and set a specific color dragging the color picker within the large square color field. Once you select a color with the color picker, the appropriate RGB and sRGB color values will be displayed in the fields on the right. You can also define a color on the base of the RGB color model by entering the corresponding numeric values into the R, G, B (red, green, blue) fields or enter the sRGB hexadecimal code into the field marked with the # sign. The selected color appears in the New preview box. If the object was previously filled with any custom color, this color is displayed in the Current box so you can compare the original and modified colors. When the color is defined, click the Add button: +

                          Palette - Custom Color

                          +

                          The custom color will be applied to the selected element and added to the Recent colors palette.

                          +
                        • +
                        +
                      • +
                      +
                      + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ChatGPT.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ChatGPT.htm index 0eea8abc2f..46ce7f47a1 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ChatGPT.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ChatGPT.htm @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ - +
                      @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@

                      ChatGPT

                      The ChatGPT plugin allows you to use the OpenAI chatbot to perform tasks that involve understanding or generating natural language or code.

                      - +

                      Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager.

                      Installation

                      To install the ChatGPT plugin,

                        diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/CommunicationPlugins.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/CommunicationPlugins.htm index d71478b6ad..d8241a627f 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/CommunicationPlugins.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/CommunicationPlugins.htm @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@

                        Communicate while editing

                        In ONLYOFFICE Presentation Editor, you can always keep in touch with colleagues and use popular online messengers, such as Telegram and Rainbow.

                        -
                        Telegram and Rainbow plugins are not installed by default. To find information on how to install them, please, refer to the corresponding article: Adding plugins to the ONLYOFFICE Desktop Editors Adding plugins to ONLYOFFICE Cloud, or Adding new plugins to server editors.
                        +
                        Telegram and Rainbow plugins are not installed by default. To find information on how to install them, please, refer to the corresponding article: Adding plugins to the ONLYOFFICE Desktop Editors Adding plugins to ONLYOFFICE Cloud, or Adding new plugins to server editors, or install the plugin using the Plugin Manager.

                        Telegram

                        To start chatting in the Telegram plugin,

                          diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/DrawingOperations.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/DrawingOperations.htm index 5cc5563e17..cb7aac6da1 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/DrawingOperations.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/DrawingOperations.htm @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ - +
                          diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/HighlightedCode.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/HighlightedCode.htm index 42176be8f9..69ce1984e9 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/HighlightedCode.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/HighlightedCode.htm @@ -16,9 +16,10 @@

                          Insert highlighted code

                          In the Presentation Editor, you can embed highlighted code with the already adjusted style in accordance with the programming language and coloring style of the program you have chosen.

                          +

                          Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager.

                          1. Go to your presentation and place the cursor at the location where you want to include the code.
                          2. -
                          3. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose
                            Highlight code.
                          4. +
                          5. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose
                            Highlight code.
                          6. Specify the programming Language.
                          7. Select a Style of the code so that it appears as if it were open in this program.
                          8. Specify if you want to replace tabs with spaces.
                          9. diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm index 063b24f3e0..a15007b5f1 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm @@ -64,12 +64,12 @@

                            Adjust autoshape settings

                          10. Rotate is used to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the shape horizontally or vertically.
                          11. Save as picture is used to save the shape as a picture on your hard drive.
                          12. - Edit Points is used to customize or to change the curvature of your shape. + Edit points is used to customize or to change the curvature of your shape.
                              -
                            1. To activate a shape’s editable anchor points, right-click the shape and choose Edit Points from the menu or click the Edit shape > Edit points option on the right panel. The black squares that become active are the points where two lines meet, and the red line outlines the shape. Click and drag it to reposition the point, and to change the shape outline.
                            2. +
                            3. To activate a shape’s editable anchor points, right-click the shape and choose Edit points from the menu or click the Edit shape > Edit points option on the right panel. The black squares that become active are the points where two lines meet, and the red line outlines the shape. Click and drag it to reposition the point, and to change the shape outline.
                            4. Once you click the anchor point, two blue lines with white squares at the ends will appear. These are Bezier handles that allow you to create a curve and to change a curve’s smoothness. -

                              Edit Points

                              +

                              Edit points

                            5. As long as the anchor points are active, you can add and delete them. @@ -88,11 +88,11 @@

                              Adjust autoshape settings

                            6. Fill - use this section to select the autoshape fill. You can choose the following options:
                                -
                              • Color Fill - to specify the solid color you want to apply to the selected shape.
                              • -
                              • Gradient Fill - to fill the shape with two colors which smoothly change from one to another.
                              • -
                              • Picture or Texture - to use an image or a predefined texture as the shape background.
                              • +
                              • Color fill - to specify the solid color you want to apply to the selected shape.
                              • +
                              • Gradient fill - to fill the shape with two colors which smoothly change from one to another.
                              • +
                              • Picture or texture - to use an image or a predefined texture as the shape background.
                              • Pattern - to fill the shape with a two-colored design composed of regularly repeated elements.
                              • -
                              • No Fill - select this option if you don't want to use any fill.
                              • +
                              • No fill - select this option if you don't want to use any fill.

                              For more detailed information on these options, please refer to the Fill objects and select colors section.

                            7. @@ -131,10 +131,26 @@

                              Adjust autoshape settings

                          13. -
                          14. Change Shape is used to replace the current autoshape. Choose another autoshape from the dropdown list.
                          15. +
                          16. Change shape is used to replace the current autoshape. Choose another autoshape from the dropdown list.
                          17. +
                        + +
                      1. + Shadow - open this menu to choose one of the preset shadow styles used for the shape. +
                          +
                        • No Shadow - uncheck this menu point to display a shadow, and vice versa.
                        • +
                        • Color - choose one of the available colors either on the Theme colors or the Standard colors palette; use the Eyedropper tool to copy color from other objects in the document; or click the More colors menu item to create a custom color.
                        • +
                        • + Adjust Shadow - create a custom shadow using the following sliders: +

                          Adjust shadow

                          +
                            +
                          • Transparency - adjust the transparency of the shadow.
                          • +
                          • Size - adjust the size of the shadow.
                          • +
                          • Angle - adjust the angle of the shadow relative to its object.
                          • +
                          • Distance - adjust the distance of the shadow from its object.
                          • +
                          +
                      2. -
                      3. Show shadow - check this option to display shape with shadow.

                      4. To change the advanced settings of the autoshape, right-click the shape and select the Shape Advanced Settings option from the contextual menu or left-click it and press the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar. The shape properties window will be opened:

                        diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm index 7c4a339025..c3da8f42cf 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm @@ -105,7 +105,7 @@

                        Insert a chart

                      5. Custom combination
                      6. -

                        Note: ONLYOFFICE Presentation Editor supports the following types of charts that were created with third-party editors: Pyramid, Bar (Pyramid), Horizontal/Vertical Cylinders, Horizontal/Vertical Cones. You can open the file containing such a chart and modify it using the available chart editing tools.

                        +

                        Note: ONLYOFFICE Presentation Editor supports the following types of charts that were created with third-party editors: Pyramid, Bar (Pyramid), Horizontal/Vertical Cylinders, Horizontal/Vertical Cones. You can open the file containing such a chart and modify it using the available chart editing tools. The following types are supported for opening only: Histogram, Waterfall, Funnel.

                      7. After that, the Chart Editor window will appear where you can enter the necessary data into the cells using the following controls: diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertText.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertText.htm index 7b58faa0b8..60969b3d8e 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertText.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertText.htm @@ -11,73 +11,76 @@
                        -
                        - -
                        +
                        + +

                        Insert and format your text

                        Insert your text box into a presentation

                        In the Presentation Editor, you can add new text in three different ways:

                        -
                          -
                        • Add a text passage within the corresponding text placeholder on the slide layout. To do that, just put the cursor within the placeholder and type in your text or paste it using the Ctrl+V key combination instead of the default text.
                        • -
                        • Add a text passage anywhere on a slide. You can insert a text box (a rectangular frame that allows you to enter some text within it) or a Text Art object (a text box with a predefined font style and color that allows you to apply some text effects). Depending on the necessary text object type, you can do the following: -
                            -
                          • - to add a text box, click the
                            Text Box icon on the Home or Insert tab of the top toolbar, choose one of the following options: Insert horizontal text box or Insert vertical text box, then click where you want to insert the text box, hold the mouse button and drag the text box border to specify its size. When you release the mouse button, the insertion point will appear in the added text box, allowing you to enter your text. -

                            It's also possible to insert a text box by clicking the Shape icon on the top toolbar and selecting the shape from the Basic Shapes group.

                            -
                          • -
                          • to add a Text Art object, click the
                            Text Art icon on the Insert tab of the top toolbar, then click on the desired style template – the Text Art object will be added in the center of the slide. Select the default text within the text box with the mouse and replace it with your own text.
                          • -
                          -
                        • -
                        • Add a text passage within an autoshape. Select a shape and start typing your text.
                        • -
                        -

                        Click outside of the text object to apply the changes and return to the slide.

                        -

                        The text within the text object is a part of the latter (when you move or rotate the text object, the text moves or rotates with it).

                        -

                        As an inserted text object represents a rectangular frame (it has invisible text box borders by default) with text in it and this frame is a common autoshape, you can change both the shape and text properties.

                        +
                          +
                        • Add a text passage within the corresponding text placeholder on the slide layout. To do that, just put the cursor within the placeholder and type in your text or paste it using the Ctrl+V key combination instead of the default text.
                        • +
                        • + Add a text passage anywhere on a slide. You can insert a text box (a rectangular frame that allows you to enter some text within it) or a Text Art object (a text box with a predefined font style and color that allows you to apply some text effects). Depending on the necessary text object type, you can do the following: +
                            +
                          • + to add a text box, click the
                            Text Box icon on the Home or Insert tab of the top toolbar, choose one of the following options: Insert horizontal text box or Insert vertical text box, then click where you want to insert the text box, hold the mouse button and drag the text box border to specify its size. When you release the mouse button, the insertion point will appear in the added text box, allowing you to enter your text. +

                            It's also possible to insert a text box by clicking the Shape icon on the top toolbar and selecting the shape from the Basic Shapes group.

                            +
                          • +
                          • to add a Text Art object, click the
                            Text Art icon on the Insert tab of the top toolbar, then click on the desired style template – the Text Art object will be added in the center of the slide. Select the default text within the text box with the mouse and replace it with your own text.
                          • +
                          +
                        • +
                        • Add a text passage within an autoshape. Select a shape and start typing your text.
                        • +
                        +

                        Click outside of the text object to apply the changes and return to the slide.

                        +

                        The text within the text object is a part of the latter (when you move or rotate the text object, the text moves or rotates with it).

                        +

                        As an inserted text object represents a rectangular frame (it has invisible text box borders by default) with text in it and this frame is a common autoshape, you can change both the shape and text properties.

                        You can save the text box as a picture on your hard drive using the Save as picture option in the right-click menu.

                        -

                        To delete the added text object, click on the text box border and press the Delete key. The text within the text box will also be deleted.

                        -

                        Format a text box

                        -

                        Select the text box by clicking on its border to change its properties. When the text box is selected, its borders are displayed as solid (not dashed) lines.

                        -

                        Text box selected

                        +

                        To delete the added text object, click on the text box border and press the Delete key. The text within the text box will also be deleted.

                        +

                        Format a text box

                        +

                        Select the text box by clicking on its border to change its properties. When the text box is selected, its borders are displayed as solid (not dashed) lines.

                        +

                        Text box selected

                          -
                        • to resize, move, rotate the text box, use the special handles on the edges of the shape.
                        • -
                        • to edit the text box fill, line, replace the rectangular box with a different shape, or access the shape advanced settings, click the Shape settings
                          icon on the right sidebar and use the corresponding options.
                        • -
                        • to align a text box on the slide, rotate or flip it, arrange text boxes as related to other objects, right-click on the text box border, and use the contextual menu options.
                        • -
                        • to create columns of text within the text box, click the corresponding icon
                          on the text formatting toolbar and choose the preferable option, or right-click on the text box border, click the Shape Advanced Settings option, and switch to the Columns tab in the Shape - Advanced Settings window.
                        • -
                        -

                        Format the text within the text box

                        -

                        Click the text within the text box to change its properties. When the text is selected, the text box borders are displayed as dashed lines.

                        -

                        Text selected

                        -

                        Note: it's also possible to change text formatting when the text box (not the text itself) is selected. In such a case, any changes will be applied to the whole text within the text box. Some font formatting options (font type, size, color, and decoration styles) can be applied to the previously selected part of the text separately.

                        -

                        Align your text within the text box

                        +
                      8. to resize, move, rotate the text box, use the special handles on the edges of the shape.
                      9. +
                      10. to edit the text box fill, line, replace the rectangular box with a different shape, or access the shape advanced settings, click the Shape settings
                        icon on the right sidebar and use the corresponding options.
                      11. +
                      12. to align a text box on the slide, rotate or flip it, arrange text boxes as related to other objects, right-click on the text box border, and use the contextual menu options.
                      13. +
                      14. to create columns of text within the text box, click the corresponding icon
                        on the text formatting toolbar and choose the preferable option, or right-click on the text box border, click the Shape Advanced Settings option, and switch to the Columns tab in the Shape - Advanced Settings window.
                      15. + +

                        Format the text within the text box

                        +

                        Click the text within the text box to change its properties. When the text is selected, the text box borders are displayed as dashed lines.

                        +

                        Text selected

                        +

                        Note: it's also possible to change text formatting when the text box (not the text itself) is selected. In such a case, any changes will be applied to the whole text within the text box. Some font formatting options (font type, size, color, and decoration styles) can be applied to the previously selected part of the text separately.

                        +

                        Align your text within the text box

                        The text is aligned horizontally in four ways: left, right, center, or justified. To do that:

                        1. place the cursor in the position where you want the alignment to be applied (this can be a new line or already entered text),
                        2. -
                        3. drop-down the Horizontal align
                          list on the Home tab of the top toolbar,
                        4. -
                        5. select the alignment type you would like to apply: +
                        6. drop-down the Horizontal align
                          list on the Home tab of the top toolbar,
                        7. +
                        8. + select the alignment type you would like to apply:
                            -
                          • the Align text left option
                            allows you to line up your text on the left side of the text box (the right side remains unaligned).
                          • -
                          • the Align text center option
                            allows you to line up your text in the center of the text box (the right and the left sides remain unaligned).
                          • -
                          • the Align text right option
                            allows you to line up your text on the right side of the text box (the left side remains unaligned).
                          • -
                          • the Justify option
                            allows you to line up your text both on the left and on the right sides of the text box (additional spacing is added where necessary to keep the alignment).
                          • +
                          • the Align text left option
                            allows you to line up your text on the left side of the text box (the right side remains unaligned).
                          • +
                          • the Align text center option
                            allows you to line up your text in the center of the text box (the right and the left sides remain unaligned).
                          • +
                          • the Align text right option
                            allows you to line up your text on the right side of the text box (the left side remains unaligned).
                          • +
                          • the Justify option
                            allows you to line up your text both on the left and on the right sides of the text box (additional spacing is added where necessary to keep the alignment).
                        -

                        Note: these parameters can also be found in the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window.

                        +

                        Note: these parameters can also be found in the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window.

                        The text is aligned vertically in three ways: top, middle, or bottom. To do that:

                        1. place the cursor in the position where you want the alignment to be applied (this can be a new line or already entered text),
                        2. -
                        3. drop-down the Vertical align
                          list on the Home tab of the top toolbar,
                        4. -
                        5. select the alignment type you would like to apply: +
                        6. drop-down the Vertical align
                          list on the Home tab of the top toolbar,
                        7. +
                        8. + select the alignment type you would like to apply:
                            -
                          • the Align text to the top option
                            allows you to line up your text to the top of the text box.
                          • -
                          • the Align text to the middle option
                            allows you to line up your text in the center of the text box.
                          • -
                          • the Align text to the bottom option
                            allows you to line up your text to the bottom of the text box.
                          • +
                          • the Align text to the top option
                            allows you to line up your text to the top of the text box.
                          • +
                          • the Align text to the middle option
                            allows you to line up your text in the center of the text box.
                          • +
                          • the Align text to the bottom option
                            allows you to line up your text to the bottom of the text box.
                        -
                        -

                        Change the text direction

                        -

                        To Rotate the text within the text box, right-click the text, select the Text Direction option, and then choose one of the available options: Horizontal (selected by default), Rotate Text Down (used to set a vertical direction, from top to bottom) or Rotate Text Up (used to set a vertical direction, from bottom to top).

                        +
                        +

                        Change the text direction

                        +

                        To Rotate the text within the text box, right-click the text, select the Text Direction option, and then choose one of the available options: Horizontal (selected by default), Rotate Text Down (used to set a vertical direction, from top to bottom) or Rotate Text Up (used to set a vertical direction, from bottom to top).


                        Adjust font type, size, color and apply decoration styles

                        You can select the font type, size, and color as well as apply various font decoration styles using the corresponding icons situated on the Home tab of the top toolbar.

                        @@ -85,67 +88,67 @@

                        Format the text within the text box

                        - + - + - + - + - + - - + + - + - + - + - + - + - + - +
                        Font
                        Used to select one of the fonts from the list of available ones. If the required font is not available in the list, you can download and install it on your operating system, and the font will be available for use in the desktop version.
                        Font size
                        Used to choose from the preset font size values in the dropdown list (the default values are: 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 36, 48, 72 and 96). It's also possible to manually enter a custom value up to 300 pt in the font size field. Press Enter to confirm.
                        Increment font size
                        Used to change the font size making it one point bigger each time the button is pressed.
                        Decrement font size
                        Used to change the font size making it one point smaller each time the button is pressed.
                        Change case
                        Used to change the font case. Sentence case. - the case matches that of a common sentence. lowercase - all letters are small. UPPERCASE - all letters are capitalized. Capitalize Each Word - each word starts with a capital letter. tOGGLE cASE - reverse the case of the selected text or the word where the mouse cursor is positioned.
                        Highlight color
                        Used to mark separate sentences, phrases, words, or even characters by adding a color band that imitates the highlighter pen effect throughout the text. You can select the required part of the text and click the downward arrow next to the icon to select a color in the palette (this color set does not depend on the selected Color scheme and includes 16 colors) - the color will be applied to the selected text. Alternatively, you can first choose a highlight color and then start selecting the text with the mouse - the mouse pointer will look like this
                        and you'll be able to highlight several different parts of your text sequentially. To stop highlighting, just click the icon once again. To delete the highlight color, choose the No Fill option.
                        Used to mark separate sentences, phrases, words, or even characters by adding a color band that imitates the highlighter pen effect throughout the text. You can select the required part of the text and click the downward arrow next to the icon to select a color in the palette (this color set does not depend on the selected Color scheme and includes 16 colors) - the color will be applied to the selected text. Alternatively, you can first choose a highlight color and then start selecting the text with the mouse - the mouse pointer will look like this
                        and you'll be able to highlight several different parts of your text sequentially. To stop highlighting, just click the icon once again. To delete the highlight color, choose the No Fill option.
                        Font color
                        Used to change the color of the letters/characters in the text. Click the downward arrow next to the icon to select the color.
                        Bold
                        Used to make the font bold giving it a heavier appearance.
                        Italic
                        Used to make the font slightly slanted to the right.
                        Underline
                        Used to make the text underlined with a line going under the letters.
                        Strikeout
                        Used to make the text struck out with a line going through the letters.
                        Superscript
                        Used to make the text smaller placing it in the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions.
                        Subscript
                        Used to make the text smaller placing it in the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas.
                        @@ -155,47 +158,50 @@

                        Format the text within the text box

                        To do that,

                        1. put the cursor within the required paragraph or select several paragraphs with the mouse,
                        2. -
                        3. use the corresponding fields of the
                          Paragraph settings tab on the right sidebar to achieve the desired results: +
                        4. + use the corresponding fields of the
                          Paragraph settings tab on the right sidebar to achieve the desired results:
                          • Line Spacing - set the line height for the text lines within the paragraph. You can select among two options: multiple (sets line spacing that can be expressed in numbers greater than 1), exactly (sets fixed line spacing). You can specify the necessary value in the field on the right.
                          • -
                          • Paragraph Spacing - set the amount of space between paragraphs. -
                              -
                            • Before - set the amount of space before the paragraph.
                            • -
                            • After - set the amount of space after the paragraph.
                            • -
                            -
                          • +
                          • + Paragraph Spacing - set the amount of space between paragraphs. +
                              +
                            • Before - set the amount of space before the paragraph.
                            • +
                            • After - set the amount of space after the paragraph.
                            • +
                            +
                        -

                        Note: these parameters can also be found in the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window.

                        -

                        To quickly change the current paragraph line spacing, you can also use the Line spacing icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar selecting the required value from the list: 1.0, 1.15, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, or 3.0 lines.

                        -

                        To change the paragraph offset from the left side of the text box, put the cursor within the required paragraph, or select several paragraphs with the mouse and use the respective icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar: Decrease indent and Increase indent .

                        -

                        Adjust paragraph advanced settings

                        -

                        To open the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window, right-click the text and choose the Paragraph Advanced Settings option from the menu. It's also possible to put the cursor within the required paragraph - the Paragraph settings tab will be activated on the right sidebar. Press the Show advanced settings link. The paragraph properties window will be opened:

                        +

                        Note: these parameters can also be found in the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window.

                        +

                        To quickly change the current paragraph line spacing, you can also use the Paragraph line spacing icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar selecting the required value from the list: 1.0, 1.15, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, or 3.0 lines, as well as open the corresponding right panel by clicking the Line spacing options menu item.

                        +

                        To change the paragraph offset from the left side of the text box, put the cursor within the required paragraph, or select several paragraphs with the mouse and use the respective icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar: Decrease indent and Increase indent .

                        +

                        Adjust paragraph advanced settings

                        +

                        To open the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window, right-click the text and choose the Paragraph Advanced Settings option from the menu. It's also possible to put the cursor within the required paragraph - the Paragraph settings tab will be activated on the right sidebar. Press the Show advanced settings link. The paragraph properties window will be opened:

                        Paragraph Properties - Indents & Spacing tab

                        The Indents & Spacing tab allows you to:

                        -
                          -
                        • change the alignment type for the paragraph text,
                        • -
                        • change the paragraph indents as related to the internal margins of the text box, -
                            -
                          • Left - set the paragraph offset from the left internal margin of the text box specifying the necessary numeric value,
                          • -
                          • Right - set the paragraph offset from the right internal margin of the text box specifying the necessary numeric value,
                          • -
                          • Special - set an indent for the first line of the paragraph: select the corresponding menu item ((none), First line, Hanging) and change the default numeric value specified for First Line or Hanging,
                          • -
                          -
                        • -
                        • change the paragraph line spacing.
                        • -
                        -

                        You can also use the horizontal ruler to set indents.

                        -
                        -

                        Select the necessary paragraph(s) and drag the indent markers along the ruler.

                        -
                          -
                        • First Line Indent marker
                          is used to set the offset from the left internal margin of the text box for the first line of the paragraph.
                        • -
                        • Hanging Indent marker
                          is used to set the offset from the left internal margin of the text box for the second and all the subsequent lines of the paragraph.
                        • -
                        • Left Indent marker
                          is used to set the entire paragraph offset from the left internal margin of the text box.
                        • -
                        • Right Indent marker
                          is used to set the paragraph offset from the right internal margin of the text box.
                        • -
                        -

                        Note: if you don't see the rulers, switch to the Home tab of the top toolbar, click the View settings icon at the upper right corner, and uncheck the Hide Rulers option to display them.

                        - Paragraph Properties - Font tab +
                          +
                        • change the alignment type for the paragraph text,
                        • +
                        • + change the paragraph indents as related to the internal margins of the text box, +
                            +
                          • Left - set the paragraph offset from the left internal margin of the text box specifying the necessary numeric value,
                          • +
                          • Right - set the paragraph offset from the right internal margin of the text box specifying the necessary numeric value,
                          • +
                          • Special - set an indent for the first line of the paragraph: select the corresponding menu item ((none), First line, Hanging) and change the default numeric value specified for First Line or Hanging,
                          • +
                          +
                        • +
                        • change the paragraph line spacing.
                        • +
                        +

                        You can also use the horizontal ruler to set indents.

                        +
                        +

                        Select the necessary paragraph(s) and drag the indent markers along the ruler.

                        +
                          +
                        • First Line Indent marker
                          is used to set the offset from the left internal margin of the text box for the first line of the paragraph.
                        • +
                        • Hanging Indent marker
                          is used to set the offset from the left internal margin of the text box for the second and all the subsequent lines of the paragraph.
                        • +
                        • Left Indent marker
                          is used to set the entire paragraph offset from the left internal margin of the text box.
                        • +
                        • Right Indent marker
                          is used to set the paragraph offset from the right internal margin of the text box.
                        • +
                        +

                        Note: if you don't see the rulers, switch to the Home tab of the top toolbar, click the View settings icon at the upper right corner, and uncheck the Hide Rulers option to display them.

                        + Paragraph Properties - Font tab

                        The Font tab contains the following parameters:

                        • Strikethrough is used to make the text struck out with a line going through the letters.
                        • @@ -204,41 +210,44 @@

                          Adjust paragraph advanced settings

                        • Subscript is used to make the text smaller placing it in the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas.
                        • Small caps is used to make all letters lowercase.
                        • All caps is used to make all letters upper case.
                        • -
                        • Character Spacing is used to set the space between the characters. Increase the default value to apply the Expanded spacing, or decrease the default value to apply the Condensed spacing. Use the arrow buttons or enter the necessary value in the box. -

                          All the changes will be displayed in the preview field below.

                          -
                        • +
                        • + Character Spacing is used to set the space between the characters. Increase the default value to apply the Expanded spacing, or decrease the default value to apply the Condensed spacing. Use the arrow buttons or enter the necessary value in the box. +

                          All the changes will be displayed in the preview field below.

                          +
                        Paragraph Properties - Tab tab

                        The Tab tab allows you to change tab stops i.e. the position the cursor advances to when you press the Tab key.

                          -
                        • Default Tab is set at 2.54 cm. You can decrease or increase this value using the arrow buttons or enter the necessary one in the box.
                        • -
                        • Tab Position - is used to set custom tab stops. Enter the necessary value in this box, adjust it more precisely using the arrow buttons, and press the Specify button. Your custom tab position will be added to the list in the field below.
                        • -
                        • Alignment - is used to set the necessary alignment type for each of the tab positions in the list above. Select the necessary tab position in the list, choose the Left, Center, or Right option from the Alignment drop-down list, and press the Specify button. -
                            -
                          • Left - lines up your text on the left side at the tab stop position; the text moves to the right from the tab stop as you type. Such a tab stop will be indicated on the horizontal ruler by the
                            marker.
                          • -
                          • Center - centers the text at the tab stop position. Such a tab stop will be indicated on the horizontal ruler by the
                            marker.
                          • -
                          • Right - lines up your text on the right side at the tab stop position; the text moves to the left from the tab stop as you type. Such a tab stop will be indicated on the horizontal ruler by the
                            marker.
                          • -
                          -

                          To delete tab stops from the list, select a tab stop and press the Remove or Remove All button.

                          -
                        • +
                        • Default Tab is set at 2.54 cm. You can decrease or increase this value using the arrow buttons or enter the necessary one in the box.
                        • +
                        • Tab Position - is used to set custom tab stops. Enter the necessary value in this box, adjust it more precisely using the arrow buttons, and press the Specify button. Your custom tab position will be added to the list in the field below.
                        • +
                        • + Alignment - is used to set the necessary alignment type for each of the tab positions in the list above. Select the necessary tab position in the list, choose the Left, Center, or Right option from the Alignment drop-down list, and press the Specify button. +
                            +
                          • Left - lines up your text on the left side at the tab stop position; the text moves to the right from the tab stop as you type. Such a tab stop will be indicated on the horizontal ruler by the
                            marker.
                          • +
                          • Center - centers the text at the tab stop position. Such a tab stop will be indicated on the horizontal ruler by the
                            marker.
                          • +
                          • Right - lines up your text on the right side at the tab stop position; the text moves to the left from the tab stop as you type. Such a tab stop will be indicated on the horizontal ruler by the
                            marker.
                          • +
                          +

                          To delete tab stops from the list, select a tab stop and press the Remove or Remove All button.

                          +
                        • +
                        +

                        To set tab stops, you can also use the horizontal ruler:

                        +
                          +
                        1. Click the tab selector button
                          in the upper left corner of the working area to choose the necessary tab stop type: Left
                          , Center
                          , Right
                          .
                        2. +
                        3. + Click on the bottom edge of the ruler where you want to place the tab stop. Drag it along the ruler to change its position. To remove the added tab stop, drag it out of the ruler. +

                          +

                          Note: if you don't see the rulers, switch to the Home tab of the top toolbar, click the View settings icon at the upper right corner, and uncheck the Hide Rulers option to display them.

                          +
                        4. +
                        +

                        Edit a Text Art style

                        +

                        Select a text object and click the Text Art settings icon on the right sidebar.

                        +

                        Text Art setting tab

                        +
                          +
                        • Change the applied text style by selecting a new Template from the gallery. You can also change the basic style additionally by selecting a different font type, size, etc.
                        • +
                        • Change the font fill and line. The available options are the same as the ones for autoshapes.
                        • +
                        • Apply a text effect by selecting the necessary text transformation type from the Transform gallery. You can adjust the degree of text distortion by dragging the pink diamond-shaped handle.
                        -

                        To set tab stops, you can also use the horizontal ruler:

                        -
                          -
                        1. Click the tab selector button
                          in the upper left corner of the working area to choose the necessary tab stop type: Left
                          , Center
                          , Right
                          .
                        2. -
                        3. Click on the bottom edge of the ruler where you want to place the tab stop. Drag it along the ruler to change its position. To remove the added tab stop, drag it out of the ruler. -

                          -

                          Note: if you don't see the rulers, switch to the Home tab of the top toolbar, click the View settings icon at the upper right corner, and uncheck the Hide Rulers option to display them.

                          -
                        4. -
                        -

                        Edit a Text Art style

                        -

                        Select a text object and click the Text Art settings icon on the right sidebar.

                        -

                        Text Art setting tab

                        -
                          -
                        • Change the applied text style by selecting a new Template from the gallery. You can also change the basic style additionally by selecting a different font type, size, etc.
                        • -
                        • Change the font fill and line. The available options are the same as the ones for autoshapes.
                        • -
                        • Apply a text effect by selecting the necessary text transformation type from the Transform gallery. You can adjust the degree of text distortion by dragging the pink diamond-shaped handle.
                        • -
                        -

                        Text Art Transformation

                        +

                        Text Art Transformation

                        \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/OpenCreateNew.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/OpenCreateNew.htm index 0da35be788..849c2569e7 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/OpenCreateNew.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/OpenCreateNew.htm @@ -72,6 +72,7 @@

                        To rename an opened presentation

                        To open the folder where the file is stored in a new browser tab in the online version, in the file explorer window in the desktop version, click the Open file location icon on the right side of the editor header. Alternatively, you can switch to the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Open file location option.

                        +

                        ONLYOFFICE offers a form gallery where you can find templates in different languages and download them directly onto your hard drive. The gallery is constantly updated, and you can participate and upload your own templates. Currently, the gallery is available for ONLYOFFICE DocSpace and for ONLYOFFICE Desktop Editors.

                        \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/PhotoEditor.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/PhotoEditor.htm index 0a2ab96efb..37bbc42af5 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/PhotoEditor.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/PhotoEditor.htm @@ -16,10 +16,11 @@

                        Edit an image

                        ONLYOFFICE Presentation Editor comes with a very powerful photo editor, that allows you to adjust the image with filters and make all kinds of annotations.

                        +

                        Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager.

                        1. Select an image in your presentation.
                        2. - Switch to the Plugins tab and choose
                          Photo Editor.
                          + Switch to the Plugins tab and choose
                          Photo Editor.
                          You are now in the editing environment.
                          • diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Pixabay.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Pixabay.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..9d1a5d1952 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Pixabay.htm @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + Pixabay + + + + + + + + +
                            +
                            + +
                            +

                            Pixabay

                            +

                            The Pixabay plugin allows you to add pictures to your presentation from an open collection of Pixabay service that offers copyright free images.

                            +

                            The plugin is compatible with the self-hosted and the desktop versions of the ONLYOFFICE editors and can be added to ONLYOFFICE instances manually using the Plugin Manager.

                            + +

                            Installation

                            +

                            To install the Pixabay plugin,

                            +
                              +
                            1. Go to the Plugins tab.
                            2. +
                            3. Open the Plugin Manager.
                            4. +
                            5. Find
                              on the marketplace and click the Install button below.
                            6. +
                            7. Click the
                              Pixabay icon in the Plugins tab.
                            8. +
                            9. Proceed with the plugin configuration.
                            10. +
                            +

                            For more details, please refer to the ONLYOFFICE API documentation.

                            + +

                            Configuration

                            +
                              +
                            1. Log in to your Pixabay account or register a new one.
                            2. +
                            3. Go to the Search Images section of the Pixabay API page.
                            4. +
                            5. + Scroll down to the Parameters list and copy the link under the Key parameter. If you are not logged in, press Login next to the Key parameter. +

                              Pixabay API key

                              +
                            6. +
                            7. Paste the key to the API key field on the left panel of the Plugins tab in the Presentation Editor.
                            8. +
                            9. Click Save.
                            10. +
                            +

                            Pixabay Panel

                            + +

                            How to use

                            +
                              +
                            1. Go to the Plugins tab.
                            2. +
                            3. Click the
                              Pixabay icon.
                            4. +
                            5. On the left panel that opens, type in the keyword you associate with the image you are looking for.
                            6. +
                            7. + Use the Show settings button to refine your search by Language, Image type, Orientation and Category. Click Hide settings to reduce the search section. +

                              Pixabay settings

                              +
                            8. +
                            9. Click Search.
                            10. +
                            11. Scroll through search results and click the image to add it to your presentation.
                            12. +
                            +

                            Pixabay Results

                            +
                            + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SetSlideParameters.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SetSlideParameters.htm index 0fdd7695b8..ab00b57d74 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SetSlideParameters.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SetSlideParameters.htm @@ -24,7 +24,7 @@

                            Set slide parameters

                            To change the selected theme for one or more slides, you can right-click the selected slides in the list on the left (or right-click a slide in the editing area), select the Change Theme option from the contextual menu and choose the necessary theme.

                          • - Color Schemes affect the predefined colors used for the presentation elements (fonts, lines, fills etc.) and allow you to maintain color consistency throughout the entire presentation. + Color Schemes affect the predefined colors used for the presentation elements (fonts, lines, fills, etc.) and allow you to maintain color consistency throughout the entire presentation. To change a color scheme, click the
                            Change color scheme icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar and select the necessary scheme from the drop-down list. The selected color scheme will be highlighted in the list and applied to all the slides.

                            Color Schemes

                          • @@ -42,19 +42,23 @@

                            Set slide parameters

                        3. - To change a background fill: -
                            + To change background fill: +

                            Slide background settings

                            +
                            1. in the slide list on the left, select the slides you want to apply the fill to. Or click at any blank space within the currently edited slide in the slide editing area to change the fill type for this separate slide.
                            2. on the Slide settings tab of the right sidebar, select the necessary option: -
                                -
                              • Color Fill - select this option to specify the solid color you want to apply to the selected slides.
                              • -
                              • Gradient Fill - select this option to fill the slide with two colors which smoothly change from one to another.
                              • -
                              • Picture or Texture - select this option to use an image or a predefined texture as the slide background.
                              • -
                              • Pattern - select this option to fill the slide with a two-colored design composed of regularly repeated elements.
                              • -
                              • No Fill - select this option if you don't want to use any fill.
                              • -
                              • Opacity - drag the slider or enter the percent value manually. The default value is 100%. It corresponds to the full opacity. The 0% value corresponds to the full transparency.
                              • -
                              +
                                +
                              • Color fill - select this option to specify the solid color you want to apply to the selected slides.
                              • +
                              • Gradient fill - select this option to fill the slide with two colors which smoothly change from one to another.
                              • +
                              • Picture or Texture - select this option to use an image or a predefined texture as the slide background.
                              • +
                              • Pattern - select this option to fill the slide with a two-colored design composed of regularly repeated elements.
                              • +
                              • No fill - select this option if you don't want to use any fill.
                              • +
                              • Opacity - drag the slider or enter the percent value manually. The default value is 100%. It corresponds to the full opacity. The 0% value corresponds to the full transparency.
                              • +
                              • Show Background graphics - uncheck this menu item to simplify the background and improve presentation loading time due to lower graphics settings.
                              • +
                              • Reset Background - reset background to default.
                              • +
                              • Apply to All Slides - apply the current background to all slides in the presentation.
                              • +

                              For more detailed information on these options, please refer to the Fill objects and select colors section.

                            diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SlideMaster.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SlideMaster.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..9ea51575bb --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SlideMaster.htm @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ + + + + Slide Master + + + + + + + + +
                            +
                            + +
                            +

                            Slide Master

                            +

                            The Slide Master allows you to edit the layout for all slides simultaneously, e.g., unify fonts or watermarks.

                            +

                            To enter the Slide Master mode:

                            +
                              +
                            1. Go to the View tab.
                            2. +
                            3. Click the Slide Master button on the top toolbar.
                            4. +
                            +

                            To manage master slides:

                            +

                            Slide Master

                            +
                              +
                            1. Click the Add Slide Master button on the top toolbar of the View tab.
                            2. +
                            3. The Master slides for each layout will appear in the slide list on the left. They are visible only to you and only in the Slide Master mode.
                            4. +
                            5. Edit the slides the way you need them to look via the Home and Insert tabs.
                            6. +
                            7. If you need more layouts, click the Add Layout button.
                            8. +
                            9. Customize the slide layout. Click the Insert Placeholder button to add and edit specific content areas.
                            10. +
                            11. Uncheck the Title and Footers buttons on the top toolbar if you do not need them.
                            12. +
                            +

                            To exit the Slide Master mode, click the Close Master button on the top toolbar, or go to the View tab and click the Normal button.

                            +
                            + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Thesaurus.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Thesaurus.htm index 9c7e6e65aa..f7fb5fe763 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Thesaurus.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Thesaurus.htm @@ -19,9 +19,10 @@

                            Replace a word by a synonym

                            If you are using the same word multiple times, or a word is just not quite the word you are looking for, ONLYOFFICE Presentation Editor lets you look up synonyms. It will show you the antonyms too.

                            +

                            Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager.

                            1. Select the word in your presentation.
                            2. -
                            3. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose
                              Thesaurus.
                            4. +
                            5. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose
                              Thesaurus.
                            6. The synonyms and antonyms will show up in the left sidebar.
                            7. Click a word to replace the word in your presentation.
                            diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Translator.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Translator.htm index 0cd22fdd80..f0238a66a6 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Translator.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Translator.htm @@ -16,9 +16,10 @@

                            Translate text

                            In the Presentation Editor, you can translate your presentation from and to numerous languages.

                            +

                            Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager.

                            1. Select the text that you want to translate.
                            2. -
                            3. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose
                              Translator, the Translator appears in a sidebar on the left.
                            4. +
                            5. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose
                              Translator, the Translator appears in a sidebar on the left.
                            6. Click the drop-down box and choose the preferred language.

                            The text will be translated to the required language.

                            diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ViewPresentationInfo.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ViewPresentationInfo.htm index 6dd2efd866..a0e18caf66 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ViewPresentationInfo.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ViewPresentationInfo.htm @@ -1,49 +1,38 @@  - - View the information about your presentation - - - - - - - - -
                            + + View the information about your presentation + + + + + + + + +
                            -

                            View the information about your presentation

                            -

                            To access the detailed information about the currently edited presentation in the Presentation Editor, click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Presentation Info option.

                            -

                            General Information

                            -

                            The presentation information includes a number of file properties which describe the presentation. Some of these properties are updated automatically, and some of them can be edited.

                            -
                              -
                            • Location - the folder in the Documents module where the file is stored. Owner - the name of the user who has created the file. Uploaded - the date and time when the file has been created. These properties are available in the online version only.
                            • -
                            • Title, Subject, Comment - these properties allow you to simplify the classification of your presentations. You can specify the necessary text in the properties fields.
                            • -
                            • Last Modified - the date and time when the file was last modified.
                            • -
                            • Last Modified By - the name of the user who has made the latest change to the presentation if it was shared and can be edited by several users.
                            • -
                            • Application - the application the presentation was created with.
                            • -
                            • Author - the person who has created the file. You can enter the necessary name in this field. Press Enter to add a new field that allows you to specify one more author.
                            • -
                            -

                            If you changed the file properties, click the Apply button to apply the changes.

                            -
                            -

                            Online Editors allow you to change the presentation title directly from the editor interface. To do that, click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Rename option, then enter the necessary File name in a new window that opens and click OK.

                            -
                            -
                            -

                            Permission Information

                            -

                            In the online version, you can view the information about permissions to the files stored in the cloud.

                            -

                            This option is not available for users with the Read Only permissions.

                            -

                            To find out who has the rights to view or edit the presentation, select the Access Rights... option on the left sidebar.

                            -

                            You can also change currently selected access rights by pressing the Change access rights button in the Persons who have rights section.

                            -

                            Version History

                            -

                            In the online version, you can view the version history for the files stored in the cloud.

                            -

                            This option is not available for users with the Read Only permissions.

                            -

                            To view all the changes made to this presentation, select the Version History option at the left sidebar. It's also possible to open the history of versions using the Version History icon on the Collaboration tab of the top toolbar. You'll see the list of this presentation versions (major changes) and revisions (minor changes) with the indication of each version/revision author and creation date and time. For presentation versions, the version number is also specified (e.g. ver. 2). To know exactly which changes have been made in each separate version/revision, you can view the one you need by clicking it on the left sidebar. The changes made by the version/revision author are marked with the color which is displayed next to the author's name on the left sidebar. You can use the Restore link below the selected version/revision to restore it.

                            -

                            Version History

                            -

                            To return to the current version of the presentation, use the Close History option on the top of the version list.

                            -
                            -

                            To close the File pane and return to presentation editing, select the Close Menu option.

                            -
                            - +

                            View the information about your presentation

                            +

                            To access the detailed information about the currently edited presentation in the Presentation Editor, click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Info option.

                            +

                            Common

                            +
                              +
                            • Owner - the person who has created the file.
                            • +
                            • Uploaded - the date when the file has been uploaded to the server.
                            • +
                            • Last Modified - the date when the file has last been edited.
                            • +
                            +

                            Statistics

                            +

                            This subsection displays the number of pages, paragraphs, words, symbols, and symbols with spaces within the file.

                            +

                            Properties

                            +
                              +
                            • Author - you can enter the necessary name in this field. Press Enter to add a new field that allows you to specify one more author. To delete additional authors, click the cross button next to the corresponding fields.
                            • +
                            • Title - enter the title of the presentation. Please do not confuse it with the file name as these are different file properties.
                            • +
                            • Tags - enter necessary tags for better file classification.
                            • +
                            • Subject - enter the presentation subject.
                            • +
                            • Comment - enter the comment to the file. Please do not confuse it with the Comments as these are different features.
                            • +
                            • Click the Add property button to add custom fields, entering the Title of the field, its Type, i.e., its format, and its Value. Click OK when ready. To delete additional fields, click the cross button next to them.
                            • +
                            +
                            + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/YouTube.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/YouTube.htm index 7babbb4aec..5a983e51c1 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/YouTube.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/YouTube.htm @@ -16,18 +16,19 @@

                            Include a video

                            In the Presentation Editor, you can include a video in your presentation. It will be shown as an image. By double-clicking the image the video dialog opens. Here you can start the video.

                            +

                            Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager.

                            1. Copy the URL of the video you want to include.
                              (the complete address shown in the address line of your browser)
                            2. Go to your presentation and place the cursor at the location where you want to include the video.
                            3. -
                            4. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose
                              YouTube.
                            5. +
                            6. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose
                              YouTube.
                            7. Paste the URL and click OK.
                            8. Check if it is the correct video and click the OK button below the video.

                            The video is now included in your presentation.

                            Youtube plugin gif - + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Zoom.htm b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Zoom.htm index 5641369723..0df87690c0 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Zoom.htm +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Zoom.htm @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ - +
                            @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@

                            Zoom

                            The Zoom plugin allows you to host or schedule Zoom meetings directly in the editor in just a few clicks.

                            -

                            The plugin is compatible with the self-hosted version of ONLYOFFICE editors and can be added to ONLYOFFICE instances manually.

                            +

                            The plugin is compatible with the self-hosted version of ONLYOFFICE editors and can be added to ONLYOFFICE instances manually using the Plugin Manager.

                            Installation

                            To install the Zoom plugin,

                            diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/animation_pane.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/animation_pane.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..fe2ccef938 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/animation_pane.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/colorscheme.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/colorscheme.png index 19f4c38e9d..0094221e9b 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/colorscheme.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/colorscheme.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/animationtab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/animationtab.png index 0deb8e566f..55b36af466 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/animationtab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/animationtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/collaborationtab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/collaborationtab.png index aa292b314b..2d44e84f97 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/collaborationtab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/collaborationtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_animationtab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_animationtab.png index 06e658788b..ea07ca7cf6 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_animationtab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_animationtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_collaborationtab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_collaborationtab.png index 1331d1c73f..d1bca6f148 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_collaborationtab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_collaborationtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_drawtab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_drawtab.png index c27108505f..5b1fdf3010 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_drawtab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_drawtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png index b02d4090e6..f63fa48659 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png index 6a71c69d38..77baafa913 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png index 990a1f5ad5..838ae6115f 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png index 0ffef6c693..83a4c55c86 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png index ea61f3d371..825b99b28a 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_protectiontab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_protectiontab.png index e6527acddd..13557046bf 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_protectiontab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_protectiontab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_transitionstab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_transitionstab.png index b888aff0b3..5f10be6a83 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_transitionstab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_transitionstab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_viewtab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_viewtab.png index 6e91ef55db..7f24325580 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_viewtab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_viewtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/drawtab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/drawtab.png index 0fd57f2556..dfe103e6f1 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/drawtab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/drawtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/editorwindow.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/editorwindow.png index 7d9d76c447..b374bca868 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/editorwindow.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/editorwindow.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/filetab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/filetab.png index c9c8107507..151cc9cac5 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/filetab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/filetab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/hometab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/hometab.png index 4ca130d870..5955655499 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/hometab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/hometab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/inserttab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/inserttab.png index 0d7c02af00..cdff62966d 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/inserttab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/inserttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/pluginstab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/pluginstab.png index 4615f9f473..5294a527d7 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/pluginstab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/pluginstab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/transitionstab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/transitionstab.png index 2dad8bbb07..de4d3ca16f 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/transitionstab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/transitionstab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/viewtab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/viewtab.png index 8bfce7dea9..9c226e8ae4 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/viewtab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/viewtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/moreeffects.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/moreeffects.png index 4decb1fbb7..3daf9c0962 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/moreeffects.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/moreeffects.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/palette.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/palette.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..556757867d Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/palette.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/pixabay_results.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/pixabay_results.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..766f03a090 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/pixabay_results.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/shapesettingstab.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/shapesettingstab.png index 4d2dd7fe24..e53d1355e5 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/shapesettingstab.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/shapesettingstab.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/slidebackground.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/slidebackground.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..92dd2c2fc8 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/slidebackground.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/slidemaster.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/slidemaster.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..5141c39c73 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/slidemaster.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/spellchecking_language.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/spellchecking_language.png index ff704d56af..ce4fb9a6c5 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/spellchecking_language.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/spellchecking_language.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/versionhistory.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/versionhistory.png index b0012b0845..5baea726bb 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/versionhistory.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/images/versionhistory.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/search/indexes.js b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/search/indexes.js index 57c1cf6889..519a607e11 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/search/indexes.js +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/en/search/indexes.js @@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm", "title": "Advanced Settings of the Presentation Editor", - "body": "The Presentation Editor allows you to change its advanced settings. To access them, open the File tab on the top toolbar and select the Advanced Settings option. The advanced settings are grouped as follows: Editing and saving Autosave is used in the online version to turn on/off automatic saving of changes you make while editing. Autorecover is used in the desktop version to turn on/off the option that allows you to automatically recover presentations if the program closes unexpectedly. Show the Paste Options button when the content is pasted. The corresponding icon will appear when you paste content in the presentation. Collaboration The Co-editing mode subsection allows you to set the preferable mode for seeing changes made to the presentation when working in collaboration. Fast (by default). The users who take part in the presentation co-editing will see the changes in real time once they are made by other users. Strict. All the changes made by co-editors will be shown only after you click the Save icon that will notify you about new changes. Show changes from other users. This feature allows to see changes made by other users in the presentation opened for viewing only in the Live Viewer mode. Proofing The Spell Checking option is used to turn on/off the spell checking. Ignore words in UPPERCASE. Words typed in capital letters are ignored during the spell checking. Ignore words with numbers. Words with numbers in them are ignored during the spell checking. The AutoCorrect options menu allows you to access the autocorrect settings such as replacing text as you type, recognizing functions, automatic formatting etc. Workspace The Turn on screen reader support option is used to enable support of screen reader software. The Alignment Guides option is used to turn on/off alignment guides that appear when you move objects. It allows for a more precise object positioning on the slide. The Use Alt key to navigate the user interface using the keyboard option is used to enable using the Alt / Optionkey in keyboard shortcuts. Show the Quick Print button in the editor header is used in the desktop version to enable quick printing via the corresponding button at the top toolbar. The file will be printed on the last selected or default printer. The RTL Interface (Beta) option is used to change the direction in which elements of the interface are displayed. The Interface theme option is used to change the color scheme of the editor’s interface. The Same as system option makes the editor follow the interface theme of your system. The Light color scheme incorporates standard blue, white, and light gray colors with less contrast in UI elements suitable for working during daytime. The Classic Light color scheme incorporates standard blue, white, and light gray colors. The Dark color scheme incorporates black, dark gray, and light gray colors suitable for working during nighttime. The Contrast Dark color scheme incorporates black, dark gray, and white colors with more contrast in UI elements highlighting the working area of the file. Note: Apart from the available Light, Classic Light, Dark, and Contrast Dark interface themes, ONLYOFFICE editors can now be customized with your own color theme. Please follow these instructions to learn how you can do that. The Unit of Measurement option is used to specify what units are used on the rulers and in properties of objects when setting such parameters as width, height, spacing, margins etc. The available units are Centimeter, Point, and Inch. The Default Zoom Value option is used to set the default zoom value, selecting it in the list of available options from 50% to 500%. You can also choose the Fit to Page, Fit to Width, or Last Used option. The Last Used option refers to the last set scaling during the current session. The Font Hinting option is used to select how fonts are displayed in the Presentation Editor. Choose As Windows if you like the way fonts are usually displayed on Windows, i.e. using Windows font hinting. Choose As OS X if you like the way fonts are usually displayed on a Mac, i.e. without any font hinting at all. Choose Native if you want your text to be displayed with the hinting embedded into font files. Default cache mode - used to select the cache mode for the font characters. It’s not recommended to switch it without any reason. It can be helpful in some cases only, for example, when the Google Chrome browser has problems with the enabled hardware acceleration. The Presentation Editor has two cache modes: In the first cache mode, each letter is cached as a separate picture. In the second cache mode, a picture of a certain size is selected where letters are placed dynamically and a mechanism of allocating/removing memory in this picture is also implemented. If there is not enough memory, a second picture is created, etc. The Default cache mode setting applies two above mentioned cache modes separately for different browsers: When the Default cache mode setting is enabled, Internet Explorer (v. 9, 10, 11) uses the second cache mode, other browsers use the first cache mode. When the Default cache mode setting is disabled, Internet Explorer (v. 9, 10, 11) uses the first cache mode, other browsers use the second cache mode. The Macros Settings option is used to set macros display with a notification. Choose Disable All to disable all macros within the presentation. Choose Show Notification to receive notifications about macros within the presentation. Choose Enable All to automatically run all macros within the presentation. To save the changes you made, click the Apply button." + "body": "The Presentation Editor allows you to change its advanced settings. To access them, open the File tab on the top toolbar and select the Advanced Settings option. The advanced settings are grouped as follows: Editing and saving Autosave is used in the online version to turn on/off automatic saving of changes you make while editing. Autorecover is used in the desktop version to turn on/off the option that allows you to automatically recover presentations if the program closes unexpectedly. Show the Paste Options button when the content is pasted. The corresponding icon will appear when you paste content in the presentation. Collaboration The Co-editing mode subsection allows you to set the preferable mode for seeing changes made to the presentation when working in collaboration. Fast (by default). The users who take part in the presentation co-editing will see the changes in real time once they are made by other users. Strict. All the changes made by co-editors will be shown only after you click the Save icon that will notify you about new changes. Show changes from other users. This feature allows seeing changes made by other users in the presentation opened for viewing only in the Live Viewer mode. Proofing The Spell Checking option is used to turn on/off the spell checking. Ignore words in UPPERCASE. Words typed in capital letters are ignored during the spell checking. Ignore words with numbers. Words with numbers in them are ignored during the spell checking. The AutoCorrect options menu allows you to access the autocorrect settings such as replacing text as you type, recognizing functions, automatic formatting etc. Appearance The Interface theme option is used to change the color scheme of the editor’s interface. The Same as system option makes the editor follow the interface theme of your system. The Light color scheme incorporates standard blue, white, and light gray colors with less contrast in UI elements suitable for working during daytime. The Classic Light color scheme incorporates standard blue, white, and light gray colors. The Dark color scheme incorporates black, dark gray, and light gray colors suitable for working during nighttime. The Contrast Dark color scheme incorporates black, dark gray, and white colors with more contrast in UI elements highlighting the working area of the file. The Gray color scheme incorporates lighter gray color and appears as a uniformly light color scheme. The Turn on document dark mode option is used to make the working area darker when the editor is set to Dark or Contrast Dark interface theme. Check the Turn on document dark mode box to enable it. Note: Apart from the available Light, Classic Light, Dark, Contrast Dark, and Gray interface themes, ONLYOFFICE editors can now be customized with your own color theme. Please follow these instructions to learn how you can do that. Tab style - choose whether you want the currently selected tab to be filled in with a lighter color with the Fill option or to be underlined with the Line option. Use toolbar color as tabs background - the color of the toolbar will be used as tabs background. The toolbar color depends on the currently selected interface theme. Workspace The Turn on screen reader support option is used to enable support of screen reader software. The Alignment guides option is used to turn on/off alignment guides that appear when you move objects. It allows for a more precise object positioning on the slide. The Use Alt key to navigate the user interface using the keyboard option is used to enable using the Alt / Option key in keyboard shortcuts. Show the Quick Print button in the editor header is used in the desktop version to enable quick printing via the corresponding button at the top toolbar. The file will be printed on the last selected or default printer. The RTL Interface (Beta) option is used to change the direction in which elements of the interface are displayed. This option is available only for interface languages that require RTL. The Customize quick access button is used to choose which buttons shall be available in the top toolbar, i.e., Save, Print, Undo, and Redo. The Unit of measurement option is used to specify what units are used on the rulers and in properties of objects when setting such parameters as width, height, spacing, margins etc. The available units are Centimeter, Point, and Inch. The Default zoom value option is used to set the default zoom value, selecting it in the list of available options from 50% to 500%. You can also choose the Fit to Page, Fit to Width, or Last Used option. The Last used option refers to the last set scaling value during the current session. The Font hinting option is used to select how fonts are displayed in the Presentation Editor. Choose As Windows if you like the way fonts are usually displayed on Windows, i.e. using Windows font hinting. Choose As OS X if you like the way fonts are usually displayed on a Mac, i.e. without any font hinting at all. Choose Native if you want your text to be displayed with the hinting embedded into font files. Default cache mode - used to select the cache mode for the font characters. It’s not recommended to switch it without any reason. It can be helpful in some cases only, for example, when the Google Chrome browser has problems with the enabled hardware acceleration. The Presentation Editor has two cache modes: In the first cache mode, each letter is cached as a separate picture. In the second cache mode, a picture of a certain size is selected where letters are placed dynamically and a mechanism of allocating/removing memory in this picture is also implemented. If there is not enough memory, a second picture is created, etc. The Default cache mode setting applies two above-mentioned cache modes separately for different browsers: When the Default cache mode setting is enabled, Internet Explorer (v. 9, 10, 11) uses the second cache mode, other browsers use the first cache mode. When the Default cache mode setting is disabled, Internet Explorer (v. 9, 10, 11) uses the first cache mode, other browsers use the second cache mode. The Macros settings option is used to set macros display with a notification. Choose Disable All to disable all macros within the presentation. Choose Show notification to receive notifications about macros within the presentation. Choose Enable all to automatically run all macros within the presentation. The changes are saved as you go." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm", @@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm", "title": "Keyboard Shortcuts", - "body": "Keyboard Shortcuts for Key Tips Use keyboard shortcuts for a faster and easier access to the features of the Presentation Editor without using a mouse. Press Alt (Option for macOS) key to turn on all key tips for the editor header, the top toolbar, the right and left sidebars and the status bar. Press the letter that corresponds to the item you wish to use. The additional key tips may appear depending on the key you press. The first key tips hide when additional key tips appear. For example, to access the Insert tab, press Alt (Option for macOS) to see all primary key tips. Press letter I to access the Insert tab and you will see all the available shortcuts for this tab. Then press the letter that corresponds to the item you wish to configure. Press Alt (Option for macOS) to hide all key tips, or press Escape to go back to the previous group of key tips. Find the most common keyboard shortcuts in the list below. Please note: for macOS, some shortcuts contain the Home, End, Page Up and Page Down keys which are only available on the extended keyboard. If you don't have these keys, use the keyboard shortcuts specified above (i.e. use ^ Ctrl/⌘ Cmd+← or Fn+← instead of Home, ^ Ctrl/⌘ Cmd+→ or Fn+→ instead of End, Fn+↑ instead of Page Up, Fn+↓ instead of Page Down). Windows/Linux Mac OS Working with Presentation Open 'File' panel Alt+F ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+F Open the File panel to save, download, print the current presentation, view its info, create a new presentation or open an existing one, access the Presentation Editor help or advanced settings. Open 'Find' dialog window Ctrl+F ^ Ctrl+F, ⌘ Cmd+F Open the Find dialog window to start searching for a character/word/phrase in the currently edited presentation. Open 'Find and Replace' menu (panel) with replacement field Ctrl+H ^ Ctrl+H Open the Find and Replace menu (panel) with the replacement field to replace one or more occurrences of the found characters. Open 'Comments' panel Ctrl+⇧ Shift+H ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+H, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+H Open the Comments panel to add your own comment or reply to comments from other users. Open comment field Alt+H ⌘ Cmd+⌥ Option+A Open a data entry field where you can add the text of your comment. Open 'Chat' panel (Online Editors) Alt+Q ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+Q Open the Chat panel in the Online Editors and send a message. Save presentation Ctrl+S ^ Ctrl+S, ⌘ Cmd+S Save all the changes to the presentation currently edited with the Presentation Editor. The active file will be saved under its current name, in the same location and file format. Print presentation Ctrl+P ^ Ctrl+P, ⌘ Cmd+P Print the presentation with one of the available printers or save it to a file. Download As... Ctrl+⇧ Shift+S ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+S, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+S Open the Download as... panel to save the currently edited presentation to the hard disk drive of your computer in one of the supported formats: PPTX, PPSX, PDF, ODP, POTX, PDF/A, OTP, PNG, JPG. Full screen (Online Editors) F11 Switch to the full screen view in the Online Editors to fit the Presentation Editor into your screen. Help menu F1 Fn+F1 Open the Presentation Editor Help menu. Open existing file Ctrl+O ⌘ Cmd+O Open the standard dialog box that allows selecting an existing file. If you select the file in this dialog box and click Open, the file will be opened in a new tab or window of Desktop Editors. Switch to the next tab Ctrl+↹ Tab ^ Ctrl+↹ Tab Switch to the next file tab in Desktop Editors or browser tab in Online Editors. Switch to the previous tab Ctrl+Shift+↹ Tab ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Switch to the previous file tab in Desktop Editors or browser tab in Online Editors. Close file Ctrl+W, Ctrl+F4 ⌘ Cmd+W Close the current presentation window. Element contextual menu ⇧ Shift+F10 ⇧ Shift+Fn+F10 Open the selected element contextual menu. Close menu or modal window, reset modes, etc. Esc Esc Close a menu or modal window. Reset adding shapes mode. Remove the cursor from the shape content. Remove selection step by step (e.g., if the content of a shape within a group is selected, the cursor will be removed from the content first, then from the shape, then from the group). Deselect the copied format. Reset text drag-n-drop. Reset marker selection mode. Reset the ‘Zoom’ parameter Ctrl+0 ^ Ctrl+0 or ⌘ Cmd+0 Reset the ‘Zoom’ parameter of the current presentation to the default 'Fit to slide' value. Navigation The first slide Home Fn+← Home Go to the first slide of the currently edited presentation/first thumbnail in the thumbnails list. The last slide End Fn+→ End Go to the last slide of the currently edited presentation/last thumbnail in the thumbnails list. Next slide Page Down, ↓, → ↓, Fn+↓ ↓, Page Down Go to the next slide of the currently edited presentation/next thumbnail in the thumbnails list. Previous slide Page Up, ↑, ← ↑, Fn+↑ ↑, Page Up Go to the previous slide of the currently edited presentation/previous thumbnail in the thumbnails list. Zoom In Ctrl++ ^ Ctrl+=, ⌘ Cmd+= Zoom in the currently edited presentation. Zoom Out Ctrl+- ^ Ctrl+-, ⌘ Cmd+- Zoom out the currently edited presentation. Navigate between controls in modal dialogues ↹ Tab/⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ↹ Tab/⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Navigate between controls to give focus to the next or previous control in modal dialogues. Performing Actions on Slides New slide Ctrl+M, Enter ^ Ctrl+M, ⌘ Cmd+M, Return Create a new slide and add it after the selected one in the list. The Ctrl+M shortcut is also used to create the first slide in the presentation which does not contain any slides. Remove slide Delete, Backspace Delete, Fn+Delete Remove the currently selected slide in the list or several selected slides. Duplicate slide Ctrl+D ⌘ Cmd+D, ^ Ctrl+D Duplicate the selected slide in the list. Move slide up Ctrl+↑ ⌘ Cmd+↑ Move the selected slide or several selected slides above the previous one in the list (when the focus is on thumbnails). Move slide down Ctrl+↓ ⌘ Cmd+↓ Move the selected slide or several selected slides below the following one in the list (when the focus is on thumbnails). Move slide to beginning Ctrl+⇧ Shift+↑, Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Page Up ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+↑, ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+↑ ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Page Up, ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Page Up Move the selected slide or several slides to the very first position in the list (when the focus is on thumbnails). Move slide to end Ctrl+⇧ Shift+↓, Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Page Down ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+↓, ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+↓ ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Page Down, ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Page Down Move the selected slide or several slides to the very last position in the list (when the focus is on thumbnails). Performing Actions on Objects Working with shapes ↵ Enter ↵ Return When the shape is selected, if it does not contain content, create content and move the cursor to the beginning of the line. If the content is empty, move the cursor to it, otherwise select the entire content. Working with charts ↵ Enter ↵ Return When the chart title is selected, if the title is empty, move the cursor to the beginning of the line, otherwise select the text. Create a copy when dragging Ctrl ^ Ctrl Select an object and hold down the specified key when dragging the object to create the copy of the object in the location where it was moved. Create a copy Ctrl+D ^ Ctrl+D, ⌘ Cmd+D Select an object and press the specified keyboard shortcut to create the copy of the object next to the selected object. Group Ctrl+G ⌘ Cmd+G, ^ Ctrl+G Group the selected objects. Ungroup Ctrl+⇧ Shift+G ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+G, ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+G Ungroup the selected group of objects. Move focus to the next object ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Move focus to the next object after the currently selected one. Move focus to the previous object ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Move focus to the previous object before the currently selected one. Change angle of line/arrow when drawing ⇧ Shift + drag (when drawing lines/arrows) ⇧ Shift + drag (when drawing lines/arrows) Hold down the Shift key while drawing the line/arrow and rotate the spout of the arrow/end of the line to change the angle of the line/arrow when drawing it. The line/arrow will be rotated exactly 45 degrees. Movement pixel by pixel Ctrl+← → ↑ ↓ ⌘ Cmd+← → ↑ ↓ Hold down the specified key and use the keybord arrows to move the selected object to the left, right, up, or down by one pixel at a time. Move shape by a big step ← → ↑ ↓ ← → ↑ ↓ Use the keybord arrows to move the selected object by a big step to the left, right, up, or down. Modifying Objects Constrain movement ⇧ Shift + drag ⇧ Shift + drag Constrain the movement of the selected object horizontally or vertically. Set 15-degree-rotation ⇧ Shift + drag (when rotating) ⇧ Shift + drag (when rotating) Constrain the rotation angle to 15 degree increments. Maintain proportions ⇧ Shift + drag (when resizing) ⇧ Shift + drag (when resizing) Maintain the proportions of the selected object when resizing. Working with Tables Move to the next cell in a row ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Go to the next cell in a table row. Move to the previous cell in a row ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Go to the previous cell in a table row. Move to the next row ↓ ↓ Go to the next row in a table. Move to the previous row ↑ ↑ Go to the previous row in a table. Start new paragraph ↵ Enter ↵ Return Start a new paragraph within a cell. If cells are selected, delete their contents. If the table is selected, move the cursor to the first cell. If it is empty, move the cursor to the beginning, otherwise select the contents of the cell. Add new row ↹ Tab in the lower right table cell. ↹ Tab in the lower right table cell. Add a new row at the bottom of the table. Previewing Presentation Start a presentation Ctrl+F5 ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+↵ Return Start a presentation from the beginning. Navigate forward ↵ Enter, Page Down, →, ↓, ␣ Spacebar ↵ Return, Fn+↓, →, ↓, ␣ Spacebar ↵ Return, Page Down, →, ↓, ␣ Spacebar Display the next transition effect or advance to the next slide. Navigate backward Page Up, ←, ↑ Fn+↑, ←, ↑ Page Up, ←, ↑ Display the previous transition effect or return to the previous slide. Navigate to the first slide Home Fn+← Home Navigate to the first slide. Navigate to the last slide End Fn+→ End Navigate to the last slide. Navigate to the specified slide slide number+Enter slide number+↵ Return Navigate to the specified slide. Close preview Esc Esc End a presentation. For the web version, the first pressing of Esc is an exit from the full-screen mode of a browser, the second one is an exit from the demonstration mode. Undo and Redo Undo Ctrl+Z ^ Ctrl+Z, ⌘ Cmd+Z Reverse the latest performed action. Redo Ctrl+Y ^ Ctrl+Y, ⌘ Cmd+Y Repeat the latest undone action. Cut, Copy, and Paste Cut Ctrl+X, ⇧ Shift+Delete ⌘ Cmd+X Cut the selected object/text/slide in the slide list and send it to the computer clipboard memory. The cut object can be later inserted to another place in the same presentation. Copy Ctrl+C, Ctrl+Insert ⌘ Cmd+C Send the selected object/text/slide in the slide list to the computer clipboard memory. The copied object can be later inserted to another place in the same presentation. Paste Ctrl+V, ⇧ Shift+Insert ⌘ Cmd+V Insert the previously copied object/text/slide in the slide list from the computer clipboard memory to the current cursor position. The object can be previously copied from the same presentation, from another presentation, from another editor, or from some other program. Paste text without style formatting Ctrl+⇧ Shift+V ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+V Insert the previously copied text fragment from the computer clipboard memory to the current cursor position without preserving its original formatting. The text can be previously copied from the same document, from another document, or from some other program. Copy style Alt+Ctrl+C ⌘ Cmd+⌥ Option+C, ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+C Copy the formatting from the selected fragment of the currently edited text. The copied formatting can be later applied to another text fragment in the same presentation. Apply style Alt+Ctrl+V ⌘ Cmd+⌥ Option+V, ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+V Apply the previously copied formatting to the text in the currently edited text box. Paste Special options 1 Use destination theme Ctrl then H ^ Ctrl then H Apply the formatting specified by the theme of the current presentation. Keep source formatting Ctrl then K ^ Ctrl then K Keep the source formatting of the copied text. Paste as picture Ctrl then U ^ Ctrl then U Paste the text as an image so that it cannot be edited. Keep text only Ctrl then T ^ Ctrl then T Paste the text without its original formatting. Working with Hyperlinks Insert hyperlink Ctrl+K ^ Ctrl+K, ⌘ Cmd+K Insert a hyperlink which can be used to go to a web address or to a certain slide in the presentation. Visit hyperlink Enter Return Visit a hyperlink (with the cursor in the hyperlink). Selecting with the Mouse Add to the selected fragment ⇧ Shift ⇧ Shift Start the selection, hold down the ⇧ Shift key and click where you need to end the selection. Selecting using the Keyboard Select all Ctrl+A ^ Ctrl+A, ⌘ Cmd+A Select all the slides (in the slides list) or all the objects within the slide (in the slide editing area) or all the text (within the text box) - depending on where the mouse cursor is located. Add the next slide in the slide list to the selection Shift+Page Down, ⇧ Shift+↓ ⇧ Shift+↓, ⇧ Shift+Fn+↓ ⇧ Shift+↓, ⇧ Shift+Page Down Add the next slide in the slide list to the selection (when the focus is on thumbnails). Add the previous slide in the slide list to the selection Shift+Page Up, ⇧ Shift+↑ ⇧ Shift+↑, ⇧ Shift+Fn+↑ ⇧ Shift+↑, ⇧ Shift+Page Up Add the previous slide in the slide list to the selection (when the focus is on thumbnails). Select to the first slide Shift+Home ⇧ Shift+Fn+← ⇧ Shift+Home Select slides to the first slide starting from the current slide where the focus is located in the thumbnails list. Select to the last slide Shift+End ⇧ Shift+Fn+→ ⇧ Shift+End Select slides to the last slide starting from the current slide where the focus is located in the thumbnails list. Select text from cursor to beginning of line ⇧ Shift+Home ⇧ Shift+Fn+← ⇧ Shift+Home Select a text fragment from the cursor to the beginning of the current line. Select text from cursor to end of line ⇧ Shift+End ⇧ Shift+Fn+→ ⇧ Shift+End Select a text fragment from the cursor to the end of the current line. Select one character to the right ⇧ Shift+→ ⇧ Shift+→ Select one character to the right of the cursor position. Select one character to the left ⇧ Shift+← ⇧ Shift+← Select one character to the left of the cursor position. Select to the end of a word Ctrl+⇧ Shift+→ ⇧ Shift+⌥ Option+→ Select a text fragment from the cursor to the end of a word. Select to the beginning of a word Ctrl+⇧ Shift+← ⇧ Shift+⌥ Option+← Select a text fragment from the cursor to the beginning of a word. Select one line up ⇧ Shift+↑ ⇧ Shift+↑ Select one line up (with the cursor at the beginning of a line). Select one line down ⇧ Shift+↓ ⇧ Shift+↓ Select one line down (with the cursor at the end of a line). Deselect all ⇧ Shift+Esc Esc, ⇧ Shift+Esc Deselect all the selection. Text Styling Nonprinting characters Ctrl+⇧ Shift+8 ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+8, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+8 Show or hide the display of nonprinting characters. Bold Ctrl+B ^ Ctrl+B, ⌘ Cmd+B Make the font of the selected text fragment bold giving it a heavier appearance. Italic Ctrl+I ⌘ Cmd+I Make the font of the selected text fragment slightly slanted to the right. Underline Ctrl+U ^ Ctrl+U, ⌘ Cmd+U Make the selected text fragment underlined with a line going under the letters. Strikeout Ctrl+5 ^ Ctrl+5, ⌘ Cmd+5 Make the selected text fragment struck out with a line going through the letters. Subscript Ctrl+. ^ Ctrl+., ⌘ Cmd+. Make the selected text fragment smaller placing it to the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas. Superscript Ctrl+, ^ Ctrl+,, ⌘ Cmd+, Make the selected text fragment smaller placing it to the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions. Bulleted list Ctrl+⇧ Shift+L ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+L, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+L Create an unordered bulleted list from the selected text fragment or start a new one. Clear formatting Ctrl+␣ Spacebar ^ Ctrl+Fn+␣ Spacebar, ⌘ Cmd+Fn+␣ Spacebar Clear formatting of the selected text fragment. Increase font Ctrl+] ^ Ctrl+], ⌘ Cmd+] Increase the size of the font for the selected text fragment 1 point. Decrease font Ctrl+[ ^ Ctrl+[, ⌘ Cmd+[ Decrease the size of the font for the selected text fragment 1 point. Align center Ctrl+E ^ Ctrl+E, ⌘ Cmd+E Center the text between the left and the right edges. Align justified Ctrl+J ^ Ctrl+J, ⌘ Cmd+J Justify the text in the paragraph adding additional space between words so that the left and the right text edges will be aligned with the paragraph margins. Align right Ctrl+R ^ Ctrl+R, ⌘ Cmd+R Align right with the text lined up on the right side of the text box, the left side remains unaligned. Align left Ctrl+L ^ Ctrl+L, ⌘ Cmd+L Align left with the text lined up on the left side of the text box, the right side remains unaligned. Increase left indent Ctrl+M ^ Ctrl+M, ⌘ Cmd+M Increase the paragraph left indent by one tabulation position. Decrease left indent Ctrl+⇧ Shift+M ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+M, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+M Decrease the paragraph left indent by one tabulation position. Delete one character to the left ← Backspace Delete Delete one character/selection/graphical object to the left of the cursor. Delete one character to the right Delete Fn+Delete Delete one character/selection/graphical object to the right of the cursor. Delete word/selection/graphical object to the left of cursor Ctrl+← Backspace ⌥ Option+Delete Delete one word/selection/graphical object to the left of the cursor. Delete word/selection/graphical object to the right of cursor Ctrl+Delete Fn+⌥ Option+Delete Delete one word/selection/graphical object to the right of the cursor. Increase list item level ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Add a level to the numbering of a paragrapf (with the cursor at the beginning of a line). Decrease list item level ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Remove a level from the numbering of a paragrapf (with the cursor at the beginning of a line). Add tab character to paragraph ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Add the tab character to a paragraph. Add new placeholder to equation argument Shift+Enter, Enter ⇧ Shift+Return, Return Add a new placeholder to the equation argument. Add line break to text Shift+Enter ⇧ Shift+Return Add a line break to the text. Add paragraph Enter Return Add a new paragraph or add a new line to the Title/Subtitle placeholder. Inserting special characters Insert the Euro sign Ctrl+Alt+E ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+E, ⌘ Cmd+⌥ Option+E Insert the Euro sign (€) at the current cursor position. Insert an em dash ⌥ Option+⇧ Shift+- Insert an em dash ‘—’ at the current cursor position. Insert an en dash ⌥ Option+- Insert an en dash ‘-’ at the current cursor position. Create nonbreaking space Ctrl+⇧ Shift+␣ Spacebar ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Fn+␣ Spacebar, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Fn+␣ Spacebar Create a space between characters which cannot be used to start a new line. Work with keyboard supporting the ability to insert Unicode symbols ⌥ Option+Q, ⌥ Option+F, ⇧ Shift+⌥ Option+7, and others When using the ⌥ Option+keyboard symbol shortcuts, for the keyboards supporting the ability to insert Unicode symbols, the keyboard symbols are added. The examples are listed below. With the English ABC layout, the ⌥ Option+Q shortcut inserts the \"œ\" symbol, the ⌥ Option+F shortcut inserts the “ƒ” function symbol. With the US International w/o deadkeys layout, the ⌥ Option+Q shortcut inserts the “ä” symbol. With the Swiss-german layout, the ⇧ Shift+⌥ Option+7 shortcut inserts the \"\\” symbol. Moving around in text Move one character to the left/right or one line up/down ← → ↑ ↓ ← → ↑ ↓ Move the cursor one character to the left/right or one line up/down. Move to the beginning of a word or one word to the left Ctrl+← ⌥ Option+← Move the cursor to the beginning of a word or one word to the left. Move one word to the right Ctrl+→ ⌥ Option+→ Move the cursor one word to the right. Move to next placeholder or create new slide Ctrl+↵ Enter ^ Ctrl+↵ Return, ⌘ Cmd+↵ Return Move to the next title or body text placeholder. If it is the last placeholder on a slide, this will insert a new slide with the same slide layout as the original slide Jump to the beginning of the line Home ⌘ Cmd+← Home Put the cursor to the beginning of the currently edited line. Jump to the end of the line End ⌘ Cmd+→ End Put the cursor to the end of the currently edited line. Jump to the beginning of the content Ctrl+Home ^ Ctrl+Fn+← ^ Ctrl+Home Put the cursor to the beginning of the currently edited text box or to the upper left cell of a table. Jump to the end of the content Ctrl+End ^ Ctrl+Fn+→ ^ Ctrl+End Put the cursor to the end of the currently edited text box or to the lower right cell of a table. Paste the copied data using Ctrl+V on Windows or Cmd+V on macOS. After pasting the copied data, use the Ctrl key to open the Paste Special menu, then press the letter key which corresponds to the necessary option." + "body": "Keyboard Shortcuts for Key Tips Use keyboard shortcuts for a faster and easier access to the features of the Presentation Editor without using a mouse. Press Alt (Option for macOS) key to turn on all key tips for the editor header, the top toolbar, the right and left sidebars and the status bar. Press the letter that corresponds to the item you wish to use. The additional key tips may appear depending on the key you press. The first key tips hide when additional key tips appear. For example, to access the Insert tab, press Alt (Option for macOS) to see all primary key tips. Press letter I to access the Insert tab and you will see all the available shortcuts for this tab. Then press the letter that corresponds to the item you wish to configure. Press Alt (Option for macOS) to hide all key tips, or press Escape to go back to the previous group of key tips. Find the most common keyboard shortcuts in the list below. Please note: for macOS, some shortcuts contain the Home, End, Page Up and Page Down keys which are only available on the extended keyboard. If you don't have these keys, use the keyboard shortcuts specified above (i.e. use ^ Ctrl/⌘ Cmd+← or Fn+← instead of Home, ^ Ctrl/⌘ Cmd+→ or Fn+→ instead of End, Fn+↑ instead of Page Up, Fn+↓ instead of Page Down). Windows/Linux Mac OS Working with Presentation Open 'File' panel Alt+F ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+F Open the File panel to save, download, print the current presentation, view its info, create a new presentation or open an existing one, access the Presentation Editor help or advanced settings. Open 'Find' dialog window Ctrl+F ^ Ctrl+F, ⌘ Cmd+F Open the Find dialog window to start searching for a character/word/phrase in the currently edited presentation. Open 'Find and Replace' menu (panel) with replacement field Ctrl+H ^ Ctrl+H Open the Find and Replace menu (panel) with the replacement field to replace one or more occurrences of the found characters. Open 'Comments' panel Ctrl+⇧ Shift+H ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+H, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+H Open the Comments panel to add your own comment or reply to comments from other users. Open comment field Alt+H ⌘ Cmd+⌥ Option+A Open a data entry field where you can add the text of your comment. Open 'Chat' panel (Online Editors) Alt+Q ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+Q Open the Chat panel in the Online Editors and send a message. Save presentation Ctrl+S ^ Ctrl+S, ⌘ Cmd+S Save all the changes to the presentation currently edited with the Presentation Editor. The active file will be saved under its current name, in the same location and file format. Print presentation Ctrl+P ^ Ctrl+P, ⌘ Cmd+P Print the presentation with one of the available printers or save it to a file. Download As... Ctrl+⇧ Shift+S ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+S, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+S Open the Download as... panel to save the currently edited presentation to the hard disk drive of your computer in one of the supported formats: PPTX, PPSX, PDF, ODP, POTX, PDF/A, OTP, PNG, JPG. Full screen (Online Editors) F11 Switch to the full screen view in the Online Editors to fit the Presentation Editor into your screen. Help menu F1 Fn+F1 Open the Presentation Editor Help menu. Open existing file Ctrl+O ⌘ Cmd+O Open the standard dialog box that allows selecting an existing file. If you select the file in this dialog box and click Open, the file will be opened in a new tab or window of Desktop Editors. Switch to the next tab Ctrl+↹ Tab ^ Ctrl+↹ Tab Switch to the next file tab in Desktop Editors or browser tab in Online Editors. Switch to the previous tab Ctrl+Shift+↹ Tab ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Switch to the previous file tab in Desktop Editors or browser tab in Online Editors. Close file Ctrl+W, Ctrl+F4 ⌘ Cmd+W Close the current presentation window. Element contextual menu ⇧ Shift+F10 ⇧ Shift+Fn+F10 Open the selected element contextual menu. Close menu or modal window, reset modes, etc. Esc Esc Close a menu or modal window. Reset adding shapes mode. Remove the cursor from the shape content. Remove selection step by step (e.g., if the content of a shape within a group is selected, the cursor will be removed from the content first, then from the shape, then from the group). Deselect the copied format. Reset text drag-n-drop. Reset marker selection mode. Reset the ‘Zoom’ parameter Ctrl+0 ^ Ctrl+0 or ⌘ Cmd+0 Reset the ‘Zoom’ parameter of the current presentation to the default 'Fit to slide' value. Navigation The first slide Home Fn+← Home Go to the first slide of the currently edited presentation/first thumbnail in the thumbnails list. The last slide End Fn+→ End Go to the last slide of the currently edited presentation/last thumbnail in the thumbnails list. Next slide Page Down, ↓, → ↓, Fn+↓ ↓, Page Down Go to the next slide of the currently edited presentation/next thumbnail in the thumbnails list. Previous slide Page Up, ↑, ← ↑, Fn+↑ ↑, Page Up Go to the previous slide of the currently edited presentation/previous thumbnail in the thumbnails list. Zoom In Ctrl++ ^ Ctrl+=, ⌘ Cmd+= Zoom in the currently edited presentation. Zoom Out Ctrl+- ^ Ctrl+-, ⌘ Cmd+- Zoom out the currently edited presentation. Navigate between controls in modal dialogues ↹ Tab/⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ↹ Tab/⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Navigate between controls to give focus to the next or previous control in modal dialogues. Performing Actions on Slides New slide Ctrl+M, Enter ^ Ctrl+M, ⌘ Cmd+M, Return Create a new slide and add it after the selected one in the list. The Ctrl+M shortcut is also used to create the first slide in the presentation which does not contain any slides. Remove slide Delete, Backspace Delete, Fn+Delete Remove the currently selected slide in the list or several selected slides. Duplicate slide Ctrl+D ⌘ Cmd+D, ^ Ctrl+D Duplicate the selected slide in the list. Move slide up Ctrl+↑ ⌘ Cmd+↑ Move the selected slide or several selected slides above the previous one in the list (when the focus is on thumbnails). Move slide down Ctrl+↓ ⌘ Cmd+↓ Move the selected slide or several selected slides below the following one in the list (when the focus is on thumbnails). Move slide to beginning Ctrl+⇧ Shift+↑, Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Page Up ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+↑, ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+↑ ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Page Up, ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Page Up Move the selected slide or several slides to the very first position in the list (when the focus is on thumbnails). Move slide to end Ctrl+⇧ Shift+↓, Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Page Down ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+↓, ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+↓ ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Page Down, ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Page Down Move the selected slide or several slides to the very last position in the list (when the focus is on thumbnails). Performing Actions on Objects Working with shapes ↵ Enter ↵ Return When the shape is selected, if it does not contain content, create content and move the cursor to the beginning of the line. If the content is empty, move the cursor to it, otherwise select the entire content. Working with charts ↵ Enter ↵ Return When the chart title is selected, if the title is empty, move the cursor to the beginning of the line, otherwise select the text. Create a copy when dragging Ctrl ^ Ctrl Select an object and hold down the specified key when dragging the object to create the copy of the object in the location where it was moved. Create a copy Ctrl+D ^ Ctrl+D, ⌘ Cmd+D Select an object and press the specified keyboard shortcut to create the copy of the object next to the selected object. Group Ctrl+G ⌘ Cmd+G, ^ Ctrl+G Group the selected objects. Ungroup Ctrl+⇧ Shift+G ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+G, ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+G Ungroup the selected group of objects. Move focus to the next object ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Move focus to the next object after the currently selected one. Move focus to the previous object ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Move focus to the previous object before the currently selected one. Change angle of line/arrow when drawing ⇧ Shift + drag (when drawing lines/arrows) ⇧ Shift + drag (when drawing lines/arrows) Hold down the Shift key while drawing the line/arrow and rotate the spout of the arrow/end of the line to change the angle of the line/arrow when drawing it. The line/arrow will be rotated exactly 45 degrees. Movement pixel by pixel Ctrl+← → ↑ ↓ ⌘ Cmd+← → ↑ ↓ Hold down the specified key and use the keybord arrows to move the selected object to the left, right, up, or down by one pixel at a time. Move shape by a big step ← → ↑ ↓ ← → ↑ ↓ Use the keybord arrows to move the selected object by a big step to the left, right, up, or down. Modifying Objects Constrain movement ⇧ Shift + drag ⇧ Shift + drag Constrain the movement of the selected object horizontally or vertically. Set 15-degree-rotation ⇧ Shift + drag (when rotating) ⇧ Shift + drag (when rotating) Constrain the rotation angle to 15 degree increments. Maintain proportions ⇧ Shift + drag (when resizing) ⇧ Shift + drag (when resizing) Maintain the proportions of the selected object when resizing. Working with Tables Move to the next cell in a row ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Go to the next cell in a table row. Move to the previous cell in a row ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Go to the previous cell in a table row. Move to the next row ↓ ↓ Go to the next row in a table. Move to the previous row ↑ ↑ Go to the previous row in a table. Start new paragraph ↵ Enter ↵ Return Start a new paragraph within a cell. If cells are selected, delete their contents. If the table is selected, move the cursor to the first cell. If it is empty, move the cursor to the beginning, otherwise select the contents of the cell. Add new row ↹ Tab in the lower right table cell. ↹ Tab in the lower right table cell. Add a new row at the bottom of the table. Previewing Presentation Start a presentation Ctrl+F5 ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+↵ Return Start a presentation from the beginning. Navigate forward ↵ Enter, Page Down, →, ↓, ␣ Spacebar ↵ Return, Fn+↓, →, ↓, ␣ Spacebar ↵ Return, Page Down, →, ↓, ␣ Spacebar Display the next transition effect or advance to the next slide. Navigate backward Page Up, ←, ↑ Fn+↑, ←, ↑ Page Up, ←, ↑ Display the previous transition effect or return to the previous slide. Navigate to the first slide Home Fn+← Home Navigate to the first slide. Navigate to the last slide End Fn+→ End Navigate to the last slide. Navigate to the specified slide slide number+Enter slide number+↵ Return Navigate to the specified slide. Close preview Esc Esc End a presentation. For the web version, the first pressing of Esc is an exit from the full-screen mode of a browser, the second one is an exit from the demonstration mode. Undo and Redo Undo Ctrl+Z ^ Ctrl+Z, ⌘ Cmd+Z Reverse the latest performed action. Redo Ctrl+Y ^ Ctrl+Y, ⌘ Cmd+Y Repeat the latest undone action. Cut, Copy, and Paste Cut Ctrl+X, ⇧ Shift+Delete ⌘ Cmd+X Cut the selected object/text/slide in the slide list and send it to the computer clipboard memory. The cut object can be later inserted to another place in the same presentation. Copy Ctrl+C, Ctrl+Insert ⌘ Cmd+C Send the selected object/text/slide in the slide list to the computer clipboard memory. The copied object can be later inserted to another place in the same presentation. Paste Ctrl+V, ⇧ Shift+Insert ⌘ Cmd+V Insert the previously copied object/text/slide in the slide list from the computer clipboard memory to the current cursor position. The object can be previously copied from the same presentation, from another presentation, from another editor, or from some other program. Paste text without style formatting Ctrl+⇧ Shift+V ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+V Insert the previously copied text fragment from the computer clipboard memory to the current cursor position without preserving its original formatting. The text can be previously copied from the same document, from another document, or from some other program. Copy style Alt+Ctrl+C ⌘ Cmd+⌥ Option+C, ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+C Copy the formatting from the selected fragment of the currently edited text. The copied formatting can be later applied to another text fragment in the same presentation. Apply style Alt+Ctrl+V ⌘ Cmd+⌥ Option+V, ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+V Apply the previously copied formatting to the text in the currently edited text box. Paste Special options 1 Use destination theme Ctrl then H ^ Ctrl then H Apply the formatting specified by the theme of the current presentation. Keep source formatting Ctrl then K ^ Ctrl then K Keep the source formatting of the copied text. Paste as picture Ctrl then U ^ Ctrl then U Paste the text as an image so that it cannot be edited. Keep text only Ctrl then T ^ Ctrl then T Paste the text without its original formatting. Working with Hyperlinks Insert hyperlink Ctrl+K ^ Ctrl+K, ⌘ Cmd+K Insert a hyperlink which can be used to go to a web address or to a certain slide in the presentation. Visit hyperlink Enter Return Visit a hyperlink (with the cursor in the hyperlink). Selecting with the Mouse Add to the selected fragment ⇧ Shift ⇧ Shift Start the selection, hold down the ⇧ Shift key and click where you need to end the selection. Selecting using the Keyboard Select all Ctrl+A ^ Ctrl+A, ⌘ Cmd+A Select all the slides (in the slides list) or all the objects within the slide (in the slide editing area) or all the text (within the text box) - depending on where the mouse cursor is located. Add the next slide in the slide list to the selection Shift+Page Down, ⇧ Shift+↓ ⇧ Shift+↓, ⇧ Shift+Fn+↓ ⇧ Shift+↓, ⇧ Shift+Page Down Add the next slide in the slide list to the selection (when the focus is on thumbnails). Add the previous slide in the slide list to the selection Shift+Page Up, ⇧ Shift+↑ ⇧ Shift+↑, ⇧ Shift+Fn+↑ ⇧ Shift+↑, ⇧ Shift+Page Up Add the previous slide in the slide list to the selection (when the focus is on thumbnails). Select to the first slide Shift+Home ⇧ Shift+Fn+← ⇧ Shift+Home Select slides to the first slide starting from the current slide where the focus is located in the thumbnails list. Select to the last slide Shift+End ⇧ Shift+Fn+→ ⇧ Shift+End Select slides to the last slide starting from the current slide where the focus is located in the thumbnails list. Select text from cursor to beginning of line ⇧ Shift+Home ⇧ Shift+Fn+← ⇧ Shift+Home Select a text fragment from the cursor to the beginning of the current line. Select text from cursor to end of line ⇧ Shift+End ⇧ Shift+Fn+→ ⇧ Shift+End Select a text fragment from the cursor to the end of the current line. Select one character to the right ⇧ Shift+→ ⇧ Shift+→ Select one character to the right of the cursor position. Select one character to the left ⇧ Shift+← ⇧ Shift+← Select one character to the left of the cursor position. Select to the end of a word Ctrl+⇧ Shift+→ ⇧ Shift+⌥ Option+→ Select a text fragment from the cursor to the end of a word. Select to the beginning of a word Ctrl+⇧ Shift+← ⇧ Shift+⌥ Option+← Select a text fragment from the cursor to the beginning of a word. Select one line up ⇧ Shift+↑ ⇧ Shift+↑ Move the cursor one line up, selecting all symbols between the previous and current cursor position. Select one line down ⇧ Shift+↓ ⇧ Shift+↓ Move the cursor one line down, selecting all symbols between the previous and current cursor position. Deselect all ⇧ Shift+Esc Esc, ⇧ Shift+Esc Deselect all the selection. Text Styling Nonprinting characters Ctrl+⇧ Shift+8 ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+8, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+8 Show or hide the display of nonprinting characters. Bold Ctrl+B ^ Ctrl+B, ⌘ Cmd+B Make the font of the selected text fragment bold giving it a heavier appearance. Italic Ctrl+I ⌘ Cmd+I Make the font of the selected text fragment slightly slanted to the right. Underline Ctrl+U ^ Ctrl+U, ⌘ Cmd+U Make the selected text fragment underlined with a line going under the letters. Strikeout Ctrl+5 ^ Ctrl+5, ⌘ Cmd+5 Make the selected text fragment struck out with a line going through the letters. Subscript Ctrl+. ^ Ctrl+., ⌘ Cmd+. Make the selected text fragment smaller placing it to the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas. Superscript Ctrl+, ^ Ctrl+,, ⌘ Cmd+, Make the selected text fragment smaller placing it to the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions. Bulleted list Ctrl+⇧ Shift+L ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+L, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+L Create an unordered bulleted list from the selected text fragment or start a new one. Clear formatting Ctrl+␣ Spacebar ^ Ctrl+Fn+␣ Spacebar, ⌘ Cmd+Fn+␣ Spacebar Clear formatting of the selected text fragment. Increase font Ctrl+] ^ Ctrl+], ⌘ Cmd+] Increase the size of the font for the selected text fragment 1 point. Decrease font Ctrl+[ ^ Ctrl+[, ⌘ Cmd+[ Decrease the size of the font for the selected text fragment 1 point. Align center Ctrl+E ^ Ctrl+E, ⌘ Cmd+E Center the text between the left and the right edges. Align justified Ctrl+J ^ Ctrl+J, ⌘ Cmd+J Justify the text in the paragraph adding additional space between words so that the left and the right text edges will be aligned with the paragraph margins. Align right Ctrl+R ^ Ctrl+R, ⌘ Cmd+R Align right with the text lined up on the right side of the text box, the left side remains unaligned. Align left Ctrl+L ^ Ctrl+L, ⌘ Cmd+L Align left with the text lined up on the left side of the text box, the right side remains unaligned. Increase left indent Ctrl+M ^ Ctrl+M, ⌘ Cmd+M Increase the paragraph left indent by one tabulation position. Decrease left indent Ctrl+⇧ Shift+M ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+M, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+M Decrease the paragraph left indent by one tabulation position. Delete one character to the left ← Backspace Delete Delete one character/selection/graphical object to the left of the cursor. Delete one character to the right Delete Fn+Delete Delete one character/selection/graphical object to the right of the cursor. Delete word/selection/graphical object to the left of cursor Ctrl+← Backspace ⌥ Option+Delete Delete one word/selection/graphical object to the left of the cursor. Delete word/selection/graphical object to the right of cursor Ctrl+Delete Fn+⌥ Option+Delete Delete one word/selection/graphical object to the right of the cursor. Increase list item level ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Add a level to the numbering of a paragrapf (with the cursor at the beginning of a line). Decrease list item level ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Remove a level from the numbering of a paragrapf (with the cursor at the beginning of a line). Add tab character to paragraph ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Add the tab character to a paragraph. Add new placeholder to equation argument Shift+Enter, Enter ⇧ Shift+Return, Return Add a new placeholder to the equation argument. Add line break to text Shift+Enter ⇧ Shift+Return Add a line break to the text. Add paragraph Enter Return Add a new paragraph or add a new line to the Title/Subtitle placeholder. Inserting special characters Insert the Euro sign Ctrl+Alt+E ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+E, ⌘ Cmd+⌥ Option+E Insert the Euro sign (€) at the current cursor position. Insert an em dash ⌥ Option+⇧ Shift+- Insert an em dash ‘—’ at the current cursor position. Insert an en dash ⌥ Option+- Insert an en dash ‘-’ at the current cursor position. Create nonbreaking space Ctrl+⇧ Shift+␣ Spacebar ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Fn+␣ Spacebar, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Fn+␣ Spacebar Create a space between characters which cannot be used to start a new line. Work with keyboard supporting the ability to insert Unicode symbols ⌥ Option+Q, ⌥ Option+F, ⇧ Shift+⌥ Option+7, and others When using the ⌥ Option+keyboard symbol shortcuts, for the keyboards supporting the ability to insert Unicode symbols, the keyboard symbols are added. The examples are listed below. With the English ABC layout, the ⌥ Option+Q shortcut inserts the \"œ\" symbol, the ⌥ Option+F shortcut inserts the “ƒ” function symbol. With the US International w/o deadkeys layout, the ⌥ Option+Q shortcut inserts the “ä” symbol. With the Swiss-german layout, the ⇧ Shift+⌥ Option+7 shortcut inserts the \"\\” symbol. Moving around in text Move one character to the left/right or one line up/down ← → ↑ ↓ ← → ↑ ↓ Move the cursor one character to the left/right or one line up/down. Move to the beginning of a word or one word to the left Ctrl+← ⌥ Option+← Move the cursor to the beginning of a word or one word to the left. Move one word to the right Ctrl+→ ⌥ Option+→ Move the cursor one word to the right. Move to next placeholder or create new slide Ctrl+↵ Enter ^ Ctrl+↵ Return, ⌘ Cmd+↵ Return Move to the next title or body text placeholder. If it is the last placeholder on a slide, this will insert a new slide with the same slide layout as the original slide Jump to the beginning of the line Home ⌘ Cmd+← Home Put the cursor to the beginning of the currently edited line. Jump to the end of the line End ⌘ Cmd+→ End Put the cursor to the end of the currently edited line. Jump to the beginning of the content Ctrl+Home ^ Ctrl+Fn+← ^ Ctrl+Home Put the cursor to the beginning of the currently edited text box or to the upper left cell of a table. Jump to the end of the content Ctrl+End ^ Ctrl+Fn+→ ^ Ctrl+End Put the cursor to the end of the currently edited text box or to the lower right cell of a table. Paste the copied data using Ctrl+V on Windows or Cmd+V on macOS. After pasting the copied data, use the Ctrl key to open the Paste Special menu, then press the letter key which corresponds to the necessary option." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm", @@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "HelpfulHints/Search.htm", "title": "Search and Replace Function", - "body": "To search for the needed characters, words or phrases in the Presentation Editor, click the icon situated on the left sidebar, the icon situated in the upper right corner, or use the Ctrl+F (Command+F for MacOS) key combination to open the small Find panel or the Ctrl+H key combination to open the full Find panel. A small Find panel will open in the upper right corner of the working area. The panel includes the text field for typing in a search query, the number of search results, and controls for moving to the previous or the next result, and closing the bar. To access the advanced settings, click the icon. The Find and replace panel will open: Type in your inquiry into the corresponding Find data entry field. If you need to replace one or more occurrences of the found characters, type in the replacement text into the corresponding Replace with data entry field. You can choose to replace a single currently highlighted occurrence or replace all occurrences by clicking the corresponding Replace and Replace All buttons. To navigate between the found occurrences, click one of the arrow buttons. The button shows the next occurrence while the button shows the previous one. Specify search parameters by checking the necessary options below the entry fields: Case sensitive - is used to find only the occurrences typed in the same case as your inquiry (e.g. if your inquiry is 'Editor' and this option is selected, such words as 'editor' or 'EDITOR' etc. will not be found). Whole words only - is used to highlight whole words only. The first slide in the selected direction that contains the characters you entered will be highlighted in the slide list and displayed in the working area with the required characters outlined. If it is not the slide you are looking for, click the selected button again to find the next slide containing the characters you entered." + "body": "To search for the needed characters, words or phrases in the Presentation Editor, click the icon situated on the left sidebar, the icon situated in the upper right corner, or use the Ctrl+F (Command+F for MacOS) key combination to open the small Find panel or the Ctrl+H key combination to open the full Find panel. A small Find panel will open in the upper right corner of the working area. The panel includes the text field for typing in a search query, the number of search results, and controls for moving to the previous or the next result, and closing the bar. To access the advanced settings, click the icon. The Find and replace panel will open: Type in your inquiry into the corresponding Find data entry field. If you need to replace one or more occurrences of the found characters, type in the replacement text into the corresponding Replace with data entry field. You can choose to replace a single currently highlighted occurrence or replace all occurrences by clicking the corresponding Replace and Replace All buttons. The Replace button can also be found on the Home tab. To navigate between the found occurrences, click one of the arrow buttons. The button shows the next occurrence while the button shows the previous one. Specify search parameters by checking the necessary options below the entry fields: Case sensitive - is used to find only the occurrences typed in the same case as your inquiry (e.g. if your inquiry is 'Editor' and this option is selected, such words as 'editor' or 'EDITOR' etc. will not be found). Whole words only - is used to highlight whole words only. The first slide in the selected direction that contains the characters you entered will be highlighted in the slide list and displayed in the working area with the required characters outlined. If it is not the slide you are looking for, click the selected button again to find the next slide containing the characters you entered." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/SpellChecking.htm", @@ -53,12 +53,12 @@ var indexes = { "id": "HelpfulHints/UsingChat.htm", "title": "Communicating in real time", - "body": "The Presentation Editor allows you to maintain constant team-wide approach to work flow: share files and folders, collaborate on presentations in real time, comment certain parts of your presentations that require additional third-party input, save presentation versions for future use. In Presentation Editor you can communicate with your co-editors in real time using the built-in Chat tool as well as a number of useful plugins, i.e. Telegram or Rainbow. To access the Chat tool and leave a message for other users, click the icon at the left sidebar, enter your text into the corresponding field below, press the Send button. The chat messages are stored during one session only. To discuss the presentation content, it is better to use comments which are stored until they are deleted. All the messages left by users will be displayed on the panel on the left. If there are new messages you haven't read yet, the chat icon will look like this - . To close the panel with chat messages, click the icon once again." + "body": "The Presentation Editor allows you to maintain constant team-wide approach to work flow: share files and folders, collaborate on presentations in real time, comment certain parts of your presentations that require additional third-party input, save presentation versions for future use. In Presentation Editor you can communicate with your co-editors in real time using the built-in Chat tool as well as a number of useful plugins, i.e., Telegram or Rainbow. To access the Chat tool and leave a message for other users, click the icon on the left sidebar, or switch to the Collaboration tab of the top toolbar and click the Chat button, enter your text into the corresponding field below, press the Send button. The chat messages are stored during one session only. To discuss the presentation content, it is better to use comments which are stored until they are deleted. All the messages left by users will be displayed on the panel on the left. If there are new messages you haven't read yet, the chat icon will look like this - . To close the panel with chat messages, click the icon once again." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/VersionHistory.htm", "title": "Version history", - "body": "The Presentation Editor allows you to maintain constant team-wide approach to work flow: share files and folders, collaborate on presentations in real time, communicate right in the editor, comment certain parts of your presentations that require additional third-party input. In Presentation Editor you can view the version history of the presentation you collaborate on. Viewing version history: To view all the changes made to the presentation, go to the File tab, select the Version History option at the left sidebar or go to the Collaboration tab, open the history of versions using the  Version History icon at the top toolbar. You'll see the list of the presentation versions and revisions with the indication of each version/revision author and creation date and time. For presentation versions, the version number is also specified (e.g. ver. 2). Viewing versions: To know exactly which changes have been made in each separate version/revision, you can view the one you need by clicking it on the left sidebar. The changes made by the version/revision author are marked with the color which is displayed next to the author's name on the left sidebar. To return to the current version of the presentation, use the Close History option on the top of the version list. Restoring versions: If you need to roll back to one of the previous versions of the presentation, click the Restore link below the selected version/revision. To learn more about managing versions and intermediate revisions, as well as restoring previous versions, please read the following article." + "body": "The Presentation Editor allows you to maintain constant team-wide approach to work flow: share files and folders, collaborate on presentations in real time, communicate right in the editor, comment certain parts of your presentations that require additional third-party input. In Presentation Editor you can view the version history of the presentation you collaborate on. Viewing version history: To view all the changes made to the presentation, go to the File tab, select the Version History option at the left sidebar or go to the Collaboration tab, open the history of versions using the  Version History icon at the top toolbar. You'll see the list of the presentation versions and revisions with the indication of each version/revision author and creation date and time. For presentation versions, the version number is also specified (e.g. ver. 2). Viewing versions: To know exactly which changes have been made in each separate version/revision, you can view the one you need by clicking it on the left sidebar. The changes made by the version/revision author are highlighted with the same color as their avatar in the viewing version history window. To return to the current version of the presentation, use the Close History option on the top of the version list. Restoring versions: If you need to roll back to one of the previous versions of the presentation, click the Restore link below the selected version/revision. To learn more about managing versions and intermediate revisions, as well as restoring previous versions, please read the following article." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/AnimationTab.htm", @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm", "title": "File tab", - "body": "The File tab in the Presentation Editor allows performing some basic file operations. The corresponding window of the Online Presentation Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Presentation Editor: Using this tab, you can: in the online version, save the current file (in case the Autosave option is disabled), download as (save the document in the selected format to the hard disk drive of your computer), save copy as (save a copy of the document in the selected format to the portal documents), print or rename it, in the desktop version, save the current file keeping the current format and location using the Save option or save the current file under a different name and change its location or format using the Save as option, print the file. protect the file using a password, change or remove the password; protect the file using a digital signature (available in the desktop version only); create a new presentation or open a recently edited one (available in the online version only), view general information about the presentation or change some file properties, manage access rights (available in the online version only), access the Advanced Settings of the editor, in the desktop version, open the folder, where the file is stored, in the File Explorer window. In the online version, open the folder of the Documents module, where the file is stored, in a new browser tab." + "body": "The File tab in the Presentation Editor allows performing some basic file operations. The corresponding window of the Online Presentation Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Presentation Editor: Using this tab, you can: create a new presentation or open a recently edited one (available in the online version only), in the online version, save the current file (in case the Autosave option is disabled), download as (save the document in the selected format to the hard disk drive of your computer), save copy as (save a copy of the document in the selected format to the portal documents), print or rename it, in the desktop version, save the current file keeping the current format and location using the Save option or save the current file under a different name and change its location or format using the Save as option, print the file, protect the file using a password, change or remove the password, protect the file using a digital signature (available in the desktop version only), view general information about the presentation or change some file properties, track version history (available in the online version only), Go to Documents - in the desktop version, open the folder, where the file is stored, in the File Explorer window, in the online version, open the folder of the Documents module, where the file is stored, in a new browser tab, access the Advanced Settings of the editor, Help - open the built-in helpcenter." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/HomeTab.htm", @@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm", "title": "Introducing the user interface of the Presentation Editor", - "body": "The Presentation Editor uses a tabbed interface where editing commands are grouped into tabs according to their functionality. Main window of the Online Presentation Editor: Main window of the Desktop Presentation Editor: The editor interface consists of the following main elements: The Editor header displays the logo, tabs for all opened presentations with their names and menu tabs. On the left side of the Editor header, the Save, Print file, Undo and Redo buttons are located. On the right side of the Editor header, along with the user name the following icons are displayed: Open file location - in the desktop version, it allows opening the folder, where the file is stored, in the File Explorer window. In the online version, it allows opening the folder of the Documents module, where the file is stored, in a new browser tab. Share - (available in the online version only) allows setting access rights for the documents stored in the cloud. Mark as favorite - click the star to add a file to favorites as to make it easy to find. The added file is just a shortcut so the file itself remains stored in its original location. Deleting a file from favorites does not remove the file from its original location. Search - allows to search the presentation for a particular word or symbol, etc. The Top toolbar displays a set of editing commands depending on the selected menu tab. Currently, the following tabs are available: File, Home, Insert, Transitions, Animation, Collaboration, Protection, Plugins. The Copy, Paste, Cut and Select All options are always available on the left side of the Top toolbar regardless of the selected tab. The Status bar at the bottom of the editor window contains the Start slideshow icon, some navigation tools: slide number indicator and zoom buttons. The Status bar also displays some notifications (such as \"All changes saved\", ‘Connection is lost’ when there is no connection and the editor is trying to reconnect etc.) and allows setting the text language and enable spell checking. The Left sidebar contains the following icons: - allows using the Search and Replace tool, - allows viewing slides and navigating them, - allows opening the Comments panel, - (available in the online version only) allows opening the Chat panel, - (available in the online version only) allows contacting our support team, - (available in the online version only) allows viewing the information about the program. The Right sidebar allows adjusting additional parameters of different objects. When you select a particular object on a slide, the corresponding icon is activated on the right sidebar. Click this icon to expand the right sidebar. The horizontal and vertical Rulers help you place objects on a slide and allow you to set up tab stops and paragraph indents within the text boxes. The Working area allows viewing the presentation content, entering and editing data. The Scroll bar on the right allows scrolling the presentation up and down. For your convenience, you can hide some components and display them again when necessary. To learn more on how to adjust the view settings, please refer to this page. When there are many icons on the left and right panels, the ones below will be hidden, and they can be accessed via the More button." + "body": "The Presentation Editor uses a tabbed interface where editing commands are grouped into tabs according to their functionality. Main window of the Online Presentation Editor: Main window of the Desktop Presentation Editor: The editor interface consists of the following main elements: The Editor header displays the logo, tabs for all opened presentations with their names and menu tabs. On the left side of the Editor header, the Save, Print file, Undo and Redo buttons are located. Click the dots icon to the right to customize which buttons shall be hidden if any. On the right side of the Editor header, along with the user name the following icons are displayed: Open file location - in the desktop version, it allows opening the folder, where the file is stored, in the File Explorer window. In the online version, it allows opening the folder of the Documents module, where the file is stored, in a new browser tab. Share - (available in the online version only) allows setting access rights for the documents stored in the cloud. Mark as favorite - click the star to add a file to favorites as to make it easy to find. The added file is just a shortcut so the file itself remains stored in its original location. Deleting a file from favorites does not remove the file from its original location. Search - allows to search the presentation for a particular word or symbol, etc. The Top toolbar displays a set of editing commands depending on the selected menu tab. Currently, the following tabs are available: File, Home, Insert, Draw, Transitions, Animation, Collaboration, Protection, Plugins. The Copy, Paste, Cut and Select All options are always available on the left side of the Top toolbar regardless of the selected tab. The Status bar at the bottom of the editor window contains the Start slideshow icon, some navigation tools: slide number indicator and zoom buttons. The Status bar also displays some notifications (such as \"All changes saved\", ‘Connection is lost’ when there is no connection and the editor is trying to reconnect etc.) and allows setting the text language and enable spell checking. The Left sidebar contains the following icons: - allows using the Search and Replace tool, - allows viewing slides and navigating them, - allows opening the Comments panel, - (available in the online version only) allows opening the Chat panel, - (available in the online version only) allows contacting our support team, - (available in the online version only) allows viewing the information about the program. The Right sidebar allows adjusting additional parameters of different objects. When you select a particular object on a slide, the corresponding icon is activated on the right sidebar. Click this icon to expand the right sidebar. The horizontal and vertical Rulers help you place objects on a slide and allow you to set up tab stops and paragraph indents within the text boxes. The Working area allows viewing the presentation content, entering and editing data. The Scroll bar on the right allows scrolling the presentation up and down. For your convenience, you can hide some components and display them again when necessary. To learn more on how to adjust the view settings, please refer to this page. When there are many icons on the left and right panels, the ones below will be hidden, and they can be accessed via the More button." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/TransitionsTab.htm", @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "ProgramInterface/ViewTab.htm", "title": "View tab", - "body": "The View tab of the Presentation Editor allows you to manage how your presentation looks like while you are working on it. The corresponding window of the Online Presentation Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Presentation Editor: View options available on this tab: Zoom allows to zoom in and zoom out your document. Fit to Slide allows to resize the slide so that the screen displays the whole slide. Fit to Width allows to resize the slide so that the slide scales to fit the width of the screen. Interface Theme allows to change interface theme by choosing a Same as system, Light, Classic Light, Dark or Contrast Dark theme. The following options allow you to configure the elements to display or to hide. Check the elements to make them visible: Notes to make the notes panel always visible. Rulers to make rulers always visible. Guides and Gridlines to properly position objects on the slide. Always Show Toolbar to make the top toolbar always visible. Status Bar to make the status bar always visible. Left Panel to make the left panel visible. Right Panel to make the right panel visible." + "body": "The View tab of the Presentation Editor allows you to manage how your presentation looks like while you are working on it. The corresponding window of the Online Presentation Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Presentation Editor: View options available on this tab: Zoom allows to zoom in and zoom out your presentation. Fit to Slide allows to resize the slide so that the screen displays the whole slide. Fit to Width allows to resize the slide so that the slide scales to fit the width of the screen. Interface Theme allows to change interface theme by choosing a Same as system, Light, Classic Light, Dark or Contrast Dark theme. The Slide Master feature can be accessed on the tab. The following options allow you to configure the elements to display or to hide. Check the elements to make them visible: Notes to make the notes panel always visible. Rulers to make rulers always visible. Guides and Gridlines to properly position objects on the slide. Always Show Toolbar to make the top toolbar always visible. Status Bar to make the status bar always visible. Left Panel to make the left panel visible. Right Panel to make the right panel visible. Macros - this option allows adding custom macros to your presentation." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/AddHyperlinks.htm", @@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/AddingAnimations.htm", "title": "Adding animations", - "body": "Animation is a visual effect that allows you to animate text, objects and graphics as to make your presentation more dynamic and emphasize important information. You can control the movement, color and size of the text, objects and graphics. Applying an animation effect switch to the Animation tab on the top toolbar, select a text, an object or a graphic element you want to apply the animation effect to, select an Animation effect from the animations gallery, select the animation effect movement direction by clicking Parameters next to the animations gallery. The parameters on the list depend on the effect you apply. You can preview animation effects on the current slide. By default, animation effects will play automatically when you add them to a slide but you can turn it off. Click the Preview drop-down on the Animation tab, and select a preview mode: Preview to show a preview when you click the Preview button, AutoPreview to show a preview automatically when you add an animation to a slide or replace an existing one. Types of animations All animation effects are listed in the animations gallery. Click the drop-down arrow to open it. Each animation effect is represented by a star-shaped icon. The animations are grouped according to the point at which they occur: Entrance effects determine how objects appear on a slide, and are colored green in the gallery. Emphasis effects change the size or color of the object to add emphasis on an object and to draw attention of the audience, and are colored yellow or two colored in the gallery. Exit effects determine how objects disappear from a slide, and are colored red in the gallery. Motion Paths determines the movement of an object and the path it follows. The icons in the gallery represent the suggested path. The Custom Path option is also available. To learn more, please read the following article. Scroll down the animations gallery to see all effects included in the gallery. If you don’t see the needed animation in the gallery, click the Show More Effects option at the bottom of the gallery. Here you will find the full list of the animation effects. Effects are additionally grouped by the visual impact they have on audience. Entrance, Emphasis, and Exit effects are grouped by Basic, Subtle, Moderate, and Exciting. Motion Path effects are grouped by Basic, Subtle, and Moderate. Applying Multiple Animations You can add more than one animation effect to the same object. To add one more animation, click the Add Animation button on the Animation tab. The list of animation effects will open. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 above for applying an animation. If you use the Animation gallery, and not the Add Animation button, the first animation effect will substitute for a new one. A small square next to the object shows the sequence numbers of the effects applied. As soon as you add several effects to an object, the Multiple animation icon appears in the animations gallery. Changing the order of the animation effects on a slide Click the animation square mark. Сlick or arrows on the Animation tab to change the order of appearance on the slide. Setting animation timing Use the timing options on the Animation tab to set the start, the duration, the delay, the repetition and the rewind of the animations on a slide. Animation Start Options On click – animation starts when you click the slide. This is the default option. With previous – animation starts when previous animation effect starts and effects appear simultaneously. After previous – animation starts right after the previous animation effect. Note: animation effects are automatically numbered on a slide. All animations set to With previous and After previous take the number of the animation they are connected to as they will appear automatically. Animation Trigger Options Click the Trigger button and select one of the appropriate options: On Click Sequence – to start the next animation in sequence each time you click anywhere on the slide. This is the default option. On Click of - to start animation when you click the object that you select from the drop-down list. Other timing options Duration – use this option to determine how long you want an animation to be displayed. Select one of the available options from the menu, or type in the necessary time value. Delay – use this option if you want the selected animation to be displayed within a specified period of time, or if you need a pause between the effects. Use arrows to select the necessary time value, or enter the necessary value measured in seconds. Repeat – use this option if you want to display an animation more than once. Click the Repeat box and select one of the available options, or enter your value. Rewind – check this box if you want to return the object to its original state when the animation ends. Animation color options You can set the final color for animation effects that change color. Click the Parameters button at the top toolbar and select the necessary color on the Theme colors or Standard colors palette." + "body": "Animation is a visual effect that allows you to animate text, objects and graphics as to make your presentation more dynamic and emphasize important information. You can control the movement, color and size of the text, objects and graphics. Applying an animation effect switch to the Animation tab on the top toolbar, select a text, an object or a graphic element you want to apply the animation effect to, select an Animation effect from the animations gallery, select the animation effect movement direction by clicking Parameters next to the animations gallery. The parameters on the list depend on the effect you apply. You can preview animation effects on the current slide. By default, animation effects will play automatically when you add them to a slide but you can turn it off. Click the Preview drop-down on the Animation tab, and select a preview mode: Preview to show a preview when you click the Preview button, AutoPreview to show a preview automatically when you add an animation to a slide or replace an existing one. Types of animations All animation effects are listed in the animations gallery. Click the drop-down arrow to open it. Each animation effect is represented by a star-shaped icon. The animations are grouped according to the point at which they occur: Entrance effects determine how objects appear on a slide, and are colored green in the gallery. Emphasis effects change the size or color of the object to add emphasis on an object and to draw attention of the audience, and are colored yellow or two colored in the gallery. Exit effects determine how objects disappear from a slide, and are colored red in the gallery. Motion Paths determines the movement of an object and the path it follows. The icons in the gallery represent the suggested path. The Custom Path option is also available. To learn more, please read the following article. Scroll down the animations gallery to see all effects included in the gallery. If you don’t see the needed animation in the gallery, click the Show More Effects option at the bottom of the gallery. Here you will find the full list of the animation effects. Effects are additionally grouped by the visual impact they have on audience. Entrance, Emphasis, and Exit effects are grouped by Basic, Subtle, Moderate, and Exciting. Motion Path effects are grouped by Basic, Subtle, and Moderate. Applying Multiple Animations You can add more than one animation effect to the same object. To add one more animation, click the Add Animation button on the Animation tab. The list of animation effects will open. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 above for applying an animation. If you use the Animation gallery, and not the Add Animation button, the first animation effect will substitute for a new one. A small square next to the object shows the sequence numbers of the effects applied. As soon as you add several effects to an object, the Multiple animation icon appears in the animations gallery. Changing the order of the animation effects on a slide Click the animation square mark. Сlick or arrows on the Animation tab to change the order of appearance on the slide. Setting animation timing Use the timing options on the Animation tab to set the start, the duration, the delay, the repetition and the rewind of the animations on a slide. Animation Start Options On click – animation starts when you click the slide. This is the default option. With previous – animation starts when previous animation effect starts and effects appear simultaneously. After previous – animation starts right after the previous animation effect. Note: animation effects are automatically numbered on a slide. All animations set to With previous and After previous take the number of the animation they are connected to as they will appear automatically. Animation Trigger Options Click the Trigger button and select one of the appropriate options: On Click Sequence – to start the next animation in sequence each time you click anywhere on the slide. This is the default option. On Click of - to start animation when you click the object that you select from the drop-down list. Other timing options Duration – use this option to determine how long you want an animation to be displayed. Select one of the available options from the menu, or type in the necessary time value. Delay – use this option if you want the selected animation to be displayed within a specified period of time, or if you need a pause between the effects. Use arrows to select the necessary time value, or enter the necessary value measured in seconds. Repeat – use this option if you want to display an animation more than once. Click the Repeat box and select one of the available options, or enter your value. Rewind – check this box if you want to return the object to its original state when the animation ends. Animation color options You can set the final color for animation effects that change color. Click the Parameters button at the top toolbar and select the necessary color on the Theme colors or Standard colors palette. Animation pane The Animation pane displays set animations and allows for easier animation management. Play All - click this button to play all currently created animations. Play Selected - click this button to play all currently selected animations. During the playback, only selected animations are displayed in the list. Play From - click this button to play animations starting with the selected one and going down the list. During the playback, only selected animations are displayed in the list. Stop - click this button to stop animation playback. Use the and buttons to change the order of objects' animations on the slide. To set the Start point, click an animation with the right mouse button or click the More button to the right of the animation. The timeline of the slide is displayed below the animation pane. To change the duration of an animation, click and drag its ending point on the pane to the desired time point. To move an animation along the timeline, click right on its diagram representation on the pane and drag it to the desired time point. Use the Zoom interface buttons to zoom in and out of the timeline." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/AlignArrangeObjects.htm", @@ -128,17 +128,22 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/ApplyTransitions.htm", "title": "Apply transitions", - "body": "A transition is an effect that appears when one slide advances to the next one during presentation. In the Presentation Editor, you can apply the same transition to all slides or different transitions to each separate slide and adjust the transition parameters. To apply a transition to a single slide or several selected slides: Switch to the Transitions tab on the top toolbar. Select a slide (or several slides in the slide list) you want to apply a transition to. Select one of the available transition effects on the Transition tab: None, Fade, Push, Wipe, Split, Uncover, Cover, Clock, Zoom, and Morph. You can assign a name for the object on a slide used in the Morph transition. To do that, click the object with the right mouse button, select Shape advanced settings > General > Shape name. An object name is used to match two objects and force the first one to morph into the other. The name shall correspond to the !!Name template and remain the same for two morphed objects. Click the Parameters button to select one of the available effect options that define exactly how the effect appears. For example, the options available for Zoom effect are Zoom In, Zoom Out and Zoom and Rotate. Specify how long you want the transition to last. In the Duration box, enter or select the necessary time value, measured in seconds. Press the Preview button to view the slide with the transition applied in the slide editing area. Specify how long you want the slide to be displayed until it advances to the next one: Start on click – check this box if you don't want to restrict the time to display the selected slide. The slide will advance to the next one only when you click it with the mouse. Delay – use this option if you want the selected slide to be displayed within a specified period of time until it advances to the next one. Check this box and enter or select the necessary time value, measured in seconds. Note: if you check only the Delay box, the slides will advance automatically within a specified time interval. If you check both the Start on click and the Delay boxes and set the delay value, the slides will advance automatically as well, but you will also be able to click a slide to advance it to the next. To apply a transition to all slides in your presentation, click the Apply to All Slides button on the Transitions tab. To delete a transition, select the necessary slide and choose None among the transition effect options on the Transitions tab. To delete all transitions, select any slide, choose None among the transition effect options and press the Apply to All Slides button on the Transitions tab." + "body": "A transition is an effect that appears when one slide advances to the next one during a presentation. In the Presentation Editor, you can apply the same transition to all slides or different transitions to each separate slide and adjust the transition parameters. To apply a transition to a single slide or several selected slides: Switch to the Transitions tab on the top toolbar. Select a slide (or several slides in the slide list) you want to apply a transition to. Select one of the available transition effects on the Transition tab: None, Morph, Fade, Push, Wipe, Split, Uncover, Cover, Clock, Zoom, and Random. You can assign a name for the object on a slide used in the Morph transition. To do that, click the object with the right mouse button, select Shape advanced settings > General > Shape name. An object name is used to match two objects and force the first one to morph into the other. The name shall correspond to the !!Name template and remain the same for two morphed objects. Click the Parameters button to select one of the available effect options that define exactly how the effect appears. For example, the options available for Zoom effect are Zoom In, Zoom Out and Zoom and Rotate. Specify how long you want the transition to last. In the Duration box, enter or select the necessary time value, measured in seconds. Press the Preview button to view the slide with the transition applied in the slide editing area. Specify how long you want the slide to be displayed until it advances to the next one: Start on click – check this box if you don't want to restrict the time to display the selected slide. The slide will advance to the next one only when you click it with the mouse. Delay – use this option if you want the selected slide to be displayed within a specified period of time until it advances to the next one. Check this box and enter or select the necessary time value, measured in seconds. Note: if you check only the Delay box, the slides will advance automatically within a specified time interval. If you check both the Start on click and the Delay boxes and set the delay value, the slides will advance automatically as well, but you will also be able to click a slide to advance it to the next. To apply a transition to all slides in your presentation, click the Apply to All Slides button on the Transitions tab. To delete a transition, select the necessary slide and choose None among the transition effect options on the Transitions tab. To delete all transitions, select any slide, choose None among the transition effect options and press the Apply to All Slides button on the Transitions tab." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/ChangeColorScheme.htm", + "title": "Change color scheme", + "body": "Color schemes are applied to the whole presentation. In the Presentation Editor, you can quickly change the appearance of your presentation because they define the Theme Colors palette for different presentation elements (objects, tables, autoshapes, charts). If you applied some Theme Colors to the presentation elements and then select a different Color Scheme, the applied colors in your presentation will change correspondingly. To change a color scheme, click the downward arrow next to the Color Scheme icon on the Layout tab of the top toolbar and select the required color scheme from the list: Aspect, Blue Green, Blue II, Blue Warm, Blue, Grayscale, Green Yellow, Green, Marquee, Median, Office 2007-2010, Office 2013-2022, Office, Orange Red, Orange, Paper, Red Orange, Red Violet, Red, Slipstream, Violet II, Violet, Yellow Orange, Yellow, and New Office. The selected color scheme will be highlighted in the list. Once you select the preferred color scheme, you can select other colors in the color palettes window that corresponds to the presentation element you want to apply the color to. For most presentation elements, the color palettes window can be accessed by clicking the colored box on the right sidebar when the required element is selected. For the font, this window can be opened using the downward arrow next to the Font color icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar. The following palettes are available: Theme colors - the colors that correspond to the selected color scheme of the presentation. Standard colors - a set of default colors. The selected color scheme does not affect them. You can also apply a custom color using two different options: Eyedropper - use this option to choose the required color by clicking it in the presentation. More colors - click this caption if the required color is missing among the available palettes. Select the necessary color range moving the vertical color slider and set a specific color dragging the color picker within the large square color field. Once you select a color with the color picker, the appropriate RGB and sRGB color values will be displayed in the fields on the right. You can also define a color on the base of the RGB color model by entering the corresponding numeric values into the R, G, B (red, green, blue) fields or enter the sRGB hexadecimal code into the field marked with the # sign. The selected color appears in the New preview box. If the object was previously filled with any custom color, this color is displayed in the Current box so you can compare the original and modified colors. When the color is defined, click the Add button: The custom color will be applied to the selected element and added to the Recent colors palette." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/ChatGPT.htm", "title": "ChatGPT", - "body": "The ChatGPT plugin allows you to use the OpenAI chatbot to perform tasks that involve understanding or generating natural language or code. Installation To install the ChatGPT plugin, Go to the Plugins tab. Open the Plugin Manager. Find ChatGPT on the marketplace and click the Install button below. Right-click anywhere in the document and find ChatGPT in the context menu. Click Settings to proceed with the plugin configuration. Configuration Create your API key on the OpenAI API key page. Copy the generated API key into the corresponding field of the Settings window. How to use ONLYOFFICE assumes no responsibility for any ChatGPT completions that may contain errors or omissions as well as for any harassing and inappropriate content. The information contained in the plugin completions is generated by ChatGPT and is provided on the \"as is\" basis without additional filtering from ONLYOFFICE. Once installed ChatGPT will be added to the context menu, and all of the ChatGPT features will be accessed with a right mouse click. Select a piece of text or a word to access the context menu and to choose one of the ChatGPT features: Text Analysis, Word Analysis, Translation, Image Generation, Thesaurus, Chat, and Custom Request. Chat Integration of ChatGPT into the context menu allows you to invoke the Chat from anywhere in the document. Use chatbot to interact and carry on a conversation, ask questions, and receive responses to your requests. Navigate to the Chat option from the ChatGPT context menu, and start a conversation in the text box at the bottom of the ChatGPT window. Custom Request The Custom Request feature allows you to tokenize natural language or code. The tool converts the input text into a list of tokens, processes the request, converts the generated tokens back to the text, and returns the string in the document. To make a custom request, go to the ChatGPT context menu, and click Custom request. In the Open AI text box, enter the text you would like to tokenize. The tool shows the total number of tokens in the text. Click the Show advanced settings to configure the request settings: Model - the model which will generate the completion. Some models are suitable for natural language tasks, others specialize in code. To learn more about these models, please refer to the official ChatGPT website. Maximum length - the maximum number of tokens to generate in the completion. Temperature - this parameter controls randomness, e.g., lowering it results in less random completions. As the temperature approaches zero, the node will become deterministic and repetitive. Top P - an alternative to sampling with temperature, called nucleus sampling, where the model considers the results of the tokens with top_p probability mass. Stop sequences - up to four sequences where the API will stop generating further tokens. The returned text will not contain the stop sequence. Click the Submit button to process the text, or click the Clear button to delete the request and enter a new one." + "body": "The ChatGPT plugin allows you to use the OpenAI chatbot to perform tasks that involve understanding or generating natural language or code. Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager. Installation To install the ChatGPT plugin, Go to the Plugins tab. Open the Plugin Manager. Find ChatGPT on the marketplace and click the Install button below. Right-click anywhere in the document and find ChatGPT in the context menu. Click Settings to proceed with the plugin configuration. Configuration Create your API key on the OpenAI API key page. Copy the generated API key into the corresponding field of the Settings window. How to use ONLYOFFICE assumes no responsibility for any ChatGPT completions that may contain errors or omissions as well as for any harassing and inappropriate content. The information contained in the plugin completions is generated by ChatGPT and is provided on the \"as is\" basis without additional filtering from ONLYOFFICE. Once installed ChatGPT will be added to the context menu, and all of the ChatGPT features will be accessed with a right mouse click. Select a piece of text or a word to access the context menu and to choose one of the ChatGPT features: Text Analysis, Word Analysis, Translation, Image Generation, Thesaurus, Chat, and Custom Request. Chat Integration of ChatGPT into the context menu allows you to invoke the Chat from anywhere in the document. Use chatbot to interact and carry on a conversation, ask questions, and receive responses to your requests. Navigate to the Chat option from the ChatGPT context menu, and start a conversation in the text box at the bottom of the ChatGPT window. Custom Request The Custom Request feature allows you to tokenize natural language or code. The tool converts the input text into a list of tokens, processes the request, converts the generated tokens back to the text, and returns the string in the document. To make a custom request, go to the ChatGPT context menu, and click Custom request. In the Open AI text box, enter the text you would like to tokenize. The tool shows the total number of tokens in the text. Click the Show advanced settings to configure the request settings: Model - the model which will generate the completion. Some models are suitable for natural language tasks, others specialize in code. To learn more about these models, please refer to the official ChatGPT website. Maximum length - the maximum number of tokens to generate in the completion. Temperature - this parameter controls randomness, e.g., lowering it results in less random completions. As the temperature approaches zero, the node will become deterministic and repetitive. Top P - an alternative to sampling with temperature, called nucleus sampling, where the model considers the results of the tokens with top_p probability mass. Stop sequences - up to four sequences where the API will stop generating further tokens. The returned text will not contain the stop sequence. Click the Submit button to process the text, or click the Clear button to delete the request and enter a new one." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/CommunicationPlugins.htm", "title": "Communicate while editing", - "body": "In ONLYOFFICE Presentation Editor, you can always keep in touch with colleagues and use popular online messengers, such as Telegram and Rainbow. Telegram and Rainbow plugins are not installed by default. To find information on how to install them, please, refer to the corresponding article: Adding plugins to the ONLYOFFICE Desktop Editors Adding plugins to ONLYOFFICE Cloud, or Adding new plugins to server editors . Telegram To start chatting in the Telegram plugin, Switch to the Plugins tab and click Telegram, enter your phone number into the corresponding field, check the Keep me signed in checkbox if you want to save credentials for the current session and click the Next button, enter the code you've received in your Telegram app, or log in using the QR code, open Telegram app on your phone, go to Settings > Devices > Scan QR, scan the image to Log in. Now you can use Telegram for instant messaging within ONLYOFFICE editors interface. Rainbow To start chatting in the Rainbow plugin, Switch to the Plugins tab and click Rainbow, register a new account by clicking the Sign up button, or log into an already created one. To do this, enter your email into the corresponding field and click Continue, then enter your account password, check the Keep my session alive checkbox if you want to save credentials for the current session, and click the Connect button. Now you're all set and can simultaneously chat in Rainbow and work within ONLYOFFICE editors interface." + "body": "In ONLYOFFICE Presentation Editor, you can always keep in touch with colleagues and use popular online messengers, such as Telegram and Rainbow. Telegram and Rainbow plugins are not installed by default. To find information on how to install them, please, refer to the corresponding article: Adding plugins to the ONLYOFFICE Desktop Editors Adding plugins to ONLYOFFICE Cloud, or Adding new plugins to server editors , or install the plugin using the Plugin Manager. Telegram To start chatting in the Telegram plugin, Switch to the Plugins tab and click Telegram, enter your phone number into the corresponding field, check the Keep me signed in checkbox if you want to save credentials for the current session and click the Next button, enter the code you've received in your Telegram app, or log in using the QR code, open Telegram app on your phone, go to Settings > Devices > Scan QR, scan the image to Log in. Now you can use Telegram for instant messaging within ONLYOFFICE editors interface. Rainbow To start chatting in the Rainbow plugin, Switch to the Plugins tab and click Rainbow, register a new account by clicking the Sign up button, or log into an already created one. To do this, enter your email into the corresponding field and click Continue, then enter your account password, check the Keep my session alive checkbox if you want to save credentials for the current session, and click the Connect button. Now you're all set and can simultaneously chat in Rainbow and work within ONLYOFFICE editors interface." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/CopyClearFormatting.htm", @@ -168,17 +173,17 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/HighlightedCode.htm", "title": "Insert highlighted code", - "body": "In the Presentation Editor, you can embed highlighted code with the already adjusted style in accordance with the programming language and coloring style of the program you have chosen. Go to your presentation and place the cursor at the location where you want to include the code. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose Highlight code. Specify the programming Language. Select a Style of the code so that it appears as if it were open in this program. Specify if you want to replace tabs with spaces. Choose Background color. To do this, manually move the cursor over the palette or insert the RGB/HSL/HEX value. Click OK to insert the code." + "body": "In the Presentation Editor, you can embed highlighted code with the already adjusted style in accordance with the programming language and coloring style of the program you have chosen. Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager. Go to your presentation and place the cursor at the location where you want to include the code. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose Highlight code. Specify the programming Language. Select a Style of the code so that it appears as if it were open in this program. Specify if you want to replace tabs with spaces. Choose Background color. To do this, manually move the cursor over the palette or insert the RGB/HSL/HEX value. Click OK to insert the code." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm", "title": "Insert and format autoshapes", - "body": "Insert an autoshape To add an autoshape to a slide in the Presentation Editor, in the slide list on the left, select the slide you want to add the autoshape to, click the Shape icon on the Home tab or the Shape gallery dropdown arrow on the Insert tab of the top toolbar, select one of the available autoshape groups from the Shape Gallery: Recently Used, Basic Shapes, Figured Arrows, Math, Charts, Stars & Ribbons, Callouts, Buttons, Rectangles, Lines, click on the necessary autoshape within the selected group, in the slide editing area, place the mouse cursor where you want the shape to be put, Note: you can click and drag to stretch the shape. once the autoshape is added, you can change its size, position and properties. You can save the autoshape as picture on your hard drive using the Save as picture option in the right-click menu. Note: to add a caption within the autoshape, make sure the shape is selected on the slide and start typing your text. The text you add in this way becomes a part of the autoshape (when you move or rotate the shape, the text moves or rotates with it). It's also possible to add an autoshape to a slide layout. To learn more, please refer to this article. Copy autoshape style formatting To copy a certain autoshape style formatting, select the autoshape whose formatting you need to copy with the mouse or using the keyboard, click the Copy style icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar (the mouse pointer will look like this ), select the required autoshape to apply the same formatting. Adjust autoshape settings To align and arrange autoshapes, use the right-click menu. The menu options are: Cut, Copy, Paste - standard options which are used to cut or copy the selected text/object and paste the previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position. Arrange is used to bring the selected autoshape to foreground, send it to background, move forward or backward as well as group or ungroup shapes to perform operations with several of them at once. To learn more on how to arrange objects, please refer to this page. Align is used to align the shape to the left, in the center, to the right, at the top, in the middle, at the bottom. To learn more on how to align objects, please refer to this page. Rotate is used to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the shape horizontally or vertically. Save as picture is used to save the shape as a picture on your hard drive. Edit Points is used to customize or to change the curvature of your shape. To activate a shape’s editable anchor points, right-click the shape and choose Edit Points from the menu or click the Edit shape > Edit points option on the right panel. The black squares that become active are the points where two lines meet, and the red line outlines the shape. Click and drag it to reposition the point, and to change the shape outline. Once you click the anchor point, two blue lines with white squares at the ends will appear. These are Bezier handles that allow you to create a curve and to change a curve’s smoothness. As long as the anchor points are active, you can add and delete them. To add a point to a shape, hold Ctrl and click the position where you want to add an anchor point. To delete a point, hold Ctrl and click the unnecessary point. Shape Advanced Settings is used to open the 'Shape - Advanced Settings' window. Add to layout is used to merge the autoshape with the background layout of the slide. Some of the autoshape settings can be altered using the Shape settings tab of the right sidebar. To activate it, click the autoshape and choose the Shape settings icon on the right. Here you can change the following properties: Fill - use this section to select the autoshape fill. You can choose the following options: Color Fill - to specify the solid color you want to apply to the selected shape. Gradient Fill - to fill the shape with two colors which smoothly change from one to another. Picture or Texture - to use an image or a predefined texture as the shape background. Pattern - to fill the shape with a two-colored design composed of regularly repeated elements. No Fill - select this option if you don't want to use any fill. For more detailed information on these options, please refer to the Fill objects and select colors section. Line - use this section to change the width, color or type of the autoshape line. To change the line width, select one of the available options from the Size drop-down list. The available options are: 0.5 pt, 1 pt, 1.5 pt, 2.25 pt, 3 pt, 4.5 pt, 6 pt. Or select the No Line option if you don't want to use any line. To change the line color, click on the colored box below and select the necessary color. You can use the selected theme color, a standard color or choose a custom color. To change the line type, select the necessary option from the corresponding dropdown list (a solid line is applied by default, you can change it to one of the available dashed lines). To change the line opacity, enter the required value manually or use the corresponding slider bar. Rotation is used to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the shape horizontally or vertically. Click one of the buttons: to rotate the shape by 90 degrees counterclockwise to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise to flip the shape horizontally (left to right) to flip the shape vertically (upside down) Edit shape - use this section to edit the shape points or to replace the current autoshape with another one selected from the dropdown list. Edit points is used to customize or to change the curvature of your shape. Once you click the anchor point, two blue lines with white squares at the ends will appear. These are Bezier handles that allow you to create a curve and to change a curve’s smoothness. As long as the anchor points are active, you can add and delete them. To add a point to a shape, hold Ctrl and click the position where you want to add an anchor point. To delete a point, hold Ctrl and click the unnecessary point. Change Shape is used to replace the current autoshape. Choose another autoshape from the dropdown list. Show shadow - check this option to display shape with shadow. To change the advanced settings of the autoshape, right-click the shape and select the Shape Advanced Settings option from the contextual menu or left-click it and press the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar. The shape properties window will be opened: The Placement tab allows you to change the autoshape Width and/or Height. If the Constant proportions button is clicked (in this case it looks like this ), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original autoshape aspect ratio. You can also set the exact position using the Horizontal and Vertical fields, as well as the From field where you can access such settings as Top Left Corner and Center. The Rotation tab contains the following parameters: Angle - use this option to rotate the shape by an exactly specified angle. Enter the necessary value measured in degrees into the field or adjust it using the arrows on the right. Flipped - check the Horizontally box to flip the shape horizontally (left to right) or check the Vertically box to flip the shape vertically (upside down). The Weights & Arrows tab contains the following parameters: Line Style - this option allows specifying the following parameters: Cap Type - this option allows setting the style for the end of the line, therefore it can be applied only to the shapes with the open outline, such as lines, polylines, etc.: Flat - the end points will be flat. Round - the end points will be rounded. Square - the end points will be square. Join Type - this option allows setting the style for the intersection of two lines, for example, it can affect a polyline or the corners of the triangle or rectangle outline: Round - the corner will be rounded. Bevel - the corner will be cut off angularly. Miter - the corner will be pointed. It goes well to shapes with sharp angles. Note: the effect will be more noticeable if you use a large outline width. Arrows - this option group is available if a shape from the Lines shape group is selected. It allows you to set the arrow Start and End Style and Size by selecting the appropriate option from the drop-down lists. The Text Box tab contains the following parameters: AutoFit - to change the way text is displayed within the shape: Do not Autofit, Shrink text on overflow, Resize shape to fit text. Text Padding - to change the autoshape Top, Bottom, Left and Right internal margins (i.e., the distance between the text within the shape and the autoshape borders). Note: this tab is only available if text is added within the autoshape, otherwise the tab is disabled. The Columns tab allows adding columns of text within the autoshape specifying the necessary Number of columns (up to 16) and Spacing between columns. Once you click OK, the text that already exists or any other text you enter within the autoshape will appear in columns and will flow from one column to another. The Alternative Text tab allows specifying the Title and Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand the contents of the shape. To replace the added autoshape, left-click it and use the Change Autoshape drop-down list on the Shape settings tab of the right sidebar. To delete the added autoshape, left-click it and press the Delete key. To learn how to align an autoshape on the slide or arrange several autoshapes, refer to the Align and arrange objects on a slide section. Join autoshapes using connectors You can connect autoshapes using lines with connection points to demonstrate dependencies between the objects (e.g. if you want to create a flowchart). To do that, click the Shape icon on the Home or Insert tab of the top toolbar, select the Lines group from the menu, click the necessary shape within the selected group (excepting the last three shapes which are not connectors, namely Curve, Scribble and Freeform), hover the mouse cursor over the first autoshape and click one of the connection points that appear on the shape outline, drag the mouse cursor towards the second autoshape and click the necessary connection point on its outline. If you move the joined autoshapes, the connector remains attached to the shapes and moves together with them. You can also detach the connector from the shapes and then attach it to any other connection points." + "body": "Insert an autoshape To add an autoshape to a slide in the Presentation Editor, in the slide list on the left, select the slide you want to add the autoshape to, click the Shape icon on the Home tab or the Shape gallery dropdown arrow on the Insert tab of the top toolbar, select one of the available autoshape groups from the Shape Gallery: Recently Used, Basic Shapes, Figured Arrows, Math, Charts, Stars & Ribbons, Callouts, Buttons, Rectangles, Lines, click on the necessary autoshape within the selected group, in the slide editing area, place the mouse cursor where you want the shape to be put, Note: you can click and drag to stretch the shape. once the autoshape is added, you can change its size, position and properties. You can save the autoshape as picture on your hard drive using the Save as picture option in the right-click menu. Note: to add a caption within the autoshape, make sure the shape is selected on the slide and start typing your text. The text you add in this way becomes a part of the autoshape (when you move or rotate the shape, the text moves or rotates with it). It's also possible to add an autoshape to a slide layout. To learn more, please refer to this article. Copy autoshape style formatting To copy a certain autoshape style formatting, select the autoshape whose formatting you need to copy with the mouse or using the keyboard, click the Copy style icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar (the mouse pointer will look like this ), select the required autoshape to apply the same formatting. Adjust autoshape settings To align and arrange autoshapes, use the right-click menu. The menu options are: Cut, Copy, Paste - standard options which are used to cut or copy the selected text/object and paste the previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position. Arrange is used to bring the selected autoshape to foreground, send it to background, move forward or backward as well as group or ungroup shapes to perform operations with several of them at once. To learn more on how to arrange objects, please refer to this page. Align is used to align the shape to the left, in the center, to the right, at the top, in the middle, at the bottom. To learn more on how to align objects, please refer to this page. Rotate is used to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the shape horizontally or vertically. Save as picture is used to save the shape as a picture on your hard drive. Edit points is used to customize or to change the curvature of your shape. To activate a shape’s editable anchor points, right-click the shape and choose Edit points from the menu or click the Edit shape > Edit points option on the right panel. The black squares that become active are the points where two lines meet, and the red line outlines the shape. Click and drag it to reposition the point, and to change the shape outline. Once you click the anchor point, two blue lines with white squares at the ends will appear. These are Bezier handles that allow you to create a curve and to change a curve’s smoothness. As long as the anchor points are active, you can add and delete them. To add a point to a shape, hold Ctrl and click the position where you want to add an anchor point. To delete a point, hold Ctrl and click the unnecessary point. Shape Advanced Settings is used to open the 'Shape - Advanced Settings' window. Add to layout is used to merge the autoshape with the background layout of the slide. Some of the autoshape settings can be altered using the Shape settings tab of the right sidebar. To activate it, click the autoshape and choose the Shape settings icon on the right. Here you can change the following properties: Fill - use this section to select the autoshape fill. You can choose the following options: Color fill - to specify the solid color you want to apply to the selected shape. Gradient fill - to fill the shape with two colors which smoothly change from one to another. Picture or texture - to use an image or a predefined texture as the shape background. Pattern - to fill the shape with a two-colored design composed of regularly repeated elements. No fill - select this option if you don't want to use any fill. For more detailed information on these options, please refer to the Fill objects and select colors section. Line - use this section to change the width, color or type of the autoshape line. To change the line width, select one of the available options from the Size drop-down list. The available options are: 0.5 pt, 1 pt, 1.5 pt, 2.25 pt, 3 pt, 4.5 pt, 6 pt. Or select the No Line option if you don't want to use any line. To change the line color, click on the colored box below and select the necessary color. You can use the selected theme color, a standard color or choose a custom color. To change the line type, select the necessary option from the corresponding dropdown list (a solid line is applied by default, you can change it to one of the available dashed lines). To change the line opacity, enter the required value manually or use the corresponding slider bar. Rotation is used to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the shape horizontally or vertically. Click one of the buttons: to rotate the shape by 90 degrees counterclockwise to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise to flip the shape horizontally (left to right) to flip the shape vertically (upside down) Edit shape - use this section to edit the shape points or to replace the current autoshape with another one selected from the dropdown list. Edit points is used to customize or to change the curvature of your shape. Once you click the anchor point, two blue lines with white squares at the ends will appear. These are Bezier handles that allow you to create a curve and to change a curve’s smoothness. As long as the anchor points are active, you can add and delete them. To add a point to a shape, hold Ctrl and click the position where you want to add an anchor point. To delete a point, hold Ctrl and click the unnecessary point. Change shape is used to replace the current autoshape. Choose another autoshape from the dropdown list. Shadow - open this menu to choose one of the preset shadow styles used for the shape. No Shadow - uncheck this menu point to display a shadow, and vice versa. Color - choose one of the available colors either on the Theme colors or the Standard colors palette; use the Eyedropper tool to copy color from other objects in the document; or click the More colors menu item to create a custom color. Adjust Shadow - create a custom shadow using the following sliders: Transparency - adjust the transparency of the shadow. Size - adjust the size of the shadow. Angle - adjust the angle of the shadow relative to its object. Distance - adjust the distance of the shadow from its object. To change the advanced settings of the autoshape, right-click the shape and select the Shape Advanced Settings option from the contextual menu or left-click it and press the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar. The shape properties window will be opened: The Placement tab allows you to change the autoshape Width and/or Height. If the Constant proportions button is clicked (in this case it looks like this ), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original autoshape aspect ratio. You can also set the exact position using the Horizontal and Vertical fields, as well as the From field where you can access such settings as Top Left Corner and Center. The Rotation tab contains the following parameters: Angle - use this option to rotate the shape by an exactly specified angle. Enter the necessary value measured in degrees into the field or adjust it using the arrows on the right. Flipped - check the Horizontally box to flip the shape horizontally (left to right) or check the Vertically box to flip the shape vertically (upside down). The Weights & Arrows tab contains the following parameters: Line Style - this option allows specifying the following parameters: Cap Type - this option allows setting the style for the end of the line, therefore it can be applied only to the shapes with the open outline, such as lines, polylines, etc.: Flat - the end points will be flat. Round - the end points will be rounded. Square - the end points will be square. Join Type - this option allows setting the style for the intersection of two lines, for example, it can affect a polyline or the corners of the triangle or rectangle outline: Round - the corner will be rounded. Bevel - the corner will be cut off angularly. Miter - the corner will be pointed. It goes well to shapes with sharp angles. Note: the effect will be more noticeable if you use a large outline width. Arrows - this option group is available if a shape from the Lines shape group is selected. It allows you to set the arrow Start and End Style and Size by selecting the appropriate option from the drop-down lists. The Text Box tab contains the following parameters: AutoFit - to change the way text is displayed within the shape: Do not Autofit, Shrink text on overflow, Resize shape to fit text. Text Padding - to change the autoshape Top, Bottom, Left and Right internal margins (i.e., the distance between the text within the shape and the autoshape borders). Note: this tab is only available if text is added within the autoshape, otherwise the tab is disabled. The Columns tab allows adding columns of text within the autoshape specifying the necessary Number of columns (up to 16) and Spacing between columns. Once you click OK, the text that already exists or any other text you enter within the autoshape will appear in columns and will flow from one column to another. The Alternative Text tab allows specifying the Title and Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand the contents of the shape. To replace the added autoshape, left-click it and use the Change Autoshape drop-down list on the Shape settings tab of the right sidebar. To delete the added autoshape, left-click it and press the Delete key. To learn how to align an autoshape on the slide or arrange several autoshapes, refer to the Align and arrange objects on a slide section. Join autoshapes using connectors You can connect autoshapes using lines with connection points to demonstrate dependencies between the objects (e.g. if you want to create a flowchart). To do that, click the Shape icon on the Home or Insert tab of the top toolbar, select the Lines group from the menu, click the necessary shape within the selected group (excepting the last three shapes which are not connectors, namely Curve, Scribble and Freeform), hover the mouse cursor over the first autoshape and click one of the connection points that appear on the shape outline, drag the mouse cursor towards the second autoshape and click the necessary connection point on its outline. If you move the joined autoshapes, the connector remains attached to the shapes and moves together with them. You can also detach the connector from the shapes and then attach it to any other connection points." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertCharts.htm", "title": "Insert and edit charts", - "body": "Insert a chart To insert a chart in the Presentation Editor, Put the cursor where you want to add a chart. Switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar. Click the Chart icon on the top toolbar. Select the needed chart type from the available ones: Column Charts Clustered column Stacked column 100% stacked column 3-D Clustered Column 3-D Stacked Column 3-D 100% stacked column 3-D Column Line Charts Line Stacked line 100% stacked line Line with markers Stacked line with markers 100% stacked line with markers 3-D Line Pie Charts Pie Doughnut 3-D Pie Bar Charts Clustered bar Stacked bar 100% stacked bar 3-D clustered bar 3-D stacked bar 3-D 100% stacked bar Area Charts Area Stacked area 100% stacked area Stock Charts XY (Scatter) Charts Scatter Stacked bar Scatter with smooth lines and markers Scatter with smooth lines Scatter with straight lines and markers Scatter with straight lines Radar Charts Radar Radar with markers Filled radar Combo Charts Clustered column - line Clustered column - line on secondary axis Stacked area - clustered column Custom combination Note: ONLYOFFICE Presentation Editor supports the following types of charts that were created with third-party editors: Pyramid, Bar (Pyramid), Horizontal/Vertical Cylinders, Horizontal/Vertical Cones. You can open the file containing such a chart and modify it using the available chart editing tools. After that, the Chart Editor window will appear where you can enter the necessary data into the cells using the following controls: and for copying and pasting the copied data and for undoing and redoing actions for inserting a function and for decreasing and increasing decimal places for changing the number format, i.e. the way the numbers you enter appear in cells for choosing a different type of chart. Click the Select Data button situated in the Chart Editor window. The Chart data window will open. Use the Chart data dialog to manage Chart data range, Legend entries (series), Horizontal (category) axis labels and Switch row/column. Chart data range - select data for your chart. Click the icon on the right of the Chart data range box to select the data range. Legend entries (series) - add, edit, or remove legend entries. Type or select a series name for legend entries. In Legend entries (series), click Add button. In Edit series, type a new legend entry or click the icon on the right of the Select name box. Horizontal (category) axis labels - change the text for category labels. In Horizontal (category) axis labels, click Edit. In Axis label range, type the labels you want to add or click the icon on the right of the Axis label range box to select the data range. Switch row/column - rearrange the worksheet data that is configured in the chart not in the way that you want it. Switch rows to columns to display data on a different axis. Click the OK button to apply the changes and close the window. Click the Change Chart Type button in the Chart Editor window to choose the chart type and style. Select a chart from the available sections: Column, Line, Pie, Bar, Area, Stock, XY (Scatter), Radar, or Combo. When you choose Combo Charts, the Chart type window lists chart series and allows choosing the types of charts to combine as well as select data series to place on a secondary axis. Change the chart settings by clicking the Edit Chart button situated in the Chart Editor window. The Chart - Advanced Settings window will open. The Layout tab allows you to change the layout of chart elements. Specify the Chart title position in regard to your chart by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to display no chart title, Overlay to overlay and center the title in the plot area, No overlay to display the title above the plot area. Specify the Legend position in regard to your chart by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to display no legend, Bottom to display the legend and align it to the bottom of the plot area, Top to display the legend and align it to the top of the plot area, Right to display the legend and align it to the right of the plot area, Left to display the legend and align it to the left of the plot area, Left overlay to overlay and center the legend to the left on the plot area, Right overlay to overlay and center the legend to the right on the plot area. Specify the Data labels (i.e. text labels that represent exact values of data points) parameters: Specify the Data Labels position relative to the data points selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list. The available options vary depending on the selected chart type. For Column/Bar charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Inner bottom, Inner top, Outer top. For Line/XY (Scatter)/Stock charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Left, Right, Top, Bottom. For Pie charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Fit to width, Inner top, Outer top. For Area charts as well as for 3D Column, Line, Bar, Radar, and Combo charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center. Select the data you wish to include in your labels by checking the corresponding boxes: Series name, Category name, Value, Enter a character (comma, semicolon, etc.) you wish to use to separate several labels into the Data labels separator entry field. Lines - is used to choose a line style for Line/XY (Scatter) charts. You can choose one of the following options: Straight to use straight lines among data points, Smooth to use smooth curves among data points, or None not to display lines. Markers - is used to specify whether the markers should be displayed (if the box is checked) or not (if the box is unchecked) for Line/XY (Scatter) charts. Note: the Lines and Markers options are available for Line charts and XY (Scatter) charts only. The Vertical axis tab allows you to change the parameters of the vertical axis also referred to as the values axis or y-axis which displays numeric values. Note that the vertical axis will be the category axis which displays text labels for the Bar charts, therefore in this case the Vertical Axis tab options will correspond to the ones described in the next section. For the XY (Scatter) charts, both axes are value axes. Note: the Axis Settings and Gridlines sections will be disabled for Pie charts since charts of this type have no axes and gridlines. Select Hide to hide the vertical axis in the chart, or leave it unchecked to have the vertical axis displayed. Specify Title orientation by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to display no vertical axis title, Rotated to display the title from bottom to top to the left of the vertical axis, Horizontal to display the title horizontally to the left of the vertical axis. Gridlines are used to specify the vertical gridlines to display by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None, Major, Minor, or Major and minor. Minimum value - is used to specify the lowest value displayed at the vertical axis start. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case, the minimum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right. Maximum value - is used to specify the highest value displayed at the vertical axis end. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case, the maximum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right. Axis crosses - is used to specify a point on the vertical axis where the horizontal axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case, the intersection point value of the axes is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the intersection point of the axes at the Minimum/Maximum Value on the vertical axis. Display units - is used to determine the representation of the numeric values along the vertical axis. This option can be useful if you're working with great numbers and wish the values on the axis to be displayed in a more compact and readable way (e.g. you can represent 50 000 as 50 by using the Thousands display units). Select desired units from the drop-down list: Hundreds, Thousands, 10 000, 100 000, Millions, 10 000 000, 100 000 000, Billions, Trillions, or choose the None option to return to the default units. Values in reverse order - is used to display values in the opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, the lowest value is at the bottom and the highest value is at the top of the axis. When the box is checked, the values are ordered from top to bottom. Logarithmic scale - is used to enable logarithmic scaling to the Base that is determined by the user. The Tick Options section allows adjusting the appearance of tick marks on the vertical scale. Major tick marks are the larger scale divisions which can have labels displaying numeric values. Minor tick marks are the scale subdivisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed if the corresponding option is set on the Layout tab. The Major/Minor type drop-down lists contain the following placement options: None to display no major/minor tick marks, Cross to display major/minor tick marks on both sides of the axis, In to display major/minor tick marks inside the axis, Out to display major/minor tick marks outside the axis. The Label options section allows adjusting the appearance of major tick mark labels which display values. To specify a Label position in regard to the vertical axis, select the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to display no tick mark labels, Low to display tick mark labels to the left of the plot area, High to display tick mark labels to the right of the plot area, Next to axis to display tick mark labels next to the axis. To specify a Label format, click the Label format button, and choose a category as deemed appropriate. Available label format categories: General Number Scientific Accounting Currency Date Time Percentage Fraction Text Custom Label format options vary depending on the selected category. For more information on changing the number format, go to this page. Check Linked to source to keep number formatting from the data source in the chart. Note: Secondary axes are supported in Combo charts only. Secondary axes are useful in Combo charts when data series varies considerably or mixed types of data are used to plot a chart. Secondary Axes make it easier to read and understand a combo chart. The Secondary vertical/horizontal axis tab appears when you choose an appropriate data series for a combo chart. All the settings and options on the Secondary vertical/horizontal axis tab are the same as the settings on the Vertical/Horizontal axis. For a detailed description of the Vertical/Horizontal axis options, see the description above/below. The Horizontal axis tab allows you to change the parameters of the horizontal axis also referred to as the categories axis or x-axis that displays text labels. Note that the horizontal axis will be the value axis that displays numeric values for the Bar charts, therefore in this case the Horizontal axis tab options will correspond to the ones described in the previous section. For the XY (Scatter) charts, both axes are value axes. Select Hide to hide the horizontal axis in the chart, or leave it unchecked to have the horizontal axis displayed. Specify Title orientation by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None when you don’t want to display a horizontal axis title, No overlay  to display the title below the horizontal axis, Gridlines are used to specify the horizontal gridlines to display by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None,  Major, Minor, or Major and Minor. Axis crosses - is used to specify a point on the horizontal axis where the vertical axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case, the intersection point value of the axes is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the intersection point of the axes at the Minimum/Maximum value (that corresponds to the first and last category) on the horizontal axis. Axis position - is used to specify where the axis text labels should be placed: On tick marks or Between tick marks. Values in reverse order - is used to display categories in the opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, categories are displayed from left to right. When the box is checked, the categories are ordered from right to left. The Tick Options section allows adjusting the appearance of tick marks on the horizontal scale. Major tick marks are the larger divisions that can have labels displaying category values. Minor tick marks are the smaller divisions that are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed if the corresponding option is set on the Layout tab. You can adjust the following tick mark parameters: Major/Minor type - is used to specify the following placement options: None to display no major/minor tick marks, Cross to display major/minor tick marks on both sides of the axis, In to display major/minor tick marks inside the axis, Out to display major/minor tick marks outside the axis. Interval between marks - is used to specify how many categories should be displayed between two adjacent tick marks. The Label options section allows adjusting the appearance of labels that display categories. Label position - is used to specify where the labels should be placed in regard to the horizontal axis. Select the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to display no category labels, Low to display category labels at the bottom of the plot area, High to display category labels at the top of the plot area, Next to axis to display category labels next to the axis. Axis label distance - is used to specify how closely the labels should be placed to the axis. You can specify the necessary value in the entry field. The more the value you set, the more the distance between the axis and labels is. Interval between labels - is used to specify how often the labels should be displayed. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case, the labels are displayed for every category. You can select the Manual option from the drop-down list and specify the necessary value in the entry field on the right. For example, enter 2 to display labels for every other category, etc. To specify a Label format, click the Label format button and choose a category as deemed appropriate. Available label format categories: General Number Scientific Accounting Currency Date Time Percentage Fraction Text Custom Label format options vary depending on the selected category. For more information on changing the number format, go to this page. Check Linked to source to keep number formatting from the data source in the chart. The Cell snapping tab contains the following parameters: Move and size with cells - this option allows snapping the chart to the cell behind it. If the cell moves (e.g. if you insert or delete some rows/columns), the chart will be moved together with the cell. If you increase or decrease the width or height of the cell, the chart will change its size as well. Move but don't size with cells - this option allows snapping the chart to the cell behind it preventing the chart from being resized. If the cell moves, the chart will be moved together with the cell, but if you change the cell size, the chart dimensions remain unchanged. Don't move or size with cells - this option allows preventing the chart from being moved or resized if the cell position or size was changed. The Alternative text tab allows specifying the Title and Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand the contents of the chart. Once the chart is added, you can also change its size and position. You can specify the chart position on the slide by dragging it vertically or horizontally. You can also add a chart into a text placeholder by pressing the Chart icon within it and selecting the necessary chart type: It's also possible to add a chart to a slide layout. To learn more, please refer to this article. Edit chart elements To edit the chart Title, select the default text with the mouse and type in your own instead. To change the font formatting within text elements, such as the chart title, axes titles, legend entries, data labels, etc., select the necessary text element by left-clicking it. Then use the corresponding icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar to change the font type, style, size, or color. When the chart is selected, the Shape settings icon is also available on the right, since the shape is used as the background for the chart. You can click this icon to open the Shape settings tab on the right sidebar and adjust the shape Fill and Line. Note that you cannot change the shape type. Using the Shape settings tab on the right panel, you can not only adjust the chart area itself but also change the chart elements, such as plot area, data series, chart title, legend, etc. and apply different fill types to them. Select the chart element by clicking it with the left mouse button and choose the preferred fill type: solid color, gradient, texture, picture, or pattern. Specify the fill parameters and set the Opacity level if necessary. When you select a vertical or horizontal axis or gridlines, the stroke settings are only available on the Shape settings tab: color, width, type, and opacity. For more details on how to work with shape colors, fills, and lines, please refer to this page. Note: the Show shadow option is also available on the Shape settings tab, but it is disabled for chart elements. If you need to resize chart elements, left-click to select the needed element and drag one of 8 white squares located along the perimeter of the element. To change the position of the element, left-click on it, make sure your cursor changed to , hold the left mouse button, and drag the element to the needed position. To delete a chart element, left-click it to select it, and press the Delete key. You can also rotate 3D charts using the mouse. Left-click within the plot area and hold the mouse button. Drag the cursor without releasing the mouse button to change the 3D chart orientation. Adjust chart settings The chart size, type, and style as well as the data used to create the chart can be altered using the right sidebar. To activate it, click the chart and choose the Chart settings icon on the right. The Size section allows you to change the chart width and/or height. If the Constant proportions button is clicked (in this case it looks like this ), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original chart aspect ratio. The Change Chart Type section allows you to change the type of the selected chart type and/or its style using the corresponding drop-down menu. To select the necessary chart Style, use the second drop-down menu in the Change Chart Type section. The Edit Data button allows you to open the Chart Editor window and start editing data as described above. Note: to quickly open the 'Chart Editor' window, you can also double-click the chart on the slide. Additionally, 3D Rotation settings are available for 3D charts: X rotation - set the required value for the X-axis rotation using the keyboard or via the Left and Right arrows to the right. Y rotation - set the required value for the Y-axis rotation using the keyboard or via the Up and Down arrows to the right. Perspective - set the required value for depth rotation using the keyboard or via the Narrow field of view and Widen field of view arrows to the right. Right Angle Axis - is used to set the right angle axis view. Autoscale - check this box to autoscale the depth and height values of the chart, or uncheck this box to set the depth and height values manually. Depth (% of base) - set the required depth value using the keyboard or via the arrows. Height (% of base) - set the required height value using the keyboard or via the arrows. Default Rotation - set the 3D parameters to their default. Please note that you cannot edit each element of the chart; the settings will be applied to the chart as a whole. The Show advanced settings option on the right sidebar allows you to open the Chart - Advanced Settings window where you adjust the following parameters: The Placement tab allows you to set the following properties: Size - use this option to change the image width and/or height. If the Constant proportions button is clicked (in this case it looks like this ), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original image aspect ratio. Position - set the exact position using the Horizontal and Vertical fields, as well as the From field where you can access such settings as Top left corner and Center. The Alternative text tab allows specifying the Title and Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand the contents of the chart. To delete the inserted chart, left-click it and press the Delete key. To learn how to align a chart on the slide or arrange several objects, refer to the Align and arrange objects on a slide section." + "body": "Insert a chart To insert a chart in the Presentation Editor, Put the cursor where you want to add a chart. Switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar. Click the Chart icon on the top toolbar. Select the needed chart type from the available ones: Column Charts Clustered column Stacked column 100% stacked column 3-D Clustered Column 3-D Stacked Column 3-D 100% stacked column 3-D Column Line Charts Line Stacked line 100% stacked line Line with markers Stacked line with markers 100% stacked line with markers 3-D Line Pie Charts Pie Doughnut 3-D Pie Bar Charts Clustered bar Stacked bar 100% stacked bar 3-D clustered bar 3-D stacked bar 3-D 100% stacked bar Area Charts Area Stacked area 100% stacked area Stock Charts XY (Scatter) Charts Scatter Stacked bar Scatter with smooth lines and markers Scatter with smooth lines Scatter with straight lines and markers Scatter with straight lines Radar Charts Radar Radar with markers Filled radar Combo Charts Clustered column - line Clustered column - line on secondary axis Stacked area - clustered column Custom combination Note: ONLYOFFICE Presentation Editor supports the following types of charts that were created with third-party editors: Pyramid, Bar (Pyramid), Horizontal/Vertical Cylinders, Horizontal/Vertical Cones. You can open the file containing such a chart and modify it using the available chart editing tools. The following types are supported for opening only: Histogram, Waterfall, Funnel. After that, the Chart Editor window will appear where you can enter the necessary data into the cells using the following controls: and for copying and pasting the copied data and for undoing and redoing actions for inserting a function and for decreasing and increasing decimal places for changing the number format, i.e. the way the numbers you enter appear in cells for choosing a different type of chart. Click the Select Data button situated in the Chart Editor window. The Chart data window will open. Use the Chart data dialog to manage Chart data range, Legend entries (series), Horizontal (category) axis labels and Switch row/column. Chart data range - select data for your chart. Click the icon on the right of the Chart data range box to select the data range. Legend entries (series) - add, edit, or remove legend entries. Type or select a series name for legend entries. In Legend entries (series), click Add button. In Edit series, type a new legend entry or click the icon on the right of the Select name box. Horizontal (category) axis labels - change the text for category labels. In Horizontal (category) axis labels, click Edit. In Axis label range, type the labels you want to add or click the icon on the right of the Axis label range box to select the data range. Switch row/column - rearrange the worksheet data that is configured in the chart not in the way that you want it. Switch rows to columns to display data on a different axis. Click the OK button to apply the changes and close the window. Click the Change Chart Type button in the Chart Editor window to choose the chart type and style. Select a chart from the available sections: Column, Line, Pie, Bar, Area, Stock, XY (Scatter), Radar, or Combo. When you choose Combo Charts, the Chart type window lists chart series and allows choosing the types of charts to combine as well as select data series to place on a secondary axis. Change the chart settings by clicking the Edit Chart button situated in the Chart Editor window. The Chart - Advanced Settings window will open. The Layout tab allows you to change the layout of chart elements. Specify the Chart title position in regard to your chart by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to display no chart title, Overlay to overlay and center the title in the plot area, No overlay to display the title above the plot area. Specify the Legend position in regard to your chart by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to display no legend, Bottom to display the legend and align it to the bottom of the plot area, Top to display the legend and align it to the top of the plot area, Right to display the legend and align it to the right of the plot area, Left to display the legend and align it to the left of the plot area, Left overlay to overlay and center the legend to the left on the plot area, Right overlay to overlay and center the legend to the right on the plot area. Specify the Data labels (i.e. text labels that represent exact values of data points) parameters: Specify the Data Labels position relative to the data points selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list. The available options vary depending on the selected chart type. For Column/Bar charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Inner bottom, Inner top, Outer top. For Line/XY (Scatter)/Stock charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Left, Right, Top, Bottom. For Pie charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Fit to width, Inner top, Outer top. For Area charts as well as for 3D Column, Line, Bar, Radar, and Combo charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center. Select the data you wish to include in your labels by checking the corresponding boxes: Series name, Category name, Value, Enter a character (comma, semicolon, etc.) you wish to use to separate several labels into the Data labels separator entry field. Lines - is used to choose a line style for Line/XY (Scatter) charts. You can choose one of the following options: Straight to use straight lines among data points, Smooth to use smooth curves among data points, or None not to display lines. Markers - is used to specify whether the markers should be displayed (if the box is checked) or not (if the box is unchecked) for Line/XY (Scatter) charts. Note: the Lines and Markers options are available for Line charts and XY (Scatter) charts only. The Vertical axis tab allows you to change the parameters of the vertical axis also referred to as the values axis or y-axis which displays numeric values. Note that the vertical axis will be the category axis which displays text labels for the Bar charts, therefore in this case the Vertical Axis tab options will correspond to the ones described in the next section. For the XY (Scatter) charts, both axes are value axes. Note: the Axis Settings and Gridlines sections will be disabled for Pie charts since charts of this type have no axes and gridlines. Select Hide to hide the vertical axis in the chart, or leave it unchecked to have the vertical axis displayed. Specify Title orientation by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to display no vertical axis title, Rotated to display the title from bottom to top to the left of the vertical axis, Horizontal to display the title horizontally to the left of the vertical axis. Gridlines are used to specify the vertical gridlines to display by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None, Major, Minor, or Major and minor. Minimum value - is used to specify the lowest value displayed at the vertical axis start. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case, the minimum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right. Maximum value - is used to specify the highest value displayed at the vertical axis end. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case, the maximum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right. Axis crosses - is used to specify a point on the vertical axis where the horizontal axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case, the intersection point value of the axes is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the intersection point of the axes at the Minimum/Maximum Value on the vertical axis. Display units - is used to determine the representation of the numeric values along the vertical axis. This option can be useful if you're working with great numbers and wish the values on the axis to be displayed in a more compact and readable way (e.g. you can represent 50 000 as 50 by using the Thousands display units). Select desired units from the drop-down list: Hundreds, Thousands, 10 000, 100 000, Millions, 10 000 000, 100 000 000, Billions, Trillions, or choose the None option to return to the default units. Values in reverse order - is used to display values in the opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, the lowest value is at the bottom and the highest value is at the top of the axis. When the box is checked, the values are ordered from top to bottom. Logarithmic scale - is used to enable logarithmic scaling to the Base that is determined by the user. The Tick Options section allows adjusting the appearance of tick marks on the vertical scale. Major tick marks are the larger scale divisions which can have labels displaying numeric values. Minor tick marks are the scale subdivisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed if the corresponding option is set on the Layout tab. The Major/Minor type drop-down lists contain the following placement options: None to display no major/minor tick marks, Cross to display major/minor tick marks on both sides of the axis, In to display major/minor tick marks inside the axis, Out to display major/minor tick marks outside the axis. The Label options section allows adjusting the appearance of major tick mark labels which display values. To specify a Label position in regard to the vertical axis, select the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to display no tick mark labels, Low to display tick mark labels to the left of the plot area, High to display tick mark labels to the right of the plot area, Next to axis to display tick mark labels next to the axis. To specify a Label format, click the Label format button, and choose a category as deemed appropriate. Available label format categories: General Number Scientific Accounting Currency Date Time Percentage Fraction Text Custom Label format options vary depending on the selected category. For more information on changing the number format, go to this page. Check Linked to source to keep number formatting from the data source in the chart. Note: Secondary axes are supported in Combo charts only. Secondary axes are useful in Combo charts when data series varies considerably or mixed types of data are used to plot a chart. Secondary Axes make it easier to read and understand a combo chart. The Secondary vertical/horizontal axis tab appears when you choose an appropriate data series for a combo chart. All the settings and options on the Secondary vertical/horizontal axis tab are the same as the settings on the Vertical/Horizontal axis. For a detailed description of the Vertical/Horizontal axis options, see the description above/below. The Horizontal axis tab allows you to change the parameters of the horizontal axis also referred to as the categories axis or x-axis that displays text labels. Note that the horizontal axis will be the value axis that displays numeric values for the Bar charts, therefore in this case the Horizontal axis tab options will correspond to the ones described in the previous section. For the XY (Scatter) charts, both axes are value axes. Select Hide to hide the horizontal axis in the chart, or leave it unchecked to have the horizontal axis displayed. Specify Title orientation by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None when you don’t want to display a horizontal axis title, No overlay  to display the title below the horizontal axis, Gridlines are used to specify the horizontal gridlines to display by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None,  Major, Minor, or Major and Minor. Axis crosses - is used to specify a point on the horizontal axis where the vertical axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case, the intersection point value of the axes is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the intersection point of the axes at the Minimum/Maximum value (that corresponds to the first and last category) on the horizontal axis. Axis position - is used to specify where the axis text labels should be placed: On tick marks or Between tick marks. Values in reverse order - is used to display categories in the opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, categories are displayed from left to right. When the box is checked, the categories are ordered from right to left. The Tick Options section allows adjusting the appearance of tick marks on the horizontal scale. Major tick marks are the larger divisions that can have labels displaying category values. Minor tick marks are the smaller divisions that are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed if the corresponding option is set on the Layout tab. You can adjust the following tick mark parameters: Major/Minor type - is used to specify the following placement options: None to display no major/minor tick marks, Cross to display major/minor tick marks on both sides of the axis, In to display major/minor tick marks inside the axis, Out to display major/minor tick marks outside the axis. Interval between marks - is used to specify how many categories should be displayed between two adjacent tick marks. The Label options section allows adjusting the appearance of labels that display categories. Label position - is used to specify where the labels should be placed in regard to the horizontal axis. Select the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to display no category labels, Low to display category labels at the bottom of the plot area, High to display category labels at the top of the plot area, Next to axis to display category labels next to the axis. Axis label distance - is used to specify how closely the labels should be placed to the axis. You can specify the necessary value in the entry field. The more the value you set, the more the distance between the axis and labels is. Interval between labels - is used to specify how often the labels should be displayed. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case, the labels are displayed for every category. You can select the Manual option from the drop-down list and specify the necessary value in the entry field on the right. For example, enter 2 to display labels for every other category, etc. To specify a Label format, click the Label format button and choose a category as deemed appropriate. Available label format categories: General Number Scientific Accounting Currency Date Time Percentage Fraction Text Custom Label format options vary depending on the selected category. For more information on changing the number format, go to this page. Check Linked to source to keep number formatting from the data source in the chart. The Cell snapping tab contains the following parameters: Move and size with cells - this option allows snapping the chart to the cell behind it. If the cell moves (e.g. if you insert or delete some rows/columns), the chart will be moved together with the cell. If you increase or decrease the width or height of the cell, the chart will change its size as well. Move but don't size with cells - this option allows snapping the chart to the cell behind it preventing the chart from being resized. If the cell moves, the chart will be moved together with the cell, but if you change the cell size, the chart dimensions remain unchanged. Don't move or size with cells - this option allows preventing the chart from being moved or resized if the cell position or size was changed. The Alternative text tab allows specifying the Title and Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand the contents of the chart. Once the chart is added, you can also change its size and position. You can specify the chart position on the slide by dragging it vertically or horizontally. You can also add a chart into a text placeholder by pressing the Chart icon within it and selecting the necessary chart type: It's also possible to add a chart to a slide layout. To learn more, please refer to this article. Edit chart elements To edit the chart Title, select the default text with the mouse and type in your own instead. To change the font formatting within text elements, such as the chart title, axes titles, legend entries, data labels, etc., select the necessary text element by left-clicking it. Then use the corresponding icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar to change the font type, style, size, or color. When the chart is selected, the Shape settings icon is also available on the right, since the shape is used as the background for the chart. You can click this icon to open the Shape settings tab on the right sidebar and adjust the shape Fill and Line. Note that you cannot change the shape type. Using the Shape settings tab on the right panel, you can not only adjust the chart area itself but also change the chart elements, such as plot area, data series, chart title, legend, etc. and apply different fill types to them. Select the chart element by clicking it with the left mouse button and choose the preferred fill type: solid color, gradient, texture, picture, or pattern. Specify the fill parameters and set the Opacity level if necessary. When you select a vertical or horizontal axis or gridlines, the stroke settings are only available on the Shape settings tab: color, width, type, and opacity. For more details on how to work with shape colors, fills, and lines, please refer to this page. Note: the Show shadow option is also available on the Shape settings tab, but it is disabled for chart elements. If you need to resize chart elements, left-click to select the needed element and drag one of 8 white squares located along the perimeter of the element. To change the position of the element, left-click on it, make sure your cursor changed to , hold the left mouse button, and drag the element to the needed position. To delete a chart element, left-click it to select it, and press the Delete key. You can also rotate 3D charts using the mouse. Left-click within the plot area and hold the mouse button. Drag the cursor without releasing the mouse button to change the 3D chart orientation. Adjust chart settings The chart size, type, and style as well as the data used to create the chart can be altered using the right sidebar. To activate it, click the chart and choose the Chart settings icon on the right. The Size section allows you to change the chart width and/or height. If the Constant proportions button is clicked (in this case it looks like this ), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original chart aspect ratio. The Change Chart Type section allows you to change the type of the selected chart type and/or its style using the corresponding drop-down menu. To select the necessary chart Style, use the second drop-down menu in the Change Chart Type section. The Edit Data button allows you to open the Chart Editor window and start editing data as described above. Note: to quickly open the 'Chart Editor' window, you can also double-click the chart on the slide. Additionally, 3D Rotation settings are available for 3D charts: X rotation - set the required value for the X-axis rotation using the keyboard or via the Left and Right arrows to the right. Y rotation - set the required value for the Y-axis rotation using the keyboard or via the Up and Down arrows to the right. Perspective - set the required value for depth rotation using the keyboard or via the Narrow field of view and Widen field of view arrows to the right. Right Angle Axis - is used to set the right angle axis view. Autoscale - check this box to autoscale the depth and height values of the chart, or uncheck this box to set the depth and height values manually. Depth (% of base) - set the required depth value using the keyboard or via the arrows. Height (% of base) - set the required height value using the keyboard or via the arrows. Default Rotation - set the 3D parameters to their default. Please note that you cannot edit each element of the chart; the settings will be applied to the chart as a whole. The Show advanced settings option on the right sidebar allows you to open the Chart - Advanced Settings window where you adjust the following parameters: The Placement tab allows you to set the following properties: Size - use this option to change the image width and/or height. If the Constant proportions button is clicked (in this case it looks like this ), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original image aspect ratio. Position - set the exact position using the Horizontal and Vertical fields, as well as the From field where you can access such settings as Top left corner and Center. The Alternative text tab allows specifying the Title and Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand the contents of the chart. To delete the inserted chart, left-click it and press the Delete key. To learn how to align a chart on the slide or arrange several objects, refer to the Align and arrange objects on a slide section." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertEquation.htm", @@ -213,7 +218,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertText.htm", "title": "Insert and format your text", - "body": "Insert your text box into a presentation In the Presentation Editor, you can add new text in three different ways: Add a text passage within the corresponding text placeholder on the slide layout. To do that, just put the cursor within the placeholder and type in your text or paste it using the Ctrl+V key combination instead of the default text. Add a text passage anywhere on a slide. You can insert a text box (a rectangular frame that allows you to enter some text within it) or a Text Art object (a text box with a predefined font style and color that allows you to apply some text effects). Depending on the necessary text object type, you can do the following: to add a text box, click the Text Box icon on the Home or Insert tab of the top toolbar, choose one of the following options: Insert horizontal text box or Insert vertical text box, then click where you want to insert the text box, hold the mouse button and drag the text box border to specify its size. When you release the mouse button, the insertion point will appear in the added text box, allowing you to enter your text. It's also possible to insert a text box by clicking the Shape icon on the top toolbar and selecting the shape from the Basic Shapes group. to add a Text Art object, click the Text Art icon on the Insert tab of the top toolbar, then click on the desired style template – the Text Art object will be added in the center of the slide. Select the default text within the text box with the mouse and replace it with your own text. Add a text passage within an autoshape. Select a shape and start typing your text. Click outside of the text object to apply the changes and return to the slide. The text within the text object is a part of the latter (when you move or rotate the text object, the text moves or rotates with it). As an inserted text object represents a rectangular frame (it has invisible text box borders by default) with text in it and this frame is a common autoshape, you can change both the shape and text properties. You can save the text box as a picture on your hard drive using the Save as picture option in the right-click menu. To delete the added text object, click on the text box border and press the Delete key. The text within the text box will also be deleted. Format a text box Select the text box by clicking on its border to change its properties. When the text box is selected, its borders are displayed as solid (not dashed) lines. to resize, move, rotate the text box, use the special handles on the edges of the shape. to edit the text box fill, line, replace the rectangular box with a different shape, or access the shape advanced settings, click the Shape settings icon on the right sidebar and use the corresponding options. to align a text box on the slide, rotate or flip it, arrange text boxes as related to other objects, right-click on the text box border, and use the contextual menu options. to create columns of text within the text box, click the corresponding icon on the text formatting toolbar and choose the preferable option, or right-click on the text box border, click the Shape Advanced Settings option, and switch to the Columns tab in the Shape - Advanced Settings window. Format the text within the text box Click the text within the text box to change its properties. When the text is selected, the text box borders are displayed as dashed lines. Note: it's also possible to change text formatting when the text box (not the text itself) is selected. In such a case, any changes will be applied to the whole text within the text box. Some font formatting options (font type, size, color, and decoration styles) can be applied to the previously selected part of the text separately. Align your text within the text box The text is aligned horizontally in four ways: left, right, center, or justified. To do that: place the cursor in the position where you want the alignment to be applied (this can be a new line or already entered text), drop-down the Horizontal align list on the Home tab of the top toolbar, select the alignment type you would like to apply: the Align text left option allows you to line up your text on the left side of the text box (the right side remains unaligned). the Align text center option allows you to line up your text in the center of the text box (the right and the left sides remain unaligned). the Align text right option allows you to line up your text on the right side of the text box (the left side remains unaligned). the Justify option allows you to line up your text both on the left and on the right sides of the text box (additional spacing is added where necessary to keep the alignment). Note: these parameters can also be found in the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window. The text is aligned vertically in three ways: top, middle, or bottom. To do that: place the cursor in the position where you want the alignment to be applied (this can be a new line or already entered text), drop-down the Vertical align list on the Home tab of the top toolbar, select the alignment type you would like to apply: the Align text to the top option allows you to line up your text to the top of the text box. the Align text to the middle option allows you to line up your text in the center of the text box. the Align text to the bottom option allows you to line up your text to the bottom of the text box. Change the text direction To Rotate the text within the text box, right-click the text, select the Text Direction option, and then choose one of the available options: Horizontal (selected by default), Rotate Text Down (used to set a vertical direction, from top to bottom) or Rotate Text Up (used to set a vertical direction, from bottom to top). Adjust font type, size, color and apply decoration styles You can select the font type, size, and color as well as apply various font decoration styles using the corresponding icons situated on the Home tab of the top toolbar. Note: in case you want to apply the formatting to the text already present in the presentation, select it with the mouse or use the keyboard and apply the formatting. You can also place the mouse cursor within the necessary word to apply the formatting to this word only. Font Used to select one of the fonts from the list of available ones. If the required font is not available in the list, you can download and install it on your operating system, and the font will be available for use in the desktop version. Font size Used to choose from the preset font size values in the dropdown list (the default values are: 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 36, 48, 72 and 96). It's also possible to manually enter a custom value up to 300 pt in the font size field. Press Enter to confirm. Increment font size Used to change the font size making it one point bigger each time the button is pressed. Decrement font size Used to change the font size making it one point smaller each time the button is pressed. Change case Used to change the font case. Sentence case. - the case matches that of a common sentence. lowercase - all letters are small. UPPERCASE - all letters are capitalized. Capitalize Each Word - each word starts with a capital letter. tOGGLE cASE - reverse the case of the selected text or the word where the mouse cursor is positioned. Highlight color Used to mark separate sentences, phrases, words, or even characters by adding a color band that imitates the highlighter pen effect throughout the text. You can select the required part of the text and click the downward arrow next to the icon to select a color in the palette (this color set does not depend on the selected Color scheme and includes 16 colors) - the color will be applied to the selected text. Alternatively, you can first choose a highlight color and then start selecting the text with the mouse - the mouse pointer will look like this and you'll be able to highlight several different parts of your text sequentially. To stop highlighting, just click the icon once again. To delete the highlight color, choose the No Fill option. Font color Used to change the color of the letters/characters in the text. Click the downward arrow next to the icon to select the color. Bold Used to make the font bold giving it a heavier appearance. Italic Used to make the font slightly slanted to the right. Underline Used to make the text underlined with a line going under the letters. Strikeout Used to make the text struck out with a line going through the letters. Superscript Used to make the text smaller placing it in the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions. Subscript Used to make the text smaller placing it in the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas. Set line spacing and change paragraph indents You can set the line height for the text lines within the paragraph as well as the margins between the current and the previous or the following paragraph. To do that, put the cursor within the required paragraph or select several paragraphs with the mouse, use the corresponding fields of the Paragraph settings tab on the right sidebar to achieve the desired results: Line Spacing - set the line height for the text lines within the paragraph. You can select among two options: multiple (sets line spacing that can be expressed in numbers greater than 1), exactly (sets fixed line spacing). You can specify the necessary value in the field on the right. Paragraph Spacing - set the amount of space between paragraphs. Before - set the amount of space before the paragraph. After - set the amount of space after the paragraph. Note: these parameters can also be found in the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window. To quickly change the current paragraph line spacing, you can also use the Line spacing icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar selecting the required value from the list: 1.0, 1.15, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, or 3.0 lines. To change the paragraph offset from the left side of the text box, put the cursor within the required paragraph, or select several paragraphs with the mouse and use the respective icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar: Decrease indent and Increase indent . Adjust paragraph advanced settings To open the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window, right-click the text and choose the Paragraph Advanced Settings option from the menu. It's also possible to put the cursor within the required paragraph - the Paragraph settings tab will be activated on the right sidebar. Press the Show advanced settings link. The paragraph properties window will be opened: The Indents & Spacing tab allows you to: change the alignment type for the paragraph text, change the paragraph indents as related to the internal margins of the text box, Left - set the paragraph offset from the left internal margin of the text box specifying the necessary numeric value, Right - set the paragraph offset from the right internal margin of the text box specifying the necessary numeric value, Special - set an indent for the first line of the paragraph: select the corresponding menu item ((none), First line, Hanging) and change the default numeric value specified for First Line or Hanging, change the paragraph line spacing. You can also use the horizontal ruler to set indents. Select the necessary paragraph(s) and drag the indent markers along the ruler. First Line Indent marker is used to set the offset from the left internal margin of the text box for the first line of the paragraph. Hanging Indent marker is used to set the offset from the left internal margin of the text box for the second and all the subsequent lines of the paragraph. Left Indent marker is used to set the entire paragraph offset from the left internal margin of the text box. Right Indent marker is used to set the paragraph offset from the right internal margin of the text box. Note: if you don't see the rulers, switch to the Home tab of the top toolbar, click the View settings icon at the upper right corner, and uncheck the Hide Rulers option to display them. The Font tab contains the following parameters: Strikethrough is used to make the text struck out with a line going through the letters. Double strikethrough is used to make the text struck out with a double line going through the letters. Superscript is used to make the text smaller placing it in the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions. Subscript is used to make the text smaller placing it in the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas. Small caps is used to make all letters lowercase. All caps is used to make all letters upper case. Character Spacing is used to set the space between the characters. Increase the default value to apply the Expanded spacing, or decrease the default value to apply the Condensed spacing. Use the arrow buttons or enter the necessary value in the box. All the changes will be displayed in the preview field below. The Tab tab allows you to change tab stops i.e. the position the cursor advances to when you press the Tab key. Default Tab is set at 2.54 cm. You can decrease or increase this value using the arrow buttons or enter the necessary one in the box. Tab Position - is used to set custom tab stops. Enter the necessary value in this box, adjust it more precisely using the arrow buttons, and press the Specify button. Your custom tab position will be added to the list in the field below. Alignment - is used to set the necessary alignment type for each of the tab positions in the list above. Select the necessary tab position in the list, choose the Left, Center, or Right option from the Alignment drop-down list, and press the Specify button. Left - lines up your text on the left side at the tab stop position; the text moves to the right from the tab stop as you type. Such a tab stop will be indicated on the horizontal ruler by the marker. Center - centers the text at the tab stop position. Such a tab stop will be indicated on the horizontal ruler by the marker. Right - lines up your text on the right side at the tab stop position; the text moves to the left from the tab stop as you type. Such a tab stop will be indicated on the horizontal ruler by the marker. To delete tab stops from the list, select a tab stop and press the Remove or Remove All button. To set tab stops, you can also use the horizontal ruler: Click the tab selector button in the upper left corner of the working area to choose the necessary tab stop type: Left , Center , Right . Click on the bottom edge of the ruler where you want to place the tab stop. Drag it along the ruler to change its position. To remove the added tab stop, drag it out of the ruler. Note: if you don't see the rulers, switch to the Home tab of the top toolbar, click the View settings icon at the upper right corner, and uncheck the Hide Rulers option to display them. Edit a Text Art style Select a text object and click the Text Art settings icon on the right sidebar. Change the applied text style by selecting a new Template from the gallery. You can also change the basic style additionally by selecting a different font type, size, etc. Change the font fill and line. The available options are the same as the ones for autoshapes. Apply a text effect by selecting the necessary text transformation type from the Transform gallery. You can adjust the degree of text distortion by dragging the pink diamond-shaped handle." + "body": "Insert your text box into a presentation In the Presentation Editor, you can add new text in three different ways: Add a text passage within the corresponding text placeholder on the slide layout. To do that, just put the cursor within the placeholder and type in your text or paste it using the Ctrl+V key combination instead of the default text. Add a text passage anywhere on a slide. You can insert a text box (a rectangular frame that allows you to enter some text within it) or a Text Art object (a text box with a predefined font style and color that allows you to apply some text effects). Depending on the necessary text object type, you can do the following: to add a text box, click the Text Box icon on the Home or Insert tab of the top toolbar, choose one of the following options: Insert horizontal text box or Insert vertical text box, then click where you want to insert the text box, hold the mouse button and drag the text box border to specify its size. When you release the mouse button, the insertion point will appear in the added text box, allowing you to enter your text. It's also possible to insert a text box by clicking the Shape icon on the top toolbar and selecting the shape from the Basic Shapes group. to add a Text Art object, click the Text Art icon on the Insert tab of the top toolbar, then click on the desired style template – the Text Art object will be added in the center of the slide. Select the default text within the text box with the mouse and replace it with your own text. Add a text passage within an autoshape. Select a shape and start typing your text. Click outside of the text object to apply the changes and return to the slide. The text within the text object is a part of the latter (when you move or rotate the text object, the text moves or rotates with it). As an inserted text object represents a rectangular frame (it has invisible text box borders by default) with text in it and this frame is a common autoshape, you can change both the shape and text properties. You can save the text box as a picture on your hard drive using the Save as picture option in the right-click menu. To delete the added text object, click on the text box border and press the Delete key. The text within the text box will also be deleted. Format a text box Select the text box by clicking on its border to change its properties. When the text box is selected, its borders are displayed as solid (not dashed) lines. to resize, move, rotate the text box, use the special handles on the edges of the shape. to edit the text box fill, line, replace the rectangular box with a different shape, or access the shape advanced settings, click the Shape settings icon on the right sidebar and use the corresponding options. to align a text box on the slide, rotate or flip it, arrange text boxes as related to other objects, right-click on the text box border, and use the contextual menu options. to create columns of text within the text box, click the corresponding icon on the text formatting toolbar and choose the preferable option, or right-click on the text box border, click the Shape Advanced Settings option, and switch to the Columns tab in the Shape - Advanced Settings window. Format the text within the text box Click the text within the text box to change its properties. When the text is selected, the text box borders are displayed as dashed lines. Note: it's also possible to change text formatting when the text box (not the text itself) is selected. In such a case, any changes will be applied to the whole text within the text box. Some font formatting options (font type, size, color, and decoration styles) can be applied to the previously selected part of the text separately. Align your text within the text box The text is aligned horizontally in four ways: left, right, center, or justified. To do that: place the cursor in the position where you want the alignment to be applied (this can be a new line or already entered text), drop-down the Horizontal align list on the Home tab of the top toolbar, select the alignment type you would like to apply: the Align text left option allows you to line up your text on the left side of the text box (the right side remains unaligned). the Align text center option allows you to line up your text in the center of the text box (the right and the left sides remain unaligned). the Align text right option allows you to line up your text on the right side of the text box (the left side remains unaligned). the Justify option allows you to line up your text both on the left and on the right sides of the text box (additional spacing is added where necessary to keep the alignment). Note: these parameters can also be found in the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window. The text is aligned vertically in three ways: top, middle, or bottom. To do that: place the cursor in the position where you want the alignment to be applied (this can be a new line or already entered text), drop-down the Vertical align list on the Home tab of the top toolbar, select the alignment type you would like to apply: the Align text to the top option allows you to line up your text to the top of the text box. the Align text to the middle option allows you to line up your text in the center of the text box. the Align text to the bottom option allows you to line up your text to the bottom of the text box. Change the text direction To Rotate the text within the text box, right-click the text, select the Text Direction option, and then choose one of the available options: Horizontal (selected by default), Rotate Text Down (used to set a vertical direction, from top to bottom) or Rotate Text Up (used to set a vertical direction, from bottom to top). Adjust font type, size, color and apply decoration styles You can select the font type, size, and color as well as apply various font decoration styles using the corresponding icons situated on the Home tab of the top toolbar. Note: in case you want to apply the formatting to the text already present in the presentation, select it with the mouse or use the keyboard and apply the formatting. You can also place the mouse cursor within the necessary word to apply the formatting to this word only. Font Used to select one of the fonts from the list of available ones. If the required font is not available in the list, you can download and install it on your operating system, and the font will be available for use in the desktop version. Font size Used to choose from the preset font size values in the dropdown list (the default values are: 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 36, 48, 72 and 96). It's also possible to manually enter a custom value up to 300 pt in the font size field. Press Enter to confirm. Increment font size Used to change the font size making it one point bigger each time the button is pressed. Decrement font size Used to change the font size making it one point smaller each time the button is pressed. Change case Used to change the font case. Sentence case. - the case matches that of a common sentence. lowercase - all letters are small. UPPERCASE - all letters are capitalized. Capitalize Each Word - each word starts with a capital letter. tOGGLE cASE - reverse the case of the selected text or the word where the mouse cursor is positioned. Highlight color Used to mark separate sentences, phrases, words, or even characters by adding a color band that imitates the highlighter pen effect throughout the text. You can select the required part of the text and click the downward arrow next to the icon to select a color in the palette (this color set does not depend on the selected Color scheme and includes 16 colors) - the color will be applied to the selected text. Alternatively, you can first choose a highlight color and then start selecting the text with the mouse - the mouse pointer will look like this and you'll be able to highlight several different parts of your text sequentially. To stop highlighting, just click the icon once again. To delete the highlight color, choose the No Fill option. Font color Used to change the color of the letters/characters in the text. Click the downward arrow next to the icon to select the color. Bold Used to make the font bold giving it a heavier appearance. Italic Used to make the font slightly slanted to the right. Underline Used to make the text underlined with a line going under the letters. Strikeout Used to make the text struck out with a line going through the letters. Superscript Used to make the text smaller placing it in the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions. Subscript Used to make the text smaller placing it in the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas. Set line spacing and change paragraph indents You can set the line height for the text lines within the paragraph as well as the margins between the current and the previous or the following paragraph. To do that, put the cursor within the required paragraph or select several paragraphs with the mouse, use the corresponding fields of the Paragraph settings tab on the right sidebar to achieve the desired results: Line Spacing - set the line height for the text lines within the paragraph. You can select among two options: multiple (sets line spacing that can be expressed in numbers greater than 1), exactly (sets fixed line spacing). You can specify the necessary value in the field on the right. Paragraph Spacing - set the amount of space between paragraphs. Before - set the amount of space before the paragraph. After - set the amount of space after the paragraph. Note: these parameters can also be found in the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window. To quickly change the current paragraph line spacing, you can also use the Paragraph line spacing icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar selecting the required value from the list: 1.0, 1.15, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, or 3.0 lines, as well as open the corresponding right panel by clicking the Line spacing options menu item. To change the paragraph offset from the left side of the text box, put the cursor within the required paragraph, or select several paragraphs with the mouse and use the respective icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar: Decrease indent and Increase indent . Adjust paragraph advanced settings To open the Paragraph - Advanced Settings window, right-click the text and choose the Paragraph Advanced Settings option from the menu. It's also possible to put the cursor within the required paragraph - the Paragraph settings tab will be activated on the right sidebar. Press the Show advanced settings link. The paragraph properties window will be opened: The Indents & Spacing tab allows you to: change the alignment type for the paragraph text, change the paragraph indents as related to the internal margins of the text box, Left - set the paragraph offset from the left internal margin of the text box specifying the necessary numeric value, Right - set the paragraph offset from the right internal margin of the text box specifying the necessary numeric value, Special - set an indent for the first line of the paragraph: select the corresponding menu item ((none), First line, Hanging) and change the default numeric value specified for First Line or Hanging, change the paragraph line spacing. You can also use the horizontal ruler to set indents. Select the necessary paragraph(s) and drag the indent markers along the ruler. First Line Indent marker is used to set the offset from the left internal margin of the text box for the first line of the paragraph. Hanging Indent marker is used to set the offset from the left internal margin of the text box for the second and all the subsequent lines of the paragraph. Left Indent marker is used to set the entire paragraph offset from the left internal margin of the text box. Right Indent marker is used to set the paragraph offset from the right internal margin of the text box. Note: if you don't see the rulers, switch to the Home tab of the top toolbar, click the View settings icon at the upper right corner, and uncheck the Hide Rulers option to display them. The Font tab contains the following parameters: Strikethrough is used to make the text struck out with a line going through the letters. Double strikethrough is used to make the text struck out with a double line going through the letters. Superscript is used to make the text smaller placing it in the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions. Subscript is used to make the text smaller placing it in the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas. Small caps is used to make all letters lowercase. All caps is used to make all letters upper case. Character Spacing is used to set the space between the characters. Increase the default value to apply the Expanded spacing, or decrease the default value to apply the Condensed spacing. Use the arrow buttons or enter the necessary value in the box. All the changes will be displayed in the preview field below. The Tab tab allows you to change tab stops i.e. the position the cursor advances to when you press the Tab key. Default Tab is set at 2.54 cm. You can decrease or increase this value using the arrow buttons or enter the necessary one in the box. Tab Position - is used to set custom tab stops. Enter the necessary value in this box, adjust it more precisely using the arrow buttons, and press the Specify button. Your custom tab position will be added to the list in the field below. Alignment - is used to set the necessary alignment type for each of the tab positions in the list above. Select the necessary tab position in the list, choose the Left, Center, or Right option from the Alignment drop-down list, and press the Specify button. Left - lines up your text on the left side at the tab stop position; the text moves to the right from the tab stop as you type. Such a tab stop will be indicated on the horizontal ruler by the marker. Center - centers the text at the tab stop position. Such a tab stop will be indicated on the horizontal ruler by the marker. Right - lines up your text on the right side at the tab stop position; the text moves to the left from the tab stop as you type. Such a tab stop will be indicated on the horizontal ruler by the marker. To delete tab stops from the list, select a tab stop and press the Remove or Remove All button. To set tab stops, you can also use the horizontal ruler: Click the tab selector button in the upper left corner of the working area to choose the necessary tab stop type: Left , Center , Right . Click on the bottom edge of the ruler where you want to place the tab stop. Drag it along the ruler to change its position. To remove the added tab stop, drag it out of the ruler. Note: if you don't see the rulers, switch to the Home tab of the top toolbar, click the View settings icon at the upper right corner, and uncheck the Hide Rulers option to display them. Edit a Text Art style Select a text object and click the Text Art settings icon on the right sidebar. Change the applied text style by selecting a new Template from the gallery. You can also change the basic style additionally by selecting a different font type, size, etc. Change the font fill and line. The available options are the same as the ones for autoshapes. Apply a text effect by selecting the necessary text transformation type from the Transform gallery. You can adjust the degree of text distortion by dragging the pink diamond-shaped handle." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/ManageSlides.htm", @@ -243,7 +248,12 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/PhotoEditor.htm", "title": "Edit an image", - "body": "ONLYOFFICE Presentation Editor comes with a very powerful photo editor, that allows you to adjust the image with filters and make all kinds of annotations. Select an image in your presentation. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose Photo Editor. You are now in the editing environment. Below the image you will find the following checkboxes and slider filters: Grayscale, Sepia, Sepia 2, Blur, Emboss, Invert, Sharpen; Remove White (Threshhold, Distance), Gradient transparency, Brightness, Noise, Pixelate, Color Filter; Tint, Multiply, Blend. Below the filters you will find buttons for Undo, Redo and Resetting; Delete, Delete all; Crop (Custom, Square, 3:2, 4:3, 5:4, 7:5, 16:9); Flip (Flip X, Flip Y, Reset); Rotate (30 degree, -30 degree,Manual rotation slider); Draw (Free, Straight, Color, Size slider); Shape (Recrangle, Circle, Triangle, Fill, Stroke, Stroke size); Icon (Arrows, Stars, Polygon, Location, Heart, Bubble, Custom icon, Color); Text (Bold, Italic, Underline, Left, Center, Right, Color, Text size); Mask. Feel free to try all of these and remember you can always undo them. When finished, click the OK button. The edited picture is now included in the presentation." + "body": "ONLYOFFICE Presentation Editor comes with a very powerful photo editor, that allows you to adjust the image with filters and make all kinds of annotations. Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager. Select an image in your presentation. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose Photo Editor. You are now in the editing environment. Below the image you will find the following checkboxes and slider filters: Grayscale, Sepia, Sepia 2, Blur, Emboss, Invert, Sharpen; Remove White (Threshhold, Distance), Gradient transparency, Brightness, Noise, Pixelate, Color Filter; Tint, Multiply, Blend. Below the filters you will find buttons for Undo, Redo and Resetting; Delete, Delete all; Crop (Custom, Square, 3:2, 4:3, 5:4, 7:5, 16:9); Flip (Flip X, Flip Y, Reset); Rotate (30 degree, -30 degree,Manual rotation slider); Draw (Free, Straight, Color, Size slider); Shape (Recrangle, Circle, Triangle, Fill, Stroke, Stroke size); Icon (Arrows, Stars, Polygon, Location, Heart, Bubble, Custom icon, Color); Text (Bold, Italic, Underline, Left, Center, Right, Color, Text size); Mask. Feel free to try all of these and remember you can always undo them. When finished, click the OK button. The edited picture is now included in the presentation." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/Pixabay.htm", + "title": "Pixabay", + "body": "The Pixabay plugin allows you to add pictures to your presentation from an open collection of Pixabay service that offers copyright free images. The plugin is compatible with the self-hosted and the desktop versions of the ONLYOFFICE editors and can be added to ONLYOFFICE instances manually using the Plugin Manager. Installation To install the Pixabay plugin, Go to the Plugins tab. Open the Plugin Manager. Find on the marketplace and click the Install button below. Click the Pixabay icon in the Plugins tab. Proceed with the plugin configuration. For more details, please refer to the ONLYOFFICE API documentation. Configuration Log in to your Pixabay account or register a new one. Go to the Search Images section of the Pixabay API page. Scroll down to the Parameters list and copy the link under the Key parameter. If you are not logged in, press Login next to the Key parameter. Paste the key to the API key field on the left panel of the Plugins tab in the Presentation Editor. Click Save. How to use Go to the Plugins tab. Click the Pixabay icon. On the left panel that opens, type in the keyword you associate with the image you are looking for. Use the Show settings button to refine your search by Language, Image type, Orientation and Category. Click Hide settings to reduce the search section. Click Search. Scroll through search results and click the image to add it to your presentation." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/PreviewPresentation.htm", @@ -258,31 +268,36 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/SetSlideParameters.htm", "title": "Set slide parameters", - "body": "To customize your presentation in the Presentation Editor, you can select a theme, color scheme, slide size and orientation for the entire presentation, change the background fill or slide layout for each separate slide, apply transitions between the slides. It's also possible to add explanatory notes to each slide that can be helpful when demonstrating the presentation in the Presenter mode. Themes allow you to quickly change the presentation design, notably the slides background appearance, predefined fonts for titles and texts and the color scheme that is used for the presentation elements. To select a theme for the presentation, click on the necessary predefined theme from the themes gallery on the right side of the top toolbar on the Home tab. The selected theme will be applied to all the slides if you have not previously selected certain slides to apply the theme to. To change the selected theme for one or more slides, you can right-click the selected slides in the list on the left (or right-click a slide in the editing area), select the Change Theme option from the contextual menu and choose the necessary theme. Color Schemes affect the predefined colors used for the presentation elements (fonts, lines, fills etc.) and allow you to maintain color consistency throughout the entire presentation. To change a color scheme, click the Change color scheme icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar and select the necessary scheme from the drop-down list. The selected color scheme will be highlighted in the list and applied to all the slides. To change the size of all the slides in the presentation, click the Select slide size icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar and select the necessary option from the drop-down list. You can select: one of the two quick-access presets - Standard (4:3) or Widescreen (16:9), the Advanced Settings option that opens the Slide Size Settings window where you can select one of the available presets or set a Custom size specifying the desired Width and Height values. The available presets are: Standard (4:3), Widescreen (16:9), Widescreen (16:10), Letter Paper (8.5x11 in), Ledger Paper (11x17 in), A3 Paper (297x420 mm), A4 Paper (210x297 mm), B4 (ICO) Paper (250x353 mm), B5 (ICO) Paper (176x250 mm), 35 mm Slides, Overhead, Banner. The Slide Orientation menu allows changing the currently selected orientation type. The default orientation type is Landscape that can be switched to Portrait. The Number slides from field allows setting the slide that will mark the start of slide numeration. To change a background fill: in the slide list on the left, select the slides you want to apply the fill to. Or click at any blank space within the currently edited slide in the slide editing area to change the fill type for this separate slide. on the Slide settings tab of the right sidebar, select the necessary option: Color Fill - select this option to specify the solid color you want to apply to the selected slides. Gradient Fill - select this option to fill the slide with two colors which smoothly change from one to another. Picture or Texture - select this option to use an image or a predefined texture as the slide background. Pattern - select this option to fill the slide with a two-colored design composed of regularly repeated elements. No Fill - select this option if you don't want to use any fill. Opacity - drag the slider or enter the percent value manually. The default value is 100%. It corresponds to the full opacity. The 0% value corresponds to the full transparency. For more detailed information on these options, please refer to the Fill objects and select colors section. Transitions help make your presentation more dynamic and keep your audience's attention. To apply a transition: in the slide list on the left, select the slides you want to apply a transition to, choose a transition in the Effect drop-down list on the Slide settings tab, To open the Slide settings tab, you can click the Slide settings icon on the right or right-click the slide in the slide editing area and select the Slide Settings option from the contextual menu. adjust the transition properties: choose a transition variation, duration and the way to advance slides, click the Apply to All Slides button if you want to apply the same transition to all slides in the presentation. For more detailed information on these options, please refer to the Apply transitions section. To change a slide layout: in the slide list on the left, select the slides you want to apply a new layout to, click the Change slide layout icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar, select the necessary layout from the menu. Alternatively, you can right-click the necessary slide in the list on the left or in the editing area, select the Change Layout option from the contextual menu and choose the necessary layout. Currently, the following layouts are available: Title Slide, Title and Content, Section Header, Two Content, Comparison, Title Only, Blank, Content with Caption, Picture with Caption, Title and Vertical Text, Vertical Title and Text. To add objects to a slide layout: click the Change slide layout icon and select a layout you want to add an object to, using the Insert tab of the top toolbar, add the necessary object to the slide (image, table, chart, shape), then right-click on this object and select Add to Layout option, on the Home tab, click Change slide layout and apply the changed layout. The selected objects will be added to the current theme's layout. Objects placed on a slide this way cannot be selected, resized, or moved. To return the slide layout to its original state: in the slide list on the left, select the slides that you want to return to the default state, Hold down the Ctrl key and select one slide at a time to select several slides at once, or hold down the Shift key to select all slides from the current to the selected. right-click on one of the slides and select the Reset slide option in the context menu, All text frames and objects located on slides will be reset and situated in accordinance with the slide layout. To add notes to a slide: in the slide list on the left, select the slide you want to add a note to, click the Click to add notes caption below the slide editing area, type in the text of your note. You can format the text using the icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar. When you start the slideshow in the Presenter mode, you will be able to see all the slide notes below the slide preview area." + "body": "To customize your presentation in the Presentation Editor, you can select a theme, color scheme, slide size and orientation for the entire presentation, change the background fill or slide layout for each separate slide, apply transitions between the slides. It's also possible to add explanatory notes to each slide that can be helpful when demonstrating the presentation in the Presenter mode. Themes allow you to quickly change the presentation design, notably the slides background appearance, predefined fonts for titles and texts and the color scheme that is used for the presentation elements. To select a theme for the presentation, click on the necessary predefined theme from the themes gallery on the right side of the top toolbar on the Home tab. The selected theme will be applied to all the slides if you have not previously selected certain slides to apply the theme to. To change the selected theme for one or more slides, you can right-click the selected slides in the list on the left (or right-click a slide in the editing area), select the Change Theme option from the contextual menu and choose the necessary theme. Color Schemes affect the predefined colors used for the presentation elements (fonts, lines, fills, etc.) and allow you to maintain color consistency throughout the entire presentation. To change a color scheme, click the Change color scheme icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar and select the necessary scheme from the drop-down list. The selected color scheme will be highlighted in the list and applied to all the slides. To change the size of all the slides in the presentation, click the Select slide size icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar and select the necessary option from the drop-down list. You can select: one of the two quick-access presets - Standard (4:3) or Widescreen (16:9), the Advanced Settings option that opens the Slide Size Settings window where you can select one of the available presets or set a Custom size specifying the desired Width and Height values. The available presets are: Standard (4:3), Widescreen (16:9), Widescreen (16:10), Letter Paper (8.5x11 in), Ledger Paper (11x17 in), A3 Paper (297x420 mm), A4 Paper (210x297 mm), B4 (ICO) Paper (250x353 mm), B5 (ICO) Paper (176x250 mm), 35 mm Slides, Overhead, Banner. The Slide Orientation menu allows changing the currently selected orientation type. The default orientation type is Landscape that can be switched to Portrait. The Number slides from field allows setting the slide that will mark the start of slide numeration. To change background fill: in the slide list on the left, select the slides you want to apply the fill to. Or click at any blank space within the currently edited slide in the slide editing area to change the fill type for this separate slide. on the Slide settings tab of the right sidebar, select the necessary option: Color fill - select this option to specify the solid color you want to apply to the selected slides. Gradient fill - select this option to fill the slide with two colors which smoothly change from one to another. Picture or Texture - select this option to use an image or a predefined texture as the slide background. Pattern - select this option to fill the slide with a two-colored design composed of regularly repeated elements. No fill - select this option if you don't want to use any fill. Opacity - drag the slider or enter the percent value manually. The default value is 100%. It corresponds to the full opacity. The 0% value corresponds to the full transparency. Show Background graphics - uncheck this menu item to simplify the background and improve presentation loading time due to lower graphics settings. Reset Background - reset background to default. Apply to All Slides - apply the current background to all slides in the presentation. For more detailed information on these options, please refer to the Fill objects and select colors section. Transitions help make your presentation more dynamic and keep your audience's attention. To apply a transition: in the slide list on the left, select the slides you want to apply a transition to, choose a transition in the Effect drop-down list on the Slide settings tab, To open the Slide settings tab, you can click the Slide settings icon on the right or right-click the slide in the slide editing area and select the Slide Settings option from the contextual menu. adjust the transition properties: choose a transition variation, duration and the way to advance slides, click the Apply to All Slides button if you want to apply the same transition to all slides in the presentation. For more detailed information on these options, please refer to the Apply transitions section. To change a slide layout: in the slide list on the left, select the slides you want to apply a new layout to, click the Change slide layout icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar, select the necessary layout from the menu. Alternatively, you can right-click the necessary slide in the list on the left or in the editing area, select the Change Layout option from the contextual menu and choose the necessary layout. Currently, the following layouts are available: Title Slide, Title and Content, Section Header, Two Content, Comparison, Title Only, Blank, Content with Caption, Picture with Caption, Title and Vertical Text, Vertical Title and Text. To add objects to a slide layout: click the Change slide layout icon and select a layout you want to add an object to, using the Insert tab of the top toolbar, add the necessary object to the slide (image, table, chart, shape), then right-click on this object and select Add to Layout option, on the Home tab, click Change slide layout and apply the changed layout. The selected objects will be added to the current theme's layout. Objects placed on a slide this way cannot be selected, resized, or moved. To return the slide layout to its original state: in the slide list on the left, select the slides that you want to return to the default state, Hold down the Ctrl key and select one slide at a time to select several slides at once, or hold down the Shift key to select all slides from the current to the selected. right-click on one of the slides and select the Reset slide option in the context menu, All text frames and objects located on slides will be reset and situated in accordinance with the slide layout. To add notes to a slide: in the slide list on the left, select the slide you want to add a note to, click the Click to add notes caption below the slide editing area, type in the text of your note. You can format the text using the icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar. When you start the slideshow in the Presenter mode, you will be able to see all the slide notes below the slide preview area." + }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/SlideMaster.htm", + "title": "Slide Master", + "body": "The Slide Master allows you to edit the layout for all slides simultaneously, e.g., unify fonts or watermarks. To enter the Slide Master mode: Go to the View tab. Click the Slide Master button on the top toolbar. To manage master slides: Click the Add Slide Master button on the top toolbar of the View tab. The Master slides for each layout will appear in the slide list on the left. They are visible only to you and only in the Slide Master mode. Edit the slides the way you need them to look via the Home and Insert tabs. If you need more layouts, click the Add Layout button. Customize the slide layout. Click the Insert Placeholder button to add and edit specific content areas. Uncheck the Title and Footers buttons on the top toolbar if you do not need them. To exit the Slide Master mode, click the Close Master button on the top toolbar, or go to the View tab and click the Normal button." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/Thesaurus.htm", "title": "Replace a word by a synonym", - "body": "If you are using the same word multiple times, or a word is just not quite the word you are looking for, ONLYOFFICE Presentation Editor lets you look up synonyms. It will show you the antonyms too. Select the word in your presentation. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose Thesaurus. The synonyms and antonyms will show up in the left sidebar. Click a word to replace the word in your presentation." + "body": "If you are using the same word multiple times, or a word is just not quite the word you are looking for, ONLYOFFICE Presentation Editor lets you look up synonyms. It will show you the antonyms too. Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager. Select the word in your presentation. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose Thesaurus. The synonyms and antonyms will show up in the left sidebar. Click a word to replace the word in your presentation." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/Translator.htm", "title": "Translate text", - "body": "In the Presentation Editor, you can translate your presentation from and to numerous languages. Select the text that you want to translate. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose Translator, the Translator appears in a sidebar on the left. Click the drop-down box and choose the preferred language. The text will be translated to the required language. Changing the language of your result: Click the drop-down box and choose the preferred language. The translation will change immediately." + "body": "In the Presentation Editor, you can translate your presentation from and to numerous languages. Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager. Select the text that you want to translate. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose Translator, the Translator appears in a sidebar on the left. Click the drop-down box and choose the preferred language. The text will be translated to the required language. Changing the language of your result: Click the drop-down box and choose the preferred language. The translation will change immediately." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/ViewPresentationInfo.htm", "title": "View the information about your presentation", - "body": "To access the detailed information about the currently edited presentation in the Presentation Editor, click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Presentation Info option. General Information The presentation information includes a number of file properties which describe the presentation. Some of these properties are updated automatically, and some of them can be edited. Location - the folder in the Documents module where the file is stored. Owner - the name of the user who has created the file. Uploaded - the date and time when the file has been created. These properties are available in the online version only. Title, Subject, Comment - these properties allow you to simplify the classification of your presentations. You can specify the necessary text in the properties fields. Last Modified - the date and time when the file was last modified. Last Modified By - the name of the user who has made the latest change to the presentation if it was shared and can be edited by several users. Application - the application the presentation was created with. Author - the person who has created the file. You can enter the necessary name in this field. Press Enter to add a new field that allows you to specify one more author. If you changed the file properties, click the Apply button to apply the changes. Online Editors allow you to change the presentation title directly from the editor interface. To do that, click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Rename option, then enter the necessary File name in a new window that opens and click OK. Permission Information In the online version, you can view the information about permissions to the files stored in the cloud. This option is not available for users with the Read Only permissions. To find out who has the rights to view or edit the presentation, select the Access Rights... option on the left sidebar. You can also change currently selected access rights by pressing the Change access rights button in the Persons who have rights section. Version History In the online version, you can view the version history for the files stored in the cloud. This option is not available for users with the Read Only permissions. To view all the changes made to this presentation, select the Version History option at the left sidebar. It's also possible to open the history of versions using the Version History icon on the Collaboration tab of the top toolbar. You'll see the list of this presentation versions (major changes) and revisions (minor changes) with the indication of each version/revision author and creation date and time. For presentation versions, the version number is also specified (e.g. ver. 2). To know exactly which changes have been made in each separate version/revision, you can view the one you need by clicking it on the left sidebar. The changes made by the version/revision author are marked with the color which is displayed next to the author's name on the left sidebar. You can use the Restore link below the selected version/revision to restore it. To return to the current version of the presentation, use the Close History option on the top of the version list. To close the File pane and return to presentation editing, select the Close Menu option." + "body": "To access the detailed information about the currently edited presentation in the Presentation Editor, click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Info option. Common Owner - the person who has created the file. Uploaded - the date when the file has been uploaded to the server. Last Modified - the date when the file has last been edited. Statistics This subsection displays the number of pages, paragraphs, words, symbols, and symbols with spaces within the file. Properties Author - you can enter the necessary name in this field. Press Enter to add a new field that allows you to specify one more author. To delete additional authors, click the cross button next to the corresponding fields. Title - enter the title of the presentation. Please do not confuse it with the file name as these are different file properties. Tags - enter necessary tags for better file classification. Subject - enter the presentation subject. Comment - enter the comment to the file. Please do not confuse it with the Comments as these are different features. Click the Add property button to add custom fields, entering the Title of the field, its Type, i.e., its format, and its Value. Click OK when ready. To delete additional fields, click the cross button next to them." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/YouTube.htm", "title": "Include a video", - "body": "In the Presentation Editor, you can include a video in your presentation. It will be shown as an image. By double-clicking the image the video dialog opens. Here you can start the video. Copy the URL of the video you want to include. (the complete address shown in the address line of your browser) Go to your presentation and place the cursor at the location where you want to include the video. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose YouTube. Paste the URL and click OK. Check if it is the correct video and click the OK button below the video. The video is now included in your presentation." + "body": "In the Presentation Editor, you can include a video in your presentation. It will be shown as an image. By double-clicking the image the video dialog opens. Here you can start the video. Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager. Copy the URL of the video you want to include. (the complete address shown in the address line of your browser) Go to your presentation and place the cursor at the location where you want to include the video. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose YouTube. Paste the URL and click OK. Check if it is the correct video and click the OK button below the video. The video is now included in your presentation." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/Zoom.htm", "title": "Zoom", - "body": "The Zoom plugin allows you to host or schedule Zoom meetings directly in the editor in just a few clicks. The plugin is compatible with the self-hosted version of ONLYOFFICE editors and can be added to ONLYOFFICE instances manually. Installation To install the Zoom plugin, Go to the Plugins tab. Open the Plugin Manager. Find Zoom on the marketplace and click the Install button below. Click the Zoom icon in the Plugins tab. Proceed with the plugin configuration. For more details, please refer to the ONLYOFFICE API documentation. Configuration Register the editor as the JWT app on the Zoom Develop page to use the meeting schedule. Fill in all the necessary fields and activate the app. A JWT token will be assigned to the app. If you need help filling in the fields, please refer to the official Zoom documentation. Create a Meeting SDK app on the Zoom Develop page to start joining meetings. Fill in all the necessary fields and activate the app. SDK credentials will be assigned to the app. If you need help filling in the fields, please refer to the official Zoom documentation. Enter the generated SDK Key, SDK Secret, and JWT Token into the corresponding fields in the left panel of the ONLYOFFICE editor and click Save. How to use Go to the Plugins tab. Click the Zoom icon. Add your meeting topic and choose whether you want to Start meeting or Schedule meeting. Start meeting - a new meeting will be created. All details are displayed in the editor chat. Press the Alt + Q key combination to access the chat quickly. Schedule meeting - set all required parameters for the upcoming meeting, such as time, date, duration. Access the Advanced settings for more parameters. Click Save when you are ready. Meeting notifications are sent to the Chat for online editors and to the Comments for desktop editors. Click the Reconfigure button to set the parameters once again. Click the Meeting mode button to enter the meeting menu where you can set such parameters as Name, Meeting ID, Email, and Password. Select your role, meeting region, and meeting language. Click the Join button to enter the meeting or click the Copy direct join link button to copy the meeting link to your clipboard. Once you enter the meeting, a Zoom window will open within the plugin panel. Like in your usual Zoom call, here you can enable or disable microphone and camera, perform various actions, and enter the full screen mode. A black window may appear in the Safari browser when joining a meeting. For the problem to disappear, you need to resize the plugin window or zoom in on the browser page." + "body": "The Zoom plugin allows you to host or schedule Zoom meetings directly in the editor in just a few clicks. The plugin is compatible with the self-hosted version of ONLYOFFICE editors and can be added to ONLYOFFICE instances manually using the Plugin Manager. Installation To install the Zoom plugin, Go to the Plugins tab. Open the Plugin Manager. Find Zoom on the marketplace and click the Install button below. Click the Zoom icon in the Plugins tab. Proceed with the plugin configuration. For more details, please refer to the ONLYOFFICE API documentation. Configuration Register the editor as the JWT app on the Zoom Develop page to use the meeting schedule. Fill in all the necessary fields and activate the app. A JWT token will be assigned to the app. If you need help filling in the fields, please refer to the official Zoom documentation. Create a Meeting SDK app on the Zoom Develop page to start joining meetings. Fill in all the necessary fields and activate the app. SDK credentials will be assigned to the app. If you need help filling in the fields, please refer to the official Zoom documentation. Enter the generated SDK Key, SDK Secret, and JWT Token into the corresponding fields in the left panel of the ONLYOFFICE editor and click Save. How to use Go to the Plugins tab. Click the Zoom icon. Add your meeting topic and choose whether you want to Start meeting or Schedule meeting. Start meeting - a new meeting will be created. All details are displayed in the editor chat. Press the Alt + Q key combination to access the chat quickly. Schedule meeting - set all required parameters for the upcoming meeting, such as time, date, duration. Access the Advanced settings for more parameters. Click Save when you are ready. Meeting notifications are sent to the Chat for online editors and to the Comments for desktop editors. Click the Reconfigure button to set the parameters once again. Click the Meeting mode button to enter the meeting menu where you can set such parameters as Name, Meeting ID, Email, and Password. Select your role, meeting region, and meeting language. Click the Join button to enter the meeting or click the Copy direct join link button to copy the meeting link to your clipboard. Once you enter the meeting, a Zoom window will open within the plugin panel. Like in your usual Zoom call, here you can enable or disable microphone and camera, perform various actions, and enter the full screen mode. A black window may appear in the Safari browser when joining a meeting. For the problem to disappear, you need to resize the plugin window or zoom in on the browser page." } ] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/images/big.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/images/big.png index ac5e30ea53..bcf54adc96 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/images/big.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/images/big.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/images/icons.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/images/icons.png index ec53f39560..f7f85e1ef8 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/images/icons.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/images/icons.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/images/sprite.css b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/images/sprite.css index 78658d80ca..3af39ce203 100644 --- a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/images/sprite.css +++ b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/images/sprite.css @@ -170,8 +170,8 @@ .big-leftpart { background-position: -599px -564px; - width: 140px; - height: 19px; + width: 176px; + height: 17px; } .icon{ @@ -180,1298 +180,1316 @@ display: inline-block; } -.icon-highlight { +.icon-pixabay_store_icon { background-position: 0px 0px; + width: 120px; + height: 37px; +} + +.icon-highlight { + background-position: 0px -37px; width: 28px; height: 28px; } .icon-photoeditor { - background-position: -28px 0px; + background-position: -28px -37px; width: 28px; height: 28px; } .icon-youtube { - background-position: 0px -28px; + background-position: -56px -37px; width: 28px; height: 28px; } .icon-translator { - background-position: -28px -28px; + background-position: -84px -37px; width: 26px; height: 26px; } .icon-help { - background-position: -56px 0px; + background-position: 0px -65px; width: 24px; height: 24px; } .icon-rainbow_icon { - background-position: -56px -24px; + background-position: -24px -65px; width: 24px; height: 24px; } .icon-telegram_icon { - background-position: 0px -56px; + background-position: -48px -65px; width: 24px; height: 24px; } .icon-spellchecking_toptoolbar_activated { - background-position: -24px -56px; + background-position: -72px -65px; width: 21px; height: 24px; } .icon-arrow { - background-position: -45px -56px; + background-position: -93px -65px; width: 23px; height: 23px; } .icon-placeholder_imagefromurl { - background-position: -80px 0px; + background-position: 0px -89px; width: 23px; height: 23px; } .icon-change_case { - background-position: 0px -80px; + background-position: -23px -89px; width: 45px; height: 22px; } .icon-fontsize { - background-position: -45px -80px; + background-position: -68px -89px; width: 45px; height: 22px; } .icon-rowsandcolumns { - background-position: -103px 0px; + background-position: -120px 0px; width: 45px; height: 22px; } .icon-SearchOptions { - background-position: -103px -22px; + background-position: -120px -22px; width: 42px; height: 22px; } .icon-pastespecialbutton { - background-position: -103px -44px; + background-position: -120px -44px; width: 33px; height: 22px; } .icon-thesaurus_icon { - background-position: -103px -66px; + background-position: -120px -66px; width: 28px; height: 22px; } .icon-insertautoshape { - background-position: -80px -23px; + background-position: -120px -88px; width: 22px; height: 22px; } .icon-inserttexticon { - background-position: -80px -45px; + background-position: -142px -88px; width: 22px; height: 22px; } .icon-text_autoshape { - background-position: 0px -102px; + background-position: 0px -112px; width: 22px; height: 22px; } .icon-spellchecking_toptoolbar { - background-position: -22px -102px; + background-position: -22px -112px; width: 20px; height: 22px; } .icon-coeditingmode { - background-position: -42px -102px; + background-position: -42px -112px; width: 18px; height: 22px; } .icon-header_footer_icon { - background-position: -60px -102px; + background-position: -60px -112px; width: 18px; height: 22px; } .icon-slide_number_icon { - background-position: -131px -66px; + background-position: -148px -66px; width: 16px; height: 22px; } .icon-versionhistoryicon { - background-position: -78px -102px; + background-position: -78px -112px; width: 24px; height: 21px; } .icon-addhyperlink { - background-position: -102px -102px; + background-position: -102px -112px; width: 22px; height: 21px; } .icon-inserttextarticon { - background-position: -124px -102px; + background-position: -124px -112px; width: 19px; height: 21px; } .icon-changerowheight { - background-position: 0px -124px; + background-position: -143px -112px; width: 17px; height: 21px; } .icon-slides { - background-position: -17px -124px; + background-position: 0px -134px; width: 17px; height: 21px; } .icon-usersnumber { - background-position: -34px -124px; + background-position: -17px -134px; width: 28px; height: 20px; } .icon-date_time_icon { - background-position: -62px -124px; + background-position: -45px -134px; width: 22px; height: 20px; } .icon-pointer_screen { - background-position: -84px -124px; + background-position: -67px -134px; width: 22px; height: 20px; } .icon-addslide { - background-position: -106px -124px; + background-position: -89px -134px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-chatgpt_icon { - background-position: -126px -124px; + background-position: -109px -134px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-constantproportionsactivated { - background-position: -148px 0px; + background-position: -129px -134px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-copystyle_selected { - background-position: -148px -20px; + background-position: -165px 0px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-image { - background-position: -148px -40px; + background-position: -165px -20px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-insert_symbol_icon { - background-position: -148px -60px; + background-position: -165px -40px; + width: 20px; + height: 20px; +} + +.icon-pixabay_icon { + background-position: -165px -60px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-placeholder_imagefromfile { - background-position: -148px -80px; + background-position: -165px -80px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-pointer_enabled { - background-position: -148px -100px; + background-position: -165px -100px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-show_password { - background-position: -148px -120px; + background-position: -165px -120px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-sortcommentsicon { - background-position: 0px -145px; + background-position: 0px -155px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-spellcheckactivated { - background-position: -20px -145px; + background-position: -20px -155px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-vector { - background-position: -40px -145px; + background-position: -40px -155px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-zoom_icon { - background-position: -60px -145px; + background-position: -60px -155px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-inserttable { - background-position: -80px -145px; + background-position: -80px -155px; width: 28px; height: 19px; } .icon-chat_toptoolbar { - background-position: -108px -145px; + background-position: -108px -155px; width: 24px; height: 19px; } .icon-chart { - background-position: -132px -145px; + background-position: -132px -155px; width: 22px; height: 19px; } .icon-comment_toptoolbar { - background-position: -168px 0px; + background-position: -154px -155px; width: 22px; height: 19px; } .icon-placeholder_chart { - background-position: -168px -19px; + background-position: -185px 0px; width: 22px; height: 19px; } .icon-hiderulers { - background-position: -168px -38px; + background-position: -185px -19px; width: 19px; height: 19px; } .icon-noborders { - background-position: -168px -57px; + background-position: -185px -38px; width: 19px; height: 19px; } .icon-removecomment_toptoolbar { - background-position: -168px -76px; + background-position: -185px -57px; width: 15px; height: 19px; } .icon-equationplaceholder { - background-position: -168px -95px; + background-position: -185px -76px; width: 18px; height: 18px; } .icon-search_advanced { - background-position: -168px -113px; + background-position: -185px -94px; width: 18px; height: 18px; } .icon-searchbuttons { - background-position: 0px -165px; + background-position: 0px -175px; width: 33px; height: 17px; } .icon-insert_columns { - background-position: -33px -165px; + background-position: -33px -175px; width: 25px; height: 17px; } .icon-insertequationicon { - background-position: -168px -131px; + background-position: -185px -112px; width: 22px; height: 17px; } .icon-changecolumnwidth { - background-position: -168px -148px; + background-position: -185px -129px; width: 21px; height: 17px; } .icon-sharingicon { - background-position: -58px -165px; + background-position: -185px -146px; width: 21px; height: 17px; } -.icon-chaticon_new { - background-position: -79px -165px; - width: 19px; - height: 17px; -} - .icon-paste_style { - background-position: -98px -165px; + background-position: -149px -134px; width: 16px; height: 17px; } .icon-addgradientpoint { - background-position: -136px -44px; + background-position: -153px -44px; width: 12px; height: 17px; } .icon-removegradientpoint { - background-position: -68px -56px; + background-position: -58px -175px; width: 12px; height: 17px; } .icon-placeholder_table { - background-position: -114px -165px; + background-position: -70px -175px; width: 22px; height: 16px; } .icon-editcommenticon { - background-position: -136px -165px; + background-position: -92px -175px; width: 16px; height: 16px; } .icon-favorites_icon { - background-position: -152px -165px; + background-position: -108px -175px; width: 16px; height: 16px; } .icon-access_rights { - background-position: -168px -165px; + background-position: -165px -140px; width: 20px; height: 15px; } .icon-chaticon { - background-position: -190px 0px; + background-position: -124px -175px; width: 18px; height: 15px; } +.icon-chaticon_new { + background-position: -142px -175px; + width: 17px; + height: 15px; +} + .icon-saveupdate { - background-position: -190px -15px; + background-position: -159px -175px; width: 17px; height: 15px; } .icon-added_comment_icon { - background-position: -190px -30px; + background-position: -176px -175px; width: 16px; height: 15px; } .icon-bgcolor { - background-position: -190px -45px; + background-position: 0px -192px; width: 16px; height: 15px; } .icon-about { - background-position: -190px -60px; + background-position: -192px -175px; width: 15px; height: 15px; } .icon-abouticon { - background-position: -190px -75px; + background-position: -16px -192px; width: 15px; height: 15px; } .icon-advanced_settings_icon { - background-position: -190px -90px; + background-position: -31px -192px; width: 15px; height: 15px; } .icon-document_language { - background-position: -190px -105px; + background-position: -46px -192px; width: 15px; height: 15px; } .icon-group { - background-position: -190px -120px; + background-position: -61px -192px; width: 15px; height: 15px; } .icon-pagesize { - background-position: -190px -135px; + background-position: -76px -192px; width: 15px; height: 15px; } .icon-save { - background-position: -190px -150px; + background-position: -91px -192px; width: 15px; height: 15px; } .icon-savewhilecoediting { - background-position: -190px -165px; + background-position: -106px -192px; width: 15px; height: 15px; } .icon-search_options { - background-position: 0px -182px; + background-position: -121px -192px; width: 15px; height: 15px; } .icon-tabstopcenter { - background-position: -15px -182px; + background-position: -136px -192px; width: 15px; height: 15px; } .icon-tabstopleft { - background-position: -30px -182px; + background-position: -151px -192px; width: 15px; height: 15px; } .icon-tabstopright { - background-position: -45px -182px; + background-position: -166px -192px; width: 15px; height: 15px; } .icon-ungroup { - background-position: -60px -182px; + background-position: -181px -192px; width: 15px; height: 15px; } .icon-feedback { - background-position: -154px -145px; + background-position: -207px 0px; width: 14px; height: 15px; } .icon-fitpage { - background-position: -75px -182px; + background-position: -207px -15px; width: 14px; height: 15px; } .icon-flipupsidedown { - background-position: -89px -182px; + background-position: -207px -30px; width: 14px; height: 15px; } .icon-file { - background-position: -90px -80px; + background-position: -207px -45px; width: 13px; height: 15px; } .icon-back { - background-position: -103px -182px; + background-position: -207px -60px; width: 12px; height: 15px; } .icon-changecolorscheme { - background-position: -103px -88px; + background-position: 0px -207px; width: 25px; height: 14px; } .icon-fontcolor { - background-position: -115px -182px; + background-position: -25px -207px; width: 25px; height: 14px; } .icon-table_settings_icon { - background-position: -128px -88px; + background-position: -50px -207px; width: 19px; height: 14px; } .icon-columnwidthmarker { - background-position: -140px -182px; + background-position: -69px -207px; width: 15px; height: 14px; } .icon-fliplefttoright { - background-position: -155px -182px; + background-position: -84px -207px; width: 15px; height: 14px; } .icon-autoshape { - background-position: -170px -182px; + background-position: -207px -75px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-commentsicon { - background-position: -184px -182px; + background-position: -207px -89px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-deleteicon { - background-position: -208px 0px; + background-position: -207px -103px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-searchicon { - background-position: -208px -14px; + background-position: -207px -117px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-search_icon_header { - background-position: -208px -28px; + background-position: -207px -131px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-gradientslider { - background-position: -208px -42px; + background-position: -207px -145px; width: 13px; height: 14px; } .icon-highlight_color_mouse_pointer { - background-position: -208px -56px; + background-position: -207px -159px; width: 13px; height: 14px; } .icon-textart_settings_icon { - background-position: -208px -70px; + background-position: -207px -173px; width: 12px; height: 14px; } .icon-hard { - background-position: -208px -84px; + background-position: -207px -187px; width: 9px; height: 14px; } .icon-highlightcolor { - background-position: 0px -197px; + background-position: -99px -207px; width: 27px; height: 13px; } .icon-outline { - background-position: -27px -197px; + background-position: -126px -207px; width: 25px; height: 13px; } .icon-alignshape { - background-position: -80px -67px; + background-position: -151px -207px; width: 21px; height: 13px; } .icon-arrangeshape { - background-position: -52px -197px; + background-position: -172px -207px; width: 21px; height: 13px; } .icon-changelayout { - background-position: -73px -197px; + background-position: -193px -207px; width: 21px; height: 13px; } .icon-table { - background-position: -94px -197px; + background-position: -221px 0px; width: 21px; height: 13px; } .icon-verticalalign { - background-position: -115px -197px; + background-position: -221px -13px; width: 21px; height: 13px; } .icon-visible_area { - background-position: -136px -197px; + background-position: -221px -26px; width: 20px; height: 13px; } .icon-orientation { - background-position: -156px -197px; + background-position: -221px -39px; width: 17px; height: 13px; } .icon-cut { - background-position: -173px -197px; + background-position: -221px -52px; width: 16px; height: 13px; } .icon-gotodocuments { - background-position: -189px -197px; + background-position: -221px -65px; width: 16px; height: 13px; } .icon-print { - background-position: -205px -197px; + background-position: -221px -78px; width: 16px; height: 13px; } .icon-changerange { - background-position: -222px 0px; + background-position: -221px -91px; width: 15px; height: 13px; } .icon-feedbackicon { - background-position: -222px -13px; + background-position: -221px -104px; width: 15px; height: 13px; } .icon-fitslide { - background-position: -222px -26px; + background-position: -221px -117px; width: 15px; height: 13px; } .icon-greencircle { - background-position: -222px -39px; + background-position: -221px -130px; + width: 15px; + height: 13px; +} + +.icon-replace { + background-position: -221px -143px; width: 15px; height: 13px; } .icon-clearstyle { - background-position: -222px -52px; + background-position: -221px -156px; width: 14px; height: 13px; } .icon-copy { - background-position: -222px -65px; + background-position: -221px -169px; width: 14px; height: 13px; } .icon-paste { - background-position: -222px -78px; + background-position: -221px -182px; width: 14px; height: 13px; } .icon-selectall { - background-position: -222px -91px; + background-position: -221px -195px; width: 14px; height: 13px; } .icon-alignbottom { - background-position: -222px -104px; + background-position: -221px -208px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-alignmiddle { - background-position: -222px -117px; + background-position: 0px -221px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-alignobjectbottom { - background-position: -222px -130px; + background-position: -13px -221px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-alignobjectcenter { - background-position: -222px -143px; + background-position: -26px -221px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-alignobjectleft { - background-position: -222px -156px; + background-position: -39px -221px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-alignobjectmiddle { - background-position: -222px -169px; + background-position: -52px -221px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-alignobjectright { - background-position: -222px -182px; + background-position: -65px -221px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-alignobjecttop { - background-position: -222px -195px; + background-position: -78px -221px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-aligntop { - background-position: -208px -98px; + background-position: -91px -221px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-bringforward { - background-position: -208px -111px; + background-position: -104px -221px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-bringtofront { - background-position: -208px -124px; + background-position: -117px -221px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-chart_settings_icon { - background-position: -208px -137px; + background-position: -130px -221px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-copystyle { - background-position: -208px -150px; + background-position: -143px -221px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-distributehorizontally { - background-position: -208px -163px; + background-position: -156px -221px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-distributevertically { - background-position: -208px -176px; + background-position: -169px -221px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-exitfullscreen { - background-position: 0px -210px; + background-position: -182px -221px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-fullscreen { - background-position: -13px -210px; + background-position: -195px -221px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-image_settings_icon { - background-position: -26px -210px; + background-position: -208px -221px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-nextpage { - background-position: -39px -210px; + background-position: -221px -221px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-previouspage { - background-position: -52px -210px; + background-position: -242px 0px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-sendbackward { - background-position: -65px -210px; + background-position: -242px -13px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-sendtoback { - background-position: -78px -210px; + background-position: -242px -26px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-shape_settings_icon { - background-position: -91px -210px; + background-position: -242px -39px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-slide_settings_icon { - background-position: -104px -210px; + background-position: -242px -52px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-startpreview { - background-position: -117px -210px; + background-position: -242px -65px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-text_settings_icon { - background-position: -130px -210px; + background-position: -242px -78px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-zoomin { - background-position: -143px -210px; + background-position: -242px -91px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-aligncenter { - background-position: -156px -210px; + background-position: -242px -104px; width: 12px; height: 13px; } .icon-alignleft { - background-position: -168px -210px; + background-position: -242px -117px; width: 12px; height: 13px; } .icon-alignright { - background-position: -180px -210px; + background-position: -242px -130px; width: 12px; height: 13px; } .icon-justify { - background-position: -192px -210px; + background-position: -242px -143px; width: 12px; height: 13px; } .icon-selectslidesizeicon { - background-position: -204px -210px; + background-position: 0px -234px; width: 25px; height: 12px; } .icon-spellcheckdeactivated { - background-position: 0px -223px; + background-position: -185px -163px; width: 15px; height: 12px; } .icon-rotateclockwise { - background-position: -15px -223px; + background-position: -242px -156px; width: 13px; height: 12px; } .icon-rotatecounterclockwise { - background-position: -28px -223px; + background-position: -242px -168px; width: 13px; height: 12px; } .icon-circle { - background-position: -41px -223px; + background-position: -242px -180px; width: 12px; height: 12px; } .icon-nofill { - background-position: -53px -223px; + background-position: -242px -192px; width: 12px; height: 12px; } .icon-sup { - background-position: -65px -223px; + background-position: -242px -204px; width: 12px; height: 12px; } .icon-deletecommenticon { - background-position: -77px -223px; + background-position: -242px -216px; width: 11px; height: 12px; } .icon-presenter_startpresentation { - background-position: -198px -182px; + background-position: -110px -37px; width: 9px; height: 12px; } .icon-startpresentation { - background-position: -88px -223px; + background-position: -110px -49px; width: 9px; height: 12px; } .icon-numbering { - background-position: -97px -223px; + background-position: -25px -234px; width: 23px; height: 11px; } .icon-bullets { - background-position: -120px -223px; + background-position: -48px -234px; width: 22px; height: 11px; } .icon-horizontalalign { - background-position: -142px -223px; + background-position: -70px -234px; width: 21px; height: 11px; } .icon-insertfunction { - background-position: -163px -223px; + background-position: -91px -234px; width: 21px; height: 11px; } .icon-linespacing { - background-position: -184px -223px; + background-position: -112px -234px; width: 21px; height: 11px; } .icon-fitwidth { - background-position: -205px -223px; + background-position: -133px -234px; width: 16px; height: 11px; } .icon-viewsettingsicon { - background-position: -221px -223px; + background-position: -149px -234px; width: 16px; height: 11px; } .icon-larger { - background-position: -237px 0px; + background-position: -165px -234px; width: 14px; height: 11px; } .icon-sub { - background-position: -237px -11px; + background-position: -179px -234px; width: 13px; height: 11px; } .icon-decreasedec { - background-position: -237px -22px; + background-position: -192px -234px; width: 12px; height: 11px; } .icon-decreaseindent { - background-position: -237px -33px; + background-position: -204px -234px; width: 12px; height: 11px; } .icon-increasedec { - background-position: -237px -44px; + background-position: -216px -234px; width: 12px; height: 11px; } .icon-increaseindent { - background-position: -237px -55px; + background-position: -228px -234px; width: 12px; height: 11px; } .icon-resolvedicon { - background-position: -237px -66px; + background-position: -240px -234px; width: 12px; height: 11px; } .icon-resolveicon { - background-position: -237px -77px; + background-position: -255px 0px; width: 12px; height: 11px; } .icon-closepreview { - background-position: -237px -88px; + background-position: -255px -11px; width: 11px; height: 11px; } .icon-underline { - background-position: -237px -99px; + background-position: -255px -22px; width: 10px; height: 11px; } .icon-zoomout { - background-position: -237px -110px; + background-position: -255px -33px; width: 10px; height: 11px; } .icon-smaller { - background-position: -237px -121px; + background-position: 0px -246px; width: 13px; height: 10px; } .icon-nextslide { - background-position: -237px -131px; + background-position: -255px -44px; width: 12px; height: 10px; } .icon-presenter_nextslide { - background-position: -237px -141px; + background-position: -255px -54px; width: 12px; height: 10px; } .icon-presenter_previousslide { - background-position: -237px -151px; + background-position: -255px -64px; width: 12px; height: 10px; } .icon-previousslide { - background-position: -237px -161px; + background-position: -255px -74px; width: 12px; height: 10px; } .icon-strike { - background-position: -237px -171px; + background-position: -255px -84px; width: 12px; height: 10px; } .icon-yellowdiamond { - background-position: -237px -181px; + background-position: -255px -94px; width: 11px; height: 10px; } .icon-firstline_indent { - background-position: -237px -191px; + background-position: -255px -104px; width: 10px; height: 10px; } .icon-pointer { - background-position: -237px -201px; + background-position: -255px -114px; width: 10px; height: 10px; } .icon-bold { - background-position: -237px -211px; + background-position: -255px -124px; width: 8px; height: 10px; } .icon-pausepresentation { - background-position: -237px -221px; + background-position: -255px -134px; width: 8px; height: 10px; } .icon-presenter_pausepresentation { - background-position: -229px -210px; + background-position: -255px -144px; width: 8px; height: 10px; } .icon-italic { - background-position: -183px -76px; + background-position: -255px -154px; width: 7px; height: 10px; } .icon-redo { - background-position: 0px -235px; + background-position: -13px -246px; width: 17px; height: 9px; } .icon-undo { - background-position: -17px -235px; + background-position: -30px -246px; width: 17px; height: 9px; } .icon-cellrow { - background-position: -34px -235px; + background-position: -255px -164px; width: 9px; height: 9px; } .icon-resize_square { - background-position: -43px -235px; + background-position: -255px -173px; width: 9px; height: 9px; } .icon-searchdownbutton { - background-position: -208px -189px; + background-position: -47px -246px; width: 14px; height: 8px; } .icon-searchupbutton { - background-position: -56px -48px; + background-position: -61px -246px; width: 14px; height: 8px; } .icon-constantproportions { - background-position: -52px -235px; + background-position: -75px -246px; width: 13px; height: 8px; } .icon-rowheightmarker { - background-position: -65px -235px; + background-position: -88px -246px; width: 13px; height: 8px; } .icon-tabstopcenter_marker { - background-position: -78px -235px; + background-position: -255px -182px; width: 12px; height: 8px; } .icon-hanging { - background-position: -70px -48px; + background-position: -255px -190px; width: 10px; height: 8px; } .icon-right_indent { - background-position: -90px -235px; + background-position: -255px -198px; width: 10px; height: 8px; } .icon-soft { - background-position: -100px -235px; + background-position: -255px -206px; width: 10px; height: 8px; } .icon-tabstopleft_marker { - background-position: -110px -235px; + background-position: -255px -214px; width: 8px; height: 8px; } .icon-tabstopright_marker { - background-position: -118px -235px; + background-position: -255px -222px; width: 8px; height: 8px; } .icon-redo1 { - background-position: -90px -95px; + background-position: -242px -228px; width: 13px; height: 6px; } .icon-undo1 { - background-position: -126px -235px; + background-position: -207px -201px; width: 13px; height: 6px; } .icon-leftindent { - background-position: -68px -73px; + background-position: -255px -230px; width: 10px; height: 6px; } .icon-tab { - background-position: -148px -140px; + background-position: -255px -236px; width: 10px; height: 5px; } .icon-connectionpoint { - background-position: -245px -211px; + background-position: -262px -154px; width: 5px; height: 5px; } .icon-square { - background-position: -245px -216px; + background-position: -262px -159px; width: 5px; height: 5px; } .icon-space { - background-position: -249px -22px; + background-position: -265px -22px; width: 2px; height: 3px; } diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/images/src/big/leftpart.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/images/src/big/leftpart.png index f14574fb4e..2ce9b64e42 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/images/src/big/leftpart.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/images/src/big/leftpart.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/chaticon_new.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/chaticon_new.png index b1fb9c0385..0d93aa1654 100644 Binary files a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/chaticon_new.png and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/chaticon_new.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/pixabay_icon.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/pixabay_icon.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..5c3b171dce Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/pixabay_icon.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/pixabay_store_icon.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/pixabay_store_icon.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..8a68930ddb Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/pixabay_store_icon.png differ diff --git a/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/replace.png b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/replace.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..66e5fbd5bb Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/presentationeditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/replace.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/Contents.json b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/Contents.json index 7770f5fc62..55fa66e516 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/Contents.json +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/Contents.json @@ -67,7 +67,8 @@ {"src": "UsageInstructions/Thesaurus.htm", "name": "Replace a word by a synonym" }, {"src": "UsageInstructions/CommunicationPlugins.htm", "name": "Communicate while editing"}, {"src": "UsageInstructions/Zoom.htm", "name": "Host and schedule Zoom meetings"}, - {"src": "UsageInstructions/ChatGPT.htm", "name": "Use AI to write text"}, + { "src": "UsageInstructions/ChatGPT.htm", "name": "Use AI to write text" }, + {"src": "UsageInstructions/Pixabay.htm", "name": "Add pictures"}, { "src": "UsageInstructions/ViewDocInfo.htm", "name": "View file information", "headername": "Tools and settings" }, {"src": "UsageInstructions/ScaleToFit.htm", "name": "Scale a worksheet"}, {"src": "UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm", "name": "Save/print/download your spreadsheet"}, diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/Functions/arraytotext.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/Functions/arraytotext.htm index 3702fd7632..09aa98a18d 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/Functions/arraytotext.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/Functions/arraytotext.htm @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ - +
                            diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/Functions/expand.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/Functions/expand.htm index c430a12b1b..d314d9299d 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/Functions/expand.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/Functions/expand.htm @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ - +
                            diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/Functions/filter.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/Functions/filter.htm index 0798b8e3f8..fc2d32bc07 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/Functions/filter.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/Functions/filter.htm @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ - +
                            diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/Functions/getpivotdata.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/Functions/getpivotdata.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b66b55531f --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/Functions/getpivotdata.htm @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + GETPIVOTDATA Function + + + + + + + + +
                            +
                            + +
                            +

                            GETPIVOTDATA Function

                            +

                            The GETPIVOTDATA function is one of the lookup and reference functions. It is used to extract data stored in a PivotTable.

                            +

                            Syntax

                            +

                            GETPIVOTDATA(data_field, pivot_table, [field], [item], …)

                            +

                            The GETPIVOTDATA function has the following arguments:

                            + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
                            ArgumentDescription
                            data_fieldIs used to set the name of the PivotTable field that contains the required data. The argument needs to be in quotes.
                            pivot_tableIs used to refer to any cell, range of cells, or named range of cells in a PivotTable. The argument is used to determine which PivotTable contains the required data.
                            field, itemA field/item pair. There are up to 126 pairs of field names and item names that may be used to describe the required data. The pairs can be in any order.
                            + +

                            Examples

                            +

                            The figure below displays the result returned by the GETPIVOTDATA function.

                            +

                            GETPIVOTDATA Function

                            +
                            + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/Functions/importrange.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/Functions/importrange.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..67c3269f2b --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/Functions/importrange.htm @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + IMPORTRANGE Function + + + + + + + + +
                            +
                            + +
                            +

                            IMPORTRANGE Function

                            +

                            The IMPORTRANGE function is one of the text and data functions. It is used to import a range of cells from a specified spreadsheet.

                            +

                            Syntax

                            +

                            IMPORTRANGE("spreadsheet_url", "range_string")

                            +

                            The IMPORTRANGE function has the following arguments:

                            + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
                            ArgumentDescription
                            spreadsheet_urlIs used to specify the URL of the spreadsheet the data is imported from.
                            range_stringA string specifying the range to import.
                            + +

                            Examples

                            +

                            The figure below displays the result returned by the IMPORTRANGE function.

                            +

                            IMPORTRANGE Function

                            +
                            + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/Functions/sequence.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/Functions/sequence.htm index 368ac71b36..e753661378 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/Functions/sequence.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/Functions/sequence.htm @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ - +
                            diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/Functions/sort.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/Functions/sort.htm index 13f3fa8261..7398069eee 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/Functions/sort.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/Functions/sort.htm @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ - +
                            diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/Functions/sortby.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/Functions/sortby.htm index 46d63df7fb..42c145dbe4 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/Functions/sortby.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/Functions/sortby.htm @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ - +
                            diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/Functions/xmatch.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/Functions/xmatch.htm index 4860446cea..9f78a9ad1d 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/Functions/xmatch.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/Functions/xmatch.htm @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ - +
                            diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm index de0b3d448a..e7e5f091d1 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm @@ -10,12 +10,12 @@ -
                            -
                            - -
                            -

                            Advanced Settings of the Spreadsheet Editor

                            -

                            The Spreadsheet Editor allows you to change its general advanced settings. To access them, open the File tab on the top toolbar and select the Advanced Settings option.

                            +
                            +
                            + +
                            +

                            Advanced Settings of the Spreadsheet Editor

                            +

                            The Spreadsheet Editor allows you to change its general advanced settings. To access them, open the File tab on the top toolbar and select the Advanced Settings option.

                            The advanced settings are grouped as follows:

                            Editing and saving

                            @@ -34,44 +34,56 @@

                            Collaboration

                          1. Strict. All the changes made by co-editors will be shown only after you click the Save
                            icon that will notify you about new changes.
                          2. -
                          3. Show changes from other users. This feature allows to see changes made by other users in the spreadsheet opened for viewing only in the Live Viewer mode.
                          4. +
                          5. Show changes from other users. This feature allows seeing changes made by other users in the spreadsheet opened for viewing only in the Live Viewer mode.
                          6. Show comments in text. If you disable this feature, the commented passages will be highlighted only if you click the Comments
                            icon on the left sidebar.
                          7. Show resolved comments. This feature is disabled by default so that the resolved comments are hidden in the spreadsheet. You can view such comments only if you click the Comments
                            icon on the left sidebar. Enable this option if you want to display resolved comments in the spreadsheet.
                          +

                          Appearance

                          +
                            +
                          1. + The Interface theme option is used to change the color scheme of the editor’s interface. +
                              +
                            • The Same as system option makes the editor follow the interface theme of your system.
                            • +
                            • The Light color scheme incorporates standard blue, white, and light gray colors with less contrast in UI elements suitable for working during daytime.
                            • +
                            • The Classic Light color scheme incorporates standard blue, white, and light gray colors.
                            • +
                            • The Dark color scheme incorporates black, dark gray, and light gray colors suitable for working during nighttime.
                            • +
                            • The Contrast Dark color scheme incorporates black, dark gray, and white colors with more contrast in UI elements highlighting the working area of the file.
                            • +
                            • The Gray color scheme incorporates lighter gray color and appears as a uniformly light color scheme.
                            • +
                            • + The Turn on document dark mode option is used to make the working area darker when the editor is set to Dark or Contrast Dark interface theme. Check the Turn on document dark mode box to enable it. +

                              Note: Apart from the available Light, Classic Light, Dark, Contrast Dark, and Gray interface themes, ONLYOFFICE editors can now be customized with your own color theme. Please follow these instructions to learn how you can do that.

                              +
                            • +
                            +
                          2. +
                          3. Tab style - choose whether you want the currently selected tab to be filled in with a lighter color with the Fill option or to be underlined with the Line option.
                          4. +
                          5. Use toolbar color as tabs background - the color of the toolbar will be used as tabs background. The toolbar color depends on the currently selected interface theme.
                          6. +
                          +

                          Workspace

                          1. The Turn on screen reader support option is used to enable support of screen reader software.
                          2. The R1C1 reference style option is disabled by default and the A1 reference style is used.

                            -

                            When the A1 reference style is used, columns are designated by letters, and rows are designated by numbers. If you select the cell located in row 3 and column 2, its address displayed in the box to the left of the the formula bar looks like this: B3. If the R1C1 reference style is enabled, both rows and columns are designated by numbers. If you select the cell at the intersection of row 3 and column 2, its address will look like this: R3C2. Letter R indicates the row number and letter C indicates the column number.

                            +

                            When the A1 reference style is used, columns are designated by letters, and rows are designated by numbers. If you select the cell located in row 3 and column 2, its address displayed in the box to the left of the formula bar looks like this: B3. If the R1C1 reference style is enabled, both rows and columns are designated by numbers. If you select the cell at the intersection of row 3 and column 2, its address will look like this: R3C2. Letter R indicates the row number and letter C indicates the column number.

                            Active cell

                            In case you refer to other cells using the R1C1 reference style, the reference to a target cell is formed based on the distance from an active cell. For example, when you select the cell in row 5 and column 1 and refer to the cell in row 3 and column 2, the reference is R[-2]C[1]. The numbers in square brackets designate the position of the cell relative to the current cell position, i.e. the target cell is 2 rows up and 1 column to the right of the active cell. If you select the cell in row 1 and column 2 and refer to the same cell in row 3 and column 2, the reference is R[2]C, i.e. the target cell is 2 rows down from the active cell and in the same column.

                          3. The Use Alt key to navigate the user interface using the keyboard option is used to enable using the Alt / Option key in keyboard shortcuts.
                          4. Show the Quick Print button in the editor header is used in the desktop version to enable quick printing via the corresponding button at the top toolbar. The file will be printed on the last selected or default printer.
                          5. -
                          6. The RTL Interface (Beta) option is used to change the direction in which elements of the interface are displayed.
                          7. - The Interface theme option is used to change the color scheme of the editor’s interface. -
                              -
                            • The Same as system option makes the editor follow the interface theme of your system.
                            • -
                            • The Light color scheme incorporates standard blue, white, and light gray colors with less contrast in UI elements suitable for working during daytime.
                            • -
                            • The Classic Light color scheme incorporates standard blue, white, and light gray colors.
                            • -
                            • The Dark color scheme incorporates black, dark gray, and light gray colors suitable for working during nighttime.
                            • -
                            • - The Contrast Dark color scheme incorporates black, dark gray, and white colors with more contrast in UI elements highlighting the working area of the file. -

                              Note: Apart from the available Light, Classic Light, Dark, and Contrast Dark interface themes, ONLYOFFICE editors can now be customized with your own color theme. Please follow these instructions to learn how you can do that.

                              -
                            • -
                            + The RTL Interface (Beta) option is used to change the direction in which elements of the interface are displayed. +

                            This option is available only for interface languages that require RTL.

                          8. -
                          9. The Unit of Measurement option is used to specify what units are used on the rulers and in properties of objects when setting such parameters as width, height, spacing, margins etc. The available units are Centimeter, Point, and Inch.
                          10. +
                          11. The Customize quick access button is used to choose which buttons shall be available in the top toolbar, i.e., Save, Print, Undo, and Redo.
                          12. +
                          13. The Unit of measurement option is used to specify what units are used on the rulers and in properties of objects when setting such parameters as width, height, spacing, margins etc. The available units are Centimeter, Point, and Inch.
                          14. - The Default Zoom Value option is used to set the default zoom value, selecting it in the list of available options from 50% to 500%. You can also choose the Fit to Page, Fit to Width, or Last Used option. -

                            The Last Used option refers to the last set scaling during the current session.

                            + The Default zoom value option is used to set the default zoom value, selecting it in the list of available options from 50% to 500%. You can also choose the Fit to Page, Fit to Width, or Last Used option. +

                            The Last used option refers to the last set scaling value during the current session.

                          15. - The Font Hinting option is used to select how fonts are displayed in the Spreadsheet Editor. + The Font hinting option is used to select how fonts are displayed in the Spreadsheet Editor.
                            • Choose As Windows if you like the way fonts are usually displayed on Windows, i.e. using Windows font hinting.
                            • Choose As OS X if you like the way fonts are usually displayed on a Mac, i.e. without any font hinting at all.
                            • @@ -83,7 +95,7 @@

                              Workspace

                            • In the first cache mode, each letter is cached as a separate picture.
                            • In the second cache mode, a picture of a certain size is selected where letters are placed dynamically and a mechanism of allocating/removing memory in this picture is also implemented. If there is not enough memory, a second picture is created, etc.
                          -

                          The Default cache mode setting applies two above mentioned cache modes separately for different browsers:

                          +

                          The Default cache mode setting applies two above-mentioned cache modes separately for different browsers:

                          • When the Default cache mode setting is enabled, Internet Explorer (v. 9, 10, 11) uses the second cache mode, other browsers use the first cache mode.
                          • When the Default cache mode setting is disabled, Internet Explorer (v. 9, 10, 11) uses the first cache mode, other browsers use the second cache mode.
                          • @@ -92,21 +104,21 @@

                            Workspace

                        4. - The Macros Settings option is used to set macros display with a notification. + The Macros settings option is used to set macros display with a notification.
                          • Choose Disable All to disable all macros within the spreadsheet.
                          • -
                          • Choose Show Notification to receive notifications about macros within the spreadsheet.
                          • -
                          • Choose Enable All to automatically run all macros within the spreadsheet.
                          • +
                          • Choose Show notification to receive notifications about macros within the spreadsheet.
                          • +
                          • Choose Enable all to automatically run all macros within the spreadsheet.
                        -

                        Regional Settings

                        +

                        Regional settings

                        1. The Formula Language option is used to select the language for displaying and entering formula names, argument names, and descriptions.

                          Formula language is supported for 33 languages:

                          -

                          Armenian, Belarussian, Bulgarian, Catalan, Chinese, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English, Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian, Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Lao, Latvian, Norwegian, Polish, Portuguese (Brazil), Portuguese (Portugal), Romanian, Russian, Slovak, Slovenian, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish, Ukrainian, Vietnamese.

                          +

                          Armenian, Belarusian, Bulgarian, Catalan, Chinese, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English, Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian, Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Lao, Latvian, Norwegian, Polish, Portuguese (Brazil), Portuguese (Portugal), Romanian, Russian, Slovak, Slovenian, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish, Ukrainian, Vietnamese.

                        2. The Region option is used to set the display mode for currency, date, and time.
                        3. Available regions: Azerbaijani, Bulgarian, Czech, Danish, German (Austria), German (Germany), German (Switzerland), Greek (Greece), English (Australia), English (Indonesia), English (United Kingdom), English (USA), Spanish (Spain), Spanish (Mexico), Finnish (Finland), French (France), French (Switzerland), Indonesian (Indonesia), Italian (Italy), Italian (Switzerland), Japanese, Korean, Latvian, Hungarian, Dutch (Netherlands), Polish (Poland), Portuguese (Brazil), Portuguese (Portugal), Slovak, Slovenian, Swedish (Finland), Swedish (Sweden), Turkish, Ukrainian, Vietnamese, Chinese, Taiwanese.
                        4. @@ -124,8 +136,11 @@

                          Proofing

                          Calculating

                          1. The Use 1904 date system option is used to calculate dates by using January 1, 1904, as a starting point. It can be useful when working with spreadsheets created in MS Excel 2008 for Mac and earlier MS Excel for Mac versions.
                          2. +
                          3. The Enable iterative calculation option is used to activate iterative calculation.
                          4. +
                          5. The Maximum iterations option is used to set the number of times formulae with circular reference will perform calculations until the cycle stops.
                          6. +
                          7. The Maximum change option is used to set the precision of iterative calculations.
                          -

                          To save the changes you made, click the Apply button.

                          - +

                          The changes are saved as you go.

                          + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Commenting.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Commenting.htm index 5faad335e6..27ce9d8c3e 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Commenting.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Commenting.htm @@ -17,6 +17,7 @@

                          Commenting

                          The Spreadsheet Editor allows you to maintain constant team-wide approach to work flow: share files and folders, collaborate on spreadsheets in real time, communicate right in the editor, save spreadsheet versions for future use.

                          In Spreadsheet Editor you can leave comments to the content of spreadsheets without actually editing it. Unlike chat messages, the comments stay until deleted.

                          +

                          Added comments will remain in third-party editors.

                          Leaving comments and replying to them

                          To leave a comment,

                            diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Communicating.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Communicating.htm index 91bc33075a..6e66501015 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Communicating.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Communicating.htm @@ -16,16 +16,22 @@

                            Communicating in real time

                            The Spreadsheet Editor allows you to maintain constant team-wide approach to work flow: share files and folders, collaborate on spreadsheets in real time, comment certain parts of your spreadsheets that require additional third-party input, save spreadsheet versions for future use.

                            -

                            In Spreadsheet Editor you can communicate with your co-editors in real time using the built-in Chat tool as well as a number of useful plugins, i.e. Telegram or Rainbow.

                            -

                            To access the Chat tool and leave a message for other users,

                            -
                              -
                            1. click the
                              icon at the left sidebar,
                            2. -
                            3. enter your text into the corresponding field below,
                            4. -
                            5. press the Send button.
                            6. -
                            -

                            The chat messages are stored during one session only. To discuss the spreadsheet content, it is better to use comments which are stored until they are deleted.

                            -

                            All the messages left by users will be displayed on the panel on the left. If there are new messages you haven't read yet, the chat icon will look like this - .

                            -

                            To close the panel with chat messages, click the icon once again.

                            +

                            In Spreadsheet Editor you can communicate with your co-editors in real time using the built-in Chat tool as well as a number of useful plugins, i.e., Telegram or Rainbow.

                            +

                            Chat window

                            +
                            +

                            To access the Chat tool and leave a message for other users,

                            +
                              +
                            1. + click the
                              icon on the left sidebar, or
                              + switch to the Collaboration tab of the top toolbar and click the
                              Chat button, +
                            2. +
                            3. enter your text into the corresponding field below,
                            4. +
                            5. press the Send button.
                            6. +
                            +

                            The chat messages are stored during one session only. To discuss the spreadsheet content, it is better to use comments which are stored until they are deleted.

                            +

                            All the messages left by users will be displayed on the panel on the left. If there are new messages you haven't read yet, the chat icon will look like this - .

                            +

                            To close the panel with chat messages, click the icon once again.

                            +
                            \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm index 4e642aac56..ee37996c23 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm @@ -862,13 +862,13 @@

                            Keyboard Shortcuts for Key Tips

                            Select one line up ⇧ Shift+ ⇧ Shift+ - Select one line up (with the cursor at the beginning of a line). + Move the cursor one line up, selecting all symbols between the previous and current cursor position. Select one line down ⇧ Shift+ ⇧ Shift+ - Select one line down (with the cursor at the end of a line). + Move the cursor one line down, selecting all symbols between the previous and current cursor position. Pivot tables diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Search.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Search.htm index 0de2520cd8..1158aa094f 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Search.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/Search.htm @@ -15,7 +15,7 @@

                            Search and Replace Functions

                            -

                            To search for the required characters, words or phrases in the Spreadsheet Editor, click the Search icon situated on the left sidebar, the icon situated in the upper right corner, or use the Ctrl+F (Command+F for MacOS) key combination to open the small Find panel or the Ctrl+H key combination to open the full Find panel.

                            +

                            To search for the required characters, words or phrases in the Spreadsheet Editor, click the Search icon situated on the left sidebar, the icon situated in the upper right corner, or use the Ctrl+F (Command+F for MacOS) key combination to open the small Find panel or the Ctrl+H key combination to open the full Find panel.

                            A small Find panel will open in the upper right corner of the working area.The panel includes the text field for typing in a search query, the number of search results, and controls for moving to the previous or the next result, and closing the bar.

                            Find small panel

                            To access the advanced settings, click the icon.

                            @@ -24,7 +24,7 @@

                            Search and Replace Functions

                            1. Type in your inquiry into the corresponding Find data entry field.
                            2. To navigate between the found occurrences, click one of the arrow buttons. The
                              button shows the next occurrence while the
                              button shows the previous one.
                            3. -
                            4. If you need to replace one or more occurrences of the found characters, type in the replacement text into the corresponding Replace with data entry field. You can choose to replace a single currently selected occurrence or replace all occurrences by clicking the corresponding Replace and Replace All buttons.
                            5. +
                            6. If you need to replace one or more occurrences of the found characters, type in the replacement text into the corresponding Replace with data entry field. You can choose to replace a single currently selected occurrence or replace all occurrences by clicking the corresponding Replace and Replace All buttons. The
                              Replace button can also be found on the Home tab.
                            7. Specify search options by checking the necessary options:
                                diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/VersionHistory.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/VersionHistory.htm index 6fca1b0005..8c8916a5d1 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/VersionHistory.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/HelpfulHints/VersionHistory.htm @@ -28,9 +28,9 @@

                                Version history

                              • go to the Collaboration tab,
                              • open the history of versions using the
                                 Version History icon at the top toolbar.
                              -

                              You'll see the list of the spreadsheet versions and revisions with the indication of each version/revision author and creation date and time. For spreadsheet versions, the version number is also specified (e.g. ver. 2).

                              +

                              You'll see the list of the spreadsheet versions and revisions with the indication of each version/revision author and creation date and time. For spreadsheet versions, the version number is also specified (e.g., ver. 2).

                              Viewing versions:

                              -

                              To know exactly which changes have been made in each separate version/revision, you can view the one you need by clicking it on the left sidebar. The changes made by the version/revision author are marked with the color which is displayed next to the author's name on the left sidebar.

                              +

                              To know exactly which changes have been made in each separate version/revision, you can view the one you need by clicking it on the left sidebar. The changes made by the version/revision author are highlighted with the same color as their avatar in the viewing version history window.

                              To return to the current version of the spreadsheet, use the Close History option on the top of the version list.

                              Restoring versions:

                              If you need to roll back to one of the previous versions of the spreadsheet, click the Restore link below the selected version/revision.

                              diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/DrawTab.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/DrawTab.htm index f0186da7eb..67a1c2515f 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/DrawTab.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/DrawTab.htm @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ - +
                              diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm index 623ba8ef3f..ff495336b0 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm @@ -26,18 +26,18 @@

                              File tab

                              Using this tab, you can perform the following operations:

                                +
                              • create a new spreadsheet or open a recently edited one (available in the online version only),
                              • in the online version, save the current file (in case the Autosave option is disabled), download as (save the spreadsheet in the selected format to hard disk drive of the computer), save copy as (save a copy of the spreadsheet in the selected format to the portal documents), print or rename it, - in the desktop version, save the current file keeping the current format and location using the Save option or save the current file with a different name, location or format using the Save as option, print the file. + in the desktop version, save the current file keeping the current format and location using the Save option or save the current file with a different name, location or format using the Save as option, print the file,
                              • -
                              • protect the file using a password, change or remove the password;
                              • -
                              • protect the file using a digital signature (available in the desktop version only);
                              • -
                              • create a new spreadsheet or open a recently edited one (available in the online version only),
                              • +
                              • protect the file using a password, change or remove the password,
                              • +
                              • protect the file using a digital signature (available in the desktop version only),
                              • view the general information about the spreadsheet or change some file properties,
                              • -
                              • track version history (available in the online version only),
                              • -
                              • manage access rights (available in the online version only),
                              • +
                              • track version history (available in the online version only),
                              • +
                              • Go to Documents - in the desktop version, open the folder, where the file is stored, in the File explorer window, in the online version, open the folder in the Documents module, where the file is stored, in a new browser tab,
                              • access the Advanced Settings of the editor,
                              • -
                              • in the desktop version, open the folder, where the file is stored, in the File explorer window. In the online version, open the folder in the Documents module, where the file is stored, in a new browser tab.
                              • +
                              • Help - open the built-in helpcenter.
                              diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/LayoutTab.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/LayoutTab.htm index 2f0fcdfd90..3b3bd4c98b 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/LayoutTab.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/LayoutTab.htm @@ -31,6 +31,7 @@

                              Layout tab

                            8. insert page breaks,
                            9. insert headers or footers,
                            10. scale a worksheet,
                            11. +
                            12. switch the sheet direction so that the first column is on the right side using the Sheet Right-to-Left button,
                            13. print titles on a page,
                            14. align and arrange objects (images, charts, shapes),
                            15. change color scheme.
                            16. diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/PivotTableTab.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/PivotTableTab.htm index 20d3609ef8..cf210151bf 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/PivotTableTab.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/PivotTableTab.htm @@ -16,6 +16,7 @@

                              Pivot Table tab

                              The Pivot Table tab in the Spreadsheet Editor allows creating and editing pivot tables.

                              +

                              Starting from ONLYOFFICE Docs version 8.2, the Pivot Table tab is hidden by default and will open only while working with pivot tables.

                              The corresponding window of the Online Spreadsheet Editor:

                              Pivot Table tab

                              The corresponding window of the Desktop Spreadsheet Editor:

                              diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm index f96559b040..c225a91caa 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm @@ -27,8 +27,8 @@

                              Introducing the Spreadsheet Editor user interface

                              The editor interface consists of the following main elements:

                              1. - The Editor header displays the logo, tabs for all opened spreadsheets, with their names and menu tabs.. -

                                On the left side of the Editor header there are the Save, Print file, Undo and Redo buttons are located.

                                + The Editor header displays the logo, tabs for all opened spreadsheets, with their names and menu tabs. +

                                On the left side of the Editor header there are the Save, Print file, Undo and Redo buttons are located. Click the dots icon to the right to customize which buttons shall be hidden if any.

                                Icons in the editor header

                                On the right side of the Editor header along with the user name the following icons are displayed:

                                  @@ -39,7 +39,7 @@

                                  Introducing the Spreadsheet Editor user interface

                              2. The top toolbar displays a set of editing commands depending on the selected menu tab. Currently, the following tabs are available: File, Home, Insert, Draw, Layout, Formula, Data, Pivot Table, Collaboration, Protection, View, Plugins. -

                                The Copy, Paste, Cut and Select All options are always available at the left part of the Top toolbar regardless of the selected tab.

                                +

                                The Copy, Paste, Cut, and Copy style options are always available at the left part of the Top toolbar regardless of the selected tab. The Select All button is located at the left part of the Top toolbar of the Home tab.

                              3. The Formula bar allows entering and editing formulas or values in the cells. The Formula bar displays the contents of the currently selected cell.
                              4. The Status bar at the bottom of the editor window contains some navigation tools: sheet navigation buttons, add worksheet button, list of sheets button, sheet tabs, and zoom buttons. The Status bar also displays the background save status and connection status when there is no connection and the editor is trying to reconnect, the number of filtered records if you apply a filter, or the results of automatic calculations if you select several cells containing data.
                              5. diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ViewTab.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ViewTab.htm index 6aa8fd3423..dce4f58b9e 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ViewTab.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/ProgramInterface/ViewTab.htm @@ -46,6 +46,7 @@

                                View tab

                              6. Left Panel to make the left panel visible.
                              7. Right Panel to make the right panel visible.
                              8. +

                                Macros - this option allows adding custom macros to your spreadsheet.

                                \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/AddExternalLinks.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/AddExternalLinks.htm index a419776d03..71904a4d8e 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/AddExternalLinks.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/AddExternalLinks.htm @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ - +
                                diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ChangeNumberFormat.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ChangeNumberFormat.htm index 5dedd4d823..735962e226 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ChangeNumberFormat.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ChangeNumberFormat.htm @@ -55,11 +55,12 @@

                                Apply a number format

                                • use the Increase decimal
                                  icon situated on the Home tab of the top toolbar to display more digits after the decimal point,
                                • use the Decrease decimal
                                  icon situated on the Home tab of the top toolbar to display fewer digits after the decimal point.
                                • +
                                • use the Comma style
                                  icon situated on the Home tab of the top toolbar to display numbers with two decimal places and thousands separated with a comma.

                              - Note: to change the number format you can also use keyboard shortcuts. + Note: to change the number format, you can also use keyboard shortcuts.

                              Customize the number format

                              You can customize the applied number format in the following way:

                              diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ChatGPT.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ChatGPT.htm index 0eea8abc2f..f2df3f22e2 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ChatGPT.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ChatGPT.htm @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ - +
                              @@ -16,6 +16,7 @@

                              ChatGPT

                              The ChatGPT plugin allows you to use the OpenAI chatbot to perform tasks that involve understanding or generating natural language or code.

                              +

                              Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager.

                              Installation

                              To install the ChatGPT plugin,

                              diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/CommunicationPlugins.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/CommunicationPlugins.htm index dd575911c2..199b5a5cc5 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/CommunicationPlugins.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/CommunicationPlugins.htm @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@

                              Communicate while editing

                              In ONLYOFFICE Spreadsheet Editor, you can always keep in touch with colleagues and use popular online messengers, such as Telegram and Rainbow.

                              -
                              Telegram and Rainbow plugins are not installed by default. To find information on how to install them, please, refer to the corresponding article: Adding plugins to the ONLYOFFICE Desktop Editors Adding plugins to ONLYOFFICE Cloud, or Adding new plugins to server editors.
                              +
                              Telegram and Rainbow plugins are not installed by default. To find information on how to install them, please, refer to the corresponding article: Adding plugins to the ONLYOFFICE Desktop Editors Adding plugins to ONLYOFFICE Cloud, or Adding new plugins to server editors, or install the plugin using the Plugin Manager..

                              Telegram

                              To start chatting in the Telegram plugin,

                                diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/DrawingOperations.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/DrawingOperations.htm index d7c84d9269..29cbfe1138 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/DrawingOperations.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/DrawingOperations.htm @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ - +
                                diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeStyle.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeStyle.htm index 34ed579302..3efd84195a 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeStyle.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeStyle.htm @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@

                                Set font type, size, style, and colors

                                Change color scheme
                                - This button is located on the Layout tab. Used to change the default color palette for worksheet elements (font, background, chats and chart elements) selecting from the available options: New Office, Office, Grayscale, Apex, Aspect, Civic, Concourse, Equity, Flow, Foundry, Median, Metro, Module, Odulent, Oriel, Origin, Paper, Solstice, Technic, Trek, Urban, or Verve. + This button is located on the Layout tab. Used to change the default color palette for worksheet elements (font, background, chats and chart elements) selecting from the available options: Aspect, Blue Green, Blue II, Blue Warm, Blue, Grayscale, Green Yellow, Green, Marquee, Median, Office 2007-2010, Office 2013-2022, Office, Orange Red, Orange, Paper, Red Orange, Red Violet, Red, Slipstream, Violet II, Violet, Yellow Orange, Yellow, and New Office.

                                Note: it's also possible to apply one of the formatting presets selecting the cell you wish to format and choosing the desired preset from the list on the Home tab of the top toolbar:

                                diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/GoalSeek.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/GoalSeek.htm index 110c61a0b9..7ce8b5383e 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/GoalSeek.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/GoalSeek.htm @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ - +

                                diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/HighlightedCode.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/HighlightedCode.htm index f881bd982f..3c315afb78 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/HighlightedCode.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/HighlightedCode.htm @@ -16,9 +16,10 @@

                                Insert highlighted code

                                In the Spreadsheet Editor, you can embed highlighted code with the already adjusted style in accordance with the programming language and coloring style of the program you have chosen.

                                +

                                Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager.

                                1. Go to your spreadsheet and place the cursor at the location where you want to include the code.
                                2. -
                                3. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose
                                  Highlight code.
                                4. +
                                5. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose
                                  Highlight code.
                                6. Specify the programming Language.
                                7. Select a Style of the code so that it appears as if it were open in this program.
                                8. Specify if you want to replace tabs with spaces.
                                9. diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm index 3ed4cd698e..27c55a9e60 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm @@ -78,12 +78,12 @@

                                  Adjust the autoshape settings

                                  Fill - use this section to select the autoshape fill. You can choose the following options:
                                  • - Color Fill - select this option to specify a solid color to fill the inner space of the selected autoshape. -

                                    Color Fill

                                    + Color fill - select this option to specify a solid color to fill the inner space of the selected autoshape. +

                                    Color fill

                                    Click the colored box below and select the necessary color from the available color sets or specify any color you like:

                                      -
                                    • Theme Colors - the colors that correspond to the selected color scheme of the spreadsheet.
                                    • -
                                    • Standard Colors - the default colors set.
                                    • +
                                    • Theme colors - the colors that correspond to the selected color scheme of the spreadsheet.
                                    • +
                                    • Standard colors - the default colors set.
                                    • You can also apply a custom color using two different options:
                                        @@ -100,8 +100,8 @@

                                        Adjust the autoshape settings

                                    • - Gradient Fill - use this option to fill the shape with two or more fading colors. Customize your gradient fill with no constraints. Click the Shape settings
                                      icon to open the Fill menu on the right sidebar: -

                                      Gradient Fill

                                      + Gradient fill - use this option to fill the shape with two or more fading colors. Customize your gradient fill with no constraints. Click the Shape settings
                                      icon to open the Fill menu on the right sidebar: +

                                      Gradient fill

                                      Available menu options:

                                      • @@ -112,9 +112,9 @@

                                        Adjust the autoshape settings

                                    • - Gradient Point is a specific point for transition from one color to another. + Gradient point is a specific point for transition from one color to another.
                                        -
                                      • Use the
                                        Add Gradient Point button or slider bar to add a gradient point. You can add up to 10 gradient points. Each next gradient point added will in no way affect the current gradient fill appearance. Use the
                                        Remove Gradient Point button to delete a certain gradient point.
                                      • +
                                      • Use the
                                        Add gradient point button or slider bar to add a gradient point. You can add up to 10 gradient points. Each next gradient point added will in no way affect the current gradient fill appearance. Use the
                                        Remove gradient point button to delete a certain gradient point.
                                      • Use the slider bar to change the location of the gradient point or specify Position in percentage for precise location.
                                      • To apply a color to a gradient point, click a point on the slider bar, and then click Color to choose the color you want.
                                      @@ -122,12 +122,12 @@

                                      Adjust the autoshape settings

                                  • - Picture or Texture - select this option to use an image or a predefined texture as the shape background. -

                                    Picture or Texture Fill

                                    + Picture or texture - select this option to use an image or a predefined texture as the shape background. +

                                    Picture or texture fill

                                      -
                                    • If you wish to use an image as the shape background, you can click the Select Picture button and add an image From File selecting it on the hard disc drive of your computer, From Storage using your ONLYOFFICE file manager, or From URL inserting the appropriate URL address into the opened window.
                                    • +
                                    • If you wish to use an image as a background for the shape, open the Select picture dropdown menu; here, you can add an image From file by selecting it on your computer hard disk drive, From URL by inserting the appropriate URL address into the opened window, or From storage by selecting the required image stored on your portal.
                                    • - If you wish to use a texture as the shape background, open the From Texture menu and select the necessary texture preset. + If you wish to use a texture as the shape background, open the From texture menu and select the necessary texture preset.

                                      Currently, the following textures are available: canvas, carton, dark fabric, grain, granite, grey paper, knit, leather, brown paper, papyrus, wood.

                                    @@ -142,14 +142,14 @@

                                    Adjust the autoshape settings

                                  • Pattern - select this option to fill the shape with a two-colored design composed of regularly repeated elements. -

                                    Pattern Fill

                                    +

                                    Pattern fill

                                    • Pattern - select one of the predefined designs from the menu.
                                    • Foreground color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern elements.
                                    • Background color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern background.
                                  • -
                                  • No Fill - select this option if you don't want to use any fill.
                                  • +
                                  • No fill - select this option if you don't want to use any fill.
                              @@ -191,10 +191,26 @@

                              Adjust the autoshape settings

                            -
                          1. Change Shape is used to replace the current autoshape. Choose another autoshape from the dropdown list.
                          2. +
                          3. Change shape is used to replace the current autoshape. Choose another autoshape from the dropdown list.
                          4. + + +
                          5. + Shadow - open this menu to choose one of the preset shadow styles used for the shape. +
                              +
                            • No Shadow - uncheck this menu point to display a shadow, and vice versa.
                            • +
                            • Color - choose one of the available colors either on the Theme colors or the Standard colors palette; use the Eyedropper tool to copy color from other objects in the document; or click the More colors menu item to create a custom color.
                            • +
                            • + Adjust Shadow - create a custom shadow using the following sliders: +

                              Adjust shadow

                              +
                                +
                              • Transparency - adjust the transparency of the shadow.
                              • +
                              • Size - adjust the size of the shadow.
                              • +
                              • Angle - adjust the angle of the shadow relative to its object.
                              • +
                              • Distance - adjust the distance of the shadow from its object.
                              • +
                              +
                          6. -
                          7. Show shadow - check this option to display the shape with shadow.

                          8. Adjust shape advanced settings

                            diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertChart.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertChart.htm index 6605acb078..78a45f238d 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertChart.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertChart.htm @@ -118,7 +118,7 @@

                            Insert and adjust a chart manually

                          After that the chart will be added to the worksheet.

                          -

                          Note: ONLYOFFICE Spreadsheet Editor supports the following types of charts that were created with third-party editors: Pyramid, Bar (Pyramid), Horizontal/Vertical Cylinders, Horizontal/Vertical Cones. You can open the file containing such a chart and modify it using the available chart editing tools.

                          +

                          Note: ONLYOFFICE Spreadsheet Editor supports the following types of charts that were created with third-party editors: Pyramid, Bar (Pyramid), Horizontal/Vertical Cylinders, Horizontal/Vertical Cones. You can open the file containing such a chart and modify it using the available chart editing tools. The following types are supported for opening only: Histogram, Waterfall, Funnel.

                          Adjust the chart settings

                          Now you can change the settings of the inserted chart. To change the chart type,

                            @@ -234,6 +234,10 @@

                            Adjust the chart settings

                            Markers - is used to specify whether the markers should be displayed (if the box is checked) or not (if the box is unchecked) for Line/XY (Scatter) charts.

                            Note: the Lines and Markers options are available for Line charts and XY (Scatter) charts only.

                            +
                          1. + Trendline options - use the Display equation on chart option for the equations to appear on the diagram. +

                            This option is available for diagrams that include trendlines.

                            +
                          2. Chart - Advanced Settings window

                            The Vertical axis tab allows you to change the parameters of the vertical axis also referred to as the values axis or y-axis which displays numeric values. Note that the vertical axis will be the category axis which displays text labels for the Bar charts, therefore in this case the Vertical axis tab options will correspond to the ones described in the next section. For the XY (Scatter) charts, both axes are value axes.

                            diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertFunction.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertFunction.htm index 84f6afa64b..72e3a326a1 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertFunction.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/InsertFunction.htm @@ -97,7 +97,7 @@

                            How to apply functions

                            Text and Data Functions Used to correctly display the text data in the spreadsheet. - ARRAYTOTEXT; ASC; CHAR; CLEAN; CODE; CONCATENATE; CONCAT; DOLLAR; EXACT; FIND; FINDB; FIXED; LEFT; LEFTB; LEN; LENB; LOWER; MID; MIDB; NUMBERVALUE; PROPER; REPLACE; REPLACEB; REPT; RIGHT; RIGHTB; SEARCH; SEARCHB; SUBSTITUTE; T; TEXT; TEXTJOIN; TRIM; UNICHAR; UNICODE; UPPER; VALUE; TEXTBEFORE; TEXTAFTER; TEXTSPLIT + ARRAYTOTEXT; ASC; CHAR; CLEAN; CODE; CONCATENATE; CONCAT; DOLLAR; EXACT; FIND; FINDB; FIXED; IMPORTRANGE; LEFT; LEFTB; LEN; LENB; LOWER; MID; MIDB; NUMBERVALUE; PROPER; REPLACE; REPLACEB; REPT; RIGHT; RIGHTB; SEARCH; SEARCHB; SUBSTITUTE; T; TEXT; TEXTJOIN; TRIM; UNICHAR; UNICODE; UPPER; VALUE; TEXTBEFORE; TEXTAFTER; TEXTSPLIT Statistical Functions @@ -132,18 +132,22 @@

                            How to apply functions

                            Lookup and Reference Functions Used to easily find information from the data list. - ADDRESS; CHOOSE; CHOOSECOLS; CHOOSEROWS; COLUMN; COLUMNS; DROP; EXPAND; FILTER; FORMULATEXT; HLOOKUP; HSTACK; HYPERLINK; INDEX; INDIRECT; LOOKUP; MATCH; OFFSET; ROW; ROWS; SORT; SORTBY; TAKE; TOCOL; TOROW; TRANSPOSE; UNIQUE; VLOOKUP; VSTACK; WRAPCOLS; WRAPROWS; XLOOKUP; XMATCH + ADDRESS; CHOOSE; CHOOSECOLS; CHOOSEROWS; COLUMN; COLUMNS; DROP; EXPAND; FILTER; FORMULATEXT; GETPIVOTDATA; HLOOKUP; HSTACK; HYPERLINK; INDEX; INDIRECT; LOOKUP; MATCH; OFFSET; ROW; ROWS; SORT; SORTBY; TAKE; TOCOL; TOROW; TRANSPOSE; UNIQUE; VLOOKUP; VSTACK; WRAPCOLS; WRAPROWS; XLOOKUP; XMATCH + + + Information Functions + Used to provide information about the data in the selected cell or cell range. + CELL; ERROR.TYPE; ISBLANK; ISERR; ISERROR; ISEVEN; ISFORMULA; ISLOGICAL; ISNA; ISNONTEXT; ISNUMBER; ISODD; ISREF; ISTEXT; N; NA; SHEET; SHEETS; TYPE + + + Logical Functions + Used to check if a condition is true or false. + AND; FALSE; IF; IFERROR; IFNA; IFS; NOT; OR; SWITCH; TRUE; XOR + + + Custom Functions + Used to access custom functions. - - Information Functions - Used to provide information about the data in the selected cell or cell range. - CELL; ERROR.TYPE; ISBLANK; ISERR; ISERROR; ISEVEN; ISFORMULA; ISLOGICAL; ISNA; ISNONTEXT; ISNUMBER; ISODD; ISREF; ISTEXT; N; NA; SHEET; SHEETS; TYPE - - - Logical Functions - Used to check if a condition is true or false. - AND; FALSE; IF; IFERROR; IFNA; IFS; NOT; OR; SWITCH; TRUE; XOR - diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ManageSheets.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ManageSheets.htm index 8aa18181a1..c9eb3c5430 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ManageSheets.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ManageSheets.htm @@ -52,8 +52,10 @@

                            Manage sheets

                            To move an existing sheet:

                            1. right-click the sheet tab you wish to move,
                            2. -
                            3. select the Move option from the right-click menu,
                            4. -
                            5. select the sheet before which you wish to insert the selected one or use the Move to end option to move the selected sheet after all the existing ones,
                            6. +
                            7. select the Move or copy option from the right-click menu,
                            8. +
                            9. select the required workbook using the Spreadsheet drop-down menu,
                            10. +
                            11. select the sheet before which you wish to insert the selected one, or use the Move to end option to move the selected sheet after all the existing ones,
                            12. +
                            13. mark the Create a copy checkbox if you want to create a copy of the moved sheet,
                            14. click the OK button to confirm your choice.

                            Or simply drag the necessary sheet tab and drop it to a new location. The selected sheet will be moved.

                            diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/OpenCreateNew.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/OpenCreateNew.htm index 539a932e7c..9c0b15be62 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/OpenCreateNew.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/OpenCreateNew.htm @@ -72,6 +72,7 @@

                            To rename an opened spreadsheet

                            To open the folder, where the file is stored , in a new browser tab in the online version or in the file explorer window in the desktop version, click the Open file location icon on the right side of the editor header. Alternatively, you can switch to the File tab on the top toolbar and select the Open file location option.

                            +

                            ONLYOFFICE offers a form gallery where you can find templates in different languages and download them directly onto your hard drive. The gallery is constantly updated, and you can participate and upload your own templates. Currently, the gallery is available for ONLYOFFICE DocSpace and for ONLYOFFICE Desktop Editors.

                            diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/PageBreaks.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/PageBreaks.htm index b0e98f6cef..aee41cf964 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/PageBreaks.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/PageBreaks.htm @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ - +
                            diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Password.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Password.htm index 5591c10478..2b6c5227c2 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Password.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Password.htm @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@

                            Protecting spreadsheets with a password

                            -

                            You can control access to a spreadsheet by setting a password that is required to enter the editing mode by your co-authors. The password can be changed or removed later on. There are two ways to password protect your spreadsheet: using the Protection tab or the File tab.

                            +

                            You can control access to a spreadsheet by setting a password that is required to enter the editing mode by your co-authors. The password can be changed or removed later on. The spreadsheet will remain protected in third-party editors. There are two ways to password protect your spreadsheet: using the Protection tab or the File tab.

                            The password cannot be restored if you lose or forget it. Please keep it in a safe place.

                            Setting a password using the Protection tab.

                              @@ -25,7 +25,7 @@

                              Setting a password using the Protection tab.

                              in the Set Password window that opens, enter and confirm the password you will use to access this file. Click
                              to show or hide password characters when entered.

                              setting password

                              -
                            • click OK to confirm
                            • . +
                            • click OK to confirm.
                            • the Encrypt button on the top toolbar displays with an arrow when the file is encrypted. Click the arrow if you want to change or delete your password.

                              Encrypted

                              diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/PhotoEditor.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/PhotoEditor.htm index 53054f2a77..6e3ff87aae 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/PhotoEditor.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/PhotoEditor.htm @@ -16,10 +16,11 @@

                              Edit an image

                              ONLYOFFICE Spreadsheet Editor comes with a very powerful photo editor, that allows you to adjust the image with filters and make all kinds of annotations.

                              +

                              Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager.

                              1. Select an image in your spreadsheet.
                              2. - Switch to the Plugins tab and choose
                                Photo Editor.
                                + Switch to the Plugins tab and choose
                                Photo Editor.
                                You are now in the editing environment.
                                • diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Pixabay.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Pixabay.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..b601c90d29 --- /dev/null +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Pixabay.htm @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + Pixabay + + + + + + + + +
                                  +
                                  + +
                                  +

                                  Pixabay

                                  +

                                  The Pixabay plugin allows you to add pictures to your spreadsheet from an open collection of Pixabay service that offers copyright free images.

                                  +

                                  The plugin is compatible with the self-hosted and the desktop versions of the ONLYOFFICE editors and can be added to ONLYOFFICE instances manually using the Plugin Manager..

                                  + +

                                  Installation

                                  +

                                  To install the Pixabay plugin,

                                  +
                                    +
                                  1. Go to the Plugins tab.
                                  2. +
                                  3. Open the Plugin Manager.
                                  4. +
                                  5. Find
                                    on the marketplace and click the Install button below.
                                  6. +
                                  7. Click the
                                    Pixabay icon in the Plugins tab.
                                  8. +
                                  9. Proceed with the plugin configuration.
                                  10. +
                                  +

                                  For more details, please refer to the ONLYOFFICE API documentation.

                                  + +

                                  Configuration

                                  +
                                    +
                                  1. Log in to your Pixabay account or register a new one.
                                  2. +
                                  3. Go to the Search Images section of the Pixabay API page.
                                  4. +
                                  5. + Scroll down to the Parameters list and copy the link under the Key parameter. If you are not logged in, press Login next to the Key parameter. +

                                    Pixabay API key

                                    +
                                  6. +
                                  7. Paste the key to the API key field on the left panel of the Plugins tab in the Spreadsheet Editor.
                                  8. +
                                  9. Click Save.
                                  10. +
                                  +

                                  Pixabay Panel

                                  + +

                                  How to use

                                  +
                                    +
                                  1. Go to the Plugins tab.
                                  2. +
                                  3. Click the
                                    Pixabay icon.
                                  4. +
                                  5. On the left panel that opens, type in the keyword you associate with the image you are looking for.
                                  6. +
                                  7. + Use the Show settings button to refine your search by Language, Image type, Orientation and Category. Click Hide settings to reduce the search section. +

                                    Pixabay settings

                                    +
                                  8. +
                                  9. Click Search.
                                  10. +
                                  11. Scroll through search results and click the image to add it to your spreadsheet.
                                  12. +
                                  +

                                  Pixabay Results

                                  +
                                  + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ProtectRanges.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ProtectRanges.htm index dd12f0f181..48db186d13 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ProtectRanges.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ProtectRanges.htm @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ - +
                                  @@ -25,13 +25,14 @@

                                  Protect ranges

                                • Use the Filter drop-down list to choose the required sheet. Click the New button in the Protected Ranges window to select and add a range of cells a user will be allowed to edit.
                                • - In the New Range window, type the range Title, and select the range of cells by clicking the Select Range button. Select users who can edit this range and click OK to confirm. + In the New Range window, type the range Title, and select the range of cells by clicking the Select Range button. Select users to provide access to the range, set their access rights, and click OK to confirm.

                                  New Range

                                  + The available access rights are Edit and View.
                                • To edit or delete a range, select it in the Protected Ranges window and click the Edit or Delete button accordingly.
                                • Click the Close button in the Protected Ranges window when you are ready.
                              -

                              To learn more about allowing edit ranges, please refer to the following article.

                              +

                              To learn more about allowing users to edit ranges, please refer to the following article.

                              \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm index e96d770107..8381562932 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@

                              Printing

                              The spreadsheet Preview and the available printing options will open.

                              Some of these settings (page Margins, Orientation, Size, Print Area as well as Scale to Fit) are also available on the Layout tab of the top toolbar.

                              -

                              Print Settings window

                              +

                              Print Settings window

                              Here you can adjust the following parameters. In the desktop version you can also define the Print sides option to print on one or two sides flipping the pages on long or short edge as well as print the file to PDF or use the Quick print button in the top toolbar to print the file on the last selected or default printer.

                              • @@ -110,6 +110,7 @@

                                Printing

                                Header/footer settings - allow to add some additional information to a printed worksheet, such as date and time, page number, sheet name, etc.
                              • First page number - specify the number of the first page printed.
                              • +
                              • Toggle the Zoom to page switch in the bottom right corner of the screen to display the actual size of the sheets when deactivated, or zoom out when activated.

                              After you have configured the printing settings click the Print button to save changes and print out the spreadsheet or the Save button to save changes made to printing settings.

                              All changes you made will be lost if you don't print the spreadsheet or save the changes.

                              diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Thesaurus.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Thesaurus.htm index fc0ad5b96a..1f370270f5 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Thesaurus.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Thesaurus.htm @@ -19,9 +19,10 @@

                              Replace a word by a synonym

                              If you are using the same word multiple times, or a word is just not quite the word you are looking for, ONLYOFFICE Spreadsheet Editor lets you look up synonyms. It will show you the antonyms too.

                              +

                              Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager.

                              1. Select the word in your spreadsheet.
                              2. -
                              3. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose
                                Thesaurus.
                              4. +
                              5. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose
                                Thesaurus.
                              6. The synonyms and antonyms will show up in the left sidebar.
                              7. Click a word to replace the word in your spreadsheet.
                              diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Translator.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Translator.htm index 7fe395b665..46acfda01b 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Translator.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Translator.htm @@ -16,9 +16,10 @@

                              Translate text

                              In the Spreadsheet Editor, you can translate your spreadsheet from and to numerous languages.

                              +

                              Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager.

                              1. Select the text that you want to translate.
                              2. -
                              3. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose
                                Translator, the Translator appears in a sidebar on the left.
                              4. +
                              5. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose
                                Translator, the Translator appears in a sidebar on the left.
                              6. Click the drop-down box and choose the preferred language.

                              The text will be translated to the required language.

                              @@ -28,7 +29,7 @@

                              Changing the language of your result:

                              1. Click the drop-down box and choose the preferred language.
                              -

                              The translation will change immediately.

                              +

                              The translation will change immediately.

                              \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ViewDocInfo.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ViewDocInfo.htm index 493ccd3ed0..417bb8d68e 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ViewDocInfo.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/ViewDocInfo.htm @@ -10,40 +10,29 @@ -
                              -
                              - -
                              -

                              View file information

                              -

                              To access the detailed information about the currently edited spreadsheet in the Spreadsheet Editor, click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Spreadsheet Info option.

                              -

                              General Information

                              -

                              The spreadsheet information includes a number of file properties which describe the spreadsheet. Some of these properties are updated automatically, and some of them can be edited.

                              +
                              +
                              + +
                              +

                              View file information

                              +

                              To access the detailed information about the currently edited spreadsheet in the Spreadsheet Editor, click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Info option.

                              +

                              Common

                                -
                              • Location - the folder in the Documents module where the file is stored. Owner - the name of the user who has created the file. Uploaded - the date and time when the file has been created. These properties are available in the online version only.
                              • -
                              • Title, Subject, Comment - these properties allow you to simplify the classification of your documents. You can specify the necessary text in the properties fields.
                              • -
                              • Last Modified - the date and time when the file was last modified.
                              • -
                              • Last Modified By - the name of the user who has made the latest change to the spreadsheet if the spreadsheet has been shared and it can be edited by several users.
                              • -
                              • Application - the application the spreadsheet was created with.
                              • -
                              • Author - the person who has created the file. You can enter the necessary name in this field. Press Enter to add a new field that allows you to specify one more author.
                              • +
                              • Owner - the person who has created the file.
                              • +
                              • Uploaded - the date when the file has been uploaded to the server.
                              • +
                              • Last Modified - the date when the file has last been edited.
                              • +
                              +

                              Statistics

                              +

                              This subsection displays the number of pages, paragraphs, words, symbols, and symbols with spaces within the file.

                              +

                              Properties

                              +
                                +
                              • Author - you can enter the necessary name in this field. Press Enter to add a new field that allows you to specify one more author. To delete additional authors, click the cross button next to the corresponding fields.
                              • +
                              • Title - enter the title of the spreadsheet. Please do not confuse it with the file name as these are different file properties.
                              • +
                              • Tags - enter necessary tags for better file classification.
                              • +
                              • Subject - enter the spreadsheet subject.
                              • +
                              • Comment - enter the comment to the file. Please do not confuse it with the Comments as these are different features.
                              • +
                              • Click the Add property button to add custom fields, entering the Title of the field, its Type, i.e., its format, and its Value. Click OK when ready. To delete additional fields, click the cross button next to them.
                              -

                              If you changed the file properties, click the Apply button to apply the changes.

                              -
                              -

                              Note: The Online Editors allow you to change the spreadsheet title directly from the editor interface. To do that, click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Rename option, then enter the necessary File name in the opened window and click OK.

                              -
                              -
                              -

                              Permission Information

                              -

                              In the online version, you can view the information about permissions assigned to the files stored in the cloud.

                              -

                              Note: this option is not available for users with the Read Only permissions.

                              -

                              To find out who has the rights to view or edit the spreadsheet, select the Access Rights... option on the left sidebar.

                              -

                              You can also change currently selected access rights by clicking the Change access rights button in the Persons who have rights section.

                              -

                              To close the File pane and return to your spreadsheet, select the Close Menu option.

                              -

                              Version History

                              -

                              In the online version, you can view the version history for the files stored in the cloud.

                              -

                              Note: this option is not available for users with the Read Only permissions.

                              -

                              To view all the changes made to this spreadsheet, select the Version History option at the left sidebar. It's also possible to open the history of versions using the Version History icon on the Collaboration tab of the top toolbar. You'll see the list of this spreadsheet versions (major changes) and revisions (minor changes) with the indication of each version/revision author and creation date and time. For spreadsheet versions, the version number is also specified (e.g. ver. 2). To know exactly which changes have been made in each separate version/revision, you can view the one you need by clicking it on the left sidebar. You can use the Restore link below the selected version/revision to restore it.

                              -

                              Version History

                              -

                              To return to the current version of the spreadsheet, use the Close History option on the top of the version list.

                              -
                              \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/YouTube.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/YouTube.htm index 154231f366..15dea77c31 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/YouTube.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/YouTube.htm @@ -16,13 +16,14 @@

                              Include a video

                              In the Spreadsheet Editor, you can include a video in your spreadsheet. It will be shown as an image. By double-clicking the image the video dialog opens. Here you can start the video.

                              +

                              Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager.

                              1. Copy the URL of the video you want to include.
                                (the complete address shown in the address line of your browser)
                              2. Go to your spreadsheet and place the cursor at the location where you want to include the video.
                              3. -
                              4. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose
                                YouTube.
                              5. +
                              6. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose
                                YouTube.
                              7. Paste the URL and click OK.
                              8. Check if it is the correct video and click the OK button below the video.
                              diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Zoom.htm b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Zoom.htm index 5641369723..0df87690c0 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Zoom.htm +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/UsageInstructions/Zoom.htm @@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ - +
                              @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@

                              Zoom

                              The Zoom plugin allows you to host or schedule Zoom meetings directly in the editor in just a few clicks.

                              -

                              The plugin is compatible with the self-hosted version of ONLYOFFICE editors and can be added to ONLYOFFICE instances manually.

                              +

                              The plugin is compatible with the self-hosted version of ONLYOFFICE editors and can be added to ONLYOFFICE instances manually using the Plugin Manager.

                              Installation

                              To install the Zoom plugin,

                              diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/activecell.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/activecell.png index fca5a730cf..ec01b4efc9 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/activecell.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/activecell.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/allowedit_newrange.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/allowedit_newrange.png index 18e8d0a321..d359aaffcb 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/allowedit_newrange.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/allowedit_newrange.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/array1.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/array1.png index db3aa88565..1d6e172019 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/array1.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/array1.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/array2.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/array2.png index 656c094ce1..75e2f10555 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/array2.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/array2.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/array3.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/array3.png index 8f84205135..a224b1d7c1 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/array3.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/array3.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/array4.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/array4.png index eba8d20259..6e9d0633f2 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/array4.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/array4.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/array5.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/array5.png index 8974fc1d7e..7bd5fe2dba 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/array5.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/array5.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/array6.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/array6.png index c76f6f3e91..7b213d7d82 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/array6.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/array6.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/array7.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/array7.png index 78b13ef505..985e3f6918 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/array7.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/array7.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/array8.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/array8.png index 1fc229c25e..e66549caf3 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/array8.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/array8.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/array9.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/array9.png index 0c41ee9ba3..ca7354114f 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/array9.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/array9.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/changecolumnwidth.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/changecolumnwidth.png index 1763a52d6f..0926b7011b 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/changecolumnwidth.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/changecolumnwidth.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/colorscheme.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/colorscheme.png index c49f7c1d91..0094221e9b 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/colorscheme.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/colorscheme.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/expand_last.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/expand_last.png index 4a99010e83..21b8ef349f 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/expand_last.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/expand_last.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/getpivotdata.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/getpivotdata.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..bcf1b74b1a Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/getpivotdata.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/groupedrows.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/groupedrows.png index bbe5212176..0e2d7b6220 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/groupedrows.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/groupedrows.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/importrange.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/importrange.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..52f4c6a4ae Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/importrange.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/collaborationtab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/collaborationtab.png index 65a56d4c31..a3e159fc3b 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/collaborationtab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/collaborationtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/datatab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/datatab.png index 2a8c57ffeb..ecdab76fb1 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/datatab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/datatab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_collaborationtab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_collaborationtab.png index 95975d8b60..49ef905084 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_collaborationtab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_collaborationtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_datatab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_datatab.png index 38d95f6dbf..be4e375d1b 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_datatab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_datatab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_drawtab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_drawtab.png index c8da4d4826..609b69f57c 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_drawtab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_drawtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png index f49a7bd6e2..8ab3aca68a 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_editorwindow.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png index 4e3b194b29..99a868657f 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_filetab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_formulatab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_formulatab.png index 1c0da47077..58be11334d 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_formulatab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_formulatab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png index 1027fef941..70aab6350e 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_hometab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png index 8d094a5097..c685eb7f1d 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_inserttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_layouttab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_layouttab.png index b871f376f5..4eee01651b 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_layouttab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_layouttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_pivottabletab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_pivottabletab.png index 19f43ce93f..568f347414 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_pivottabletab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_pivottabletab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png index 5c0ceca5f3..ae8d409192 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_pluginstab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_protectiontab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_protectiontab.png index ac61e82217..6940f1fa89 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_protectiontab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_protectiontab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_viewtab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_viewtab.png index 8e8f9715d5..1447e4bca7 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_viewtab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/desktop_viewtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/drawtab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/drawtab.png index c640d70381..2d7faf25d9 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/drawtab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/drawtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/editorwindow.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/editorwindow.png index 99e3be2108..1a487166af 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/editorwindow.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/editorwindow.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/filetab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/filetab.png index 7dc2b11bae..74a080723d 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/filetab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/filetab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/formulatab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/formulatab.png index 69f2a7a487..082ffe7f48 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/formulatab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/formulatab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/hometab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/hometab.png index 5c49b0331b..9796587f2f 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/hometab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/hometab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/inserttab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/inserttab.png index 4c9618fdb2..c50dbc9099 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/inserttab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/inserttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/layouttab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/layouttab.png index ce6da191fd..fd4c2b0cec 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/layouttab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/layouttab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/leftpart.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/leftpart.png index 8d0c49f2d5..23afdddbe9 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/leftpart.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/leftpart.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/pivottabletab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/pivottabletab.png index b5a8c616ea..e1d05fa98f 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/pivottabletab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/pivottabletab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/pluginstab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/pluginstab.png index 808bd35741..c07abf90ae 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/pluginstab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/pluginstab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/protectiontab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/protectiontab.png index 372a95c82f..62ed7c3e48 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/protectiontab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/protectiontab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/viewtab.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/viewtab.png index 9ee9f9f977..939e0ae32d 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/viewtab.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/interface/viewtab.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/multilevelstructure.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/multilevelstructure.png index 72282a5bac..7ae841164c 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/multilevelstructure.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/multilevelstructure.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/namefield.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/namefield.png index 39f64d1acb..68a9b6fb2c 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/namefield.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/namefield.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/pivot_columns.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/pivot_columns.png index 6c36b4576b..1365a30a94 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/pivot_columns.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/pivot_columns.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/pivot_compact.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/pivot_compact.png index 86ddc460cd..96222bb281 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/pivot_compact.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/pivot_compact.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/pivot_outline.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/pivot_outline.png index e913762126..8c42643301 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/pivot_outline.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/pivot_outline.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/pivot_rows.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/pivot_rows.png index d6af3c21a7..28f91d68ab 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/pivot_rows.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/pivot_rows.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/pivot_tabular.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/pivot_tabular.png index a82328efb3..5caf4f9e64 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/pivot_tabular.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/pivot_tabular.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/pivot_values.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/pivot_values.png index 52443ce820..73dc72ee3d 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/pivot_values.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/pivot_values.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/pixabay_results.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/pixabay_results.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..889306b4a7 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/pixabay_results.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/printsettingswindow.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/printsettingswindow.png index a61cda6a8b..e0bd2acae6 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/printsettingswindow.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/printsettingswindow.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_autoshape.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_autoshape.png index deb257654a..139b7f42df 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_autoshape.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/right_autoshape.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/selectcolumn.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/selectcolumn.png index bf2e03387f..d5a68a537f 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/selectcolumn.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/selectcolumn.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/selectrow.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/selectrow.png index dd67f664c5..4a6ab806c4 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/selectrow.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/selectrow.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/selecttable.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/selecttable.png index 9ccfe37313..f5ca87c228 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/selecttable.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/selecttable.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/series_context_menu.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/series_context_menu.png index 1e09f8069a..75a6a4c283 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/series_context_menu.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/series_context_menu.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/series_menu.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/series_menu.png index 01d7ff2a8b..6eafeb1efe 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/series_menu.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/series_menu.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/severalsheets.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/severalsheets.png index 07d74b7912..6392e936ea 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/severalsheets.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/severalsheets.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/summary.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/summary.png index cb55686644..772b5268ff 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/summary.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/summary.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/versionhistory.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/versionhistory.png index 47e50bef9b..5baea726bb 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/versionhistory.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/images/versionhistory.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/search/indexes.js b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/search/indexes.js index 888b080a12..b3c4f42d9c 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/search/indexes.js +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/en/search/indexes.js @@ -940,6 +940,11 @@ var indexes = "title": "GESTEP Function", "body": "The GESTEP function is one of the engineering functions. It is used to test if a number is greater than a threshold value. The function returns 1 if the number is greater than or equal to the threshold value and 0 otherwise. Syntax GESTEP(number, [step]) The GESTEP function has the following arguments: Argument Description number A number to compare with step. step A threshold value. It is an optional argument. If it is omitted, the function will assume step to be 0. Notes How to apply the GESTEP function. Examples The figure below displays the result returned by the GESTEP function." }, + { + "id": "Functions/getpivotdata.htm", + "title": "GETPIVOTDATA Function", + "body": "The GETPIVOTDATA function is one of the lookup and reference functions. It is used to extract data stored in a PivotTable. Syntax GETPIVOTDATA(data_field, pivot_table, [field], [item], …) The GETPIVOTDATA function has the following arguments: Argument Description data_field Is used to set the name of the PivotTable field that contains the required data. The argument needs to be in quotes. pivot_table Is used to refer to any cell, range of cells, or named range of cells in a PivotTable. The argument is used to determine which PivotTable contains the required data. field, item A field/item pair. There are up to 126 pairs of field names and item names that may be used to describe the required data. The pairs can be in any order. Examples The figure below displays the result returned by the GETPIVOTDATA function." + }, { "id": "Functions/growth.htm", "title": "GROWTH Function", @@ -1085,6 +1090,11 @@ var indexes = "title": "IMLOG2 Function", "body": "The IMLOG2 function is one of the engineering functions. It is used to return the logarithm of a complex number to a base of 2. Syntax IMLOG2(inumber) The IMLOG2 function has the following argument: Argument Description inumber A complex number expressed in x + yi or x + yj form. Notes How to apply the IMLOG2 function. Examples The figure below displays the result returned by the IMLOG2 function." }, + { + "id": "Functions/importrange.htm", + "title": "IMPORTRANGE Function", + "body": "The IMPORTRANGE function is one of the text and data functions. It is used to import a range of cells from a specified spreadsheet. Syntax IMPORTRANGE(\"spreadsheet_url\", \"range_string\") The IMPORTRANGE function has the following arguments: Argument Description spreadsheet_url Is used to specify the URL of the spreadsheet the data is imported from. range_string A string specifying the range to import. Examples The figure below displays the result returned by the IMPORTRANGE function." + }, { "id": "Functions/impower.htm", "title": "IMPOWER Function", @@ -2408,7 +2418,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "HelpfulHints/AdvancedSettings.htm", "title": "Advanced Settings of the Spreadsheet Editor", - "body": "The Spreadsheet Editor allows you to change its general advanced settings. To access them, open the File tab on the top toolbar and select the Advanced Settings option. The advanced settings are grouped as follows: Editing and saving Autosave is used in the online version to turn on/off automatic saving of changes made during the editing process. Autorecover is used in the desktop version to turn on/off the option that allows you to automatically recover spreadsheets if the program closes unexpectedly. Show the Paste Options button when the content is pasted. The corresponding icon will appear when you paste content in the spreadsheet. Collaboration The Co-editing mode subsection allows you to set the preferable mode for seeing changes made to the spreadsheet when working in collaboration. Fast (by default). The users who take part in the spreadsheet co-editing will see the changes in real time once they are made by other users. Strict. All the changes made by co-editors will be shown only after you click the Save icon that will notify you about new changes. Show changes from other users. This feature allows to see changes made by other users in the spreadsheet opened for viewing only in the Live Viewer mode. Show comments in text. If you disable this feature, the commented passages will be highlighted only if you click the Comments icon on the left sidebar. Show resolved comments. This feature is disabled by default so that the resolved comments are hidden in the spreadsheet. You can view such comments only if you click the Comments icon on the left sidebar. Enable this option if you want to display resolved comments in the spreadsheet. Workspace The Turn on screen reader support option is used to enable support of screen reader software. The R1C1 reference style option is disabled by default and the A1 reference style is used. When the A1 reference style is used, columns are designated by letters, and rows are designated by numbers. If you select the cell located in row 3 and column 2, its address displayed in the box to the left of the the formula bar looks like this: B3. If the R1C1 reference style is enabled, both rows and columns are designated by numbers. If you select the cell at the intersection of row 3 and column 2, its address will look like this: R3C2. Letter R indicates the row number and letter C indicates the column number. In case you refer to other cells using the R1C1 reference style, the reference to a target cell is formed based on the distance from an active cell. For example, when you select the cell in row 5 and column 1 and refer to the cell in row 3 and column 2, the reference is R[-2]C[1]. The numbers in square brackets designate the position of the cell relative to the current cell position, i.e. the target cell is 2 rows up and 1 column to the right of the active cell. If you select the cell in row 1 and column 2 and refer to the same cell in row 3 and column 2, the reference is R[2]C, i.e. the target cell is 2 rows down from the active cell and in the same column. The Use Alt key to navigate the user interface using the keyboard option is used to enable using the Alt / Option key in keyboard shortcuts. Show the Quick Print button in the editor header is used in the desktop version to enable quick printing via the corresponding button at the top toolbar. The file will be printed on the last selected or default printer. The RTL Interface (Beta) option is used to change the direction in which elements of the interface are displayed. The Interface theme option is used to change the color scheme of the editor’s interface. The Same as system option makes the editor follow the interface theme of your system. The Light color scheme incorporates standard blue, white, and light gray colors with less contrast in UI elements suitable for working during daytime. The Classic Light color scheme incorporates standard blue, white, and light gray colors. The Dark color scheme incorporates black, dark gray, and light gray colors suitable for working during nighttime. The Contrast Dark color scheme incorporates black, dark gray, and white colors with more contrast in UI elements highlighting the working area of the file. Note: Apart from the available Light, Classic Light, Dark, and Contrast Dark interface themes, ONLYOFFICE editors can now be customized with your own color theme. Please follow these instructions to learn how you can do that. The Unit of Measurement option is used to specify what units are used on the rulers and in properties of objects when setting such parameters as width, height, spacing, margins etc. The available units are Centimeter, Point, and Inch. The Default Zoom Value option is used to set the default zoom value, selecting it in the list of available options from 50% to 500%. You can also choose the Fit to Page, Fit to Width, or Last Used option. The Last Used option refers to the last set scaling during the current session. The Font Hinting option is used to select how fonts are displayed in the Spreadsheet Editor. Choose As Windows if you like the way fonts are usually displayed on Windows, i.e. using Windows font hinting. Choose As OS X if you like the way fonts are usually displayed on a Mac, i.e. without any font hinting at all. Choose Native to display the text with hinting embedded into the font files. Default cache mode - used to select the cache mode for the font characters. It’s not recommended to switch it without any reason. It can be helpful in some cases only, for example, when an issue with the enabled hardware acceleration in the Google Chrome browser occurs. The Spreadsheet Editor has two cache modes: In the first cache mode, each letter is cached as a separate picture. In the second cache mode, a picture of a certain size is selected where letters are placed dynamically and a mechanism of allocating/removing memory in this picture is also implemented. If there is not enough memory, a second picture is created, etc. The Default cache mode setting applies two above mentioned cache modes separately for different browsers: When the Default cache mode setting is enabled, Internet Explorer (v. 9, 10, 11) uses the second cache mode, other browsers use the first cache mode. When the Default cache mode setting is disabled, Internet Explorer (v. 9, 10, 11) uses the first cache mode, other browsers use the second cache mode. The Macros Settings option is used to set macros display with a notification. Choose Disable All to disable all macros within the spreadsheet. Choose Show Notification to receive notifications about macros within the spreadsheet. Choose Enable All to automatically run all macros within the spreadsheet. Regional Settings The Formula Language option is used to select the language for displaying and entering formula names, argument names, and descriptions. Formula language is supported for 33 languages: Armenian, Belarussian, Bulgarian, Catalan, Chinese, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English, Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian, Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Lao, Latvian, Norwegian, Polish, Portuguese (Brazil), Portuguese (Portugal), Romanian, Russian, Slovak, Slovenian, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish, Ukrainian, Vietnamese. The Region option is used to set the display mode for currency, date, and time. Available regions: Azerbaijani, Bulgarian, Czech, Danish, German (Austria), German (Germany), German (Switzerland), Greek (Greece), English (Australia), English (Indonesia), English (United Kingdom), English (USA), Spanish (Spain), Spanish (Mexico), Finnish (Finland), French (France), French (Switzerland), Indonesian (Indonesia), Italian (Italy), Italian (Switzerland), Japanese, Korean, Latvian, Hungarian, Dutch (Netherlands), Polish (Poland), Portuguese (Brazil), Portuguese (Portugal), Slovak, Slovenian, Swedish (Finland), Swedish (Sweden), Turkish, Ukrainian, Vietnamese, Chinese, Taiwanese. The Use separators based on regional settings option is enabled by default, the separators will correspond to the set region. To set custom separators, uncheck this option and enter the required separators in Decimal separator and Thousands separator fields. Proofing The Dictionary language option is used to set the preferred dictionary for the spell checking. Ignore words in UPPERCASE. Words typed in capital letters are ignored during the spell checking. Ignore words with numbers. Words with numbers in them are ignored during the spell checking. The AutoCorrect options menu allows you to access the autocorrect settings such as replacing text as you type, recognizing functions, automatic formatting etc. Calculating The Use 1904 date system option is used to calculate dates by using January 1, 1904, as a starting point. It can be useful when working with spreadsheets created in MS Excel 2008 for Mac and earlier MS Excel for Mac versions. To save the changes you made, click the Apply button." + "body": "The Spreadsheet Editor allows you to change its general advanced settings. To access them, open the File tab on the top toolbar and select the Advanced Settings option. The advanced settings are grouped as follows: Editing and saving Autosave is used in the online version to turn on/off automatic saving of changes made during the editing process. Autorecover is used in the desktop version to turn on/off the option that allows you to automatically recover spreadsheets if the program closes unexpectedly. Show the Paste Options button when the content is pasted. The corresponding icon will appear when you paste content in the spreadsheet. Collaboration The Co-editing mode subsection allows you to set the preferable mode for seeing changes made to the spreadsheet when working in collaboration. Fast (by default). The users who take part in the spreadsheet co-editing will see the changes in real time once they are made by other users. Strict. All the changes made by co-editors will be shown only after you click the Save icon that will notify you about new changes. Show changes from other users. This feature allows seeing changes made by other users in the spreadsheet opened for viewing only in the Live Viewer mode. Show comments in text. If you disable this feature, the commented passages will be highlighted only if you click the Comments icon on the left sidebar. Show resolved comments. This feature is disabled by default so that the resolved comments are hidden in the spreadsheet. You can view such comments only if you click the Comments icon on the left sidebar. Enable this option if you want to display resolved comments in the spreadsheet. Appearance The Interface theme option is used to change the color scheme of the editor’s interface. The Same as system option makes the editor follow the interface theme of your system. The Light color scheme incorporates standard blue, white, and light gray colors with less contrast in UI elements suitable for working during daytime. The Classic Light color scheme incorporates standard blue, white, and light gray colors. The Dark color scheme incorporates black, dark gray, and light gray colors suitable for working during nighttime. The Contrast Dark color scheme incorporates black, dark gray, and white colors with more contrast in UI elements highlighting the working area of the file. The Gray color scheme incorporates lighter gray color and appears as a uniformly light color scheme. The Turn on document dark mode option is used to make the working area darker when the editor is set to Dark or Contrast Dark interface theme. Check the Turn on document dark mode box to enable it. Note: Apart from the available Light, Classic Light, Dark, Contrast Dark, and Gray interface themes, ONLYOFFICE editors can now be customized with your own color theme. Please follow these instructions to learn how you can do that. Tab style - choose whether you want the currently selected tab to be filled in with a lighter color with the Fill option or to be underlined with the Line option. Use toolbar color as tabs background - the color of the toolbar will be used as tabs background. The toolbar color depends on the currently selected interface theme. Workspace The Turn on screen reader support option is used to enable support of screen reader software. The R1C1 reference style option is disabled by default and the A1 reference style is used. When the A1 reference style is used, columns are designated by letters, and rows are designated by numbers. If you select the cell located in row 3 and column 2, its address displayed in the box to the left of the formula bar looks like this: B3. If the R1C1 reference style is enabled, both rows and columns are designated by numbers. If you select the cell at the intersection of row 3 and column 2, its address will look like this: R3C2. Letter R indicates the row number and letter C indicates the column number. In case you refer to other cells using the R1C1 reference style, the reference to a target cell is formed based on the distance from an active cell. For example, when you select the cell in row 5 and column 1 and refer to the cell in row 3 and column 2, the reference is R[-2]C[1]. The numbers in square brackets designate the position of the cell relative to the current cell position, i.e. the target cell is 2 rows up and 1 column to the right of the active cell. If you select the cell in row 1 and column 2 and refer to the same cell in row 3 and column 2, the reference is R[2]C, i.e. the target cell is 2 rows down from the active cell and in the same column. The Use Alt key to navigate the user interface using the keyboard option is used to enable using the Alt / Option key in keyboard shortcuts. Show the Quick Print button in the editor header is used in the desktop version to enable quick printing via the corresponding button at the top toolbar. The file will be printed on the last selected or default printer. The RTL Interface (Beta) option is used to change the direction in which elements of the interface are displayed. This option is available only for interface languages that require RTL. The Customize quick access button is used to choose which buttons shall be available in the top toolbar, i.e., Save, Print, Undo, and Redo. The Unit of measurement option is used to specify what units are used on the rulers and in properties of objects when setting such parameters as width, height, spacing, margins etc. The available units are Centimeter, Point, and Inch. The Default zoom value option is used to set the default zoom value, selecting it in the list of available options from 50% to 500%. You can also choose the Fit to Page, Fit to Width, or Last Used option. The Last used option refers to the last set scaling value during the current session. The Font hinting option is used to select how fonts are displayed in the Spreadsheet Editor. Choose As Windows if you like the way fonts are usually displayed on Windows, i.e. using Windows font hinting. Choose As OS X if you like the way fonts are usually displayed on a Mac, i.e. without any font hinting at all. Choose Native to display the text with hinting embedded into the font files. Default cache mode - used to select the cache mode for the font characters. It’s not recommended to switch it without any reason. It can be helpful in some cases only, for example, when an issue with the enabled hardware acceleration in the Google Chrome browser occurs. The Spreadsheet Editor has two cache modes: In the first cache mode, each letter is cached as a separate picture. In the second cache mode, a picture of a certain size is selected where letters are placed dynamically and a mechanism of allocating/removing memory in this picture is also implemented. If there is not enough memory, a second picture is created, etc. The Default cache mode setting applies two above-mentioned cache modes separately for different browsers: When the Default cache mode setting is enabled, Internet Explorer (v. 9, 10, 11) uses the second cache mode, other browsers use the first cache mode. When the Default cache mode setting is disabled, Internet Explorer (v. 9, 10, 11) uses the first cache mode, other browsers use the second cache mode. The Macros settings option is used to set macros display with a notification. Choose Disable All to disable all macros within the spreadsheet. Choose Show notification to receive notifications about macros within the spreadsheet. Choose Enable all to automatically run all macros within the spreadsheet. Regional settings The Formula Language option is used to select the language for displaying and entering formula names, argument names, and descriptions. Formula language is supported for 33 languages: Armenian, Belarusian, Bulgarian, Catalan, Chinese, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English, Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian, Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Lao, Latvian, Norwegian, Polish, Portuguese (Brazil), Portuguese (Portugal), Romanian, Russian, Slovak, Slovenian, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish, Ukrainian, Vietnamese. The Region option is used to set the display mode for currency, date, and time. Available regions: Azerbaijani, Bulgarian, Czech, Danish, German (Austria), German (Germany), German (Switzerland), Greek (Greece), English (Australia), English (Indonesia), English (United Kingdom), English (USA), Spanish (Spain), Spanish (Mexico), Finnish (Finland), French (France), French (Switzerland), Indonesian (Indonesia), Italian (Italy), Italian (Switzerland), Japanese, Korean, Latvian, Hungarian, Dutch (Netherlands), Polish (Poland), Portuguese (Brazil), Portuguese (Portugal), Slovak, Slovenian, Swedish (Finland), Swedish (Sweden), Turkish, Ukrainian, Vietnamese, Chinese, Taiwanese. The Use separators based on regional settings option is enabled by default, the separators will correspond to the set region. To set custom separators, uncheck this option and enter the required separators in Decimal separator and Thousands separator fields. Proofing The Dictionary language option is used to set the preferred dictionary for the spell checking. Ignore words in UPPERCASE. Words typed in capital letters are ignored during the spell checking. Ignore words with numbers. Words with numbers in them are ignored during the spell checking. The AutoCorrect options menu allows you to access the autocorrect settings such as replacing text as you type, recognizing functions, automatic formatting etc. Calculating The Use 1904 date system option is used to calculate dates by using January 1, 1904, as a starting point. It can be useful when working with spreadsheets created in MS Excel 2008 for Mac and earlier MS Excel for Mac versions. The Enable iterative calculation option is used to activate iterative calculation. The Maximum iterations option is used to set the number of times formulae with circular reference will perform calculations until the cycle stops. The Maximum change option is used to set the precision of iterative calculations. The changes are saved as you go." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/CollaborativeEditing.htm", @@ -2423,7 +2433,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "HelpfulHints/Communicating.htm", "title": "Communicating in real time", - "body": "The Spreadsheet Editor allows you to maintain constant team-wide approach to work flow: share files and folders, collaborate on spreadsheets in real time, comment certain parts of your spreadsheets that require additional third-party input, save spreadsheet versions for future use. In Spreadsheet Editor you can communicate with your co-editors in real time using the built-in Chat tool as well as a number of useful plugins, i.e. Telegram or Rainbow. To access the Chat tool and leave a message for other users, click the icon at the left sidebar, enter your text into the corresponding field below, press the Send button. The chat messages are stored during one session only. To discuss the spreadsheet content, it is better to use comments which are stored until they are deleted. All the messages left by users will be displayed on the panel on the left. If there are new messages you haven't read yet, the chat icon will look like this - . To close the panel with chat messages, click the icon once again." + "body": "The Spreadsheet Editor allows you to maintain constant team-wide approach to work flow: share files and folders, collaborate on spreadsheets in real time, comment certain parts of your spreadsheets that require additional third-party input, save spreadsheet versions for future use. In Spreadsheet Editor you can communicate with your co-editors in real time using the built-in Chat tool as well as a number of useful plugins, i.e., Telegram or Rainbow. To access the Chat tool and leave a message for other users, click the icon on the left sidebar, or switch to the Collaboration tab of the top toolbar and click the Chat button, enter your text into the corresponding field below, press the Send button. The chat messages are stored during one session only. To discuss the spreadsheet content, it is better to use comments which are stored until they are deleted. All the messages left by users will be displayed on the panel on the left. If there are new messages you haven't read yet, the chat icon will look like this - . To close the panel with chat messages, click the icon once again." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/ImportData.htm", @@ -2433,7 +2443,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "HelpfulHints/KeyboardShortcuts.htm", "title": "Keyboard Shortcuts", - "body": "Keyboard Shortcuts for Key Tips Use keyboard shortcuts for a faster and easier access to the features of the Spreadsheet Editor without using a mouse. Press Alt (Option for macOS) key to turn on all key tips for the editor header, the top toolbar, the right and left sidebars and the status bar. Press the letter that corresponds to the item you wish to use. The additional key tips may appear depending on the key you press. The first key tips hide when additional key tips appear. For example, to access the Insert tab, press Alt (Option for macOS) to see all primary key tips. Press letter I to access the Insert tab and you will see all the available shortcuts for this tab. Then press the letter that corresponds to the item you wish to configure. Press Alt (Option for macOS) to hide all key tips, or press Escape to go back to the previous group of key tips. Find the most common keyboard shortcuts in the list below. Please note: for macOS, some shortcuts contain the Home, End, Page Up and Page Down keys which are only available on the extended keyboard. If you don't have these keys, use the keyboard shortcuts specified above (i.e. use ^ Ctrl/⌘ Cmd+← or Fn+← instead of Home, ^ Ctrl/⌘ Cmd+→ or Fn+→ instead of End, Fn+↑ instead of Page Up, Fn+↓ instead of Page Down). Windows/Linux Mac OS Working with Spreadsheet Open 'File' panel Alt+F ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+F Open the File panel to save, download, print the current spreadsheet, view its info, create a new spreadsheet or open an existing one, access the help menu of the Spreadsheet Editor or its advanced settings. Open 'Find' dialog window Ctrl+F ^ Ctrl+F, ⌘ Cmd+F Open the Find dialog window to start searching for a cell containing the required characters. Open 'Find and Replace' menu (panel) with replacement field Ctrl+H ^ Ctrl+H Open the Find and Replace menu (panel) with the replacement field to replace one or more occurrences of the found characters. Open 'Comments' panel Ctrl+⇧ Shift+H ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+H, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+H Open the Comments panel to add your own comment or reply to other users' comments. Open comment field Alt+H ⌘ Cmd+⌥ Option+A Open a data entry field where you can add the text of your comment. Open 'Chat' panel (Online Editors) Alt+Q ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+Q Open the Chat panel in the Online Editors and send a message. Save spreadsheet Ctrl+S ^ Ctrl+S, ⌘ Cmd+S Save all the changes to the spreadsheet currently edited with the Spreadsheet Editor. The active file will be saved with its current file name, location, and file format. Print spreadsheet Ctrl+P ^ Ctrl+P, ⌘ Cmd+P Print your spreadsheet with one of the available printers or save it to a file. Download as... Ctrl+⇧ Shift+S ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+S, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+S Open the Download as... panel to save the currently edited spreadsheet to the computer hard disk drive in one of the supported formats: XLSX, XLTX, PDF, PDF/A, ODS, OTS, CSV, PNG, JPG. Full screen (Online Editors) F11 Switch to the full screen view in the Online Editors to fit the Spreadsheet Editor on the screen. Help menu F1 Fn+F1 Open the Help menu of the Spreadsheet Editor. Open existing file Ctrl+O ⌘ Cmd+O Open the standard dialog box that allows selecting an existing file. If you select the file in this dialog box and click Open, the file will be opened in a new tab or window of Desktop Editors. Switch to the next tab Ctrl+↹ Tab ^ Ctrl+↹ Tab Switch to the next file tab in Desktop Editors or browser tab in Online Editors. Switch to the previous tab Ctrl+Shift+↹ Tab ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Switch to the previous file tab in Desktop Editors or browser tab in Online Editors. Close file Ctrl+W, Ctrl+F4 ⌘ Cmd+W Close the current spreadsheet window. Element contextual menu ⇧ Shift+F10 ⇧ Shift+Fn+F10 Open the contextual menu of the selected element. Close menu or modal window, reset modes, etc. Esc Esc Close a menu or modal window. Suspend copying formats. Reset adding shapes mode. Clear clipboard when cutting/copying cells. Hide the Paste Special button. Reset the ‘Zoom’ parameter Ctrl+0 ^ Ctrl+0 or ⌘ Cmd+0 Reset the ‘Zoom’ parameter of the current spreadsheet to a default 100%. Duplicate a worksheet Press and hold down Ctrl+ drag the sheet tab Press and hold down ⌥ Option+ drag the sheet tab Copy an entire worksheet in a workbook and move it to the tab location you need. Navigation Move one cell up, down, left, or right ↑ ↓ ← → ↑ ↓ ← → Outline a cell above/below the currently selected one or to the left/to the right of it. Move active cell down ↵ Enter ↵ Return Move to the cell below. Move active cell up ⇧ Shift+↵ Enter ⇧ Shift+↵ Return Move to the cell above. Move active cell to the right ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Move to the cell on the right. Move active cell to the left ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Move to the cell on the left . Jump to the edge of the visible data region or the next cell with data Ctrl+← → ↑ ↓ ⌘ Cmd+← → ↑ ↓ Home End Page Up Page Down Outline a cell at the edge of the visible data region or the next cell with data in a worksheet. If the region does not contain data, the last cell of the visible area will be selected. If the region contains data, the next cell with data will be selected. Jump to the beginning of the row Home Fn+← Home Outline a cell in the column A of the current row. Jump to the beginning of the spreadsheet Ctrl+Home ^ Ctrl+Fn+←, ⌘ Cmd+Fn+← ^ Ctrl+Home, ⌘ Cmd+Home Outline the cell A1. Jump to the end of the row End, Ctrl+→ Fn+→, ⌘ Cmd+→ End Outline the last cell of the current row. Jump to the end of the spreadsheet Ctrl+End ^ Ctrl+Fn+→, ⌘ Cmd+Fn+→ ^ Ctrl+End, ⌘ Cmd+End Outline the lower right used cell in the worksheet situated in the bottommost row with data of the rightmost column with data. If the cursor is in the formula bar, it will be placed to the end of the text. Move to the previous sheet Alt+Page Up ⌥ Option+Fn+↑ ⌥ Option+Page Up Move to the previous sheet in your spreadsheet. Move to the next sheet Alt+Page Down ⌥ Option+Fn+↓ ⌥ Option+Page Down Move to the next sheet in your spreadsheet. Move up one row ↑, ⇧ Shift+↵ Enter ⇧ Shift+↵ Return Outline the cell above the current one in the same column. Move down one row ↓, ↵ Enter ↵ Return Outline the cell below the current one in the same column. Move left one column ←, ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ←, ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Outline the previous cell of the current row. Move right one column →, ↹ Tab →, ↹ Tab Outline the next cell of the current row. Move down one screen Page Down Fn+↓ Page Down Move one screen down in the worksheet. Move up one screen Page Up Fn+↑ Page Up Move one screen up in the worksheet. Move vertical scrollbar Up/Down Mouse scroll Up/Down Mouse scroll Up/Down Move vertical scrollbar up/down. Move horizontal scrollbar Left/Right ⇧ Shift+Mouse scroll Up/Down ⇧ Shift+Mouse scroll Up/Down Move horizontal scrollbar left/right. To move the scrollbar to the right, scroll the mouse wheel down. To move the scrollbar to the left, scroll the mouse wheel up. Zoom In Ctrl++ ^ Ctrl+=, ⌘ Cmd+= Zoom in the currently edited spreadsheet. Zoom Out Ctrl+- ^ Ctrl+-, ⌘ Cmd+- Zoom out the currently edited spreadsheet. Navigate between controls in modal dialogues ↹ Tab/⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ↹ Tab/⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Navigate between controls to give focus to the next or previous control in modal dialogues. Data Selection Select the entire worksheet Ctrl+A, Ctrl+⇧ Shift+␣ Spacebar ⌘ Cmd+A, ^ Ctrl+A Select the entire worksheet (when the focus is on a cell). Select column Ctrl+␣ Spacebar ^ Ctrl+Fn+␣ Spacebar, ⌘ Cmd+Fn+␣ Spacebar Select an entire column in a worksheet. Select row ⇧ Shift+␣ Spacebar ⇧ Shift+␣ Spacebar Select an entire row in a worksheet. Select one cell to the right ⇧ Shift+→ ⇧ Shift+→ Select one cell to the right. Select one cell to the left ⇧ Shift+← ⇧ Shift+← Select one cell to the left. Select one cell up ⇧ Shift+↑ ⇧ Shift+↑ Select one cell up. Select one cell down ⇧ Shift+↓ ⇧ Shift+↓ Select one cell down. Select from cursor to beginning of row ⇧ Shift+Home ⇧ Shift+Fn+← ⇧ Shift+Home Select a fragment from the cursor to the beginning of the current row. Select from cursor to end of row ⇧ Shift+End ⇧ Shift+Fn+→ ⇧ Shift+End Select a fragment from the cursor to the end of the current row. Select to the next nonblank cell to the right Ctrl+⇧ Shift+→ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+→, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+→ Select cells to the next nonblank cell to the right of the active cell or to the edge of the visible area. Select to the next nonblank cell to the left Ctrl+⇧ Shift+← ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+←, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+← Select cells to the next nonblank cell to the left of the active cell or to the edge of the visible area. Select to the next nonblank cell up Ctrl+⇧ Shift+↑ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+↑, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+↑ Select cells to the next nonblank cell up from the active cell or to the edge of the visible area. Select to the next nonblank cell down Ctrl+⇧ Shift+↓ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+↓, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+↓ Select cells to the next nonblank cell down from the active cell or to the edge of the visible area. Extend the selection to beginning of worksheet Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Home ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Fn+←, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Fn+← ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Home, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Home Select a fragment from the current selected cells to the beginning of the worksheet. Extend the selection to the last used cell Ctrl+⇧ Shift+End ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Fn+→, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Fn+→ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+End, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+End Select a fragment from the current selected cells to the last used cell in the worksheet (in the bottommost row with data of the rightmost column with data). If the cursor is in the formula bar, this will select all text in the formula bar from the cursor position to the end without affecting the height of the formula bar. Extend the selection to the nearest nonblank cell to the right ⇧ Shift+End, Ctrl+⇧ Shift+→ ⇧ Shift+Fn+→ ⇧ Shift+End Extend the selection to the nearest nonblank cell in the same row to the right of the active cell. If the next cell is blank, the selection will be extended to the next nonblank cell. Extend the selection to the nonblank cell to the left Ctrl+⇧ Shift+← Extend the selection to the nonblank cell to the left. Extend the selection to the first column ⇧ Shift+Home ⇧ Shift+Fn+← ⇧ Shift+Home Extend the selection to the first column (A). Extend the selection to the nearest nonblank cell up/down the column Ctrl+⇧ Shift+↑ ↓ Extend the selection to the nearest nonblank cell in the same column up/down from the active cell. If the next cell is blank, the selection will be extended to the next nonblank cell. Extend the selection down one screen ⇧ Shift+Page Down ⇧ Shift+Fn+↓ ⇧ Shift+Page Down Extend the selection to include all the cells one screen down from the active cell. All cells in the columns of the previously selected range will be selected. Extend the selection up one screen ⇧ Shift+Page Up ⇧ Shift+Fn+↑ ⇧ Shift+Page Up Extend the selection to include all the cells one screen up from the active cell. All cells in the columns of the previously selected range will be selected. Undo and Redo Undo Ctrl+Z ⌘ Cmd+Z, ^ Ctrl+Z Reverse the latest performed action. Redo Ctrl+Y ⌘ Cmd+Y, ^ Ctrl+Y Repeat the latest undone action. Cut, Copy, and Paste Cut Ctrl+X, ⇧ Shift+Delete ⌘ Cmd+X Cut the the selected data/graphics and send them to the computer clipboard memory. The cut data can be later inserted to another place in the same worksheet, into another spreadsheet, or into some other program. Copy Ctrl+C, Ctrl+Insert ⌘ Cmd+C Send the selected data/graphics to the computer clipboard memory. The copied data can be later inserted to another place in the same worksheet, into another spreadsheet, or into some other program. Paste Ctrl+V, ⇧ Shift+Insert ⌘ Cmd+V Insert the previously copied/cut data/graphics from the computer clipboard memory to the current cursor position. The data can be previously copied from the same worksheet, from another spreadsheet, or from some other program. Paste Special options 1 Paste only formula Ctrl then F ^ Ctrl then F Paste formulas without pasting the data formatting. Paste formula + number format Ctrl then O ^ Ctrl then O Paste formulas with the formatting applied to numbers. Paste formula + all formatting Ctrl then K ^ Ctrl then K Paste formulas with all the data formatting. Paste formula without borders Ctrl then B ^ Ctrl then B Paste formulas with all the data formatting except the cell borders. Paste formula + column width Ctrl then W ^ Ctrl then W Paste formulas with all the data formatting and set the source column`s width for the cell range. Transpose Ctrl then T ^ Ctrl then T Paste data switching them from columns to rows, or vice versa. This option is available for regular data ranges, but not for formatted tables. Paste only value Ctrl then V ^ Ctrl then V Paste the formula results without pasting the data formatting. Paste value + number format Ctrl then A ^ Ctrl then A Paste the formula results with the formatting applied to numbers. Paste value + all formatting Ctrl then E ^ Ctrl then E Paste the formula results with all the data formatting. Paste only formatting Ctrl then R ^ Ctrl then R Paste the cell formatting only without pasting the cell contents. Paste link Ctrl then N ^ Ctrl then N Paste the external link to a cell or range of cells in another spreadsheet within the current portal (in the online editor) or in a local file (in the desktop editor). Working with Hyperlinks Insert hyperlink Ctrl+K ⌘ Cmd+K, ^ Ctrl+K Insert a hyperlink which can be used to go to a web address. Visit hyperlink Enter Return Visit a hyperlink (with the cursor in the hyperlink). Data Formatting Bold Ctrl+B ^ Ctrl+B, ⌘ Cmd+B Make the font of the selected text fragment darker and heavier than normal or remove the bold formatting. Italic Ctrl+I ⌘ Cmd+I Make the font of the selected text fragment italicized and slightly slanted or remove italic formatting. Underline Ctrl+U ^ Ctrl+U, ⌘ Cmd+U Make the selected text fragment underlined with a line going under the letters or remove underlining. Strikeout Ctrl+5 ^ Ctrl+5, ⌘ Cmd+5 Make the selected text fragment struck out with a line going through the letters or remove strikeout formatting. Edit active cell F2 Fn+F2 Edit the active cell and position the insertion point at the end of the cell contents. If editing in a cell is turned off, the insertion point will be moved into the Formula Bar. Data Filtering Enable/Remove Filter Ctrl+⇧ Shift+L ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+L, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+L Enable a filter for a selected cell range or remove the filter. Open filter window Alt+↓ ⌥ Option+↓ In the header of a column with a filter, open the filter window. Format as table template Ctrl+L ^ Ctrl+L, ⌘ Cmd+L Apply a table template to a selected cell range. Data Entry Complete cell entry and move down ↵ Enter ↵ Return Complete a cell entry in the selected cell or the formula bar, and move to the cell below. Complete cell entry and move up ⇧ Shift+↵ Enter ⇧ Shift+↵ Return Complete a cell entry in the selected cell, and move to the cell above. Complete cell entry and move to the right ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Complete a cell entry in the selected cell or the formula bar and move to the cell on the right. Complete cell entry and move to the left ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Complete a cell entry in the selected cell or the formula bar and move to the cell on the left . Complete cell entry and stay in it Ctrl+⇧ Shift+↵ Enter, Ctrl+↵ Enter ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+↵ Return, ^ Ctrl+↵ Return Complete a cell entry in the selected cell or the formula bar and stay in it. Fill the selected cell range with the current entry Ctrl+↵ Enter ^ Ctrl+↵ Return Fill the selected cell range with the current entry. Select a cell range, type data to the active cell and press the specified keys to fill all the selected cells with entered data. Start new line Alt+↵ Enter ⌥ Option+↵ Return Start a new line in the same cell. Add new placeholder to equation argument Enter Return, ⇧ Shift+Return Add a new placeholder to the equation argument. Cancel Esc Esc Cancel an entry in the selected cell or the formula bar. Delete to the left ← Backspace Delete Delete one character to the left in the formula bar or in the selected cell when the cell editing mode is activated. Remove the selection. Also removes the content of the active cell. It is also applicable to text in graphical objects. Delete to the right Delete Fn+Delete Delete one character to the right in the formula bar or in the selected cell when the cell editing mode is activated. Remove the selection. Also removes the cell contents (data and formulas) from selected cells without affecting cell formats or comments. It is also applicable to text in graphical objects. Clear active cell content Delete, ← Backspace Delete Remove the content (data and formulas) from the active cell without affecting the cell format or comments. Clear content of all selected cells Delete Fn+Delete Remove the content (data and formulas) from all selected cells without affecting the cell format or comments. Insert cells Ctrl+⇧ Shift+= Ctrl+⇧ Shift+=, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+= Open the dialog box for inserting new cells within current spreadsheet with an added parameter of a shift to the right, a shift down, inserting an entire row or an entire column. Delete cells Ctrl+⇧ Shift+- Ctrl+⇧ Shift+-, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+- Open the dialog box for deleting cells within current spreadsheet with an added parameter of a shift to the left, a shift up, deleting an entire row or an entire column. Insert the current date Ctrl+; Ctrl+;, ⌘ Cmd+; Insert the today date within an active cell. Insert the current time Ctrl+⇧ Shift+; Ctrl+⇧ Shift+;, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+; Insert the current time within an active cell. Insert the current date and time Ctrl+; then ␣ Spacebar then Ctrl+⇧ Shift+; Ctrl+; then ␣ Spacebar then Ctrl+⇧ Shift+;, ⌘ Cmd+; then ␣ Spacebar then ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+; Insert the current date and time within an active cell. Insert separator Numpad . Insert separator within an active cell. Auto Fill (Open drop-down list) Alt+↓ ⌥ Option+↓ Use this shortcut in an empty cell below or above existing values in the column. A drop-down list with existing values will appear. Select one of the available text values to fill an empty cell. Insert an em dash ⌥ Option+⇧ Shift+- Insert an em dash ‘—’ within the current cell. Insert an en dash ⌥ Option+- Insert an en dash ‘-’ within the current cell. Work with keyboard supporting the ability to insert Unicode symbols ⌥ Option+Q, ⌥ Option+F, ⇧ Shift+⌥ Option+7, and others When using the ⌥ Option+keyboard symbol shortcuts, for the keyboards supporting the ability to insert Unicode symbols, the keyboard symbols are added. The examples are listed below. With the English ABC layout, the ⌥ Option+Q shortcut inserts the \"œ\" symbol, the ⌥ Option+F shortcut inserts the “ƒ” function symbol. With the US International w/o deadkeys layout, the ⌥ Option+Q shortcut inserts the “ä” symbol. With the Swiss-german layout, the ⇧ Shift+⌥ Option+7 shortcut inserts the \"\\” symbol. Working with text in cells and graphical objects Remove word, selection to the left Ctrl+Backspace ⌥ Option+Delete Remove a word, selection to the left of the cursor. Remove word, selection to the right Ctrl+Delete Fn+⌥ Option+Delete Remove a word, selection to the right of the cursor. Select all Ctrl+A ⌘ Cmd+A, ^ Ctrl+A Select the entire shape content (when the cursor is within the shape content). Select the entire cell content (when the cursor is within the cell). Move one character to the left/right or one line up/down ← → ↑ ↓ ← → ↑ ↓ Move the cursor one character to the left/right or one line up/down. Select one character to the right ⇧ Shift+→ ⇧ Shift+→ Select one character to the right of the cursor position. Select one character to the left ⇧ Shift+← ⇧ Shift+← Select one character to the left of the cursor position. Move the cursor one word to the left Ctrl+← ⌥ Option+← Move the cursor one word to the left. Move the cursor one word to the right Ctrl+→ ⌥ Option+→ Move the cursor one word to the right. Select one word to the left Ctrl+⇧ Shift+← ⇧ Shift+⌥ Option+← Select one word to the left of the cursor. Select one word to the right Ctrl+⇧ Shift+→ ⇧ Shift+⌥ Option+→ Select one word to the right of the cursor. Jump to the beginning of the text Ctrl+Home ^ Ctrl+Fn+←, ⌘ Cmd+Fn+← ^ Ctrl+Home, ⌘ Cmd+Home Put the cursor to the very beginning of the text in a cell or shape. Jump to the end of the text Ctrl+End ^ Ctrl+Fn+→, ⌘ Cmd+Fn+→ ^ Ctrl+End, ⌘ Cmd+End Put the cursor to the very end of the text in a cell or shape. Select from cursor to beginning of text Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Home ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Fn+←, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Fn+← ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Home, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Home Select a text fragment from the cursor to the beginning of the text in a cell or shape. Select from cursor to end of text Ctrl+⇧ Shift+End ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Fn+→, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Fn+→ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+End, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+End Select a text fragment from the cursor to the end of the text in a cell or shape. Jump to the beginning of the line Home ⌘ Cmd+← Home Put the cursor to the beginning of the currently edited line. Jump to the end of the line End ⌘ Cmd+→ End Put the cursor to the end of the currently edited line. Select from cursor to beginning of line ⇧ Shift+Home ⇧ Shift+Fn+← ⇧ Shift+Home Select a text fragment from the cursor to the beginning of the current line. Select from cursor to end of line ⇧ Shift+End ⇧ Shift+Fn+→ ⇧ Shift+End Select a text fragment from the cursor to the end of the current line. Select one line up ⇧ Shift+↑ ⇧ Shift+↑ Select one line up (with the cursor at the beginning of a line). Select one line down ⇧ Shift+↓ ⇧ Shift+↓ Select one line down (with the cursor at the end of a line). Pivot tables Update pivot table Alt+F5 ⌥ Option+Fn+F5 Update the previously selected pivot table. Update all pivot tables Ctrl+Alt+F5 2 Ctrl+⌥ Option+Fn+F5 Update all pivot tables. Slicers Clear selected values Alt+C Ctrl+⌥ Option+C, ⌘ Cmd+⌥ Option+C Clear selected values for a slicer. Switch multi-select Alt+S Ctrl+⌥ Option+S, ⌘ Cmd+⌥ Option+S Enable/disabler multi-select for a slicer. Formatted tables Add summary row Ctrl+⇧ Shift+R Ctrl+⇧ Shift+R, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+R Add the Summary row for a formatted table. Functions Insert function ⇧ Shift+F3 ⇧ Shift+Fn+F3 Open the dialog box for inserting a new function by choosing from the provided list. SUM function Alt+= ⌥ Option+Ctrl+= Insert the SUM function into the selected cell. Recalculate functions F9 Fn+F9 Recalculate the entire workbook. Recalculate functions ⇧ Shift+F9 ⇧ Shift+Fn+F9 Recalculate the current worksheet. Display functions on sheet Ctrl+` Ctrl+` Display functions (not their values) on a sheet for printing them. Switch the type of reference F4 Fn+F4 Switch the type of a reference to a cell in the formula bar (absolute, relative). Data Formats Open the 'Number Format' dialog box Ctrl+1 ^ Ctrl+1, ⌘ Cmd+1 Open the Number Format dialog box. Apply the General format Ctrl+⇧ Shift+~ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+~ Apply the General number format. Apply the Currency format Ctrl+⇧ Shift+$ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+$ Apply the Currency format with two decimal places. Apply the Percentage format Ctrl+⇧ Shift+% ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+% Apply the Percentage format with no decimal places. Apply the Exponential format Ctrl+⇧ Shift+^ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+^ Apply the Exponential number format with two decimal places. Apply the Date format Ctrl+⇧ Shift+# ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+# Apply the Date format with the day, month, and year. Apply the Time format Ctrl+⇧ Shift+@ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+@ Apply the Time format with the hour and minute, and AM or PM. Apply the Number format Ctrl+⇧ Shift+! ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+! Apply the Number format with two decimal places, thousands separator, and minus sign (-) for negative values. Modifying Objects Working with shapes ↵ Enter Return When the shape is selected, if it does not contain content, create content and move the cursor to the beginning of the line. If the content is empty, move the cursor to it, otherwise select the entire content. Working with charts ↵ Enter When the chart title is selected, select the text. Create a copy when dragging Ctrl ^ Ctrl Select an object and hold down the specified key when dragging the object to create the copy of the object in the location where it was moved. Constrain movement ⇧ Shift + drag ⇧ Shift + drag Constrain the movement of the selected object horizontally or vertically. Set 15-degree rotation ⇧ Shift + drag (when rotating) ⇧ Shift + drag (when rotating) Constrain the rotation angle to 15-degree increments. Maintain proportions ⇧ Shift + drag (when resizing) ⇧ Shift + drag (when resizing) Maintain the proportions of the selected object when resizing. Change angle of line/arrow when drawing ⇧ Shift + drag (when drawing lines/arrows) ⇧ Shift + drag (when drawing lines/arrows) Hold down the Shift key while drawing the line/arrow and rotate the spout of the arrow/end of the line to change the angle of the line/arrow when drawing it. The line/arrow will be rotated exactly 45 degrees. Movement by one-pixel increments Ctrl+← → ↑ ↓ ⌘ Cmd+← → ↑ ↓ Hold down the specified key and use the keybord arrows to move the selected object to the left, right, up, or down by one pixel at a time. Move shape by a big step ← → ↑ ↓ ← → ↑ ↓ Use the keybord arrows to move the selected object by a big step to the left, right, up, or down. Move focus to the next object ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Move focus to the next object after the currently selected one. Move focus to the previous object ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Move focus to the previous object before the currently selected one. Select all Ctrl+A ⌘ Cmd+A, ^ Ctrl+A Select all shapes (when the focus is on a shape). Add tab character to the object content ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Add the tab character to the object content. Subscript Ctrl+. ^ Ctrl+., ⌘ Cmd+. Make the selected text fragment smaller and place it to the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas. Works only with text within a graphical object. Superscript Ctrl+, ^ Ctrl+,, ⌘ Cmd+, Make the selected text fragment smaller and place it to the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions. Works only with text within a graphical object. Increase font Ctrl+] ⌘ Cmd+], ^ Ctrl+] Increase the size of the font for the selected text fragment 1 point. Works only with text within a graphical object. Decrease font Ctrl+[ ⌘ Cmd+[, ^ Ctrl+[ Decrease the size of the font for the selected text fragment 1 point. Works only with text within a graphical object. Align center Ctrl+E ^ Ctrl+E, ⌘ Cmd+E Switch a paragraph between centered and left-aligned. Works only with text within a graphical object. Align justified Ctrl+J ^ Ctrl+J, ⌘ Cmd+J Switch a paragraph between justified and left-aligned. Works only with text within a graphical object. Align right Ctrl+R ^ Ctrl+R, ⌘ Cmd+R Switch a paragraph between right-aligned and left-aligned. Works only with text within a graphical object. Align left Ctrl+L ^ Ctrl+L, ⌘ Cmd+L Align a paragraph left. Works only with text within a graphical object. End paragraph and start a new one ↵ Enter ↵ Return End the current paragraph and start a new one when entering text within a graphical object. Add line break ⇧ Shift+↵ Enter ⇧ Shift+↵ Return Add a line break without starting a new paragraph when entering text within a graphical object. Remove graphical object Delete, Ctrl+Delete, Backspace, Ctrl+Backspace Delete, ⌥ Option+Delete Remove graphical object. Exit from adding shapes mode, remove selection step by step Esc Esc Exit from adding shapes mode. Remove selection step by step (e.g., if the content of a shape within a group is selected, the cursor will be removed from the content first, then from the shape, then from the group). 1 - Paste the copied data using Ctrl+V on Windows or Cmd+V on macOS. After pasting the copied data, use the Ctrl key to open the Paste Special menu, then press the letter key which corresponds to the necessary option. 2 - This keyboard shortcut does not work on Linux." + "body": "Keyboard Shortcuts for Key Tips Use keyboard shortcuts for a faster and easier access to the features of the Spreadsheet Editor without using a mouse. Press Alt (Option for macOS) key to turn on all key tips for the editor header, the top toolbar, the right and left sidebars and the status bar. Press the letter that corresponds to the item you wish to use. The additional key tips may appear depending on the key you press. The first key tips hide when additional key tips appear. For example, to access the Insert tab, press Alt (Option for macOS) to see all primary key tips. Press letter I to access the Insert tab and you will see all the available shortcuts for this tab. Then press the letter that corresponds to the item you wish to configure. Press Alt (Option for macOS) to hide all key tips, or press Escape to go back to the previous group of key tips. Find the most common keyboard shortcuts in the list below. Please note: for macOS, some shortcuts contain the Home, End, Page Up and Page Down keys which are only available on the extended keyboard. If you don't have these keys, use the keyboard shortcuts specified above (i.e. use ^ Ctrl/⌘ Cmd+← or Fn+← instead of Home, ^ Ctrl/⌘ Cmd+→ or Fn+→ instead of End, Fn+↑ instead of Page Up, Fn+↓ instead of Page Down). Windows/Linux Mac OS Working with Spreadsheet Open 'File' panel Alt+F ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+F Open the File panel to save, download, print the current spreadsheet, view its info, create a new spreadsheet or open an existing one, access the help menu of the Spreadsheet Editor or its advanced settings. Open 'Find' dialog window Ctrl+F ^ Ctrl+F, ⌘ Cmd+F Open the Find dialog window to start searching for a cell containing the required characters. Open 'Find and Replace' menu (panel) with replacement field Ctrl+H ^ Ctrl+H Open the Find and Replace menu (panel) with the replacement field to replace one or more occurrences of the found characters. Open 'Comments' panel Ctrl+⇧ Shift+H ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+H, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+H Open the Comments panel to add your own comment or reply to other users' comments. Open comment field Alt+H ⌘ Cmd+⌥ Option+A Open a data entry field where you can add the text of your comment. Open 'Chat' panel (Online Editors) Alt+Q ^ Ctrl+⌥ Option+Q Open the Chat panel in the Online Editors and send a message. Save spreadsheet Ctrl+S ^ Ctrl+S, ⌘ Cmd+S Save all the changes to the spreadsheet currently edited with the Spreadsheet Editor. The active file will be saved with its current file name, location, and file format. Print spreadsheet Ctrl+P ^ Ctrl+P, ⌘ Cmd+P Print your spreadsheet with one of the available printers or save it to a file. Download as... Ctrl+⇧ Shift+S ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+S, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+S Open the Download as... panel to save the currently edited spreadsheet to the computer hard disk drive in one of the supported formats: XLSX, XLTX, PDF, PDF/A, ODS, OTS, CSV, PNG, JPG. Full screen (Online Editors) F11 Switch to the full screen view in the Online Editors to fit the Spreadsheet Editor on the screen. Help menu F1 Fn+F1 Open the Help menu of the Spreadsheet Editor. Open existing file Ctrl+O ⌘ Cmd+O Open the standard dialog box that allows selecting an existing file. If you select the file in this dialog box and click Open, the file will be opened in a new tab or window of Desktop Editors. Switch to the next tab Ctrl+↹ Tab ^ Ctrl+↹ Tab Switch to the next file tab in Desktop Editors or browser tab in Online Editors. Switch to the previous tab Ctrl+Shift+↹ Tab ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Switch to the previous file tab in Desktop Editors or browser tab in Online Editors. Close file Ctrl+W, Ctrl+F4 ⌘ Cmd+W Close the current spreadsheet window. Element contextual menu ⇧ Shift+F10 ⇧ Shift+Fn+F10 Open the contextual menu of the selected element. Close menu or modal window, reset modes, etc. Esc Esc Close a menu or modal window. Suspend copying formats. Reset adding shapes mode. Clear clipboard when cutting/copying cells. Hide the Paste Special button. Reset the ‘Zoom’ parameter Ctrl+0 ^ Ctrl+0 or ⌘ Cmd+0 Reset the ‘Zoom’ parameter of the current spreadsheet to a default 100%. Duplicate a worksheet Press and hold down Ctrl+ drag the sheet tab Press and hold down ⌥ Option+ drag the sheet tab Copy an entire worksheet in a workbook and move it to the tab location you need. Navigation Move one cell up, down, left, or right ↑ ↓ ← → ↑ ↓ ← → Outline a cell above/below the currently selected one or to the left/to the right of it. Move active cell down ↵ Enter ↵ Return Move to the cell below. Move active cell up ⇧ Shift+↵ Enter ⇧ Shift+↵ Return Move to the cell above. Move active cell to the right ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Move to the cell on the right. Move active cell to the left ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Move to the cell on the left . Jump to the edge of the visible data region or the next cell with data Ctrl+← → ↑ ↓ ⌘ Cmd+← → ↑ ↓ Home End Page Up Page Down Outline a cell at the edge of the visible data region or the next cell with data in a worksheet. If the region does not contain data, the last cell of the visible area will be selected. If the region contains data, the next cell with data will be selected. Jump to the beginning of the row Home Fn+← Home Outline a cell in the column A of the current row. Jump to the beginning of the spreadsheet Ctrl+Home ^ Ctrl+Fn+←, ⌘ Cmd+Fn+← ^ Ctrl+Home, ⌘ Cmd+Home Outline the cell A1. Jump to the end of the row End, Ctrl+→ Fn+→, ⌘ Cmd+→ End Outline the last cell of the current row. Jump to the end of the spreadsheet Ctrl+End ^ Ctrl+Fn+→, ⌘ Cmd+Fn+→ ^ Ctrl+End, ⌘ Cmd+End Outline the lower right used cell in the worksheet situated in the bottommost row with data of the rightmost column with data. If the cursor is in the formula bar, it will be placed to the end of the text. Move to the previous sheet Alt+Page Up ⌥ Option+Fn+↑ ⌥ Option+Page Up Move to the previous sheet in your spreadsheet. Move to the next sheet Alt+Page Down ⌥ Option+Fn+↓ ⌥ Option+Page Down Move to the next sheet in your spreadsheet. Move up one row ↑, ⇧ Shift+↵ Enter ⇧ Shift+↵ Return Outline the cell above the current one in the same column. Move down one row ↓, ↵ Enter ↵ Return Outline the cell below the current one in the same column. Move left one column ←, ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ←, ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Outline the previous cell of the current row. Move right one column →, ↹ Tab →, ↹ Tab Outline the next cell of the current row. Move down one screen Page Down Fn+↓ Page Down Move one screen down in the worksheet. Move up one screen Page Up Fn+↑ Page Up Move one screen up in the worksheet. Move vertical scrollbar Up/Down Mouse scroll Up/Down Mouse scroll Up/Down Move vertical scrollbar up/down. Move horizontal scrollbar Left/Right ⇧ Shift+Mouse scroll Up/Down ⇧ Shift+Mouse scroll Up/Down Move horizontal scrollbar left/right. To move the scrollbar to the right, scroll the mouse wheel down. To move the scrollbar to the left, scroll the mouse wheel up. Zoom In Ctrl++ ^ Ctrl+=, ⌘ Cmd+= Zoom in the currently edited spreadsheet. Zoom Out Ctrl+- ^ Ctrl+-, ⌘ Cmd+- Zoom out the currently edited spreadsheet. Navigate between controls in modal dialogues ↹ Tab/⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ↹ Tab/⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Navigate between controls to give focus to the next or previous control in modal dialogues. Data Selection Select the entire worksheet Ctrl+A, Ctrl+⇧ Shift+␣ Spacebar ⌘ Cmd+A, ^ Ctrl+A Select the entire worksheet (when the focus is on a cell). Select column Ctrl+␣ Spacebar ^ Ctrl+Fn+␣ Spacebar, ⌘ Cmd+Fn+␣ Spacebar Select an entire column in a worksheet. Select row ⇧ Shift+␣ Spacebar ⇧ Shift+␣ Spacebar Select an entire row in a worksheet. Select one cell to the right ⇧ Shift+→ ⇧ Shift+→ Select one cell to the right. Select one cell to the left ⇧ Shift+← ⇧ Shift+← Select one cell to the left. Select one cell up ⇧ Shift+↑ ⇧ Shift+↑ Select one cell up. Select one cell down ⇧ Shift+↓ ⇧ Shift+↓ Select one cell down. Select from cursor to beginning of row ⇧ Shift+Home ⇧ Shift+Fn+← ⇧ Shift+Home Select a fragment from the cursor to the beginning of the current row. Select from cursor to end of row ⇧ Shift+End ⇧ Shift+Fn+→ ⇧ Shift+End Select a fragment from the cursor to the end of the current row. Select to the next nonblank cell to the right Ctrl+⇧ Shift+→ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+→, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+→ Select cells to the next nonblank cell to the right of the active cell or to the edge of the visible area. Select to the next nonblank cell to the left Ctrl+⇧ Shift+← ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+←, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+← Select cells to the next nonblank cell to the left of the active cell or to the edge of the visible area. Select to the next nonblank cell up Ctrl+⇧ Shift+↑ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+↑, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+↑ Select cells to the next nonblank cell up from the active cell or to the edge of the visible area. Select to the next nonblank cell down Ctrl+⇧ Shift+↓ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+↓, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+↓ Select cells to the next nonblank cell down from the active cell or to the edge of the visible area. Extend the selection to beginning of worksheet Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Home ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Fn+←, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Fn+← ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Home, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Home Select a fragment from the current selected cells to the beginning of the worksheet. Extend the selection to the last used cell Ctrl+⇧ Shift+End ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Fn+→, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Fn+→ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+End, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+End Select a fragment from the current selected cells to the last used cell in the worksheet (in the bottommost row with data of the rightmost column with data). If the cursor is in the formula bar, this will select all text in the formula bar from the cursor position to the end without affecting the height of the formula bar. Extend the selection to the nearest nonblank cell to the right ⇧ Shift+End, Ctrl+⇧ Shift+→ ⇧ Shift+Fn+→ ⇧ Shift+End Extend the selection to the nearest nonblank cell in the same row to the right of the active cell. If the next cell is blank, the selection will be extended to the next nonblank cell. Extend the selection to the nonblank cell to the left Ctrl+⇧ Shift+← Extend the selection to the nonblank cell to the left. Extend the selection to the first column ⇧ Shift+Home ⇧ Shift+Fn+← ⇧ Shift+Home Extend the selection to the first column (A). Extend the selection to the nearest nonblank cell up/down the column Ctrl+⇧ Shift+↑ ↓ Extend the selection to the nearest nonblank cell in the same column up/down from the active cell. If the next cell is blank, the selection will be extended to the next nonblank cell. Extend the selection down one screen ⇧ Shift+Page Down ⇧ Shift+Fn+↓ ⇧ Shift+Page Down Extend the selection to include all the cells one screen down from the active cell. All cells in the columns of the previously selected range will be selected. Extend the selection up one screen ⇧ Shift+Page Up ⇧ Shift+Fn+↑ ⇧ Shift+Page Up Extend the selection to include all the cells one screen up from the active cell. All cells in the columns of the previously selected range will be selected. Undo and Redo Undo Ctrl+Z ⌘ Cmd+Z, ^ Ctrl+Z Reverse the latest performed action. Redo Ctrl+Y ⌘ Cmd+Y, ^ Ctrl+Y Repeat the latest undone action. Cut, Copy, and Paste Cut Ctrl+X, ⇧ Shift+Delete ⌘ Cmd+X Cut the the selected data/graphics and send them to the computer clipboard memory. The cut data can be later inserted to another place in the same worksheet, into another spreadsheet, or into some other program. Copy Ctrl+C, Ctrl+Insert ⌘ Cmd+C Send the selected data/graphics to the computer clipboard memory. The copied data can be later inserted to another place in the same worksheet, into another spreadsheet, or into some other program. Paste Ctrl+V, ⇧ Shift+Insert ⌘ Cmd+V Insert the previously copied/cut data/graphics from the computer clipboard memory to the current cursor position. The data can be previously copied from the same worksheet, from another spreadsheet, or from some other program. Paste Special options 1 Paste only formula Ctrl then F ^ Ctrl then F Paste formulas without pasting the data formatting. Paste formula + number format Ctrl then O ^ Ctrl then O Paste formulas with the formatting applied to numbers. Paste formula + all formatting Ctrl then K ^ Ctrl then K Paste formulas with all the data formatting. Paste formula without borders Ctrl then B ^ Ctrl then B Paste formulas with all the data formatting except the cell borders. Paste formula + column width Ctrl then W ^ Ctrl then W Paste formulas with all the data formatting and set the source column`s width for the cell range. Transpose Ctrl then T ^ Ctrl then T Paste data switching them from columns to rows, or vice versa. This option is available for regular data ranges, but not for formatted tables. Paste only value Ctrl then V ^ Ctrl then V Paste the formula results without pasting the data formatting. Paste value + number format Ctrl then A ^ Ctrl then A Paste the formula results with the formatting applied to numbers. Paste value + all formatting Ctrl then E ^ Ctrl then E Paste the formula results with all the data formatting. Paste only formatting Ctrl then R ^ Ctrl then R Paste the cell formatting only without pasting the cell contents. Paste link Ctrl then N ^ Ctrl then N Paste the external link to a cell or range of cells in another spreadsheet within the current portal (in the online editor) or in a local file (in the desktop editor). Working with Hyperlinks Insert hyperlink Ctrl+K ⌘ Cmd+K, ^ Ctrl+K Insert a hyperlink which can be used to go to a web address. Visit hyperlink Enter Return Visit a hyperlink (with the cursor in the hyperlink). Data Formatting Bold Ctrl+B ^ Ctrl+B, ⌘ Cmd+B Make the font of the selected text fragment darker and heavier than normal or remove the bold formatting. Italic Ctrl+I ⌘ Cmd+I Make the font of the selected text fragment italicized and slightly slanted or remove italic formatting. Underline Ctrl+U ^ Ctrl+U, ⌘ Cmd+U Make the selected text fragment underlined with a line going under the letters or remove underlining. Strikeout Ctrl+5 ^ Ctrl+5, ⌘ Cmd+5 Make the selected text fragment struck out with a line going through the letters or remove strikeout formatting. Edit active cell F2 Fn+F2 Edit the active cell and position the insertion point at the end of the cell contents. If editing in a cell is turned off, the insertion point will be moved into the Formula Bar. Data Filtering Enable/Remove Filter Ctrl+⇧ Shift+L ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+L, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+L Enable a filter for a selected cell range or remove the filter. Open filter window Alt+↓ ⌥ Option+↓ In the header of a column with a filter, open the filter window. Format as table template Ctrl+L ^ Ctrl+L, ⌘ Cmd+L Apply a table template to a selected cell range. Data Entry Complete cell entry and move down ↵ Enter ↵ Return Complete a cell entry in the selected cell or the formula bar, and move to the cell below. Complete cell entry and move up ⇧ Shift+↵ Enter ⇧ Shift+↵ Return Complete a cell entry in the selected cell, and move to the cell above. Complete cell entry and move to the right ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Complete a cell entry in the selected cell or the formula bar and move to the cell on the right. Complete cell entry and move to the left ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Complete a cell entry in the selected cell or the formula bar and move to the cell on the left . Complete cell entry and stay in it Ctrl+⇧ Shift+↵ Enter, Ctrl+↵ Enter ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+↵ Return, ^ Ctrl+↵ Return Complete a cell entry in the selected cell or the formula bar and stay in it. Fill the selected cell range with the current entry Ctrl+↵ Enter ^ Ctrl+↵ Return Fill the selected cell range with the current entry. Select a cell range, type data to the active cell and press the specified keys to fill all the selected cells with entered data. Start new line Alt+↵ Enter ⌥ Option+↵ Return Start a new line in the same cell. Add new placeholder to equation argument Enter Return, ⇧ Shift+Return Add a new placeholder to the equation argument. Cancel Esc Esc Cancel an entry in the selected cell or the formula bar. Delete to the left ← Backspace Delete Delete one character to the left in the formula bar or in the selected cell when the cell editing mode is activated. Remove the selection. Also removes the content of the active cell. It is also applicable to text in graphical objects. Delete to the right Delete Fn+Delete Delete one character to the right in the formula bar or in the selected cell when the cell editing mode is activated. Remove the selection. Also removes the cell contents (data and formulas) from selected cells without affecting cell formats or comments. It is also applicable to text in graphical objects. Clear active cell content Delete, ← Backspace Delete Remove the content (data and formulas) from the active cell without affecting the cell format or comments. Clear content of all selected cells Delete Fn+Delete Remove the content (data and formulas) from all selected cells without affecting the cell format or comments. Insert cells Ctrl+⇧ Shift+= Ctrl+⇧ Shift+=, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+= Open the dialog box for inserting new cells within current spreadsheet with an added parameter of a shift to the right, a shift down, inserting an entire row or an entire column. Delete cells Ctrl+⇧ Shift+- Ctrl+⇧ Shift+-, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+- Open the dialog box for deleting cells within current spreadsheet with an added parameter of a shift to the left, a shift up, deleting an entire row or an entire column. Insert the current date Ctrl+; Ctrl+;, ⌘ Cmd+; Insert the today date within an active cell. Insert the current time Ctrl+⇧ Shift+; Ctrl+⇧ Shift+;, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+; Insert the current time within an active cell. Insert the current date and time Ctrl+; then ␣ Spacebar then Ctrl+⇧ Shift+; Ctrl+; then ␣ Spacebar then Ctrl+⇧ Shift+;, ⌘ Cmd+; then ␣ Spacebar then ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+; Insert the current date and time within an active cell. Insert separator Numpad . Insert separator within an active cell. Auto Fill (Open drop-down list) Alt+↓ ⌥ Option+↓ Use this shortcut in an empty cell below or above existing values in the column. A drop-down list with existing values will appear. Select one of the available text values to fill an empty cell. Insert an em dash ⌥ Option+⇧ Shift+- Insert an em dash ‘—’ within the current cell. Insert an en dash ⌥ Option+- Insert an en dash ‘-’ within the current cell. Work with keyboard supporting the ability to insert Unicode symbols ⌥ Option+Q, ⌥ Option+F, ⇧ Shift+⌥ Option+7, and others When using the ⌥ Option+keyboard symbol shortcuts, for the keyboards supporting the ability to insert Unicode symbols, the keyboard symbols are added. The examples are listed below. With the English ABC layout, the ⌥ Option+Q shortcut inserts the \"œ\" symbol, the ⌥ Option+F shortcut inserts the “ƒ” function symbol. With the US International w/o deadkeys layout, the ⌥ Option+Q shortcut inserts the “ä” symbol. With the Swiss-german layout, the ⇧ Shift+⌥ Option+7 shortcut inserts the \"\\” symbol. Working with text in cells and graphical objects Remove word, selection to the left Ctrl+Backspace ⌥ Option+Delete Remove a word, selection to the left of the cursor. Remove word, selection to the right Ctrl+Delete Fn+⌥ Option+Delete Remove a word, selection to the right of the cursor. Select all Ctrl+A ⌘ Cmd+A, ^ Ctrl+A Select the entire shape content (when the cursor is within the shape content). Select the entire cell content (when the cursor is within the cell). Move one character to the left/right or one line up/down ← → ↑ ↓ ← → ↑ ↓ Move the cursor one character to the left/right or one line up/down. Select one character to the right ⇧ Shift+→ ⇧ Shift+→ Select one character to the right of the cursor position. Select one character to the left ⇧ Shift+← ⇧ Shift+← Select one character to the left of the cursor position. Move the cursor one word to the left Ctrl+← ⌥ Option+← Move the cursor one word to the left. Move the cursor one word to the right Ctrl+→ ⌥ Option+→ Move the cursor one word to the right. Select one word to the left Ctrl+⇧ Shift+← ⇧ Shift+⌥ Option+← Select one word to the left of the cursor. Select one word to the right Ctrl+⇧ Shift+→ ⇧ Shift+⌥ Option+→ Select one word to the right of the cursor. Jump to the beginning of the text Ctrl+Home ^ Ctrl+Fn+←, ⌘ Cmd+Fn+← ^ Ctrl+Home, ⌘ Cmd+Home Put the cursor to the very beginning of the text in a cell or shape. Jump to the end of the text Ctrl+End ^ Ctrl+Fn+→, ⌘ Cmd+Fn+→ ^ Ctrl+End, ⌘ Cmd+End Put the cursor to the very end of the text in a cell or shape. Select from cursor to beginning of text Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Home ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Fn+←, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Fn+← ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Home, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Home Select a text fragment from the cursor to the beginning of the text in a cell or shape. Select from cursor to end of text Ctrl+⇧ Shift+End ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+Fn+→, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+Fn+→ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+End, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+End Select a text fragment from the cursor to the end of the text in a cell or shape. Jump to the beginning of the line Home ⌘ Cmd+← Home Put the cursor to the beginning of the currently edited line. Jump to the end of the line End ⌘ Cmd+→ End Put the cursor to the end of the currently edited line. Select from cursor to beginning of line ⇧ Shift+Home ⇧ Shift+Fn+← ⇧ Shift+Home Select a text fragment from the cursor to the beginning of the current line. Select from cursor to end of line ⇧ Shift+End ⇧ Shift+Fn+→ ⇧ Shift+End Select a text fragment from the cursor to the end of the current line. Select one line up ⇧ Shift+↑ ⇧ Shift+↑ Move the cursor one line up, selecting all symbols between the previous and current cursor position. Select one line down ⇧ Shift+↓ ⇧ Shift+↓ Move the cursor one line down, selecting all symbols between the previous and current cursor position. Pivot tables Update pivot table Alt+F5 ⌥ Option+Fn+F5 Update the previously selected pivot table. Update all pivot tables Ctrl+Alt+F5 2 Ctrl+⌥ Option+Fn+F5 Update all pivot tables. Slicers Clear selected values Alt+C Ctrl+⌥ Option+C, ⌘ Cmd+⌥ Option+C Clear selected values for a slicer. Switch multi-select Alt+S Ctrl+⌥ Option+S, ⌘ Cmd+⌥ Option+S Enable/disabler multi-select for a slicer. Formatted tables Add summary row Ctrl+⇧ Shift+R Ctrl+⇧ Shift+R, ⌘ Cmd+⇧ Shift+R Add the Summary row for a formatted table. Functions Insert function ⇧ Shift+F3 ⇧ Shift+Fn+F3 Open the dialog box for inserting a new function by choosing from the provided list. SUM function Alt+= ⌥ Option+Ctrl+= Insert the SUM function into the selected cell. Recalculate functions F9 Fn+F9 Recalculate the entire workbook. Recalculate functions ⇧ Shift+F9 ⇧ Shift+Fn+F9 Recalculate the current worksheet. Display functions on sheet Ctrl+` Ctrl+` Display functions (not their values) on a sheet for printing them. Switch the type of reference F4 Fn+F4 Switch the type of a reference to a cell in the formula bar (absolute, relative). Data Formats Open the 'Number Format' dialog box Ctrl+1 ^ Ctrl+1, ⌘ Cmd+1 Open the Number Format dialog box. Apply the General format Ctrl+⇧ Shift+~ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+~ Apply the General number format. Apply the Currency format Ctrl+⇧ Shift+$ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+$ Apply the Currency format with two decimal places. Apply the Percentage format Ctrl+⇧ Shift+% ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+% Apply the Percentage format with no decimal places. Apply the Exponential format Ctrl+⇧ Shift+^ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+^ Apply the Exponential number format with two decimal places. Apply the Date format Ctrl+⇧ Shift+# ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+# Apply the Date format with the day, month, and year. Apply the Time format Ctrl+⇧ Shift+@ ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+@ Apply the Time format with the hour and minute, and AM or PM. Apply the Number format Ctrl+⇧ Shift+! ^ Ctrl+⇧ Shift+! Apply the Number format with two decimal places, thousands separator, and minus sign (-) for negative values. Modifying Objects Working with shapes ↵ Enter Return When the shape is selected, if it does not contain content, create content and move the cursor to the beginning of the line. If the content is empty, move the cursor to it, otherwise select the entire content. Working with charts ↵ Enter When the chart title is selected, select the text. Create a copy when dragging Ctrl ^ Ctrl Select an object and hold down the specified key when dragging the object to create the copy of the object in the location where it was moved. Constrain movement ⇧ Shift + drag ⇧ Shift + drag Constrain the movement of the selected object horizontally or vertically. Set 15-degree rotation ⇧ Shift + drag (when rotating) ⇧ Shift + drag (when rotating) Constrain the rotation angle to 15-degree increments. Maintain proportions ⇧ Shift + drag (when resizing) ⇧ Shift + drag (when resizing) Maintain the proportions of the selected object when resizing. Change angle of line/arrow when drawing ⇧ Shift + drag (when drawing lines/arrows) ⇧ Shift + drag (when drawing lines/arrows) Hold down the Shift key while drawing the line/arrow and rotate the spout of the arrow/end of the line to change the angle of the line/arrow when drawing it. The line/arrow will be rotated exactly 45 degrees. Movement by one-pixel increments Ctrl+← → ↑ ↓ ⌘ Cmd+← → ↑ ↓ Hold down the specified key and use the keybord arrows to move the selected object to the left, right, up, or down by one pixel at a time. Move shape by a big step ← → ↑ ↓ ← → ↑ ↓ Use the keybord arrows to move the selected object by a big step to the left, right, up, or down. Move focus to the next object ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Move focus to the next object after the currently selected one. Move focus to the previous object ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab ⇧ Shift+↹ Tab Move focus to the previous object before the currently selected one. Select all Ctrl+A ⌘ Cmd+A, ^ Ctrl+A Select all shapes (when the focus is on a shape). Add tab character to the object content ↹ Tab ↹ Tab Add the tab character to the object content. Subscript Ctrl+. ^ Ctrl+., ⌘ Cmd+. Make the selected text fragment smaller and place it to the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas. Works only with text within a graphical object. Superscript Ctrl+, ^ Ctrl+,, ⌘ Cmd+, Make the selected text fragment smaller and place it to the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions. Works only with text within a graphical object. Increase font Ctrl+] ⌘ Cmd+], ^ Ctrl+] Increase the size of the font for the selected text fragment 1 point. Works only with text within a graphical object. Decrease font Ctrl+[ ⌘ Cmd+[, ^ Ctrl+[ Decrease the size of the font for the selected text fragment 1 point. Works only with text within a graphical object. Align center Ctrl+E ^ Ctrl+E, ⌘ Cmd+E Switch a paragraph between centered and left-aligned. Works only with text within a graphical object. Align justified Ctrl+J ^ Ctrl+J, ⌘ Cmd+J Switch a paragraph between justified and left-aligned. Works only with text within a graphical object. Align right Ctrl+R ^ Ctrl+R, ⌘ Cmd+R Switch a paragraph between right-aligned and left-aligned. Works only with text within a graphical object. Align left Ctrl+L ^ Ctrl+L, ⌘ Cmd+L Align a paragraph left. Works only with text within a graphical object. End paragraph and start a new one ↵ Enter ↵ Return End the current paragraph and start a new one when entering text within a graphical object. Add line break ⇧ Shift+↵ Enter ⇧ Shift+↵ Return Add a line break without starting a new paragraph when entering text within a graphical object. Remove graphical object Delete, Ctrl+Delete, Backspace, Ctrl+Backspace Delete, ⌥ Option+Delete Remove graphical object. Exit from adding shapes mode, remove selection step by step Esc Esc Exit from adding shapes mode. Remove selection step by step (e.g., if the content of a shape within a group is selected, the cursor will be removed from the content first, then from the shape, then from the group). 1 - Paste the copied data using Ctrl+V on Windows or Cmd+V on macOS. After pasting the copied data, use the Ctrl key to open the Paste Special menu, then press the letter key which corresponds to the necessary option. 2 - This keyboard shortcut does not work on Linux." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/Navigation.htm", @@ -2443,7 +2453,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "HelpfulHints/Search.htm", "title": "Search and Replace Functions", - "body": "To search for the required characters, words or phrases in the Spreadsheet Editor, click the Search icon situated on the left sidebar, the icon situated in the upper right corner, or use the Ctrl+F (Command+F for MacOS) key combination to open the small Find panel or the Ctrl+H key combination to open the full Find panel. A small Find panel will open in the upper right corner of the working area.The panel includes the text field for typing in a search query, the number of search results, and controls for moving to the previous or the next result, and closing the bar. To access the advanced settings, click the icon. The Find and replace panel will open: Type in your inquiry into the corresponding Find data entry field. To navigate between the found occurrences, click one of the arrow buttons. The button shows the next occurrence while the button shows the previous one. If you need to replace one or more occurrences of the found characters, type in the replacement text into the corresponding Replace with data entry field. You can choose to replace a single currently selected occurrence or replace all occurrences by clicking the corresponding Replace and Replace All buttons. Specify search options by checking the necessary options: Within - is used to search within the active Sheet only, the whole Workbook, or the Specific range. In the latter case, the Select Data range field will become active where you can specify the required range. Search - is used to specify the direction that you want to search: to the right by rows or down by columns. Look in - is used to specify whether you want to search the Value of the cells or their underlying Formulas. Specify search parameters by checking the necessary options below the entry fields: Case sensitive - is used to find only the occurrences typed in the same case as your inquiry (e.g. if your inquiry is 'Editor' and this option is selected, such words as 'editor' or 'EDITOR' etc. will not be found). Entire cell contents - is used to find only the cells that do not contain any other characters besides the ones specified in your inquiry (e.g. if your inquiry is '56' and this option is selected, the cells containing such data as '0.56' or '156' etc. will not be found). All occurrences will be highlighted in the file and shown as a list in the Find panel to the left. Use the list to skip to the required occurrence, or use the navigation and buttons." + "body": "To search for the required characters, words or phrases in the Spreadsheet Editor, click the Search icon situated on the left sidebar, the icon situated in the upper right corner, or use the Ctrl+F (Command+F for MacOS) key combination to open the small Find panel or the Ctrl+H key combination to open the full Find panel. A small Find panel will open in the upper right corner of the working area.The panel includes the text field for typing in a search query, the number of search results, and controls for moving to the previous or the next result, and closing the bar. To access the advanced settings, click the icon. The Find and replace panel will open: Type in your inquiry into the corresponding Find data entry field. To navigate between the found occurrences, click one of the arrow buttons. The button shows the next occurrence while the button shows the previous one. If you need to replace one or more occurrences of the found characters, type in the replacement text into the corresponding Replace with data entry field. You can choose to replace a single currently selected occurrence or replace all occurrences by clicking the corresponding Replace and Replace All buttons. The Replace button can also be found on the Home tab. Specify search options by checking the necessary options: Within - is used to search within the active Sheet only, the whole Workbook, or the Specific range. In the latter case, the Select Data range field will become active where you can specify the required range. Search - is used to specify the direction that you want to search: to the right by rows or down by columns. Look in - is used to specify whether you want to search the Value of the cells or their underlying Formulas. Specify search parameters by checking the necessary options below the entry fields: Case sensitive - is used to find only the occurrences typed in the same case as your inquiry (e.g. if your inquiry is 'Editor' and this option is selected, such words as 'editor' or 'EDITOR' etc. will not be found). Entire cell contents - is used to find only the cells that do not contain any other characters besides the ones specified in your inquiry (e.g. if your inquiry is '56' and this option is selected, the cells containing such data as '0.56' or '156' etc. will not be found). All occurrences will be highlighted in the file and shown as a list in the Find panel to the left. Use the list to skip to the required occurrence, or use the navigation and buttons." }, { "id": "HelpfulHints/SpellChecking.htm", @@ -2458,7 +2468,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "HelpfulHints/VersionHistory.htm", "title": "Version history", - "body": "The Spreadsheet Editor allows you to maintain constant team-wide approach to work flow: share files and folders, collaborate on spreadsheets in real time, communicate right in the editor, comment certain parts of your spreadsheets that require additional third-party input. In Spreadsheet Editor you can view the version history of the spreadsheet you collaborate on. Viewing version history: To view all the changes made to the spreadsheet, go to the File tab, select the Version History option at the left sidebar or go to the Collaboration tab, open the history of versions using the  Version History icon at the top toolbar. You'll see the list of the spreadsheet versions and revisions with the indication of each version/revision author and creation date and time. For spreadsheet versions, the version number is also specified (e.g. ver. 2). Viewing versions: To know exactly which changes have been made in each separate version/revision, you can view the one you need by clicking it on the left sidebar. The changes made by the version/revision author are marked with the color which is displayed next to the author's name on the left sidebar. To return to the current version of the spreadsheet, use the Close History option on the top of the version list. Restoring versions: If you need to roll back to one of the previous versions of the spreadsheet, click the Restore link below the selected version/revision. To learn more about managing versions and intermediate revisions, as well as restoring previous versions, please read the following article." + "body": "The Spreadsheet Editor allows you to maintain constant team-wide approach to work flow: share files and folders, collaborate on spreadsheets in real time, communicate right in the editor, comment certain parts of your spreadsheets that require additional third-party input. In Spreadsheet Editor you can view the version history of the spreadsheet you collaborate on. Viewing version history: To view all the changes made to the spreadsheet, go to the File tab, select the Version History option at the left sidebar or go to the Collaboration tab, open the history of versions using the  Version History icon at the top toolbar. You'll see the list of the spreadsheet versions and revisions with the indication of each version/revision author and creation date and time. For spreadsheet versions, the version number is also specified (e.g., ver. 2). Viewing versions: To know exactly which changes have been made in each separate version/revision, you can view the one you need by clicking it on the left sidebar. The changes made by the version/revision author are highlighted with the same color as their avatar in the viewing version history window. To return to the current version of the spreadsheet, use the Close History option on the top of the version list. Restoring versions: If you need to roll back to one of the previous versions of the spreadsheet, click the Restore link below the selected version/revision. To learn more about managing versions and intermediate revisions, as well as restoring previous versions, please read the following article." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/CollaborationTab.htm", @@ -2478,7 +2488,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "ProgramInterface/FileTab.htm", "title": "File tab", - "body": "The File tab in the Spreadsheet Editor allows performing basic operations with the current file. The corresponding window of the Online Spreadsheet Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Spreadsheet Editor: Using this tab, you can perform the following operations: in the online version, save the current file (in case the Autosave option is disabled), download as (save the spreadsheet in the selected format to hard disk drive of the computer), save copy as (save a copy of the spreadsheet in the selected format to the portal documents), print or rename it, in the desktop version, save the current file keeping the current format and location using the Save option or save the current file with a different name, location or format using the Save as option, print the file. protect the file using a password, change or remove the password; protect the file using a digital signature (available in the desktop version only); create a new spreadsheet or open a recently edited one (available in the online version only), view the general information about the spreadsheet or change some file properties, track version history (available in the online version only), manage access rights (available in the online version only), access the Advanced Settings of the editor, in the desktop version, open the folder, where the file is stored, in the File explorer window. In the online version, open the folder in the Documents module, where the file is stored, in a new browser tab." + "body": "The File tab in the Spreadsheet Editor allows performing basic operations with the current file. The corresponding window of the Online Spreadsheet Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Spreadsheet Editor: Using this tab, you can perform the following operations: create a new spreadsheet or open a recently edited one (available in the online version only), in the online version, save the current file (in case the Autosave option is disabled), download as (save the spreadsheet in the selected format to hard disk drive of the computer), save copy as (save a copy of the spreadsheet in the selected format to the portal documents), print or rename it, in the desktop version, save the current file keeping the current format and location using the Save option or save the current file with a different name, location or format using the Save as option, print the file, protect the file using a password, change or remove the password, protect the file using a digital signature (available in the desktop version only), view the general information about the spreadsheet or change some file properties, track version history (available in the online version only), Go to Documents - in the desktop version, open the folder, where the file is stored, in the File explorer window, in the online version, open the folder in the Documents module, where the file is stored, in a new browser tab, access the Advanced Settings of the editor, Help - open the built-in helpcenter." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/FormulaTab.htm", @@ -2498,12 +2508,12 @@ var indexes = { "id": "ProgramInterface/LayoutTab.htm", "title": "Layout tab", - "body": "The Layout tab in the Spreadsheet Editor allows adjusting the appearance of a spreadsheet: setting up the page parameters and defining the arrangement of visual elements. The corresponding window of the Online Spreadsheet Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Spreadsheet Editor: Using this tab, you can: adjust page margins, orientation, size, specify a print area, insert page breaks, insert headers or footers, scale a worksheet, print titles on a page, align and arrange objects (images, charts, shapes), change color scheme." + "body": "The Layout tab in the Spreadsheet Editor allows adjusting the appearance of a spreadsheet: setting up the page parameters and defining the arrangement of visual elements. The corresponding window of the Online Spreadsheet Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Spreadsheet Editor: Using this tab, you can: adjust page margins, orientation, size, specify a print area, insert page breaks, insert headers or footers, scale a worksheet, switch the sheet direction so that the first column is on the right side using the Sheet Right-to-Left button, print titles on a page, align and arrange objects (images, charts, shapes), change color scheme." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/PivotTableTab.htm", "title": "Pivot Table tab", - "body": "The Pivot Table tab in the Spreadsheet Editor allows creating and editing pivot tables. The corresponding window of the Online Spreadsheet Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Spreadsheet Editor: Using this tab, you can: create a new pivot table, choose the necessary layout for your pivot table, update the pivot table if you change the data in your source data set, select an entire pivot table with a single click, expand or collapse fields to show/hide the details for the pivot table items, highlight certain rows/columns by applying a specific formatting style to them, choose one of the predefined tables styles." + "body": "The Pivot Table tab in the Spreadsheet Editor allows creating and editing pivot tables. Starting from ONLYOFFICE Docs version 8.2, the Pivot Table tab is hidden by default and will open only while working with pivot tables. The corresponding window of the Online Spreadsheet Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Spreadsheet Editor: Using this tab, you can: create a new pivot table, choose the necessary layout for your pivot table, update the pivot table if you change the data in your source data set, select an entire pivot table with a single click, expand or collapse fields to show/hide the details for the pivot table items, highlight certain rows/columns by applying a specific formatting style to them, choose one of the predefined tables styles." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/PluginsTab.htm", @@ -2513,7 +2523,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "ProgramInterface/ProgramInterface.htm", "title": "Introducing the Spreadsheet Editor user interface", - "body": "The Spreadsheet Editor uses a tabbed interface where editing commands are grouped into tabs by functionality. Main window of the Online Spreadsheet Editor: Main window of the Desktop Spreadsheet Editor: The editor interface consists of the following main elements: The Editor header displays the logo, tabs for all opened spreadsheets, with their names and menu tabs.. On the left side of the Editor header there are the Save, Print file, Undo and Redo buttons are located. On the right side of the Editor header along with the user name the following icons are displayed: Open file location - in the desktop version, it allows opening the folder, where the file is stored, in the File explorer window. In the online version, it allows opening the folder in the Documents module where the file is stored, in a new browser tab. Share - (available in the online version only) allows setting access rights for the documents stored in the cloud. Mark as favorite - click the star to add a file to favorites as to make it easy to find. The added file is just a shortcut so the file itself remains stored in its original location. Deleting a file from favorites does not remove the file from its original location. Search - allows to search the spreadsheet for a particular word or symbol, etc. The top toolbar displays a set of editing commands depending on the selected menu tab. Currently, the following tabs are available: File, Home, Insert, Draw, Layout, Formula, Data, Pivot Table, Collaboration, Protection, View, Plugins. The Copy, Paste, Cut and Select All options are always available at the left part of the Top toolbar regardless of the selected tab. The Formula bar allows entering and editing formulas or values in the cells. The Formula bar displays the contents of the currently selected cell. The Status bar at the bottom of the editor window contains some navigation tools: sheet navigation buttons, add worksheet button, list of sheets button, sheet tabs, and zoom buttons. The Status bar also displays the background save status and connection status when there is no connection and the editor is trying to reconnect, the number of filtered records if you apply a filter, or the results of automatic calculations if you select several cells containing data. The Left sidebar contains the following icons: - allows using the Search and Replace tool, - allows opening the Comments panel, - (available in the online version only) allows opening the Chat panel, - allows to check the spelling of your text in a certain language and correct mistakes while editing. - allows contacting our support team, - (available in the online version only) allows viewing the information about the program. The Right sidebar allows adjusting additional parameters of different objects. When you select a particular object in a worksheet, the corresponding icon is activated on the right sidebar. Click this icon to expand the right sidebar. The Working area allows viewing the contents of a spreadsheet, as well as entering and editing data. The horizontal and vertical Scroll bars allow scrolling up/down and left/right. For your convenience, you can hide some components and display them again when necessary. To learn more on how to adjust view settings please refer to this page. When there are many icons on the left and right panels, the ones below will be hidden, and they can be accessed via the More button." + "body": "The Spreadsheet Editor uses a tabbed interface where editing commands are grouped into tabs by functionality. Main window of the Online Spreadsheet Editor: Main window of the Desktop Spreadsheet Editor: The editor interface consists of the following main elements: The Editor header displays the logo, tabs for all opened spreadsheets, with their names and menu tabs. On the left side of the Editor header there are the Save, Print file, Undo and Redo buttons are located. Click the dots icon to the right to customize which buttons shall be hidden if any. On the right side of the Editor header along with the user name the following icons are displayed: Open file location - in the desktop version, it allows opening the folder, where the file is stored, in the File explorer window. In the online version, it allows opening the folder in the Documents module where the file is stored, in a new browser tab. Share - (available in the online version only) allows setting access rights for the documents stored in the cloud. Mark as favorite - click the star to add a file to favorites as to make it easy to find. The added file is just a shortcut so the file itself remains stored in its original location. Deleting a file from favorites does not remove the file from its original location. Search - allows to search the spreadsheet for a particular word or symbol, etc. The top toolbar displays a set of editing commands depending on the selected menu tab. Currently, the following tabs are available: File, Home, Insert, Draw, Layout, Formula, Data, Pivot Table, Collaboration, Protection, View, Plugins. The Copy, Paste, Cut, and Copy style options are always available at the left part of the Top toolbar regardless of the selected tab. The Select All button is located at the left part of the Top toolbar of the Home tab. The Formula bar allows entering and editing formulas or values in the cells. The Formula bar displays the contents of the currently selected cell. The Status bar at the bottom of the editor window contains some navigation tools: sheet navigation buttons, add worksheet button, list of sheets button, sheet tabs, and zoom buttons. The Status bar also displays the background save status and connection status when there is no connection and the editor is trying to reconnect, the number of filtered records if you apply a filter, or the results of automatic calculations if you select several cells containing data. The Left sidebar contains the following icons: - allows using the Search and Replace tool, - allows opening the Comments panel, - (available in the online version only) allows opening the Chat panel, - allows to check the spelling of your text in a certain language and correct mistakes while editing. - allows contacting our support team, - (available in the online version only) allows viewing the information about the program. The Right sidebar allows adjusting additional parameters of different objects. When you select a particular object in a worksheet, the corresponding icon is activated on the right sidebar. Click this icon to expand the right sidebar. The Working area allows viewing the contents of a spreadsheet, as well as entering and editing data. The horizontal and vertical Scroll bars allow scrolling up/down and left/right. For your convenience, you can hide some components and display them again when necessary. To learn more on how to adjust view settings please refer to this page. When there are many icons on the left and right panels, the ones below will be hidden, and they can be accessed via the More button." }, { "id": "ProgramInterface/ProtectionTab.htm", @@ -2523,7 +2533,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "ProgramInterface/ViewTab.htm", "title": "View tab", - "body": "The View tab in the Spreadsheet Editor allows you to manage sheet view presets based on applied filters view options. The corresponding window of the Online Spreadsheet Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Spreadsheet Editor: View options available on this tab: Sheet View allows to manage sheet view presets. Normal allows to see the spreadsheet fully. Page Break Preview allows to see the printed area of the spreadsheet only. Zoom allows to zoom in and zoom out your spreadsheet. Interface Theme allows to change interface theme by choosing a Same as system, Light, Classic Light, Dark or Contrast Dark theme. Freeze Panes allows to freeze and unfreeze certain panes or rows and columns. The following options allow you to configure the elements to display or to hide. Check the elements to make them visible: Formula Bar to show a formula bar above the spreadsheet. Headings to show headings, i.e., column headings at the top and row headings on the left. Gridlines to show gridlines, i.e., cell outlines. Show Zeros to always show \"0\" when entered in a cell. Always Show Toolbar to make the top toolbar always visible. Combine Sheet and Status Bars to display all sheet navigation tools and status bar in a single line. The status bar will appear in two lines when this box is unchecked. Left Panel to make the left panel visible. Right Panel to make the right panel visible." + "body": "The View tab in the Spreadsheet Editor allows you to manage sheet view presets based on applied filters view options. The corresponding window of the Online Spreadsheet Editor: The corresponding window of the Desktop Spreadsheet Editor: View options available on this tab: Sheet View allows to manage sheet view presets. Normal allows to see the spreadsheet fully. Page Break Preview allows to see the printed area of the spreadsheet only. Zoom allows to zoom in and zoom out your spreadsheet. Interface Theme allows to change interface theme by choosing a Same as system, Light, Classic Light, Dark or Contrast Dark theme. Freeze Panes allows to freeze and unfreeze certain panes or rows and columns. The following options allow you to configure the elements to display or to hide. Check the elements to make them visible: Formula Bar to show a formula bar above the spreadsheet. Headings to show headings, i.e., column headings at the top and row headings on the left. Gridlines to show gridlines, i.e., cell outlines. Show Zeros to always show \"0\" when entered in a cell. Always Show Toolbar to make the top toolbar always visible. Combine Sheet and Status Bars to display all sheet navigation tools and status bar in a single line. The status bar will appear in two lines when this box is unchecked. Left Panel to make the left panel visible. Right Panel to make the right panel visible. Macros - this option allows adding custom macros to your spreadsheet." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/AddBorders.htm", @@ -2548,12 +2558,12 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/ChangeNumberFormat.htm", "title": "Change number format", - "body": "Apply a number format In the Spreadsheet Editor, you can easily change the number format, i.e. the way the numbers appear in a spreadsheet. To do that, select a cell, a cell range with the mouse or the whole worksheet by pressing the Ctrl+A key combination, Note: you can also select multiple non-adjacent cells or cell ranges holding down the Ctrl key while selecting cells/ranges with the mouse. drop-down the Number format button list situated on the Home tab of the top toolbar or right-click the selected cells and use the Number Format option from the contextual menu. Select the number format you wish to apply: General - is used to display the data as plain numbers in the most compact way without any additional signs, Number - is used to display the numbers with 0-30 digits after the decimal point where a thousand separator is added between each group of three digits before the decimal point, Scientific (exponential) - is used to keep short the numbers converting in a string of type d.dddE+ddd or d.dddE-ddd where each d is a digit 0 to 9, Accounting - is used to display monetary values with the default currency symbol and two decimal places. To apply another currency symbol or number of decimal places, follow the instructions below. Unlike the Currency format, the Accounting format aligns currency symbols to the left side of the cell, represents zero values as dashes and displays negative values in parentheses. Note: to quickly apply the Accounting format to the selected data, you can also click the Accounting style icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar and select one of the following currency symbols: $ Dollar, € Euro, £ Pound, ₽ Rouble, ¥ Yen, kn Croatian Kuna. Currency - is used to display monetary values with the default currency symbol and two decimal places. To apply another currency symbol or number of decimal places, follow the instructions below. Unlike the Accounting format, the Currency format places a currency symbol directly before the first digit and displays negative values with the negative sign (-). Short Date - is used to display date in the DD.MM.YYYY format, Long Date - is used to display date in the DD.month in full.YYYY format, Time - is used to display time, Percentage - is used to display the data as a percentage accompanied by a percent sign %, Note: to quickly apply the percent style to the data, you can also use the Percent style icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar. Fraction - is used to display the numbers as common fractions rather than decimals. Text - is used to display the numeric values as a plain text with as much precision as possible. More formats - is used to create a custom number format or to customize the already applied number formats specifying additional parameters (see the description below). Custom - is used to create a custom format: select a cell, a range of cells, or the whole worksheet for values you want to format, choose the Custom option from the More formats menu, enter the required codes and check the result in the preview area or choose one of the templates and/or combine them. If you want to create a format based on the existing one, first apply the existing format and then edit the codes to your preference, click OK. change the number of decimal places if needed: use the Increase decimal icon situated on the Home tab of the top toolbar to display more digits after the decimal point, use the Decrease decimal icon situated on the Home tab of the top toolbar to display fewer digits after the decimal point. Note: to change the number format you can also use keyboard shortcuts. Customize the number format You can customize the applied number format in the following way: select the cells whose number format you want to customize, drop-down the Number format button list on the Home tab of the top toolbar or right-click the selected cells and use the Number Format option from the contextual menu, select the More formats option, in the opened Number Format window, adjust the available parameters. The options differ depending on the number format that is applied to the selected cells. You can use the Category list to change the number format. for the Number format, you can set the number of Decimal points, specify if you want to Use 1000 separator or not and choose one of the available Formats for displaying negative values. for the Scientific and Percentage formats, you can set the number of Decimal points. for the Accounting and Currency formats, you can set the number of Decimal points, choose one of the available currency Symbols and one of the available Formats for displaying negative values. for the Date format, you can select one of the available date formats: 4/15, 04/15, 4/15/06, 04/15/06, 4/15/2006, 04/15/2006, 4/15/06 0:00, 04/15/06 0:00, 4/15/06 12:00 AM, A, April 15 2006, 15-Apr, 15-Apr-06, Apr-06, April-06, A-06, 06-Apr, 15-Apr-2006, 2006-Apr-15, 06-Apr-15,  06-4-15, 06-04-15, 2006-4-15, 2006-04-15, 15/Apr, 15/Apr/06, Apr/06, April/06, A/06, 06/Apr, 15/Apr/2006, 2006/Apr/15, 06/Apr/15, 06/4/15, 06/04/15, 2006/4/15, 2006/04/15, 15 Apr, 15 Apr 06, Apr 06, April 06, A 06, 06 Apr, 15 Apr 2006, 2006 Apr 15, 06 Apr 15, 06 4 15, 06 04 15, 2006 4 15, 2006 04 15. for the Time format, you can select one of the available time formats: 12:48:58 PM, 12:48, 12:48 PM, 12:48:58, 48:57.6, 36:48:58. for the Fraction format, you can select one of the available formats: Up to one digit (1/3), Up to two digits (12/25), Up to three digits (131/135), As halves (1/2), As fourths (2/4), As eighths (4/8), As sixteenths (8/16), As tenths (5/10) , As hundredths (50/100). click the OK button to apply the changes." + "body": "Apply a number format In the Spreadsheet Editor, you can easily change the number format, i.e. the way the numbers appear in a spreadsheet. To do that, select a cell, a cell range with the mouse or the whole worksheet by pressing the Ctrl+A key combination, Note: you can also select multiple non-adjacent cells or cell ranges holding down the Ctrl key while selecting cells/ranges with the mouse. drop-down the Number format button list situated on the Home tab of the top toolbar or right-click the selected cells and use the Number Format option from the contextual menu. Select the number format you wish to apply: General - is used to display the data as plain numbers in the most compact way without any additional signs, Number - is used to display the numbers with 0-30 digits after the decimal point where a thousand separator is added between each group of three digits before the decimal point, Scientific (exponential) - is used to keep short the numbers converting in a string of type d.dddE+ddd or d.dddE-ddd where each d is a digit 0 to 9, Accounting - is used to display monetary values with the default currency symbol and two decimal places. To apply another currency symbol or number of decimal places, follow the instructions below. Unlike the Currency format, the Accounting format aligns currency symbols to the left side of the cell, represents zero values as dashes and displays negative values in parentheses. Note: to quickly apply the Accounting format to the selected data, you can also click the Accounting style icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar and select one of the following currency symbols: $ Dollar, € Euro, £ Pound, ₽ Rouble, ¥ Yen, kn Croatian Kuna. Currency - is used to display monetary values with the default currency symbol and two decimal places. To apply another currency symbol or number of decimal places, follow the instructions below. Unlike the Accounting format, the Currency format places a currency symbol directly before the first digit and displays negative values with the negative sign (-). Short Date - is used to display date in the DD.MM.YYYY format, Long Date - is used to display date in the DD.month in full.YYYY format, Time - is used to display time, Percentage - is used to display the data as a percentage accompanied by a percent sign %, Note: to quickly apply the percent style to the data, you can also use the Percent style icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar. Fraction - is used to display the numbers as common fractions rather than decimals. Text - is used to display the numeric values as a plain text with as much precision as possible. More formats - is used to create a custom number format or to customize the already applied number formats specifying additional parameters (see the description below). Custom - is used to create a custom format: select a cell, a range of cells, or the whole worksheet for values you want to format, choose the Custom option from the More formats menu, enter the required codes and check the result in the preview area or choose one of the templates and/or combine them. If you want to create a format based on the existing one, first apply the existing format and then edit the codes to your preference, click OK. change the number of decimal places if needed: use the Increase decimal icon situated on the Home tab of the top toolbar to display more digits after the decimal point, use the Decrease decimal icon situated on the Home tab of the top toolbar to display fewer digits after the decimal point. use the Comma style icon situated on the Home tab of the top toolbar to display numbers with two decimal places and thousands separated with a comma. Note: to change the number format, you can also use keyboard shortcuts. Customize the number format You can customize the applied number format in the following way: select the cells whose number format you want to customize, drop-down the Number format button list on the Home tab of the top toolbar or right-click the selected cells and use the Number Format option from the contextual menu, select the More formats option, in the opened Number Format window, adjust the available parameters. The options differ depending on the number format that is applied to the selected cells. You can use the Category list to change the number format. for the Number format, you can set the number of Decimal points, specify if you want to Use 1000 separator or not and choose one of the available Formats for displaying negative values. for the Scientific and Percentage formats, you can set the number of Decimal points. for the Accounting and Currency formats, you can set the number of Decimal points, choose one of the available currency Symbols and one of the available Formats for displaying negative values. for the Date format, you can select one of the available date formats: 4/15, 04/15, 4/15/06, 04/15/06, 4/15/2006, 04/15/2006, 4/15/06 0:00, 04/15/06 0:00, 4/15/06 12:00 AM, A, April 15 2006, 15-Apr, 15-Apr-06, Apr-06, April-06, A-06, 06-Apr, 15-Apr-2006, 2006-Apr-15, 06-Apr-15,  06-4-15, 06-04-15, 2006-4-15, 2006-04-15, 15/Apr, 15/Apr/06, Apr/06, April/06, A/06, 06/Apr, 15/Apr/2006, 2006/Apr/15, 06/Apr/15, 06/4/15, 06/04/15, 2006/4/15, 2006/04/15, 15 Apr, 15 Apr 06, Apr 06, April 06, A 06, 06 Apr, 15 Apr 2006, 2006 Apr 15, 06 Apr 15, 06 4 15, 06 04 15, 2006 4 15, 2006 04 15. for the Time format, you can select one of the available time formats: 12:48:58 PM, 12:48, 12:48 PM, 12:48:58, 48:57.6, 36:48:58. for the Fraction format, you can select one of the available formats: Up to one digit (1/3), Up to two digits (12/25), Up to three digits (131/135), As halves (1/2), As fourths (2/4), As eighths (4/8), As sixteenths (8/16), As tenths (5/10) , As hundredths (50/100). click the OK button to apply the changes." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/ChatGPT.htm", "title": "ChatGPT", - "body": "The ChatGPT plugin allows you to use the OpenAI chatbot to perform tasks that involve understanding or generating natural language or code. Installation To install the ChatGPT plugin, Go to the Plugins tab. Open the Plugin Manager. Find ChatGPT on the marketplace and click the Install button below. Right-click anywhere in the document and find ChatGPT in the context menu. Click Settings to proceed with the plugin configuration. Configuration Create your API key on the OpenAI API key page. Copy the generated API key into the corresponding field of the Settings window. How to use ONLYOFFICE assumes no responsibility for any ChatGPT completions that may contain errors or omissions as well as for any harassing and inappropriate content. The information contained in the plugin completions is generated by ChatGPT and is provided on the \"as is\" basis without additional filtering from ONLYOFFICE. Once installed ChatGPT will be added to the context menu, and all of the ChatGPT features will be accessed with a right mouse click. Select a piece of text or a word to access the context menu and to choose one of the ChatGPT features: Text Analysis, Word Analysis, Translation, Image Generation, Thesaurus, Chat, and Custom Request. Chat Integration of ChatGPT into the context menu allows you to invoke the Chat from anywhere in the document. Use chatbot to interact and carry on a conversation, ask questions, and receive responses to your requests. Navigate to the Chat option from the ChatGPT context menu, and start a conversation in the text box at the bottom of the ChatGPT window. Custom Request The Custom Request feature allows you to tokenize natural language or code. The tool converts the input text into a list of tokens, processes the request, converts the generated tokens back to the text, and returns the string in the document. To make a custom request, go to the ChatGPT context menu, and click Custom request. In the Open AI text box, enter the text you would like to tokenize. The tool shows the total number of tokens in the text. Click the Show advanced settings to configure the request settings: Model - the model which will generate the completion. Some models are suitable for natural language tasks, others specialize in code. To learn more about these models, please refer to the official ChatGPT website. Maximum length - the maximum number of tokens to generate in the completion. Temperature - this parameter controls randomness, e.g., lowering it results in less random completions. As the temperature approaches zero, the node will become deterministic and repetitive. Top P - an alternative to sampling with temperature, called nucleus sampling, where the model considers the results of the tokens with top_p probability mass. Stop sequences - up to four sequences where the API will stop generating further tokens. The returned text will not contain the stop sequence. Click the Submit button to process the text, or click the Clear button to delete the request and enter a new one." + "body": "The ChatGPT plugin allows you to use the OpenAI chatbot to perform tasks that involve understanding or generating natural language or code. Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager. Installation To install the ChatGPT plugin, Go to the Plugins tab. Open the Plugin Manager. Find ChatGPT on the marketplace and click the Install button below. Right-click anywhere in the document and find ChatGPT in the context menu. Click Settings to proceed with the plugin configuration. Configuration Create your API key on the OpenAI API key page. Copy the generated API key into the corresponding field of the Settings window. How to use ONLYOFFICE assumes no responsibility for any ChatGPT completions that may contain errors or omissions as well as for any harassing and inappropriate content. The information contained in the plugin completions is generated by ChatGPT and is provided on the \"as is\" basis without additional filtering from ONLYOFFICE. Once installed ChatGPT will be added to the context menu, and all of the ChatGPT features will be accessed with a right mouse click. Select a piece of text or a word to access the context menu and to choose one of the ChatGPT features: Text Analysis, Word Analysis, Translation, Image Generation, Thesaurus, Chat, and Custom Request. Chat Integration of ChatGPT into the context menu allows you to invoke the Chat from anywhere in the document. Use chatbot to interact and carry on a conversation, ask questions, and receive responses to your requests. Navigate to the Chat option from the ChatGPT context menu, and start a conversation in the text box at the bottom of the ChatGPT window. Custom Request The Custom Request feature allows you to tokenize natural language or code. The tool converts the input text into a list of tokens, processes the request, converts the generated tokens back to the text, and returns the string in the document. To make a custom request, go to the ChatGPT context menu, and click Custom request. In the Open AI text box, enter the text you would like to tokenize. The tool shows the total number of tokens in the text. Click the Show advanced settings to configure the request settings: Model - the model which will generate the completion. Some models are suitable for natural language tasks, others specialize in code. To learn more about these models, please refer to the official ChatGPT website. Maximum length - the maximum number of tokens to generate in the completion. Temperature - this parameter controls randomness, e.g., lowering it results in less random completions. As the temperature approaches zero, the node will become deterministic and repetitive. Top P - an alternative to sampling with temperature, called nucleus sampling, where the model considers the results of the tokens with top_p probability mass. Stop sequences - up to four sequences where the API will stop generating further tokens. The returned text will not contain the stop sequence. Click the Submit button to process the text, or click the Clear button to delete the request and enter a new one." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/ClearFormatting.htm", @@ -2563,7 +2573,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/CommunicationPlugins.htm", "title": "Communicate while editing", - "body": "In ONLYOFFICE Spreadsheet Editor, you can always keep in touch with colleagues and use popular online messengers, such as Telegram and Rainbow. Telegram and Rainbow plugins are not installed by default. To find information on how to install them, please, refer to the corresponding article: Adding plugins to the ONLYOFFICE Desktop Editors Adding plugins to ONLYOFFICE Cloud, or Adding new plugins to server editors . Telegram To start chatting in the Telegram plugin, Switch to the Plugins tab and click Telegram, enter your phone number into the corresponding field, check the Keep me signed in checkbox if you want to save credentials for the current session and click the Next button, enter the code you've received in your Telegram app, or log in using the QR code, open Telegram app on your phone, go to Settings > Devices > Scan QR, scan the image to Log in. Now you can use Telegram for instant messaging within ONLYOFFICE editors interface. Rainbow To start chatting in the Rainbow plugin, Switch to the Plugins tab and click Rainbow, register a new account by clicking the Sign up button, or log into an already created one. To do this, enter your email into the corresponding field and click Continue, then enter your account password, check the Keep my session alive checkbox if you want to save credentials for the current session, and click the Connect button. Now you're all set and can simultaneously chat in Rainbow and work within ONLYOFFICE editors interface." + "body": "In ONLYOFFICE Spreadsheet Editor, you can always keep in touch with colleagues and use popular online messengers, such as Telegram and Rainbow. Telegram and Rainbow plugins are not installed by default. To find information on how to install them, please, refer to the corresponding article: Adding plugins to the ONLYOFFICE Desktop Editors Adding plugins to ONLYOFFICE Cloud, or Adding new plugins to server editors , or install the plugin using the Plugin Manager.. Telegram To start chatting in the Telegram plugin, Switch to the Plugins tab and click Telegram, enter your phone number into the corresponding field, check the Keep me signed in checkbox if you want to save credentials for the current session and click the Next button, enter the code you've received in your Telegram app, or log in using the QR code, open Telegram app on your phone, go to Settings > Devices > Scan QR, scan the image to Log in. Now you can use Telegram for instant messaging within ONLYOFFICE editors interface. Rainbow To start chatting in the Rainbow plugin, Switch to the Plugins tab and click Rainbow, register a new account by clicking the Sign up button, or log into an already created one. To do this, enter your email into the corresponding field and click Continue, then enter your account password, check the Keep my session alive checkbox if you want to save credentials for the current session, and click the Connect button. Now you're all set and can simultaneously chat in Rainbow and work within ONLYOFFICE editors interface." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/ConditionalFormatting.htm", @@ -2588,7 +2598,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/FontTypeSizeStyle.htm", "title": "Set font type, size, style, and colors", - "body": "In the Spreadsheet Editor, you can select the font type and its size, apply one of the decoration styles and change the font and background colors by clicking the corresponding icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar. Note: if you want to apply formatting to the data in the spreadsheet, select them with the mouse or use the keyboard and apply the required formatting. If you need to apply the formatting to multiple non-adjacent cells or cell ranges, hold down the Ctrl key while selecting cells/ranges with the mouse. Font Used to select one of the fonts from the list of the available fonts. If the required font is not available in the list, you can download and install it on your operating system, and the font will be available for use in the desktop version. Font size Used to select the preset font size values from the dropdown list (the default values are: 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 36, 48, 72 and 96). It's also possible to manually enter a custom value up to 409 pt in the font size field. Press Enter to confirm. Increment font size Used to change the font size making it one point bigger each time the icon is clicked. Decrement font size Used to change the font size making it one point smaller each time the icon is clicked. Change case Used to change the font case. Sentence case. - the case matches that of a common sentence. lowercase - all letters are small. UPPERCASE - all letters are capital. Capitalize Each Word - each word starts with a capital letter. tOGGLE cASE - reverse the case of the selected text or the word where the mouse cursor is positioned. Bold Used to make the font bold making it heavier. Italic Used to make the font slightly slanted to the right. Underline Used to make the text underlined with a line going below the letters. Strikethrough Used to make the text struck out with a line going through the letters. Subscript/Superscript Allows choosing the Superscript or Subscript option. The Superscript option is used to make the text smaller and place it to the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions. The Subscript option is used to make the text smaller and place it to the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas. Font color Used to change the color of the letters/characters in cells. Fill color Used to change the color of the cell fill. Using this icon you can apply a solid color fill. The color of the cell fill can also be changed using the Fill section on the Cell settings tab of the right sidebar. Change color scheme This button is located on the Layout tab. Used to change the default color palette for worksheet elements (font, background, chats and chart elements) selecting from the available options: New Office, Office, Grayscale, Apex, Aspect, Civic, Concourse, Equity, Flow, Foundry, Median, Metro, Module, Odulent, Oriel, Origin, Paper, Solstice, Technic, Trek, Urban, or Verve. Note: it's also possible to apply one of the formatting presets selecting the cell you wish to format and choosing the desired preset from the list on the Home tab of the top toolbar: To change the font color or use a solid color fill as the cell background, select characters/cells with the mouse or the whole worksheet using the Ctrl+A key combination, click the corresponding icon on the top toolbar, select any color in the available palettes Theme Colors - the colors that correspond to the selected color scheme of the spreadsheet. Standard Colors - the default colors set. You can also apply a custom color using two different options: Eyedropper - use this option to choose the required color by clicking it in the spreadsheet. More colors - click this caption if the required color is missing among the available palettes. Select the necessary color range moving the vertical color slider and set a specific color dragging the color picker within the large square color field. Once you select a color with the color picker, the appropriate RGB and sRGB color values will be displayed in the fields on the right. You can also define a color on the base of the RGB color model by entering the corresponding numeric values into the R, G, B (red, green, blue) fields or enter the sRGB hexadecimal code into the field marked with the # sign. The selected color appears in the New preview box. If the object was previously filled with any custom color, this color is displayed in the Current box so you can compare the original and modified colors. When the color is defined, click the Add button: The custom color will be applied to the text/cell and added to the Recent colors palette. To remove the background color from a certain cell, select a cell, or a cell range with the mouse or the whole worksheet using the Ctrl+A key combination, click the Fill color icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar, select the icon." + "body": "In the Spreadsheet Editor, you can select the font type and its size, apply one of the decoration styles and change the font and background colors by clicking the corresponding icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar. Note: if you want to apply formatting to the data in the spreadsheet, select them with the mouse or use the keyboard and apply the required formatting. If you need to apply the formatting to multiple non-adjacent cells or cell ranges, hold down the Ctrl key while selecting cells/ranges with the mouse. Font Used to select one of the fonts from the list of the available fonts. If the required font is not available in the list, you can download and install it on your operating system, and the font will be available for use in the desktop version. Font size Used to select the preset font size values from the dropdown list (the default values are: 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 36, 48, 72 and 96). It's also possible to manually enter a custom value up to 409 pt in the font size field. Press Enter to confirm. Increment font size Used to change the font size making it one point bigger each time the icon is clicked. Decrement font size Used to change the font size making it one point smaller each time the icon is clicked. Change case Used to change the font case. Sentence case. - the case matches that of a common sentence. lowercase - all letters are small. UPPERCASE - all letters are capital. Capitalize Each Word - each word starts with a capital letter. tOGGLE cASE - reverse the case of the selected text or the word where the mouse cursor is positioned. Bold Used to make the font bold making it heavier. Italic Used to make the font slightly slanted to the right. Underline Used to make the text underlined with a line going below the letters. Strikethrough Used to make the text struck out with a line going through the letters. Subscript/Superscript Allows choosing the Superscript or Subscript option. The Superscript option is used to make the text smaller and place it to the upper part of the text line, e.g. as in fractions. The Subscript option is used to make the text smaller and place it to the lower part of the text line, e.g. as in chemical formulas. Font color Used to change the color of the letters/characters in cells. Fill color Used to change the color of the cell fill. Using this icon you can apply a solid color fill. The color of the cell fill can also be changed using the Fill section on the Cell settings tab of the right sidebar. Change color scheme This button is located on the Layout tab. Used to change the default color palette for worksheet elements (font, background, chats and chart elements) selecting from the available options: Aspect, Blue Green, Blue II, Blue Warm, Blue, Grayscale, Green Yellow, Green, Marquee, Median, Office 2007-2010, Office 2013-2022, Office, Orange Red, Orange, Paper, Red Orange, Red Violet, Red, Slipstream, Violet II, Violet, Yellow Orange, Yellow, and New Office. Note: it's also possible to apply one of the formatting presets selecting the cell you wish to format and choosing the desired preset from the list on the Home tab of the top toolbar: To change the font color or use a solid color fill as the cell background, select characters/cells with the mouse or the whole worksheet using the Ctrl+A key combination, click the corresponding icon on the top toolbar, select any color in the available palettes Theme Colors - the colors that correspond to the selected color scheme of the spreadsheet. Standard Colors - the default colors set. You can also apply a custom color using two different options: Eyedropper - use this option to choose the required color by clicking it in the spreadsheet. More colors - click this caption if the required color is missing among the available palettes. Select the necessary color range moving the vertical color slider and set a specific color dragging the color picker within the large square color field. Once you select a color with the color picker, the appropriate RGB and sRGB color values will be displayed in the fields on the right. You can also define a color on the base of the RGB color model by entering the corresponding numeric values into the R, G, B (red, green, blue) fields or enter the sRGB hexadecimal code into the field marked with the # sign. The selected color appears in the New preview box. If the object was previously filled with any custom color, this color is displayed in the Current box so you can compare the original and modified colors. When the color is defined, click the Add button: The custom color will be applied to the text/cell and added to the Recent colors palette. To remove the background color from a certain cell, select a cell, or a cell range with the mouse or the whole worksheet using the Ctrl+A key combination, click the Fill color icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar, select the icon." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/FormattedTables.htm", @@ -2608,7 +2618,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/HighlightedCode.htm", "title": "Insert highlighted code", - "body": "In the Spreadsheet Editor, you can embed highlighted code with the already adjusted style in accordance with the programming language and coloring style of the program you have chosen. Go to your spreadsheet and place the cursor at the location where you want to include the code. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose Highlight code. Specify the programming Language. Select a Style of the code so that it appears as if it were open in this program. Specify if you want to replace tabs with spaces. Choose Background color. To do this, manually move the cursor over the palette or insert the RGB/HSL/HEX value. Click OK to insert the code." + "body": "In the Spreadsheet Editor, you can embed highlighted code with the already adjusted style in accordance with the programming language and coloring style of the program you have chosen. Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager. Go to your spreadsheet and place the cursor at the location where you want to include the code. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose Highlight code. Specify the programming Language. Select a Style of the code so that it appears as if it were open in this program. Specify if you want to replace tabs with spaces. Choose Background color. To do this, manually move the cursor over the palette or insert the RGB/HSL/HEX value. Click OK to insert the code." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertArrayFormulas.htm", @@ -2618,12 +2628,12 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertAutoshapes.htm", "title": "Insert and format autoshapes", - "body": "Insert an autoshape To add an autoshape in the Spreadsheet Editor, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Shape icon on the top toolbar, select one of the available autoshape groups from the Shape Gallery: Recently Used, Basic Shapes, Figured Arrows, Math, Charts, Stars & Ribbons, Callouts, Buttons, Rectangles, Lines, click the necessary autoshape within the selected group, place the mouse cursor where the shape sholud be added, once the autoshape is added, you can change its size and position as well as its settings. You can save the autoshape as picture on your hard drive using the Save as picture option in the right-click menu. Copy autoshape style formatting To copy a certain autoshape style formatting, select the autoshape whose formatting you need to copy with the mouse or using the keyboard, click the Copy style icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar (the mouse pointer will look like this ), select the required autoshape to apply the same formatting. Adjust the autoshape settings To align and arrange autoshapes, use the right-click menu. The menu options are: Cut, Copy, Paste - standard options which are used to cut or copy the selected text/object and paste the previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position. Arrange is used to bring the selected autoshape to foreground, send it to background, move forward or backward as well as group or ungroup shapes to perform operations with several of them at once. To learn more on how to arrange objects, please refer to this page. Align is used to align the shape to the left, in the center, to the right, at the top, in the middle, at the bottom. To learn more on how to align objects, please refer to this page. Rotate is used to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the shape horizontally or vertically. Assign Macro is used to provide a quick and easy access to a macro within a spreadsheet by assigning a macro to any shape. Once you assign a macro, the shape appears as a button control and you can run the macro whenever you click it. To learn more, please refer to the Assign a Macro to a Shape section of this guide. Save as picture is used to save the shape as a picture on your hard drive. Edit Points is used to customize or to change the curvature of your shape. To activate a shape’s editable anchor points, right-click the shape and choose Edit Points from the menu or click the Edit shape > Edit points option on the right panel. The black squares that become active are the points where two lines meet, and the red line outlines the shape. Click and drag it to reposition the point, and to change the shape outline. Once you click the anchor point, two blue lines with white squares at the ends will appear. These are Bezier handles that allow you to create a curve and to change a curve’s smoothness. As long as the anchor points are active, you can add and delete them. To add a point to a shape, hold Ctrl and click the position where you want to add an anchor point. To delete a point, hold Ctrl and click the unnecessary point. Shape Advanced Settings is used to open the 'Shape - Advanced Settings' window. Some of the autoshape settings can be changed using the Shape settings tab on the right sidebar that will open if you select the inserted autoshape with the mouse and click the Shape settings icon. The following settings can be changed: Fill - use this section to select the autoshape fill. You can choose the following options: Color Fill - select this option to specify a solid color to fill the inner space of the selected autoshape. Click the colored box below and select the necessary color from the available color sets or specify any color you like: Theme Colors - the colors that correspond to the selected color scheme of the spreadsheet. Standard Colors - the default colors set. You can also apply a custom color using two different options: Eyedropper - use this option to choose the required color by clicking it in the document. More colors - click this caption if the required color is missing among the available palettes. Select the necessary color range moving the vertical color slider and set a specific color dragging the color picker within the large square color field. Once you select a color with the color picker, the appropriate RGB and sRGB color values will be displayed in the fields on the right. You can also define a color on the base of the RGB color model by entering the corresponding numeric values into the R, G, B (red, green, blue) fields or enter the sRGB hexadecimal code into the field marked with the # sign. The selected color appears in the New preview box. If the object was previously filled with any custom color, this color is displayed in the Current box so you can compare the original and modified colors. When the color is defined, click the Add button: The custom color will be applied to the selected element and added to the Recent colors palette. Gradient Fill - use this option to fill the shape with two or more fading colors. Customize your gradient fill with no constraints. Click the Shape settings icon to open the Fill menu on the right sidebar: Available menu options: Style - choose between Linear or Radial: Linear is used  when you need your colors to flow from left-to-right, top-to-bottom, or at any angle you chose in a single direction. The Direction preview window displays the selected gradient color, click the arrow to choose a preset gradient direction. Use Angle settings for a precise gradient angle. Radial is used to move from the center as it starts at a single point and emanates outward. Gradient Point is a specific point for transition from one color to another. Use the Add Gradient Point button or slider bar to add a gradient point. You can add up to 10 gradient points. Each next gradient point added will in no way affect the current gradient fill appearance. Use the Remove Gradient Point button to delete a certain gradient point. Use the slider bar to change the location of the gradient point or specify Position in percentage for precise location. To apply a color to a gradient point, click a point on the slider bar, and then click Color to choose the color you want. Picture or Texture - select this option to use an image or a predefined texture as the shape background. If you wish to use an image as the shape background, you can click the Select Picture button and add an image From File selecting it on the hard disc drive of your computer, From Storage using your ONLYOFFICE file manager, or From URL inserting the appropriate URL address into the opened window. If you wish to use a texture as the shape background, open the From Texture menu and select the necessary texture preset. Currently, the following textures are available: canvas, carton, dark fabric, grain, granite, grey paper, knit, leather, brown paper, papyrus, wood. In case the selected Picture has less or more dimensions than the autoshape has, you can choose the Stretch or Tile setting from the dropdown list. The Stretch option allows you to adjust the size of the image to fit the autoshape so that it could fill all the space completely. The Tile option allows you to display only a part of the bigger image keeping its original dimensions or repeat the smaller image keeping its original dimensions over the autoshape surface so that it could fill the space completely. Note: any selected Texture preset fills the space completely, but you can apply the Stretch effect if necessary. Pattern - select this option to fill the shape with a two-colored design composed of regularly repeated elements. Pattern - select one of the predefined designs from the menu. Foreground color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern elements. Background color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern background. No Fill - select this option if you don't want to use any fill. Opacity - use this section to set the Opacity level by dragging the slider or entering the percent value manually. The default value is 100%. It means full opacity. The 0% value means full transparency. Line - use this section to change the width, color or type of the autoshape line. To change the line width, select one of the available options from the Size dropdown list. The available options are: 0.5 pt, 1 pt, 1.5 pt, 2.25 pt, 3 pt, 4.5 pt, 6 pt. Alternatively, select the No Line option if you don't want to use any line. To change the line color, click on the colored box below and select the necessary color. To change the line type, select the necessary option from the corresponding dropdown list (a solid line is applied by default, you can change it to one of the available dashed lines). To change the line opacity, enter the required value manually or use the corresponding slider bar. Rotation is used to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the shape horizontally or vertically. Click one of the buttons: to rotate the shape by 90 degrees counterclockwise to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise to flip the shape horizontally (left to right) to flip the shape vertically (upside down) Edit shape - use this section to edit the shape points or to replace the current autoshape with another one selected from the dropdown list. Edit points is used to customize or to change the curvature of your shape. Once you click the anchor point, two blue lines with white squares at the ends will appear. These are Bezier handles that allow you to create a curve and to change a curve’s smoothness. As long as the anchor points are active, you can add and delete them. To add a point to a shape, hold Ctrl and click the position where you want to add an anchor point. To delete a point, hold Ctrl and click the unnecessary point. Change Shape is used to replace the current autoshape. Choose another autoshape from the dropdown list. Show shadow - check this option to display the shape with shadow. Adjust shape advanced settings To change the advanced settings of the autoshape, use the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar. The 'Shape - Advanced Settings' window will open: The Size tab contains the following parameters: Width and Height - use these options to change the width and/or height of the autoshape. If the Constant proportions button is clicked (in this case it looks like this ), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original shape aspect ratio. The Rotation tab contains the following parameters: Angle - use this option to rotate the shape by an exactly specified angle. Enter the necessary value measured in degrees into the field or adjust it using the arrows on the right. Flipped - check the Horizontally box to flip the shape horizontally (left to right) or check the Vertically box to flip the shape vertically (upside down). The Weights & Arrows tab contains the following parameters: Line Style - this option group allows you to specify the following parameters: Cap Type - this option allows you to set the style of the end of the line, therefore it can be applied only to the shapes with an open outline, such as lines, polylines etc.: Flat - the end points will be flat. Round - the end points will be rounded. Square - the end points will be square. Join Type - this option allows you to set the style of the intersection of two lines, for example, it can affect a polyline or the corners of a triangle or rectangle outline: Round - the corner will be rounded. Bevel - the corner will be cut off angularly. Miter - the corner will be pointed. It goes well to shapes with sharp angles. Note: the effect will be more noticeable if you use a large outline width. Arrows - this option group is available if a shape from the Lines shape group is selected. It allows you to set the arrow Start and End Style and Size by selecting the appropriate option from the dropdown lists. The Text Box tab allows you to Resize shape to fit text, Allow text to overflow shape or change the Top, Bottom, Left and Right internal margins of the autoshape (i.e. the distance between the text within the shape and the autoshape borders). Note: this tab is only available if text is added within the autoshape, otherwise the tab is disabled. The Columns tab allows you to add columns of text within the autoshape specifying the necessary Number of columns (up to 16) and Spacing between columns. Once you click OK, the text that already exists or any other text you enter within the autoshape will appear in columns and will flow from one column to another one. The Cell Snapping tab contains the following parameters: Move and size with cells - this option allows you to snap the shape to the cell behind it. If the cell moves (e.g. if you insert or delete some rows/columns), the shape will be moved together with the cell. If you increase or decrease the width or height of the cell, the shape will change its size as well. Move but don't size with cells - this option allows you to snap the shape to the cell behind it preventing the shape from being resized. If the cell moves, the shape will be moved together with the cell, but if you change the cell size, the shape dimensions remain unchanged. Don't move or size with cells - this option allows you to prevent the shape from being moved or resized if the cell position or size was changed. The Alternative Text tab allows you to specify the Title and Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information the shape contains. Insert and format text within the autoshape To insert a text into the autoshape, select the shape with the mouse and start typing your text. The text will become part of the autoshape (when you move or rotate the shape, the text also moves or rotates with it). All the formatting options you can apply to the text within the autoshape are listed here. Join autoshapes using connectors You can connect autoshapes using lines with connection points to demonstrate dependencies between the objects (e.g. if you want to create a flowchart). To do that, click the Shape icon on the Insert tab of the top toolbar, select the Lines group from the menu, click the necessary shape within the selected group (excepting the last three shapes which are not connectors, namely Curve, Scribble and Freeform), hover the mouse cursor over the first autoshape and click one of the connection points that appear on the shape outline, drag the mouse cursor towards the second autoshape and click the necessary connection point on its outline. If you move the joined autoshapes, the connector remains attached to the shapes and moves together with them. You can also detach the connector from the shapes and then attach it to any other connection points. Assign a Macro to a Shape You can provide a quick and easy access to a macro within a spreadsheet by assigning a macro to any shape. Once you assign a macro, the shape appears as a button control and you can run the macro whenever you click it. To assign a macro: Right-click the shape to assign a macro to and choose the Assign Macro option from the drop-down menu. The Assign Macro dialogue will open Choose a macro from the list, or type in the macro name, and click OK to confirm." + "body": "Insert an autoshape To add an autoshape in the Spreadsheet Editor, switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar, click the Shape icon on the top toolbar, select one of the available autoshape groups from the Shape Gallery: Recently Used, Basic Shapes, Figured Arrows, Math, Charts, Stars & Ribbons, Callouts, Buttons, Rectangles, Lines, click the necessary autoshape within the selected group, place the mouse cursor where the shape sholud be added, once the autoshape is added, you can change its size and position as well as its settings. You can save the autoshape as picture on your hard drive using the Save as picture option in the right-click menu. Copy autoshape style formatting To copy a certain autoshape style formatting, select the autoshape whose formatting you need to copy with the mouse or using the keyboard, click the Copy style icon on the Home tab of the top toolbar (the mouse pointer will look like this ), select the required autoshape to apply the same formatting. Adjust the autoshape settings To align and arrange autoshapes, use the right-click menu. The menu options are: Cut, Copy, Paste - standard options which are used to cut or copy the selected text/object and paste the previously cut/copied text passage or object to the current cursor position. Arrange is used to bring the selected autoshape to foreground, send it to background, move forward or backward as well as group or ungroup shapes to perform operations with several of them at once. To learn more on how to arrange objects, please refer to this page. Align is used to align the shape to the left, in the center, to the right, at the top, in the middle, at the bottom. To learn more on how to align objects, please refer to this page. Rotate is used to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the shape horizontally or vertically. Assign Macro is used to provide a quick and easy access to a macro within a spreadsheet by assigning a macro to any shape. Once you assign a macro, the shape appears as a button control and you can run the macro whenever you click it. To learn more, please refer to the Assign a Macro to a Shape section of this guide. Save as picture is used to save the shape as a picture on your hard drive. Edit Points is used to customize or to change the curvature of your shape. To activate a shape’s editable anchor points, right-click the shape and choose Edit Points from the menu or click the Edit shape > Edit points option on the right panel. The black squares that become active are the points where two lines meet, and the red line outlines the shape. Click and drag it to reposition the point, and to change the shape outline. Once you click the anchor point, two blue lines with white squares at the ends will appear. These are Bezier handles that allow you to create a curve and to change a curve’s smoothness. As long as the anchor points are active, you can add and delete them. To add a point to a shape, hold Ctrl and click the position where you want to add an anchor point. To delete a point, hold Ctrl and click the unnecessary point. Shape Advanced Settings is used to open the 'Shape - Advanced Settings' window. Some of the autoshape settings can be changed using the Shape settings tab on the right sidebar that will open if you select the inserted autoshape with the mouse and click the Shape settings icon. The following settings can be changed: Fill - use this section to select the autoshape fill. You can choose the following options: Color fill - select this option to specify a solid color to fill the inner space of the selected autoshape. Click the colored box below and select the necessary color from the available color sets or specify any color you like: Theme colors - the colors that correspond to the selected color scheme of the spreadsheet. Standard colors - the default colors set. You can also apply a custom color using two different options: Eyedropper - use this option to choose the required color by clicking it in the document. More colors - click this caption if the required color is missing among the available palettes. Select the necessary color range moving the vertical color slider and set a specific color dragging the color picker within the large square color field. Once you select a color with the color picker, the appropriate RGB and sRGB color values will be displayed in the fields on the right. You can also define a color on the base of the RGB color model by entering the corresponding numeric values into the R, G, B (red, green, blue) fields or enter the sRGB hexadecimal code into the field marked with the # sign. The selected color appears in the New preview box. If the object was previously filled with any custom color, this color is displayed in the Current box so you can compare the original and modified colors. When the color is defined, click the Add button: The custom color will be applied to the selected element and added to the Recent colors palette. Gradient fill - use this option to fill the shape with two or more fading colors. Customize your gradient fill with no constraints. Click the Shape settings icon to open the Fill menu on the right sidebar: Available menu options: Style - choose between Linear or Radial: Linear is used  when you need your colors to flow from left-to-right, top-to-bottom, or at any angle you chose in a single direction. The Direction preview window displays the selected gradient color, click the arrow to choose a preset gradient direction. Use Angle settings for a precise gradient angle. Radial is used to move from the center as it starts at a single point and emanates outward. Gradient point is a specific point for transition from one color to another. Use the Add gradient point button or slider bar to add a gradient point. You can add up to 10 gradient points. Each next gradient point added will in no way affect the current gradient fill appearance. Use the Remove gradient point button to delete a certain gradient point. Use the slider bar to change the location of the gradient point or specify Position in percentage for precise location. To apply a color to a gradient point, click a point on the slider bar, and then click Color to choose the color you want. Picture or texture - select this option to use an image or a predefined texture as the shape background. If you wish to use an image as a background for the shape, open the Select picture dropdown menu; here, you can add an image From file by selecting it on your computer hard disk drive, From URL by inserting the appropriate URL address into the opened window, or From storage by selecting the required image stored on your portal. If you wish to use a texture as the shape background, open the From texture menu and select the necessary texture preset. Currently, the following textures are available: canvas, carton, dark fabric, grain, granite, grey paper, knit, leather, brown paper, papyrus, wood. In case the selected Picture has less or more dimensions than the autoshape has, you can choose the Stretch or Tile setting from the dropdown list. The Stretch option allows you to adjust the size of the image to fit the autoshape so that it could fill all the space completely. The Tile option allows you to display only a part of the bigger image keeping its original dimensions or repeat the smaller image keeping its original dimensions over the autoshape surface so that it could fill the space completely. Note: any selected Texture preset fills the space completely, but you can apply the Stretch effect if necessary. Pattern - select this option to fill the shape with a two-colored design composed of regularly repeated elements. Pattern - select one of the predefined designs from the menu. Foreground color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern elements. Background color - click this color box to change the color of the pattern background. No fill - select this option if you don't want to use any fill. Opacity - use this section to set the Opacity level by dragging the slider or entering the percent value manually. The default value is 100%. It means full opacity. The 0% value means full transparency. Line - use this section to change the width, color or type of the autoshape line. To change the line width, select one of the available options from the Size dropdown list. The available options are: 0.5 pt, 1 pt, 1.5 pt, 2.25 pt, 3 pt, 4.5 pt, 6 pt. Alternatively, select the No Line option if you don't want to use any line. To change the line color, click on the colored box below and select the necessary color. To change the line type, select the necessary option from the corresponding dropdown list (a solid line is applied by default, you can change it to one of the available dashed lines). To change the line opacity, enter the required value manually or use the corresponding slider bar. Rotation is used to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise as well as to flip the shape horizontally or vertically. Click one of the buttons: to rotate the shape by 90 degrees counterclockwise to rotate the shape by 90 degrees clockwise to flip the shape horizontally (left to right) to flip the shape vertically (upside down) Edit shape - use this section to edit the shape points or to replace the current autoshape with another one selected from the dropdown list. Edit points is used to customize or to change the curvature of your shape. Once you click the anchor point, two blue lines with white squares at the ends will appear. These are Bezier handles that allow you to create a curve and to change a curve’s smoothness. As long as the anchor points are active, you can add and delete them. To add a point to a shape, hold Ctrl and click the position where you want to add an anchor point. To delete a point, hold Ctrl and click the unnecessary point. Change shape is used to replace the current autoshape. Choose another autoshape from the dropdown list. Shadow - open this menu to choose one of the preset shadow styles used for the shape. No Shadow - uncheck this menu point to display a shadow, and vice versa. Color - choose one of the available colors either on the Theme colors or the Standard colors palette; use the Eyedropper tool to copy color from other objects in the document; or click the More colors menu item to create a custom color. Adjust Shadow - create a custom shadow using the following sliders: Transparency - adjust the transparency of the shadow. Size - adjust the size of the shadow. Angle - adjust the angle of the shadow relative to its object. Distance - adjust the distance of the shadow from its object. Adjust shape advanced settings To change the advanced settings of the autoshape, use the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar. The 'Shape - Advanced Settings' window will open: The Size tab contains the following parameters: Width and Height - use these options to change the width and/or height of the autoshape. If the Constant proportions button is clicked (in this case it looks like this ), the width and height will be changed together preserving the original shape aspect ratio. The Rotation tab contains the following parameters: Angle - use this option to rotate the shape by an exactly specified angle. Enter the necessary value measured in degrees into the field or adjust it using the arrows on the right. Flipped - check the Horizontally box to flip the shape horizontally (left to right) or check the Vertically box to flip the shape vertically (upside down). The Weights & Arrows tab contains the following parameters: Line Style - this option group allows you to specify the following parameters: Cap Type - this option allows you to set the style of the end of the line, therefore it can be applied only to the shapes with an open outline, such as lines, polylines etc.: Flat - the end points will be flat. Round - the end points will be rounded. Square - the end points will be square. Join Type - this option allows you to set the style of the intersection of two lines, for example, it can affect a polyline or the corners of a triangle or rectangle outline: Round - the corner will be rounded. Bevel - the corner will be cut off angularly. Miter - the corner will be pointed. It goes well to shapes with sharp angles. Note: the effect will be more noticeable if you use a large outline width. Arrows - this option group is available if a shape from the Lines shape group is selected. It allows you to set the arrow Start and End Style and Size by selecting the appropriate option from the dropdown lists. The Text Box tab allows you to Resize shape to fit text, Allow text to overflow shape or change the Top, Bottom, Left and Right internal margins of the autoshape (i.e. the distance between the text within the shape and the autoshape borders). Note: this tab is only available if text is added within the autoshape, otherwise the tab is disabled. The Columns tab allows you to add columns of text within the autoshape specifying the necessary Number of columns (up to 16) and Spacing between columns. Once you click OK, the text that already exists or any other text you enter within the autoshape will appear in columns and will flow from one column to another one. The Cell Snapping tab contains the following parameters: Move and size with cells - this option allows you to snap the shape to the cell behind it. If the cell moves (e.g. if you insert or delete some rows/columns), the shape will be moved together with the cell. If you increase or decrease the width or height of the cell, the shape will change its size as well. Move but don't size with cells - this option allows you to snap the shape to the cell behind it preventing the shape from being resized. If the cell moves, the shape will be moved together with the cell, but if you change the cell size, the shape dimensions remain unchanged. Don't move or size with cells - this option allows you to prevent the shape from being moved or resized if the cell position or size was changed. The Alternative Text tab allows you to specify the Title and Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information the shape contains. Insert and format text within the autoshape To insert a text into the autoshape, select the shape with the mouse and start typing your text. The text will become part of the autoshape (when you move or rotate the shape, the text also moves or rotates with it). All the formatting options you can apply to the text within the autoshape are listed here. Join autoshapes using connectors You can connect autoshapes using lines with connection points to demonstrate dependencies between the objects (e.g. if you want to create a flowchart). To do that, click the Shape icon on the Insert tab of the top toolbar, select the Lines group from the menu, click the necessary shape within the selected group (excepting the last three shapes which are not connectors, namely Curve, Scribble and Freeform), hover the mouse cursor over the first autoshape and click one of the connection points that appear on the shape outline, drag the mouse cursor towards the second autoshape and click the necessary connection point on its outline. If you move the joined autoshapes, the connector remains attached to the shapes and moves together with them. You can also detach the connector from the shapes and then attach it to any other connection points. Assign a Macro to a Shape You can provide a quick and easy access to a macro within a spreadsheet by assigning a macro to any shape. Once you assign a macro, the shape appears as a button control and you can run the macro whenever you click it. To assign a macro: Right-click the shape to assign a macro to and choose the Assign Macro option from the drop-down menu. The Assign Macro dialogue will open Choose a macro from the list, or type in the macro name, and click OK to confirm." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertChart.htm", "title": "Insert charts", - "body": "Insert a recommended chart The easiest way to insert a chart in the Spreadsheet Editor is to use the Recommended Chart tool which suggests using certain types of charts depending on the selected data as well as displays preview for all types of charts. Select the cell range that contain the data you wish to use for the chart. Switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar. Click the Recommended Chart icon on the top toolbar. Switch between the recommended chart types to see how the chart will look like. You can also use tabs on the left to preview other chart types. When the chart type is selected, click OK. Insert and adjust a chart manually To insert a chart and manually adjust its parameters, Select the cell range that contain the data you wish to use for the chart. Switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar. Click the Chart icon on the top toolbar. Select the needed chart type from the available ones: Column Charts Clustered column Stacked column 100% stacked column 3-D Clustered Column 3-D Stacked Column 3-D 100% stacked column 3-D Column Line Charts Line Stacked line 100% stacked line Line with markers Stacked line with markers 100% stacked line with markers 3-D Line Pie Charts Pie Doughnut 3-D Pie Bar Charts Clustered bar Stacked bar 100% stacked bar 3-D clustered bar 3-D stacked bar 3-D 100% stacked bar Area Charts Area Stacked area 100% stacked area Stock Charts XY (Scatter) Charts Scatter Stacked bar Scatter with smooth lines and markers Scatter with smooth lines Scatter with straight lines and markers Scatter with straight lines Radar Charts Radar Radar with markers Filled radar Combo Charts Clustered column - line Clustered column - line on secondary axis Stacked area - clustered column Custom combination After that the chart will be added to the worksheet. Note: ONLYOFFICE Spreadsheet Editor supports the following types of charts that were created with third-party editors: Pyramid, Bar (Pyramid), Horizontal/Vertical Cylinders, Horizontal/Vertical Cones. You can open the file containing such a chart and modify it using the available chart editing tools. Adjust the chart settings Now you can change the settings of the inserted chart. To change the chart type, Select the chart with the mouse. Click the Chart settings icon on the right sidebar. Open the Style drop-down list below and select the style which suits you best. Open the Change type drop-down list and select the type you need. Click the Switch row/column option to change the positioning of chart rows and columns. The selected chart type and style will be changed. Additionally, 3D Rotation settings are available for 3D charts: X rotation - set the required value for the X axis rotation using the keyboard or via the Left and Right arrows to the right. Y rotation - set the required value for the Y axis rotation using the keyboard or via the Up and Down arrows to the right. Perspective - set the required value for depth rotation using the keyboard or via the Narrow field of view and Widen field of view arrows to the right. Right Angle Axis - is used to set the right angle axis view. Autoscale - check this box to autoscale the depth and height values of the chart, or uncheck this box to set the depth and height values manually. Depth (% of base) - set the required depth value using the keyboard or via the arrows. Height (% of base) - set the required height value using the keyboard or via the arrows. Default Rotation - set the 3D parameters to their default. Please note that you cannot edit each element of the chart; the settings will be applied to the chart as a whole. To edit chart data: Click the Select Data button on the right-side panel. Use the Chart data dialog to manage Chart data range, Legend entries (series), Horizontal (category) axis label and Switch row/column. Chart data range - select data for your chart. Click the icon on the right of the Chart data range box to select data range. Legend entries (series) - add, edit, or remove legend entries. Type or select series name for legend entries. In Legend entries (series), click Add button. In Edit series, type a new legend entry or click the icon on the right of the Series name box. Horizontal (category) axis labels - change text for category labels. In Horizontal (category) axis labels, click Edit. In Axis label range, type the labels you want to add or click the icon on the right of the Axis label range box to select data range. Switch row/column - rearrange the worksheet data that is configured in the chart not in the way that you want it. Switch rows to columns to display data on a different axis. Click OK button to apply the changes and close the window. Click Show advanced settings to change other settings such as Layout, Vertical axis, Secondary vertical axis, Horizontal axis, Secondary horizontal axis, Cell snapping and Alternative text. The Layout tab allows you to change the layout of chart elements. Specify the Chart title position in regard to your chart by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to display no chart title, Overlay to overlay and center the title in the plot area, No overlay to display the title above the plot area. Specify the Legend position in regard to your chart by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to display no legend, Bottom to display the legend and align it to the bottom of the plot area, Top to display the legend and align it to the top of the plot area, Right to display the legend and align it to the right of the plot area, Left to display the legend and align it to the left of the plot area, Left overlay to overlay and center the legend to the left in the plot area, Right overlay to overlay and center the legend to the right in the plot area. Specify the Data labels (i.e., text labels that represent exact values of data points) parameters: Specify the Data labels position relative to the data points by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list. The available options vary depending on the selected chart type. For Column/Bar charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Inner bottom, Inner top, Outer top. For Line/XY (Scatter)/Stock charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Left, Right, Top, Bottom. For Pie charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Fit to width, Inner top, Outer top. For Area charts as well as for 3D Column, Line, Radar, and Bar charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center. Select the data you wish to include into your labels checking the corresponding boxes: Series name, Category name, Value, Enter a character (comma, semicolon, etc.) you wish to use for separating several labels into the Data labels separator entry field. Lines - is used to choose a line style for Line/XY (Scatter) charts. You can choose one of the following options: Straight to use straight lines between data points, Smooth to use smooth curves between data points, or None to not display lines. Markers - is used to specify whether the markers should be displayed (if the box is checked) or not (if the box is unchecked) for Line/XY (Scatter) charts. Note: the Lines and Markers options are available for Line charts and XY (Scatter) charts only. The Vertical axis tab allows you to change the parameters of the vertical axis also referred to as the values axis or y-axis which displays numeric values. Note that the vertical axis will be the category axis which displays text labels for the Bar charts, therefore in this case the Vertical axis tab options will correspond to the ones described in the next section. For the XY (Scatter) charts, both axes are value axes. Note: the Axis settings and Gridlines sections will be disabled for Pie charts since charts of this type have no axes and gridlines. Select Hide to hide vertical axis in the chart, leave it unchecked to have vertical axis displayed. Specify Title orientation by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to display no vertical axis title, Rotated to display the title from bottom to top to the left of the vertical axis, Horizontal to display the title horizontally to the left of the vertical axis. Minimum value - is used to specify the lowest value displayed at the vertical axis start. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the minimum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right. Maximum value - is used to specify the highest value displayed at the vertical axis end. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the maximum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right. Axis crosses - is used to specify a point on the vertical axis where the horizontal axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the axes intersection point value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the axes intersection point at the Minimum/Maximum Value on the vertical axis. Display units - is used to determine the representation of the numeric values along the vertical axis. This option can be useful if you're working with great numbers and wish the values on the axis to be displayed in a more compact and readable way (e.g. you can represent 50 000 as 50 by using the Thousands display units). Select desired units from the drop-down list: Hundreds, Thousands, 10 000, 100 000, Millions, 10 000 000, 100 000 000, Billions, Trillions, or choose the None option to return to the default units. Values in reverse order - is used to display values in the opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, the lowest value is at the bottom and the highest value is at the top of the axis. When the box is checked, the values are ordered from top to bottom. Logarithmic scale - is used to enable logarithmic scaling to the Base that is determined by the user. The Tick Options section allows adjusting the appearance of tick marks on the vertical scale. Major tick marks are the larger scale divisions which can have labels displaying numeric values. Minor tick marks are the scale subdivisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed if the corresponding option is set on the Layout tab. The Major/minor type drop-down lists contain the following placement options: None to display no major/minor tick marks, Cross to display major/minor tick marks on both sides of the axis, In to display major/minor tick marks inside the axis, Out to display major/minor tick marks outside the axis. The Label options section allows adjusting the appearance of major tick mark labels which display values. To specify a Label position in regard to the vertical axis, select the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to display no tick mark labels, Low to display tick mark labels to the left of the plot area, High to display tick mark labels to the right of the plot area, Next to axis to display tick mark labels next to the axis. To specify a Label format click the Label Format button and choose a category as it deems appropriate. Available label format categories: General Number Scientific Accounting Currency Date Time Percentage Fraction Text Custom Label format options vary depending on the selected category. For more information on changing number format, go to this page. Check Linked to source to keep number formatting from the data source in the chart. Note: Secondary axes are supported in Combo charts only. Secondary axes are useful in Combo charts when data series vary considerably or mixed types of data are used to plot a chart. Secondary Axes make it easier to read and understand a combo chart. The Secondary vertical/horizontal axis tab appears when you choose an appropriate data series for a combo chart. All the settings and options on the Secondary vertical/horizontal axis tab are the same as the settings on the Vertical/Horizontal Axis. For a detailed description of the Vertical/horizontal axis options, see description above/below. The Horizontal axis tab allows you to change the parameters of the horizontal axis also referred to as the categories axis or x-axis which displays text labels. Note that the horizontal axis will be the value axis which displays numeric values for the Bar charts, therefore in this case the Horizontal axis tab options will correspond to the ones described in the previous section. For the XY (Scatter) charts, both axes are value axes. Select Hide to hide horizontal axis in the chart, leave it unchecked to have horizontal axis displayed. Specify Title orientation by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None when you don’t want to display a horizontal axis title, No overlay  to display the title below the horizontal axis, Gridlines is used to specify the Horizontal gridlines to display by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None,  Major, Minor, or Major and minor. Axis crosses - is used to specify a point on the horizontal axis where the vertical axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the axes intersection point value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the axes intersection point at the Minimum/maximum value (that corresponds to the first and last category) on the horizontal axis. Axis position - is used to specify where the axis text labels should be placed: On tick marks or Between tick marks. Values in reverse order - is used to display categories in the opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, categories are displayed from left to right. When the box is checked, the categories are ordered from right to left. The Tick Options section allows adjusting the appearance of tick marks on the horizontal scale. Major tick marks are the larger divisions which can have labels displaying category values. Minor tick marks are the smaller divisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed if the corresponding option is set on the Layout tab. You can adjust the following tick mark parameters: Major/minor type - is used to specify the following placement options: None to display no major/minor tick marks, Cross to display major/minor tick marks on both sides of the axis, In to display major/minor tick marks inside the axis, Out to display major/minor tick marks outside the axis. Interval between marks - is used to specify how many categories should be displayed between two adjacent tick marks. The Label options section allows adjusting the appearance of labels which display categories. Label position - is used to specify where the labels should be placed in regard to the horizontal axis. Select the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to display no category labels, Low to display category labels at the bottom of the plot area, High to display category labels at the top of the plot area, Next to axis to display category labels next to the axis. Axis label distance - is used to specify how closely the labels should be placed to the axis. You can specify the necessary value in the entry field. The more the value you set, the more the distance between the axis and labels is. Interval between labels - is used to specify how often the labels should be displayed. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case labels are displayed for every category. You can select the Manual option from the drop-down list and specify the necessary value in the entry field on the right. For example, enter 2 to display labels for every other category etc. To specify a Label format click the Label Format button and choose a category as it deems appropriate. Available label format categories: General Number Scientific Accounting Currency Date Time Percentage Fraction Text Custom Label format options vary depending on the selected category. For more information on changing number format, go to this page. Check Linked to source to keep number formatting from the data source in the chart. The Cell snapping tab contains the following parameters: Move and size with cells - this option allows you to snap the chart to the cell behind it. If the cell moves (e.g. if you insert or delete some rows/columns), the chart will be moved together with the cell. If you increase or decrease the width or height of the cell, the chart will change its size as well. Move but don't size with cells - this option allows to snap the chart to the cell behind it preventing the chart from being resized. If the cell moves, the chart will be moved together with the cell, but if you change the cell size, the chart dimensions remain unchanged. Don't move or size with cells - this option allows to prevent the chart from being moved or resized if the cell position or size was changed. The Alternative text tab allows to specify the Title and the Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information the chart contains. Edit chart elements To edit the chart Title, select the default text with the mouse and type in your own one instead. To change the font formatting within text elements, such as the chart title, axes titles, legend entries, data labels etc., select the necessary text element by left-clicking it. Then use icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar to change the font type, style, size, or color. When the chart is selected, the Shape settings icon is also available on the right, since the shape is used as a background for the chart. You can click this icon to open the Shape settings tab on the right sidebar and adjust the shape Fill and Line. Note that you cannot change the shape type. Using the Shape settings tab on the right panel you can not only adjust the chart area itself, but also change the chart elements, such as the plot area, data series, chart title, legend, etc. and apply different fill types to them. Select the chart element by clicking it with the left mouse button and choose the preferred fill type: solid color, gradient, texture or picture, pattern. Specify the fill parameters and set the Opacity level if necessary. When you select a vertical or horizontal axis or gridlines, the stroke settings are only available on the Shape Settings tab: color, width, type, and opacity. For more details on how to work with shape colors, fills and stroke, please refer to this page. Note: the Show shadow option is also available on the Shape settings tab, but it is disabled for chart elements. If you need to resize chart elements, left-click to select the needed element and drag one of 8 white squares located along the perimeter of the element. To change the position of the element, left-click on it, make sure your cursor changed to , hold the left mouse button and drag the element to the needed position. To delete a chart element, select it by left-clicking and press the Delete key on the keyboard. You can also rotate 3D charts using the mouse. Left-click within the plot area and hold the mouse button. Drag the cursor without releasing the mouse button to change the 3D chart orientation. If necessary, you can change the chart size and position. To delete the inserted chart, click it and press the Delete key. Assign a Macro to a Chart You can provide a quick and easy access to a macro within a spreadsheet by assigning a macro to any chart. Once you assign a macro, the chart appears as a button control and you can run the macro whenever you click it. To assign a macro: Right-click the chart to assign a macro to and choose the Assign Macro option from the drop-down menu. The Assign Macro dialogue will open Choose a macro from the list, or type in the macro name, and click OK to confirm. Once a macro is assigned, you can still select the chart to perform other operations by left-clicking on chart surface. Using sparklines ONLYOFFICE Spreadsheet Editor supports Sparklines. Sparklines are small charts that fit into a cell, and are an efficient data visualization tool. For more information about how to create, edit and format sparklines, please see our Insert Sparklines guidelines." + "body": "Insert a recommended chart The easiest way to insert a chart in the Spreadsheet Editor is to use the Recommended Chart tool which suggests using certain types of charts depending on the selected data as well as displays preview for all types of charts. Select the cell range that contain the data you wish to use for the chart. Switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar. Click the Recommended Chart icon on the top toolbar. Switch between the recommended chart types to see how the chart will look like. You can also use tabs on the left to preview other chart types. When the chart type is selected, click OK. Insert and adjust a chart manually To insert a chart and manually adjust its parameters, Select the cell range that contain the data you wish to use for the chart. Switch to the Insert tab of the top toolbar. Click the Chart icon on the top toolbar. Select the needed chart type from the available ones: Column Charts Clustered column Stacked column 100% stacked column 3-D Clustered Column 3-D Stacked Column 3-D 100% stacked column 3-D Column Line Charts Line Stacked line 100% stacked line Line with markers Stacked line with markers 100% stacked line with markers 3-D Line Pie Charts Pie Doughnut 3-D Pie Bar Charts Clustered bar Stacked bar 100% stacked bar 3-D clustered bar 3-D stacked bar 3-D 100% stacked bar Area Charts Area Stacked area 100% stacked area Stock Charts XY (Scatter) Charts Scatter Stacked bar Scatter with smooth lines and markers Scatter with smooth lines Scatter with straight lines and markers Scatter with straight lines Radar Charts Radar Radar with markers Filled radar Combo Charts Clustered column - line Clustered column - line on secondary axis Stacked area - clustered column Custom combination After that the chart will be added to the worksheet. Note: ONLYOFFICE Spreadsheet Editor supports the following types of charts that were created with third-party editors: Pyramid, Bar (Pyramid), Horizontal/Vertical Cylinders, Horizontal/Vertical Cones. You can open the file containing such a chart and modify it using the available chart editing tools. The following types are supported for opening only: Histogram, Waterfall, Funnel. Adjust the chart settings Now you can change the settings of the inserted chart. To change the chart type, Select the chart with the mouse. Click the Chart settings icon on the right sidebar. Open the Style drop-down list below and select the style which suits you best. Open the Change type drop-down list and select the type you need. Click the Switch row/column option to change the positioning of chart rows and columns. The selected chart type and style will be changed. Additionally, 3D Rotation settings are available for 3D charts: X rotation - set the required value for the X axis rotation using the keyboard or via the Left and Right arrows to the right. Y rotation - set the required value for the Y axis rotation using the keyboard or via the Up and Down arrows to the right. Perspective - set the required value for depth rotation using the keyboard or via the Narrow field of view and Widen field of view arrows to the right. Right Angle Axis - is used to set the right angle axis view. Autoscale - check this box to autoscale the depth and height values of the chart, or uncheck this box to set the depth and height values manually. Depth (% of base) - set the required depth value using the keyboard or via the arrows. Height (% of base) - set the required height value using the keyboard or via the arrows. Default Rotation - set the 3D parameters to their default. Please note that you cannot edit each element of the chart; the settings will be applied to the chart as a whole. To edit chart data: Click the Select Data button on the right-side panel. Use the Chart data dialog to manage Chart data range, Legend entries (series), Horizontal (category) axis label and Switch row/column. Chart data range - select data for your chart. Click the icon on the right of the Chart data range box to select data range. Legend entries (series) - add, edit, or remove legend entries. Type or select series name for legend entries. In Legend entries (series), click Add button. In Edit series, type a new legend entry or click the icon on the right of the Series name box. Horizontal (category) axis labels - change text for category labels. In Horizontal (category) axis labels, click Edit. In Axis label range, type the labels you want to add or click the icon on the right of the Axis label range box to select data range. Switch row/column - rearrange the worksheet data that is configured in the chart not in the way that you want it. Switch rows to columns to display data on a different axis. Click OK button to apply the changes and close the window. Click Show advanced settings to change other settings such as Layout, Vertical axis, Secondary vertical axis, Horizontal axis, Secondary horizontal axis, Cell snapping and Alternative text. The Layout tab allows you to change the layout of chart elements. Specify the Chart title position in regard to your chart by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to display no chart title, Overlay to overlay and center the title in the plot area, No overlay to display the title above the plot area. Specify the Legend position in regard to your chart by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to display no legend, Bottom to display the legend and align it to the bottom of the plot area, Top to display the legend and align it to the top of the plot area, Right to display the legend and align it to the right of the plot area, Left to display the legend and align it to the left of the plot area, Left overlay to overlay and center the legend to the left in the plot area, Right overlay to overlay and center the legend to the right in the plot area. Specify the Data labels (i.e., text labels that represent exact values of data points) parameters: Specify the Data labels position relative to the data points by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list. The available options vary depending on the selected chart type. For Column/Bar charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Inner bottom, Inner top, Outer top. For Line/XY (Scatter)/Stock charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Left, Right, Top, Bottom. For Pie charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center, Fit to width, Inner top, Outer top. For Area charts as well as for 3D Column, Line, Radar, and Bar charts, you can choose the following options: None, Center. Select the data you wish to include into your labels checking the corresponding boxes: Series name, Category name, Value, Enter a character (comma, semicolon, etc.) you wish to use for separating several labels into the Data labels separator entry field. Lines - is used to choose a line style for Line/XY (Scatter) charts. You can choose one of the following options: Straight to use straight lines between data points, Smooth to use smooth curves between data points, or None to not display lines. Markers - is used to specify whether the markers should be displayed (if the box is checked) or not (if the box is unchecked) for Line/XY (Scatter) charts. Note: the Lines and Markers options are available for Line charts and XY (Scatter) charts only. Trendline options - use the Display equation on chart option for the equations to appear on the diagram. This option is available for diagrams that include trendlines. The Vertical axis tab allows you to change the parameters of the vertical axis also referred to as the values axis or y-axis which displays numeric values. Note that the vertical axis will be the category axis which displays text labels for the Bar charts, therefore in this case the Vertical axis tab options will correspond to the ones described in the next section. For the XY (Scatter) charts, both axes are value axes. Note: the Axis settings and Gridlines sections will be disabled for Pie charts since charts of this type have no axes and gridlines. Select Hide to hide vertical axis in the chart, leave it unchecked to have vertical axis displayed. Specify Title orientation by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to display no vertical axis title, Rotated to display the title from bottom to top to the left of the vertical axis, Horizontal to display the title horizontally to the left of the vertical axis. Minimum value - is used to specify the lowest value displayed at the vertical axis start. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the minimum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right. Maximum value - is used to specify the highest value displayed at the vertical axis end. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the maximum value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Fixed option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right. Axis crosses - is used to specify a point on the vertical axis where the horizontal axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the axes intersection point value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the axes intersection point at the Minimum/Maximum Value on the vertical axis. Display units - is used to determine the representation of the numeric values along the vertical axis. This option can be useful if you're working with great numbers and wish the values on the axis to be displayed in a more compact and readable way (e.g. you can represent 50 000 as 50 by using the Thousands display units). Select desired units from the drop-down list: Hundreds, Thousands, 10 000, 100 000, Millions, 10 000 000, 100 000 000, Billions, Trillions, or choose the None option to return to the default units. Values in reverse order - is used to display values in the opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, the lowest value is at the bottom and the highest value is at the top of the axis. When the box is checked, the values are ordered from top to bottom. Logarithmic scale - is used to enable logarithmic scaling to the Base that is determined by the user. The Tick Options section allows adjusting the appearance of tick marks on the vertical scale. Major tick marks are the larger scale divisions which can have labels displaying numeric values. Minor tick marks are the scale subdivisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed if the corresponding option is set on the Layout tab. The Major/minor type drop-down lists contain the following placement options: None to display no major/minor tick marks, Cross to display major/minor tick marks on both sides of the axis, In to display major/minor tick marks inside the axis, Out to display major/minor tick marks outside the axis. The Label options section allows adjusting the appearance of major tick mark labels which display values. To specify a Label position in regard to the vertical axis, select the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to display no tick mark labels, Low to display tick mark labels to the left of the plot area, High to display tick mark labels to the right of the plot area, Next to axis to display tick mark labels next to the axis. To specify a Label format click the Label Format button and choose a category as it deems appropriate. Available label format categories: General Number Scientific Accounting Currency Date Time Percentage Fraction Text Custom Label format options vary depending on the selected category. For more information on changing number format, go to this page. Check Linked to source to keep number formatting from the data source in the chart. Note: Secondary axes are supported in Combo charts only. Secondary axes are useful in Combo charts when data series vary considerably or mixed types of data are used to plot a chart. Secondary Axes make it easier to read and understand a combo chart. The Secondary vertical/horizontal axis tab appears when you choose an appropriate data series for a combo chart. All the settings and options on the Secondary vertical/horizontal axis tab are the same as the settings on the Vertical/Horizontal Axis. For a detailed description of the Vertical/horizontal axis options, see description above/below. The Horizontal axis tab allows you to change the parameters of the horizontal axis also referred to as the categories axis or x-axis which displays text labels. Note that the horizontal axis will be the value axis which displays numeric values for the Bar charts, therefore in this case the Horizontal axis tab options will correspond to the ones described in the previous section. For the XY (Scatter) charts, both axes are value axes. Select Hide to hide horizontal axis in the chart, leave it unchecked to have horizontal axis displayed. Specify Title orientation by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None when you don’t want to display a horizontal axis title, No overlay  to display the title below the horizontal axis, Gridlines is used to specify the Horizontal gridlines to display by selecting the necessary option from the drop-down list: None,  Major, Minor, or Major and minor. Axis crosses - is used to specify a point on the horizontal axis where the vertical axis should cross it. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case the axes intersection point value is calculated automatically depending on the selected data range. You can select the Value option from the drop-down list and specify a different value in the entry field on the right, or set the axes intersection point at the Minimum/maximum value (that corresponds to the first and last category) on the horizontal axis. Axis position - is used to specify where the axis text labels should be placed: On tick marks or Between tick marks. Values in reverse order - is used to display categories in the opposite direction. When the box is unchecked, categories are displayed from left to right. When the box is checked, the categories are ordered from right to left. The Tick Options section allows adjusting the appearance of tick marks on the horizontal scale. Major tick marks are the larger divisions which can have labels displaying category values. Minor tick marks are the smaller divisions which are placed between the major tick marks and have no labels. Tick marks also define where gridlines can be displayed if the corresponding option is set on the Layout tab. You can adjust the following tick mark parameters: Major/minor type - is used to specify the following placement options: None to display no major/minor tick marks, Cross to display major/minor tick marks on both sides of the axis, In to display major/minor tick marks inside the axis, Out to display major/minor tick marks outside the axis. Interval between marks - is used to specify how many categories should be displayed between two adjacent tick marks. The Label options section allows adjusting the appearance of labels which display categories. Label position - is used to specify where the labels should be placed in regard to the horizontal axis. Select the necessary option from the drop-down list: None to display no category labels, Low to display category labels at the bottom of the plot area, High to display category labels at the top of the plot area, Next to axis to display category labels next to the axis. Axis label distance - is used to specify how closely the labels should be placed to the axis. You can specify the necessary value in the entry field. The more the value you set, the more the distance between the axis and labels is. Interval between labels - is used to specify how often the labels should be displayed. The Auto option is selected by default, in this case labels are displayed for every category. You can select the Manual option from the drop-down list and specify the necessary value in the entry field on the right. For example, enter 2 to display labels for every other category etc. To specify a Label format click the Label Format button and choose a category as it deems appropriate. Available label format categories: General Number Scientific Accounting Currency Date Time Percentage Fraction Text Custom Label format options vary depending on the selected category. For more information on changing number format, go to this page. Check Linked to source to keep number formatting from the data source in the chart. The Cell snapping tab contains the following parameters: Move and size with cells - this option allows you to snap the chart to the cell behind it. If the cell moves (e.g. if you insert or delete some rows/columns), the chart will be moved together with the cell. If you increase or decrease the width or height of the cell, the chart will change its size as well. Move but don't size with cells - this option allows to snap the chart to the cell behind it preventing the chart from being resized. If the cell moves, the chart will be moved together with the cell, but if you change the cell size, the chart dimensions remain unchanged. Don't move or size with cells - this option allows to prevent the chart from being moved or resized if the cell position or size was changed. The Alternative text tab allows to specify the Title and the Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information the chart contains. Edit chart elements To edit the chart Title, select the default text with the mouse and type in your own one instead. To change the font formatting within text elements, such as the chart title, axes titles, legend entries, data labels etc., select the necessary text element by left-clicking it. Then use icons on the Home tab of the top toolbar to change the font type, style, size, or color. When the chart is selected, the Shape settings icon is also available on the right, since the shape is used as a background for the chart. You can click this icon to open the Shape settings tab on the right sidebar and adjust the shape Fill and Line. Note that you cannot change the shape type. Using the Shape settings tab on the right panel you can not only adjust the chart area itself, but also change the chart elements, such as the plot area, data series, chart title, legend, etc. and apply different fill types to them. Select the chart element by clicking it with the left mouse button and choose the preferred fill type: solid color, gradient, texture or picture, pattern. Specify the fill parameters and set the Opacity level if necessary. When you select a vertical or horizontal axis or gridlines, the stroke settings are only available on the Shape Settings tab: color, width, type, and opacity. For more details on how to work with shape colors, fills and stroke, please refer to this page. Note: the Show shadow option is also available on the Shape settings tab, but it is disabled for chart elements. If you need to resize chart elements, left-click to select the needed element and drag one of 8 white squares located along the perimeter of the element. To change the position of the element, left-click on it, make sure your cursor changed to , hold the left mouse button and drag the element to the needed position. To delete a chart element, select it by left-clicking and press the Delete key on the keyboard. You can also rotate 3D charts using the mouse. Left-click within the plot area and hold the mouse button. Drag the cursor without releasing the mouse button to change the 3D chart orientation. If necessary, you can change the chart size and position. To delete the inserted chart, click it and press the Delete key. Assign a Macro to a Chart You can provide a quick and easy access to a macro within a spreadsheet by assigning a macro to any chart. Once you assign a macro, the chart appears as a button control and you can run the macro whenever you click it. To assign a macro: Right-click the chart to assign a macro to and choose the Assign Macro option from the drop-down menu. The Assign Macro dialogue will open Choose a macro from the list, or type in the macro name, and click OK to confirm. Once a macro is assigned, you can still select the chart to perform other operations by left-clicking on chart surface. Using sparklines ONLYOFFICE Spreadsheet Editor supports Sparklines. Sparklines are small charts that fit into a cell, and are an efficient data visualization tool. For more information about how to create, edit and format sparklines, please see our Insert Sparklines guidelines." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertDeleteCells.htm", @@ -2638,7 +2648,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertFunction.htm", "title": "Insert functions", - "body": "The ability to perform basic calculations is the principal reason for using the Spreadsheet Editor. Some of them are performed automatically when you select a cell range in your spreadsheet: Average is used to analyze the selected cell range and find the average value. Count is used to count the number of the selected cells with values ignoring the empty cells. Min is used to analyze the range of data and find the smallest number. Max is used to analyze the range of data and find the largest number. Sum is used to add all the numbers in the selected range ignoring the empty cells or those contaning text. The results of these calculations are displayed in the right lower corner on the status bar. You can manage the status bar by right-clicking on it and choosing only those functions to display that you need. To perform any other calculations, you can insert the required formula manually using the common mathematical operators or insert a predefined formula - Function. The abilities to work with Functions are accessible from both the Home and Formula tab or by pressing Shift+F3 key combination. On the Home tab, you can use the Insert function button to add one of the most commonly used functions (SUM, AVERAGE, MIN, MAX, COUNT) or open the Insert Function window that contains all the available functions classified by category. Use the search box to find the exact function by its name. On the Formula tab you can use the following buttons: Function - to open the Insert Function window that contains all the available functions classified by category. Autosum - to quickly access the SUM, MIN, MAX, COUNT functions. When you select a functions from this group, it automatically performs calculations for all cells in the column above the selected cell so that you don't need to enter arguments. Recently used - to quickly access 10 recently used functions. Financial, Logical, Text and data, Date and time, Lookup and references, Math and trigonometry - to quickly access functions that belongs to the corresponding categories. More functions - to access the functions from the following groups: Database, Engineering, Information and Statistical. Named ranges - to open the Name Manager, or define a new name, or paste a name as a function argument. For more details, you can refer to this page. Trace Precedents - to show arrows that indicate which cells affect the value of the selected cell. Trace Dependents - to show arrows that indicate which cells are affected by the value of the selected cell. Remove Arrows - to remove the arrows used for precedents and dependents. Click the arrow next to the Remove Arrows option to choose whether to remove all arrows, precedent arrows, or dependent arrows. Show Formulas - to show the formulas used in the cells instead of the final results of the formulas. Watch Window - to display changes in the cells that are not currently in the visible area of the worksheet. To learn more about the Watch Window, please read the following article. Calculation - to force the program to recalculate functions. How to apply functions To insert a function, Select a cell where you wish to insert a function. Proceed in one of the following ways: switch to the Formula tab and use the buttons available on the top toolbar to access a function from a specific group, then click the necessary function to open the Function Arguments wizard. You can also use the Additional option from the menu or click the Function button on the top toolbar to open the Insert Function window. switch to the Home tab, click the Insert function icon, select one of the commonly used functions (SUM, AVERAGE, MIN, MAX, COUNT) or click the Additional option to open the Insert Function window. right-click within the selected cell and select the Insert Function option from the contextual menu. click the icon before the formula bar. In the opened Insert Function window, enter its name in the search box or select the necessary function group, then choose the required function from the list and click OK. Once you click the necessary function, the Function Arguments window will open: In the opened Function Arguments window, enter the necessary values of each argument. You can enter the function arguments either manually or by clicking the icon and selecting a cell or cell range to be included as an argument. Note: generally, numeric values, logical values (TRUE, FALSE), text values (must be quoted), cell references, cell range references, names assigned to ranges and other functions can be used as function arguments. The function result will be displayed below. When all the agruments are specified, click the OK button in the Function Arguments window. To enter a function manually using the keyboard, Select a cell. Enter the equal sign (=). Each formula must begin with the equal sign (=). Enter the function name. Once you type the initial letters, the Formula Autocomplete list will be displayed. As you type, the items (formulas and names) that match the entered characters are displayed in it. If you hover the mouse pointer over a formula, a tooltip with the formula description will be displayed. You can select the necessary formula from the list and insert it by clicking it or pressing the Tab key. Enter the function arguments either manually or by dragging to select a cell range to be included as an argument. If the function requires several arguments, they must be separated by commas. Arguments must be enclosed into parentheses. The opening parenthesis '(' is added automatically if you select a function from the list. When you enter arguments, a tooltip that contains the formula syntax is also displayed. When all the agruments are specified, enter the closing parenthesis ')' and press Enter. If you enter new data or change the values used as arguments, recalculation of functions is performed automatically by default. You can force the program to recalculate functions by using the Calculation button on the Formula tab. Click the Calculation button to recalculate the entire workbook, or click the arrow below the button and choose the necessary option from the menu: Calculate workbook or Calculate current sheet. You can also use the following key combinations: F9 to recalculate the workbook, Shift +F9 to recalculate the current worksheet. Here is the list of the available functions grouped by categories: Function Category Description Functions Text and Data Functions Used to correctly display the text data in the spreadsheet. ARRAYTOTEXT; ASC; CHAR; CLEAN; CODE; CONCATENATE; CONCAT; DOLLAR; EXACT; FIND; FINDB; FIXED; LEFT; LEFTB; LEN; LENB; LOWER; MID; MIDB; NUMBERVALUE; PROPER; REPLACE; REPLACEB; REPT; RIGHT; RIGHTB; SEARCH; SEARCHB; SUBSTITUTE; T; TEXT; TEXTJOIN; TRIM; UNICHAR; UNICODE; UPPER; VALUE; TEXTBEFORE; TEXTAFTER; TEXTSPLIT Statistical Functions Used to analyze data: finding the average value, the largest or smallest values in a cell range. AVEDEV; AVERAGE; AVERAGEA; AVERAGEIF; AVERAGEIFS; BETADIST; BETA.DIST; BETA.INV; BETAINV; BINOMDIST; BINOM.DIST; BINOM.DIST.RANGE; BINOM.INV; CHIDIST; CHIINV; CHISQ.DIST; CHISQ.DIST.RT; CHISQ.INV; CHISQ.INV.RT; CHITEST; CHISQ.TEST; CONFIDENCE; CONFIDENCE.NORM; CONFIDENCE.T; CORREL; COUNT; COUNTA; COUNBLANK; COUNTIF; COUNTIFS; COVAR; COVARIANCE.P; COVARIANCE.S; CRITBINOM; DEVSQ; EXPON.DIST; EXPONDIST; F.DIST; FDIST; F.DIST.RT; F.INV; FINV; F.INV.RT; FISHER; FISHERINV; FORECAST; FORECAST.ETS; FORECAST.ETS.CONFINT; FORECAST.ETS.SEASONALITY; FORECAST.ETS.STAT; FORECAST.LINEAR; FREQUENCY; FTEST; F.TEST; GAMMA; GAMMA.DIST; GAMMADIST; GAMMA.INV; GAMMAINV; GAMMALN; GAMMALN.PRECISE; GAUSS; GEOMEAN; GROWTH; HARMEAN; HYPGEOMDIST; HYPGEOM.DIST; INTERCEPT; KURT; LARGE; LINEST; LOGEST, LOGINV; LOGNORM.DIST; LOGNORM.INV; LOGNORMDIST; MAX; MAXA; MAXIFS; MEDIAN; MIN; MINA; MINIFS; MODE; MODE.MULT; MODE.SNGL; NEGBINOMDIST; NEGBINOM.DIST; NORMDIST; NORM.DIST; NORMINV; NORM.INV; NORMSDIST; NORM.S.DIST; NORMSINV; NORM.S.INV; PEARSON; PERCENTILE; PERCENTILE.EXC; PERCENTILE.INC; PERCENTRANK; PERCENTRANK.EXC; PERCENTRANK.INC; PERMUT; PERMUTATIONA; PHI; POISSON; POISSON.DIST; PROB; QUARTILE; QUARTILE.EXC; QUARTILE.INC; RANK; RANK.AVG; RANK.EQ; RSQ; SKEW; SKEW.P; SLOPE; SMALL; STANDARDIZE; STDEV; STDEV.S; STDEVA; STDEVP; STDEV.P; STDEVPA; STEYX; TDIST; T.DIST; T.DIST.2T; T.DIST.RT; T.INV; T.INV.2T; TINV; TREND, TRIMMEAN; TTEST; T.TEST; VAR; VARA; VARP; VAR.P; VAR.S; VARPA; WEIBULL; WEIBULL.DIST; ZTEST; Z.TEST Math and Trigonometry Functions Used to perform basic math and trigonometry operations such as adding, multiplying, dividing, rounding, etc. ABS; ACOS; ACOSH; ACOT; ACOTH; AGGREGATE; ARABIC; ASIN; ASINH; ATAN; ATAN2; ATANH; BASE; CEILING; CEILING.MATH; CEILING.PRECISE; COMBIN; COMBINA; COS; COSH; COT; COTH; CSC; CSCH; DECIMAL; DEGREES; ECMA.CEILING; EVEN; EXP; FACT; FACTDOUBLE; FLOOR; FLOOR.PRECISE; FLOOR.MATH; GCD; INT; ISO.CEILING; LCM; LN; LOG; LOG10; MDETERM; MINVERSE; MMULT; MOD; MROUND; MULTINOMIAL; MUNIT; ODD; PI; POWER; PRODUCT; QUOTIENT; RADIANS; RAND; RANDARRAY; RANDBETWEEN; ROMAN; ROUND; ROUNDDOWN; ROUNDUP; SEC; SECH; SERIESSUM; SEQUENCE; SIGN; SIN; SINH; SQRT; SQRTPI; SUBTOTAL; SUM; SUMIF; SUMIFS; SUMPRODUCT; SUMSQ; SUMX2MY2; SUMX2PY2; SUMXMY2; TAN; TANH; TRUNC Date and Time Functions Used to correctly display the date and time in the spreadsheet. DATE; DATEDIF; DATEVALUE; DAY; DAYS; DAYS360; EDATE; EOMONTH; HOUR; ISOWEEKNUM; MINUTE; MONTH; NETWORKDAYS; NETWORKDAYS.INTL; NOW; SECOND; TIME; TIMEVALUE; TODAY; WEEKDAY; WEEKNUM; WORKDAY; WORKDAY.INTL; YEAR; YEARFRAC Engineering Functions Used to perform some engineering calculations: converting between different bases number systems, finding complex numbers etc. BESSELI; BESSELJ; BESSELK; BESSELY; BIN2DEC; BIN2HEX; BIN2OCT; BITAND; BITLSHIFT; BITOR; BITRSHIFT; BITXOR; COMPLEX; CONVERT; DEC2BIN; DEC2HEX; DEC2OCT; DELTA; ERF; ERF.PRECISE; ERFC; ERFC.PRECISE; GESTEP; HEX2BIN; HEX2DEC; HEX2OCT; IMABS; IMAGINARY; IMARGUMENT; IMCONJUGATE; IMCOS; IMCOSH; IMCOT; IMCSC; IMCSCH; IMDIV; IMEXP; IMLN; IMLOG10; IMLOG2; IMPOWER; IMPRODUCT; IMREAL; IMSEC; IMSECH; IMSIN; IMSINH; IMSQRT; IMSUB; IMSUM; IMTAN; OCT2BIN; OCT2DEC; OCT2HEX Database Functions Used to perform calculations for the values in a certain field of the database that meet the specified criteria. DAVERAGE; DCOUNT; DCOUNTA; DGET; DMAX; DMIN; DPRODUCT; DSTDEV; DSTDEVP; DSUM; DVAR; DVARP Financial Functions Used to perform some financial calculations: calculating the net present value, payments etc. ACCRINT; ACCRINTM; AMORDEGRC; AMORLINC; COUPDAYBS; COUPDAYS; COUPDAYSNC; COUPNCD; COUPNUM; COUPPCD; CUMIPMT; CUMPRINC; DB; DDB; DISC; DOLLARDE; DOLLARFR; DURATION; EFFECT; FV; FVSCHEDULE; INTRATE; IPMT; IRR; ISPMT; MDURATION; MIRR; NOMINAL; NPER; NPV; ODDFPRICE; ODDFYIELD; ODDLPRICE; ODDLYIELD; PDURATION; PMT; PPMT; PRICE; PRICEDISC; PRICEMAT; PV; RATE; RECEIVED; RRI; SLN; SYD; TBILLEQ; TBILLPRICE; TBILLYIELD; VDB; XIRR; XNPV; YIELD; YIELDDISC; YIELDMAT Lookup and Reference Functions Used to easily find information from the data list. ADDRESS; CHOOSE; CHOOSECOLS; CHOOSEROWS; COLUMN; COLUMNS; DROP; EXPAND; FILTER; FORMULATEXT; HLOOKUP; HSTACK; HYPERLINK; INDEX; INDIRECT; LOOKUP; MATCH; OFFSET; ROW; ROWS; SORT; SORTBY; TAKE; TOCOL; TOROW; TRANSPOSE; UNIQUE; VLOOKUP; VSTACK; WRAPCOLS; WRAPROWS; XLOOKUP; XMATCH Information Functions Used to provide information about the data in the selected cell or cell range. CELL; ERROR.TYPE; ISBLANK; ISERR; ISERROR; ISEVEN; ISFORMULA; ISLOGICAL; ISNA; ISNONTEXT; ISNUMBER; ISODD; ISREF; ISTEXT; N; NA; SHEET; SHEETS; TYPE Logical Functions Used to check if a condition is true or false. AND; FALSE; IF; IFERROR; IFNA; IFS; NOT; OR; SWITCH; TRUE; XOR" + "body": "The ability to perform basic calculations is the principal reason for using the Spreadsheet Editor. Some of them are performed automatically when you select a cell range in your spreadsheet: Average is used to analyze the selected cell range and find the average value. Count is used to count the number of the selected cells with values ignoring the empty cells. Min is used to analyze the range of data and find the smallest number. Max is used to analyze the range of data and find the largest number. Sum is used to add all the numbers in the selected range ignoring the empty cells or those contaning text. The results of these calculations are displayed in the right lower corner on the status bar. You can manage the status bar by right-clicking on it and choosing only those functions to display that you need. To perform any other calculations, you can insert the required formula manually using the common mathematical operators or insert a predefined formula - Function. The abilities to work with Functions are accessible from both the Home and Formula tab or by pressing Shift+F3 key combination. On the Home tab, you can use the Insert function button to add one of the most commonly used functions (SUM, AVERAGE, MIN, MAX, COUNT) or open the Insert Function window that contains all the available functions classified by category. Use the search box to find the exact function by its name. On the Formula tab you can use the following buttons: Function - to open the Insert Function window that contains all the available functions classified by category. Autosum - to quickly access the SUM, MIN, MAX, COUNT functions. When you select a functions from this group, it automatically performs calculations for all cells in the column above the selected cell so that you don't need to enter arguments. Recently used - to quickly access 10 recently used functions. Financial, Logical, Text and data, Date and time, Lookup and references, Math and trigonometry - to quickly access functions that belongs to the corresponding categories. More functions - to access the functions from the following groups: Database, Engineering, Information and Statistical. Named ranges - to open the Name Manager, or define a new name, or paste a name as a function argument. For more details, you can refer to this page. Trace Precedents - to show arrows that indicate which cells affect the value of the selected cell. Trace Dependents - to show arrows that indicate which cells are affected by the value of the selected cell. Remove Arrows - to remove the arrows used for precedents and dependents. Click the arrow next to the Remove Arrows option to choose whether to remove all arrows, precedent arrows, or dependent arrows. Show Formulas - to show the formulas used in the cells instead of the final results of the formulas. Watch Window - to display changes in the cells that are not currently in the visible area of the worksheet. To learn more about the Watch Window, please read the following article. Calculation - to force the program to recalculate functions. How to apply functions To insert a function, Select a cell where you wish to insert a function. Proceed in one of the following ways: switch to the Formula tab and use the buttons available on the top toolbar to access a function from a specific group, then click the necessary function to open the Function Arguments wizard. You can also use the Additional option from the menu or click the Function button on the top toolbar to open the Insert Function window. switch to the Home tab, click the Insert function icon, select one of the commonly used functions (SUM, AVERAGE, MIN, MAX, COUNT) or click the Additional option to open the Insert Function window. right-click within the selected cell and select the Insert Function option from the contextual menu. click the icon before the formula bar. In the opened Insert Function window, enter its name in the search box or select the necessary function group, then choose the required function from the list and click OK. Once you click the necessary function, the Function Arguments window will open: In the opened Function Arguments window, enter the necessary values of each argument. You can enter the function arguments either manually or by clicking the icon and selecting a cell or cell range to be included as an argument. Note: generally, numeric values, logical values (TRUE, FALSE), text values (must be quoted), cell references, cell range references, names assigned to ranges and other functions can be used as function arguments. The function result will be displayed below. When all the agruments are specified, click the OK button in the Function Arguments window. To enter a function manually using the keyboard, Select a cell. Enter the equal sign (=). Each formula must begin with the equal sign (=). Enter the function name. Once you type the initial letters, the Formula Autocomplete list will be displayed. As you type, the items (formulas and names) that match the entered characters are displayed in it. If you hover the mouse pointer over a formula, a tooltip with the formula description will be displayed. You can select the necessary formula from the list and insert it by clicking it or pressing the Tab key. Enter the function arguments either manually or by dragging to select a cell range to be included as an argument. If the function requires several arguments, they must be separated by commas. Arguments must be enclosed into parentheses. The opening parenthesis '(' is added automatically if you select a function from the list. When you enter arguments, a tooltip that contains the formula syntax is also displayed. When all the agruments are specified, enter the closing parenthesis ')' and press Enter. If you enter new data or change the values used as arguments, recalculation of functions is performed automatically by default. You can force the program to recalculate functions by using the Calculation button on the Formula tab. Click the Calculation button to recalculate the entire workbook, or click the arrow below the button and choose the necessary option from the menu: Calculate workbook or Calculate current sheet. You can also use the following key combinations: F9 to recalculate the workbook, Shift +F9 to recalculate the current worksheet. Here is the list of the available functions grouped by categories: Function Category Description Functions Text and Data Functions Used to correctly display the text data in the spreadsheet. ARRAYTOTEXT; ASC; CHAR; CLEAN; CODE; CONCATENATE; CONCAT; DOLLAR; EXACT; FIND; FINDB; FIXED; IMPORTRANGE; LEFT; LEFTB; LEN; LENB; LOWER; MID; MIDB; NUMBERVALUE; PROPER; REPLACE; REPLACEB; REPT; RIGHT; RIGHTB; SEARCH; SEARCHB; SUBSTITUTE; T; TEXT; TEXTJOIN; TRIM; UNICHAR; UNICODE; UPPER; VALUE; TEXTBEFORE; TEXTAFTER; TEXTSPLIT Statistical Functions Used to analyze data: finding the average value, the largest or smallest values in a cell range. AVEDEV; AVERAGE; AVERAGEA; AVERAGEIF; AVERAGEIFS; BETADIST; BETA.DIST; BETA.INV; BETAINV; BINOMDIST; BINOM.DIST; BINOM.DIST.RANGE; BINOM.INV; CHIDIST; CHIINV; CHISQ.DIST; CHISQ.DIST.RT; CHISQ.INV; CHISQ.INV.RT; CHITEST; CHISQ.TEST; CONFIDENCE; CONFIDENCE.NORM; CONFIDENCE.T; CORREL; COUNT; COUNTA; COUNBLANK; COUNTIF; COUNTIFS; COVAR; COVARIANCE.P; COVARIANCE.S; CRITBINOM; DEVSQ; EXPON.DIST; EXPONDIST; F.DIST; FDIST; F.DIST.RT; F.INV; FINV; F.INV.RT; FISHER; FISHERINV; FORECAST; FORECAST.ETS; FORECAST.ETS.CONFINT; FORECAST.ETS.SEASONALITY; FORECAST.ETS.STAT; FORECAST.LINEAR; FREQUENCY; FTEST; F.TEST; GAMMA; GAMMA.DIST; GAMMADIST; GAMMA.INV; GAMMAINV; GAMMALN; GAMMALN.PRECISE; GAUSS; GEOMEAN; GROWTH; HARMEAN; HYPGEOMDIST; HYPGEOM.DIST; INTERCEPT; KURT; LARGE; LINEST; LOGEST, LOGINV; LOGNORM.DIST; LOGNORM.INV; LOGNORMDIST; MAX; MAXA; MAXIFS; MEDIAN; MIN; MINA; MINIFS; MODE; MODE.MULT; MODE.SNGL; NEGBINOMDIST; NEGBINOM.DIST; NORMDIST; NORM.DIST; NORMINV; NORM.INV; NORMSDIST; NORM.S.DIST; NORMSINV; NORM.S.INV; PEARSON; PERCENTILE; PERCENTILE.EXC; PERCENTILE.INC; PERCENTRANK; PERCENTRANK.EXC; PERCENTRANK.INC; PERMUT; PERMUTATIONA; PHI; POISSON; POISSON.DIST; PROB; QUARTILE; QUARTILE.EXC; QUARTILE.INC; RANK; RANK.AVG; RANK.EQ; RSQ; SKEW; SKEW.P; SLOPE; SMALL; STANDARDIZE; STDEV; STDEV.S; STDEVA; STDEVP; STDEV.P; STDEVPA; STEYX; TDIST; T.DIST; T.DIST.2T; T.DIST.RT; T.INV; T.INV.2T; TINV; TREND, TRIMMEAN; TTEST; T.TEST; VAR; VARA; VARP; VAR.P; VAR.S; VARPA; WEIBULL; WEIBULL.DIST; ZTEST; Z.TEST Math and Trigonometry Functions Used to perform basic math and trigonometry operations such as adding, multiplying, dividing, rounding, etc. ABS; ACOS; ACOSH; ACOT; ACOTH; AGGREGATE; ARABIC; ASIN; ASINH; ATAN; ATAN2; ATANH; BASE; CEILING; CEILING.MATH; CEILING.PRECISE; COMBIN; COMBINA; COS; COSH; COT; COTH; CSC; CSCH; DECIMAL; DEGREES; ECMA.CEILING; EVEN; EXP; FACT; FACTDOUBLE; FLOOR; FLOOR.PRECISE; FLOOR.MATH; GCD; INT; ISO.CEILING; LCM; LN; LOG; LOG10; MDETERM; MINVERSE; MMULT; MOD; MROUND; MULTINOMIAL; MUNIT; ODD; PI; POWER; PRODUCT; QUOTIENT; RADIANS; RAND; RANDARRAY; RANDBETWEEN; ROMAN; ROUND; ROUNDDOWN; ROUNDUP; SEC; SECH; SERIESSUM; SEQUENCE; SIGN; SIN; SINH; SQRT; SQRTPI; SUBTOTAL; SUM; SUMIF; SUMIFS; SUMPRODUCT; SUMSQ; SUMX2MY2; SUMX2PY2; SUMXMY2; TAN; TANH; TRUNC Date and Time Functions Used to correctly display the date and time in the spreadsheet. DATE; DATEDIF; DATEVALUE; DAY; DAYS; DAYS360; EDATE; EOMONTH; HOUR; ISOWEEKNUM; MINUTE; MONTH; NETWORKDAYS; NETWORKDAYS.INTL; NOW; SECOND; TIME; TIMEVALUE; TODAY; WEEKDAY; WEEKNUM; WORKDAY; WORKDAY.INTL; YEAR; YEARFRAC Engineering Functions Used to perform some engineering calculations: converting between different bases number systems, finding complex numbers etc. BESSELI; BESSELJ; BESSELK; BESSELY; BIN2DEC; BIN2HEX; BIN2OCT; BITAND; BITLSHIFT; BITOR; BITRSHIFT; BITXOR; COMPLEX; CONVERT; DEC2BIN; DEC2HEX; DEC2OCT; DELTA; ERF; ERF.PRECISE; ERFC; ERFC.PRECISE; GESTEP; HEX2BIN; HEX2DEC; HEX2OCT; IMABS; IMAGINARY; IMARGUMENT; IMCONJUGATE; IMCOS; IMCOSH; IMCOT; IMCSC; IMCSCH; IMDIV; IMEXP; IMLN; IMLOG10; IMLOG2; IMPOWER; IMPRODUCT; IMREAL; IMSEC; IMSECH; IMSIN; IMSINH; IMSQRT; IMSUB; IMSUM; IMTAN; OCT2BIN; OCT2DEC; OCT2HEX Database Functions Used to perform calculations for the values in a certain field of the database that meet the specified criteria. DAVERAGE; DCOUNT; DCOUNTA; DGET; DMAX; DMIN; DPRODUCT; DSTDEV; DSTDEVP; DSUM; DVAR; DVARP Financial Functions Used to perform some financial calculations: calculating the net present value, payments etc. ACCRINT; ACCRINTM; AMORDEGRC; AMORLINC; COUPDAYBS; COUPDAYS; COUPDAYSNC; COUPNCD; COUPNUM; COUPPCD; CUMIPMT; CUMPRINC; DB; DDB; DISC; DOLLARDE; DOLLARFR; DURATION; EFFECT; FV; FVSCHEDULE; INTRATE; IPMT; IRR; ISPMT; MDURATION; MIRR; NOMINAL; NPER; NPV; ODDFPRICE; ODDFYIELD; ODDLPRICE; ODDLYIELD; PDURATION; PMT; PPMT; PRICE; PRICEDISC; PRICEMAT; PV; RATE; RECEIVED; RRI; SLN; SYD; TBILLEQ; TBILLPRICE; TBILLYIELD; VDB; XIRR; XNPV; YIELD; YIELDDISC; YIELDMAT Lookup and Reference Functions Used to easily find information from the data list. ADDRESS; CHOOSE; CHOOSECOLS; CHOOSEROWS; COLUMN; COLUMNS; DROP; EXPAND; FILTER; FORMULATEXT; GETPIVOTDATA; HLOOKUP; HSTACK; HYPERLINK; INDEX; INDIRECT; LOOKUP; MATCH; OFFSET; ROW; ROWS; SORT; SORTBY; TAKE; TOCOL; TOROW; TRANSPOSE; UNIQUE; VLOOKUP; VSTACK; WRAPCOLS; WRAPROWS; XLOOKUP; XMATCH Information Functions Used to provide information about the data in the selected cell or cell range. CELL; ERROR.TYPE; ISBLANK; ISERR; ISERROR; ISEVEN; ISFORMULA; ISLOGICAL; ISNA; ISNONTEXT; ISNUMBER; ISODD; ISREF; ISTEXT; N; NA; SHEET; SHEETS; TYPE Logical Functions Used to check if a condition is true or false. AND; FALSE; IF; IFERROR; IFNA; IFS; NOT; OR; SWITCH; TRUE; XOR Custom Functions Used to access custom functions." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/InsertHeadersFooters.htm", @@ -2673,7 +2683,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/ManageSheets.htm", "title": "Manage sheets", - "body": "By default, a newly created spreadsheet has a single sheet. The simplest way to add a new sheet into the Spreadsheet Editor is to click the Plus button located to the right of the Sheet Navigation buttons in the left lower corner. Another way to add a new sheet is to: right-click the sheet tab after which you wish to insert a new one, select the Insert option from the right-click menu. A new sheet will be inserted after the selected one. To activate the required sheet, use the sheet tabs in the left lower corner of each spreadsheet. Note: if you have a lot of sheets, you can find the necessary one by using the Sheet Navigation buttons situated in the left lower corner. To delete an unnecessary sheet: right-click the sheet tab you wish to delete, select the Delete option from the right-click menu. The selected sheet will be deleted from the current spreadsheet. To rename an existing sheet: right-click the sheet tab you wish to rename, select the Rename option from the right-click menu, enter the Sheet Name in the dialog box and click OK. The selected sheet name will be changed. To copy an existing sheet: right-click the sheet tab you wish to copy, select the Copy option from the right-click menu, select the sheet before which you wish to insert the copied one or use the Copy to end option to insert the copied sheet after all the existing ones, click the OK button to confirm your choice. or press and hold down the CTRL key and drag the sheet tab to the right to duplicate it and move the copy to the location you need. The selected sheet will be copied and inserted in the selected place. To move an existing sheet: right-click the sheet tab you wish to move, select the Move option from the right-click menu, select the sheet before which you wish to insert the selected one or use the Move to end option to move the selected sheet after all the existing ones, click the OK button to confirm your choice. Or simply drag the necessary sheet tab and drop it to a new location. The selected sheet will be moved. You can also manually drag'n'drop a sheet from one book to another. To do this, select the sheet you want to move and drag it to the sheet bar of another book. For example, you can drag a sheet from the online editor book to the desktop one: In this case, the sheet from the original spreadsheet will be deleted. Currently, it's not possible to drag'n'drop sheets to a new workbook in Desktop Editors on Linux. If you have a lot of sheets, you can hide some of them you don't need to facilitate your work. To do that, right-click the sheet tab you wish to hide, select the Hide option from the right-click menu, To display the hidden sheet tab, right-click any sheet tab, open the Hidden list and select the sheet tab you wish to display. To differentiate the sheets, you can assign different colors to the sheet tabs. To do that, right-click the sheet tab you wish to color, select the Tab Color option from the right-click menu, select any color in the available palettes Theme Colors - the colors that correspond to the selected color scheme of the spreadsheet. Standard Colors - the default colors set. Custom Color - click this caption if there is no needed color in the available palettes. Select the necessary color range moving the vertical color slider and set the specific color by dragging the color picker within the large square color field. Once you select a color with the color picker, the appropriate RGB and sRGB color values will be displayed in the fields on the right. You can also specify a color on the base of the RGB color model by entering the necessary numeric values into the R, G, B (red, green, blue) fields or enter the sRGB hexadecimal code into the field marked with the # sign. The selected color will appear in the New preview box. If the object was previously filled with any custom color, this color is displayed in the Current box, so you can compare the original and modified colors. When the color is specified, click the Add button: The custom color will be applied to the selected tab and added to the Custom color palette. You can work with multiple sheets simultaneously: select the first sheet you want to include into the group, press and hold the Shift key to select several adjacent sheets you want to group, or use the Ctrl key to select several non-adjacent sheets you want to group, right-click one of the selected sheets tab to open the contextual menu, choose the necessary option from the menu: Insert - to insert the same number of new blank sheets, as in the selected group, Delete - to delete all the selected sheets at once (you cannot delete all sheets in the workbook, as the workbook must contain at least one visible sheet), Rename - this option can be applied to each separate sheet only, Copy - to create copies of all the selected sheets at once and paste them to the selected place, Move - to move all the selected sheets at once and paste them to the selected place, Hide - to hide all the selected sheets at once (you cannot hide all sheets in the workbook, as the workbook must contain at least one visible sheet), Tab color - to assign the same color to all the selected sheet tabs at once, Select All Sheets - to select all the sheets in the current workbook, Ungroup Sheets - to ungroup the selected sheets. it's also possible to ungroup sheets by double-clicking on a sheet which is included into the group, or by clicking any sheet which is not included into the group." + "body": "By default, a newly created spreadsheet has a single sheet. The simplest way to add a new sheet into the Spreadsheet Editor is to click the Plus button located to the right of the Sheet Navigation buttons in the left lower corner. Another way to add a new sheet is to: right-click the sheet tab after which you wish to insert a new one, select the Insert option from the right-click menu. A new sheet will be inserted after the selected one. To activate the required sheet, use the sheet tabs in the left lower corner of each spreadsheet. Note: if you have a lot of sheets, you can find the necessary one by using the Sheet Navigation buttons situated in the left lower corner. To delete an unnecessary sheet: right-click the sheet tab you wish to delete, select the Delete option from the right-click menu. The selected sheet will be deleted from the current spreadsheet. To rename an existing sheet: right-click the sheet tab you wish to rename, select the Rename option from the right-click menu, enter the Sheet Name in the dialog box and click OK. The selected sheet name will be changed. To copy an existing sheet: right-click the sheet tab you wish to copy, select the Copy option from the right-click menu, select the sheet before which you wish to insert the copied one or use the Copy to end option to insert the copied sheet after all the existing ones, click the OK button to confirm your choice. or press and hold down the CTRL key and drag the sheet tab to the right to duplicate it and move the copy to the location you need. The selected sheet will be copied and inserted in the selected place. To move an existing sheet: right-click the sheet tab you wish to move, select the Move or copy option from the right-click menu, select the required workbook using the Spreadsheet drop-down menu, select the sheet before which you wish to insert the selected one, or use the Move to end option to move the selected sheet after all the existing ones, mark the Create a copy checkbox if you want to create a copy of the moved sheet, click the OK button to confirm your choice. Or simply drag the necessary sheet tab and drop it to a new location. The selected sheet will be moved. You can also manually drag'n'drop a sheet from one book to another. To do this, select the sheet you want to move and drag it to the sheet bar of another book. For example, you can drag a sheet from the online editor book to the desktop one: In this case, the sheet from the original spreadsheet will be deleted. Currently, it's not possible to drag'n'drop sheets to a new workbook in Desktop Editors on Linux. If you have a lot of sheets, you can hide some of them you don't need to facilitate your work. To do that, right-click the sheet tab you wish to hide, select the Hide option from the right-click menu, To display the hidden sheet tab, right-click any sheet tab, open the Hidden list and select the sheet tab you wish to display. To differentiate the sheets, you can assign different colors to the sheet tabs. To do that, right-click the sheet tab you wish to color, select the Tab Color option from the right-click menu, select any color in the available palettes Theme Colors - the colors that correspond to the selected color scheme of the spreadsheet. Standard Colors - the default colors set. Custom Color - click this caption if there is no needed color in the available palettes. Select the necessary color range moving the vertical color slider and set the specific color by dragging the color picker within the large square color field. Once you select a color with the color picker, the appropriate RGB and sRGB color values will be displayed in the fields on the right. You can also specify a color on the base of the RGB color model by entering the necessary numeric values into the R, G, B (red, green, blue) fields or enter the sRGB hexadecimal code into the field marked with the # sign. The selected color will appear in the New preview box. If the object was previously filled with any custom color, this color is displayed in the Current box, so you can compare the original and modified colors. When the color is specified, click the Add button: The custom color will be applied to the selected tab and added to the Custom color palette. You can work with multiple sheets simultaneously: select the first sheet you want to include into the group, press and hold the Shift key to select several adjacent sheets you want to group, or use the Ctrl key to select several non-adjacent sheets you want to group, right-click one of the selected sheets tab to open the contextual menu, choose the necessary option from the menu: Insert - to insert the same number of new blank sheets, as in the selected group, Delete - to delete all the selected sheets at once (you cannot delete all sheets in the workbook, as the workbook must contain at least one visible sheet), Rename - this option can be applied to each separate sheet only, Copy - to create copies of all the selected sheets at once and paste them to the selected place, Move - to move all the selected sheets at once and paste them to the selected place, Hide - to hide all the selected sheets at once (you cannot hide all sheets in the workbook, as the workbook must contain at least one visible sheet), Tab color - to assign the same color to all the selected sheet tabs at once, Select All Sheets - to select all the sheets in the current workbook, Ungroup Sheets - to ungroup the selected sheets. it's also possible to ungroup sheets by double-clicking on a sheet which is included into the group, or by clicking any sheet which is not included into the group." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/ManipulateObjects.htm", @@ -2708,17 +2718,22 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/PhotoEditor.htm", "title": "Edit an image", - "body": "ONLYOFFICE Spreadsheet Editor comes with a very powerful photo editor, that allows you to adjust the image with filters and make all kinds of annotations. Select an image in your spreadsheet. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose Photo Editor. You are now in the editing environment. Below the image you will find the following checkboxes and slider filters: Grayscale, Sepia, Sepia 2, Blur, Emboss, Invert, Sharpen; Remove White (Threshhold, Distance), Gradient transparency, Brightness, Noise, Pixelate, Color Filter; Tint, Multiply, Blend. Below the filters you will find buttons for Undo, Redo and Resetting; Delete, Delete all; Crop (Custom, Square, 3:2, 4:3, 5:4, 7:5, 16:9); Flip (Flip X, Flip Y, Reset); Rotate (30 degree, -30 degree,Manual rotation slider); Draw (Free, Straight, Color, Size slider); Shape (Recrangle, Circle, Triangle, Fill, Stroke, Stroke size); Icon (Arrows, Stars, Polygon, Location, Heart, Bubble, Custom icon, Color); Text (Bold, Italic, Underline, Left, Center, Right, Color, Text size); Mask. Feel free to try all of these and remember you can always undo them. When finished, click the OK button. The edited picture is now included in the spreadsheet." + "body": "ONLYOFFICE Spreadsheet Editor comes with a very powerful photo editor, that allows you to adjust the image with filters and make all kinds of annotations. Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager. Select an image in your spreadsheet. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose Photo Editor. You are now in the editing environment. Below the image you will find the following checkboxes and slider filters: Grayscale, Sepia, Sepia 2, Blur, Emboss, Invert, Sharpen; Remove White (Threshhold, Distance), Gradient transparency, Brightness, Noise, Pixelate, Color Filter; Tint, Multiply, Blend. Below the filters you will find buttons for Undo, Redo and Resetting; Delete, Delete all; Crop (Custom, Square, 3:2, 4:3, 5:4, 7:5, 16:9); Flip (Flip X, Flip Y, Reset); Rotate (30 degree, -30 degree,Manual rotation slider); Draw (Free, Straight, Color, Size slider); Shape (Recrangle, Circle, Triangle, Fill, Stroke, Stroke size); Icon (Arrows, Stars, Polygon, Location, Heart, Bubble, Custom icon, Color); Text (Bold, Italic, Underline, Left, Center, Right, Color, Text size); Mask. Feel free to try all of these and remember you can always undo them. When finished, click the OK button. The edited picture is now included in the spreadsheet." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/PivotTables.htm", "title": "Create and edit pivot tables", "body": "Pivot tables allow you to group and arrange data of large data sets to get summarized information. In the Spreadsheet Editor you can reorganize data in many different ways to display only the necessary information and focus on important aspects. Create a new pivot table To create a pivot table, Prepare the source data set you want to use for creating a pivot table. It should include column headers. The data set should not contain empty rows or columns. Select any cell within the source data range. Switch to the Pivot Table tab of the top toolbar and click the Insert Table icon. If you want to create a pivot table on the base of a formatted table, you can also use the Insert pivot table option on the Table settings tab of the right sidebar. The Create Pivot Table window will appear. The Source data range is already specified. In this case, all data from the source data range will be used. If you want to change the data range (e.g. to include only a part of source data), click the icon. In the Select Data Range window, enter the necessary data range in the following format: Sheet1!$A$1:$E$10. You can also select the necessary cell range on the sheet using the mouse. When ready, click OK. Specify where you want to place the pivot table. The New worksheet option is selected by default. It allows you to place the pivot table in a new worksheet. You can also select the Existing worksheet option and choose a certain cell. In this case, the selected cell will be the upper right cell of the created pivot table. To select a cell, click the icon. In the Select Data Range window, enter the cell address in the following format: Sheet1!$G$2. You can also click the necessary cell in the sheet. When ready, click OK. When you select the pivot table location, click OK in the Create Table window. An empty pivot table will be inserted in the selected location. The Pivot table settings tab on the right sidebar will be opened. You can hide or display this tab by clicking the icon. Pivot table settings are also available in the context menu that appears when you right click the table. The context menu options depend on the field you click. Select fields to display The Select Fields section contains the fields named according to the column headers in your source data set. Each field contains values from the corresponding column of the source table. The following four sections are available below: Filters, Columns, Rows, and Values. Check the fields you want to display in the pivot table. When you check a field, it will be added to one of the available sections on the right sidebar depending on the data type and will be displayed in the pivot table. Fields containing text values will be added to the Rows section; fields containing numeric values will be added to the Values section. You can simply drag fields to the necessary section as well as drag the fields between sections to quickly reorganize your pivot table. To remove a field from the current section, drag it out of this section. In order to add a field to the necessary section, it's also possible to click the black arrow to the right of a field in the Select Fields section and choose the necessary option from the menu: Add to Filters, Add to Rows, Add to Columns, Add to Values. Below you can see some examples of using the Filters, Columns, Rows, and Values sections. If you add a field to the Filters section, a separate filter will be added above the pivot table. It will be applied to the entire pivot table. If you click the drop-down arrow in the added filter, you'll see the values from the selected field. When you uncheck some values in the filter option window and click OK, the unchecked values will not be displayed in the pivot table. If you add a field to the Columns section, the pivot table will contain a number of columns equal to the number of values from the selected field. The Grand Total column will also be added. If you add a field to the Rows section, the pivot table will contain a number of rows equal to the number of values from the selected field. The Grand Total row will also be added. If you add a field to the Values section, the pivot table will display the summation value for all numeric values from the selected field. If the field contains text values, the count of values will be displayed. The function used to calculate the summation value can be changed in the field settings. To see more information regarding any value field, click it with the right mouse button to open the context menu and choose the Show details option, or double click the required value field with the left mouse button. The data that the value field is based on will open in a new sheet. Rearrange fields and adjust their properties Once the fields are added to the necessary sections, you can manage them to change the layout and format of the pivot table. Click the black arrow to the right of a field within the Filters, Columns, Rows, or Values sections to access the field context menu. It allows you to: Move the selected field Up, Down, to the Beginning, or to the End of the current section if you have added more than one field to the current section. Move the selected field to a different section - to Filters, Columns, Rows, or Values. The option that corresponds to the current section will be disabled. Remove the selected field from the current section. Adjust the selected field settings. The Filters, Columns, and Rows field settings look similarly: The Layout tab contains the following options: The Source name option allows you to view the field name corresponding to the column header from the source data set. The Custom name option allows you to change the name of the selected field displayed in the pivot table. The Report Form section allows you to change the way the selected field is displayed in the pivot table: Choose the necessary layout for the selected field in the pivot table: The Tabular form displays one column for each field and provides space for field headers. The Outline form displays one column for each field and provides space for field headers. It also allows you to display subtotals at the top of groups. The Compact form displays items from different row section fields in a single column. The Number format option allows you to choose the required number format for the value field. Click this button, choose the required format from the Category list, then click OK when ready. To learn more about number formats, please refer to the following article. The Repeat items labels at each row option allows you to visually group rows or columns together if you have multiple fields in the tabular form. The Insert blank rows after each item option allows you to add blank lines after items of the selected field. The Show subtotals option allows you to choose if you want to display subtotals for the selected field. You can select one of the options: Show at top of group or Show at bottom of group. The Show items with no data option allows you to show or hide blank items in the selected field. The Subtotals tab allows you to choose Functions for Subtotals. Check the necessary functions in the list: Sum, Count, Average, Max, Min, Product, Count Numbers, StdDev, StdDevp, Var, Varp. Values field settings The Source name option allows you to view the field name corresponding to the column header from the source data set. The Custom name option allows you to change the name of the selected field displayed in the pivot table. The Summarize value field by option allows you to choose the function used to calculate the summation value for all values from this field. By default, Sum is used for numeric values, Count is used for text values. The available functions are Sum, Count, Average, Max, Min, Product, Count Numbers, StdDev, StdDevp, Var, Varp. The Show values as option allows you to show instant custom calculations instead of adding a formula and creating a calculated field. No calculation is the default option that displays the actual value in the field. Other calculation options: % of grand total, % of column total, % of row total, % of, % of parent row total, % of parent column total, % of parent total, Difference from, % difference from, Running total in, % running total in, Rank smallest to largest, Rank largest to smallest, Index. Use Base field and Base item when these options are available for the calculation you selected (% of, % of parent total, Difference from, % difference from, Running total in, % running total in). The Number format option allows you to choose the required number format for the value field. Click this button, choose the required format from the Category list, then click OK when ready. To learn more about number formats, please refer to the following article. Group and ungroup data Data in pivot tables can be grouped according to custom requirements. Grouping is available for dates and basic numbers. Grouping dates To group dates, create a pivot table incorporating a set of needed dates. Right click any cell in a pivot table with a date, choose the Group option in the pop-up menu, and set the needed parameters in the opened window. Starting at - the first date in the source data is chosen by default. To change it, enter the needed date in this field. Deactivate this box to ignore the starting point. Ending at - the last date in the source data is chosen by default. To change it, enter the needed date in this field. Deactivate this box to ignore the ending point. By - the Seconds, Minutes, and Hours options group the data according to the time given in the source data. The Months option eliminates days and leaves months only. The Quarters option operates at a condition: four months constitute a quarter, thus providing Qtr1, Qtr2, etc. The Years option groups dates as per years given in the source data. Combine the options to achieve the needed result. Number of days - set the required value to determine a date range. Click OK when finished. Grouping numbers To group numbers, create a pivot table incorporating a set of needed numbers. Right click any cell in a pivot table with a number, choose the Group option in the pop-up menu, and set the needed parameters in the opened window. Starting at - the smallest number in the source data is chosen by default. To change it, enter the needed number in this field. Deactivate this box to ignore the smallest number. Ending at - the largest number in the source data is chosen by default. To change it, enter the needed number in this field. Deactivate this box to ignore the largest number. By - set the required interval for grouping numbers. E.g., “2” will group the set of numbers from 1 through 10 as “1-2”, “3-4”, etc. Click OK when finished. Ungrouping data To ungroup previously grouped data, right-click any cell that is in the group, select the Ungroup option in the context menu. Change the appearance of pivot tables You can use options available on the top toolbar to adjust the way your pivot table is displayed. These options are applied to the entire pivot table. Select at least one cell within the pivot table with the mouse to activate the editing tools on the top toolbar. The Report Layout drop-down list allows you to choose the necessary layout for your pivot table: Show in Compact Form - allows you to display items from different row section fields in a single column. Show in Outline Form - allows you to display the pivot table in the classic pivot table style. It displays one column for each field and provides space for field headers. It also allows you to display subtotals at the top of groups. Show in Tabular Form - allows you to display the pivot table in a traditional table format. It displays one column for each field and provides space for field headers. Repeat All Item Labels - allows you to visually group rows or columns together if you have multiple fields in the tabular form. Don't Repeat All Item Labels - allows you to hide item labels if you have multiple fields in the tabular form. The Blank Rows drop-down list allows you to choose if you want to display blank lines after items: Insert Blank Line after Each Item - allows you to add blank lines after items. Remove Blank Line after Each Item - allows you to remove the added blank lines. The Subtotals drop-down list allows you to choose if you want to display subtotals in the pivot table: Don't Show Subtotals - allows you to hide subtotals for all items. Show all Subtotals at Bottom of Group - allows you to display subtotals below the subtotaled rows. Show all Subtotals at Top of Group - allows you to display subtotals above the subtotaled rows. The Grand Totals drop-down list allows you to choose if you want to display grand totals in the pivot table: Off for Rows and Columns - allows you to hide grand totals for both rows and columns. On for Rows and Columns - allows you to display grand totals for both rows and columns. On for Rows Only - allows you to display grand totals for rows only. On for Columns Only - allows you to display grand totals for columns only. Note: the similar settings are also available in the pivot table advanced settings window in the Grand Totals section of the Name and Layout tab. The Select button allows you to select the entire pivot table. If you change the data in your source data set, select the pivot table and click the Refresh button to update the pivot table. Expand or collapse fields To expand or collapse data details, click a field with the right mouse button to open the context menu, choose the Expand/Collapse menu item, then select the necessary option: Expand - to show details for the currently selected item. Collapse - to hide details for the currently selected item. Expand Entire Field - to show details for all items in a field. The similar setting is also available at the top toolbar. Collapse Entire Field - to hide details for all items in a field. The similar setting is also available at the top toolbar. The groups are hidden behind the plus/minus icons. You can also expand/collapse fields by double-clicking the pivot table headers. The Expand option, when the last field of rows or columns is selected, opens a dialog window for adding a new field to the row or column. Choose the necessary field and click OK. Change the style of pivot tables You can change the appearance of pivot tables in a spreadsheet using the style editing tools available on the top toolbar. Select at least one cell within the pivot table with the mouse to activate the editing tools on the top toolbar. The rows and columns options allow you to emphasize certain rows/columns applying specific formatting to them, or highlight different rows/columns with different background colors to clearly distinguish them. The following options are available: Row Headers - allows you to highlight the row headers with special formatting. Column Headers - allows you to highlight the column headers with special formatting. Banded Rows - enables the background color alternation for odd and even rows. Banded Columns - enables the background color alternation for odd and even columns. The template list allows you to choose one of the predefined pivot table styles. Each template combines certain formatting parameters, such as a background color, border style, row/column banding, etc. Depending on the options checked for rows and columns, the templates set will be displayed differently. For example, if you've checked the Row Headers and Banded Columns options, the visible part of the templates list will include templates with the row headers highlighted and banded columns enabled, but you can expand the full list by clicking the arrow to see all the available templates. Filter, sort and add slicers in pivot tables You can filter pivot tables by labels or values and use the additional sort parameters. Filtering Click the drop-down arrow in the Row Labels or Column Labels of the pivot table. The Filter option list will open: Adjust the filter parameters. You can proceed in one of the following ways: select the data to display or filter the data by certain criteria. Select the data to display Uncheck the boxes near the data you need to hide. For your convenience, all the data within the Filter option list are sorted in ascending order. Note: the (blank) checkbox corresponds to the empty cells. It is available if the selected cell range contains at least one empty cell. To facilitate the process, make use of the search field on the top. Enter your query, entirely or partially, in the field - the values that include these characters will be displayed in the list below. The following two options will be also available: Select All Search Results - is checked by default. It allows selecting all the values that correspond to your query in the list. Add current selection to filter - if you check this box, the selected values will not be hidden when you apply the filter. After you select all the necessary data, click the OK button in the Filter option list to apply the filter. Filter data by certain criteria You can choose either the Label filter or the Value filter option on the right side of the Filter options list, and then select one of the options from the submenu: For the Label filter the following options are available: For texts: Equals..., Does not equal..., Begins with..., Does not begin with..., Ends with..., Does not end with..., Contains..., Does not contain... For numbers: Greater than..., Greater than or equal to..., Less than..., Less than or equal to..., Between, Not between. For the Value filter the following options are available: Equals..., Does not equal..., Greater than..., Greater than or equal to..., Less than..., Less than or equal to..., Between, Not between, Top 10. After you select one of the above options (apart from Top 10), the Label/Value Filter window will open. The corresponding field and criterion will be selected in the first and second drop-down lists. Enter the necessary value in the field on the right. Click OK to apply the filter. If you choose the Top 10 option from the Value filter option list, a new window will open: The first drop-down list allows choosing if you wish to display the highest (Top) or the lowest (Bottom) values. The second field allows specifying how many entries from the list or which percent of the overall entries number you want to display (you can enter a number from 1 to 500). The third drop-down list allows setting the units of measure: Item, Percent, or Sum. The fourth drop-down list displays the selected field name. Once the necessary parameters are set, click OK to apply the filter. The Filter button will appear in the Row Labels or Column Labels of the pivot table. It means that the filter is applied. Sorting You can sort your pivot table data using the sort options. Click the drop-down arrow in the Row Labels or Column Labels of the pivot table and then select Sort Lowest to Highest or Sort Highest to Lowest option from the submenu. The More Sort Options option allows you to open the Sort window where you can select the necessary sorting order - Ascending or Descending - and then select a certain field you want to sort. Adding slicers You can add slicers to filter data easier by displaying only what is needed. To learn more about slicers, please read the guide on creating slicers. Adjust pivot table advanced settings To change the advanced settings of the pivot table, use the Show advanced settings link on the right sidebar. The 'Pivot Table - Advanced Settings' window will open: The Name and Layout tab allows you to change the pivot table common properties. The Name option allows you to change the pivot table name. The Grand Totals section allows you to choose if you want to display grand totals in the pivot table. The Show for rows and Show for columns options are checked by default. You can uncheck either one of them or both these options to hide the corresponding grand totals from your pivot table. Note: the similar settings are available on the top toolbar in the Grand Totals menu. The Display fields in report filter area section allows you to adjust the report filters which appear when you add fields to the Filters section: The Down, then over option is used for column arrangement. It allows you to show the report filters across the column. The Over, then down option is used for row arrangement. It allows you to show the report filters across the row. The Report filter fields per column option allows you to select the number of filters to go in each column. The default value is set to 0. You can set the necessary numeric value. The Show field headers for rows and columns option allows you to choose if you want to display field headers in your pivot table. The option is enabled by default. Uncheck it to hide field headers from your pivot table. The Autofit column widths on update option allows you to enable/disable automatic adjusting of the column widths. The option is enabled by default. The Data Source tab allows you to change the data you wish to use to create the pivot table. Check the selected Data Range and modify it, if necessary. To do that, click the icon. In the Select Data Range window, enter the necessary data range in the following format: Sheet1!$A$1:$E$10. You can also select the necessary cell range in the sheet using the mouse. When ready, click OK. The Alternative Text tab allows specifying the Title and the Description which will be read to people with vision or cognitive impairments to help them better understand what information the pivot table contains. Delete a pivot table To delete a pivot table, Select the entire pivot table using the Select button on the top toolbar. Press the Delete key." }, + { + "id": "UsageInstructions/Pixabay.htm", + "title": "Pixabay", + "body": "The Pixabay plugin allows you to add pictures to your spreadsheet from an open collection of Pixabay service that offers copyright free images. The plugin is compatible with the self-hosted and the desktop versions of the ONLYOFFICE editors and can be added to ONLYOFFICE instances manually using the Plugin Manager.. Installation To install the Pixabay plugin, Go to the Plugins tab. Open the Plugin Manager. Find on the marketplace and click the Install button below. Click the Pixabay icon in the Plugins tab. Proceed with the plugin configuration. For more details, please refer to the ONLYOFFICE API documentation. Configuration Log in to your Pixabay account or register a new one. Go to the Search Images section of the Pixabay API page. Scroll down to the Parameters list and copy the link under the Key parameter. If you are not logged in, press Login next to the Key parameter. Paste the key to the API key field on the left panel of the Plugins tab in the Spreadsheet Editor. Click Save. How to use Go to the Plugins tab. Click the Pixabay icon. On the left panel that opens, type in the keyword you associate with the image you are looking for. Use the Show settings button to refine your search by Language, Image type, Orientation and Category. Click Hide settings to reduce the search section. Click Search. Scroll through search results and click the image to add it to your spreadsheet." + }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/ProtectRanges.htm", "title": "Protect ranges", - "body": "The Protect Range option allows you to specify cell ranges that cannot be edited by users without corresponding editing rights that are granted by the creator of the file or a user with full access to it. To select a range of locked cells a user will be allowed to change: Click the Protect Range button on the top toolbar of the Protection tab. The Protected Ranges window will open. Use the Filter drop-down list to choose the required sheet. Click the New button in the Protected Ranges window to select and add a range of cells a user will be allowed to edit. In the New Range window, type the range Title, and select the range of cells by clicking the Select Range button. Select users who can edit this range and click OK to confirm. To edit or delete a range, select it in the Protected Ranges window and click the Edit or Delete button accordingly. Click the Close button in the Protected Ranges window when you are ready. To learn more about allowing edit ranges, please refer to the following article." + "body": "The Protect Range option allows you to specify cell ranges that cannot be edited by users without corresponding editing rights that are granted by the creator of the file or a user with full access to it. To select a range of locked cells a user will be allowed to change: Click the Protect Range button on the top toolbar of the Protection tab. The Protected Ranges window will open. Use the Filter drop-down list to choose the required sheet. Click the New button in the Protected Ranges window to select and add a range of cells a user will be allowed to edit. In the New Range window, type the range Title, and select the range of cells by clicking the Select Range button. Select users to provide access to the range, set their access rights, and click OK to confirm. The available access rights are Edit and View. To edit or delete a range, select it in the Protected Ranges window and click the Edit or Delete button accordingly. Click the Close button in the Protected Ranges window when you are ready. To learn more about allowing users to edit ranges, please refer to the following article." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/ProtectSheet.htm", @@ -2743,7 +2758,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/SavePrintDownload.htm", "title": "Save/print/download your spreadsheet", - "body": "Saving By default, the online Spreadsheet Editor automatically saves your file each 2 seconds when you are working on it preventing your data from loss if the program closes unexpectedly. If you co-edit the file in the Fast mode, the timer requests for updates 25 times a second and saves the changes if they have been made. When the file is being co-edited in the Strict mode, changes are automatically saved at 10-minute intervals. If you need, you can easily select the preferred co-editing mode or disable the Autosave feature on the Advanced Settings page. To save your current spreadsheet manually in the current format and location, click the Save icon on the left side of the editor header, or use the Ctrl+S key combination, or click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Save option. In the desktop version, to prevent data loss if the program closes unexpectedly, you can turn on the Autorecover option on the Advanced Settings page. In the desktop version, you can save the spreadsheet with another name, in a new location or format, click the File tab of the top toolbar, select the Save as option, choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: XLSX, XLTX, ODS, OTS, CSV, PDF, PDF/A, XLTM, JPG, PNG. Downloading In the online version, you can download the resulting spreadsheet onto your computer hard disk drive, click the File tab of the top toolbar, select the Download as option, choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: XLSX, ODS, CSV, PDF, XLTX, OTS, PDF/A, JPG, PNG. Note: if you select the CSV format, all features (font formatting, formulas, etc.) except the plain text will not be preserved in the CSV file. If you continue saving, the Choose CSV Options window will open. By default, Unicode (UTF-8) is used as the Encoding type. The default Delimiter is comma (,), but the following options are also available: semicolon (;), colon (:), Tab, Space and Other (this option allows you to set a custom delimiter character). Saving a copy In the online version, you can save a copy of the file on your portal, click the File tab of the top toolbar, select the Save Copy as option, choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: XLSX, ODS, CSV, PDF, XLTX, OTS, PDF/A, JPG, PNG, select a location of the file on the portal and press Save. Printing To print out the current spreadsheet, click the Print icon on the left side of the editor header, or use the Ctrl+P key combination, or click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Print option. The Firefox browser enables printing without downloading the document as a .pdf file first. The spreadsheet Preview and the available printing options will open. Some of these settings (page Margins, Orientation, Size, Print Area as well as Scale to Fit) are also available on the Layout tab of the top toolbar. Here you can adjust the following parameters. In the desktop version you can also define the Print sides option to print on one or two sides flipping the pages on long or short edge as well as print the file to PDF or use the Quick print button in the top toolbar to print the file on the last selected or default printer. Print range - specify what to print: Active sheets, All sheets or Selection. If you previously set a constant print area but want to print the entire sheet, check the Ignore print area box. Pages - specify the range of pages for printing. You can enter the numbers manually or use the corresponding arrows. Settings of sheet - specify individual print settings for each separate sheet, if you have selected the All Sheets option in the Print range drop-down list. Page size - select one of the available sizes from the drop-down list. Page orientation - choose the Portrait option if you wish to print vertically on the page, or use the Landscape option to print horizontally. Margins - choose one of the availabe presets: Normal, Narrow, or Wide, or choose the Custom option and specify the distance between the worksheet data and the edges of the printed page changing the default sizes in the Top, Bottom, Left and Right fields. To center data on the printed page, choose the Custom option from the Margins menu, check the Vertically/Horizontally box in the Center on page section, and click OK. Scaling - if you do not want some columns or rows to be printed on the second page, you can shrink sheet contents to fit it on one page by selecting the corresponding option: Actual Size, Fit Sheet on One Page, Fit All Columns on One Page or Fit All Rows on One Page. Leave the Actual Size option to print the sheet without adjusting. If you choose the Custom Options item from the menu, the Scale Settings window will open: Fit To: allows you to select the necessary number of pages you want to fit the printed worksheet to. Select the necessary number of pages from the Width and Height lists. Scale To: allows you to enlarge or reduce the scale of the worksheet to fit printed pages by manually specifying the percentage of normal size. Print titles - if you want to print row or column titles on every page, use Repeat rows at top and/or Repeat columns at left to indicate the row and the column with the title to repeat, or select one of the available options from the drop-down list: Frozen rows/columns, First row/column or Don't repeat. Gridlines and headings - specify the worksheet elements to print by checking the corresponding boxes: Print gridlines and Print row and column headings. Header/footer settings - allow to add some additional information to a printed worksheet, such as date and time, page number, sheet name, etc. First page number - specify the number of the first page printed. After you have configured the printing settings click the Print button to save changes and print out the spreadsheet or the Save button to save changes made to printing settings. All changes you made will be lost if you don't print the spreadsheet or save the changes. The spreadsheet Preview allows you to navigate a spreadsheet using arrows at the bottom to see how your data will be displayed on a sheet when printed and to correct eventual faults using the print setting above. In the online version, a PDF file will be generated on the basis of the document. You can open and print it out, or save onto your computer hard disk drive or removable medium to print it out later. Some browsers (e.g. Chrome and Opera) support direct printing. Setting up the print area If you want to print the selected cell range only instead of the entire worksheet, you can use the Selection option from the Print range drop-down list. When the workbook is saved, this setting is not saved, it is intended for single use. If a cell range should be printed frequently, you can set a constant print area on the worksheet. When the workbook is saved, the print area is also saved, it can be used when you open the spreadsheet next time. It's also possible to set several constant print areas in a sheet, in this case each area will be printed on a separate page. To set the print area: select the necessary cell range on the worksheet. To select multiple cell ranges, hold down the Ctrl key, switch to the Layout tab of the top toolbar, click the arrow next to the Print Area button and select the Set Print Area option. The created print area is saved when the workbook is saved. When you open the file next time, the specified print area will be printed. When you create a print area, a Print_Area named range is also automatically created, which is displayed in the Name Manager. To highlight the borders of all the print areas on the current worksheet, you can click the arrow in the name box located to the left of the the formula bar and select the Print_Area name from the name list. To add cells to the print area: open the necessary worksheet where the print area is added, select the necessary cell range on the worksheet, switch to the Layout tab of the top toolbar, click the arrow next to the Print Area button and select the Add to Print Area option. A new print area will be added. Each print area will be printed on a separate page. To remove the print area: open the necessary worksheet where the print area is added, switch to the Layout tab of the top toolbar, click the arrow next to the Print Area button and select the Clear Print Area option. All the existing print areas in this sheet will be removed. Then the entire sheet will be printed." + "body": "Saving By default, the online Spreadsheet Editor automatically saves your file each 2 seconds when you are working on it preventing your data from loss if the program closes unexpectedly. If you co-edit the file in the Fast mode, the timer requests for updates 25 times a second and saves the changes if they have been made. When the file is being co-edited in the Strict mode, changes are automatically saved at 10-minute intervals. If you need, you can easily select the preferred co-editing mode or disable the Autosave feature on the Advanced Settings page. To save your current spreadsheet manually in the current format and location, click the Save icon on the left side of the editor header, or use the Ctrl+S key combination, or click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Save option. In the desktop version, to prevent data loss if the program closes unexpectedly, you can turn on the Autorecover option on the Advanced Settings page. In the desktop version, you can save the spreadsheet with another name, in a new location or format, click the File tab of the top toolbar, select the Save as option, choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: XLSX, XLTX, ODS, OTS, CSV, PDF, PDF/A, XLTM, JPG, PNG. Downloading In the online version, you can download the resulting spreadsheet onto your computer hard disk drive, click the File tab of the top toolbar, select the Download as option, choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: XLSX, ODS, CSV, PDF, XLTX, OTS, PDF/A, JPG, PNG. Note: if you select the CSV format, all features (font formatting, formulas, etc.) except the plain text will not be preserved in the CSV file. If you continue saving, the Choose CSV Options window will open. By default, Unicode (UTF-8) is used as the Encoding type. The default Delimiter is comma (,), but the following options are also available: semicolon (;), colon (:), Tab, Space and Other (this option allows you to set a custom delimiter character). Saving a copy In the online version, you can save a copy of the file on your portal, click the File tab of the top toolbar, select the Save Copy as option, choose one of the available formats depending on your needs: XLSX, ODS, CSV, PDF, XLTX, OTS, PDF/A, JPG, PNG, select a location of the file on the portal and press Save. Printing To print out the current spreadsheet, click the Print icon on the left side of the editor header, or use the Ctrl+P key combination, or click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Print option. The Firefox browser enables printing without downloading the document as a .pdf file first. The spreadsheet Preview and the available printing options will open. Some of these settings (page Margins, Orientation, Size, Print Area as well as Scale to Fit) are also available on the Layout tab of the top toolbar. Here you can adjust the following parameters. In the desktop version you can also define the Print sides option to print on one or two sides flipping the pages on long or short edge as well as print the file to PDF or use the Quick print button in the top toolbar to print the file on the last selected or default printer. Print range - specify what to print: Active sheets, All sheets or Selection. If you previously set a constant print area but want to print the entire sheet, check the Ignore print area box. Pages - specify the range of pages for printing. You can enter the numbers manually or use the corresponding arrows. Settings of sheet - specify individual print settings for each separate sheet, if you have selected the All Sheets option in the Print range drop-down list. Page size - select one of the available sizes from the drop-down list: US Letter (21,59cm x 27,94cm) US Legal (21,59cm x 35,56cm) A4 (21cm x 29,7cm) A5 (14,81cm x 20,99cm) B5 (17,6cm x 25,01cm) Envelope #10 (10,48cm x 24,13cm) Envelope DL (11,01cm x 22,01cm) Tabloid (27,94cm x 43,17cm) AЗ (29,7cm x 42,01cm) Tabloid Oversize (29,69cm x 45,72cm) ROC 16K (19,68cm x 27,3cm) Envelope Choukei 3 (12cm x 23,5cm) Super B/A3 (30,5cm x 48,7cm) Page orientation - choose the Portrait option if you wish to print vertically on the page, or use the Landscape option to print horizontally. Margins - choose one of the availabe presets: Normal, Narrow, or Wide, or choose the Custom option and specify the distance between the worksheet data and the edges of the printed page changing the default sizes in the Top, Bottom, Left and Right fields. To center data on the printed page, choose the Custom option from the Margins menu, check the Vertically/Horizontally box in the Center on page section, and click OK. Scaling - if you do not want some columns or rows to be printed on the second page, you can shrink sheet contents to fit it on one page by selecting the corresponding option: Actual Size, Fit Sheet on One Page, Fit All Columns on One Page or Fit All Rows on One Page. Leave the Actual Size option to print the sheet without adjusting. If you choose the Custom Options item from the menu, the Scale Settings window will open: Fit To: allows you to select the necessary number of pages you want to fit the printed worksheet to. Select the necessary number of pages from the Width and Height lists. Scale To: allows you to enlarge or reduce the scale of the worksheet to fit printed pages by manually specifying the percentage of normal size. Print titles - if you want to print row or column titles on every page, use Repeat rows at top and/or Repeat columns at left to indicate the row and the column with the title to repeat, or select one of the available options from the drop-down list: Frozen rows/columns, First row/column or Don't repeat. Gridlines and headings - specify the worksheet elements to print by checking the corresponding boxes: Print gridlines and Print row and column headings. Header/footer settings - allow to add some additional information to a printed worksheet, such as date and time, page number, sheet name, etc. First page number - specify the number of the first page printed. Toggle the Zoom to page switch in the bottom right corner of the screen to display the actual size of the sheets when deactivated, or zoom out when activated. After you have configured the printing settings click the Print button to save changes and print out the spreadsheet or the Save button to save changes made to printing settings. All changes you made will be lost if you don't print the spreadsheet or save the changes. The spreadsheet Preview allows you to navigate a spreadsheet using arrows at the bottom to see how your data will be displayed on a sheet when printed and to correct eventual faults using the print setting above. In the online version, a PDF file will be generated on the basis of the document. You can open and print it out, or save onto your computer hard disk drive or removable medium to print it out later. Some browsers (e.g. Chrome and Opera) support direct printing. Setting up the print area If you want to print the selected cell range only instead of the entire worksheet, you can use the Selection option from the Print range drop-down list. When the workbook is saved, this setting is not saved, it is intended for single use. If a cell range should be printed frequently, you can set a constant print area on the worksheet. When the workbook is saved, the print area is also saved, it can be used when you open the spreadsheet next time. It's also possible to set several constant print areas in a sheet, in this case each area will be printed on a separate page. To set the print area: select the necessary cell range on the worksheet. To select multiple cell ranges, hold down the Ctrl key, switch to the Layout tab of the top toolbar, click the arrow next to the Print Area button and select the Set Print Area option. The created print area is saved when the workbook is saved. When you open the file next time, the specified print area will be printed. When you create a print area, a Print_Area named range is also automatically created, which is displayed in the Name Manager. To highlight the borders of all the print areas on the current worksheet, you can click the arrow in the name box located to the left of the the formula bar and select the Print_Area name from the name list. To add cells to the print area: open the necessary worksheet where the print area is added, select the necessary cell range on the worksheet, switch to the Layout tab of the top toolbar, click the arrow next to the Print Area button and select the Add to Print Area option. A new print area will be added. Each print area will be printed on a separate page. To remove the print area: open the necessary worksheet where the print area is added, switch to the Layout tab of the top toolbar, click the arrow next to the Print Area button and select the Clear Print Area option. All the existing print areas in this sheet will be removed. Then the entire sheet will be printed." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/ScaleToFit.htm", @@ -2768,12 +2783,12 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/Thesaurus.htm", "title": "Replace a word by a synonym", - "body": "If you are using the same word multiple times, or a word is just not quite the word you are looking for, ONLYOFFICE Spreadsheet Editor lets you look up synonyms. It will show you the antonyms too. Select the word in your spreadsheet. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose Thesaurus. The synonyms and antonyms will show up in the left sidebar. Click a word to replace the word in your spreadsheet." + "body": "If you are using the same word multiple times, or a word is just not quite the word you are looking for, ONLYOFFICE Spreadsheet Editor lets you look up synonyms. It will show you the antonyms too. Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager. Select the word in your spreadsheet. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose Thesaurus. The synonyms and antonyms will show up in the left sidebar. Click a word to replace the word in your spreadsheet." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/Translator.htm", "title": "Translate text", - "body": "In the Spreadsheet Editor, you can translate your spreadsheet from and to numerous languages. Select the text that you want to translate. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose Translator, the Translator appears in a sidebar on the left. Click the drop-down box and choose the preferred language. The text will be translated to the required language. Changing the language of your result: Click the drop-down box and choose the preferred language. The translation will change immediately." + "body": "In the Spreadsheet Editor, you can translate your spreadsheet from and to numerous languages. Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager. Select the text that you want to translate. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose Translator, the Translator appears in a sidebar on the left. Click the drop-down box and choose the preferred language. The text will be translated to the required language. Changing the language of your result: Click the drop-down box and choose the preferred language. The translation will change immediately." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/UndoRedo.htm", @@ -2788,7 +2803,7 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/ViewDocInfo.htm", "title": "View file information", - "body": "To access the detailed information about the currently edited spreadsheet in the Spreadsheet Editor, click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Spreadsheet Info option. General Information The spreadsheet information includes a number of file properties which describe the spreadsheet. Some of these properties are updated automatically, and some of them can be edited. Location - the folder in the Documents module where the file is stored. Owner - the name of the user who has created the file. Uploaded - the date and time when the file has been created. These properties are available in the online version only. Title, Subject, Comment - these properties allow you to simplify the classification of your documents. You can specify the necessary text in the properties fields. Last Modified - the date and time when the file was last modified. Last Modified By - the name of the user who has made the latest change to the spreadsheet if the spreadsheet has been shared and it can be edited by several users. Application - the application the spreadsheet was created with. Author - the person who has created the file. You can enter the necessary name in this field. Press Enter to add a new field that allows you to specify one more author. If you changed the file properties, click the Apply button to apply the changes. Note: The Online Editors allow you to change the spreadsheet title directly from the editor interface. To do that, click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Rename option, then enter the necessary File name in the opened window and click OK. Permission Information In the online version, you can view the information about permissions assigned to the files stored in the cloud. Note: this option is not available for users with the Read Only permissions. To find out who has the rights to view or edit the spreadsheet, select the Access Rights... option on the left sidebar. You can also change currently selected access rights by clicking the Change access rights button in the Persons who have rights section. To close the File pane and return to your spreadsheet, select the Close Menu option. Version History In the online version, you can view the version history for the files stored in the cloud. Note: this option is not available for users with the Read Only permissions. To view all the changes made to this spreadsheet, select the Version History option at the left sidebar. It's also possible to open the history of versions using the Version History icon on the Collaboration tab of the top toolbar. You'll see the list of this spreadsheet versions (major changes) and revisions (minor changes) with the indication of each version/revision author and creation date and time. For spreadsheet versions, the version number is also specified (e.g. ver. 2). To know exactly which changes have been made in each separate version/revision, you can view the one you need by clicking it on the left sidebar. You can use the Restore link below the selected version/revision to restore it. To return to the current version of the spreadsheet, use the Close History option on the top of the version list." + "body": "To access the detailed information about the currently edited spreadsheet in the Spreadsheet Editor, click the File tab of the top toolbar and select the Info option. Common Owner - the person who has created the file. Uploaded - the date when the file has been uploaded to the server. Last Modified - the date when the file has last been edited. Statistics This subsection displays the number of pages, paragraphs, words, symbols, and symbols with spaces within the file. Properties Author - you can enter the necessary name in this field. Press Enter to add a new field that allows you to specify one more author. To delete additional authors, click the cross button next to the corresponding fields. Title - enter the title of the spreadsheet. Please do not confuse it with the file name as these are different file properties. Tags - enter necessary tags for better file classification. Subject - enter the spreadsheet subject. Comment - enter the comment to the file. Please do not confuse it with the Comments as these are different features. Click the Add property button to add custom fields, entering the Title of the field, its Type, i.e., its format, and its Value. Click OK when ready. To delete additional fields, click the cross button next to them." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/WatchWindow.htm", @@ -2798,11 +2813,11 @@ var indexes = { "id": "UsageInstructions/YouTube.htm", "title": "Include a video", - "body": "In the Spreadsheet Editor, you can include a video in your spreadsheet. It will be shown as an image. By double-clicking the image the video dialog opens. Here you can start the video. Copy the URL of the video you want to include. (the complete address shown in the address line of your browser) Go to your spreadsheet and place the cursor at the location where you want to include the video. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose YouTube. Paste the URL and click OK. Check if it is the correct video and click the OK button below the video. The video is now included in your spreadsheet." + "body": "In the Spreadsheet Editor, you can include a video in your spreadsheet. It will be shown as an image. By double-clicking the image the video dialog opens. Here you can start the video. Starting with ONLYOFFICE Docs 8.2, no plugins come with the editors by default. The plugins shall be installed via Plugin Manager. Copy the URL of the video you want to include. (the complete address shown in the address line of your browser) Go to your spreadsheet and place the cursor at the location where you want to include the video. Switch to the Plugins tab and choose YouTube. Paste the URL and click OK. Check if it is the correct video and click the OK button below the video. The video is now included in your spreadsheet." }, { "id": "UsageInstructions/Zoom.htm", "title": "Zoom", - "body": "The Zoom plugin allows you to host or schedule Zoom meetings directly in the editor in just a few clicks. The plugin is compatible with the self-hosted version of ONLYOFFICE editors and can be added to ONLYOFFICE instances manually. Installation To install the Zoom plugin, Go to the Plugins tab. Open the Plugin Manager. Find Zoom on the marketplace and click the Install button below. Click the Zoom icon in the Plugins tab. Proceed with the plugin configuration. For more details, please refer to the ONLYOFFICE API documentation. Configuration Register the editor as the JWT app on the Zoom Develop page to use the meeting schedule. Fill in all the necessary fields and activate the app. A JWT token will be assigned to the app. If you need help filling in the fields, please refer to the official Zoom documentation. Create a Meeting SDK app on the Zoom Develop page to start joining meetings. Fill in all the necessary fields and activate the app. SDK credentials will be assigned to the app. If you need help filling in the fields, please refer to the official Zoom documentation. Enter the generated SDK Key, SDK Secret, and JWT Token into the corresponding fields in the left panel of the ONLYOFFICE editor and click Save. How to use Go to the Plugins tab. Click the Zoom icon. Add your meeting topic and choose whether you want to Start meeting or Schedule meeting. Start meeting - a new meeting will be created. All details are displayed in the editor chat. Press the Alt + Q key combination to access the chat quickly. Schedule meeting - set all required parameters for the upcoming meeting, such as time, date, duration. Access the Advanced settings for more parameters. Click Save when you are ready. Meeting notifications are sent to the Chat for online editors and to the Comments for desktop editors. Click the Reconfigure button to set the parameters once again. Click the Meeting mode button to enter the meeting menu where you can set such parameters as Name, Meeting ID, Email, and Password. Select your role, meeting region, and meeting language. Click the Join button to enter the meeting or click the Copy direct join link button to copy the meeting link to your clipboard. Once you enter the meeting, a Zoom window will open within the plugin panel. Like in your usual Zoom call, here you can enable or disable microphone and camera, perform various actions, and enter the full screen mode. A black window may appear in the Safari browser when joining a meeting. For the problem to disappear, you need to resize the plugin window or zoom in on the browser page." + "body": "The Zoom plugin allows you to host or schedule Zoom meetings directly in the editor in just a few clicks. The plugin is compatible with the self-hosted version of ONLYOFFICE editors and can be added to ONLYOFFICE instances manually using the Plugin Manager. Installation To install the Zoom plugin, Go to the Plugins tab. Open the Plugin Manager. Find Zoom on the marketplace and click the Install button below. Click the Zoom icon in the Plugins tab. Proceed with the plugin configuration. For more details, please refer to the ONLYOFFICE API documentation. Configuration Register the editor as the JWT app on the Zoom Develop page to use the meeting schedule. Fill in all the necessary fields and activate the app. A JWT token will be assigned to the app. If you need help filling in the fields, please refer to the official Zoom documentation. Create a Meeting SDK app on the Zoom Develop page to start joining meetings. Fill in all the necessary fields and activate the app. SDK credentials will be assigned to the app. If you need help filling in the fields, please refer to the official Zoom documentation. Enter the generated SDK Key, SDK Secret, and JWT Token into the corresponding fields in the left panel of the ONLYOFFICE editor and click Save. How to use Go to the Plugins tab. Click the Zoom icon. Add your meeting topic and choose whether you want to Start meeting or Schedule meeting. Start meeting - a new meeting will be created. All details are displayed in the editor chat. Press the Alt + Q key combination to access the chat quickly. Schedule meeting - set all required parameters for the upcoming meeting, such as time, date, duration. Access the Advanced settings for more parameters. Click Save when you are ready. Meeting notifications are sent to the Chat for online editors and to the Comments for desktop editors. Click the Reconfigure button to set the parameters once again. Click the Meeting mode button to enter the meeting menu where you can set such parameters as Name, Meeting ID, Email, and Password. Select your role, meeting region, and meeting language. Click the Join button to enter the meeting or click the Copy direct join link button to copy the meeting link to your clipboard. Once you enter the meeting, a Zoom window will open within the plugin panel. Like in your usual Zoom call, here you can enable or disable microphone and camera, perform various actions, and enter the full screen mode. A black window may appear in the Safari browser when joining a meeting. For the problem to disappear, you need to resize the plugin window or zoom in on the browser page." } ] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/images/big.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/images/big.png index 7256838c3f..94dbb31655 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/images/big.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/images/big.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/images/icons.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/images/icons.png index 3355affb14..f87025966c 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/images/icons.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/images/icons.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/images/sprite.css b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/images/sprite.css index 2c0a252262..5c96d8d175 100644 --- a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/images/sprite.css +++ b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/images/sprite.css @@ -186,1724 +186,1748 @@ display: inline-block; } -.icon-highlight { +.icon-pixabay_store_icon { background-position: 0px 0px; + width: 120px; + height: 37px; +} + +.icon-highlight { + background-position: 0px -37px; width: 28px; height: 28px; } .icon-photoeditor { - background-position: -28px 0px; + background-position: -28px -37px; width: 28px; height: 28px; } .icon-youtube { - background-position: 0px -28px; + background-position: -56px -37px; width: 28px; height: 28px; } .icon-thumbnailsettingicon { - background-position: -56px 0px; + background-position: -84px -37px; width: 34px; height: 27px; } .icon-translator { - background-position: -56px -27px; + background-position: 0px -65px; width: 26px; height: 26px; } .icon-favorites_icon { - background-position: -28px -28px; + background-position: -26px -65px; width: 26px; height: 25px; } .icon-conditionalformatting_button { - background-position: 0px -56px; + background-position: -52px -65px; width: 32px; height: 24px; } .icon-help { - background-position: -32px -56px; + background-position: -84px -65px; width: 24px; height: 24px; } .icon-rainbow_icon { - background-position: -56px -56px; + background-position: 0px -91px; width: 24px; height: 24px; } .icon-telegram_icon { - background-position: -90px 0px; + background-position: -24px -91px; width: 24px; height: 24px; } .icon-slicer_icon { - background-position: -90px -24px; + background-position: -48px -91px; width: 21px; height: 24px; } .icon-arrow { - background-position: -90px -48px; + background-position: -69px -91px; width: 23px; height: 23px; } .icon-insert_pivot { - background-position: 0px -80px; + background-position: -92px -91px; width: 23px; height: 23px; } .icon-list_worksheets { - background-position: -23px -80px; + background-position: -120px 0px; width: 23px; height: 23px; } .icon-change_case { - background-position: -46px -80px; + background-position: 0px -115px; width: 45px; height: 22px; } .icon-fontsize { - background-position: -114px 0px; + background-position: -45px -115px; width: 45px; height: 22px; } .icon-rowsandcolumns { - background-position: -114px -22px; + background-position: -90px -115px; width: 45px; height: 22px; } .icon-SearchOptions { - background-position: -114px -44px; + background-position: -143px 0px; width: 42px; height: 22px; } .icon-verticalalignment { - background-position: -114px -66px; + background-position: -143px -22px; width: 33px; height: 22px; } .icon-pastespecialbutton { - background-position: 0px -103px; + background-position: -143px -44px; width: 30px; height: 22px; } .icon-sparklines_button { - background-position: -30px -103px; + background-position: -143px -66px; width: 28px; height: 22px; } .icon-thesaurus_icon { - background-position: -58px -103px; + background-position: -143px -88px; width: 28px; height: 22px; } .icon-addworksheet { - background-position: -86px -103px; + background-position: -143px -110px; width: 24px; height: 22px; } .icon-ascendingbutton { - background-position: -91px -80px; + background-position: -120px -23px; width: 22px; height: 22px; } .icon-descendingbutton { - background-position: -110px -103px; + background-position: -120px -45px; width: 22px; height: 22px; } .icon-go_to_the_next_word { - background-position: -132px -103px; + background-position: -120px -67px; width: 22px; height: 22px; } .icon-inserttexticon { - background-position: 0px -125px; + background-position: -120px -89px; width: 22px; height: 22px; } .icon-pagebreak1 { - background-position: -22px -125px; + background-position: 0px -137px; width: 21px; height: 22px; } .icon-printareabutton { - background-position: -43px -125px; + background-position: -21px -137px; width: 20px; height: 22px; } .icon-calculationicon { - background-position: -63px -125px; + background-position: -167px -110px; width: 18px; height: 22px; } .icon-coeditingmode { - background-position: -81px -125px; + background-position: -41px -137px; width: 18px; height: 22px; } .icon-header_footer_icon { - background-position: -99px -125px; + background-position: -59px -137px; width: 18px; height: 22px; } .icon-versionhistoryicon { - background-position: -117px -125px; + background-position: -77px -137px; width: 24px; height: 21px; } .icon-pivot_refresh { - background-position: -159px 0px; + background-position: -101px -137px; width: 21px; height: 21px; } .icon-selectall { - background-position: 0px -147px; + background-position: -122px -137px; width: 27px; height: 20px; } .icon-dataval_icon { - background-position: -27px -147px; + background-position: -149px -137px; width: 26px; height: 20px; } .icon-sheetview_icon { - background-position: -53px -147px; + background-position: 0px -159px; width: 25px; height: 20px; } .icon-bringforward_toptoolbar { - background-position: -159px -21px; + background-position: -25px -159px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-changecolorscheme { - background-position: -159px -41px; + background-position: -45px -159px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-chatgpt_icon { - background-position: -159px -61px; + background-position: -65px -159px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-constantproportionsactivated { - background-position: -159px -81px; + background-position: -85px -159px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-copystyle_selected { - background-position: -159px -101px; + background-position: -105px -159px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-group_toptoolbar { - background-position: -159px -121px; + background-position: -125px -159px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-image { - background-position: -78px -147px; + background-position: -145px -159px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-insertautoshape { - background-position: -98px -147px; + background-position: -165px -159px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-insert_symbol_icon { - background-position: -118px -147px; + background-position: -185px 0px; + width: 20px; + height: 20px; +} + +.icon-pixabay_icon { + background-position: -185px -20px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-scaletofit { - background-position: -138px -147px; + background-position: -185px -40px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-sendbackward_toptoolbar { - background-position: -158px -147px; + background-position: -185px -60px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-show_password { - background-position: -180px 0px; + background-position: -185px -80px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-sortcommentsicon { - background-position: -180px -20px; + background-position: -185px -100px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-vector { - background-position: -180px -40px; + background-position: -185px -120px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-zoom_icon { - background-position: -180px -60px; + background-position: -185px -140px; width: 20px; height: 20px; } .icon-align_toptoolbar { - background-position: -180px -80px; + background-position: 0px -179px; width: 19px; height: 20px; } .icon-inserttextarticon { - background-position: -180px -100px; + background-position: -19px -179px; width: 16px; height: 20px; } .icon-chat_toptoolbar { - background-position: 0px -167px; + background-position: -35px -179px; width: 24px; height: 19px; } .icon-chart { - background-position: -24px -167px; + background-position: -59px -179px; width: 22px; height: 19px; } .icon-comment_toptoolbar { - background-position: -46px -167px; + background-position: -81px -179px; width: 22px; height: 19px; } .icon-insertequationicon { - background-position: -68px -167px; + background-position: -103px -179px; width: 22px; height: 19px; } .icon-pivotselecticon { - background-position: -90px -167px; + background-position: -125px -179px; width: 22px; height: 19px; } .icon-functionicon { - background-position: -180px -120px; + background-position: -185px -160px; width: 20px; height: 19px; } .icon-paste_style { - background-position: -180px -139px; + background-position: -147px -179px; width: 20px; height: 19px; } .icon-addhyperlink { - background-position: -112px -167px; + background-position: -167px -179px; width: 19px; height: 19px; } .icon-hiderulers { - background-position: -131px -167px; + background-position: -186px -179px; width: 19px; height: 19px; } .icon-removecomment_toptoolbar { - background-position: -141px -125px; + background-position: -205px 0px; width: 15px; height: 19px; } .icon-customsort { - background-position: -150px -167px; + background-position: 0px -199px; width: 18px; height: 18px; } .icon-new_icon { - background-position: -168px -167px; + background-position: -18px -199px; width: 18px; height: 18px; } .icon-search_advanced { - background-position: -200px 0px; + background-position: -36px -199px; width: 18px; height: 18px; } .icon-searchbuttons { - background-position: 0px -186px; + background-position: -54px -199px; width: 33px; height: 17px; } .icon-horizontalalignment { - background-position: -33px -186px; + background-position: -87px -199px; width: 31px; height: 17px; } .icon-backgroundcolor { - background-position: -64px -186px; + background-position: -118px -199px; width: 25px; height: 17px; } .icon-removeduplicates_icon { - background-position: -89px -186px; + background-position: -143px -199px; width: 24px; height: 17px; } .icon-table { - background-position: -113px -186px; + background-position: -167px -199px; width: 22px; height: 17px; } .icon-changecolumnwidthcursor { - background-position: -135px -186px; + background-position: -189px -199px; width: 21px; height: 17px; } .icon-sharingicon { - background-position: -156px -186px; + background-position: -220px 0px; width: 21px; height: 17px; } -.icon-chaticon_new { - background-position: -177px -186px; - width: 19px; - height: 17px; -} - .icon-groupicon { - background-position: -196px -186px; + background-position: -220px -17px; width: 19px; height: 17px; } .icon-selectdata_icon { - background-position: -218px 0px; + background-position: -220px -34px; width: 19px; height: 17px; } .icon-ungroupicon { - background-position: -218px -17px; + background-position: -220px -51px; width: 19px; height: 17px; } .icon-search_icon_header { - background-position: -218px -34px; + background-position: -220px -68px; width: 17px; height: 17px; } .icon-insertslicer { - background-position: -218px -51px; + background-position: -220px -85px; width: 16px; height: 17px; } .icon-slicer_settings { - background-position: -218px -68px; + background-position: -220px -102px; width: 16px; height: 17px; } .icon-addgradientpoint { - background-position: -218px -85px; + background-position: -220px -119px; width: 12px; height: 17px; } .icon-removegradientpoint { - background-position: -218px -102px; + background-position: -220px -136px; width: 12px; height: 17px; } .icon-levelnumbericons { - background-position: 0px -203px; + background-position: 0px -217px; width: 48px; height: 16px; } .icon-usersnumber { - background-position: -48px -203px; + background-position: -48px -217px; width: 22px; height: 16px; } .icon-close_icon { - background-position: -218px -119px; + background-position: -220px -153px; width: 18px; height: 16px; } .icon-saveupdate { - background-position: -218px -135px; + background-position: -220px -169px; width: 18px; height: 16px; } .icon-savewhilecoediting { - background-position: -218px -151px; + background-position: -220px -185px; width: 17px; height: 16px; } .icon-collapserowsicon { - background-position: -218px -167px; + background-position: -220px -201px; width: 16px; height: 16px; } .icon-converttorange { - background-position: -218px -183px; + background-position: -70px -217px; width: 16px; height: 16px; } .icon-dropdownarrow { - background-position: -200px -18px; + background-position: -86px -217px; width: 16px; height: 16px; } .icon-editcommenticon { - background-position: -200px -34px; + background-position: -102px -217px; width: 16px; height: 16px; } .icon-expandrowsicon { - background-position: -200px -50px; + background-position: -118px -217px; width: 16px; height: 16px; } .icon-filterbutton { - background-position: -200px -66px; + background-position: -134px -217px; width: 16px; height: 16px; } .icon-firstlevelicon { - background-position: -200px -82px; + background-position: -150px -217px; width: 16px; height: 16px; } .icon-highesttolowest { - background-position: -200px -98px; + background-position: -166px -217px; width: 16px; height: 16px; } .icon-highesttolowest1 { - background-position: -200px -114px; + background-position: -182px -217px; width: 16px; height: 16px; } .icon-lowesttohighest { - background-position: -200px -130px; + background-position: -198px -217px; width: 16px; height: 16px; } .icon-lowesttohighest1 { - background-position: -200px -146px; + background-position: -214px -217px; width: 16px; height: 16px; } .icon-pivot_settings { - background-position: -200px -162px; + background-position: -241px 0px; width: 16px; height: 16px; } .icon-secondlevelicon { - background-position: -70px -203px; + background-position: -241px -16px; width: 16px; height: 16px; } .icon-thirdlevelicon { - background-position: -86px -203px; + background-position: -241px -32px; width: 16px; height: 16px; } .icon-distributevertically { - background-position: -186px -167px; + background-position: -241px -48px; width: 14px; height: 16px; } .icon-textart_settings_icon { - background-position: -147px -66px; + background-position: -241px -64px; width: 12px; height: 16px; } .icon-namedrangesicon { - background-position: -114px -88px; + background-position: 0px -233px; width: 23px; height: 15px; } .icon-search_options { - background-position: -137px -88px; + background-position: -23px -233px; width: 22px; height: 15px; } .icon-access_rights { - background-position: -102px -203px; + background-position: -45px -233px; width: 19px; height: 15px; } .icon-chaticon { - background-position: -121px -203px; + background-position: -64px -233px; width: 18px; height: 15px; } .icon-gotodocuments { - background-position: -139px -203px; + background-position: -82px -233px; width: 18px; height: 15px; } +.icon-chaticon_new { + background-position: -100px -233px; + width: 17px; + height: 15px; +} + .icon-print { - background-position: -157px -203px; + background-position: -117px -233px; width: 17px; height: 15px; } .icon-bgcolor { - background-position: -174px -203px; + background-position: -241px -80px; width: 16px; height: 15px; } .icon-about { - background-position: -190px -203px; + background-position: -241px -95px; width: 15px; height: 15px; } .icon-abouticon { - background-position: -205px -203px; + background-position: -241px -110px; width: 15px; height: 15px; } .icon-advanced_settings_icon { - background-position: -220px -203px; + background-position: -241px -125px; width: 15px; height: 15px; } .icon-insertpivot { - background-position: 0px -219px; + background-position: -241px -140px; width: 15px; height: 15px; } .icon-plus { - background-position: -15px -219px; + background-position: -241px -155px; width: 15px; height: 15px; } .icon-plus_sheet { - background-position: -30px -219px; + background-position: -241px -170px; width: 15px; height: 15px; } .icon-save { - background-position: -45px -219px; + background-position: -241px -185px; width: 15px; height: 15px; } .icon-tabstopcenter { - background-position: -60px -219px; + background-position: -241px -200px; width: 15px; height: 15px; } .icon-tabstopleft { - background-position: -75px -219px; + background-position: -241px -215px; width: 15px; height: 15px; } .icon-feedback { - background-position: -90px -219px; + background-position: -205px -19px; width: 14px; height: 15px; } .icon-flipupsidedown { - background-position: -104px -219px; + background-position: -205px -34px; width: 14px; height: 15px; } .icon-shapesettings { - background-position: -118px -219px; + background-position: -205px -49px; width: 14px; height: 15px; } .icon-file { - background-position: -132px -219px; + background-position: -205px -64px; width: 13px; height: 15px; } .icon-back { - background-position: -145px -219px; + background-position: -205px -79px; width: 12px; height: 15px; } .icon-fontcolor { - background-position: -157px -219px; + background-position: -134px -233px; width: 25px; height: 14px; } .icon-numbering { - background-position: -182px -219px; + background-position: -159px -233px; width: 24px; height: 14px; } .icon-spellcheckactivated { - background-position: -206px -219px; + background-position: -183px -233px; width: 17px; height: 14px; } .icon-spellcheckdeactivated { - background-position: -237px 0px; + background-position: -200px -233px; width: 17px; height: 14px; } .icon-distributehorizontally { - background-position: -237px -14px; + background-position: -217px -233px; width: 16px; height: 14px; } .icon-fliplefttoright { - background-position: -237px -28px; + background-position: -205px -94px; width: 15px; height: 14px; } .icon-sort { - background-position: -237px -42px; + background-position: -205px -108px; width: 15px; height: 14px; } .icon-alignobjectbottom { - background-position: -237px -56px; + background-position: -205px -122px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-alignobjectleft { - background-position: -237px -70px; + background-position: -205px -136px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-alignobjectright { - background-position: -237px -84px; + background-position: -205px -150px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-alignobjecttop { - background-position: -237px -98px; + background-position: -205px -164px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-bordercolor { - background-position: -237px -112px; + background-position: -205px -178px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-borderwidth { - background-position: -237px -126px; + background-position: -171px -66px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-chartsettingsicon { - background-position: -237px -140px; + background-position: -171px -88px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-clearicon { - background-position: -237px -154px; + background-position: -233px -233px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-commentsicon { - background-position: -237px -168px; + background-position: -257px 0px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-deleteicon { - background-position: -237px -182px; + background-position: -257px -14px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-function { - background-position: -237px -196px; + background-position: -257px -28px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-group { - background-position: -237px -210px; + background-position: -257px -42px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-image_settings_icon { - background-position: -223px -219px; + background-position: -257px -56px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-searchicon { - background-position: 0px -234px; + background-position: -257px -70px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-shape_settings_icon { - background-position: -14px -234px; + background-position: -257px -84px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-ungroup { - background-position: -28px -234px; + background-position: -257px -98px; width: 14px; height: 14px; } .icon-alignobjectcenter { - background-position: -42px -234px; + background-position: -257px -112px; width: 13px; height: 14px; } .icon-copystyle { - background-position: -55px -234px; + background-position: -257px -126px; width: 12px; height: 14px; } .icon-gradientslider { - background-position: -67px -234px; + background-position: -257px -140px; width: 12px; height: 14px; } .icon-hard { - background-position: -80px -56px; + background-position: -257px -154px; width: 9px; height: 14px; } .icon-clear { - background-position: -79px -234px; + background-position: 0px -248px; width: 26px; height: 13px; } .icon-outline { - background-position: -105px -234px; + background-position: -26px -248px; width: 25px; height: 13px; } .icon-bullets { - background-position: -130px -234px; + background-position: -51px -248px; width: 24px; height: 13px; } .icon-insertfunction { - background-position: -154px -234px; + background-position: -75px -248px; width: 24px; height: 13px; } .icon-orientation { - background-position: -178px -234px; + background-position: -99px -248px; width: 24px; height: 13px; } .icon-insertchart { - background-position: -202px -234px; + background-position: -123px -248px; width: 22px; height: 13px; } .icon-insert_dropcap_icon { - background-position: -224px -234px; + background-position: -145px -248px; width: 22px; height: 13px; } .icon-headerfooter { - background-position: -254px 0px; + background-position: -167px -248px; width: 21px; height: 13px; } .icon-insertcells { - background-position: -254px -13px; + background-position: -188px -248px; width: 21px; height: 13px; } .icon-pagesize { - background-position: -254px -26px; + background-position: -209px -248px; width: 20px; height: 13px; } .icon-cut { - background-position: -254px -39px; + background-position: -229px -248px; width: 16px; height: 13px; } .icon-removeduplicates { - background-position: -254px -52px; + background-position: -245px -248px; width: 16px; height: 13px; } .icon-text_autoshape { - background-position: -254px -65px; + background-position: -271px 0px; width: 16px; height: 13px; } .icon-changerange { - background-position: -254px -78px; + background-position: -271px -13px; width: 15px; height: 13px; } .icon-feedbackicon { - background-position: -254px -91px; + background-position: -271px -26px; width: 15px; height: 13px; } .icon-greencircle { - background-position: -254px -104px; + background-position: -271px -39px; + width: 15px; + height: 13px; +} + +.icon-replace { + background-position: -271px -52px; width: 15px; height: 13px; } .icon-alignobjectmiddle { - background-position: -254px -117px; + background-position: -271px -65px; width: 14px; height: 13px; } .icon-clearstyle { - background-position: -254px -130px; + background-position: -271px -78px; width: 14px; height: 13px; } .icon-copy { - background-position: -254px -143px; + background-position: -271px -91px; width: 14px; height: 13px; } .icon-hyperlink { - background-position: -254px -156px; + background-position: -271px -104px; width: 14px; height: 13px; } .icon-multiselect { - background-position: -254px -169px; + background-position: -271px -117px; width: 14px; height: 13px; } .icon-paste { - background-position: -254px -182px; + background-position: -271px -130px; width: 14px; height: 13px; } .icon-select_all { - background-position: -254px -195px; + background-position: -271px -143px; width: 14px; height: 13px; } .icon-wraptext { - background-position: -254px -208px; + background-position: -271px -156px; width: 14px; height: 13px; } .icon-allborders { - background-position: -254px -221px; + background-position: -271px -169px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-bottomborders { - background-position: -254px -234px; + background-position: -271px -182px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-bringforward { - background-position: 0px -248px; + background-position: -271px -195px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-bringtofront { - background-position: -13px -248px; + background-position: -271px -208px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-document_language { - background-position: -26px -248px; + background-position: -271px -221px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-dropcap_margin { - background-position: -39px -248px; + background-position: -271px -234px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-dropcap_none { - background-position: -52px -248px; + background-position: -271px -247px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-dropcap_text { - background-position: -65px -248px; + background-position: -257px -168px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-equationplaceholder { - background-position: -78px -248px; + background-position: -257px -181px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-fitpage { - background-position: -91px -248px; + background-position: -257px -194px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-fitwidth { - background-position: -104px -248px; + background-position: -257px -207px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-insideborders { - background-position: -117px -248px; + background-position: -257px -220px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-insidehorizontalborders { - background-position: -130px -248px; + background-position: -257px -233px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-insideverticalborders { - background-position: -143px -248px; + background-position: 0px -261px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-leftborders { - background-position: -156px -248px; + background-position: -13px -261px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-noborders { - background-position: -169px -248px; + background-position: -26px -261px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-outsideborders { - background-position: -182px -248px; + background-position: -39px -261px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-rightborders { - background-position: -195px -248px; + background-position: -52px -261px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-sendbackward { - background-position: -208px -248px; + background-position: -65px -261px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-sendtoback { - background-position: -221px -248px; + background-position: -78px -261px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-topborders { - background-position: -234px -248px; + background-position: -91px -261px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-zoomin { - background-position: -247px -248px; + background-position: -104px -261px; width: 13px; height: 13px; } .icon-currencystyle { - background-position: -260px -248px; + background-position: -173px -44px; width: 12px; height: 13px; } .icon-insertpagenumber { - background-position: 0px -261px; + background-position: -108px -65px; width: 12px; height: 13px; } .icon-rotateclockwise { - background-position: -12px -261px; + background-position: -117px -261px; width: 12px; height: 13px; } .icon-rotatecounterclockwise { - background-position: -24px -261px; + background-position: -129px -261px; width: 12px; height: 13px; } .icon-alignmiddle { - background-position: -36px -261px; + background-position: -230px -217px; width: 11px; height: 13px; } .icon-textsettings { - background-position: -47px -261px; + background-position: -175px -137px; width: 10px; height: 13px; } .icon-accountingstyle { - background-position: -57px -261px; + background-position: -141px -261px; width: 26px; height: 12px; } .icon-cellsettings_rightpanel { - background-position: -83px -261px; + background-position: -167px -261px; width: 15px; height: 12px; } .icon-decreasedecimal { - background-position: -98px -261px; + background-position: -182px -261px; width: 14px; height: 12px; } .icon-slicer_clearfilter { - background-position: -112px -261px; + background-position: -196px -261px; width: 14px; height: 12px; } .icon-increasedecimal { - background-position: -126px -261px; + background-position: -210px -261px; width: 13px; height: 12px; } .icon-angleclockwise { - background-position: -139px -261px; + background-position: -223px -261px; width: 12px; height: 12px; } .icon-anglecounterclockwise { - background-position: -151px -261px; + background-position: -235px -261px; width: 12px; height: 12px; } .icon-circle { - background-position: -163px -261px; + background-position: -247px -261px; width: 12px; height: 12px; } .icon-firstsheet { - background-position: -175px -261px; + background-position: -259px -261px; width: 12px; height: 12px; } .icon-larger { - background-position: -187px -261px; + background-position: -271px -261px; width: 12px; height: 12px; } .icon-nofill { - background-position: -199px -261px; + background-position: 0px -274px; width: 12px; height: 12px; } .icon-sup { - background-position: -211px -261px; + background-position: -12px -274px; width: 12px; height: 12px; } .icon-deletecommenticon { - background-position: -223px -261px; + background-position: -24px -274px; width: 11px; height: 12px; } .icon-selectcolumn_cursor { - background-position: -234px -261px; + background-position: -35px -274px; width: 11px; height: 12px; } .icon-tabletemplate { - background-position: -245px -261px; + background-position: -46px -274px; width: 26px; height: 11px; } .icon-merge { - background-position: -275px 0px; + background-position: -72px -274px; width: 24px; height: 11px; } .icon-subscripticon { - background-position: -275px -11px; + background-position: -96px -274px; width: 24px; height: 11px; } .icon-addborders { - background-position: -275px -22px; + background-position: -120px -274px; width: 22px; height: 11px; } .icon-deletecells { - background-position: -275px -33px; + background-position: -142px -274px; width: 21px; height: 11px; } .icon-linespacing { - background-position: -275px -44px; + background-position: -163px -274px; width: 21px; height: 11px; } .icon-nonprintingcharacters { - background-position: -275px -55px; + background-position: -184px -274px; width: 20px; height: 11px; } .icon-namedranges { - background-position: -275px -66px; + background-position: -204px -274px; width: 16px; height: 11px; } .icon-table_settings_icon { - background-position: -275px -77px; + background-position: -220px -274px; width: 16px; height: 11px; } .icon-viewsettingsicon { - background-position: -275px -88px; + background-position: -236px -274px; width: 16px; height: 11px; } .icon-sub { - background-position: -275px -99px; + background-position: -252px -274px; width: 13px; height: 11px; } .icon-aligncenter { - background-position: -275px -110px; + background-position: -108px -78px; width: 12px; height: 11px; } .icon-alignleft { - background-position: -287px -110px; + background-position: -265px -274px; width: 12px; height: 11px; } .icon-alignright { - background-position: -275px -121px; + background-position: -287px 0px; width: 12px; height: 11px; } .icon-borderstyle { - background-position: -287px -121px; + background-position: -287px -11px; width: 12px; height: 11px; } .icon-clearfilter { - background-position: -275px -132px; + background-position: -287px -22px; width: 12px; height: 11px; } .icon-decreasedec { - background-position: -287px -132px; + background-position: -287px -33px; width: 12px; height: 11px; } .icon-decreaseindent { - background-position: -275px -143px; + background-position: -287px -44px; width: 12px; height: 11px; } .icon-increasedec { - background-position: -287px -143px; + background-position: -287px -55px; width: 12px; height: 11px; } .icon-increaseindent { - background-position: -275px -154px; + background-position: -287px -66px; width: 12px; height: 11px; } .icon-justify { - background-position: -287px -154px; + background-position: -287px -77px; width: 12px; height: 11px; } .icon-resolvedicon { - background-position: -275px -165px; + background-position: -287px -88px; width: 12px; height: 11px; } .icon-resolveicon { - background-position: -287px -165px; + background-position: -287px -99px; width: 12px; height: 11px; } .icon-selecttable_cursor { - background-position: -275px -176px; + background-position: -287px -110px; width: 12px; height: 11px; } .icon-sortandfilter { - background-position: -287px -176px; + background-position: -287px -121px; width: 12px; height: 11px; } .icon-alignbottom { - background-position: -288px -99px; + background-position: -287px -132px; width: 11px; height: 11px; } .icon-aligntop { - background-position: -275px -187px; + background-position: -287px -143px; width: 11px; height: 11px; } .icon-diagonal_down_border { - background-position: -286px -187px; + background-position: -287px -154px; width: 11px; height: 11px; } .icon-diagonal_up_border { - background-position: -275px -198px; + background-position: -287px -165px; width: 11px; height: 11px; } .icon-sortatoz { - background-position: -286px -198px; + background-position: -287px -176px; width: 11px; height: 11px; } .icon-sortztoa { - background-position: -275px -209px; + background-position: -287px -187px; width: 11px; height: 11px; } .icon-percentstyle { - background-position: -286px -209px; + background-position: -287px -198px; width: 10px; height: 11px; } .icon-underline { - background-position: -275px -220px; + background-position: -287px -209px; width: 10px; height: 11px; } .icon-verticaltext { - background-position: -285px -220px; + background-position: -287px -220px; width: 10px; height: 11px; } .icon-zoomout { - background-position: -275px -231px; + background-position: -287px -231px; width: 10px; height: 11px; } .icon-rotatedown { - background-position: -285px -231px; + background-position: -287px -242px; width: 9px; height: 11px; } +.icon-commastyle { + background-position: -287px -253px; + width: 7px; + height: 11px; +} + .icon-highlightcolor { - background-position: -275px -242px; + background-position: 0px -286px; width: 23px; height: 10px; } .icon-navigationicon { - background-position: -275px -252px; + background-position: -23px -286px; width: 13px; height: 10px; } .icon-strike { - background-position: -275px -262px; + background-position: -287px -264px; width: 12px; height: 10px; } .icon-smaller { - background-position: -288px -252px; + background-position: -287px -274px; width: 11px; height: 10px; } .icon-yellowdiamond { - background-position: -287px -262px; + background-position: -36px -286px; width: 11px; height: 10px; } .icon-lastsheet { - background-position: -237px -224px; + background-position: -210px -199px; width: 10px; height: 10px; } .icon-rotateup { - background-position: -80px -70px; + background-position: -232px -119px; width: 9px; height: 10px; } .icon-bold { - background-position: -291px -66px; + background-position: -232px -136px; width: 8px; height: 10px; } .icon-nextsheet { - background-position: -291px -77px; + background-position: -176px -22px; width: 8px; height: 10px; } .icon-previoussheet { - background-position: -291px -88px; + background-position: -176px -32px; width: 8px; height: 10px; } .icon-italic { - background-position: -268px -117px; + background-position: -135px -115px; width: 7px; height: 10px; } .icon-redo { - background-position: -180px -158px; + background-position: -47px -286px; width: 17px; height: 9px; } .icon-undo { - background-position: -90px -71px; + background-position: -64px -286px; width: 17px; height: 9px; } .icon-selectrow_cursor { - background-position: 0px -274px; + background-position: -173px -57px; width: 12px; height: 9px; } .icon-horizontaltext { - background-position: -12px -274px; + background-position: -247px -233px; width: 10px; height: 9px; } .icon-cellrow { - background-position: -22px -274px; + background-position: -261px -248px; width: 9px; height: 9px; } .icon-resize_square { - background-position: -31px -274px; + background-position: -277px -274px; width: 9px; height: 9px; } .icon-searchdownbutton { - background-position: -200px -178px; + background-position: -171px -80px; width: 14px; height: 8px; } .icon-searchupbutton { - background-position: -40px -274px; + background-position: -171px -102px; width: 14px; height: 8px; } .icon-constantproportions { - background-position: -54px -274px; + background-position: -81px -286px; width: 13px; height: 8px; } .icon-tabstopcenter_marker { - background-position: -67px -274px; + background-position: -94px -286px; width: 12px; height: 8px; } .icon-soft { - background-position: -79px -274px; + background-position: -106px -286px; width: 10px; height: 8px; } .icon-tabstopleft_marker { - background-position: -267px -221px; + background-position: -135px -125px; width: 8px; height: 8px; } .icon-tabstopright_marker { - background-position: -267px -234px; + background-position: -116px -286px; width: 8px; height: 8px; } .icon-redo1 { - background-position: -159px -141px; + background-position: -205px -192px; width: 13px; height: 6px; } .icon-undo1 { - background-position: -89px -274px; + background-position: -124px -286px; width: 13px; height: 6px; } .icon-nextpage { - background-position: -294px -231px; + background-position: -294px -253px; width: 5px; height: 6px; } .icon-previouspage { - background-position: -270px -39px; + background-position: -266px -154px; width: 5px; height: 6px; } .icon-tab { - background-position: -147px -82px; + background-position: -143px -132px; width: 10px; height: 5px; } .icon-connectionpoint { - background-position: -294px -237px; + background-position: -294px -259px; width: 5px; height: 5px; } .icon-nonbreakspace { - background-position: -270px -45px; + background-position: -266px -160px; width: 5px; height: 5px; } .icon-square { - background-position: -270px -52px; + background-position: -236px -85px; width: 5px; height: 5px; } .icon-space { - background-position: -297px -22px; + background-position: -297px -198px; width: 2px; height: 3px; } diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/big/relativereference.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/big/relativereference.png index b58cebfe3c..a4c4212c91 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/big/relativereference.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/big/relativereference.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/chaticon_new.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/chaticon_new.png index b1fb9c0385..0d93aa1654 100644 Binary files a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/chaticon_new.png and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/chaticon_new.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/commastyle.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/commastyle.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..93ab60dd24 Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/commastyle.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/pixabay_icon.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/pixabay_icon.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..5c3b171dce Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/pixabay_icon.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/pixabay_store_icon.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/pixabay_store_icon.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..8a68930ddb Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/pixabay_store_icon.png differ diff --git a/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/replace.png b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/replace.png new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..66e5fbd5bb Binary files /dev/null and b/apps/spreadsheeteditor/main/resources/help/images/src/icons/replace.png differ